Fone
SREY ‘isstaioa?
ate rath
iV
. ent
Ie ree
PRE BP
BF PS, G
Aedes :
ol ere Nis
SPENT ETE A ee
© P-0-0 0-5 ee) GP PH “ ~é 4 ". ~ x wr: a ‘ 4
rt mw hel ef pa WN ee Wo8-9rw 0: vie Ae - 3 y : "< * e pees 3 ao ete ited tat “ # She negate!
rr - tr a Ae. 0t-8 @ 9 OO Se PAR Dito OPA, oe : 5 e Si 0 Rate Batten “ade te - Retired Bee BIW EPS SH,
~~. ¢ 5-7 8 ae Pee GRE ERE LE oe. Bator ee ee ee a Pt eo Fok f tee in ; = nh i vey Tee tr eet Ue Cn an > ee BB oF d RD. Be he) Rey Oe
. CH PPO OSE LE eR e HE 4 Hee Latah we 2-4-&8 b e~e9 Sun 3 ee : if e cae % ~k ol 7 Creer? 4 ts ree S ‘ = yer? sc . : sy . een ej 7
‘ 2 tee : A "
cs ~% we
Ere Wh Go Oni Ai gee es aly
Pe ae ee ptt “a <0 Nobo oe et -es
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, anv DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.
CONDUCTED BY
SIR ROBERT KANE, LL.D. F.R.S. M.R.LA. F.C.S.
AUGUSTUS MATTHIESSEN, Pu.D. F.RS. F.CS.
AND
WILLIAM FRANCIS, Pu.D. F.LS. F.B.A.S. F.C.S.
“Nec aranearum sane textus ideo melior quia ex se fila gignunt, nec noster
vilior quia ex alienis libamus ut apes.” Just. Lips. Polit. lib. i. cap. 1. Not.
VOL. XXXVIII—FOURTH SERIES. ~ |
AY JULY—DECEMBER, 1869. 4risst}
LONDON.
TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET,
Printers and Publishers to the University of London ;
SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, READER, AND DYER; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL AND CO.;
WHITTAKER AND CO.; AND KENT AND CO., LONDON:—BY ADAM AND
CHARLES BLACK, AND THOMAS CLARK, EDINBURGH ;
SMITH AND SON, GLASGOW; HODGES AND
SMITH, DUBLIN; AND PUTNAM,
NEW YORK.
“Meditationis est perscrutari occulta; contemplationis est admirari
perspicua..... Admiratio generat questionem, queestio investigationem,
investigatio inventionem.”’—Hugo de S. Victore.
—“ Cur spirent venti, cur terra dehiscat,
Cur mare turgescat, pelago cur tantus amaror,
Cur caput obscura Phcebus ferrugine condat,
Quid toties diros cogat flagrare cometas ;
Quid pariat nubes, veniant cur fulmina ccelo,
Quo micet igne Iris, superos quis conciat orbes
Tam vario motu.”
J. B. Pinelli ad Mazonium.
CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIITI.
(FOURTH SERIES.)
NUMBER CCLII.—JULY 1869.
Page
The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory ...... 1
Dr. W. H. Broadbent on the Function of the Blood in Muscular
MTN Pie) irc ce el. 4d. 9 sess ae aie’ HAR deepsea 15
Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according to Age, and the
Spemes ese eb apie y | s:sjr4: sac bls we o ait js dleitle a ee og 'd eres 18
Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental Principles of Molecular
Piysics. siteply to Professor Bayma, |: i¢s-< ses saws + 34
Prof. Challis’s Note on the Hydrodynamical Theory of Mag-
“NEEIGTS —. - 9 005 SARS Rn oY ree ee eee 42
Mr. W. C. Roberts’s Note on the Experimental Illustration of
the Expansion of Palladium attending the Formation of its
Seon ELV GTOO CMIUDA 564 nica false dts oeaiac@ em» aro ote eovier = « 51
Prof. Haidinger on the Polarization of Light by Air mixed with
nO prictier Sh. Linie wvajnawrs O49 Jur ba bary es eke 54
Dr. A. H. Gallatin on Ammonium ee and on Nascent- i
drogen Tests .... 57
Proceedings of the Royal Society : —
Mr. G. Gore on a momentary Molecular Change in Iron
Pome Hs Gasioriiee iy Te cunt re hls ae ow ph 59
Mr. G. Gore on the Development of Electric Currents by
iaemetismpamd Eleaf jg) i ald acalt feerseceeud’ sede mth 64
Messrs. E. Frankland and J. N. Lockyer’s Preliminary Re-
searches on Gaseous Spectra in relation to the Physical
Ponahitutiontof the Sums: i4s\-< 212 stan shedtinllt «f) ~ eh 66
Mr. W. Huggins on a Method of viewing the Solar Promi-
meuces without an Hehipse, 2/16 i? Tawa ese els 3s oe 68
Wie, Fugeins onthe Heat of the Stars 3..........- 69
Sir W. Thomson on the Fracture of Brittle and Viscous
Solds by) <: SMeATIM Gyan. Ase ede atin: © a) Garey sini ¢ 71
Proceedings of the Geological Society :—
' Mr. G. M. Browne on Floods in the Island of Bequia .. 73
lv CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIII.—FOURTH SERIES.
Page
Capt. F. W. Hutton’s Description of Nga Tutura, an Ex- 5
tinct Volcano in New Zealand
Mr.:J. W. Mason on Dakosourus 3.2.05. 2... 1-2 eee 74 .
Mr. P. M. Duncan onthe Anatomy of the test of Amphi-
detus (Echinocardium) Vi ee Forbes; and on the
genus Breynia .... 74
Mr. H. Bauerman’s Notes wee a Geological Reeonmaicenee
in Arabia iPetrea,. chi)... ee ee eee 75
On the Heat consumed in Internal Work when a Gas dilates
under the Pressure of the Atmosphere, by M. J. Moutier .. 76
Investigations on obscure Calorific Spectra, by M. Desains.... 78
NUMBER CCLIII.—AUGUST.
M. G. Quincke on the Constants of Capillarity of Molten
Bodies
Canon Moseley on the Descent ofa Solid Body on an Inclined
Plane when subjected to alternations of Temperature ...... he)
Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on the
Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound .. 118
Captain F. W. Hutton on the Mechanical eee involved
in the Sailing Flight of the Albatros. ..... Ar te)
Mr. J. Parnell on a new Fluorescent Substance. siols jn leeatn 136
Dr. E. Warburg on the Heating produced in Solid Bodies
when they are Sounded
Proceedings of the Royal Institution :—
Mr.J. N. Lockyer on Recent Discoveries in Solar gee
made by means of the Spectroscope.......... 142
Proceedings of the Royal Society :—
Dr. Tyndall on the Formation and Phenomena of Clouds. 156
Dr. A. Dupré and Mr. F. J. M. Page on the Specific Heat
and other physical properties of ey Mixtures and
Solutions ... ole bias De LAD eae ae
Proceedings of the Geological Society : —
Mr. H. Bauerman on the occurrence of Celestine in the
Tertiary Rocks of Hgypt' 2272. 2. Se eee 162
Dr. P.M. Duncan on the Echinodermata, Bivalve Mollusca,
and some other Fossils from the Cretaceous Rocks of
imal Sea . 163
M. C.-Martins on the Existence during the Quaternary
Period of a Glacier of the Second Order Be 5 8 i 163
On the Compressibility of Liquids, by MM. Amaury and Des-
camps. 164
Measur ement of the Electrical ‘Conductivity a ‘Liquids ‘hitherto
supposed to be Insulators, by M. Said-Effendi .... 165
On the Heat developed in Discontinuous Currents, by MM. Ja-
min and Roger 2202 00). Gl 02 Re Ae certo eee
CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIII.—FOUKTH SERIES,
NUMBER CCLIV.—SEPTEMBER.
Prof. E. Edlund on the Construction of the Galvanometer used
in Electrical Discharges, and on the Path of the Extra Cur-
rents through the Electric Sparkie 25" eee ensers v5 whe ee.
Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena of Bmocuias Vision. .
Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Formation of Bubbles of Gas and of
Vapour in Liquids. . : :
Dr. T. Fritzsche on the Production of a » Columnar Structure
mm Metallic Tin .....
Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental Principles of Mole-
cular Physics. Reply to Professor Bayma ..............
Mr. C. Tomlinson on a Remarkable Structural Appearance in
-.) SLICE: aS Sie eee oe ne ean heer ina ines
Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Supposed Action of Light on Com-
TEE TE cc ce ote eae aE atta ti i el ee a 2
Mr. J. Croll on the Opinion that the Southern Hemisphere
loses by Radiation more Heat than the Northern, and the
supposed Influence that this has on Climate ............
Prof. G. C. Foster on some Lecture-experiments in Electricity. 2
Proceedings of the Geological Society :—
Prof. W. King and Dr. ‘I. H. Rowney on the so-called
SeUsOCalaMCOCK a's isc sees coe she wos he es
Mr. T. W. Kingsmill on the Geology of China ........
prot. D. Hi. Huxley on Hyperodapedon :
Mr. W. Whitaker on the Locality of a new Specimen of
Hyperodapedon on the South Coast of Devon? ........
Mr.W. H. Baily on Graptolites and allied Fossils occurring
in Ireland, and on Plant-remains from beds interstratified
with the Basalt in the County of Antrim.
Mr. G. T. Clark on the Basalt rile of the Mainland of
dices oe ee
Dr. Sutherland on . Wate gual Meee in iseache eter
Africa, . : Wen, Wed
Note on Electrolytic Polarization, ‘by Professor Tait cwlocuot ee
On the Spectrum of the Aurora Borealis, by J. A. Angstrom. ‘
On the Thermal Energy of Molecular Vortices, by W. J. Mac-
quorn Rankine, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. Lond. & Edinb. &c...
NUMBER CCLV.—OCTOBER.
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. (Witha Plate.)
Prof. E. Edlund on the Cause of the Phenomena of Voltaic
Cooling and Heating discovered by Peltier...............
Prof. Challis’s Comparison of a Theory of the Dispersion of Light
Page
169
79
204
207
208
249
V1 CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIII.—FOURTH SERIES.
Page
on the Hypothesis of Undulations with Ditscheiner’s determi- ’
nations of Wave-lengths and corresponding refractive Indices 268
Prof. E. C. Pickering’s Observations of the Corona during the
Total Eclipse, AUS ISt s7tbe WS GOS 5 cate emia tera ic te : 281
Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity of Vapours
to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’ s Law. (Witha Plate.) . 284
Mr. J..S. Aldis on the Nebular Hypothesis... .20..> ¢ 9 oemier 308
M. P. A. Favre’s Thermal Researches on the Battery........ 310
Proceedings of the Royal Society :—
The Earl of Rosse on the Radiation of Heat from the Moon. 314
Proceedings of the Geological Society :—
Mr. E. Hull on the Evidence of a ridge of Lower Carboni-
ferous Rocks crossing the Plain of Cheshire beneath the
DIVAS. +5 «soflny ib “hats “anecciche de sPeades laced os Bue iS ence 321
The Rev. T. Wiltshire on the Red Chalk of Hunstanton,. 321
On the Expansion of Gases, by M. A. Cazin, .....,......-. 322
On the Employment of the Spectroscope in order to distinguish
a feeble Light in a stronger one, by M. J. M. Seguin . 020
On the Mean Velocity of the Motion of Translation of the Mo-
lecules in Imperfect Gases, by M. P. Blaserna .......... 326
NUMBER CCLVI.—NOVEMBER.
Dr. Marcet’s Observations on the Temperature of the Human
Body at various Altitudes, in connexion with the act of As-
cendingycis, 329
Licut. J. “Herschel on that portion ae the Report of ‘the ‘Astro-
nomer to the Madras Government on the Eclipse of August
1868 which recounts his Spectroscopic Observations. ...... 308
MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the Win-
terings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years.... 340
M. F. Zéllner on a New Spectroscope, together with contribu-
tions to the Spectral Analysis of the Stars. ....-......... 300
Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on the
_ Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound .. 369
Mr: W. K. Brideman’s'Pheory of ‘the Voltaic Pile 255.4 377
Proceedings of the Royal Society :—
Prof, A.W; (ChurchvonW@uracine). 43). 2). eee 383
Mr. W. Crookes ona Se ie of Binocular a
trum-Microscope ... .. 383
Mr. W. Crookes on some - Optical Phenomena of Opals .. 388
Sir W. Thomson on a new Astronomical Clock, and a Pen-
dulum-governor, for Uniform Miotion.., <<. uae ee 393
Dr. W.A. Miller on a Self-registering Thermometer adapted
to Deep-sea Soundings... cei eee oe ee
Proceedings of the Geological Society :—
Mr. W. B. Dawkins on the British Postglacial Mammalia. 399
CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIII.—FOURTH SERIES. Vil
Page
Mr. J. W. Judd on the Origin of the Northampton Sand. 400
Prof. H. Coquand on the Cretaceous Strata of England and
the North of France ..... AO |
Mr. W. Carruthers on the Saueture ‘ahd Affinities ‘ee ist
gillaria and allied genera .... 402
Dr. H. A. Nicholson on the British Species of the Genera
Climacograpsus, Diplogr ar Dicranograpsus, and Di-
dymograpsus ...... . 402
Mr. F. O. Adams on the ‘Coal- mines at Kaianoma .... .. 402
Mr. M. Morgans on a peculiarity of the Brendon-Hills
Spathose Ore- WEIMeh FASS OR IY SO oe 403
On the Emission and Absorption of Heat radiated at Low Tem-
Perecese my G. Magnus: 2. <2 is. i ek eee es eee 403
On the limits of the Magnetization of Iron and Steel, by Prof.
Pent warmdoren eels aie ee uD LO oe aa OU 404
On the Reflection of Heat from the surface of Fluor-spar and
Monemadres: by G, Magnus!) 0.2). 0.0.0 5 072 tte. 405
On the Luminous Effects produced by Electrostatic Induction in
Rarefied Gases.—Leyden Jar with Gaseous Coatings, by M.
©. TP Lui JEG UTSIE [Cec bet iP dea Pr 407
NUMBER CCLVII.—DECEMBER.
Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor on the Surface of
es Ne 2 hee owas Wot a toad GRAY & oes eee 409
Prof. A. Kenngott’s Microscopical Investigation of thin polished
Laminz of the Knyahynia Meteorite. (With a Plate.) .... 424
Mr. W. H. Preece on the Parallelogram of Forces .......... 428
Prof. F. Kohlrausch on the Determination of the Specific Heat
of Air under constant Volume by means of the Metallic Ba-
NOME PM Me a OE ren, ocvera cS ctole! etd efetechatio dt cheaty ern ot, & 430
M. Abich on Fulgurites in the Andesite of the Lesser Ararat, and
on the Influence of Local Agents on the Production of Thun-
derstorms ..... ee 436
M. Abich on Hailstorms i in Russian Georgia. “(With : a Plate. ) 440
Mr. T. T. P. B. Warren on Electrification JRL SBE Jeepers 441
Prof. J. Plateau’s Experimental and Theoretical Researches
into the Figures of Equilibrium of a Liquid Mass without
Ptetedtee—— Meth, Series 5.0. oe) a deere we i dale le ee 445
Dr. W. Odling ona Theory of @ondened Ntmmon Compounds. 455
Notices respecting New Books :—
M.J. G. Fitch’s Methods of teaching Arithmetic.—Dr. J.
Cornwell and Mr. J. G. Fitch’s School Arithmetic, and
BUCS CICNCe Of ATICMMECHIC. jaueeeets 6s bs 5 se. 457
Proceedings of the Royal Society :—
Mich oranamron, Lydropentums.s | F. 2st. ced lk es 459
Vlil CONTENTS OF VOL. XXXVIII.—FOURTH SERIES.
Page
Proceedings of the Geological Society :— ‘
M. F. Ruschhaupe on the Salt-mines of St. Domingo .. 465
Messrs. 8S. Wood, Jun., and F. W. Harmer on a peculiar
instance of Intraglacial Erosion near Norwich...... -. 466
Mr. E. J. Beor on the Lignite-mines of Podnernuovo.... 466
Mr. T. C. Wallbridge on the Geology and Mineralog ey of
Hastings County, Canada West .... s{s'e ee “0G
Mr. J. W. Flower on the distribution of Flint Implements
inthe Davitics: 24 <8 eh. eo). oct eee ae eee 467
On the Extension of Liquids upon each other, by R. Ludtge.. 468
On the Measurement of the Electrical Conductivity of Liquids
hitherto supposed to be Insulators, by Thomas T. P. Bruce
NWianrenie. cise o ote mds eid: ee Cae 470
On the Freezing-point of Water ‘containing dissolved Gases,
and on the Regelation of Water, by C. Schultz iti eee 471
Disturbances of Respiration, Circulation, and of the Production
of Heat at great heights on Mont Blanc, by M. Lortet .... 472
Emde: sreiersi «aM aieseie ol Sis 5S Bis Oe Se eee
PLATES.
I. Tllustrative of Dr. H. M. Watts’s Paper on the Spectra of Carbon.
II. Illustrative of Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity of
Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law.
III. Illustrative of Prof. A. Kenngott’s Microscopical Investigation of thin
polished Lamine of the Knyahynia Meteorite, and M. Abich’s
Paper on Hailstorms in Russian Georgia.
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, ann DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.
[FOURTH SERIES.]
J OL, VO 1869)
I. On some Electromagnetic Phenomena considered in connexion
with the Dynamical Theory. By The Hon. J. W. Srrurt,
Fellow of Trinity College, Cambridge*.
ia is now some time since general equations applicable to the
conditions of most electrical problems have been given, and
attempts, more or less complete, have been made to establish an
analogy between electrical phenomena and those of ordinary
mechanics. In particular, Maxwell has given a general dyna-
mical theory of the electromagnetic field+, according to which
he shows the mutual interdependence of the various branches cf
the science, and lays down equations sufficient for the theoretical
solution of any electrical problem. He has also in scattered
papers illustrated the solution of special problems by reference
to those which correspond with them (at least in their mathe-
matical conditions) in ordinary mechanics. There can be no
doubt, I think, of the value of such illustrations, both as help-
ing the mind to a more vivid conception of what takes place,
and to a rough quantitative result which is often of more value
in a physical point of view, than the most elaborate mathemati-
cal analysis. It is because the dynamical theory seems to be
far less generally understood than its importance requires that I
have thought that some more examples of electrical problems
illustrated by a comparison with their mechanical analogues
might not be superfluous.
As a simple case, let us consider an experiment first made b
De la Rive, in which a battery (such as a single Daniell cell)
* Communicated by the Author.
t Philosophical Transactions for 1865.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 252. July 1869. B
2 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
whose electromotive force is insufficient to decompose water, be-
comes competent to do so by the intervention of a coil or elec-
tromagnet. Thus, let the primary wire of a Ruhmkorff coil be
connected in the usual manner with the battery, and the elec-
trodes of the voltameter (which may consist of a test-tube con-
taining dilute sulphuric acid into which dip platinum wires)
with the points where in the ordinary use of the instru--
ment the contact is made and broken. There will thus be
always a complete conducting circuit through the voltameter ;
but when the contact is made the voltameter will be shunted, and
the poles of the battery joined by metal. Now when the shunt
is open the battery is unable to send a steady current through
the voltameter, because, as has been shown by Thomson, the
mechanical value of the chemical action in the battery corre-
sponding to the passage of any quantity of electricity is less
than that required for the decomposition of the water in the
voltameter. When, however, the shunt is closed, a current es-
tablishes itself gradually in the coil, where there is no permanent
opposing electromotive force, and after the lapse of a fraction of a
second reaches its full value as given hy Ohm’s law. Ifthe con-
tact be now broken, there is a momentary current through the vol-
tameter, which causes bubbles of gas to appear on the electrodes,
and which is often (but not, I think, well) called the extra cur-
rent. Allowing the rheotome to act freely we get a steady
evolution of gas.
To this electrical apparatus Montgolfier’s hydraulic ram is
closely analogous. The latter, it will be remembered, is a ma-
chine in which the power of a considerable quantity of water
falling a small height is used to raise a portion of the water to a
height twenty or thirty times as great. The body of water from
the reservoir flows down a closed channel to the place of discharge,
which can be suddenly closed with a valve. When this takes
place, the moving mass by its momentum is able for a time to
overcome a pressure many times greater than that to which it
owes its own motion, and so to force a portion of itself to a con-
siderable height through a suitably placed pipe. Just as the
electromotive force of the battery is unable directly to overcome
the opposing polarization in the voltameter, so of course the
small pressure due to the fall cannot lift a valve pressed down
by a greater. But when an independent passage is opened, the
water (or electricity) begins to flow with a motion which con-
tinues to accelerate until the moving force is balanced by fric-
tion (resistance), and then remains steady. At the moment the
discharge-valve is closed (or, in the electrical problem, the shunt-
contact is broken), the water, by its inertia, tends to continue
moving, and thus the pressure instantly rises to the value re-
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. 3
quired to overcome the weight of the great column of water.
The second valve is accordingly opened, and a portion of the
water is forced up. Now the electrical current, in virtue of
self-induction, can no more be suddenly stopped than the cur-
rent of water ; and so in the above experiment the polarization of
the voltameter is instantly overcome, and a quantity of electricity
passes.
If no second means of escape were provided for the water in
the hydraulic ram, the pipe would in all probability be unable
to withstand the shock, and in any case could only do so by
yielding within the limits of its elasticity, soas gradually, though
of course very quickly, to stop the flow of water. The bursting
of the pipe may properly be compared to the passage of a spark
at the place where a conductor carrying an electric current is
opened. Just as the natural elasticity of the pipe or the com-
pressibility of the air in a purposely connected air-vessel greatly
diminishes the strain, so the electrical spark may be stopped by
connecting the breaking-points with the plates of a condenser,
as was done by Fizeau in the induction-coil. Contrary to what
might at first sight have been expected, the fall of the pri-
mary current is thus rendered more sudden, and the power of
the instrument for many purposes increased. Of course the
spark is equally prevented when the breaking-points are con-
nected by a short conducting circuit, as in our experiment by
the voltameter. In fact the energy of the actual motion which
exists the moment before contact is broken is im the one case
transformed into that of the sound and heat of the spark, and in
the other has its equivalent partly in the potential energy of the
decomposed water, partly in the heat generated by the passage
of the momentary current in the voltameter branch.
The experiment will be varied in an instructive manner if we
replace the voltameter by a coil (with or without soft iron), ac-
cording to the resistance and self-induction of the latter. In
order to know the result, we must examine closely what takes
place at the moment when contact is broken. The original cur-
rent, on account of its self-induction or inertia, tends to conti-
nue. At the same time the inertia in the branch circuit tends
to prevent the sudden rise of a current there. A force is thus
produced at the breaking-points exactly analogous to the pres-
sure between two bodies, which we will suppose inelastic, one
of which impinges on the other at rest. The pressure or elec-
trical tension continues to vary until the velocities or currents
become equal. All this time the motion of each body or cur-
rent is opposed by a force of the nature of friction proportional
to the velocity or current. Whether this resistance will affect
the common value of the currents (or velocities) at the moment
4 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
they become equal, will depend on its magnitude as compared
with the other data of the problem.
There is for every conducting circuit a certain time-constant
which determines the rapidity of the rise or fall of currents, and
which is proportional to the self-induction and conductivity of
the circuit. Thus, to use Maxwell’s notation, if L and R be re-
spectively the coefficient of self-induction and the resistance, the
time-constant is Boa If the current c exist at any moment
in the circuit and fall undisturbed by external electromotive
t
force, the value at any time ¢ afterwards is given by z=c.e 7.
Any action which takes place in a time much smaller than 7 will
be sensibly unaffected by resistance.
We see, then, that we may neglect the effects of resistance
during the time of equalization of the currents, provided that
the operation is completed in a time much smaller than the time-
constants of either circuit. And this I shall suppose to be the
case. The value of the common current or velocity at the mo-
ment the impact is over will of course be given by the condition
that the momentum, electromagnetic or ordinary, is unchanged.
If Land N be the coefficients of self-induction for the main and
branch circuits respectively, 2 and X the original and required
currents, the analytical expression of the above condition is
(L4+N)X=Lz,
or
L
X= LiN Le
It is here supposed that there is no sensible mutual induction
between the two circuits.
The spark is the result of the excess of the one current over
the other, and lasts until its cause is removed. Its mechanical
value is the difference between that of the original current in
the main circuit and that of the initial current in the combined
circuit, and is expressed by
4La®—3(L-+N)3?;
or if the value of X be substituted,
L
~ L+N
Exactly the same expression holds good for the heat produced
during the collision of the inelastic bodies, which is necessarily
equal to the loss of ordinary actual energy, at least if the per-
1 2
tha
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. 5
manent change of their molecular state may be neglected. From
the value X the current gradually increases or diminishes to that
determined according to Ohm’s law, by the resistance of the
combined circuit. It may be scen from the expression just found
that the resistance of the branch may be varied without affect-
ing the spark, provided always that it is not so great in relation
to the self-induction as to make the time- constant compa-
rable in magnitude with the duration of the spark. The spark
depends only on the comparative self-induction of the branch
circuit, being small when this is small, and when this is great
approximating to its full value ¢La’.
These results are easily illustrated experimentally. I have
two coils of thick wire belonging to an electromagnet, which for
convenience I will call A and B. Each consists of two wires of
equal length, which are coiled together. These may be called
aeoee) bo. When A, A, are “joined consecutively, so that
the direction of the current is the same in the two wires, we have
a circuit whose self-induction is four times that of either wire
taken singly. But if, on the contrary, the current flows oppo-
site ways in the two wires, the self-induction of the circuit be-
comes quite insensible.
The main circuit may be composed of the wire A, (A, remain-
ing open) into which the current from a single Daniell cell is
led, and which can be opened or closed at a mercury cup. One
end of the branch circuit dips into the mercury while the other
communicates with the wire whose entrance or withdrawal from
the cup closes or opens the main circuit. In this way the coils
of the branch may be said to be thrown in at the break.
If the branch is open, we obtain at break the full spark,
whose value is $Lz?. If the wire B, be thrown in, the spark
is still ponsiderable, having approximately the value +L? for
N=L. And if B, B, are thrown in, so that the currents are
parallel, the spark 1 . still greater and is measured by $La? x 4.
But if the currents are opposed, the spark disappears, Bdeause
now N=O; so that the addition of the wire B,, whereby the
resistance of the branch is doubled, diminishes the spark. It
is true that to this last case our calculation is not properly
applicable, masmuch as the time-constant of the branch is so
exceedingly small. But it is not difficult to see that in such a
case (where the self-induction of the branch may be neglected)
the tension at the breaking-points, or more accurately the dif-
ference of potential between them, cannot exceed that of the
battery more than in the proportion of the resistances of the
branch and main circuits, so that it could not here give rise to
any sensible spark. Soft iron wires may be introduced into the
coils in order to exalt the effects; but solid iron cores would
6 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
allow induced currents to circulate which might interfere with
the result. |
In this form of the experiment there was no sensible mutual
induction between the coils A and B. Should there be such,
the result may be considerably modified. For instance, let the
wire A, be thrown at the break into the cireuit of A, and the bat-
tery. This may happen in two ways. If the connexions are so
made that the currents are parallel in A, Aj, there will be no
sensible spark ; but if the directions of the currents are opposed,
the spark appears equal to the full spark $La”.
And this is in accordance with theory. The current X is
given by the same condition as before, which leads to the
equation
Le +Ma=(L+2M+4+N)X,
M being the coefficient of mutual induction between the two
circuits. The spark is therefore
x? L—M
tLa2?—} (L+2M+N) =o Sore as N=L.
Now in the first-mentioned connexion M=L very nearly, and in
the second M=—L; so that the observed sparks are just what
theory requires.
With regard to those electrical phenomena which depend on
the mutual induction of two circuits, it may be remarked that it
is not easy to find exact analogues in ordinary mechanics which
are sufficiently familiar to be of much use as aids to conception.
A rough idea of the reaction of neighbourmg currents may be
had from the consideration of the motion of a heavy bar to
whose ends forces may be applied. If when the bar is at rest
one end is suddenly pushed forwards in a transverse direction,
the inertia of the material gives the centre of gravity in some
degree the properties of a fulcrum, and so the other end begins
to move backwards. This corresponds to the inverse wave in-
duced by the rise of a current in a neighbouring wire. If the
motion be supposed infinitely small, so that the body never turns
through a sensible angle, the kinetic energy is proportional to
3 (a? + KA) a? + 2 (DP + k*)y? + (ab—K)ay,
where a and 0 are the distances of the driving-points (whose velo-
cities are z and 7) from the centre of gravity, k? the radius of gyra-
tion about the latter pomt. This corresponds to the expression
for the energy of the electromagnetic field due to two currents,
tLz?-+ May+4Ny?;
and if we imagine the motion of the driving-points to be re-
sisted by a frictional force proportional to the velocity, we get a
very tolerable representation of the electrical conditions.
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. 7
Or we may take an illustration, which is in many respects to be
preferred, from the disturbance of a perfect fluid, by the motion
of solid bodies in its interior. Thus if in an infinite fluid two
spheres move parallel to each other and perpendicularly to the
line joining them, and with such small velocities that their rela-
tive position does not sensibly change, the kinetic energy may
as usual be expressed by
$Lz?+ May+4Ny?,
x,y denoting the velocities of the two spheres, and L,M, N being
approximately constants*. When the spheres move in the same
direction, the reaction of the fluid tends to press them together ;
but if the motions are opposed, the force changes to a repulsion.
We see here the analogues of the phenomena of attraction and
repulsion discovered by Ampére. If when all is at rest a given
velocity is impulsively impressed on one sphere, the other im-
mediately starts backwards, and, as Thomson + has shown, with
uch velocity that the energy of the whole motion is the least
possible under the given condition.
This theorem is general, and leads directly to the solution of
a large class of electrical problems connected with indaction ;
for whenever a current is suddenly generated in one of the
circuits of a system, the initial currents im all the others are
to be determined so as to make the energy of the field a mini-
mum. These initial currents are formed unmodified by resist-
ance whenever the electromotive impulses to which they owe
their existence last only for a time which may be regarded as va-
nishingly small compared with the time-constants of the circuits.
The sudden fall of a current when a circuit is opened generates
the same currents, except as to sign, in neighbouring circuits as
those due to a rise of the first current, and the condition as to
sufficient suddenness is more generally fulfilled ; at the same time
it is more convenient in explaining the theory to take the case of
the establishment of the primary current.
Suppose, then, that in the wire A, of our coil a current 2 is
suddenly generated, while the ends of A, are joined by a short
wire. ‘The condition of minimum energy 1s obviously fulfilled
if there arise in A, a current represented by—z; for then the
energy of the field is approximately zero. But if the self-induc-
tion of the wire joining the ends of A, be sensible, the annihi-
lation of the energy can no longer be perfect. Thus, let the
circuit of A, be completed by B, B,, then the general expression
for the energy of two currents becomes in this case
+ Lx? + Lay + sly? x (5 or 1,
* Thomson and Tait’s ‘Natural Philosophy, pp. 262, 264.
+ Thomson and Tait, p. 225,
8 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
according to the connexions) ; and the value of y for which this
is a minimum is —2(1 or1). In the first case, the exterior
part of the induced circuit having uo sensible self-induction,
takes away nothing from the initial current; but in the second
there is a reduction to one-fifth. On the other hand, it makes
; *k
no difference to the total current (- =*) , as measured by the
deflection of the galvanometer-needle, which way the connexion
is made; for the smaller initial current, in virtue of its greater
inertia, sustains itself proportionally longer against the damping
action of resistance, which is the same in the two cases. The
heating-power and the effect on the electrodynamometer, which
depend on the integral of the square of the current while it lasts
[2
oS x ), will be different ; but the easiest proof of the diver-
sity of the currents is to be had by comparing their powers of
magnetizing steel.
Thus, if we include in the induced circuit a magnetizing spiral
in which is placed a new sewing-needle, we shall find an im-
mense difference in the magnetization produced by a break-in-
duced current, according as its direction is the same or otherwise
in the wires B, B,. Inthe actual experiment the diluted current
was unable, even after several repetitions, to give the needle any
considerable magnetization (the vibrations were only about three
per minute), while after one condensed current the needle gave
sixteen, raised by repetition to nmeteent. A new needle submit-
ted to the action of several condensed currents also gave nineteen
per minute. The magnetic moments, which are as the squares
of these numbers, show a still greater disproportion.
The truth seems to be that the time required for the perma-
nent magnetization of steel is so small as compared even with
the duration of our induced currents, that the amount of acquired
magnetism depends essentially on the imitial or maximum cur-
rent without regard to the time for which it lasts.
The increased heating-effect when the two parts of the current
in B are opposed in direction is, of course, at the expense of the
spark in the mercury-cup. The mechanical value of the spark
is the difference between the values of the currents which exist
at the moments before and after the breaking of the contact, and
LL a?—1LNy? =}2°(L- 7) =}0*(L—) neatly.
* R, S are the resistances of the primary and secondary circuits respec-
tively.
+ These were complete vibrations.
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. 9
Now, according to the connexions, N=L or 5L; and so in the
first case the spark disappears, while in the second it falls short
of the full spark by only one-fifth.
While considering the dynamics of the field of two currents,
I noticed that the initial induced current due to a sudden fall of
a given current in the primary wire is theoretically greater the
smaller the number of terms of which the secondary consists ;
for in calculating the energy of the field, it makes no difference
whether we have a current of any magnitude in a doubled
circuit, or twice that current in a single circuit. The same
conclusion may be arrived at by the consideration of the ana-
lytical expression for the initial induced current
M
JOR Ns
for if the secondary circuit consists essentially of a single coil of
n terms, we have, ceteris paribus, M « n, while N a n?, so that
1
Yo%>. The whole induced current if ydt c Mon. Interme-
2
diate to these is the heating-effect Jf yrdt, which a wy> and is
therefore independent of n. Thus it was evident that neither the
galvanometer nor electrodynamometer were available for the veri-
fication of this rather paradoxical deduction from theory, at
least without commutators capable of separating one part of the
induced current from the rest. On the other hand, it appeared
probable that the smaller total current, in virtue of its greater
maximum, might be the most powerful in its magnetizing action
on steel.
With the view of putting this idea to the test of experiment,
I bound three wires of ‘001 inch diameter, and about 20 feet
long, together into a coil whose opening was sufficient to allow
it to pass over the coil A. The ends of the wires were free, so
that they could be joined up in any order into one circuit, which
was also to contain the magnetizing spiral. It is evident that
if the currents are paralle] in the three wires (an arrangement
which I will call a), then
M=3M,, N=9No
M, N, being the values of the induction-coefficients for one wire ;
while if in the two wires the current flows one way round and in
the third the opposite (6), we shall have M=M,, N=N . Inas-
muchas the self-induction of the magnetizing spiral was relatively
very small, these may be regarded as the induction-coefficients
for the secondary circuit as a whole. This arrangement was
adopted in order that there might be no change in the resistance
10 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
in passing from one case to the other. The primary current was
excited by a Daniell cell in the two wires of A arranged collate-
rally, and was interrupted at a mercury-cup. The needle was
submitted to the break induction-currents only—although the
make currents had no perceptible magnetizing-power, on ac-
count of the relatively large time-constant of the primary cir-
cuit, and the consequent slow rise of its current to the maximum.
On actually submitting a new needle to the current a, I
obtained after one discharge 12 vibrations (complete) per
minute, a number raised after several discharges to 15. On
the other hand, a new needle after one discharge b gave
only 5 per minute, and was not much affected by repetition.
The last needle being now submitted to discharge a gave 83,
and after several 12. Other trials having confirmed these
results, there seemed to be no doubt that the current a was
the most efficient magnetizer. There remained, however, some
uncertainty as to whether the time-constant, especially in 8,
was sufficiently large relatively to the time for which the spark
at the mercury cup lasted to allow of the initial current being
formed undiminished by resistance. In order to make the fall
of the primary current more sudden, I connected the breaking-
points with the plates of a condenser belonging te a Ruhmkorff
coil, and now found but little difference between the magneti-
zing-powers of a and b. Seeing that the theoretical condi-
tion had not been properly fulfilled, 1 prepared another triple
coil of much thicker wire, and, for greater convenience, arranged
a mercury-cup commutator, by means of which it was possible
to pass at once from the one mode of connexion to the other.
The magnetizing spiral was still of fine wire coiled, without any
tube, closely over the needle, and its ends were soldered to the
thicker wire of the triple coil.
The experiment was now completely successful. Out of the
large number of results obtained, the following are selected as
an example. A new needle was submitted to the break dis-
charge of arrangement 0, and gave,
After 1 discharge, 19 per minute.
3) 3 3) 23 PB)
3) 6 PP) 24, 3)
Another needle was now taken and magnetized by discharge a.
It gave,
After 1 discharge, 11 per minute. °
3) 3 3) 12 oY
3) 10 3) 125 PP)
On submitting this needle, which had received all the mag-
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. ue
netism that a could give it, to current b, I obtained,
After 1 discharge, 21 per minute.
33 3 3) 4
PP)
In fact it was the general result of the experiments that
more magnetism is always given to the needle by arrangement
6 than by a. In order, however, that the difference may be
striking, it is advisable not to approach too nearly the point of
magnetic saturation. The numbers quoted were obtained with
the condenser, which was still necessary, in order to make the
break sufficiently sudden. I have no doubt, however, that it
might have been dispensed with had the triple coil consisted
of a larger number of turns.
The circumstances of this experiment are in some degree
represented by supposing, in the hydrodynamical analogue, one
of the balls to vary in size. When a given motion is suddenly
impressed on the other ball, the corresponding velocity gene-
rated in the first would vary inversely with its magnitude; for
the larger the ball the greater hold, as it were, would it have
on the fiuid.
It is interesting also to examine the influence of neighbour-
ing soft iron on the character of the induced current. This in-
fluence is of two sorts; but I refer here to the modifications
produced by the magnetic character of iron. The circulation
of induced currents in its mass may generally be prevented
from exercising any injurious influence on the result by using
ouly wires, or fragments of small size. The proximity of soft
iron always increases the coefficient of self-imduction N, while
M may be either increased or diminished. The latter state-
ment is true also for the initial current y, which is propor-
tional to a For the two wires of the coil A, however, it is
easy to see that M and N are approximately equal, whether
there be soft iron in their neighbourhood or not. Thus, if A,
be connected with a Daniell cell while the circuit of A, is com-
pleted by the magnetizing spiral, the magnetism acquired by
the needle, after a break-induced current, is not much altered,
even if a considerable number of iron wires are placed in the
coil. The total current is increased fifteen times or more; but
this is because the current lasts longer, the maximum or initial
value being no greater than before. This experiment strikingly
illustrates the comparative independence of the magnetizing
effect of a current on its duration. It seems probable a priori,
and is partly confirmed by some of my experiments, that this is
more especially true if we take the limiting magnetism which
12 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena
an induced current can produce, after repetition, as the measure
of its magnetizing powers.
The same kind of reasoning may be applied to more compli-
cated problems. As an example, we may recur to a former
combination, in which the primary current is excited in the
wire A,, while the secondary circuit includes A,, B,, and the
magnetizing spiral. The initial current y, on which, as we
have seen, the magnetizing power mainly depends, will be greatly
increased if the ends of the wire B, are joined so as to make a
tertiary circuit; for a current in B, is developed, which, being
equal and contrary to that in B,, neutralizes its action on the
magnetic field, and so allows the energy, immediately after the
sudden rise of the current x in A,, to be vanishingly small,
exactly as when the secondary circuit consisted of A, alone.
The effect of closing B, is therefore to increase the current yp
from —3 az to —z, and at the same time to produce a new cur-
rent denoted by +2 in B, itself. The following were some of
the experimental results :—
A new needle,
B, open After 1 break-discharge, gave 74 per minute.
3) 8 3) 33 3)
On closing B, we had, with the same needle,
After 1 discharge, 15 per minute.
3) 8 33 17 3)
A new needle gave,
After 1 discharge, 17 per minute.
9) 8 3) 19 39
Another new needle in the tertiary circuit gave,
After 1 discharge, 16 per minute.
3) 4 33 19 3)
3) 8 93 195 39
The magnetizing spiral was here removed from the secondary
to the tertiary circuit; and although its resistance was by no
means relatively small, the results are none the less compara-
ble; for in this experiment resistances (within limits) are of
no account, and the self-induction of the spiral was quite in-
sensible.
Had there been twentycolsA BCD...... similar to A B,
with the wires B, C,, C, D,, &c. connected, as im the experi-
ment just described, the magnetizing power of the current in
the last would not, I imagine, be much less than im the first ;
for the condition of mmimum energy would still be fulfilled by
currents in the series of coils all equal in numerical value, and
alternately opposite m algebraic sign. On this subject much
considered in connexion with the Dynamical Theory. 13
confusion seems to have prevailed, as shown by the numerous
inquiries into the direction of the induced currents of high
orders. The currents, as a whole, at least after the first, can-
not properly be said to have any direction at all, as they in-
volve, when complete, no transfer of electricity im any direc-
tion. Nevertheless the positive and negative parts are not si-
milar ; and if they were, one must necessarily precede the other ;
so that in this way directional effects may be produced. The
magnetizing power, for instance, depends essentially on the initial
maximum magnitude of the induced current, and is probably
but little affected by the character of the diluted but compara-
tively long-continued remaining parts. This being understood,
the alternately opposite magnetizations observed by Henry in a
series of induced currents of high order, is an immediate con-
sequence of the dynamical theory.
The circuits being denoted by the numbers 1, 2, 3,..., let
the coefficient of mutual induction between 2 and 3 be denoted
by (2 3), and of self-induction of 2 by (22), and so on. The
result is only generally true when there is no mutual induction
except between immediate neighbours in the series ; and it will
therefore be supposed that
Gye A) p01 (i) verbo QkA)i
vanish, as indeed they practically would in the ordinary arrange-
ment of the experiment. The energy of the field is given by
BH=4(1 1)a?+3(2 2)a2+3(8 3)a2+...
+ (1 2)a,7.4+ (2 3)rqor34+ (8 4)aga,+ ...
Here a, is the given current in the first circuit, and 2, z5,...
are to be determined so as to make KE a minimum. Now, HE
being homogeneous in 2, %,..., we have identically
di di
ott ees Te rey 606
And since, when EF is a minimum,
ap at ... all vanish,
dz, dx,
we see that
QE (min.) =2, 4" = (1 1)z2+ (1 2)ar,29
lp
1
But if x,, #3,... had been all zero, 2K would have been equal
to(11)#?. It is clear therefore that (1 2)2, 2, is negative ;
or, as (1 2) is taken positive, the sign of x, is the opposite of
that of z,.
14 The Hon. J. W. Strutt on some Electromagnetic Phenomena.
Again, supposing z, z, both given, we must have, when EH is
a minimum,
dB de,
dats dx, ) Py IR! )
and thus
2K (min.) =z, [(1 l)z,+ (1 2)aq]
+aq[(1 2)a, + (2 2) a+ (2 3)ars]
= [1 1)2?+2(1 2)x, ryt (2 2)u?2 + (2 8) rons.
As before, 2E might have been
(1 Va? +21 2)a, a, + (2 2)a2;
and therefore the mimimum value is necessarily less than this,
and accordingly the signs of 2, and #, are opposite. This process
may be continued, and shows that, however long the series, the
initial induced currents are alternately opposite in sign. In any
definite example, the actual values of the initial currents are to
be found from the solution of the linear equations
dk CAD
ipo ae
==) re
but the sign of the result does not appear at once from the form
of the expression so obtained. In order to exhibit it, it is ne-
cessary to introduce a number of relations which exist between
the induction-coefficients, and which are the analytical expres-
sion of the fact that the energy is always positive, whatever may
fethe valuesi0t 27, gaa-ee
It has been assumed throughout that the time of rise or fall
of the current in the primary wire 1s very small as compared with
the time-constants of the other circuits. In the case of coils,
such as are generally used in induction-experiments, and which
are not clogged by great external resistances, this condition is
abundantly fulfilled at the break of the voltaic current*. The time
of rise depends more on the nature of the circuit, but may be
made as small as we please by sufficiently increasing the resist-
ance in proportion to the self-induction ; of course, in order to
get an equally strong current, a higher electromotive force must
be employed. In this way the rise may be made sufficiently
sudden to fulfil the condition. Indeed, with a battery intense
enough the rise of the current at make may become more sudden
* A rough measurement by Maxwell’s method (Phil. Trans. 1865) gave
for the time-constant of the circuit composed of the two wires of coil A
0023". The time-constant is the same whether the wires are collateral or
consecutive, the greater self-induction of the latter arrangement being
balanced by its greater resistance. For one wire only, the time-constant
would be half the above.
On the Function of the Blood in Muscular Work. 15
than the fall when contact is broken. In some of Henry’s ex-
periments this seems actually to have cccurred. Thus, with
a single cell as electromotor, he found the shock at make
barely perceptible ; but when the battery was increased to thirty
cells, the shock became more powerful at make than at break.
And here [ must bring this rather disjointed paper to a close.
Terling Place, Witham,
June l.
II. On the Function of the Bloodin Muscular Work. By W. H.
BroapBent, M.D., Lecturer on Physiology at St. Mary’s
Hospital Medical School*.
‘ the Philosophical Magazine for May 1867 there is a paper
under the title given above by Mr. C. W. Heaton, Professor
of Chemistry at Charing-Cross Hospital, the purport of which is
to show that the oxidation which yields the force exerted by the
muscles is intravascular, or that muscular force is generated en-
tirely from the blood and within the blood-vessels. As this
communication is considered by some eminent physiologists to
have established the hypothesis that the blood itself 1s both the
source and the seat of all the chemical change by which force is
developed in the animal organism, it is desirable to examine
whether the considerations on which it is based are really so con-
clusive.
The point in question is whether the oxidation which evolves
muscular force is intravascular or extravascular. The arguments
employed by Professor Heaton are as follows :—
1. “If the oxidation of muscle is effected in the tissue itself,
it is clearly necessary to suppose either that the oxygen, upon
the stimulus of the motor nerves, leaves its combination in the
corpuscle, traverses the walls of the capillary in company with
the outgoing stream of nutrient fluid, and only enters into new
combinations when it has passed to some comparatively dis-
tant muscle-fibre, or else that the corpuscle itself liquefies and
passes out bodily through the thin membrane with its loosely
combined oxygen..... Any oxygen which passes. out into the
tissues must obviously pass in solution in the exudate.”
2. The lymph collected from the tissues and again poured into
the blood may be taken as the measure of the exudate which
passes out of the capillaries into the structures; and it is shown
by careful calculation, exaggerating both the amount of exudate
and the proportion of oxygen dissolvable in it, that the quantity
of oxygen which could thus be carried to the tissue is utterly
* Communicated by the Author.
16 Dr. W. H. Broadbent on the Function of
inadequate to effect the oxidation required for the evolution of
the force actually exerted by the muscles.
The entire question thus turns on the assumption that oxygen
can leave the capillaries only by passing through the thi mem-
brane of which they consist, in solution in a fluid exudate. The
necessity for a current of fluid to convey the oxygen is supposed
to arise from the fact that the oxygen, being in solution in the
blood, carries with it its solvent in passing through the capillary
wall—yjust as in dialysis the saline matter is accompanied by the
water in which it is dissolved. But this view of the process
leaves entirely out of consideration the fact that if oxygen
leaves the capillaries, the products of oxidation (carbonic anhy-
dride &c.) must enter them; and when two diffusible substances
are in solution on opposite sides of a thin membrane, the ad-
verse currents of the common solvent more or less neutralize each
other, and there is interchange of the dissolved matters with
comparatively little movement of fluid.
If oxygen can leave the blood only in solution in a current of
fluid, how, it may be asked, does it enter the blood in the lungs ?
It would seem that there ought to be a stream of fluid setting in
from the air-cells into the pulmonary capillaries ; and this would
be required were it not that, as the oxygen enters the blood, car-
bonic anhydride leaves it. On the hypothesis that oxidation is
extravascular, the exchange of oxygen for carbonic anhydride 1s
effected very similarly in the pulmonic and systemic capillaries.
In the lungs the oxygen is dissolved in the moisture of the walls
of the air-sacs; there is thus outside the capillary membrane
fluid containing oxygen, while in its interior is moving the blood
charged with CO?; interchange of the two gases consequently
takes place. In the systemic capillaries the blood is oxygenated,
while outside the capillaries is the interstitial fluid of the textures
containing the CO*® which has resulted from oxidation. The
conditions under which interchange will occur are here again
realized; the capillary wall stands between two fluids, one charged
with O, the other with CO?. Here, however, the O is in the
blood, instead of CO? as in the lungs. It is not the affinity of
a distant fibre for oxygen which overcomes the weak “ molecular
combination ” of this gas with the blood-corpuscles, but the pre-
sence of CO? in the surrounding fluid; and the affinity of O and
CO? for hematoglobin is so nearly balanced, that they mutually
displace each other according as one or the other predominates.
It is thus evident that, supposing the oxidation to take place
outside the capillaries, the oxygen does not require a stream of
fluid to convey it to the tissues; and this being the case, the
calculation by which it is shown that the exudate is insufficient
for the purpose has no bearing whatever on the question whether
the Blood in Muscular Work. 7
the oxidation is intra- or extravascular. This consequently has
to be decided on other grounds; and the evidence in favour of
the view that the oxidation takes place outside the capillaries
preponderates greatly. In muscle, besides the proper muscular
fibre with its connective tissue and the capillaries, there is an in-
terstitial fluid (the “muscular juice”), which Claude Bernard
calls the ‘ mzliew”’ of the fibre, and which may be regarded as
a medium common to the fibre and the vessel. On the one
hand, it is by the reaction between the fibre and this fluid
which surrounds and saturates it that the chemical change takes
place (oxidation or its equivalent) by which the force is evolved ;
on the other hand, this fluid being separated from the blood only
by the thin capillar y wall, the most perfect equalization of their
diffusible constituents must take place by osmosis, oxygen pass-
ing from the blood into the interstitial fluid, and products of
oxidation from this fluid into the blood ; so far, then, as the sup-
ply of oxygen is concerned, the muscular juice is equivalent to the
blood. Were intravascular oxidation the source of muscular
force, the evolution of the force must cease absolutely on the
supply of blood being cut off. We find, on the contrary, that a
muscle continues to contract for some time after its removal from
the body, showing that force (or, in other words, oxygen and
oxidizable material) is stored up in the muscle; and it is further
found that after frequent and sustained contraction the muscular
juice is changed in composition. We find, again, that muscular
contractility survives removal longest in cold-blooded animals,
whose blood contains a minimum of oxygen; and when a
warm-blooded animal is brought into a state analogous to that
of reptiles, its blood being rendered venous and its tempera-
ture greatly lowered, its muscles also retain their contractility,
as has been shown by Claude Bernard’s “lapin a sang froid,” in
which the above conditions are induced by section of the cervical
spinal cord. Itis perhaps scarcely necessary to notice a difficulty
in the hypothesis of Professor Heaton; but it might fairly be
asked how force evolved within the capillary is transmitted to
the “comparatively distant fibre” by which it is manifested.
Oxidation has been spoken of in this discussion as the source
of muscular work without any qualification; but it should be
understood that there is an essential difference between the mode
of oxidation which yields the animal heat, and that which affords
mechanical work or nerve-force. While heat is evolved continu-
ously and uniformly, nervo-muscular action takes place inter-
mittently, abruptly, and with varying intensity on the application
of a “stimulus,” 7. e. the oxygen and oxidizable matter being in
presence, the combination only occurs when some impulse 1S
given. It is thus not a simple case of combination of oxygen
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88. No. 252. July 1869. C
18 Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according
with a combustible, but the rearrangement of the elementary
constituents of a complex molecule in a state which, for want of
a better term, I have called elsewhere* “ chemical tension.” In
the communication alluded to the evolution of nerve-force only
was considered, and the conclusion here stated was reached de-
ductively, but experimental confirmation is afforded by Hermann’s
researches on the chemical changes attending muscular action.
III. On Vital Force according to Age, and the “English Life Table.”
By Tuomas Rows Epmonns, B.A. Cantab.t
BSERVATIONS on the vital force of man at different ages
from birth are all of modern date. The idea of the exist-
ence in every population of a law of vital force according to age
was not entertained by mankind until near the end of the seven-
teenth century. The embodiment of this idea in a “Table of
Mortality ” was first made about the year 1693, by our country-
man, Dr. Halley. The form of the Table of mortality adopted
about the year 1738, and continued in use to the present time,
may be described as follows :—Such Table consists of three co-
lumns. The heading of the first column is ‘ Age,” of the se-
cond column “ Living,” and of the third column “ Dying.” The
numbers in the first column denote completed years of age from
birth-time, beginning at age O and ending, say, at 99 years.
The numbers in the second column denote the living or suryi-
vors at any completed year of age out of a given number born or
livmg at the age 0. Lastly, the numbers in the ¢hird column
denote the numbers dying during the year of age next following
the completed year marked, i the same horizontal line, in the
first column.
In a Table of mortality, if the numbers in the column of
“Living” be represented by the letter P, the numbers in the
column of “Dying”? will be represented by AP, for a unit of
time or age taken to be one year. If the time or age be reckoned
from birth, we shall have at any age ¢ the quantity atl re-
t
present the ratio of the numbers dying during the (¢+1)th year
of age to the numbers living at the beginning of the same year
of age. If the intervals of age, instead of being each one year,
be diminished indefinitely, we shall have to substitute the differ-
ential of P; or d. P, for AP? in the above ratio. We shall then
P,
P,
obtain d
, or d. log, P; for the expression of the ratio of the
* Proceedings of the Royal Society, June 1868.
ft Communeated by the Author.
to Age, and the “English Life Table.” 19
dying to the living, during an infinitely small given time df, at
the precise age ¢ years, ¢ being either a whole number or frac-
tional. Ifa simple function of the variable ¢ can be discovered
which will represent d.log, P; at all ages, then by integration
the value of log, P;, and consequently of P;, may be determined
for all ages. It may be useful here to state that the ratio of
the dying tothe living for an indefinitely small given time df,
at the exact age 7, represents the force of mortality at that age—
also that the vital force at any age ¢ 1s represented by the reci-
procal of the force of mortality at the same precise point of age.
A Table of mortality for a particular population is a mode of
exhibiting the ratio of the dying to the living in that population
for every year of age from birth-time to the end of life. The
knowledge of this series of annual ratios (which is the founda-
tion of every true Table of mortality) can be obtained only by
observations of the contemporary numbers living and dying at
every interval of age. In the making of such observations, the
intervals of age ought to be quinquennial at all ages above five
years, biennial at ages above one and less than five years, quar-
terly in the first year of age, and monthly in the first quarter
of year from birth. No observation of the kind now described
was known to the public until near the end of the eighteenth
century, when the Sweden Table of mortality constructed by
Dr. Richard Price was published. Dr. Halley’s Table for
Breslau, as well as all other Tables of mortality for specific
populations, which had been constructed previously, were defec-
tive and not to be relied upon through not being founded on
the requisite data mentioned above. These defective Tables had
been deduced from observations made only on the registered
number of deaths at different ages belonging to the several
populations, without any observation or enumeration of the
contemporary numbers living at the same ages. The defects
inseparable from such Tables were partially remedied in various
ways. Populations were selected for observation in which the
numbers living at all ages were nearly stationary, and in which
the annual births had been nearly equal to the annual deaths for
along period of time. Then the supposition was made that the
living population at each interval of age was constant and not
increased or diminished by migration. Lastly, corrections were
introduced to rectify manifest deviations from the assumed con-
dition of a stationary population at every interval of age.
Observations made correctly, and in the proper form for de-
termining the vital force of man at different ages, are very few
im number. In the first rank are the observations of the living
and dying, according to age, of the population of Sweden,
commencing about the year 1750 and continued to the present
C2
20 Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according
time. In these observations the ages and numbers of the con-
temporary living and dying are given for quinquennial intervals
at all ages above five years of age, and for biennial and annual
intervals below that age. Next in time and very high in rank
comes the observation of the living and dying, according to age,
of the population of Carlisle, made for the nine years ending with
the year 1787. This observation was made spontaneously by a
private individual, Dr. Heysham, without aid in money or labour
from the public. This observation, on the vital force, according
to age, of the population of a town of no great magnitude, is
in accuracy and form of so high a character, that it is equal in
value to any ordinary observation of the same kind made on a
population a hundred times as great in extent. Last in time
comes the observation on the living and dying, according to age,
of the population of England for the seventeen years 1838-1854.
This observation was published in the year 1864, by authority
of the Registrar-General for England, and was accompanied by
the “ English Life Table” deduced therefrom by Dr. William
Farr.
In the earlier part of the English observation, made for the
seven years ending with 1844, and published in 1849, the num-
bers of the living and dying, according to age, were given for
quinguennial intervals at all ages above 15 years. But in the
observation for the total period of seventeen years ending with
1854 the numbers living and dying, according to age, are given
for decennial intervals only at ages above 15 years. Ne reason
has been assigned for thus withholding mformation which 1s very
valuable as an index of the truth, or want of truth, in the re-
ported ages and numbers of the living and dying on which the
“English Life Table” is founded. On the present occasion,
however, this defect in the English observation for the entire pe-
riod of seventeen years has been remedied, as may be seen on
reference to Tables IV. and V. hereunto annexed. The rates
of mortality for decennial intervals of age have been given for
the period of seven years and for the period of seventeen years,
whilst the rates for quinquennial intervals of age have been given
also for the seven years ending with 1844. From these data
the quinquennial rates for the seventeen years ending with 1854:
have been determined as nearly as can be desired for any useful
purpose.
All Tables of mortality, especially those founded on good ob-
servations, agree with one another in exhibiting one uniform
progressive rate of increase of vital force according to age during
childhood, and another uniform progressive rate of decrease accord-
ing to age during manhood, reckoning from puberty to the latest
age of life. The true law according to which the vital force uni-
to Age, and the “English Life Table.” 21
formly increases during childhood, as well as the true law ac-
cording to which the vital force uniformly decreases during
manhood, were first communicated to the public through the
Philosophical Magazine of January 1866, in a paper written by
me. I had previously, in the year 1832, given to the public a
triple series of “ Life Tables,” all founded upon an empirical law
which yields results nearly ponte dene with the results of the true
law published in1866. For practical purposes, in the construction
of Tables of mortality, it is not easy to determine whether the
true law of 1866 ought to be preferred to the empirical law of
1832. In either case the law of variation of vital force from
birth to the end of life is expressible in very simple terms, the
result in either case being a differential of the logarithm of the
living (d.log,P) of great simplicity. But when the two differ-
entials are integrated, the resulting formula for the living (or
survivors) at any specified age ¢ or a+¢ is found to be more
simple when the empirical law is adopted than when the true
law is adopted as the basis of calculation.
In the Philosophical Magazine for January 1866 (No. 206,
page 9), it has been shown, according to the true law, that the
force of mortality at any age, either in the period of childhood
or in the period of manhood, is known when the force of mor-
tality at any other age in the same period is known, from the for-
mula following,
1
(45)
ao at+t
wherein ¢ is the difference of age; ais a constant representing
distance (in time or age) from a fixed point, which is one of the
two zeros of life; a 1s a given or observed force of mortality at
a known absolute age a; a, 1s the force of mortality to be de-
termined for any other absolute age (a+7); and wherein 2 is
| k
the hyperbolic logarithm of 10, and equal to 2302585.
There are two zeros of vital forcee—one belonging to the period
of childhood, and the other to the period of manhood. The zero
of childhood is at the age 21 years before birth, or at the age 14
year before conception. The zero of the period of manhood is
at the age 102 years after birth-time. The length of the period of
childhood (which terminates at 9 years after birth-time) is
244+9=114 years. The length of the period of manhood is
102—12=90 years. The length of the period of manhood is
just eight times the length of the period of childhood. The in-
crease of vital force during each year in childhood is just eight
times as great as the decrease of vital force during each year in ©
the period of manhood. There is an intermediate period, from
«
22 Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according
the age of 9 to the age of 12 years, during which the rate of
mortality is constant and at a minimum. It may be well to ob-
serve that the zero of life m the period of childhood may be real
and mark the commencement of animal organization. Also it
may be useful to observe that, if the law of mortality is conti-
nuous above and below 84 years of age as well as above and
below birth-time, it will ensue that the rate of mortality at the
age 90 years is equal to the rate of mortality immediately after
the time of conception, and the rate of mortality at the age 96
years 1s equal to the rate of extinction of germs existing at the
age of 9 months, measured from the day of commencement of
organization.
The differential of the hyperbolic logarithm of the living or
surviving at any age a@+7 is known when the force of mortality
a at the absolute age a measured from one of the two zeros of
vital force is known, and is of the form Ue —
log Bie (+ a) Eat
The above equation yields on integration (after assuming P
to be equal to unity when ¢=0) the following equation, corre-
sponding to any absolute age a+47,
com. log Py= — “ats 1 = ( ibe = ay",
i mee
wherein n= i —]1=1:'302585, and wherein ais the decrement
i ,
in a unit of time on a unit of life, at the absolute age a whence
¢ is measured, the infinitesimal rate of decrement for the same
precise age being adf.
The above formula for the surviving population from a given
age a to any other age a+¢ is similar to the formula which re-
presents the ratio of increase of the expansive force of water
(with its steam envelope) from a given temperature a to any
other temperature a+¢, measured from the zero of heat, which
is at 276° C. (or 496°'8 F.) below the temperature of melting
ice. That is to say, the law of surviving population accord-
ing to age is the same as the law of expansive force of water
according to ¢emperature. Both laws are expressed by similar
functions of the variables, whether in time or in temperature.
The expansion by heat of the force of water (or of steam in-
cumbent on water) is the chief instrument employed by man
in producing motion for mechanical purposes. In mterest and
importance to man, the law of vital force is at least equal to
_ the law of steam force. The knowledge of either of these two
laws is as valuable as the knowledge of any other law which
concerns mankind,
to Age, and the “ English Life Table.” 23
In the case both of surviving population and of steam force,
dlog.P is of the same form though of different signs, whether P
represents population or pressure per square foot of steam of
maximum density. The differential of log, P represents decre-
ment in one case and increment in the other case. Surviving
population is always diminishing as age increases ;_ whilst steam
force is always increasing as temperature increases.
In the case of population, d. log’ P, or a represents rate of
decrement of life or force of mortality at the absolute age a+t.
In the case of steam force, d.log,P stands for rate of incre-
ment of force, to which no specific name is attached We
; ; ip Samy
know, however, something of the chief factor ( 1+ 5 * con-
tained in the expression d.log,P applicable to the pressure
of steam of maximum density; for if steam were a perfectly
elastic gas and did not increase in density according as the
temperature of the subjacent water increased, in that case the
increment per degree of the expansive force of such steam atany
=I
temperature a+¢ would be represented by 2(1 == -) > lf @ re-
presented the increase of expansive force per degree at the tem-
perature a. That is to say, the factor which represents incre-
ment of force per degree in the two cases is the same, with this
difference, however, that the exponent of the factor in one case
is unity and in the other case 7 = 2802585. The law just
mentioned as expressing the increment per degree of expansive
force of a perfect gas according to temperature, was discovered
eighty years ago, by Dalton in England, and by Gay-Lussac in
France. The quantity a measuring degrees from the zero of
heat is the same in the case of air as in the case of steam of
maximum density. The value of a is 276° C., being the dis-
tance of the zero of heat below the temperature of melting ice.
Recurring to the formula for the force of mortality already
given, we have, in the period of childhood, for the force of mor-
tality at any age ¢ measured from birth-time, where a, is given
by observation and @=2°25 years,
I 5)
a T. \—-=
=o 5 )= ent eS Ey (a+t) %-
= is, the force of mortality at any age ¢ varies inversely as
Ri, if R be taken equal to (a+t) and be made to represent dis-
tance in time or age from a fixed point which is the zero of
24, Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according
vital foree. The chief of physical forces is that of gravity, which,
according to distance from a fixed point in space, varies inversely
as R*. ‘That is to say, the law of variation of the force of mor-
tality measured from a central point, differs from the law of va-
riation of the force of gravity similarly measured, only in the
exponent of the radial distance. The exponent is two in the
case of the force of gravity, and the exponent is = or 2°302585
in the case of the force of mortality.
The empirical formula published in 1832 was founded on the
supposition that the mortality according to age decreases or in-
creases in a constant geometrical ratio im each of three definite
periods of human life. The com. logs. of the three constant
ratios are —‘17, +°0128, and +°0333; the corresponding
numbers being ‘6761, 1:0299, and 10797. The first period
begins at birth, and ends near 9 years of age. The second
period begins at 12 and ends near 55 years of age. Andthe
third period begins near 55 years of age, and continues until
the end of life. There is probably an intermediate fourth pe-
riod, from the age of 9 to the age of 12 years, during which
the rate of mortality is constant and at a minimum.
From the above law of geometric increase or decrease of mor-
tality according to age, was obtained for each of the three periods
the differential equation following, viz.
0 Ogee = — apt ;
and afterwards by integration, assuming P=1 when ¢=0,
kre aes t
com. log P;= vi (l—p*) or P,=107 ??.
The quantity « in the empirical formula of 1832 represents
the annual rate of mortality at the precise age a whence ¢1s mea-
sured, that is when ¢=0. ‘The actual or infinitesimal rate of
mortality at the time or age when ¢=0 is edt. The actual or
infinitesimal rate at any other point of time, say ¢ years or frac-
tions of years, is ep’dt. The quantity « thus used to indicate
the rate of mortality at a particular point of age was not known
to the public until the year 1832. In my book of “ Life Tables,”
published in that year, the above quantity was first described and
made the subject of a special Table, of which the following is the
title:-—“Table A 27, showing at quinquennial intervals of age the
force of mortality, or the number of deaths which would occur
in one year, upon 100 constantly living.” Without the quantity
a, as first described by me, any formula similar to that of
ke
com. log P;= ue: (1—p‘) is of no use except for the imterpola-
to Age, and the “ English Life Table.” 25
tion of new values of P between two or more values of P; ex-
tracted from any Table of mortality not regulated by any definite
law of decrement of life according to age.
In facilities afforded for the rapid construction of Tables of
mortality, the formula of 1832 has the advantage over the for-
mula of 1866, chiefly through yielding successive values of
log A log P; differing from one another by a constant quantity
which is the common logarithm of the annual ratio of increase
of the mortality according to age. The formula of 1882 yields
the equation following, i
log A log P;,, — log A log P;== — log p.
The formula of 1866 yields
1
log A log P;,, — log A log P; = — Fae nearly.
In the former case the numbers in the column containing
log A log P are obtained with exactitude by successive additions
of a constant which is log». In the latter case the numbers in
the same column are obtained nearly by successive additions of
the variable => The smaller the intervals of age adopted,
a
the nearer will be the approach to exactitude in the latter case.
For practical purposes, the results from both formule, obtained
as above, will be equally valuable when the intervals of age are
yearly. Nevertheless the above short method of constructing
Tables according to the formula of 1866 is not likely to find
favour with calculators; for they will generally prefer the
direct use of the formula yielding accurate results, to the indi-
rect and short course attended with errors however insignificant.
The vital force relative to age is probably the same im all indi-
viduals, the rate of increase of such force during childhood and
the rate of decrease during manhood being the same for all.
But the absolute vital forces at the same ages may vary greatly
when individuals are compared with individuals and classes with
classes. One of the earliest fruits of the study of the law of
human mortality was the discovery of the fact that the rates of
mortality, at all ages, of the populations of large towns were
much greater than the rates, at the same ages, prevailing in the
populations of the small towns and villages of the same nation.
The general rule appeared to be, that the absolute rates of mor-
tality at every age increased according as the magnitude and
density of these town populations increased. The earlier writers
on human mortality considered large cities to perform the func-
tion of graves, in swallowing up all excess of births over deaths,
and thus preventing the populations of long settled countries
from increasing.
In the year 1832 the present writer gave to the public three
26 Mr. T. R. Edmonds on Vital Force according
series of theoretical Life Tables—one representing “ Village Mor-
tality,” another “ Mean Mortality,” and the third “ City Mor-
taly,”? the principal series being that of Mean Mortality. At
any given age the rates of mortality in the three Tables are to
one another in the proportion of the numbers 5, 6, and 74 respec-
tively. The same three numbers were intended to represent for
the fixed age of ten years the annual mortality per thousand
living according to the same three several Tables. The above
three Tables were deduced from the same formula,
se Bee 2 pt
com. log P;= 7 (l—p’),
with the three different values of a above mentioned. These
Tables were the first ever published in which the rate of morta-
lity at any age was connected by a continuous and definite law
of increase or decrease with the rate of mortality exhibited for
every other age. The first of these theoretical Tables, desig-
nated as “ Village Mortality,” is almost in exact coincidence at
every age with Heysham and Milne’s Table for Carlisle (pub-
lished in 1815), as may be seen on inspection of Tables I. and
VI. hereunto annexed.
In the ‘ Lancet’ of the 9th and 16th of March, 1850, there ap-
peared a paper in which I compared the results of the * Village,”
“ Mean,” and “ City” Tables of mortality with the observed
rates of mortality, according to age, of various parts of the po-
pulation of England during the seven years 1838-1844, these
observed rates having been published by authority of the
Registrar-General in the year 1849. Extracts from these com-
pared results will be found in Table III. hereunto annexed.
On inspection of this Table it will be seen that the mortality,
according to age, of the total male population of the four heal-
thiest of the eleven Registrar’s districts into which England has
been divided is sufficiently well represented by the theoretical
Table of “ Village Mortality.” Also it will be seen that the
theoretical Table of ‘‘ City Mortality” 1s a good representation
of the mortality, according to age, of the male population of the
chief towns of Kngland. Taking four classes of such towns, ar-
ranged according to intensity of mortality, it will be seen that
the mortality according to the “ City ” Table, at the various in-
tervals of age, agrees nearly with the mean mortality observed
in these four classes of chief towns.
It is worthy of remark that, although the “ City ” Table is a
good representation of the mortality of the population of English
cities at ages under 10 years and at ages above 30 years, it is
not so for the intermediate period of age. One of the remark-
able results of the English observation is, that the mortality
of the populations of great towns between the ages of 10 and 30
to Age, and the “ English Life Table.” 27
years is shown to differ very little from that of the general po-
pulation at the same interval of age. If the fact is in accord-
ance with the observation, the result may be ascribed to the free
interchange of town and country population at this interval of
age. ‘There commonly occurs at this interval of age a great in-
flux of population into the large towns from the surrounding
country. ecscke 913 202
sands ...
TaBLeE LV.—Annual Mortality per cent., according to age, of the total
Male Population of England during the 17 years "1838- 54, according to
observation, and according to the “ English ‘Life Table ” intended to re-
present the result of such “obs
ervation.
Edmonds’s| Observed
|
Observed | English
Interval “* Mean rate,
of age. |Mortality’’} 7 years
(1832). | (1838-44).
0- 5 6:70 707
5-10 we) 93
10-15 ‘69 ‘00
15-25 ‘S1 80
25-35 1-08 AY
30-45 1:45 1:25
45-55 1-95 1:78
55-65 3°33 3:14
659-75 6-99 6:61
79-85 14:31 14:39
85-95 28°17 29°65
All ages...| 255 | 297 |
rate, Life ‘Table
17 years for 17
(1838-54). years.
7°25 701
292 96
52 30
82 79
1-00 1:00
1:28 1:29
1:85 1:90
3°18 324
6°69 6:58
14:76 13°74
30°14 26:20
2°33 2°50
Difference _Propor-
or error. itional error
per cent.
= 007 8-5
— 1:02 74
—3-94 | 13°]
ror iY aa eae |
to Age, and the “ English Life Table.” 33
TaBLEe V.—Showing for quinquennial intervals of age, above 15 years, for
the total Male Population of England, the discrepancies between the
rates of mortality observed and the rates exhibited by the ‘‘ English Life
Table,” published in 1864.
Sweden, |Edmonds’s} Observed} Probable :
nest Males. ee ean. rate, ane feel Difference ae
ry ae, cea | DASE | FER | formate: | 7% [Der cent
percent. | percent. | percent. | percent. | percent.
15-20 68 795 71 73 ‘63 — ‘10 13:7
20-25 ‘90 87 “92 “94 87 — 07 74
25-30 1:06 1:00 98 1-01 96 — ‘05 5:0
30-35 1:17 1:16 97 1:00 1:06 + :06 6:0
35-40 1:26 1°35 1:26 1:29 1:20 — 09 7:0
40-45 1:60 1:56 1:25 1:28 1-40 + :-]2 9:4
45-50 1:92 181 1-73 1:80 1-68 — 12 67
50-55 2°40 2:10 1:84 1:91 2:14 + °23 12:0
55-60 3°00 2-74 2:97 3°01 2°77 — ‘24 8:0
60-65 4:39 4-02 3°32 3°36 3°78 + 42 12°5
65-70 6°63 9°88 5:97 6:05 5°47 — 58 9-6
70-75 9:28 8:58 741 7°49 8:12 + ‘63 8:4
75-80 13:25 12°50 12°71 12°87 12:00 — $7 6:8
80-85 18°64 18°16 17-53 17-75 17:34 — Al 2:3
85-90 24:67 26°23 28:33 28°55 24:46 — 4:09 14:3
4:7
90-95 33°52 37°61 35°51 35°79 33°67 | —2-12
TasuLe VI.—Proportional numbers Dying at each of nine intervals of age
below 12 years, relatively to 1000 Survivors to that age, according to
the Carlisle Table of Heysham and Milne, according to the ‘‘ English
Life Table,” and according to each of two theoretical Tables of Mor-
tality.
Heysham Edmonds’s English Life | Edmonds’s
Interval of age. and Milne. "Village Table. Males} formula of
st as ii fas (1864). 1866.
0 to 1 month. 83 20 FTf 25
1 ,, 3 months. 38 37 46 44
ery Gilt 5 40 50 46 53
Gipea Fb 80 $2 71 73
1 ,, 2 years 107 114 78 84
re A 122 118 67 74
Ate Gt 1: 50 50 34 33
Ge | ek 58 29 28 29 24
OE BE oc ll 15 17 17
Total deaths under
MARVEAES) ncccees oe } ae oe aD acd
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88. No, 252. July 1869, D
[sieat “
IV. Fundamental Principles of Molecular Physics. Reply to
Professor Bayma. By Professor W. A. Norton.
To the Editors of the Philosophical Magazine and Journal.
GENTLEMEN,
HE paper by Professor Bayma, entitled “ Fundamental
Principles of Molecular Physics,’ published in recent
Numbers of the Philosophical Magazine, is obviously of a cha-
racter to demand some answer at my hands. In replying to it
I do not propose to take up in detail, and in the order in which
they occur, all the points made by the learned author, nor strive
to make good all the positions before taken in my reply to his eri-
ticisms on my ‘ Memoir on Molecular Physics.’ My aim will
be to present the important points on which we are at issue in
what appears to me to be their true attitude, im such order as
may best conduce toa clear understanding of the whole subject,
alluding occasionally to such side issues as may demand atten-
tion. The cause of truth will apparently be best subserved in
this way ; and this is of far more importance than that my ac-
curacy and consistency should be formally justified by defend-
ing anew every position I have taken. Whether any important
position, either taken in my original paper or in my reply to
Professor Bayma’s criticisms, has been effectually assailed or
not, there will be a fair opportunity of judging when the whole
ground shall have been gone over.
By way of introduction to a general view of the case, I will
first remark that I did not mean to convey the idea, in what
Professor Bayma calls my first proposition, that molecular
science is ‘‘ without established principles,” is a “pure heap of
hypotheses.” I had no thought of implying that I did not re-
gard the existence of matter, with its fundamental properties of
inertia, &c., the operation of forces of attraction and repulsion
in nature, and other kindred principles, as established truths ;
and it is surprising that such an intimation should have been
thrown out by my critic, who, with all his unquestionable acute-
ness, is, | doubt not, animated by a sincere desire to deal justly
and with entire fairness. I meant, and could reasonably be
supposed to mean, no more than that every new theory of mole-
cular physics must of necessity znvolve one or more hypotheses
that “ have been rendered more or less probable, either by in-
duction from observations or @ prior? reasonings,” and to be
tested by a comparison of the deductions from the theory with
facts, and therefore that its foundation is essentially hypotheti-
cal—just as it is affirmed that the strength of a structure is the
strength of its weakest part. The doctrine is, in other words,
that a new theory of molecular physics must, when first pro-
Prof. W. A. Norton on Molecular Physics. 35
pounded, occupy precisely the same hypothetical position that
all former physical theories have at first done—as that of uni-
versal gravitation, the undulatory theory of light, &c. It is by
triumphantly withstanding all possible tests that these and other
theories have come to be admitted among the established truths
of physical science. It is in this way alone that physical science
has hitherto made all its great advances. In no instance has a
physical theory sprung into existence, Minerva-like, in full
armed panoply, the complete full-grown impersonation of wis-
dom and truth.
It does not follow, then, as our author intimates, because
such theories have had, and as I conceive must continue in
each new instance to have, more or less of a hypothetical foun-
dation, that no physical theory can lead to established truths.
The deductions from it have, it is true, no higher certainty, as
mere deductions, than the fundamental induction from which
they are derived; but every legitimate deduction that accords
with known facts, furnishes thereby a new confirmation of the
essential truth of the theory. It gains assurance of strength by
its victories, and, when crowned with years of triumph, is worthy
of all honour, despite its humble origin.
Professor Bayma conceives that the time has arrived when a
theory of molecular physics can be securely erected upon a few
philosophical principles which may be regarded as established
truths, and that the legitimate deductions from the theory will
have the same character of certainty. If this claim could be
admitted, I should be far from desirmg to put a single straw in
the way of his success, and would gladly recognize the “ eternal
verities ” evolved from his philosophy. Nor would there be of
necessity any conflict between us; for in proportion to the
strength of my confidence in the essential truth of my own
theory of the modes of evolution of phenomena, would be the
. strength of my conviction that his theory must embrace my own
generalizations within its comprehensive grasp, though placing
them in a new attitude and on a deeper foundation. But I can-
not but entertain a decided conviction that our author’s claim,
that his legitimate theoretical deductions are positive certain-
ties, rests on fallacious grounds. It implies that his fundamental
principles, whether formally expressed or implied, are all either
universally admitted truths, or truths which he has himself de-
monstrated. Now certain of these principles do not, in the na-
ture of things, admit of positive proof. They cannot have any
other foundation than certain conceptions with regard to matter
or active powers which can only be regarded as mere assump-
tions. For example, it is laid down as a fundamental principle
that matter in its ultimate analysis is made up of absolute
D2
36 Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental
points separated by finite distances, every one of which acts
upon every other pomt, and hence that there cau be no such thing
in Nature as an atom that has continuous extension. Now
this principle is no inevitable deduction from recognized facts ;
for the only certain knowledge furnished by the entire range
of physical science with regard to the so-called atoms, is that
they have certain properties and active powers. ‘The essential
origin and mode of evolution of these properties and powers must
for ever remain an impenetrable mystery. It may be confidently
asserted that few links of the mystic chain that binds each
ultimate atom to the throne of the Creator will ever be certainly
discerned. We may indeed recognize that the so-called “ che-
mical atoms” are really complex in their constitution, and
should accordingly be termed “primitive molecules,” as both
Professor Bayma and myself maintain, and frame hypotheses as
to the nature of their physical constitution and the immediate
origin of the forces they exert, suggested by physical phenomena,
and to be tested by comparing the deductions from them with
facts ; but the elements, or primary atoms, of which they are
composed, what are they? Are these of necessity mere points,
mere mathematical centres of force? Is it not absurd to sup-
pose that when we can know nothing of the essential nature
and origin of the primary powers, or activities, of these atoms,
anything can be predicated with certaimty with regard to their
size and the question of their continuity or non-continuity, and
to claim that a certain conception formed of their geometrical
character is not an assumption, not an hypothesis, but an absolute
verity. Our author’s ‘ demonstration,” that an atom having
continuous extension is an impossibility, rests upon the assump-
tion that if an atom be conceived to be continuous, each point
of it must act upon every other point in the same manner and
in the same degree at equal distances. Now in our absolute
ignorance of the manner in which force and matter are linked
together, how can we be sure that this is an imevitable conclu-
sion. It is im fact a mere inference from the assumption that
force may be evolved from a mathematical point, and take effect
upon another mathematical point which is the centre of a similar
activity. If this be a truth, the knowledge of it can be gained
from inspiration alone.
Let us examine it a little from a philosophical point of view,
somewhat different from that which our author occupies. The
principle of activity cannot subsist in a mere mathematical point,
for activity implies a something to act, and a mathematical pomt
is nothing but position. Also a mathematical point cannot be
acted upon, for an activity exerted implies something having
receptivity, and a mathematical point can have no such pro-
Principles of Molecular Physics. 37
perty, since it is nothing but position. If it be urged in reply
that the points supposed are not mere mathematical points, but
also centres of force, the answer is, if the possibility of mere cen-
tres of emanation of force be admitted, still to suppose that one
centre of force acts upon another is to suppose that one force
acts directly upon another force, or that the principle of acti-
vity acts upon itself. Again, mobility cannot be predicated of a
point, since a force cannot impart motion to nothing, nor to an-
other force or collection of forces ina point. This reasoning
may not be deemed conclusive ; but the real question here is, not
whether it is conclusive or not, but whether it is not as much
entitled to be called so as the “demonstration” we find on
page 28 of the ‘ Molecular Mechanics,’ that ‘the hypothesis
that bodies are made up of particles materially continuous leads
to an absolute impossibility of communication of motion,” or as
the demonstration on page 30, that ‘matter cannot be conti-
nuous.”
If it should be urged that we cannot conceive of an atom of
which every point does not possess the same activity as every
other point, or that the entire space occupied by an atom should
alone determine the definite power which it exerts outwardly and
receives, it is equally impossible to conceive of mere points en-
dued with all the essential properties and powers that belong to
matter (these powers differimg in intensity and kind, although
belonging to mere points), resisting change of place with vary-
ing degrees of inertia, and retaining the same activities as they
shift their position from one point of space to another. We may
as well frankly admit that in all such attempts to reach true
conceptions we are vainly striving to sound the fathomless depths
of the unknown.
Another of Professor Bayma’s fundamental principles is, that
simple elements act at all distances according to the inverse ratio
of the squares of the distance. This principle may be admitted
as the law of elementary action if we regard such action as a pro-
pagated emanation ; and it may be adopted as an hypothesis if
we conceive, with Professor Bayma, that such action is instanta-
neous at all distances; but he undertakes to demonstrate its
truth by both ‘‘ metaphysical and mathematical reasoning.” The
demonstration, whatever may be said of the metaphysics, is open
to this fatal objection—that it involves the conception that gra-
vitation and molecular attraction are but the same elementary forces
operating at different distances. To show that this cannot be true,
let us suppose a primitive molecule posited at the distance (d)
from a certain point of the earth’s surface, at which the attrac-
tion of adhesion becomes sensible; and let us conceive the
earth’s surface to be perfectly smooth and spherical. Now New-
38 Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental
ton has shown that if the law of elementary action be that of the
inverse squares, the attraction of such a homogeneous sphere for
an element exterior to it is the same as if the whole mass were
concentrated at the centre, The demonstration involves the
supposition that equal portions, however small, of each spherical
layer are occupied by equal quantities of matter. The principle
demonstrated holds good for every distance of the element at-
tracted from the surface—except that at very minute distances,
not many times greater than the distance between two contiguous
molecules of the earth’s mass, it may happen that two lines di-
verging from the element in question under a small angle will
not actually contain within them any matter on the immediately
contiguous portion of the earth’s surface, and as a consequence
the entire attraction of the first spherical layer would be repre-
sented by that of its mass concentrated at a pomt slightly more
remote than the centre. The result would then be that, in the
case supposed, the entire attraction exerted by the earth would
be slightly less than the Newtonian deduction. It follows,
therefore, that if the element at the supposed minute distance
(d) from the earth’s surface were to approach the surface, the
entire attraction it would experience would not be sensibly
greater, would in fact be less than at the distance (d); whereas
the attraction of adhesion that would actually come into play is
immensely greater than the simple force of gravity near the sur-
face. We thus demonstrate that the attraction of gravitation can-
not be the force of molecular attraction operating at greater dis-
tances, either as a whole or in its elements; and accordingly
show that the law of inverse squares proved for gravitation can-
aot be extended inferentially, or by any process of reasoning, to
the force of elementary attraction at minute distances.
The same important conclusion may be reached more directly
in another way. ‘The enormous excess of the attraction of adhe-
sion or of cohesion at distances a little greater than the distance
between contiguous molecules, over the force of gravity at the
distance (d) above specified, can only be attributed, from Pro-
fessor Bayma’s point of view, to a greatly increased attraction of
the molecules lying at or near the earth’s surface. Now the
number of separate lines that can be drawn from the element
attracted through attractive elements so situated is incalculably
small, we may say insensibly small, in comparison with the num-
ber that can be drawn through more remote elements which by
their united action determine the force of gravity ; and hence the
attraction of adhesion should be incaleulably small in comparison
with the force of gravity.
It may here be incidentally remarked that, unless the position
just taken can be proved to be untenable, it must be admitted
Principles of Molecular Physics. 39
that Professor Bayma’s theory not only fails to include the known
force of gravitation, but actually excludes it as something alto-
gether impossible—since his supposed or “ proved” molecular
actions are all that possibly exist in accordance with his funda-
mental principles, and these, as we have just seen, do not include
the actual force of gravity, but have, as their necessary concomi-
tant, an attractive action at considerable distances vastly greater
than the actual attraction. Or, if he prefers the other horn of
the dilemma and admits the actual force of gravitation, we are
then conducted to the inevitable inference that his theory makes
no adequate provision for the known molecular attraction, since
the molecular attraction deduced from the force of gravity 1s of an
exceedingly smail intensity in comparison with the attractive
action known to exist.
The same inference may be extended to the force molecular
repulsion, since the actual repulsion is in equilibrium with the
attraction at ordinary molecular distances; and hence the theo-
retical repulsion must have an intensity correspondent to that of
the theoretical attraction, and therefore be exceedingly small as
compared with the actual repulsion. In fact, if I mistake not,
the objection here urged saps the foundation of the whole theory
developed and maintained with such signal ability by Professor
Bayma in his ‘ Molecular Mechanics.’ ‘To comprehend the full
force of this objection, it should be borne in mind that our
author maintains that all material elements are mere points, and
are either attractive under all circumstances or repulsive under all
circumstances,—that the action of each element takes effect upon
all other elements according to the law of the inverse squares, and
without the least interception by intervening elements,—and
that these direct actions of the two classes of elements, attractive
and repulsive, are the sole determining’ cause of all material phe-
nomena. It should be added that each “ primitive molecule”
is conceived to consist of a central attractive portion, and an ex-
terior repulsive envelope (each of these being composed of ele-
ments separated by finite distances)—and that the “ molecular
radi” are regarded as “infinitesimal quantities,” in comparison
with the distance between contiguous molecules at which their
effective attraction manifests itself.
We find in the ‘ Molecular Mechanics’ the following funda-
mental propositions: ‘one and the same element A cannot
attract the element B and repel another element C when B and
C are equally distant from A ;” and “ one and the same element
of matter cannot be attractive for one distance and repulsive for
another.” These are not direct inferences from physical facts,
since we recognize among molecular actions precisely the differ-
ences which it is here stated cannot have place in the activities
40 Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental
exerted by the ultimate elements. But the attempt is made to
establish them by metaphysical reasoning, of which it may be
said that it involves certain conceptions of the “ principle of ac-~
tivity,” “nature,” and “ determinations ” of elements, designated
as “substance,” though they are nothing but mathematical
points, which are neither self-evident truths nor have any cha-
racter of certainty, but are mere shadows dimly discerned in that
metaphysical region which the finite mind strives in vain to enter.
The most that can be conceded is that they have a certain air of
probability, and may reasonably be adopted by our author as hy-
potheses to be ultimately substantiated or overthrown by the
appeal to facts.
It will be apparent from what has been stated that an impor-
tant difference obtains in the nature of the foundations on which
Professor Bayma’s theory and my own have heen erected, in the
methods of construction employed, and in the claims asserted
with reference to the true character of the results achieved. The.
theory developed in my memoir on Molecular Physics rests upon
the most comprehensive generalizations and principles to which
the progress of physical science has conducted, and in no degree
upon metaphysical conceptions or reasonings with respect to the
nature of matter, the size of atoms, the possibilities or impossibili-
ties of certain inherent material actions, &c. On the other hand,
in the groundwork of Professor Bayma’s theory are included, as
we have seen, certain conceptions and reasonings of this character
which I maintain are fundamentally hypothetical. Professor
Bayma has proceeded on the philosophical and what he deems
the strictly scientific plan of construction, while I have restricted
myself to the simple deduction of molecular forces and pheno-
mena. He claims that his fundamental principles are either
universally admitted or demonstrated truths, and that his legiti-
mate deductions are to be received as established truths. I do
not venture to prefer any higher claim than that the fundamental
principles I have adopted are universally admitted (with the
sngle exception of the hypothesis of an electric fluid or ether ;
an this is the only distinct fundamental conception which the
vrocess of inductive research has evolved from electric pheno-
mena), and that the recognized molecular forces and the various
classes of physical phenomena can be legitimately deduced from
the few fundamental postulates laid down without the aid of new
hypotheses. In this I claim to have pursued the ordinary me-
thod of physical speculation, and the only one which has hitherto
achieved any substantial success. Professor Bayma virtually
admits (Phil. Mag. March 1869, p. 183) that his method 1s ra-
dically different from the methods of research hitherto employed
by physicists. This, which he esteems its most excellent feature,
Principles of Molecular Physics. 41
and as constituting an especial claim to favourable regard, will
be likely to prove its sufficient condemnation.
The entirely different stand-point occupied by Professor Bayma
from that which I have taken, and the consequent liability he
has incurred of misunderstanding my views, is the occasion of
much of the criticism he has indulged in. Thus he assails from
all points, and in a variety of modes, what he regards as one of
my strongholds, viz. that a primary atom has continuous exten-
sion and is spherical in form. Now, as a matter of fact, in fra-
ming my theory I took scarcely any thought of the question of
the continuity of matter in a primary atom. Conceiving the real
constitution of the atom to be incapable of detection, I simply
adopted the ordinary conception of it, recognizing in it the em-
bodiment of three essential truths, viz. (1) that the ultimate
element, called,an atom, is incapable of division by either me-
chanical or chemical means, (2) that it acts with equal energy in
all directions, (3) that its surface opposes a repulsive resistance
to any other atoms that may be urged toward it by the attraction
of the whole atom. ‘These three features cannot be conceived to
belong to a single point, but may either to a continuous material
sphere, or to a spherical collection of material points. It mat-
ters not, from my theoretical stand-point, which of these two
views be taken.
But I have since been led (see my answer to Professor Bayma’s
criticisms in the Philosophical Magazine, February 1869, p. 106)
to adopt the fundamental conception that the effective attraction
of a primary atom of ordinary matter for the luminiferous ether
probably consists in a diminished repulsion. Upon this view
the question of the size and constitution of primary atoms can
have no value in physical science, and may be left for the enter-
tainment of those who have a predilection for metaphysical spe-
culations.
Before taking up briefly some of the specific points discussed
in Professor Bayma’s paper, it may be well to say a word in reply
to his affirmation that ‘‘ hypothesis begins only where real science
ends.” I would ask our learned author if real science had come
to an end when Newton conceived the hypothesis of universal
gravitation and followed it out to its legitimate consequences—
or when Huyghens imagined the existence of luminiferous ether
waves, and so laid the foundation of the undulatory theory of
light.
Yale College, U.S.,
June 1, 1869.
[To be continued. |
Pude> |
V. Note on the Hydrodynamical Theory of Magnetism.
By Professor Cuatuis, M.A., F.R.S., F.R.A.S.*
the Numbers of the Philosophical Magazine for January
and February 1861 I proposed a theory of magnetism
founded on hydrodynamical principles, which is also reproduced,
with modifications and additions, in my work ‘ On the Principles
of Mathematics and Physics,’ recently published. It has since
occurred to me that an objection might be raised against the
theory because it does not account for the variation of magnetic
action according to the law of the inverse square, which seems to
be established by Gauss’s process for determining the absolute
measure of the intensity of terrestrial magnetism. The purpose
of this Note is to meet this objection.
Whatever may be thought of Gauss’s fundamental hypotheses
of two fluids acting attractively and repulsively under certain
conditions according to the law of the inverse square, and of the
dependence of sensible magnetic action on the “separation” of
_ these fluids, it is certain from the numerical results he has ob-
tained that his investigations must have a real physical basis,
A true theory of magnetism ought to be capable of indicating
what that basis 1s, and how far the hypotheses are expressions of
facts, or are simply empirical. I proceed to try the hydrodyna-
mical theory by this test.
It will be necessary, first, to state the leading principles of
this theory. All visible and tangible substances are supposed
to consist of inert spherical atoms of constant form and magni-
tude, retained in positions of equilibrium by the resultant actions
of the forces which I have named atomic repulsion and mole-
cular attraction. The laws of these forces admit of being ma-
thematically deduced from the hypothesis of a universal and con-
tinuous ether, supposed to press proportionally to its density,
and from the combination of its action with the reaction of the
atoms due to their constancy of form. The space occupied by
atoms is assumed to be very small compared to the intervening
spaces, even for substances of yreat density. This assumption
1s justified by an inference from the undulatory theory of light,
as is shown in page 410 of the above-mentioned work.
These hypotheses being understood, we may next consider
what will take place when a steady stream of the ether enters
into a substance atomically constituted in the manner above
stated. For the sake of precision it will be supposed that the
body has the form of a cylinder the diameter of which is small
compared to the length of the axis, and that the direction of the
axis coincides with that of the stream. Then from the hydro-
* Communicated by the Author.
On the Hydrodynamical Theory of Magnetism. 43
dynamics of steady motion it follows that the fluid will have
ereater velocity and less density within the cylinder than with-
out, simply because of the contraction of channel by the occupa-
tion of space by the atoms. There will be confluence of the
lines of motion towards the extremity at which the stream enters,
and equal divergence of the lines of motion from the extremity
out of which it issues. These lines, as well as the velocity and
density along them, will be symmetrically disposed about the
axis of the cylinder prolonged in both directions, and also with
respect to a plane transverse to the axis through its middle
point. Under these circumstances there is no acceleration of
the mean current, the quantity of fluid which crosses any unli-
mited plane transverse to the axis being the same as if the stream
had not been interrupted by the cylinder.
The above description of the courses of the lines of motion
applies to any solid cylinder whether or not it be magnetic. If
it is not magnetized, but susceptible of magnetism, the modifi-
cation which the original stream undergoes by passage through
the cylinder is proper for magnetizingit. For it is evident that,
by reason of the variation of the density of the ether from point
to point, the atoms of the cylinder, especially those at and near
its extremities, will be caused to vibrate; and it appears from
experiment that the magnetizing of a substance 1s effected when-
ever a magnetic stream traverses it while its particles are in a
state of vibration. This is remarkably indicated by the well-
known experiment in which a plate of iron, placed with its faces
in the direction of magnetic dip, is magnetized by being repeat-
edly struck with a hammer. Possibly the permanent magnetism
of the loadstone may have been gradually induced by the etherial
streams which relatively pass through it in consequence of the
earth’s motion in space.
Supposing that the cylinder, either by the process above men-
tioned, or by some other, has been magnetized, let us inquire
what influence this circumstance will have on the stream which
traverses it. But it is first necessary to define the magnetized
state. According to the theory of magnetism I long since pro-
posed, this state depends solely on a small and regular increment
of atomic density from one end to the other of the cylinder, the
equilibrium of the atoms being maintained by the equality, at
each point, of the atomic repulsion towards the rarer part, and
the molecular attraction towards the denser part. Conceive now
the ztherial stream to traverse the cylinder in any direction. At
exit and entrance there will be the same cause of disturbance of
the lines of motion as in the previous case of a cylinder of uni-
form density ; and, besides, the gradation of density will have
the effect of generating new streams, which for distinction I shall
44 Prof. Challis on the Hydrodynamical
call secondary streams. The particular mode of generation of
these streams is next to be considered.
The incident stream being supposed to have originally the
same velocity and density at all points of any section transverse
to its direction, it follows, by the laws of steady motion, that
after entrance into the cylinder its resulting mean velocity will
be greater and mean density less, the greater the atomic density.
This is an immediate consequence of the contraction of channel
by the atoms. Hence the fluid will be impressed at all points in
the interior of the cylinder by a constant accelerative force acting
in the direction from the rarer towards the denser end. The
consequent effective accelerative force will, by reason of the
inertia of the fiuid, accelerate a given particle towards a trans-
verse plane through the middle point of the cylinder, and equally
retard it after it has passed that plane. Thus there will be a
maximum of velocity at the points where the plane is cut trans-
versely by the lines of motion. Also as there can be no transfer
of the whole fluid mass, supposed to be of unlimited extent, by
means of an accelerative force impressed on a limited portion of
it, there will necessarily be return currents at different distances
from the cylinder, such that the lines of motion of these secon-
dary currents will be reentermg. The courses of these lines will
be symmetrical with respect to the axis and the above-mentioned
transverse plane, and will cross this plane outside the cylinder at
right angles. Such is the general character of the secondary
streams to which the theory attributes-the phenomena of the
magnet.
It will be seen that the intensity of the secondary stream is the
same whatever be the direction of the primary, so long as the
latter is of given intensity. Also it must be admitted that the
secondary stream, as generated by the interior gradation of den-
sity of a magnetized body, is dynamically far more effective than
that modification of the primary stream which was above de-
scribed as being produced whether or not the body be magne-
tized; for otherwise magnetic streams would be perceptible in
the case of a non-magnetized body. The great intensity of the
secondary streams is to be attributed to the efficacy of the im-
pressed accelerative forces by which they are generated, the
equation p=a*p showing that, on account of the great magni-
tude of a, the extremely small variation of p due to the grada-
tion of density may cause a large change of p. In the subse-
quent reasoning the above-mentioned small modification of the
primary stream is left out of account. ni
It may be supposed that the whole mass of the fluid in which
the secondary streams are generated partakes of the primary
motion. In that case, if the primary velocity were impressed in
Theory of Magnetism. 45
the opposite direction both on the fluid and the cylinder, the
secondary streams would be unaffected, the fluid would be re-
duced to rest, and the cylinder would be made to move in it in a
given direction with a given velocity. This is the case of nature,
a magnetized body being carried through space by the earth’s
motion, and its magnetism being the result of the generation of
secondary streams by the relative motion of the ether and by
the interior gradation of density. It is, however, to be observed
that the motion which the earth has in common with the solar
system, the motion in its orbit, and the rotation about its axis,
produce independent magnetic effects, and that the total magne-
tism is the swm of the magnetisms which these motions would
produce separately. The reasons for this statement are that the
resultant of these motions is not a uniform motion in a fixed di-
rection, and, as there will be occasion to show subsequently, the
secondary motions which they would generate singly are such
steady motions as can coezist.
Reverting now to the case of the magnetic streams of the cy-
lindrical magnet, which may be conceived to have a fixed position
im space, let C be the middle point of the axis, and let the den-
sity increase from the end A to the end B, so that the course of
the secondary streain is in the direction from A towards B. Ac-
cording to hydrodynamical principles, there can be, on the whole,
no transfer of fluid across any plane perpendicular to the direc-
tion of the axis, the motions of the fluid within and outside the
cylinder being both taken into account. In calculating the ve-
locity of the fluid at any point, the effect of the occupation of
space by the atoms will be considered only so far as it produces
secondary streams by the gradation of density.
To show how the above-mentioned condition is fulfilled is the
object of the following argument. Conceive the axis to be cut
perpendicularly by a plane at the distance x from C in the direc-
tion towards B, and draw any straight line from C intersecting
the plane in P. Let CP=r, the angle PCB=90, and, y being
an unknown function of x, let y?+2?=R?. Since the motion
of the fluid is wholly in planes passing through the axis, the
velocity at P may be resolved into U along CP and W perpen-
dicular to this line. It will now be assumed that for any point
in the transverse plane, beyond the distance y from the axis,
VRP VR
ee cos?, W=— 5,3
The forms of these expressions have been adopted from a consi-
deration of the circumstances of the motion when the fluid is
impelled by a moving sphere, in which case, as is known, both V
and KR are constant, and the expressions apply to all points of
sin 0.
ye
46 Prof. Challis on the Hydrodynamical
the fluid. We have next to calculate the quantity of fluid which,
according to these values of U and W, passes at any instant a given
transverse plane.
These velocities, resolved parallel to CB, are respectively
R3 Vina
3 cos? @ and — 9,8 sin? @, so that the whole resolved velocity
in that direction is
3
(8 cos*0—1).
Hence the quantity of fluid which passes the part of the plane
exterior to the circle of radius y in the small time 6¢ is
3
8t | Qarr sin 6. ee cos? 9—1)d.rsin 0,
the integral being taken from 7 = R to r = infinity. Since
r cos 0=z, this integral is equal to
Q
nvresr | & = a1)
fie is
which taken between the above limits is
x?
—nVR*(1— $5) 6
If the plane intersect the axisof the cylinder produced, at any point
beyond either A or B, we must suppose that y=0, or that R?=2*.
Since in this case the integral vanishes, there is no permanent
transfer of fluid across such planes, with respect to which, there-
fore, the required condition is fulfilled. Thus the assumed ex-
pressions for U and W are so far justified.
In other cases, by putting for R? the value y?+ 2°, the integral
becomes —7Vy*. Now let f(z) be the mean velocity with which
the fluid within the distance y crosses the same transverse plane
in the direction from A towards B, then the whole quantity
that passes that plane in the time 6¢ is
uf (x) y?st—7Vy70t.
Since by the principle already enunciated this quantity is zero,
it follows that f(x) =V.
Hence, by having regard to the above signification of f(z), and
to the circumstance that the lines of motion converge towards
the parts about A and diverge from those about B, it is clear
that the velocity V diminishes with the distance from C accord-
ing to some unknown law. In default of an exact a priori in-
vestigation of this law, I shall now make the provisional suppo-
sition that V varies inversely as R%, or that VR® is equal to a
Theory of Magnetism. A7
constant ~. Then we shall have, at any point exterior to the
circle of radius y,
Wie = cos 0, W=— 53 sin 0.
Consequently, at points for which 6=0 and @=z, W=0 and
U= 5 reckoned in the direction from A towards B; and at
points in the plane through C transverse to the axis, U=0 and
Ww=— so Hence at the same distance r, the backward motion
across that plane parallel to the axis is half the forward motion
along the axis; and each of these velocities varies as the cube of
the distance from C.
Since y is an unknown disposable quantity, the above suppo-
sition that VR°, or V(y?+ 2?) 2 is equal to a constant, is not ille-
gitimate. The function that y is of will depend on the form
of the magnet. In the case of a cylindrical magnet y will not
generally differ much from the radius. It is also to be remarked
that the above value of U for a point on the axis, and that of W
for a point in the transverse plane, are to be considered as ap-
proximative functions of 7, The more complete values would pro-
bably be of the form
Oe Os =- 44( -*)
= 5(1 =) W= 973 i pele
The motion in these magnetic streams is an instance of steady
motion for which udx+vdy+wdz may be assumed to be an
exact differential. This may be maintained on the principle that,
after the impulse is given to the fluid within the magnet in the
direction of its axis, the consequent curved courses of the lines
of motion are determined solely by the mutual action of the parts
of the fluid. Also there may be reason to conclude that for flud
of unlimited extent that expression is an exact differential in any
case in which the lines of motion may be cut by surfaces of con-
tinuous curvature—that is, whenever the motion is proper to a
fluid, and ‘not such as a fluid is capable of when it may be con-
ceived to consist of parts that are solid. Leaving, however, this
point for future consideration, I shall now assume, for the rea-
son given above, that udv+vdy+wdz is an exact differential
for magnetic streams. In that case, as is known, the relation
between the density p, and velocity V, for the streams of a given
magnet is expressed by the equation
Mat
Pi =Poe 2;
48 Prof. Challis on the Hydrodynamical
Po being the density where the fluid is undisturbed. So for an-
other set of streams
Vo2
P2= Poe 2”.
But the steady motions to which these formule apply may coewist.
(This proposition I have proved in the Philosophical Magazine
for February 1861, and in the ‘ Principles of Mathematics,’
p- 242.) Consequently the differential
(uy +Ug) da + (v, +0,)dy + (w, + w,) dz
applies to the steady motion compounded of the two sets, and is
plainly an exact differential. Hence if p! be the resulting den-
sity and V! the resulting velocity, we have
v2
p'= poe 2.
Having determined the character of the magnetic streams of a
cylindrical magnet, and the laws of the composition of such
streams, we are prepared to investigate the mechanical action of
one cylindrical magnet on another. I shall confine myself to the
two instances of the disturbance of a moveable magnet by a fixed
one, relative to which Gauss has obtained numerical determina-
tions. (See Gauss’s ‘ Absolute Measure of the Intensity of Ter-
restrial Magnetism,’ Gottingen, 1833; andthe Annales de Chimie
et de Physique, vol. lv. pp.56 & 57.) In these experiments the
magnets were about a foot long, and the different distances be-
tween their middle points varied from four feet to thirteen feet.
In both sets the moveable needle when undisturbed was in the
plane of the magnetic meridian, the end I have called A being
northward, and the end B southward. Also both needles were
horizontal with their axes in the same plane.
In the jirst set of experiments the axis of the fixed needle was
perpendicular to the plane of the magnetic meridian, and pointed
to the middle of the moveable needle. Let us take the case of
the experiments made when the fixed needle was on the east side
of the moveable one, and its end B (from which the current
flows) was turned towards the latter. There were three other
cases of relative positions of the magnets; but this one will suf-
fice for my purpose. We have next to determine the action of
the composite streams on the individual atoms of the moveable
needle, so far as such action tends to move the needle as a whole
about a vertical axis. ‘The diameter of each needle is supposed
to be small compared with its length.
At the position of any atom of the moveable needle let the
velocity of the fluid due to the fixed needle be resolved into uw,
parallel to the axis of the former, v, perpendicular to this axis,
and w, in the vertical direction; and let 22, vo, We be the analo-
Theory of Magnetism. 49
gous resolved velocities due to the moveable needle. Then, p’
and V' being the density and velocity at that position, by what
is shown above
v2
_va yi
pP'=Ppoe 27 = po( 1 _ =) nearly,
and
/
DE =F (uy tug)? + (0, +05)? + (wy + w,)?}-
Po 2a
Now the velocity and density being functions of space only, it
is easy to see that the accelerative action on any atom must have
a constant ratio to the acceleration of the fluid where the atom
is situated. I have found that this ratio is dependent of the
magnitude of the atom (Principles of Mathematics, p.315). As
the moveable needle is capable of motion only about a vertical
. axis through its middle point, we are concerned exclusively with
QT!
a force proportional to — y being the distance from the
Poly
axis. The stream of the fixed needle is symmetrical with respect
to a vertical plane through its axis, and flows nearly perpendi-
cularly to the axis of the moveable needle, so that wv, is very small
at the positions of all its atoms. A little consideration of the
courses of the streams will suffice for perceiving that neither the
forces proportional to (w, + uv) os -- 7) nor those proportional
to (w,+ we) ae ia ; produce any momentum of rotation of
the needle. Consequently the motion of rotation wholly depends
on the forces proportional to
dv, |
(v, + U9) dy ok dy .
Now the forces 0», evidently produce equal and opposite
nomenta on the north and south arms of the needle; the same
is the case with the forces yee because the values of v, are
equal with opposite signs at equal distances on the opposite sides
of the centre of motion. Also the forces v, = are mutually de-
structive, because v, at any distance from the centre of motion
has equal positive and negative values on the opposite sides of
the axis. There remains, therefore, only the momentum due to
the forces v, ie These will clearly tend to produce rotation,
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 252. July 1869. 1D)
20 On the Hydrodynamical Theory of Magnetism.
because, while v, retains the same sign, v, has equal values with
opposite signs for the two arms.
According to the before-supposed positions of the magnets,
the stream from the fixed one will oppose the transverse part of
the stream from the moveable one on the east side of the north
arm, and conspire with it on the west side, so that the pressure,
being greater as the composite velocity is less, will be im excess
on the east side. For like reasons the pressures on the atoms
of the south arm will be in excess on their west sides. Hence
the movement of the needle will be the same as if the pole B of
the fixed needle repelled the pole B of the moveable needle and
attracted its pole A.
By this reasoning it is shown that the momentum of rotation
of the moveable magnet is proportional to the velocity v,; and
from the foregoing mathematical theory it appears that v is in-
versely proportional to D?, D being the distance between the
centres of the magnets, or, presumably, that
be h?
= D3 (i a i)
In the second set of experiments the fixed needle was placed
either to the north or to the south of the moveable one,so that °
the latter pointed to its centre, and the direction of its axis was
still perpendicular to the plane of the meridian. In these posi-
tions the stream of the fixed needle will cut at right angles the
axis of the moveable one, and its action on the latter will be very
nearly the same in kind as in the former set of experiments, but
will differ in the circumstance that the velocity at the distance
D is half the velocity in the other case at the same distance.
The more exact proportion of the momenta of rotation in the
two cases for the same value of D is presumed to be
1 ie
~ 7/2 pela alie)
ae yee or 2(1 — Meet 3) nearly.
ea?
These results agree with Gauss’s numerical determinations both
as regards the law of the inverse cube and the ratio of the mo-
menta of rotation. This ratio is shown by the experiments to
be nearly equal to 2, and to be less than this value by a greater
quantity as the distance D is less; which accords with the above
expression, if 4? be greater than h’?.
The hydrodynamical theory of magnetism has thus given intel-
ligible reasons for the facts of these experiments. The provisional
assumption that VR?= a constant, for the approximate truth of
which an antecedent reason was assigned, seems by these results
Mr. W. C. Roberts on the Expansion of Palladium. 51
to be proved to be the expression of an actual law. In Gauss’s
theory analogous results are obtained on the hypothesis of two
magnetic fluids, which are assumed to be capable of separation,
and to be such that, when separated, like fluids mutually repel,
and unlike mutually attract, according to the law of the inverse
square. But what are we to understand by the separation of
dissimilar fluids, and the dependence of mutual attractions and
repulsions on this condition? It is as hard to conceive of rea-
sons for these hypotheses as to account for the magnetic facts
proposed to be explained by them. The present theory tends to
show that there is no physical foundation for such hypotheses,
the facts admitting of explanation on the supposition that a single
fluid (the zther) acts in a manner conformable to hydrodynamical
principles. The argument contained in this communication I am
entitled, I think, to regard as confirmatory of the hydrodyna-
mical theory of magnetism.
Cambridge, May 22, 1869.
VI. Note on the Experimental Illustration of the Expansion of
Palladium attending the Formation of its Alloy with Hydroge-
num. By W. CHanpiter Roserts, F.C.S., F.G.S.*
— has recently been directed to the experimental
demonstration of the absorption of hydrogen by palladium+.
As the present writer has had the pnivilege of being con-
nected with Mr. Graham’s recent researches, he ventures to
offer a description of the special arrangements that, from some
experience, appear to him best suited to the purpose of illus-
tration.
It will be remembered that Mr. Graham finds palladium, by
the occlusion of 936 volumes of hydrogen, to sustain an increase
in its linear dimensions of 1-605 on the 100; or assuming the
expansion to be equal in all directions, the cubic expansion will
be 4-908 on the 100, equal to sixteen times the dilatation of pal-
ladium when heated from 0° C. to 100° C. A simple illustra-
tion, well adapted for lecture-experiments, consists in arranging
two fine palladium wires on the same plane, but slightly inclined
towards each other; these are placed in a cell filled with acidu-
lated water, which may be illuminated by an electric or other
lamp, and the image of the wires thrown upon a screen. The
wires are to be connected with either element of a small battery,
a commutator intervening.
* Communicated by the Author.
+ James Dewar, F.R.S.E.,“ On the Motion of a Palladium Plate during
the Formation of Graham’s Hydrogenium ;” and Poggendorff, “On the
Voltaic Deportment of Palladium :” Phil. Mag. No. 251, pp. 424 and 474.
E2
ow
02 Mr. W. C. Roberts on the Experimental Illustration
On completion of the circuit the following facts will be ob-
served: from the positive wire, gas (oxygen) is freely evolved,
while the negative wire is perfectly quiescent, the hydrogen
being for some time entirely absorbed by the metal. When the
hydrogen makes its appearance it rises from the end nearest to
the positive electrode.
On reversing the direction of the current, evolution of gas
ceases from both wires, the hydrogen being occluded by the one,
and the oxygen being consumed by the previously absorbed hy-
drogen in the other*. Attention should also be directed to the
flexure produced by the unequal absorption of gas on different
sides of the wire.
To obtain a direct demonstration of the expansion, the writer
availed himself of the deportment of a compound riband of pal-
ladium and platinum when made to form the negative electrode
of a battery decomposing acidulated water. The riband con-
sists of two strips, one of palladium, the other of platinum-foil,
300 millims. long, 3 millims. wide; these are soldered together
and coiled into a circle, the palladium being inside. If, in the
first instance, the coil be connected with the zine end of the
battery, hydrogen will be thrown on the surface of the palla-
dium, which absorbs the gas, and, by the consequent expansion
of that metal only, opens the coil, the motion being rendered vi-
sible by a light moving index.
On reversing the direction of the current, oxygen will be
thrown on the compound riband, and by its combination with
the previously absorbed hydrogen, will relax the spiral and
cause the index to move rapidly back to zero.
But the employment of an index to magnify the motion is
scarcely necessary with so rapid an angular velocity at command.
The simplest form, and at the same time the most efficient, consists
in placing as the electrodes two strips of palladium-foil varnished
on one side and coiled into spirals (each 300 millims. by 5 to 7
millims.) as indicated in the figuret. When one of the strips is
* This experiment was skown at the Meeting of the British Association
at Norwich, August 1868.
+ As the varnish soon becomes cracked and detached from the foil, it is
of the Expansion of Palladium. 53
uncoiling, the other rolls up on itself. These effects are com-
paratively slow at first; but as the molecular state of the strips
is gradually altered, the evolutions are performed through a
large sweep with singular rapidity.
The most strikimg experiment of all is afforded by the fact
that an electrodeposited film of extreme tenuity is capable of oc-
eluding hydrogen, and at the same time possesses sufficient
tenacity to produce by its expansion a very considerable amount
of motion.
A thin strip of platinum-foil, 200 millims. long by 4 millims.
wide, was coiled into a circle (like a watch-spring), the external
periphery being varnished. Upon the exposed surface a thin
film of palladium was deposited by a small battery (3 litre Bun-
sen) from a solution of about 1°6 per cent. of the chloride of
palladium, the time of exposure being six minutes. The posi-
tive pole was represented by a fine platinum wire, a very small
portion of which was immersed. A grey coherent film was thus
obtained. ‘The strip was then placed in acidulated water and
connected with the zinc end of a small battery.
In consequence of its absorption, there was no evolution of
gas from its surface; but the metal instantly uncoiled itself, the
unattached end passing through an arc of 65°.
On reversing the direction of the current, the strip as rapidly
returned to its normal position. The tenacity of the film soon
becomes impaired.
In order to give an estimate of the thickness of the film, a
sheet of platinum-foil, 20 millims. x 20 millims., having there-
fore on both sides a surface of 800 square millims., was accu-
rately weighed on a delicate assay-balance at the Mint and ex-
posed for six minutes, as in the case of the strip, to the chloride-
of-palladium solution. The foil, after washing in distilled water
and drying 7m vacuo, showed an increase in weight of 0:0009 grm.
The following calculation gives the thickness of the film ca-
pable of producing so remarkable a result.
; grm.
Weight of the palladium 0:0009 —0-0000762 cub. centim.,
Sp. gr. assumed tobe . 11°8
or ‘0762 cubic millimetre.
‘0762 —0-000095 ofa millim. thick
CIA: 62 a cucaeh 16500 |... HCl,
OY yohae Of a millimetre.
For the sake of comparison |
gold leaf =57q554 inch= 7545, millimetre.
better (before varnishing) to cover one side of the palladium strip with a
thin layer of solder, although the simplicity of the arrangement is to some
extent sacrificed.
[weal
VII. On the Polarization of Light by Air mixed with Aqueous
Vapour. By Professor HarpincEer*,
To Professor Tyndall, F_R.S.
Dormbach near Vienna,
My pear Sir, June 13, 1869.
ae late experiments and reports on the polarization of
light by cloudy matter (Proceedings of the Royal Society,
No. 108, vol. xii. pp. 223 &e., Jan. 14, 1869) have made a deep
impression on my mind.
Permit me to advert to an ancient observation of mine relating
to a subject of the kind, but under circumstances widely different,
which nevertheless I now very much should wish you may think
worthy of a glance in the development of your further inquiries.
I have observed the polarization of ight by air mixed with
watery vapour. I gave an account of it in Poggendorff’s An-
nalen for 1846, vol. xvi. pp. 738-87 (77). Abbé Moigno, hke-
wise, from Poggendorff, gave a report of it in the fourth volume
of his Répertoire d’Optique Moderne, 1850, pp. 1838 & 13839.
Both were accompanied with diagrams. In the vapour-bath, of
course, I had no optical apparatus with me; but having shortly
before been struck with the appearance of the brushes of polarized
light, or of polarization (Polarisations-biischel), I was well pre-
pared to test or to recognize polarized hght under certain circum-
stances with the naked eye, by trying whether I could not see
these brushes.
It is perhaps hardly discreet of me to demand you should be
at the trouble of searching out old volumes; so I beg you will
permit me just to translate that portion of one of my old papers
which refers to the subject.
“ Brushes of polarization observed in watery vapour.
“White bows or nebulous arches (Vebelbogen) have been ob-
served in fogs or mists, having nearly the apparent diameter of
rainbows. The light of the rainbow has been found to be pola-
rized by Biot and Sir David Brewster, conformably to the well-
known explanation by single reflection of the light of the sun for
the interior rainbow, and by double reflection for the exterior
rainbow.
‘“T had an opportunity to observe the white vapour-bows or
arches in the vapour-baths of the ‘ Sorbienbad,’ a most merito-
rious establishment, conducted by M. Marawetz in the suburb
Landstrasse in Vienna. Since my observation a new building
has been raised on the east side, so that it 1s no longer possible
there to repeat the observation.
“The sun shone bright at 7 o’clock in the morning, under a
* Communicated by Professor Tyndall.
Prof. Haidinger on the Polarization of Light by Vapour. 55
small elevation through the window into the vapour. A beau-
tiful cireular arch presented itself to the eye, the centre of which
was the shadow of the head. I endeavoured to represent it in
the diagram fig. 1, A B C D being the projection of the window
upon the wall on the opposite side of Fig. 1.
the room. ————
“The colour of the arch fisapale =
bluish white. It is slightly frmged on
both sides with a pale orange or brown-
oN
E_
ish yellow, not over bright. The ey =
space e without and the space gy within SY 2 a=
the arch is inferior in light, andofa E@@ux—<2 Se
grey, rather reddish colour. Opposite ES "Sos = c=
to the eye, the sun just grazing the eye, Wa <5 § 7 =
there appears a brighter circular spot a, WN aS
fringed at 6 with the slight yellowish = SC? ==
or reddish tint. Beginning from4, the light is distinetly polarized.
The brushes of polarization are quite visible if the eye from one
place or direction is quickly directed to another. The brushes
have a direction corresponding to the radius in the whitish arch,
and a tangential direction in the spaces within and without it.
The light of the arch appears, then, to be polarized by reflection
from the surface of the particles of vapour or water. The spaces
without and within the arch appear, therefore, to be polarized by
transmission perpendicularly to the polarization of the arch. The
bluish-white and the reddish tints may be faint mixtures of the
bluish or reddish fringes of diffraction, combined with the direct
refiection from the watery particles floating in the air.
“Tt is well known that a real rainbow may be produced on a
small scale by taking some water in the mouth and then forcibly
spouting or puffing it out reduced to the finest watery dust or
powder. I availed myself of this method to ascertain, at least
approximately, the diameter of the nebulous arch, being without
any other apparatus in a vapour-bath. The nebulous arch still
continued visible, as in fig. 2; but the first or interior rainbow
now became visible, and was situ-
ated pretty much in the central line
of the nebulous arch; the exterior
rainbow, visible only in faint traces,
appeared beyond the nebulous arch. }
The angular values of the semidia- {y=
meters being for the red of the m- WW)
terior rainbow 42° 2’, for its breadth
1°45', for the red of the outer rain-
bow 50° 58’, and its breadth 3° 10', for the distance of the two
rainbows 8° 15/, the breadth of the nebulous arch is consequently
Bigs 2:
Wy
>,
‘
‘
\
Nw
56 Prof. Haidinger on the Polarization of Light by Vapour.
equal to about 12°, its central line being nearly at the angular
distance of 41° from the centre. But I must claim for these
angular values only the character of approximations, as I could
only note the data from memory, and did not succeed in getting
another sight of the phenomenon.
“In the situation fig. 38, looking at the column of air loaded
with vapour and obliquely Fig. 3.
illuminated by the sun en-
tering through a small win-
dow, the transverse brushes
of polarization produced by
transmission were distinctly
visible at a, while from the
wet boards of the floor at b
the polarization of reflection
was as distinctly visible in
the longitudinal brushes.
“Ina manner somewhat
analogous to the preceding
observations, the tangential
or transverse brushes of po-
larization may be observed
near the sun in vapoury air,
while the sun itself is screened from the eye of the observer by
intervening objects.”
You see, my dear Sir, I have reported only the bare observa-
tion, and that only for the sake of following up the “ brushes of
polarization.” But I have not found myself either sufficiently
prepared nor prompted by circumstances to follow up the
study of the subject itself in the manner it well deserves. You
are now in the course of the most interesting inquiries; and I
should be happy to find that you would give some kind glance
at my own long ago brought forward and now nearly antiquated
endeavours.
I still retam the most lively recollection of your friendly visit
at my house in Vienna in 1856, when [ still was laid up in my
bed from the cold I had caught the first day of the opening of
our scientific association. And greatly interested I was at so
many of your investigations, several of which I had the good
luck to quote in confirmation of my humble contributions. Per-
haps I should have written this letter in German, so completely
are you master of my own language, but I thought this mode of
writing would be more in agreement with your daily general
practice and intercourse.
Believe me ever, my dear Sir,
Yours very truly,
W. HarpineGeEr.
[ 587 J
VIII. On Ammonium Alloys, and on Nascent-Hydrogen Tests.
By Avsert H. Gauiarin, M.D., of New York*.
(oad and De Pontin in 1808, using the voltaic cur-
rent as Davy had done, endeavoured to do as much for the
ammoniacal compounds as he had done for those of the fixed
alkalies. They made what is known as the ammoniacal amal-
gam. That ammonium exists in this body has never been de-
monstrated, notwithstanding that its constituents in their proper
proportions were always found escaping from the amalgam: that
does not prove that they were united; on the contrary, 2 vols.
of NH? and 1 vol. of H are the products. Moreover, if it were
ammonium, it had never been made to unite with any other
metal than mercury. I have endeavoured to overcome both of
these objections.
1. On the Existence of Ammonium in the Ammoniacal Amalgam,
and on a new Test for the presence of Nascent Hydrogen.
If the hydrogen escaping from the mercury together with the
ammonia can be shown to be in the nascent state, it would be
evidence that it had just been in chemical combination with the
ammonia, in other words, that metallic ammonium (NH*) ex-
isted in the amalgam. Some pellets of sodium were placed in
contact with some particles of the transparent variety of phos-
phorus, wrapped in bibulous paper and plunged beneath the sur-
face of water. A red glow was seen; and as the nascent hydro-
gen from the decomposing water came into contact with’ the
phosphorus, bubbles of phosphide of hydrogen were formed.
Occasionally one would inflame as it came into contact with the
atmosphere, placing the nature of the reaction beyond doubt.
As phosphide of hydrogen cannot be formed by direct synthesis
if ordinary free hydrogen be employed, this becomes a test for
the presence of that gas in its nascent state. The hydrogen
escaping from the ammoniacal amalgam was now tested by this
process. A sodium-amalgam dipped beneath a solution of chlo-
ride of ammonium was employed; and it became necessary to
wait until the scdium was exhausted, that results might not be
vitiated by the nascent hydrogen escaping from the water. At
the proper time the decomposing amalgam was covered with
fragments of transparent phosphorus, when many bubbles of
inflammable phosphide were obtained. The hydrogen must
then have been in the nascent state and just escaping from the
ammonium.
* Communicated by the Author.
58 Dr. A. H. Gallatin on Ammonium Alloys.
2. On the Existence of an Alloy of Ammonium and Bismuth, and
on another new Test for the presence of Nascent Hydrogen.
Ammonium had never yet been seen united with any other
metal than mercury. Mercury being the only metal fluid at
ordinary temperatures, should another alloy be formed it would
be a solid. Some bismuth was melted in a porcelain dish and
alloyed with sodium by dropping a piece of that metal on the
clear surface of the fluid bismuth. Chloride of ammonium was
then dusted on the fluid alloy, and then water added in a fine
quick stream. The bismuth swells, appears pasty and porous,
and then congeals. Abundance of hydrogen escapes from the
water, and the ammoniacal odour is set free. This body must
now be dried. If it be placed near the ear a distinct crackling
noise will be heard, a phenomenon which endures for some days.
To ascertain if this be ammonium escaping from the bismuth, the
body was placed beneath the surface of water, when bubbles of
hydrogen escaped, easily to be collected and recognized ; the
ammonia, if any, must have been absorbed by the water. To
test for this red litmus-paper was placed in the hquid. Wherever
the currents from the bismuth struck it a blue spot became vi-
sible. On dissolving sulphate of copper in distilled water and
placing the well-dried bismuth therein, the characteristic flocculi
of ammonio-sulphate of copper appeared at once.
It remains to show that the hydrogen escaping is in the nas-
cent state. There was not enough of it to test with phosphorus.
The bismuth compound, when placed in a solution of sulphate of
copper, becomes rapidly coated with metallic copper. Now bis-
muth unalloyed will not precipitate copper fromits sulphate. To
test if the precipitation of the metallic copper was due to the
presence of nascent hydrogen, an alloy of bismuth and sodium
was made and dipped in a solution of sulphate of copper. It
instantly became coated with that metal, owing to the nascent
hydrogen escaping from the water. The hydrogen was there-
fore escaping in the nascent state from the bismuth and am-
monia, and therefore it was a true alloy of bismuth and ammo-
nium. If the temperature of this alloy be raised, it will rapidly
decompose with a crackling noise. On one occasion it exploded,
sharply scattering the metal. The loud crackling noise produced
by this substance may be heard for many days after it is made.
That there is no mere surface-action in the case of the mercurial
and bismuth alloys of ammonium, is shown by the pores which
are formed by the escaping gases in both cases. In the amalgam
these pores may be seen produced by the escaping ammonium
long after the water has exhausted the sodium. In the mercu-
rial body the pores are evanescent ; in the case of bismuth they
Royal Society. 59
remain, and may be examined at leisure. These are different
phenomena from those displayed by spongy platinum when it
forces hydrogen and oxygen to combine.
Appendix.—Continuation of the investigation at the laboratory
of the Royal Mint, London, by the kind permission of Mr.
Roberts :—
The alloy was dried in vacuo over sulphuric acid. It was then
heated im vacuo by means of a Sprengel pump, when it decom-
posed, and the resulting gas was collected over mercury. It was
found to have twenty-seven times the volume of the original
solid. Analysis of the gas proved it to contain nitrogen and
hydrogen. The results of a further examination will shortly be
given.
June 23, 1869.
IX. Proceedings of Learned Societies.
ROYAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from vol. xxxvii. p. 474.]
Jan. 28, 1869.—John Peter Gassiot, Esq., Vice-President, in the
| Chair.
fae following communications were read :—
“On a momentary Molecular Change in Iron Wire.” By G.
Gore, F.R.S.
Whilst making some experiments of heating a strained iron wire
to redness by means of a current of voltaic electricity, I observed that,
on disconnecting the battery and allowing the wire to cool, during
the process of cooling the wire suddenly elongated, and then gra-
dually shortened until it became quite cold.
On attempting, some little time afterwards, to repeat this expe-
riment, although a careful record of the conditions of the experiment
had been kept, it was with some difficulty, and after numerous trials,
that I succeeded in obtaining the same result. Having again ob-
tained it, I next examined and determined the successful conditions
of the experiment, and devised the following arrangement of appa-
ratus.
A A (fig. 1) is a wooden base 61 centimetres long and 15:5 cen-
timetres wide. B and C are binding-screws ; they are provided with
small brass mercury-cups fixed in the heads of the screws for attach-
ment of the wires of a voltaic battery. Dis a binding-screw for
holding fast the sliding wire hook EK. F is a cylindrical binding-
screw, fixed to the sliding wire G, which is held fast by the binding-
screw B. H is the iron or other wire (or ribbon) to be heated: one
end of this wire passes through the screw F and is tightly secured by
it, whilst the other end is held fast by the cylindrical binding-screw I;
the binding-screw I has a small projecting bent piece of copper wire
¢
SEES LERAEY SRA SYA
pe - a
» #077998
z
Tha
Gore on a momentary
G.
:—Mr.
=
‘=
S
R
La)
8
>>
=)
a}
Molecular Change in Iron Wire. 61
secured to it, which dips into a little shallow dish or cup of mercury,
J; and the mercury in this cup is connected by a screw and strip
of brass to the binding-screw C. Kis a stretched band of vulcanized
india-rubber, attached at one end to the hook of the wire EK, and
at the other end to the hook L (see fig. 2). The cylindrical binding-
screw I has a hook by which it is attached to the loop M (fig. 2).
N is an axis suspended delicately upon centres, and carrying a very
light index pointer O. The hook L and loop M are separate pieces of
metal, and move freely upon an axis, P (fig. 2). The distance from
the centre of the axis N to that of P is 12°72 millimetres (=0°5
inch), and to the top of the index pointer 25°45 centimetres (=10-0
inches) ; every movement horizontally, therefore, of the loop M is
attended by a movement, twenty times the amount, of the top of the
pointer. Q is a screw for supporting the axis N. I have found it
convenient to put the zero-figure of the index towards the left-hand
side of the index-plate. R is a separate piece of wood fitting into a
rectangular hole in the base-board ; it carries a graduated rule, S, for
measuring the length of the wire to be heated, andis easily removed,
so that the wire may, if necessary, be heated by means of a row of
Bunsen’s burners. The rule T is used when measuring the amount
of strain. U is a vertical stud or pin of brass (of which there are
two) for limiting the range of movement of the pointer O.
In using this apparatus, a straight wire or ribbon, H, of a suitable
length and thickness was inserted, the index pointer brought to 0 by
adjustment of the sliding wire G, and a suitable amount of strain
(varying from less than two ounces to upwards of twenty) put upon
the wire by adjusting the sliding hooked wire E. One pole of a vol-
taic battery, generally consisting of six Grove’s elements, was con-
nected with the binding-screw C, and the other pole then inserted in
the mereury-cup of B. As soonas the needle O attained a maximum
or stationary amount of deflection, the battery-wire was suddenly re-
moved from 8B, and the wire allowed to cool. The movement of the
needle O was carefully watched both during its movement to the
right hand and also during its return, to see if any irregularity of
motion occurred.
Wires of the following metals and alloys were employed :—palla-
dium, platinum, gold, silver, copper, iron, lead, tin, cadmium, zine,
brass, german-silver, aluminium, and magnesium ; metallic ribbon was
also employed in certain cases. |
In these experiments the thickness and length of the conducting-
wire or ribbon had to be carefully proportioned to the quantity and
electromotive power of the current, so as to produce in the first ex-
periments with each metal only a very moderate amount of heat ;
thinner (and sometimes also shorter) wires were then successively
used, so as ultimately to develope sufficient heat to make the metal
closely approach its softening or fusion-point. The battery employed
consisted in each case of six Grove’s cells, each cell containing two
zinc plates 32 inches wide, and a platinum plate 3 inches wide, each
immersed about 5 inches in their respective liquids. The amount
of tension imparted by the elastic band required to be carefully ad-
62 Royal Sociely :—Mr. G. Gore on a momentary
justed to the cohesive power of each metal ; if the stretching power
was too weak, the phenomenon sought for was not clearly deve-
loped; and if too great, the wire was overstretched or broken when
it approached the softening-point. The amount of strain imparted
was approximately measured by temporarily substituting the body
of a small spring balance for the hooked wire F. The heated wire
must be protected from currents of cold air.
With wires of iron 0°65 millimetre thick (size “ No. 23”) and
21°5 centimetres long, strained to the extent of 10 ounces or more,
and heated to full redness, the phenomenon was clearly developed.
As an example, the needle of the instrument went with regularity to
18-5 of index-plate; the current was then stopped; the needle in-
stantly retreated to 17°75, then as quickly advanced to 19°75, and
then went slowly and regularly back, but not to zero. If the tempe-
rature of the wire was not sufficiently high, or the strain upon the
wire not enough, the needle went directly back without exhibiting the
momentary forward movement. The temperature and strain required
to be sufficient to actually stretch the wire somewhat at the higher
temperature. A higher temperature with a less degree of strain,
or a greater degree of strain with a somewhat lower temperature,
did not develope the phenomenon ; the wire was found to be per-
manently elongated on cooling. The amount of elongation of the
wire during the momentary molecular change was usually about 545
part of the length of the heated part of the wire; but it varied in
different experiments ; it was greatest in amount when the maximum
degrees of strain were applied. The molecular change evidently
includes a diminution of cohesion at a particular temperature during
the process of cooling ; and it is interesting to notice that at the
same temperature during the heating-process no such loss of cohe-
sion (nor any increase of cohesion) takes place; a certain tempera-
ture and strain are therefore not alone sufficient to produce it ; the
condition of cooling must also be included. The phenomena which
occur during cooling are not the exact converse of those which take
place during heating.
The phenomenon of elongation of iron wire during the process of
cooling evidently lies within very narrow limits; it could only be
obtained (with the particular battery employed) with wires about
21°5 centimetres (=8;4 inch) long, and about 0°65 millimetre
(=Nos. 22 & 23 of ordinary wire-gauge) thick, having a strain
upon them of 10 ounces or upwards; with a weaker battery the
phenomenon could only be obtained by employing a shorter and
thinner wire.
The experiment may easily be verified in a simpler manner by
stretching an iron wire about 1:0 millimetre diameter between two
fixed supports, keeping it in a sufficient and proper degree of ten-
sion by means of an elastic band, then heating it to full redness by
means of a row of Bunsen’s burners, and, as soon as it has stretched
somewhat, suddenly cutting off the source of heat. In some experi-
ments of this kind, with a row (42 centimetres long) of 21 burners
and a row (76 centimetres long) of 43 burners, and the wire attached
Molecular Change in Tron Wire. 63
to a needle with index-plate, as in the figure, conspicuous effects
were obtained; but the momentary elongation was relatively much
less (in one instance 4, of the length of the heated part) than
when a battery was employed, apparently in consequence of the wire
being less intensely heated.
A large number of experiments were made with wires of palla-
dium, platinum, gold, silver, copper, lead, tin, cadmium, zinc, brass,
german-silver, aluminium, and magnesium (wire and ribbon), dimi-
nishing the length and thickness of the wire in each case, and ad-
justing the tension until suitable temperature and strain were obtained ;
but in no instance could a similar molecular change to that observed
in iron be detected. Palladium and platinum wires of different
lengths, thickness, and degrees of strain were examined at various
temperatures, up to that of a white heat; but no irregularity of co-
hesion, except that of gradual softening at the higher temperatures,
was observed; they instantly contracted with regular action on stop-
ping the current. Several gold wires were similarly examined at dif-
ferent temperatures up to that of a full red heat; no irregularity
occurred either during heating or cooling; but little tension (about
4 ounces) was applied, on account of the weak cohesion of this metal.
Wires of silver similarly examined would only bear a strain of about
2 ounces, and a temperature of feeble red heat visible in daylight ;
no irregularity of elongation or contraction occurred during heating
and cooling. By employing exactly the proper temperature and
strain, a very interesting phenomenon was observed: the wire melted
distinctly on its surface without fusing in its interior, although the
surface was most exposed to the cooling influence of the air ; this oc-
curred without the wire breaking, as it would have done if its interior
portion had melted: the phenomenon indicates the passage of the
electricity by the surface of the wire in preference to passing by its
interior. Wires of copper expanded regularly until they became red-
hot; they then contracted slightly (notwithstanding the strain ap-
plied to them), probably in consequence of a cooling effect of in-
creased radiation produced by the oxidized surface, as a similar effect
occurred with brass and german-silver*. On stopping the current
the wire contracted without manifest irregularity. Wires of lead and
tin were difficult to examine by this method, on account of their ex-
tremely feeble*cohesion and the low temperature at which they soft-
ened: wires about 1°63 millimetre diameter, 25°5 centimetres long
(with a strain upon them of about one ounce), were employed; no
irregularity was detected. Wires of cadmium from 1°255 millimetre
to 1°525 millimetre thick, and 24-2 centimetres long (with a strain
of two ounces), exhibited a slight irregularity of expansion at the
lower temperatures ; they elongated, and also cooled, with extreme
slowness, more slowly than those of any other metal. Wires of zinc
exhibited a slight irregularity of expansion, like those of cadmium ;
the most suitable ones were about 25 centimetres long and 1:2 mil-
limetre in diameter, with a strain of 10 ounces. Wires of brass and
* This supposition does not agree with the results obtained with iron wire,
which also oxidizes freely.
64 Royal Society :—Mr. G. Gore on the Development of
german-silver, when heated to redness, behaved like those of copper
in expanding regularly until a maximum was attained, and then con-
tracting slightly to a definite point whilst the battery remained con-
nected ; on stopping the current they contracted without irregularity.
When examined at lower temperatures, with a greater degree of
strain, no irregularity was observed. Various wires of aluminium
were examined; the most suitable was one 0°88 millimetre thick,
20°4 centimetres long, with a strain of 12 ounces; no irregularity
was observed at any temperature below redness ; aluminium expanded
and cooled very slowly, but less so than cadmium. Various wires and
ribbon of magnesium were also examined below a red heat, but no
irregularity of cohesion, except that due to gradual softening by heat,
was detected.
All the metals examined exhibited gradual loss of cohesion at the
higher temperatures if a suitable strain was applied to develope it. It
is probable that if the fractions of time occupied by the needle in
passing over each division of the index were noted, and the wire
perfectly protected from currents of air, small irregularities of mo-
lecular or cohesive change might be detected by this method; cad-
mium and zine offer a prospect of this kind.
This molecular change would probably be found to exist in large
masses of wrought iron as well as in the small specimens of wire
which I have examined, and would come into operation in various
cases where those masses are subjected to the conjoint influence of
heat and strain, as in various engineering operations, the destruction
of buildings by fire, and other cases.
“On the Development of Electric Currents by Magnetism and
Heat.’ By G. Gore, F.R.S.
I have devised the following apparatus for demonstrating a rela-
tion of current electricity to magnetism and heat.
A A, fig. 3, is a wooden base, upon which is supported, by four
brass clamps (two, B, B, on each side), a coil of wire, C ; the coil is 6
inches long, 13 inch in external diameter, and 2 of an inch internal
diameter, lined with a thin glass tube ; it consists of 18 layers, or
about 3000 turns of insulated copper wire of 0°415 millim. diameter
(or size No. 26 of ordinary wire-gauge) ; D isa permanent bar-mag-
net held in its place by the screws E, E, and having upon its poles two
flat armatures of soft iron, F,F, placed edgewise. Within the axis of
the coil is a straight wire of soft iron, G, one end of which is held
fast by the pillar-screw H, and the other by the cylindrical binding-
screw 1; the latter screw has a hook, to which is attached a vul-
canized india-rubber band, J, which is stretched and held secure
by the hooked brass rod K and the pillar-screw L. The screw H is
surmounted by a small mercury-cup for making connexions with one
pole of a voltaic battery, the other pole of the battery being secured
to the pillar-screw M, which is also surmounted by a small mercury-
cup, and is connected with the cylindrical binding-screw I by a cop-
per wire with a middle flattened portion O to impart to it flexibility.
The two ends of the fine wire coil are soldered to two small binding-
Electric Currents by Magnetism and Heat. 65
screws at the back; those screws are but partly shown in the sketch,
and are for the purpose of connexion with a suitable galvanometer.
The armatures F, F’, are grooved on their upper edges, and the iron
wire lies in these grooves in contact with them ; and to prevent the
electric current passing through the magnet, a "small piece of paper
or other thin non-conductor is inserted between the magnet and one
of the armatures. The battery employed consisted of six Grove’s ele-
ments (arranged in one series), with the immersed portion of platinum
plates about 5 inches by 3 inches ; it was sufficiently strong to heat
an iron wire of 1:03 millim. diameter and 20°5 centims. long to a low
red heat.
By making the contacts of the battery in unison with the move-
ments of the galvanometer-needies, a swing of about 12 degrees of
the needles each way was obtained. The galvanometer was not a very
Sensitive one; it contained 192 turns of wire. Similar results were
obtained with a coil § inches long and 1} inch in diameter contain-
ing 16 layers, or about 3776 a: of wire of 0°415 millim. diame-
ter (or No. 26 of ordinary wire-gauge), and a permanent magnet 10
inches long. Less effects were obtained with a 6-inck coil consisting
of 40 layers, or about 10,000 turns of wire 0°10 millim. in diameter,
also with several other coils. The maximum effect, of 12 degrees
each way, with six Grove’s cells in one series was obtained when the
wire became visibly red-hot, and this occurred with an iron wire of 1:03
millim. diameter (or No. 19 of ordinary wire-gauge) ; but when em-
ploying ten such cells as a double series of five, the maximum effect
was then obtained with an iron wire of 1:28 to 1°58 millim. diameter
(size Nos. 17 and 18), the deflection being 16 degrees each way. By
employing a still thicker wire and a battery of greater heating-power
still greater effects were obtained.
The galvanometer was placed about 8 (and in some instances 12)
feet distant from the coil. A reversal of the direction of the battery-
current did not reverse or perceptibly affect the current induced in
the coil; but by reversing the poles of the magnet, the direction of
the mduced current was reversed. On disconnecting the battery,
and thereby cooling the iron wire, a reversed direction of induced cur-
rent was produced. By substituting a wire of pure nickel 24:5 cen-
tims. long and 2°1 millims. in diameter, induced currents were obtained
as with the iron, but they were more feeble. No induced current
occurred by heating the iron wire if the magnet was absent; nor was
any induced current obtained if the magnet was present and wires
of palladium, platinum, gold, silver, copper, brass, or german-silver
were heated to redness instead of iron wire, nor with a rod of bis-
muth of 3°63 millims. diameter enclosed in a glass tube and heated
nearly to fusion ; it is evident, therefore, that the axial wire must be
composed of a magnetic metal.
No continuous current (or only a very feeble one) was produced in
the coil by continuously heating the iron wire. In several experi-
ments, by employing twelve similar Grove’s elements as a double series
of six intensity, an iron wire of 1°56 millim. diameter was made bright.
red-hot ; and by keeping the current continuous until the galvano-
meter-needles settled nearly at zero, and then suddenly disconnecting
Phil, Mag. 8.4. Vol, 38. No, 252, July 1869. Ii
66 Royal Society :—Frankland and Lockyer on Gaseous Spectra
the battery, the needles remained nearly stationary during several
seconds, and then went rapidly to about 10: this slow decline of the
current during the first few seconds of cooling was probably connected
with the ‘“‘ momentary molecular change of iron wire”’ during cooling
which I have described in the preceding paper. The irregularity of
movement of the needles did not occur unless the wire was bright red-
hot, a condition which was also necessary for obtaining the molecular
change.
The direction of the current induced by heating the iron wire was
found by experiment to be the same as that which was produced by
removing the magnet from the coil; therefore the heat acted simply
by diminishing the magnetism, and the results were in accordance
with, and afford a further confirmation of, the general law, that where-
ever there is increasing or decreasing magnetism, there is a tendency
to an electric current in a conductor at right angles to it.
February 11.—Dr. W. B. Carpenter, Vice-President, in the Chair.
The followmg communication was read :—
“‘ Preliminary Note of Researches on Gaseous Spectra in relation
to the Physical Constitution of the Sun.’’ By Edward Frankland,
F.R.S., and J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.A.S.
1. For some time past we have been engaged in a careful exami-
nation of the spectra of several gases and vapours uuder varying con-
ditions of pressure and temperature, with a view to throw light upon
the discoveries recently made bearing upon the physical constitution
of the sun.
Although the imvestigations are by no means yet completed, we
consider it desirable to lay at once before the Royal Society several
broad conclusions at which we have already arrived.
It will be recollected that one of us in a recent communication to
the Royal Society pointed out the following facts :—
i. That there is a continuous envelope round the sun, and that in
the spectrum of this envelope (which has been named for accuracy of
description the “‘chromosphere”’) the hydrogen line in the green
corresponding with Fraunhofer’s line F takes the form of an arrow-
head, and widens from the upper to the lower surface of the chromo-
sphere.
il. ‘That ordinarily in a prominence the F line is nearly of the same
thickness as the C line.
i. That sometimes in a prominence the F line is exceedingly
brilliant, and widens out so as to present a bulbous appearance above
the chromosphere.
iv. That the F line in the chromosphere, and also the C line, extend
on to the spectrum of the subjacent regions and re-reverse the Fraun-
hofer lines.
v. That there is a line near D visible in the spectrum of the chro-
mosphere to which there is no corresponding Fraunhofer line.
vi. That are many bright lines visible im the ordinary solar spec-
trum near the sun’s edge.
vil. That a new line sometimes makes its appearance in the chro-
mosphere.
in relation to the Physical Constitution of the Sun. 67
2. It became obviously, then, of primary importance—
i. To study the hydrogen spectrum very carefully under varying
conditions, with the view of detecting whether or not there existed a
line in the orange, and
ii. To determine the cause to which the thickening of the F line
is due.
We have altogether failed to detect any line in the hydrogen
spectrum in the place indicated, 7.e. near the line D; but we
have not yet completed all the experiments we had proposed to
ourselves,
With regard to the thickening of the F line, we may remark that,
in the paper by MM. Pliicker and Hittorf, to which reference was
made in the communication before alluded to, the phenomena of the
expansion of the spectral lines of hydrogen are fully stated, but the
cause of the phenomena is left undetermined.
We have convinced ourselves that this widening out is due to
pressure, and not appreciably, if at all, to temperature per se.
3. Having determined, then, that the phenomena presented by the
F line were phenomena depending upon and indicating varying pres-
sures, we were in a position to determine the atmospheric pressure
operating in a prominence, in which the red and green lines are
nearly of equal width, and in the chromosphere, through which the
green line gradually expands as the sun is approached*.
With regard to the higher prominences, we liave ample evidence
that the gaseous medium of which they are composed exists in a con-
dition of excessive tenuity, and that at the lower surface of the chro-
mosphere itself the pressure is very far below the pressure of the
earth’s atmosphere.
The bulbous appearance of the F line before referred to may be
taken to indicate violent convective currents or local generations of
heat, the condition of the chromosphere being doubtless one of the
most intense action.
4. We will now return for one moment to the hydrogen spectrum.
We have already stated that certain proposed experiments have not
been carried out. We have postponed them in consequence of a
further consideration of the fact that the bright line near D has ap-
parently no representative among the Fraunhofer lines. This fact
implies that, assuming the line to be a hydrogen line, the selective
absorption of the chromosphere is insufficient to reverse the spec-
trum.
It is to be remembered that the stratum of incandescent gas which
is pierced by the line of sight along the sun’s limb, the radiation from
which stratum gives us the spectrum of the chromosphere, is very
great compared. with the radial thickness of the chromosphere itself ;
it would amount to something under 200,000 miles close to the
limb.
Although there is another possible explanation of the non-reversal
of the D line, we reserve our remarks on the subject (with which the
visibility of the prominences on the sun’s disk is connected) until
further experiments and observations have been made.
* Will not this enable us ultimately to determine the temperature ?
68 Royal Society :—
5. We believe that the determination of the above-mentioned facts
leads us necessarily to several important modifications of the received
theory of the physical constitution of our central lumimary—the
theory we owe to Kirchhoff, who based it upon his examination of
the solar spectrum. According to this hypothesis, the photosphere
itself is either solid or liquid, and it is surrounded by an atmosphere
composed of gases and the vapours of the substances incandescent in
the photosphere.
We find, however, instead of this compound atmosphere, one
which gives us nearly, or at all events mainly the spectrum of hy-
drogen ; (it is not, however, composed necessarily of hydrogen alone ;
and this point is engaging our special attention ;) and the tenuity of
this incandescent atmosphere is such that it is extremely improbable
that any considerable atmosphere, such as the corona has been ima-
gined to indicate, lies outside it,—a view strengthened by the fact
that the chromosphere bright lines present no appearance of absorp-
tion, and that its physical conditions are not statical.
With regard to the photosphere itself, so far from being either a
solid surface or a liquid ocean, that it is cloudy or gaseous or both
follows both from our observations and experiments. The separate
prior observations of both of us have shown :—
i. That a gaseous condition of the photosphere is quite consistent
with its continuous spectrum. The possibility of this condition has
also been suggested by Messrs. De La Rue, Stewart, and Loewy.
ii. That the spectrum of the photosphere contains bright lines
when the limb is observed, these bright lines indicating probably an
outer shell of the photosphere of a gaseous nature.
i. That a sun-spot is a region of greater absorption.
iv. That occasionally photospheric matter appears to be injected
into the chromosphere.
May not these facts indicate that the absorption to which the re-
versal of the spectrum and the Fraunhofer lines are due takes place
in the photosphere itself or extremely near to it, instead of in an ex-
tensive outer absorbing atmosphere? And is not this conclusion
strengthened by the consideration that otherwise the newly disco-
vered bright lines in the solar spectrum itself should be themselves
reversed on Kirchhoff’s theory ? this, however, is not the case. We
do not forget that the selective radiation of the chromosphere does
not necessarily indicate the whole of its possible selective absorption ;
but our experiments lead us to believe that, were any considerable
quantity of metallic vapours present, their bright spectra would not
be entirely invisible in all strata of the chromosphere.
February 18.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—
“Note on a Method of viewing the Solar Prominences without an
Eclipse.’ By William Huggins, F.R.S.
Last Saturday, February 13, I succeeded in seeing a solar promi-
nence so as to distinguish its form. A spectroscope was used; a
narrow slit was inserted after the train of prisms before the object-
glass of the little telescope. This slit limited the light entering the
Mr. Huggins on the Heat of the Stars. 69
telescope to that of the refrangibility of the part of the spectrum
immediately about the bright line coincident with C.
The slit of the spectroscope was then widened sufficiently to admit
the form of the prominence to be seen. The spectrum then be-
came so impure that the prominence could not be distinguished.
A great part of the light of the refrangibilities removed far from
that of C was then absorbed by a piece of deep ruby glass. The
prominence was then distinctly perceived, something of this form.
A more detailed account is not now given, as I think I shall be
able to modify the method so asto make the outline of these objects
more easily visible.
February 25.—Captain Richards, R.N., Vice-President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
“Note on the Heat of the Stars.’ By Wilham Huggins, F.R.S.
In the summer of 1866 it occurred to me that the heat received
on the earth from the stars might possibly be more easily detected
than the solar heat reflected from the moon. Mr. Becker (of Messrs.
Elliott Brothers) prepared for me several thermopiles, and a very
sensitive galvanometer. Towards the close of that year, and during
the early part of 1867, I made numerous observations on the moon,
and on three or four fixed stars. I succeeded in obtaining trust-
worthy indications of stellar heat in the case of the stars Sirius,
Pollux, and Regulus, though I was not able to make any quantita-
tive estimate of their calorific power.
I had the intention of making these observations more complete,
and of extending them to other stars. I have refrained hitherto
from making them known; I find, however, that I cannot hope to
take up these researches again for some months, and therefore ven-
ture to submit the observations in their present incomplete form. ~~
An astatic galvanometer was used, over the upper needle of which
a small concave mirror was fixed, by which the image of the flame of
a lamp could be thrown upon a scale piaced at some distance. Usu-
ally, however, I preferred to observe the needle directly by means of
a lens so placed that the divisions on the card were magnified, and
could be read by the observer when at a little distance from the in-
strument. ‘The sensitiveness of the instrument was made as great as
possible by a very careful adjustment from time to time of the mag-
netic power of the needles. ‘The extreme delicacy of the instrument
was found to be more permanently preserved when the needles were
placed at right angles to the magnetic meridian during the time that
the instrument was not in use. The great sensitiveness of this in-
70 Royal Society:—
strument was shown by the needles turning through 90° when two
pieces of wire of different kinds of copper were held between the finger
and thumb. For the stars, the images of which in the telescope are
points of light, the thermopiles consisted of one or of two pairs of
elements; a large pile, containing twenty-four pairs of elements, was
also used for the moon. A few of the later observations were made
with a pile of which the elements consist of alloys of bismuth and
antimony.
The thermopile was attached to a refractor of eight inches aperture.
I considered that though some of the heat-rays would not be trans-
mitted by the glass, yet the more uniform temperature of the air
within the telescope, and some other circumstances, would make the
difficulty of preserving the pile from extraneous influences less for-
midable than if a reflector were used.
The pile a was placed within a tube of cardboard, 6; this was en-
closed in a much larger tube formed of sheets of brown paper pasted
over each other, c. The space between the two tubes was filled with
cotton-wool. At about 5 inches in front of the surface of the pile,
a glass plate (e) was placed for the purpose of intercepting any heat
that might be radiated from the inside of the telescope. This glass
plate was protected by a double tube of cardboard, the inner one of
which (d) was about half an inch in diameter. The back of the pile
was protected in a similar way by a glass plate (7). The small inner
tube (h) beyond the plate was kept plugged with cotton-wool; this
plug was removed when it was required to warm the back of the pile,
which was done by allowing the heat radiated from a candle-flame to
pass through the tube to the pile. The apparatus was kept at a
distance of about 2 inches from the brass tube by which it was
attached to the telescope by three pieces of wood (2), for the pur-
pose of cutting off as much as possible any connexion by conduction
with the tube of the telescope.
The wires connecting the pile with the galvanometer, which had
to be placed at some distance to preserve it from the influence of the
ironwork of the telescope, were covered with gutta percha, over
which cotton-wool was placed, and the whole wrapped round with
strips of brown paper. ‘The binding-screws of the galvanometer
were enclosed in a small cylinder of sheet gutta percha, and filled
with cotton-wool. These precautions were necessary, as the ap-
proach of the hand to one of the binding-screws, or even the impact
upon it of the cooler air entering the observatory, was sufficient to
Mr. Huggins on the Heat of the Stars. 71
produce a deviation of the needle greater than was to be expected
from the stars.
The apparatus was fixed to the telescope so that the surface of the
thermopile would be at the focal point of the object-glass. The
apparatus was allowed to remain attached to the telescope for hours,
or sometimes for days, the wires being in connexion with the galvano-
meter, until the heat had become uniformly distributed within the
apparatus containing the pile, and the needle remained at zero, or
was steadily deflected to the extent of a degree or two from zero.
When observations were to be made, the shutter of the dome was
opened, and the telescope, by means of the finder, was directed to a
part of the sky near the star to be examined where there were no
bright stars. In this state of things the needle was watched, and
if in four or five minutes no deviation of the needle had taken place,
then by means of the finder the telescope was moved the small dis-
tance necessary to bring the image of the star exactly upon the face
of the pile, which could be ascertained by the position of the star as
seen in the finder. The image of the star was kept upon the small
pile by means of the clock-motion attached to the telescope. The
needle was then watched during five minutes or longer; almost always
the needle began to move as soon as the image of the star fell upon
it. The telescope was then moved, so as to direct it again to the sky
near the star. Generally in one or two minutes the needle began
to return towards its original position.
In a similar manner twelve to twenty observations of the same star
were made. These observations were repeated on other nights.
The mean of a number of observations of Sirius, which did not
differ greatly from each other, gives a deflection of the needle of 2°.
The observations of Pollux 13°.
No effect was produced on the needle by Castor.
Regulus gave a deflection of 3°.
In one observation Arcturus deflected the needle 3° in 15 minutes.
The observations of the full moon were not accordant. On one
night a sensible effect was shown by the needle; but at another time
the indications of heat were excessively small, and not sufficiently
uniform to be trustworthy.
It should be stated that several times anomalous indications were
observed, which were not traced to the disturbing cause.
The results are not strictly comparable, as it is not certain that
the sensitiveness of the galvanometer was exactly the same in al] the
observations, still it was probably not greatly different.
Observations of the heat of the stars, if strictly comparable, might
be of value, in connexion with the spectra of their light, to help us
to determine the condition of the matter from which the light was
emitted in different stars.
I hope at a future time to resume this inquiry with a larger tele-
scope, and to obtain some approximate value of the quantity of heat
received at the earth from the brighter stars.
“On the Fracture of Brittle and Viscous Solids by ‘ Shearing.”’’
By Sir William Thomson, F.RS.
On recently visiting Mr. Kirkaldy’s testing works, the Grove,
72 Royal Society.
Southwark, I was much struck with the appearances presented by
some specimens of iron and steel round bars which had been broken
by torsion. Some of them were broken right across, as nearly as
may be in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the bar. On examin-
ing these I perceived that they had all yielded through a great de-
gree to distortion before having broken. I therefore looked for bars
of hardened steel which had been tested similarly, and found many
beautiful specimens in Mr. Kirkaldy’s museum. ‘These, without
exception, showed complicated surfaces of fracture, which were such
as to demonstrate, as part of the whole effect in each case, a spiral
fissure round the circumference of the cylinder at an angle of about
45° to the length. This is just what is to be expected when we
consider that if A BDC (fig. 1) represent an infinitesimal square
on the surface of a round bar with its sides A C and B D parallel to
the axis of the cylinder, before torsion, and ABD’O! the figure
into which this square becomes distorted just before rupture, the
diagonal A D has become elongated to the length A D’, and the dia-
gonal B C has become contracted to the length BC’, and that there-
Fig, 1.
CC’ Dp C
A B
fore there must be maximum tension everywhere, across the spiral
of which BC’ is an infinitely short portion. But the specimens are
remarkable as showing in softer or more viscous solids a tendency to
break parallel to the surfaces of “‘shearing’”? AB, CD, rather than
in surfaces inclined to these at an angle of 45°. Through the kind-
ness of Mr. Kirkaldy, his specimens of both kinds are now exhibited
to the Royal Society. Ona smaller scale | have made experiments on
round bars of brittle sealing-wax, hardened steel, similar steel tem-
pered to various degrees of softness, brass, copper, lead.
Sealing-wax and hard steel bars exhibited the spiral fracture. All
the other bars, without exception, broke as Mr. Kirkaldy’s soft steel
bars, right across, in a plane perpendicular to the axis of the bar.
These experiments were conducted by Mr. Walter Deed and Mr.
Adam Logan in the Physical Laboratory of the University of Glas-
gow; and specimens of the bars exhibiting the two kinds of fracture
are sent to the Royal Society along with this statement. I also
send photographs exhibiting the spiral fracture of a hard steel cylin-
der, and the “shearing” fracture of a lead cylinder by torsion.
These experiments demonstrate that continued “ shearing ”’ pa-
rallel to one of planes, of a viscous solid, developes in it a ten-
dency to break more easily parallel to these planes than in other di-
rections, or that a viscous solid, at first isotropic, acquires “‘ cleavage-
planes” parallel to the planes of shearing. Thus, if CD and AB
Geological Society. 73
(fig. 2) represent in section two sides of a cube of a viscous solid, and
if, by “shearing”’ parallel to these planes, C D be brought to the
position C! D’, relatively to A B supposed to remain at rest, and if this
process be continued until the material breaks, it breaks parallel to
AB and C'D’.
The appearances presented by the specimens in Mr. Kirkaldy’s
museum attracted my attention by their bearing on an old contro-
versy regarding Forbes’s theory of glaciers. Forbes had main-
tained that the continued shearing motion which his observations
had proved in glaciers, must tend to tear them by fissures parallel
to the surfaces of “shearing.” ‘The correctness of this view for a
viscous solid mass, such as snow becoming kneaded into a glacier,
or the substance of a formed glacier as it works its way down a
valley, ora mass of débris of glacier-ice, reforming as a glacier: after
disintegration by an obstacle, seems strongly confirmed by the ex-
periments on the softer metals described above. Hopkins had argued
against this view, that, according to the theory of elastic solids, as
stated above, and represented by the first diagram, the fracture
ought to be at an angle of 45° to the surfaces of “‘shearing.” There
can be no doubt of the truth of Hopkins’s principle for an isotropic
elastic solid, so brittle as to break by shearing before it has become
distorted through more than a very small angle; and it is illus-
trated in the experiments on brittle sealing-wax and hardened steel
which I have described. The various specimens of fractured elastic
solids now exhibited to the Society may be looked upon with some
interest, if only as illustrating the correctness of each of the two
seemingly discrepant propositions of those two distinguished men.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from vol. xxxvul. p. 311.]
Nov. 25th, 1868.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. “On Floods in the Island of Bequia.” By G. M. Browne,
Esq. Communicated by the Secretary of State for Foreign Affairs.
On the 17th of March, at 8 o’clock p.m.,a steady strong wave was
seen bearing down upon Admiralty Bay; it had no perceptible
erest, and was three feet in height; it encroached upon the land to
distances varying from 70 to 350 feet. A second, smaller wave
followed. No shock of an earthquake was felt.
2. * Description of Nga Tutura, an Extinct Volcano in New
Zealand.” By Capt. F. W. Hutton, F.G.S.
This volcano is situated on the west coast of the North Island of
New Zealand, between Raglan and the mouth of the River Waikato.
A section of 15 miles is exposed along the coast, which trends
in a north-west and south-east direction, showing beds of Me-
sozoic age forming a synclinal trough between the south head of
Waikato and Otehe Point, and descending below the sea-level at Wai-
kawau. Upon them lie Tertiary strata, following the same synclinal
74 Geological Society :—
curve as the older rocks, and broken through, nearly in the centre
of the curve, by the basaltic cone of Nga Tutura. This volcano is
about 600 feet high, and is chiefly composed of basaltic lava-streams,
with but little tuff. The eruption is considered by the author to
have been submarine.
Capt. Hutton then stated his conviction that the fluid matter
which escaped was not connected with a central molten interior of
the earth, but was derived from rocks not much more than 1000
feet in depth, and that the synclinal in question was caused by a
subsidence into the cavity thus formed.
3. “On Dakosaurus.”” By J. Wood Mason, Esq., F.G.S.
The Kimmeridge Clay of Shotover Hill has yielded five specimens
of the teeth of this reptile, now for the first time represented as a
British genus. After noticing the bibliography of the subject, and
the presence of specimens in various museums, the author proceeded
to describe the characters of the teeth. They are large, conical,
incurved, and slightly recurved, having two sharp, prominent, cre-
nulated, ‘longitudinal ridges, which are situated mudi a between
the convex and concave curvatur es.
This reptile was regarded by the author as foreshadowing the
form of dentition that characterizes the existing group of Varanide.
If the materials were at hand for a complete definition of its com-
parative osteology, Dakosaurus would probably exhibit a combina-
tion of Lacertilian and Crocodilian characters, but with the croco-
dilian elements predominant.
The PrestpEnt differed from the author as to the conclusions he
drew from the structure of the teeth. The teeth of existing Croco-
dilia had been but imperfectly described, and he thought he could
point out among existing Crocodiles teeth bearing the character
which the author regarded as Lacertilian. He agreed with Prof.
Owen in regarding Dakosaurus as Crocodilian rather than Dinosau-
rian or Lacertilian.
4, “On the Anatomy of the test of Amphidetus (Echinocardium)
Virginianus, Forbes; and on the genus Breynia.” By P. Martin
Duncan, M.B., F.R.S., Sec. G.S., &e.
After a careful examination of the Miocene Amphidetus from the
Virginian Tertiaries, the recent species of the genus from the Ku-
ropean and Australian seas were stated to form a group of yery
closely allied forms. The Crag specimen of A. cordatus described
by Forbes could not be found; but the examination of a series of
recent specimens decided that they were not specifically different
from the Miocene form.
The unusual form of the ambulacral spaces, the nature of the
fasciole crossing them, and the resulting absence (more or less) of
pores within the fasciole, were asserted to be of a third-rate cha-
racter as regards structural importance; and the author did not
consider that the genera chinocardium, Breynia, Lovenia, &e.
had a common origin or that there was a close genetic relationship
between them because they had this fasciolar structure. He con-
Notes of a Geological Reconnaissance in Arabia Petrea. 75.
sidered the fasciole to be an appendage to several generic groups
which were distinctly separated by other structural distinctions,
The result of an examination of the Nummulitic Breynie in the
Society’s collection satisfied Dr. Duncan that there were only race
characters separating them from Breynia Australiensis—a recent
Kchinoderm. The persistence of these species, widely distributed
and of great geological age, was very remarkable.
December 9th, 1868.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :— s
“ Notes of a Geological Reconnaissance in Arabia Petrea.” By
H. Bauerman, Esq., F.G.S.
The district to which this paper referred is that between Suez
and the lower part of Wady Ferran in the peninsula of Arabia
Petrea, and includes the copper and turquoise mines worked by the
ancient Egyptians. The rocks within this area were classified as
follows :—
1. Gneiss and granites, forming the central chain of Sinai and the base of all
the stratified deposits.
. Red Sandstone series.
. Cretaceous rocks. .
White limestones, with flints, salt, and bitumen. Eocene.
. Flint conglomerate, with coralline limestone. Miocene.
Gypseous marls of Wady Taragi.
- Reconstructed gypseous sands and conglomerates.
. Raised beaches, coralline and miliolitic limestones.
. Alluyium and desert drift.
The Red Sandstone series consists of three members, a thin bed
of limestone being the central and containing remains of Encrinites
referred by Mr. Etheridge to the Muschelkalk form Encrinites moni-
hformis. Iron, manganese, and copper ores are found near Nasb
and Serabib el Khadem. ‘The turquoise mines of Wady Maghara,
which were referred to the same horizon, are among the most ancient
monuments of the world. The author considered that the tools
employed were flint chisels or flakes, and hammers made from pieces
of a neighbouring doleritic lava. he flakes were supposed to have
been mounted on wooden blocks.
The Cretaceous rocks, which rest unconformably on the Triassic
sandstones, consist chiefly of green sand, with alternations of thin
argillaceous limestones, containing Echinoderms which prove them
to be of the age of the Upper Greensand. Above them comes the
Hippurite-limestone series. The fossils were described by Dr. Dun-
can, F.R.S., in a subsequent communication.
The white limestone, with flints, the next group of rocks in
ascending order, strongly resembles the European chalk with flints ;
but, according to the author, it must be regarded as representing the
nummulitic limestone of Egypt, as several species of Nummulites
have been detected in it near the shores of the Red Sea, below
Wady Gharandel. The Miocene flint conglomerate series is a mass
of coarse flint shingle alternating with these coralline limestones.
The author considered that a great physical break ensued between
CO 00 ST S> OUD 09 DO
76 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
the Eocene and Miocene period, while a gradual transition occurred
between the Cretaceous and Eocene rocks.
In the gypseous series which overlies the flint conglomerate
several peculiar effects were noted, owing to the easy manner in
which tumbled and broken masses of gypsum are reconstructed by
partial solution and recrystallization when they have been removed
from their original position by the slipping of the underlying shales.
The alluvial gravels of the Sinaitic valleys are generally similar
in containing a coarser and a finer material; the latter is the elder,
and has apparently been deposited by comparatively slow-flowing
streams. In conclusion, the author called attention to the evidence
of lakes, marshes, and streams having formerly occupied what are
now dry barren valleys.
X. Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
ON THE HEAT CONSUMED IN INTERNAL WORK WHEN A GAS DI-
LATES UNDER THE PRESSURE OF THE ATMOSPHERE. BYM.J.
MOUTIER.
M CLAUSIUS has shown that the quantity of heat necessary to
He heata body consists in general of three distinct parts: the first
represents the increase of the quantity of heat actually existing in the
interior of the body; the second has for its equivalent the external
work, and the third the internal work. When a gas dilates under the
pressure of the atmosphere, the external work is easily estimated. If
we call 6 the density of the gas compared with the air, and @ the coef-
ficient of dilatation of the gas under the pressure of the atmosphere,
the increase of volume experienced by 1 kilogramme of gas in passing
from zero to]° is, in cubic metres, __® | Moreover the atmo-
1:29382x6
spheric pressure upon one square metre is equal to 10333 kilogs. ;
consequently when 1 kilog. of gas dilates from zero to 1° under
the constant pressure of the atmosphere, the external work is equal
10333 x a
a
1°2932 x0
by dividing this number by the mechanical equivalent of heat, 425.
If we represent by C the specific heat of the gas under the pressure
of the atmosphere, by K the absolute specific heat independent of
the physical condition of the body according to M. Clausius, and by
y the heat consumed in internal work, we have, when 1 kilog. of
gas dilates by 1° under the pressure of the atmosphere,
@xe Ka buy 10888 2a ae
425 1:29382xd
This equation contains two unknown quantities, K and y.
Messrs. William Thomson and Joule have succeeded in demon-
strating the existence of internal work in a gas which expands
without effecting any external work. ‘The diminution of tempera-
ture which accompanies the flow of the gas allowed the calculation
of the proportion of the internal to the external work when the gas
and the heat consumed in external work is obtained
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 77
dilates with displacement of the point of application of an external
pressure ; this proportion, which is insensible in the case of hydrogen,
is perfectly appreciable with air, and much greater in the case of
carbonic acid.
M. Hirn has assumed the internal work to be negligible in hy-
drogen. He has deduced from the preceding equation the absolute
specific heat of that gas; and by applying the law of Dulong and
Petit to the absolute specific heats, he has been able to obtain under
this hypothesis the values of y with respect to various gases. By
combining the equation (1) with the law of absolute specific heats,
Wwe may compare the values of y for various gases without the as-
sumption of any hypothesis with regard to hydrogen.
Air and Hydrogen.—According to the experiments of M. Reg-
nault, we have, for hydrogen, C=3'409 between zero and 200°,
a=0°003661 between zero and 180°, and 6=0°06926. The equa-
tion (1) gives for this gas
K=29°41523—y. . . « hid may 2)
The experiments of M. Regnault give for air, C’ =0°23751 be-
tween zero and 200°, «’=0° 00367 eeween zero and 100°. The
equation (1) applied to this gas gives
We Ome EBay, Lunt LS Same eae Ce)
Now 100 parts by weight of air contain 77 parts of nitrogen and
23 parts of oxygen; if we apply, with M. Clausius, the law of abso-
lute specific heats to air considered as a compound body, designating
by K, and K, the absolute specific heats of nitrogen and oxygen,
100K'=77K,+23K,.
But if we apply the same law to nitrogen, to oxygen, and to hy-
drogen, the atomic weights of which are to each other as the num-
bers 14, 16, and 1,
K=14K,, K=16K,.
By transferring these values of K, and K, into the preceding
equation,
K’=0°069375K ;
and by replacing K and K’ in this last equation by the values de-
duced from the equations (2) and (3), we have, finally,
y' =0°069375y+0°000956.
Carbonic Acid and Hydrogen.—The data furnished by M. Reg-
nault’s experiments for carbonic acid are, C’’=0°21692 between 10°
and 210°, «’=0:003710 between zero and 100°, @’=0°52901. The
equation (1) gives for this gas
Brea GEES027 v1. atita 4 Midian Aa)
If we represent by 3 the atomic weight of iednaaen, the mean
atomic weight of carbonic acid is 22, ‘and according to the law of
absolute specific heats,
1K = 22K",
Replacing K and K" in this equation by the values deduced from
the equations (2) and (4), we have
y' =0'06818ly+0-006628.
78 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
In these calculations the specific heats are taken between zero and
200°, and the coefficients of dilatation are in relation to the interval
from zero to 100°; it is probable that between 100° and 200° the
coefficients of dilatation of air and hydrogen retain sensibly the
same value, and that the coefficient of dilatation of carbonic acid
tends to diminish, so that the value calculated for y” is a little too
small.
Conclusion.—If for each of these three gases (hydrogen, air, and
carbonic acid) we take the proportion of the heat consumed in in-
ternal work to the specific heat under a constant pressure, we find the
tl
: Ye OG YE
following values for a? a Gi?
Fydropent. 163.0%, Teuoae 0°297
Aare iat SOR Se owed ss 0°297 40008
Carbonic*acials se aie we 0°317+0:035
We see, therefore, that the heat consumed in internal work, when
the gas dilates under the constant pressure of the atmosphere be-
tween zero and 20U°, isa fraction of the specific heat under constant
pressure, which goes on increasing from hydrogen to air and from
air to carbonic acid.
We may likewise compare the quantities of heat expended in in-
ternal work under the same circumstances by considering the three
gases under the same volume at the temperature of melting ice. If
we take as the common volume the volume occupied by 1 kilog. of
hydrogen, the weight of equal volumes of air and carbonic acid are
respectively
1 kilog. eu 1 kilog.
0°06926 0°06926
and the quantities of heat consumed in internal work are respectively
for these three gases, considered under the same volume,
* 1°529;
Say! OE ln: _1:529
706996 = 06996"
or Hydrogen.. hh ceed ey
Ire Wo ee eri b. anen UgleOOl ae sabes
Carbonic acid ......... 1:505y+0°146.
These quantities of heat likewise increase from hydrogen to air
and from air to carbonic acid.
The law of Dulong and Petit applied to absolute specific heats,
therefore, leads us to arrange hydrogen, air, and carbonic acid, with
regard to internal work, in the order which the experiments of
Messrs. W. Thomson and Joule assign to these very gases.—
—Comptes Rendus, January 11, 1869, vol. Ixviii. pp. 95-98.
INVESTIGATIONS ON OBSCURE CALORIFIC SPECTRA.
BY M. DESAINS.
I have the honour to lay before the Academy the results of new
investigations on obscure calorific spectra. The questions I have
deavoured to solve are the following :—
(1) Given, in a spectrum formed by a prism of definite nature and
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 79
angle, a group of rays of almost the same refrangibilities, and forming
a band of feeble but constant magnitude, to investigate how the ca-
lorific action of this band varies with its mean refrangibility on the
one hand, and with the nature of the source of heat on the other.
(2) To investigate further how the transmissibility of such rays
through a screen of given thickness changes when either their mean
refrangibility is varied, or else the nature of the source or that of
the absorbent is altered.
The difficulties experienced in these researches are those always
met with in attempting to form, with rays other than the solar rays,
pure spectra of an intensity sufficient for calorimetric experiments.
I do not dare to affirm that I have completely solved these difficul-
ties; but, at any rate, I think I have succeeded in finding the condi-
tions in which the mixture of the rays is so feeble as not to exert an
appreciable influence on the result of my experiments.
. To produce these spectra I concentrated the rays from the source
of heat on a narrow slit. A lens with a focus of about 16 centims.
was placed about 30 centims. from the slit, and formed a defined
image of it in the conjugate focus. The prism placed behind this
lens deflected the rays, and transformed the colourless image into one
whose luminous part extended over from 0'015 to 0°025 metre, ac-
cording to the nature of the prisms used. The thermoscopic pile
was linear and very narrow, its aperture being scarcely broader than
0-001 metre.
Under these circumstances the purity of the spectra, and therefore
the certainty of the results furnished by analysis, must obviously
depend on the breadth of the slit which served as the source of heat.
The ideal case would be that in which this slit was infinitely nar-
row. ‘This cannot be realized; but in all the experiments whose
results I am about to indicate, I found that I could vary the breadth
of the slit from 0°0005 to 0°0015 metre (that is, in the proportion
of 1 : 3) without at all changing the conclusions to which I was led
concerning the distribution of heat in the various parts of the spec-
trum, or regarding the absorptions which the consecutive parts of
these layers experience in different media. I think I am thence
justified in assuming that in my experiments any injurious influence
of the mixture of the rays was eliminated.
I worked with four different sources :—
(1) A thick platinum wire kept at a red heat in the flame of a
Bunsen’s burner.
(2) A bat’s-wing burner with the section turned towards the slit .
(3) An ordinary moderator lamp.
(4) A Bourbouze lamp. The flame cf this lamp is a kind of
thimble of very close platinum-wire gauze, kept at a red heat by
means of a gas-flame fed by compressed air.
With the first two sources I used lenses and prisms of rock-salt ;
with the two others glass lenses, and prisms of flint glass or of rock-
salt. In the experiments in which Bourbouze’s lamp was used, I
modified the radiation by making it pass through a glass trough full
of water interposed between the source and the slit.
It would be impossible to detail all the results of my experiments ;
80 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
but I will give a comparative view of the results obtained with a
beautiful prism of rock-salt, using as a source of heat either the gas-
lamp or Bourbouze’s lamp.
All the arrangements were the same in the two sets of experiments; ;
in both cases the prism was in the position relative to the minimum
deviation of the red, which for the extreme red was 40° 18’. Under
these circumstances, working with the Bourbouze lamp, and taking
as the unit of effect that obtained in the extreme red, that obtained
at half a degree from this position is 2°2, at 1 degree 0°3 only, and at
1° 25' itis zero. At the same time the rays of the first three layers
are transmitted through a fluor-spar trough containing a layer of
water 2 millims. in thickness, in the proportionsof 0:90,0°60,and 0°75.
On the other hand, with a bat’s-wing burner, taking as unit the
effect produced in the extreme red, that obtained at half a degree
from this position becomes 4 instead of 2°2, at 1 degree it is 5 in-
stead of 0°3, and at 2 degrees it is still very appreciable. The spec-
trum thus extends much further into the obscure region. But it is
far less transmissible through water. For the band at half a degree
from the obscure red the transmission is scarcely 0°14 instead of
0:60, and for that at a distance of 1 degree from the red it becomes
insignificant.
Other differences are met with between the spectra furnished by
these two sources. With the gas-burner, under the conditions of my
experiments, no heat is found either in the yellow or the green, and
still less in the extreme white of the spectrum. With Bourbouze’s
lamp I easily found some in the green, although the intensity of the
maximum was not different in the two cases.
I may also be permitted to adduce the following results.
Working with Bourbouze’s lamp, the transmissibility of rays of
the maximum through water seemed a little less than that of the rays
which precede or succeed them in the order of refrangibility.
A similar effect is observed in the solar rays; I have also observed
a similar maximum in investigating the action of a trough full of
chloroform on the rays from a gas-burner.
Iodized chloride of carbon allows all the obscure part of the radia-
tion from this source to pass in abundance; in other words, the
transmission through it of the extreme red rays is very little different
from that of the other obscure rays ; if there be any difference, it is in
favour of the transmissibility of the least-refrangible rays. The lu-
minous part of the spectrum is reduced by the action of this absorbent
-to two beautiful bands, one red and the other violet, separated by a
well-defined dark space.
The transmissibility through ether diminishes with the refrangibi-
lity when a moderator-lamp is used as source of heat; but it is very
appreciable for rays of the maximum.
All these experiments agree with those I had the honour of pre-
senting to the Academy the 9th of last August, to prove that if, in
pure spectra, we isolate the pencils formed of rays whose deviations
by the same prism are almost identical, these pencils may be very
unequally transmissible through the same absorbent if they arise
from different sources. —Comptes Rendus, Noy. 30, 1868,
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, ann DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.
(FOURTH SERIES.]
UG Us Veog,
XI. On the Constants of Capillarity of Molten Bodies.
By G. Quincxy*,
1. J POINTED out ina previous communicationt that the con-
stants of capillarity of different fluids might be compared
at temperatures in the immediate neighbourhood of their solidi-
fication- or melting-points. [have now thought it proper to ex-
tend the determinations given elsewhere to a greater number
of chemical elements and compounds, as the forces which the
particles of any given fluid exert upon each other certainly de-
pend on circumstances less complicated than those between par-
ticles of heterogeneous substances, and we may hope accordingly
to obtain some clearer ideas in this way of the nature of the
perplexing molecular forces, which act (almost always) only at
exceedingly small distances.
The following inquiry rests on two principles, previously
established by Dr. Thomas Young, which, however, I may, for
the sake of connexion, demonstrate 1 this place.
2. A mass of fluid, m, at the point P of the free surface (2. e.
bounded by vacuum) of a fluid is attracted by another particle
A of the surface-layer (fig. 1), from which its distance 1s d, with
* Communicated in abstract to the Royal Academy of Sciences, Berlin,
May 28,1868. ‘Translated by Professor Jack, Owens College, Manchester.
+ Berliner Monatsbericht, Feb. 27, 1868, p. 132. Poge. Ann. vol.cxxxiv.
p. 356.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 253. Aug. 1869. G
82 Prof. G. Quincke on the Constants of
the force mm'd(d). The direction of this Fig. 1.
force is the line joming the particles. The
function of the distance depends on the re-
sultant of attracting and repelling forces, and
disappears when d is larger than the radius
of their sphere of action, which is a barely sen- Q
sible magnitude. The plane through A and
the normal at P to the fluid surface, cuts the =
latter in a curve which, near P, coincides d,
with a circle whose radius is p. A rp
A second particle, m,, symmetrically situ-
ated at B on the other side, exerts the same force as A. The
components of these two forces perpendicular to the normal de-
stroy one another; the sum of the components parallel to the
normal, which is the resultant of the two forces, is
2mm, (a) cos (7, d) =mm,d(d) a
We obtain the action of all the molecules of the normal section
on the particle m situated at P by sunming up these expressions
from d=0 to d= a certain value exceeding the indefinitely small
radius of the sphere of molecular action. Neglecting the con-
stant, we have for this sum
Simm!) = -
Calling p, the radius of curvature of a second normal section
which is perpendicular to the former, similar considerations give
a similar result, and the whole action of the particles in two
normal sections perpendicular to each other on a particle at the
point P is | ay
A+ u¢ -. =),
Pics rudeat
where & is the attraction which the particles of two normal sec-
tions perpendicular to each other exert on an element of the
plane surface of the size of the unit surface. The well-known
principle of Euler gives
ein od 1
Bolieh a By
where R is the greatest and R, the least radius of curvature on
the surface. The entire action of the mass of fluid on P, or the
capillary pressure (p) at the poimt P of the fluid-surface, is
therefore l l
or, introducing two new constants for these summations,
r=K+5(qtE) ot
= constant,
Capillarity of Molten Bodies. 83
This pressure is normal to the surface. K is the pressure at a
point on the plane fluid-surface, H is the difference of pressures
which would be exerted on the unit of a plane fluid-surface and on
the unit surface of a sphere with unit radius. The right-hand term
of (1) may become negative if the two radii of curvature lie out-
side the fluid, or when the surface is concave. Both H and K
depend only on the nature of the fluid; both stand for the con-
stants which Laplace* denoted by the same letters. The constants
f and & are proportional to the masses which exert influence.
If the density of the fluid be the same inside and on the surface
and be called «, & and / (and therefore also K and H) must be
proportional to e* for the same values of } and the same values
of the radius of the sphere of activity. Accordingly, assuming
an increasing temperature and taking ¢ as constant, the capillary
pressure must decrease proportionally to the square of the density.
Experiment teaches that (1) is true for points in the free sur-
face not only in presence of vacuum, but also when that surface
is bounded by any gas or by atmospheric air.
3. If z be the elevation of a point P ina capillary surface above
the level or horizontal part of the surface, we deduce from (1),
and from the hydrostatical principle that there must be the same
pressure throughout a horizontal plane within the fluid,
Myz= = (+ +e) aie kes
in which M is the mass of a unit volume of a fluid, and g the
accelerating force of gravity. For surfaces of rotation and points
at distance xz from the axis of rotation we have, therefore,
dz
Ticatlarsitt athe 5
ey e ° ° ® ( )
da?
If a hollow cylinder, the radius of which is 7, be immersed in
a fluid with a level surface, and if the axis of z be its axis, the
volume between the two cylinders which have z for their height
above the level, and # andz+dz for the radu, will bez. 27x da;
and the entire weight W of the fluid which is raised above the
level 1 ‘ :
0
or, substituting the value of z given in (8),
Pd bane 2
atte 2 ate (BY
Meets) (+ aa) J
* CEuvres de Laplace, vol. iv. p. 407 (1845).
G2
84: Prof. G. Quincke on the Constants of
If we call w the angle which the last element of the fluid sur-
face, where it meets the solid, makes with the vertical solid
bounding wall,
dz
=| Ee t dx B
& ae rk ( FEO = COS ;
1+ 7 a
dx?
and equation (4) becomes
NY pad
ap = g 608. ~- » te ecb te) a re
The weight of the fluid per unit of length of the circumference
of the cylinder which is lifted above the horizontal level is
> cos @; 7. e. it is independent of the radius of the cylinder, and
depends only on the nature of the fluid and of the enclosing solid
wall. The equation is also true for cylinders not hollow; and
every vertical wall may be considered approximately a part of
such a holiow or solid cylinder.
In fluids which wet the solids (7. e. where the last element of
the fluid layer is vertical) w is 0, and
iis FEE Or i a
aan ae
The weight of afluid sustained per unit of length of the line of con-
tact (which is the line of intersection of the vertical wall and the
capillary surface) 2s a constant quantity, and measures the mutual
attraction of the particles of the given fluid—that is, is its cohe-
sion- or capilarity-constant.
Since Poisson’s time, the quantity
9
a es eee
g Mg
is frequently called the constant of capillarity. The advantage
is, that when it is divided by the inner radius it gives the mean
elevation above the horizontal level to which a fluid which wets
the solid ascends. The elevation of a fluid which wets a plane
vertical wall, or the rise of the highest point of the curved fluid
surface over the horizontal level, is «.
4, Equation (7) is true also for drops which are formed at
the mouth of a vertical pipe, on the assumption that, in con-
sequence of the gradual accession of new fluid, the same pres-
sure 1s found in the interior fluid, at the mouth of the pipe, as in
a level fluid surface. The drop goes on increasing till o=0, or
till the highest element of the fluid is vertical, and then it falls off.
If the radius of the cylinder on which the drop is formed be very
small, the weight of the portion of fluid which remains hanging
Capillarity of Molten Bodies. 85
may be neglected, and the weight of the portion of the drop
which falls may be treated as the W in equation (7).
We may equally neglect the fact that new fluid comes down
at the time when the drop is separating, which tends to make
the drop too large. When this access of fluid is too great,
on the other hand, there is a thin jet of fluid which may readily
be resolved into smaller drops by taps from the outside. This
is the explanation of the fact that, in the case of many fluids, the
drops attain a maximum for a determined velocity in the supply
of the issuing fluid *.
Although it thus appears that the process of the formation of
drops 1s exceedingly complicated, the application of equation (7)
would give us approximate values of the capillarity-constants « ;
and this method has at least the recommendation that there is
no better, or none which is not complicated by too many expe-
rimental difficulties.
5. The experiment is simplest for gold and silver. Vertical
threads of these metals were held by pincers and brought down
into a small gas-flame the dimensions of which were not greater
than 3 millims. diameter and 8 millims. height, so that the metal,
as soon as it was melted, formed in a drop at the lower end of the
thread. The drop increased in this way, and rose on the solid
thread, which was gradually lowered to the flame. When it
was too large it fell into a vessel filled with water, and was
immediately solidified, and afterwards dried and weighed. After
a little practice it became easy to avoid any shaking of the
threads, by which the drops were apt to be too soon detached.
The molten metal was colder above than below; and at the
upper part the temperature was only a little above that of the
melting-point of the substance. The weight of the drop in mil-
ligrammes, divided by the circumference of the wire in milli-
metres, gives us accordingly the constant of capiliarity « for that
melting-point.
The shorter the distance between the drop and the pincers
holding the wire, the larger the drops seemed to be. This was
due probably to the lower temperature of the drop, in conse-
quence of the abstraction of heat by the wire and pincers.
Further, the drops from a gold wire melted over a common
gas-flame and over one fed with oxygen weighed nearly the same ;
so that the influence of temperature in these experiments may
be neglected.
The diameter of the wires was measured by a microscope and
an eyepiece-micrometer which gave one hundred divisions. Hach
single division (and tenths of a division could easily be esti-
mated) corresponded, therefore, according to the magnifying-
power used, to from ‘007 millim. to-02 millim.
* Compare Pogg, Ann. vol. exxxi. p. 130,
86 Prof. G. Quincke on the Constants of
The silver was stated to be chemically pure; the gold was
slightly alloyed with silver, chiefly to facilitate the process of
wire-drawing.
Glass threads, drawn out before the lamp from a thicker piece
of glass, were also treated like wires. The determinations, how-
ever, were less trustworthy, because glass becomes soft before
melting, and accordingly, through a commencing drop-formation
above the fluid drop, the glass cylinder from which the drop falls
off is really widened. A series of determinations was made for each
wire, and the mean of them taken. The results collected below
prove that the weight of the drops really increases (as it ought to
do according to theory) in proportion to the diameter of the wires.
_ Silver. | Gold.
2r. W. ae 2r. W. a. 2r.
millim./grm. |mgrms,|/millim./grm. |mgrms.|millim./grm. |mgrms.
0:4971| 0:0733| 47-14 || 0°2566 0-080 | 99-24 06709) 0-0422; 20-02
0-2318)| 0:0299| 41-13 || 02009 0-075 |103. - || 0-5232/ 0:0273) 16-62
(:0993) 0:0130) 41°66 || 0-0695| 0:0215| 98-42 || 0:2441) 0-0134| 17-48
O077FS0 O10) AT OO Cee tere al eee) | ieecee er 0:2006; 00115) 18°24
Mean | 42°75 || ...... Mean |100-22 || ...... Mean | 18:09
6. The measurements for platinum and palladium wires were
made in the same way as those for gold and silver. Oxygen,
however, was conducted into the gas-flame through a platinum
nozzle. Palladium was volatilized with such remarkable rapi-
dity in the oxyhydrogen flame, that I might compare the palla-
dium drops in this respect to ether drops at the ordinary tem-
perature. The melting- and boiling-points appear to be very
near each other, since | was unable with an ordinary blow-
pipe-flame (the ‘pointed flame of the glass-blowers) to melt the
metal; the drop lost more by volatilization, as soon as it had
attained a certain size, than it gamed by fusion of new wire,
Accordingly I found the values of a always too small in my nu-
merous experiments, and that which I give below makes no pre-
tence to accuracy. When palladium solidifies, there are formed
on the smooth drop-surface needle-shaped excrescences, which
give the mass a peculiar appearance.
Platinum. Palladium.
2r. We ah. 2r. Wie ah.
millim. jgrm. mgrms. |/millim. erm. merms.
05675 | 02912 | 163 || 0-6829 | 01300 | 163-4
0-3689 | 0:2055 177-4 ||
071921 | 0:0996 L651 1)
0:0998 | 0:0580 169°8
0:0767 | 0-0410 169°9
Mean | 169-041] » |
Capillarity of Molten Bodies. 87
7, To obtain drops of éim and selenium, these substances were
molten in glass tubes, the lower part of which was funnel-shaped,
ending in a thin vertical pipe. The part of this pipette-shaped
pipe which was cut off by the glass-knife was used to determine
the inner or outer diameter by means of microscope and eyeplece-
micrometer. Figs. 2 and 3 show the drop attached to the cuter
and inner circumference. Determinations in which the drops
had formed partly on the inside, partly on the outside (fig. 4),
Figs 2, Fig. 3. Fig. 4.
or where the outer glass wall was wetted
by the drops (fig. 5), were rejected. The
drops fell into a flat porcelain saucer filled
with water, or which was simply kept
cold. I took great pains to see that the
drops were formed as slowly as possible.
They followed each other usually so much
the more slowly the more the cooling
down progressed. The last drop which
fell before complete solidification was
heavier than that preceding, which was
again heavier than that before it, and so
on; so that the capillarity-constant in-
creases with diminishing temperature.
The difference, however, is insignificant,
and in some cases I have given means
collected from these last drops. Strictly
speaking, the last drop determines the
eapillarity-constant in the neighbourhood
of the melting-pomt. From the upper
part of the pipette-shaped vessel a piece of india-rubber tubing
went to the mouth, which made it easy to regulate the speed
of the issuing fluid.
The determinations for zinc were made in the same way; but,
in consequence of the higher melting-point, it was found more
88 Prof. G. Quincke on the Constants of
convenient to use the glass-blower’s flame instead of that of an
ordinary Bunsen.
Selenium. | atime Zine.
Pa eo ilo Ln eee.
miilim./grm. See aen grm. |mgrms.|/millim.jgrm. |mgrms,
0-9670) 0°0214| 7-045 | 0-665 | 0-1200) 57-41 || 0-8368) 02122) 80-74
0°7164| 0-:0158) 7-021 || 0-642 | 0:1245) €1-69 || 0-7285) 0-1920| 83-90
0°6688) 0°0155| 7°377 || 0-549 | 0-0976| 56°52 || 0-7020) 0:1847| 83°75
0°6125| 0:0140, 7:276 0-470 | 0:0800| 54-25
0:437 | 9-090 | 65°39
| 0-395 | 0-072 | 58:08
| 0'311| 0-064 | 65°62
a ee ee
Mean | 7-180
ieee Mean | 59°85 |) ..... Mean | 82:79
8. In the case of bodies which, like phosphorus, cadmium, lead,
antimony, bismuth, ‘oxidize easily, 1t was necessary to produce
the drops in an atmosphere of carbonic acid. In the case of
zine also, where oxidation might have been suspected in the open
air, several of the experiments were performed in an atmosphere
of carbonic acid, which demonstrated that the capillarity-con-
stants are little, if at all, dependent on the nature of the sur-
rounding gas when the surface is not altered by oxidation.
The phosphorus was melted in a test-tube under water, a ball
of india-rubber fastened on the glass tube which had been drawn
out into the shape of a pipette, and the molten phosphorus
sucked up by pressure on this ball. The glass pipe was care-
fully dried on the outside with blotting-paper. In these ex-
periments it often happens that the phosphorus remains in a
fluid state far below its melting-pomt, and that we find the
weight of the drop or the capillarity-constant too large. Pos-
sibly the abnormal result given by Dupré*, who found a =8°407
milligrammes for 46° C., a number about twice as large as that
which is deduced from my experiments, isto be explained in this
way. ‘The drops taken up under water remain also fluid for a
considerable time ; and it happens frequently, when they follow
each other quickly, that several gather themselves into one,
which then itself continues fluid for a considerable time. In
the determination of the constant of capillarity it is natural in
this case to take account of the number of drops which have
been collected into one.
Zine and antimony were molten in the flame of the glass-
blower’s lamp, cadmium and lead in that of a Bunsen’s burner.
The carbonic acid was obtained from marble and hydrochloric
acid, led through a washing-bottle with a solution of carbonate
of soda and a series of Babo’s bulb-tubes, which were also
* Ann, de Chim. et de Phys. vol. ix. (1866) pp. 330 & 384.
Capillarity of Molten Bodies. 89
wet with this solution, so as to remove the last traces of hydro-
chloric acid which might be taken over along with it. A black
caoutchouc tube and a vertical glass pipe conducted the carbonic
acid to the bottom of a beaker filled with water to the height
of several centimetres, over the edge of which the gas then
escaped. The lower opening of the pipette tubes was brought
into this atmosphere of carbonic acid; and care was taken, by
moving them about, that the different solidified drops in the
beaker-glass should fall at different places on the bottom.
In the cases of cadmium and phosphorus, which are very rea-
dily oxidized, this arrangement was frequently unsatisfactory.
The carbonic acid was in this case led into the lower end of a
glass tube, A B, of 120 millims. height and 20 millims. dia-
meter, which dipped into a saucer of porcelain filled 15 millims.
high with water. The narrow glass tube was completely filled
with pure carbonic acid; a slow current of gas prevented its
being mixed by diffusion with atmospheric air. Care was taken,
by shifting the porcelain saucer under the fixed glass tube in the
middle of which the drops formed, tbat the single drop should
solidify at different places.
The formation of drops in the different substances takes place
in different, and frequently in highly characteristic ways. A
mere glance at the solidified drop is sufficient to decide from
which of the metals it has been formed.
Cadmium exhibits a remarkable phenomenon when the car-
bonic-acid atmosphere contains traces of air. ., (I=) (14 224),
Ap=e(1 +a) (1— —ni)(1— ao
ry:
Case I11.—-When no point in the plate is mechanically fixed.
Since X (fig. 1) is a point so taken that if the plate were cut
asunder ¢here, the resistance of the part X A to being thrust
Inclined Plane when subjected to alternations of Temperature. 111
upwards would equal that of XB to being thrust downwards
when the temperature is raised, an element at X will dilate
equally upwards and downwards, and the point X itself (sup-
posed the centre of the element) will remain fixed.
In the same way, since X, is a point so taken that the resist-
ance to X,A being pulled downwards is equal to that to X,B
being pulled upwards if the temperature is lowered, an élement
at a will contract equally upwards and downwards, and the
centre X, of that element will remain fixed.
To determine the positions of X and X,.
Pressure necessary to thrust XA upwards = Kwf,XA,
re Fe » XB downwards = Kwf,(a—XA),
a to pull X,A downwards = Kwf,X,A,
i a » %,Bupwards =Kuwf,(a—X,A);
. Kwf,XA=Kwf,(a—XA),
Kwf,X A =Kwf,(a—X,A).
Whence we obtain, substituting for f, and f2 their values,
sin ( ea tan 6
ei! sles dost sin = cost 2 a4 tan tan b a,
yas sim (P+s) _ Se lay tan 4
ee aeat 2 sin ne COS L ie tan d (19)
n (d+e) yo} tan t
esd Ha
ag had sind cost Ae tan d mee)
a (p—
tans )
=yaq1— neh. ay
X and X, are therefore symmetrically placed in the bar.
It is evident that while the plate is in the act of dilatation, the
point X may be considered mechanically fixed, and whilst it is
in the act of contraction, the point X,.
_ The equal and opposite resistances at X and X, may, first, equal
or be less than the thrust of dilatation, im either of which cases
the whole plate will suffer dilatation or contraction ; or, secondly,
the equal and opposite resistances at X and X, may be greater
than the thrust of dilatation, in which case a portion only will
dilate or contract.
Now the ¢hrust with which the plate tends to dilate under an
sin } cos oho
112 Canon Moseley on the Descent of a Solid Body on an
increase of temperature of ¢,° is represented by
sey
1+tr
And similarly the s¢rain with which it tends to contract under
a diminution of temperature f, is
KEt) +
1] ae t,» !
Whence it follows that the opposite resistances at X and X, are
respectively greater than the elasticity of the plate, so that a por-
tion only dilates and contracts, when
pia KELX
XAf,Kw > I ime
1
and
KEt,x
X, Bf, Kw => ie
or, since
Ta ly poi, es
] 7" cosesin d
and
sin (pb +2)
i, cosh . *
when
3 KEt,~
Une sin(@—e) sin(P+e)” 1+dAt,
? cosesind cosp _ KEZA
1a
* Tf ro resistance were opposed to the dilatation of the element Az, it
would become, by an increase of temperature ¢,, (1+¢,A)Av. To bring it
back, therefore, to the length from which it has dilated, each foot must be
tAAv : : ay ge
compressed Dy aa gauAe Since, therefore, its section is K, the thrust
necessary to compress it is represented by (mua orby 747
: 1
+ If R represents the resistance to crushing per square inch of section,
and S similarly represents the tensile strength, the bar will crush at X if
and will tear asunder at X, if
IRE 32
aw >KS.
Inclined Plane when subjected to alternations of Temperature. 118
or generally when
_1i ka sin 2 $ cost
w (L4éA) sin(f+e) sm (b—s)"
In the case in which this condition is nof satisfied, or when the
whole plate, having no point mechanically fixed, dilates or contracts
by the supposed variation in its temperature, let A, B, (fig. 2) be
what A B becomes when heated by ¢,. Then, since X A dilates
as it would doif fixed at the bottom, and X B as it would do if
fixed at the top, substituting the values (14) and (15) of XA
and XB in the third and first of equations (11),
al tr ee (6—t) {1- wa sin (6+ ¢)sin ae
(18)
sin Cos & AK cos } sin ¢ cos t
eis sin raat _ wasin (6 +4) mea \
ees tM) sin d cos & Tmeribteas dh sin Cost i
- ee! wasin (6+) sin (P— ,
*. AB = a(1+Az,) {1- BR sine 008 4 pe 8)
Similarly,
wa sin (d+) sin (d@—e
A.B,=a(1—At,) 41 oa QE sin2écos. Bee rg (2)))
If the plate be first subjected to an increase of temperature,
becoming A, B,, and then to a diminution, becoming A, B,, the
value of "A, B, from the former of the above equations must be
substituted ae a in the latter.
We shall then have approximately,
an wa*sin?(d +2)sin*(d— S ,
Ae a1 ++ rz,)(1 —ni,) 41 oF AK? sin2 20 cos? t ° (21)
By every such heating and equal cooling the bar will therefore
experience an exceedingly small diminution of its entire length.
V.
The descent of the plate when subjected to an increase and then
to a decrease of temperature, supposing the whole to dilate and
contract.
Observing that X B (fig. 2) dilates as it would do if X were
fixed, and substituting for a, in the first of equations (12), the
value of XB (equation (15), ~
B= _. sin sin (6+) fin— w sin (p+e)sin(p—4) |
=F
sin Cos 6 2H sin 2d cost
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88. No. 258. Aug. 1869. I
114 Canon Moseley on the Descent of a Solid Body on an
Observing also that X,B, contracts as it would do if X, were
fixed, and that in estimating its contraction by substituting X,B
instead of X,B, for a in the second of equations (12), an error
will arise only in respect to terms of two dimensions in A and
1
— we obtain as before
KH’
sin (6—1) fy we sin (b+) sin (b—2)
sin @ cose | ” 2H sin 2¢6 cose } ;
Bjb.=
a
bole
Subtracting this equation from the last,
i a : ] i
BBa= sa paar sin (p+) — fy sin ia
wa sin (b+) sin (d—e) tane,
ak 3
2K sin d
or, by reduction,
_ atans { | a ae
BB. 2 tan d (> Gensel) tan ¢ | (22)
__ wasn (b+4) sn (6—0) } [
E sin 2¢ cos ¢
by which equation is determined the descent of the plate after
having been heated by ¢, and then cooled by é, supposing the
whole of it to dilate and contract.
If ¢t;=t.=¢, or if the plate, having been heated by ¢° above
T°, is then cooled down to the temperature T° again,
tan t _ wa sin (p+2) sin (6—2) ,
BBLS tGad | BE sn 26 cosy
The bar descends if
wa sin (p+e) sin(d—e) :
{> ~ QEAsin2d cose — e e e ° ° e e ° (24)
Vi.
When part only of the plate dilates or contracts by the assumed
variation of temperature, no point init being mechamecally fixed, to
determine the length.
Substituting the values of XB and X;B for a in the first
and second of equations (8), and XA and X A in the third
and fourth,
Inclined Plane when subjected to alternations of Temperature. 115
XB 1,50 (b +1) EA2 Zi cos b ‘eo
1 2"sin @ cost | 2w(1+Az,)sin (6—0) |
X Bargin (=) ____EN& cos $
2 2"sind@cose 2w(1—dé,) sin (b+) Qs
XA —1, 50 (p—1) En2¢; cos ( ma
1 2"sin cose 2w(1+A¢#,) sm (b+0) ° |
XA —1, 50 (b+.) En2é5 cos b |
= a a
sing@ cose 2w(l—Ad,) sn (P—1) J
Adding the first and third of the above equations and the
second and fourth, and reducing,
EA2Z; sin 2¢ cos ¢
2w(1 +Az,) sin (+0) sin (6—s) (26)
____ EBA*4 sin 2¢ cost
2w(1—rz,) sin (+2) sin (b—)
To determine the length of the plate when having been first
heated by t, it is cooled by t,, the value A,B, from the first of
the above equations must be substituted for a in the second,
iB, ED? sin 2¢ cose ‘(ea e iB \
i ae=4T dy sin (b+4) sin (P— elena sity ee. ;
A\By=a+
A,B,=a—
or
ean EN? (E, +2) (41: —t —Atyt,) sin 2¢ cost
ae 2w(1+rt,)1 —ré,) sin (b+ 4) sin(d—s)*
The bar will be lengthened if
(£—t,)>Alyty, ov if (-- =) aN,
to
(27)
Vil.
When the plate is heated (t,°), to determine what part is not di-
lated ; and when it 1s cooled (t,°), what part is not contracted.
2X (fig. 2) is the part which, when the plate is heated
(,°), 1s not dilated; and z, X, is the part which, when the
bar is cooled (¢,°), is not contracted. In the two cases the
points X and X, respectively may be considered pomts mechani-
cally fixed. Therefore taking XB to be represented by a in the
first of equations (7), and observing that a—&,=XB—Xwv=Bz,
HAt, cos @
hace w(1+A4,) sin( (f6—c)
Similarly, taking 2A to be represen ted by a in the third of equa-
tions (7), and observing that a— 2, =2A—«X=AX,
12
116 Canon Moseley on the Descent of a Solid Body on an
— Enz, cos b
eae Che.) eee)
Yn like manner,
Et, cos b
Hee w(l—A”é,) sin (6+ 1)
Eni, cos h
Rte w(1—At,) sin(p—v)
whence
Enz, sin 2¢ cos ¢
Ta Me en 7y case 1 3
ae w(1+Az,) sin (6 +2) sn (h—2z)
X» HAZ, sin 2¢ cos t
2, =a— w(1—At,) sin (b+ 4) sin C=
If these expressions vanish or become negative, there is no
part} of the plate which does not dilate by the assumed increase,
and contract by the assumed decrease of temperature.
The fact of the descent of a solid body upon an inclined plane
when subjected to alternations of temperature was first observed
in the descent of the lead on the southern side of the roof of the
choir of Bristol Cathedral, and was communicated to the Royal
Society { in April 1855. I have since verified it by the fol-
lowing experiment. I fixed a deal board 9 feet long and 5 inches
broad to the southern wall of my house so as to form an inclined
plane, and upon it [ placed a sheet of lead, turning its edges
down over the side edges of the board, and taking care that it
should not bind upon them, but be free to move with no other
obstruction than that which arose from its friction. The ineli-
nation of the board was 18° 82!, the thickness of the lead 1}
of an inch, its length 9 feet, ‘and its weight 28 lbs. The lower
end of the board was brought opposite to a window, and a ver-
nier was constructed which could be read from within, and by
which the position of the lead upon the board could be deter-
mined te the 100th of an inch. I began to measure the descent
of the lead on the 16th of February, 1858, and recorded it every
morning between 7 and 8 o’clock, and every evening between 6
and 7 o’clock until the 28th of June.
* If a sheet of lead rest on a plane of oak inclined at 223°,
Xx#=a—30°63t,, Xi7,=a—30°63 t,,
where the length is measured in feet, and the temperature in degrees of
Fahrenheit, and the modulus of elasticity of lead is assumed to be 720,000,
its coefficient of expansion 7534555, and the limiting angle of resistance be-
tween it and oak 222°,
t This agrees with inequality (18).
{ Proceedings of the Royal Society, vol. vii. p. 341.
Inclined Plane when subjected to alternations of Temperature. 117
The following were the measurements observed during the
month of May :—
Distance of the lower
end of the lead from
Date, | zero of the vernier, in | Descent in| Descent in| Descent in
1858. inches. the day. | the night. | 24 hours.
Morning. | Evening.
May 1. | 10-95 W310 | -15
( |The lead, overlapping the end of the board
3. by nearly a foot, was this evening drawn
1 back to 0-77
4 0:78 1:06 28 03 3l
5 1-09 1:21 12 03 15
6 1:24 1:44 "20 10 30
7 154 1-65 ‘ll G2 13
8. 1-67 1:88 21 00 21
9 1:88 1:93 05 07 12
10 2:00 2:19 19 00 19
1] 2°19 2°25 06 05 11
12 2:30 2°33 03 03 06
13 2°36 2°40 04 09 13
14 2:49 2°55 06 00 06
15 2:55 2°68 13 06 19
16 2-74 2:90 16 01 17
7 2°91 2:92 0] 03 04
18 2°95 3°08 13 08 21
19 3:16 3°50 34 10 44
20 3°69 377 17 10 27
21 o87 3°87 00 03 03
22 3°90 4-12 22 03 25
23 Al5 4-54 a 04 A3
24 4°58 4-64 06 00 06
25 4°64 5°16 52 04 56
26 5°20 5°41 21 09 30
27 5°50 5°84 34 01 35
28 5°85 6:05 20 02 22
29 6:07 6°37 30 03 do
30 6:40 6:55 15 08 23
3] 6°63 6°80 17
The daily observations were given up on the 31st of May ; but
the positions of the lead were registered on the 19th, 22nd, 2drd,
24th, and 26th of the following month. The average daily de-
scents 1n successive months, measured in inches, were—
February. March. April. May. | June.
wm i eee
-1000 -13806 16133 21500 | 21888
To compare the actual descent on any day with that com-
puted by formula (22), it would be necessary to know, not the
extreme temperatures only of the lead on that day, but every
oscillation of temperature between those extremes; for every
118 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
such oscillation of the temperature up and down in the course
of the day and night contributed to the daily descent; and it is
the effect of these oscillations, however numerous and however
separately small, which that descent totalizes. I accordingly
remarked that it was on days when the thermometer in the sun
varied its height rapidly and much (as on bright days with cold
winds, or when clouds were driven over. the sun) that the de-
scent was greatest. So remarkably indeed was this the case,
that every cloud which shut off the sun for atime from the lead,
and every cold gust of wind which blew upon it in the sunshine,
seemed to bring it a step down. On the contrary, when the sky
was open and clear, and the heat advanced and receded uniformly,
the descent was less, although the difference of the extreme tem-
peratures of the day might be greater. It was least of all on
days when there was continuous rain. During the night it
was often imperceptible—especially in the earlier months of the
year, when it was dark from the time of the evening observation
to that of the morning. In April and May this interval included
a period of sunlight in the early morning, to which the descent
registered as having taken place in the night was no doubt due.
XIII. On the Structure of the Human Ear, and on the Mode in
wiich it administers to the Perception of Sound. By R. Moon,
M.A., Honorary Fellow of Queen’s College, Cambridge*.
| STATED in a former papert that the human ear is so con-
structed as to suppress vibrations arising from waves of
condensation which become incident upon it, at the same time
that it transmits to the sensorium vibrations arising from waves
of rarefaction. JI now propose to exhibit the grounds upon
which I rest this assertion.
The view of the constitution and functions cf the organ of
hearing which I have just expressed, incredible as it may at first
sight appear, will be found, if I mistake not, to dissipate the
mystery which has hitherto characterized that most complicated
anatomical problem. ‘The circumstances by which this view of
the subject was first suggested to me require some words of ex-
planation.
I have elsewhere shown} that if the problem of the propaga-
tion of sound through air be pursued by a strict analysis, we
shall be led to a conclusion with regard to the velocity of pro-
* Communicated by the Author.
+ “On the Theory of Sound.” See Phil, Mag. for March last.
{ See the paper last referred to, and an earlier one, ‘On the Theory of
Pressure in Fiuids,” in the Phil. Mag. for August 1868.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 119
pagation materially different from that to which a provisional
and imperfect theory would conduct us.
I have shown that the velocity with which a small disturbance
is propagated through air of a given density is not, as the exist-
ing theory would teach us, invariably the same whatever the
character of the disturbance,—that, on the contrary, the disturb-
ances capable of such transmission are divisible into two classes,
viz. waves of condensation, in which the density is throughout
greater, and waves of rarefaction, in which the density is through-
out less than the original density of the air through which the
propagation takes place*—in waves of the first kind the velocity
of propagation being somewhat less, while in waves of the second
kind it is somewhat greater than the calculated velocity given by
the existing theory}.
In arriving at these conclusions I was confronted by this great
difficulty, viz. that in a great variety of instances sounding
bodies give rise to waves of condensation and waves of rarefac-
tion simultaneously ; so that in such instances we should have a
double sound whenever the distance of the sounding body from
the ear is considerable, unless the ear were so constructed as to
suppress one of the two classes of waves.
So incredible did this latter conclusion appear to me, that
nothing but the conviction which reiterated examination had
wrought in me of the certainty of the results at which I had
arrived would have induced me so much as to examine into the
evidence upon the subject.
But, however perfect might be the parallelism which I was
disposed @ priorz to attribute to waves of condensation and waves
of rarefaction as agents for the transmission of sound, the slight-
est examination of the auditory apparatus was sufficient to show
that no such parallelism exists in their modes of action upon
the organ of hearing, or in the contrivances by which the latter
is adapted to their reception.
The shghtest examination was sufficient to show, as I propose
by and by to point out, that some of the most striking and
characteristic features of the auditory mechanism are specially
calculated to transmit the action of rarefied waves, are essential
to such transmission, and can exercise no function in the trans-
mission of condensed waves. Nevertheless a long-cherished
* Although waves of condensation and waves of rarefaction are very
commonly called into play simultaneously, it may be shown, even upon
the principles of the existing theory, that waves of either kind are capable
of transmission when no waves of the other kind are present.
+ I must be understood to refer here to the theoretical velocity of pro-
pagation apart from Laplace’s correction, which correction, for the reasons
stated in the paper of March last before referred to, 1 cannot regard as
otherwise than untenable.
120 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
though erroneous mode of viewing the subject had its natural
influence—a false theory leading to false assumptions as to mat-
ters of fact—and for a long time prevented my recognition of
the truth of which I was in search, and which I now proceed
forthwith to establish, viz. that waves of condensation may be left
out of account in considering the phenomena of aéreally transmitted
sound.
The structure of the human ear is described by anatomists
with a lucidity and precision than which nothing can be more
admirable; but when we turn from the accounts of the structure
to the accounts of the functions of the different parts of the organ,
all is confused and contradictory*. The subject is undoubtedly
beset by great difficulties, two of which have been very generally
felt and recognized :— (1) that arising from the supposed double
transmission of motion from the tympanal membrane to the la-
byrinth, viz. through the bones of the ear and by means of the
air in the tympanal cavity—ain other words, through the fenestra
ovalis and through the fenestra rotunda; (2) that due to the
fact that very considerable power of hearing, even articulate
sounds, often remains after the tympanal membrane has been
removed, and the chain of bones hangs loose in, or is absent
from the cavity.
Nevertheless I cannot but think that the great difficulty has
consisted in the unaccountable and unfortunate propensity+
which, so far as [ am aware, has characterized every writer on
the subject, of considering the effect upon the ear of condensed
waves alone—the efforts of each investigator being thus confined
to examining the effect of a particular kind of wave upon an
organ which, as I hope to show, has been expressly contrived so
that waves of that kind shall produce upon it no effect whatever.
* Take, for example, the testimony of Sir John Herschel, delivered so
far back as the year 1830, but the justice of which at the present time, I
apprehend, few will be inclined to dispute.
‘* Of all our organs, perhaps the ear is one of the least understood....
In the ear everything is.... obscure. It is not with it as with the eye,
where the known properties of light afford a complete elucidation of the
whole mechanism of vision, and the use of every part of the visual ap-
paratus.” |
‘Tn the cavity behind the tympanum is placed a mysterious and com-
plicated apparatus” [the bones of the ear]. See Ency. Met. Art. Sound,
Nos. 319, 320. |
+ This propensity is the more surprising when we remember that no one
has ever supposed waves of rarefaction to be without their mfluence in the
production of sound, that the least consideration suffices to show that
either kind of wave may be propagated without the other, and that in a
great number of instances, as for example the sounds produced froma
kettledrum, where both kinds of waves occur, rarefied waves head the
column.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 121
The human ear may be divided into three principal regions, viz.
(1) The external ear, of which the only portion which here
concerns us is the meatus externus terminating in the tympanal
membrane.
(2) The tympanal cavity, which in the normal state is kept
filled with air through the intervention of the Eustachian tube
communicating with the throat; which tube is considered to be
ordinarily closed, and from time to time opened, during the act
of deglutition.
(3) The internal ear or labyrinth, consisting of a chamber or
system of mutually communicating chambers enclosed in the solid
bone of the skull.
Omitting details unnecessary for our present purpose, the la-
byrinth may be described as filled with a liquid in which are
immersed the nerves through whose agitation the sensation of
hearing is produced.
The fluid in the labyrinth is everywhere surrounded by the
solid bone, with the following exceptions :—
(a) Two small apertures, denominated respectively fenestra
ovalis and fenestra rotunda, where in place of the bone as a boun-
dary are substituted membranes, by which the labyrinth is sepa-
rated from the tympanal cavity, and by which the liquid in the
former is prevented from flowing into the latter.
() Certain foramina or (so-called) aqueducts, through which
the nerves with their attendant blood-vessels which supply the
labyrinth communicate with the general nervous and circulating
systems.
The sensation of hearing may be occasioned by means of vi-
brations transmitted through the bone of the skull to the laby-
rinth ; but all articulate sounds, and in general all sounds which
are conveyed by the air, are transmitted to the labyrinth through
the two fenestree (ovalis and rotunda) above spoken of.
When the ear is in its normal state (that is, when the tympa-
num is perfect), all aéreally conveyed sounds become incident on
the tympanal membrane in the first mstance, and are thence
transmitted to one or both of the tympanal fenestrae by a machi-
nery or agency which will be described hereafter. But the agi-
tation of the tympanal membrane is a sine qud non as regards the
transmission to the sensitive system of articulate or other aéreally
conveyed sounds.
And here it may be observed that if the human tympanum
were, as its name implies, a drum (that is, a stretched flat mem-
brane whose movements are restrained solely by the circular
frame upon which it is fixed), no such simultaneous transmission
of waves of rarefaction and suppression of waves of condensation
as has above been spoken of could possibly take place.
122 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
For under such circumstances, if a wave of rarefaction, for in-
stance, were incident upon the tympanum, the pressure of the
air without the tympanal membrane being less than the mean
pressure, while the air within the tympanal membrane has the
mean pressure, a motion of the tympanal membrane—which (if
any) would necessarily be a motion outwards—could only take
place by reason of the membrane being stretched. ‘The occur-
rence of such a motion outwards would afford decisive proof that
the membrane was capable of being stretched; and, being so
capable, it would follow, when a wave of condensation was inci-
dent upon it (the external being in this case greater than the in-
ternal pressure), that motion of the tympanal membrane would
again occur, though in this case taking place in a direction con-
trary to that in which it occurred in the former.
But the tympanal membrane is neither flat, nor are its move-
ments confined simply by the quasi-circular tympanal bone to
which it is affixed.
The membrane is concave outwards, convex inwards; from
which it results, as will immediately be shown, that the action
upon it of rarefied waves and of condensed waves must be radi-
cally different.
When ararefied wave is incident on the membrane, the motion
will take place outwards ; and the membrane being concave out-
wards, all that is requisite for this is a simple flexure, a simple
change of form of the membrane without any stretching, and
which may be effected whether the membrane be elastic, or ca-
pable of beimg stretched, or not.
When a condensed wave is incident upon the membrane, on
the other hand, the circumstances are altogether different. The
motion in this case (if any) must take place inwards; and the
membrane, being convex inwards, will be incapable of motion
unless it be capable of being stretched. Nor would a mere ca-
pacity for being stretched be sufficient to allow of continuous
action of the ear for auditory purposes. The membrane must
possess the power of speedily returning to its original status ; 2. e.
it must be highly elastic.
When the ear is in its normal state, therefore, it clearly ap-
pears that, in order to the transmission to the sensorium of the
vibrations of a rarefied wave, flexibility of the tympanal mem-
brane without elasticity is sufficient; while for the like trans-
mission of the vibrations of condensed waves elasticity of the
membrane is essential.
What, then, is the character as regards elasticity of the tym-
panal membrane ? The membrane is thus described by the late
Mr. Toynbee :—
“Looked at from without inwards, the membrana tympani
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 128
may be described as consisting of the following layers :—(1) the
epidermis; (2) the dermis ; (3) the fibrous layer, composed of
(a) the lamina of radiating fibres, (b) the lamina of circular
fibres; (4) the mucous membrane*.
It thus appears that the tympanum is a compound membrane
consisting of five layers which are mutually adherent, two of the
layers partaking ofthe character of fibrous membrane.
Dr. Brennan} has furnished a Table of the principal organic
tissues in the order of their elasticity, which I give complete as
follows :—
(1) Yellow fibrous tissue, (2) cartilage, (3) fibro-cartilage,
(4) skin, (5) cellular membrane, (6) muscle, (7) bone, (8) mu-
cous membrane, (9) serous membrane, (10) nervous matter,
(11) fibrous membrane.
It thus appears that the tympanal membrane, instead of being
highly elastic, as it has been shown that it ought to be in order
to admit of the motion produced by waves of condensation being
transmitted through the tympanum, involves in its composition,
and has its elasticity measured by that of fibrous membrane,
which is the least elastic and the most unyielding of all the or-
ganic tissues, as to which Dr. Brennan observes that it ‘ 1s re-
markable for its low degree of elasticity.” And that we may
be certain that the particular membrane of the tympanum is no
exception to the rule with regard to fibrous membrane in general,
we have the following testimony of Mr. Toynbee :—
“ Neither do the component fibres of the laminz appear to
evince more than an extremely slight degree of elasticity.”
(Diseases of the Ear, p. 1841.)
Other arguments in favour of the position which I have been
seeking to establish will hereafter be adduced; and in particular
I shall endeavour to show that the auditory apparatus deprived
of the tympanal membrane, equally with the apparatus in its
normal state, is calculated to transmit waves of rarefaction and to
suppress waves of condensation ; but in the mean time I would
ask whether, if it had been the design of nature to secure such
transmission and suppression respectively in the perfect ear, any
construction of the tympanal membrane could have been devised
better calculated to accomplish those objects than that which ac-
tually occurs—the concavity of the membrane combined with its
flexibility ensuring the transmission of rarefied waves, whilst the
same concavity combined with inelasticity forbids the transmis-
sion of condensed waves.
* Diseases of the Har, with Supplement, by Hinton. London, 1868.
+ Todd’s ‘ Cyclopedia of Anatomy and Physiology,’ vol. i. p. 60.
t “On n’y trouve point de fibres Clastiques.”—Traité d’ Anatomie de-
scriptive, par Cruveilhier. Paris, 1868, vol. 11. p. 674.
124 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
The argument is not limited, however, to a bare demonstra-
tion that the ear is open to the action of one class of waves
while it suppresses the action of the other. It may be shown
that some of the most remarkable and characteristic portions of
the auditory apparatus are expressly contrived with a view to fa-
cilitate and regulate the admission and transmission of waves of
rarefaction, and have no intelligible function as applying to the
transmission of condensed waves.
If the tympanal membrane were capable of being stretched
when a condensed wave becomes incident upon it, it is quite
certain that its elasticity, 2. e. its tendency to recover its original
form, would be sufficient to bring it back to its original position
and status.
But when, through the incidence upon it of a rarefaction,
the membrana tympani is pushed outwards, what is to bring it
back to its original position? There is no property of the
membrane itself capable of producing this effect. A distinct
machinery is requisite for the purpose; and this machinery we
have in the muscles acting upon the bones of the ear.
To make this clear, it will be necessary to view more in detail
the structure of the organ.
The tympanal membrane is connected with the fenestra ovalis
by a chain of small bones, variously estimated as three and four
in number, but which for our present purpose may be regarded
with sufficient accuracy as consisting of three, stretching across
the tympanal cavity, and respectively denominated :—(1) the
malleus, next to the membrana tympani; (2) the incus; (3)
the stapes, or stirrup bone, whose name describes its shape,
the base of which is attached to the membrane of the fenestra
ovalis.
The three bones or ossicles are articulated upon one another
in the order in which they have been named. The body of the
malleus and the body of the incus, which are in juxtaposition,
are much more massive than the other portions of the ossicu-
lar system. The former puts out a comparatively slender arm
called the handle of the malleus, which extends from the side of
the tympanal cavity to about the centre of the membrana tympani.
At the centre of the membrane, and nearly along the entire
length of the handle of the malleus, the latter is attached to the
membrane and moves with its motion.
The incus sends out a slender process on the other side to
the apex of the stirrup, to which it is attached.
The base of the stapes is described by Sir W. Wilde as fitting
into the fenestra ovalis “somewhat like a stopper or the piston
of acylinder, and is attached to its circumference by a ligamento-
fibrous membrane.”
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 125
When the membrana tympani moves outwards, as it will do
when a rarefied wave is incident upon it, it carries along with it
the handle of the malleus, and the tendency will be to pull out
the base of the stirrup-bone, a tendency which, no doubt, will
be in some degree yielded to*. And we may thus see how the
incidence of a rarefied wave may give rise to motion of the fluid
in the labyrinth, and consequently to such an excitation of the
auditory nerve as will occasion the perception of sound.
It has been already observed that when the membrana tym-
pani has moved outwards, it has no property by which it can
restore itself to its original position.
This function is performed by another and most important
part of the auditory apparatus—to wit, the muscles of the ear,
which are thus described by Mr. Wharton Jones.
“‘ Some anatomists admit four muscles—three attached to the
malleus, and one to the stapes. Of the three attached to the
malleus, two are described as having for their action the relaxa-
tion of the membrana tympani; but these so-called laxatores
tympani are merely ligaments..... Two muscles only can be
strictly demonstrated, and these two are both tensors of the
tympanum.” (Cyclop. Anat. and Physiology, vol. u. p. 547.)
Of these two muscles, the principal (tensor tympani) is at-
tached to the anterior surface of the handle of the malleus; and
by its action “ the handle of the malleus is drawn inwards and
forwards, whilst the head is moved in the opposite direction...
The result of this movement of the bone is that the membrana
tympani....is also drawn inwards and stretched.” In addi-
tion to which, “‘ the base of the stapes is forced against the ves-
tibular fenestra, in consequence of the movement communicated
by the head of the malleus to the incus, which tends to press
inwards the long extremity of the latter.” (Ibid. p. 549.)
The second and smaller of the muscles (stapedius) is “ in-
serted into the posterior and upper part of the head of the
stapes.”
“The first effect of the action of this muscle will be to press
the posterior part of the base of the stapes against the vestibular
fenestra. At the same time the long branch of the incus will
be drawn backwards and inwards, and the head of the malleus
being by this movement of the incus pressed forwards and out-
wards its handle will be carried inwards, and the membrana
tympani thus put upon the stretch.” (Ibid. p. 549.)
It thus appears that it is the effect of both muscles :—
* The action which takes place along the chain of bones is exactly that
which occurs along the bell-wires when a chamber-bell is rung. Of the
degree in which the stapes will yield to the tendency to pull it out more will
be said hereafter.
126 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
(1) To draw backwardsand stretch the membrana tympani ;
(2) To force inwards the stapes*;
that is, the effect of the muscles combined with the bones of the
ear is to produce in the stapes and membrana tympani a motion
opposite to that produced in them by rarefied waves of air.
Hence, since in order that the auditory apparatus shall con-
tinue in the exercise of its proper functions it is essential that
it shall possess in itself the means of restoration to its normal
state after disturbance—since, as has been seen, the combined
bones and muscles of the ear are adequate to perform this func-
tion as regards rarefied waves—since no other mode of perform-
ing it is apparent—and since no other intelligible function has
ever been ascribed to this combination of bones and musclest,
we are justified in concluding that that most remarkable and
characteristic portion of the auditory mechanism (the muscles of
the ear) has been provided solely with reference to the action
upon the organ of rarefied waves.
It has been already stated that when the membrana tym-
pani moves outwards, its tendency to pull out the stapes will be
in some degree yielded to. The whole scheme of the contrivance
* The late Mr. Toynbee (Diseases of the Ear, p. 177) appears to have
entertained the opinion that the two muscles have opposite functions.
I think we may conclude with certainty that such cannot be the ease;
for otherwise, the muscles heing of the voluntary class (Wilde’s ‘ Practical
Observations on Aural Surgery,’ 1853, p. 314), a person in the midst of
the most absolute silence might by a mere exercise of volition produce all
the effects occasioned by actual sounds.
When the stapes is drawn home (that is, is forced as far as possible into
the vestibule), there can be no doubt that if the tendon of the stapedius
were pulled, the effect would be slightly to pull out the stapes, and at the
same time slightly to relax the membrana tympani. But, apart from
the question as to how far the muscle would act when the bone was
in this position, it is evident that if instead of being driven inwards the
stapes had been forced outwards, as it would be by the action of rarefied
waves, any action of the stapedius muscle consequent thereupon would be
to draw the stapes inwards and to stretch the membrana tympani.
A careful consideration of the passages above cited from Mr. Wharton
Jones will show that when the tensor tympani is exercised, the effect,
amongst other things, is to produce a pressure on the anterior extremity of
the vestibular fenestra and a slight rotation upon it, to counteract which is,
in the perfect ear, the special function of the muscle of the stapes.
+ Mr. Toynbee considered, and others have concurred with him in this
opinion, “‘ that the function of the tensor tympani muscle is to protect the
membrana tympani and the labyrinth from injury by loud sounds.”
(Diseases of the Kar, p. 179.) Since the action of the tensor tympani takes
place in the same direction as the action (if any) of condensed waves, it
is not easy to see how the tensor tympani could diminish the effect of the
latter on the membrana tympani and labyrinth. On the other hand,
since the action of rarefied waves on the tympanum is opposite to that
of the tensor tympani, we can comprehend how, when rarefied waves are
incident, the tensor tympani might operate to mitigate their effect.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 127
requires that such should be the case; but the mode in which
this effect occurs demands very careful consideration.
If there were no round aperture, it is clear, either that such
effect could not occur at all, or could occur only to an extent
almost, if not absolutely imperceptible, and certainly very much
less than the structure of the stapes with the membrane at-
tached to it is calculated to admit of. For in such case the
labyrinth would be a closed vessel filled with liquid, and in all
parts rigid except at the oval aperture. Consequently the va-
cuum which the motion outward of the stapes would tend to
produce must be filled up by the liquid contents of the laby-
rinth, a result which could only occur (1) through an expan-
sion of the liquid in the labyrinth, or (2) through a contraction
in the space occupied by that liquid by reason of the expansion of
the walls and solid contents of the labyrinth. It may well be
doubted whether the expansion of the liquid in the labyrinth, or
the contraction in the space occupied by that liquid through the
agency just referred to, would be traceable by the aid of the
finest instruments, whereas the extent to which the stapes may
vibrate is perceptible, | apprehend, to the naked eye. We may
conclude, therefore, that the existence of the fenestra rotunda is
essential to the production in the stapes of that degree of motion
of which it is susceptible.
The mode in which the fenestra rotunda operates for that
purpose may be gathered from the following passage from Sir
W. Wilde.
«That the membrane [of the fenestra rotunda] vibrates is
proved by experiment; and one use of it may be to allow the
fluid contained within the vestibule, when pressed upon by the
base of the stapes (covering like a lid the fenestra ovalis), to
bulge a little into the cavity of the tympanum.” (Practical Ob-
vations &c., p. 312%.)
Assuming that such is the case when the organ isin its normal
state, the membrana tympani being drawn inwards+, the stapes
* J take the following still more decisive testimony from one of an in-
teresting series of papers in the ‘ Lancet’ by Dr. Allen. ‘ The tensor
tympani influences principally and chiefly the drumhead by pulling in-
wards the handle of the malleus and the membrane in which it is im-
bedded; and in the second, but not less important, place, it stretches the
membrane of the round cochlear opening by pressing the base of the stapes
into the oval vestibular opening, and driving the liquor Cotunnii (or laby-
rinth fluid) through the scale against the inner surface of the membrane
of the round aperture] and causing it to bulge outwards.” (See ‘ Lancet’
for May 1, 1869.)
7 According to Politzer (cited by Mr. Hinton), the act of swallowing
will produce this effect by diminishing the pressure of the air in the tym-
panal cavity. (Diseases of the Har, p. 443.)
128 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
pressed home, and the membrane of the fenestra rotunda bulging
out into the tympanal cavity, it is evident that when a rare-
fied wave becomes incident upon the membrana tympani, the
latter will move outwards, drawing the stapes from the labyrinth,
the fluid in the latter following the stapes by reason of the
pressure of the air in the cavity of the tympanum on the mem-
brane of the cochlear fenestra, which would thus be driven
inwards.
I think that the foregoing remarks will have made evident
what are the true relative functions of the two apertures from
the tympanal cavity into the labyrinth. So long as disturbance
was supposed to be transmitted along the chain of bones exactly
in the same manner as if they had constituted a rigid bar, with-
out producing in any degree that opening or shutting of the
labyrinth which the whole scheme of the mechanism proves is
possible, and was intended to be produced, the supposition that
a like transmission took place through the air in the tympanal
cavity was a perfectly natural and proper one. But if it be ad-
mitted that the stapes is so fitted to the vestibular aperture as
to admit of being pushed inwards and outwards—if the action of
a rarefied wave on the membrana tympani is to pull it out-
wards, while the action of the muscles of the ear is to pull it in-
wards—and if, as we have seen, none of these capacities or ten-
dencies can be carried into effect unless the action of the cochlear
membrane be such as we have described it, it is clear that the
action of the two fenestree must be opposite to each other—the
one tending to move in as the other tends to move out, and
vice versd, the two thus combining to produce that one effect
(to wit, the agitation of the fluid in the labyrinth) which is essen-
tial to the perception of sound.
But although I consider the explanation above offered suffi-
cient, so far as relates to the action of the perfect ear, it is
evident that when the membrana tympani is destroyed, or,
being perfect, the ossicular connexion between it and the laby-
rinth is broken, the above reasoning ceases to be applicable ;
and yet in these latter cases a very considerable amount of audi-
tory power is frequently retained.
I think, from what has preceded, we are entitled to assume
that it is the function of the muscles of the ear to restore the
auditory apparatus to its normal position of equilibrium*;
whence it will follow, even where the membrana tympani is
* In confirmation of this view, I cite the following passages from
Cruveilhier.
“La base de Vétrier, est une plaque mince... dont la configura-
tion est exactement adaptée a celle de la fenétre ovale, qu’elle remplit par-
faitement, ef dont on ne la retire quavec un léger effort ; en sorte que
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 129
absent, or its connexion with the labyrinth is destroyed, that
the membrane of the round aperture, when in its normal post-
tion, will bulge out into the tympanic cavity,—such bulging out
resulting, in the first of the cases now spoken of, it may be, ‘from
the united action of both the muscles of the tympanum, while
in the latter it must be due to the operation of the stapedius
alone.
Such being the case, a condensed wave which became inci-
dent upon the ear under such circumstances would be stopped
by the membrana tympani, if that membrane were perfect ;
or if it were absent, the condensed air pressing upon the stapes
could have no operation to force it further into the labyrinth,
that bone, through the operation of the stapedius muscle, being
supposed to have been already driven as far into the labyrinth
as the shape of the aperture, or the liquid in the labyrinth,
would allow.
The manner of the suppression of condensed waves, when
the tympanal membrane is destroyed, thus readily appears. The
mode of operation of rarefied waves under similar circumstances,
or when, the membrana tympani being present, there is dis-
connexion in the chain of bones, is a matter of greater de-
licacy.
In this case, to produce that combined action of the stapes
and cochlear membrane which in the perfect ear has been
shown to be essential in order to occasion the perception of
sound, we must have, when a rarefied wave is incident, a va-
riation in the external pressure on the two fenestre. Such a
variation of pressure I conceive would necessarily arise from the
different positions which the two apertures into the labyrinth
occupy with respect to the meatus externus, the base of the
stapes being nearly centrically opposite, and in a plane parallel
to the position which would be occupied by the tympanal mem-
brane if the latter were present*, while the cochlear membrane
Vétrier a plus de tendance a tomber dans le vestibule que dans la caisse du
tympan ”’ (vol. i. p. 680).
“La paroi externe de la cavité du vestibule... présente Vorifice de la
fenétre ovale ; mais cet orifice est si parfaitement comble par la base de
Pétrier, que cette circonstance ne trouble Vaspect lisse et égal de cette
paroi”’ (vol. ii. p. 691). See also Henle’s Handbuch gc. vol. i. p. 758.
* For the foregomg statement I rely on the general tenor of the ac-
counts I have read upon the subject, and on observation of preparations
of the part in the dry bone which I have had an opportunity of examining
in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons in London. As confir-
matory, so far as they go, I would refer to the plates in Cruveilhier, vol. i.
pp- 669 and 693 (given also in Dr. Henle’s Handbuch der systema-
tischen Anatomie des Menschen, vol. ii. pp- 731, 760), and to that in Dr.
Allen’s paper in the ‘ Lancet ’ for January 16, 1869.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88, No, 253. dug. 1869. K
130 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Mechanical Principles
is oblique to the latter—the vestibular aperture being opposed
directly to the full stream of the wave, while the cochlear aper-
ture is exposed to it obliquely, and, as I apprehend, though I
speak less confidently as to this point, laterally with respect to
the main stream of the incident wave*.
The difference of pressure thus cccurring at the opposite ex-
tremities of the labyrinth will necessarily cause a motion of the
stapes outwards, to counteract which the muscle of the stapes
will be called into play, so as to produce eventually a motion in
the opposite direction—the same action in the labyrinth being
thus occasioned which it has already been shown occurs when
the ear is in its normal state, and which, I would submit, the whole
scheme of the apparatus shows to be essential in order to cause
in the human subject the sensation of hearing.
The question here naturally arises—If, the tympanal mem-
brane being absent and the malleus, incus, and Eustachian tube
being deprived of all intelligible function, the ear is so compe-
tent an instrument for the perception of sound, what can have
led to the adoption of the complicated apparatus, the items of
which have just been enumerated ?
The consideration of this question, as of other points of the
greatest interest connected with the subject, I must reserve to
some future occasion.
6 New Square, Lincoln’s Inn.
June 22, 1869.
XIV. On the Mechanical Principles involved in the Sailing Flight
of the Albatros. By Captaim F. W. Huron, F.G.8.+
is TIL lately no subject in ornithology had been less suc-
cessfully treated than that of flight, notwithstanding its
great interest. This, no doubt, is owing to the great difficulty of
the problem; for not only has the mechanism of the organs of
flight to be perfectly understood, but the complicated question
of the resistance of the air to differently shaped surfaces moving
with variable velocities must also be more or less completely
solved. The first part (i. e. the mechanism of the organs of
* The assumption that the obliquity of the cochlear fenestra will affect
the pressure upon its membrane implies, of course, a variation of pressure mm
the incident wave according to the direction m which it is estimated. In
the March paper above referred to I have shown that when a pulse is pro-
pagated along a tube, the vibration being parallel to the axis, a diminution
in the pressure exerted on a plane perpendicular to the axis will be due to
the velocity. I see no reason to suppose that under the same circumstances
any change will occur in the pressure on a plane parallel to the axis.
+ Communicated by Alfred Newton, M.A., F.L.S. &c.
involved in the Sailing Flight of the Albatros. 131
flight) has recently been very ably and fully discussed by the
Duke of Argyll in ‘The Reign of Law,’ and by Dr. Pettigrew in
the Transactions of the Linnean Society, vol. xxvi.; the second,
however, as far as know, has never been attempted; and I propose
therefore to make a few remarks on the “sailing” flight of the
Albatros (Diomedea exulans, L.), and try to determine approxi-
mately the probable resistance of the air in order to allow it to
sail for half an hour without moving its wings. Before com-
mencing, however, it may be necessary to remark that the velo-
cities spoken of are velocities of the bird through the air, and not
over the water; for the latter will be very different when a wind
is blowing.
I estimate the under surface of the wings, body, and tail of
the Albatros to be about 8 square feet (see fig. 1) ; and if we take
Fig. 1.
an
OTOL
the weight of the bird to be 16 lbs., we find that it would take a
pressure of 2 lbs. per square foot to support it in theair. This
pressure would be given by an upward current of air having a
velocity of 31 feet a second if the surface acted upon were flat:
but the wings of the bird when sailing are bent downwards (see
fig. 2), which would increase the resistance ; on the other hand,
Fig. 2.
Ea i
the body of the bird is convex, and the wings are inclined at an
angle to the horizon, both of which would decrease the resist-
ance, while the surface of the wings is about three times as large
as the surface of the body and tail. Balancing one against the
other, we perhaps shall not underestimate it if we take an up-
ward current of air with a velocity of 30 feet per second as sutfii-
cient to support it. This, in other words, means that on a per-
fectly still day an Albatros with its wings outstretched, but with
no forward movement, would fall downwards at a constantly in-
creasing rate until it had attained a velocity of 30 feet per second,
K 2
132 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Mechanical Principles
which velocity it would maintain until it fell ito the sea. This
is called its “ terminal velocity.”
Let AB represent the axis of the body of the bird flying in
Fig. 3.
the direction B A and at an angle AEH with the horizon. Let
C D represent the wings of the bird making an angle CEH with
the horizon. Take the lme HE to represent the velocity at
which the bird is flying, or the number of feet it passes through
the air in one second. From H draw the perpendicular H A;
this line will represent the distance which the bird will rise (omit-
ting for the present the force of gravity) by means of the angle
at which he is flying to the horizon. But the force of the wind
HE acting upon the inciined wings C D will be resolved into
two forces, one of which, H K, will be parallel to the wings and
so have no effect on them, while the other, KE, will be at
right angles to them. This force will be again resolved into two
others at right angles to one another—one, K L, opposing the
forward movement of the bird, and the other, LE, causing it to
rise ; so that the total amount that the bird will rise per second
will be LE+HA feet. But we have previously seen that it will
fall by the action of gravity 30 feet a second; so that in order
that it may fly horizontally, without either rising or falling,
LE+HA must equal 30; and we want to find what must be
the length of HE, or, in other words, the velocity of the bird to
do this.
Now KE=HEsin CEH, because CHH is equal to EHK,
and LE is equal to KE cos CEH, because KEL is also equal to
CEH. Therefore
LE=HE sin CEH cos CEH, and AH equals HE tan AEH ;
“. HE tan AEH + HE sm CEH cos CHH =80,
HE (tan AEH + sin CEH cos CEH) =80;
ETB ep
tan AHH + sin CHH . cos CHH
If, now, we take AEH =0 and CEH=15>°, we shall find that
ITE equals 115. If we take AHH =7° and CEH =22°, we find
involved in the Sailing Flight of the Albatros. 138
that HE equals 64. So that if an Albatros starts with a velocity
of 115 feet a second, it could maintain a constant height above
the sea until its velocity was reduced to 64 feet a second by
merely increasing the angle to the horizon at which it was flying
from 0° to 7°.
The velocity of the air in a “ fresh sailing-breeze” is about
30 feet a second, in a “ moderate gale” 60 feet a second, ina
“strong gale” 90 feet a second, and in a “great storm” 120
feet a seeond. Now an Albatros can often be seen sailing,
though slowly, directly against a strong gale; his velocity must
therefore often be more than 90 feet a second; he is, however,
most at home in a strong breeze or moderate gale, when the ve-
locity of the wind is 50 or 60 feet a second, and consequently
when his velocity would have to be 70 or 80 feet a second to
enable him to fly easily against it. In a calm or light air, when
the wind has a velocity of only 10 feet a second, the Albatros
rarely sails for so long as a minute at a time—the reason for
this being that as, in order to sustain himself in the air, he must
move through it with a velocity not less than 64: feet a second,
he would, even when flying against the wind, have to travel over
the sea at the rate of not less than 54 feet per second, or 36
miles an hour, and so could not reach it properly for good, nor
stop himself quick enough when he saw anything; so that the
velocity and manner of flight observed in the Albatros correspond
closely enough with those calculated as necessary from theore-
tical considerations.
We will now proceed to see what the resistance of the air to
his forward progress ought to be to enable him to start with a
velocity of 115 feet a second and sail for half an hour without
flapping his wings, and at the end of that time to have reduced
his velocity to 64 feet per second.
If a body starts with a velocity V, and after moving for ¢
seconds the resistance of the air reduces its velocity to v, it can
be shown that Te fal __ Aght
arene "Ww? o ° e r e ° ° (1)
where W represents the weight of the bird in pounds, A the area
of its front surface in square feet, g the force of gravity, and k a
constant quantity depending on the form of the surface exposed
to the air, and probably on the velocity at which the body moves ;
so that, in order to find this cree Be the Albatros, we have
1
Pee (-5 7) oi
Aye ony
moe Geel
34 Captain F. W. Hutton on the Mechanical Principles
If we take A, in the case of the Albatros, to represent one
square foot, and put the other values into the equation, we get
uy 16x51
~ 115 x 64x 82 x 1800 x 1
= 0:000002 ;
so that the formula for the resistance of the air to the Albatros
ought to be
k
R=0:000002 22.
The formula given by Poncelet for the resistance to round shot is
R=0-0006 Av’.
If, therefore, these calculations are tolerably correct, the resist-
ance offered to the Albatros must be =4,, of that offered to round
shot. This at first sight seems to be impossible; but I must
remark, first, that the terminal velocity of the bird may be less,
and the angle at which it flies to the horizon greater than those
that I have taken, either or both of which would reduce the ve-
locity at which it was compelled to sail in order to support itself
in the air; secondly, that the resistance of the air to the flight of
elongated projectiles seems to be very much less than that to
round shot; but I have seen no experiments on the subject ;
and as the shape of the Albatros is perhaps the best that could
be devised for penetrating the air (see fig. 1), the resistance it
had to overcome would undoubtedly be considerably less than _
that offered to the best-shaped projectile ; and thirdly, that the
formula, as obtained by experiment, for round shot does not pre-
tend to absolute correctness, and applies to projectiles starting
with an initial velocity of 1200 feet a second; and it is highly
probable that the law that the resistance decreases as the square
of the velocity does not hold good for small velocities such as
those we are now considermg. For example, the range of the
larger mortar-shells, which start with an initial velocity of 300
to 400 feet per second; is‘ much more truly calculated by the pa-
rabolic theory, which omits the resistance of the air altogether,
than by allowing for it by means of the formula R=0-0006 Av”.
Still the resistance to the Albatros seems very small, and it
would be interesting to try to obtain it experimentally. From
formula (1) we obtain
ie W(V—v)
ENG ag, Weg
by which we see that weight is necessary for a bird to be able to
sail, and that the greater the weight the longer it can continue to
sail; but J cannot agree with the Duke of Argyll (Reign of Law,
involved in the Sailing Flight of the Albatros. 135
p. 152) and Dr. Pettigrew (Trans. Linn. Soe. vol. xxvi. p. 218)
that weight is absolutely essential for ordinary flight. The fact
of many birds diving and catching fish under water is a sufficient
refutation of this view, as diving is only flying in water, or in
a medium of greater specific gravity than the body of the bird ;
for all birds, even the Penguin, are lighter than water and float
upon it when shot; but, as Dr. Pettigrew has said (p. 214),
the wings must in this case act differently, as they have to over-
come an upward force of gravity instead of a downward one.
As the resistance of the air decreases as the square of the ve-
locity, it is evident that low velocities are favourable for long-
continued sailing, although practically these velocities must be
regulated by the velocity of the wind that is necessary to sail
against. Now low forward velocities depend upon the bird having
a small terminal velocity, which in its turn depends to a great
extent upon a large under surface for the air to act upon, so that
it may be said that the sailing-powers of a bird depend upon its
weight and the expanse of its wing in proportion to its weight,—
weight enabling, indeed compelling, it to fly, and expanse of
wing enabling it to sail for along time. For these reasons |
cannot agree with the Duke of Argyll (p. 157 et seg.) and Dr.
Pettigrew (pp. 216 & 257) that long narrow wings are essential
for sailing, and I appeal to the Condor, the Vulture, and the
Great Bustard to bear me out. In India I have often lain on
my back and watched through a telescope the vultures sailing
high up in the sky, and have never seen the slightest movement
of a wing; and in the Crimea, on the plains of the Alma, I have
been astonished at the sailing-powers possessed by the Great
Bustard (Otis tarda), having once seen it wheeling round in
large circles for several minutes without moving its wings.
Long and pointed wings, however, are necessary for turning
quickly ; and the Albatros could not top the waves so neatly as he
does if his wings were shaped like those of the Condor, which,
soaring high in the air, has no necessity for sharp turns, and
consequently for sharp-pointed wings. I may here remark that
it is quite easy to understand, on these principles, that a bird
having a very large expanse of wing in proportion to its weight,
might sail for a very long time on a calm, or nearly calm day,
when there was no wind to carry it away, and when consequently
its velocity might be very slow. If, now, for the sake of compa-
rison, we take the Cape-pigeon (Procellaria capensis) and assume
the area of its under surface to be 2°5 square feet, and the area
of its front surface to be 0:25 square foot, its weight beimg, from
my own observations, 14 oz. or 0°88 lb., we find that it would
have a terminal velocity of 13 feet per second, which, when fly-
ing at the same angles as we have taken for the Albatros, will
136 Mr. J. Parnell on a new Fluorescent Substance.
give velocities of 52 and 29 feet per second respectively. There-
fore
te 0°88 x 23
~ 52 x 29 x 82 x 0:000002 x 0°25"
{= 843 seconds or 14 minutes ;
so that the Cape-pigeon could sail half as long as the Albatros,
the resistance of the air being supposed to be proportionately
the same in both cases. This is more than we should expect,
considering the great difference of weight of the birds, but is
owing to the small terminal velocity of the Cape-pigeon. It
must, however, be observed that although it seems that under
favourable circumstances a Cape-pigeon could sail for 14 mi-
nutes, the velocity of 29 feet a second is so smail that, in order
to make headway against the wind, it would have to stop sailing
and use its wings long before it had reached its least possible
velocity ; so that it could not sail for long without being carried
away by the wind, neither could it sail at all in a strong gale,
except when sheltered by the waves; and this answers very well
to what we observe; for in a gentle air the Cape-pigeon sails
longer than the Albatros, but hardly ever in a gale. Once du-
ring a fresh gale, the air moving probably 70 or 80 feet a second,
when standing at the stern of the ship, a Cape-pigeon was blown
into my hands and I caught it.
In the foregomg brief remarks I do not pretend to have done
more than indicate the principles involved in the flight of the
Albatros when sailing along without moving its wings. The
problem still remains to be solved ; but until some experiments
have been made on the resistance offered to the air by the front
and lower surfaces of birds, a tolerably accurate solution is not
possible; and I hope that some person with the necessary oppor-
tunities and means may be induced to take up this highly inter-
esting subject.
XV. Note on a new Fluorescent Substance.
By Joun Parne wn, M.A., F.R.AS
HEN aniline is heated with mercuric chloride, besides the
ordinary formation of aniline-red, a substance is pro-
duced in no inconsiderable quantities which possesses such a re-
markable fluorescence that the author, not having been able to
find any notice of it hitherto published, cannot but think it
must up to the present time have escaped observation. The
* Communicated by the Author.
Mr. J. Parnell on a new Fluorescent Substance. 137
crude mass obtained by the process above mentioned, when
pounded, mixed with water, and washed with ether, gives an
ethereal solution which in a concentrated state exhibits a fluo-
rescence which it is believed has never been surpassed by any
known body*. By this means, however, the powdered mass is
apt to cake together, so that it is difficult to extract all the sub-
stance in question, which, to avoid periphrasis, it is proposed tem-
porarily to call Fluoraniline. A better method appears to be to
dissolve the crude mass in dilute hydrochloric acid, to add am-
monia in excess, and then to wash out with ether. The ethereal
solution thus obtained must be repeatedly washed with water
until the washings cease to acquire a pink colour. Thus purified it
has a greenish-yellow colour and exhibits a green fluorescence.
When evaporated to dryness spontaneously, the residue consists of
two amorphous substances, one red and the other orange, the fluo-
rescence being due apparently to the latter. The author has not
succeeded at present in perfectly eliminating the red substance,
although it may be got rid of to a great extent by washing the
ethereal solution with dilute hydrochloric acid (which will extract
the whole of the crude fluoraniline), reducing with zine, adding
ammonia in excess, extracting with ether, and, if necessary, re-
peating the process. From a specimen of aniline-red prepared by
Messrs. Maule and Nicholson, but by what process the author has
been unable to learn, as much as 10 per cent. of crude fluoraniline
has been extracted. When an ethereal solution of fluoraniline
is evaporated spontaneously till all the ether has gone, and then
heated on a water-bath to drive off the small quantity of residual
water, a strong smell of peppermint is evolved. As the heat is
increased, a substance is volatilized which condenses as a dark
brown matter insoluble in ether, and as still further heat is ap-
plied hydrocyanic acid is evolved.
Fluoraniline is almost insoluble in water when cold, but
shghtly soluble in hot water, being precipitated as the water
cools. It is soluble in dilute hydrochloric, nitric (thus distin-
guishing it from chrysaniline), sulphuric, and acetic acids, giving
fluorescent solutions, is not affected by sulphide of ammonium,
and but slightly by hypochlorite of calcium. ‘The alcoholic so-
lution is of a much darker colour than the ethereal, and not so
fluorescent ; but alcohol added to a solution of fluoraniline in hy-
drochloric acid increases its fluorescence ; it was, indeed, by add-
ing that acid to an alcoholic solution of anilime-red that atten-
tion was first drawn to this subject. The fluorescence of this
substance is most remarkable. When a beam of sunlight made
* The author has not had an opportunity of examiming a new substance
exhibiting a green fluorescence, which has recently been obtamed by M.
Wurtz by a totally different process. ;
138 Dr. E. Warburg on the Heating produced in
conical by a quartz lens is projected upon a concentrated ethereal
solution, all the rays capable of developing fluorescence are ab-
sorbed at the surface, so that no cone of light is visible in the
solution; but with a dilute solution a brilliant green cone is pro-
duced. The colours of the ethereal solution and its fluorescence
bear a remarkable resemblance to those of uranium-glass, but
with this difference, that when the fluorescent light is examined
in the spectroscope, while the fluorescent spectrum of uranium-
glass is, as is well known, discontinuous, that of fluoraniline is
continuous. ,
As the investigation of this subject cannot be continued for
some time to come, it has been thought desirable to publish the
above imperfect note, that other experimenters may have the be-
nefit of the results hitherto obtained.
Hadham House, Upper Clapton,
July 19, 1869.
Postscript, July 21.—Since the above paper was written, the
author has discovered, in the aniline-red made from stannic
chloride, another fluorescent substance associated with fluorani-
line. The fluorescent spectrum consists of red, a very bright
green band, and some blue only. To the unassisted eye the fluo-
rescence has a cold blue tint.
XVI. On the Heating produced in Solid Bodies when they are
Sounded. By Dr. K. Warsure*.
Ls the twenty-fourth volume of Poggendorff’s Annalen, Wil-
liam Weber mentions that his attention was excited by the
difference which bodies exhibit in the rapidity with which their
sound fades away. He shows that the resistance of the air, which
must diminish the amplitude the more rapidly the smaller the
mass of the body upon which it acts, is madequate to explain
this phenomenon, and he arrives at the conclusion that it must
have its origin in the special nature of the substance.
As a matter of fact, the sound of lead fades away more rapidly
than that of steel, while the density of lead is far greater than
that of steel.
From these considerations, part of the vis viva of the vibrations
must be consumed im the interior of the sounding body; and the
conclusion is obvious that it is here ‘changed into heat. ‘This
portion will be greater in the case of those bodies in which, as
in lead, the sound rapidly fades away—that is, only impart a
small amount of the motion to the surrounding medium.
* Translated from the Berliner Monatsbericht for February 1869.
Solid Bodies when they are Sounded. 1389
The phenomenon of deadening produced when bodies are con-
nected with other sounding bodies gives rise to similar considera-
tions. Ifa leaden tube (even a thin one) be so fitted to a glass tube
as to form its prolongation, it is found that the longitudinal tone
of the glass tube is very considerably deadened. This is the case
even if the leaden tube is as long as half a wave-length, in which
case the deadening is least. A steel or brass rod produces under
these circumstances scarcely any perceptible deadening. These
phenomena lead to the assumption that part of the ws viva of the
vibrations in the interior of the body is consumed—and therefore
also to the assumption that by sounding there is a production of
heat, and a greater one in‘lead than in steel.
The author proposed to himself the task of investigating the
production of heat by sound from this point of view*. He
placed the soldering of a thermopile, in the circuit of which was
inserted an astatic galvanometer, against the part to be examined
after a body had been made to sound. Before each experiment,
he proved that placing the soldering against the body produced
no deflection on the galvanometers.
Longitudinal Tones.
He first succeeded in demonstrating the heating produced by
sound by means of a bar of wax, the sound of which rapidly fades
away. A rod of wax was fixed to a thick glass tube in such a
manner that it formed its prolongation; its length amounted
to half a wave-length of the note (calculated from the velocity
of the propagation of sound in wax, which the author has ascer-
tained, and the detail of which will appear in Poggendorff’s
Annalen). When the soldering of the thermo-element was placed
against a node, a deflection of 800 divisions im the direction of
heat was produced, while in the loops there was only a deflection
of fifty divisions in the same direction.
A leaden tube of 9 millims. external diameter fastened to the
glass rod instead of wax, and also as long as half a wave-length,
exhibited a heating of 800 to 400 divisions at a node, and
-of 40 divisions in a loop. 15™ I was
astonished to find that the straight part of the prominence had en-
tirely disappeared; not even the slightest rack appeared in its
place. Whether it was entirely dissipated, or whether parts of it had
been wafted towards the other part, I do not know, although I
think the latter explanation the more probable one, as the other part
had increased.
So much, then, for the chromosphere and the prominences, which
150 Royal Institution :-—
I think the recent work has shown to be the last layer of the true
atmosphere of the sun. I shall now invite your attention to spots.
Now, as a rule, precisely those lines which are injected into the
photosphere by convection-currents are most thickened in the spec-
trum of a spot, and the thickening increases with the depth of the
spot; so that I no longer regard a spot simply as a cavity, but as a
place in which principally the vapours of sodium, barium, iron, and
magnesium occupy a lower level than they do ordinarily in the
atmosphere. .
I have told you before, that when these lines are observed in the
chromosphere, they usually are thinner than their usual Fraunhofer
lines.
I will now show a photograph of a spot-spectrum on the screen.
You will see a black band running across the ordinary spectrum ;
that black band indicates the general absorption which takes place
in a sun-spot. Now mark the behaviour of the Fraunhofer lines ;
see how they widen as they cross the spot, putting on a sudden
blackness and width in the case of a spot with steep sides, expanding
gradually in a shelving one. The behaviour of these lines is due to
selective absorption.
We have, then, the following facts: mark them well :—
(1) The lines of sodium, magnesium, and barium, when observed
in the chromosphere, are among those which are thinner than their
usual Fraunhofer lines.
(2) The lines of sodium, magnesium, and barium, when observed
in a spot, are among those which are thicker than their usual Fraun-
hofer lines.
They show, I think, that a spot is the seat of a downrush or
downsinking.
Messrs. De La Rue, Stewart, and Loewy, who brought forward
the theory of a downrush before my observations of an actual down-
rush were made in 1865, at once suggested as one advantage of this
explanation that all the gradations of darkness, from the faculee to
the central umbra, may be supposed to be due to the same cause,
namely, the presence to a greater or less extent of a relatively cooler
absorbing atmosphere—thus suggesting as one cause of the darken-
ing of a spot
(1) The general absorption of the atmosphere, thicker here than
elsewhere, as the spot is a cavity.
To which the spectroscope added in 1866, as you know,
(2) Greater selective absorption.
J have Dr. Frankland’s permission to exhibit an experiment con-
nected with our researches on absorption which will show you that
this increased selective absorption can be fairly grappled with in our
laboratories. I will show you on the screen the absorption-line due
to sodium-vapour, in one part as thin as it is in the ordinary solar
spectrum, in another almost if not quite as thick as it appears in a
spot; and I accomplish this result in the following way :—Here I
have an electric lamp, and by means of this slit I only permit a fine
line of ight to emerge from it; here the beam passes through a bi-
Mr. J. N. Lockyer on Recent Discoveries in Solar Physics. 151
sulphide-of-carbon prism, and there you see on the screen the glo-
rious spectrum due to the dismemberment of the fine line of poly-
chromatic light. Mr. Pedler will now place a glass tube containing
metallic sodium, sealed up with hydrogen, in front of the slit, and
will heat it with a spirit-lamp.
As the sodium-vapour rises you see the dark line of absorption
make its appearance as an extremely fine line, and finally you see
that the light which traverses the upper layer of the sodium scarcely
suffers any absorption—the line is thin; while, on the contrary, the
light which has traversed the lower, denser layers has suffered tre-
mendous absorption: the line is jnordinately thick, such as we see
it in the spectrum of a spot.
So much, then, for the selective absorption. My recent observa-
tions, to which I will shortly draw attention, show, I think, that it
is of great importance, especially in connexion with the fact that the
passage from the penumbra to the umbra is generally less gradual
than that from the photosphere to the penumbra. You see now how
much is included in the assertion that the photosphere is gaseous.
You are all, I know, familiar with that grand generalization of
Kirchhoft’s, by which he accounted for the Fraunhofer lines.
If we have a gas or a vapour less luminous than another light-
source, and view that light-source through the gas or vapour, then
we shall observe absorption of those particular rays which the ga-
seous vapour would emit if incandescent.
Let us confine our attention to the hydrogen Fraunhofer lines.
When I observe the chromosphere on the sun’s limb, with no
brighter light-source behind it, I observe its characteristic lines
bright. But when 1 observe them on the sun itself (that is, when
the brighter sun is on the other side of the hydrogen envelope), then,
as a rule, its function is reduced—is toned down; the envelope acts
as an absorber, the lines are observed black.
Now what must we conclude when I tell you that at the present
time it is almost impossible to observe the sun for an hour without
observing the hydrogen-lines, every now and then, bright upon the.
sun itself ?
Not oniy are the lines observed bright, but it would appear that
the strongly luminous hydrogen is carried up by the tremendous
convection-currents at different pressures ; and under these circum-
stances the bright line is seen to be expanded on both sides of its
normal position. Moreover at times there is a dim light on both
sides of the black line, and the line itselfis thinned out, showing that,
although there is an uprush of strongly luminous material, the co-
lumn is still surmounted by some less luminous hydrogen, possibly
separated from the other portion, which still performs the functions of
an absorber. This seems established by another fact, namely that
at times the lines, still black, expand on both sides, as if, in fact, in
these regions there was a depression in the chromosphere; you
already know that the pressure is greater at the base of the chromo-
sphere than at the summit.
For this reason it is best to observe these phenomena by means of
152 Royal Institution :—
the green line, which expands in a more decided manner by pressure
than does the red.
J now come to a new field of discovery opened out by these in-
vestigations, a branch of the inquiry which I fear you will consider
more startling than all the rest—a branch, however, which I have
had many opportunities of studying, and which has required me to
move with the utmost caution. I allude to the movements of the
hydrogen envelope and prominences at which I have before hinted.
Any one who has observed the sun with a powerful telescope,
especially in a London fog (all too,great a rarity unfortunately for
such work), will have been struck with the tremendous changes ob-
served in spots. Now, change means movement; and as spot-phe-
nomena occur immediately below the level of the chromosphere, we
may easily imagine that the chromosphere and its higher waves (the
prominences) will also partake of the movements, be they up- or
downrushes, cyclones, or merely lateral motions. I have thrown on
the screen a photograph of a drawing of a sun-spot observed under
the ciear sky of Rome by Father Secchi—a drawing I regard as a
most faithful counterpart of nature.
You see how the photosphere is being driven about and contorted—
how here it seems to be torn to ribbons by the action of some tre-
mendous force, how here it is dragged down and shivered to atoms.
The spectroscope enables us to determine the velocities of these
movements with a considerable approach to accuracy; and at times
they are so great that | am almost afraid to mention them to you.
Let me first endeavour to give you an idea how this result is
arrived at; and I must here beg your indulgence for a gross illustra-
tion of one of the most supremely delicate of nature’s operations.
Imagine a barrack out of which is constantly issuing with mea-
sured tread and military precision an infinite number of soldiers in
single or Indian file, and suppose yourself in a street seeing these
soldiers pass. You standstill and take out your watch and find that
so many pass you in a second or minute, and that the number of
soldiers as well as the interval between them is always the same.
You now move slowly towards the barrack, still noting what hap-
pens. You find that more soldiers pass you than before in the same
time, and, reckoned in time, the interval between each soldier is less.
You now move still slowly from the barrack, 2. e. with the soldiers.
You find that fewer soldiers now pass you, and that the interval be-
tween each is longer.
Now suppose yourself at rest, and suppose the barrack to have a
motion now towards you, now from you.
In the first case the men will be paid out, so to speak, more
rapidly. The motion of the barrack-gate towards you will plant
each soldier nearer the preceding one than he would have been if
the barrack had remained at rest. The soldiers will really be nearer
together.
In the second case it is obvious that the interval will be greater,
and the soldiers will really be further apart.
Mr. J. N. Lockyer on Recent Discoveriesin Solar Physics. 153
So that, generally, representing the interval between each soldier
by an elastic cord, if the barrack and the eye approach each other by
the motion of either, the cord will contract ; in the case of recession,
the cord will stretch.
Now let the barrack represent the hydrogen on the sun perpetu-
ally paying out waves of light, and let the elastic cord represent one
of these waves; its length will be changed if the hydrogen and the
eye approach each other by the motion of either.
Particular wave-lengths with the normal velocity of light are re-
presented to us by different colours.
The long waves are red.
The short waves are violet.
Now let us fix our attention on the green wave, the refrangibility
of which is indicated by the F line of hydrogen. If any change of
wave-length is observed in this line, and not in the adjacent ones, itis
clear that it is not to the motion of the earth or sun, but to that of
the hydrogen itself and alone that the change must be ascribed.
If the hydrogen on the sun is approaching us, the waves will be
crushed together; they will therefore be shortened, and the light will
incline towards the violet—that is, towards the light with the short-
est waves; and if the waves are shortened only by the +p>py'yy 70
of a millimetre we can detect the motion.
If the hydrogen on the sun is receding from us, the waves will be
drawn out ; they will therefore be longer, and the green ray will in-
cline towards the red.
I must next point out that there are two different circumstances
under which the hydrogen may approach or recede from the eye.
I have here a globe, which we will take as representing the sun.
Fix your attention on the centre of this globe: it is evident that an
uprush or a downrush is necessary to cause any alteration of wave-
length. A cyclone or lateral movement of any kind is powerless ;
there will be no motion to or from the eye, but only at right angles
to the line of sight.
Next fix your attention on the edge of the globe—the limb, in
astronomical language; here it is evident that an upward or down-
ward movement is as powerless to alter the wave-length as a la-
teral movement was in the other case, but that, should any lateral or
cyclonic movement occur here of sufficient velocity, it might be de-
tected.
So that we have the centre of the disk for studying upward and
downward movements, and the limb for studying lateral or cyclonic
movements, if they exist.
If the hydrogen-lines were invariably observed to broaden out on
both sides, the idea of movement would require to be received with
great caution ; we might be in presence of phenomena due to greater
pressure, either when the lines observed are bright or black upon the
sun; but when they widen out, sometimes on one side, sometimes
on the other, and sometimes on both, this explanation appears to be
untenable, as Dr. Frankland and myself in our researches at the Col-
lege of Chemistry have never failed to observe a widening out, equally
154 Royal Institution :—
or nearly so, on both sides of the F line when the pressure of the
gas has been increased.
You see now on the screen a diagram showing the strange con-
tortions which the F hydrogen line undergoes at the centre of the
sun’s disk. Not only have we the line bright, as I have before told
you, but the dark one is twisted in places, generally inclining towards
the red; and often when this happens we have a bright line on the
violet side. Yousee it sometimes stopping short of one of the small
sun-spots, swelling out prior to disappearance, invisible in a facula
between two small spots, changed into a bright line and widened
out on both sides two or three times in the very small spots, beco-
ming bright near a spot and expanding over it on both sides—very
many times widened out near a spot, sometimes considerably, on the
less refrangible side, and, finally, extended as a bright line without
any thickening over a small spot.
Now the other Fraunhofer lines on the diagram may be looked
upon as so many milestones telling us with what rapidity the uprush
and downrush take place; for these twistings are nothing more nor
less than alterations of wave-length, and, thanks to Angstrom’s map,
we can map out distances along the spectrum from Fin zppp/ppa0ths
of a millimetre from the centre of that line; and we know that an
alteration of that line z5gq5gn7 millim. towards the violet means
a velocity of 38 miles a second towards the eye (2. e. an uprush), and
that a similar alteration towards the red means a similar velocity
from the eye (7.e.adownrush). The fact that the black line inclines
to the red shows that the less bright hydrogen descends; the fact
that the bright line (where both are visible side by side) inclines to
the violet shows that the more vivid hydrogen ascends; and the alte-
ration of wave-length is such that 20 miles a second is very common.
Now, observations of the lateral motions at the limb are of course
made by the chromospheric bright lines seen beyond the limb. Here
the velocities are very much more startling—not velocities of uprush
and downrush, as you now know, but swinging and cyclonic motions
of the hydrogen.
I will first show you a cyclone observed on the 14th of March ;
but before I do so Jet me make one remark. Although the slit used
is as narrow as I can make it, let us say =3, (I have not measured
it) of an inch, a strip of this breadth, of the sun’s image, is some-
thing considerable, as the glorious sun himself is painted by my
object-glass only about ‘94 inch in diameter, so that after all the slit
lets in to be analyzed a strip some 1800 miles wide.
Now, suppose we have a cyclone of incandescent hydrogen some
1500 miles wide tearing along with a very rapid rotatory motion, it
is clear that all this cyclone could fall within the slit, and that, if the
rotatory motion were sufficiently rapid, the spectroscope should sepa-
rate the waves which are carried towards us from those which are rece-
ding. It does this: as you see, we have an alteration of wave-length
both towards the red and violet, amounting to something like 40 miles
a second. Now it should be clear to you that, by moving the slit
first one way and then the other, we may be able to bring it in turn
Mr. J. N. Lockyer on Recent Discoveries in Solar Physics. 155
to such positions that only the light proceeding from either side of
the cyclone can enter it. Then we shall have changes of wave-
length in one direction only ; in each case precisely as you see was
observed.
Now let us suppose that instead of a cyclone we have a motion of
some portions of the prominence towards the eye, and that, more-
over, the rate of motion varies excessively in some portions. What
we shall see will be this. The portion of the prominence at rest will
give us no alteration of wave-length; its bright line will be in a line
with the corresponding black one in the spectrum. The portion
moving towards the eye, however, will give us an alteration of wave-
length towards the violet. You are now in a position to grasp the
phenomena revealed to me by my spectroscope on the 12th instant,
when at times the F line was triple! the extreme alteration of wave-
length being such that the motion of that part of the prominence
giving the most extreme alteration of wave-length must have ex-
ceeded 120 miles per second, if we are to explain these phenomena
by the only known possible cause which is open to us.
By moving the slit it was possible to see in which part of the pro-
minence these great motions arose, and to follow the change of
wave-length to its extremest limit.
By the kindness of Dr. Balfour Stewart I am able to exhibit to
you some of the Kew sun-pictures, which show you how these spec-
troscopic changes are sometimes connected with telescopic ones.
On the 21st of April there was a spot very near the limb which I
was enabled to observe continuously for some time. At 7.30 a.m.
there was a prominence visible in the field of view, in which tremen-
dous action was evidently going on, for the C, D, and F lines were
magnificently bright in the ordinary spectrum itself; and as the spot-
spectrum was also visible, it was seen that the prominence was in
advance ofthe spot. The injection mto the chromosphere surpassed
anything I had seen before, for there was a magnesium cloud quite
separated from the limb, and high up in the prominence itself.
By 8.30 the action had quieted down; but at 9.30 another throb
was observed, and the new prominence was moving away with tre-
mendous velocity. While this was going on, the hydrogen-lines
suddenly became bright on the other side (the earth’s side) of the
spot, and widened out considerably—indeed to such an extent that
I attributed their action to a cyclone, although, as you know, this
was a doubtful case.
Now, what said the photographic record? The sun was photo-
graphed at 10° 55™ a.m., and I hope you will be able to see on the
screen how the sun’s surface was disturbed near the spot. A sub-
sequent photograph, at 4" 1™ p.m. on the same day, shows the limb
to be actually broken in that particular place; the photosphere seems
to have been absolutely torn away behind the spot, exactly when the
spectroscope had afforded me possible evidence of a cyclone!
In connexion with the last branches of the research I have brought
to your notice, | may remark that we have two very carefully pre-
156 Royal Society:—
pared recent maps of the solar spectrum, one by Kirchhoff, the other
by Angstrom, made a few years apart and at different epochs with
regard to the sun-spot period. If you look at these maps you will
see a vast difference in the relative thicknesses of the C and F lines,
and great differences in the relative darkness and position of the
lines; and if I had time I could show you that we now may be sup-
plied with a barometer, so to speak, to measure the varying pres-
sures in the solar and stellar chromospheres; for, depend upon it,
every star has, has had, or will have a chromosphere, and there are
no such things as ‘‘ worlds without hydrogen,” any more than there
are stars without photospheres. I suggested in 1866 that possibly
a spectroscopic examination of the sun’s limb might teach us some-
what of the outburst of the star in Corona; and already we see that
all that is necessary to get just such an outburst in our own sunis to
increase the power of his convection-currents, which we know to be
ever at work. Here, then, is one cataclysm the less in astronomy
—one less ‘‘ world on fire,” and possibly also a bright light thrown
on the past history of our own planet.
I might show you further that we now are beginning to have a
better hold on the strange phenomena presented by variable stars,
and that an application of the facts I have brought to your notice
this evening, taken in connexion with the various types of stars
which have been indicated by Father Secchi with admirable philo-
sophy, opens out generalizations of the highest interest and import-
ance, and that, having at length fairly grappled with some of the
phenomena of the nearest star, we may soon hope for more certain
knowledge of the distant ones.
At present, however, we may well leave speculation for those who
prefer it to acquiring facts; let us rather, emboldened by the work
which this new method of research has enabled us to accomplish in
this country, under the worst atmospheric conditions, in seven short
months, go on quietly deciphering one by one the letters of this
strange hieroglyphic language which the spectroscope has revealed
to us—a language written in fire on that grand orb which to us
earth-dwellers is the fountain of hght and heat, and even of Iife
itself.
ROYAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 73.]
March 4, 1869.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—
“Note on the Formation and Phenomena of Clouds.’’ By John
Tyndall, LL.D., #.R.S.
It is well known that when a receiver filled with ordinary undried
air is exhausted, a cloudiness, due to the precipitation of the aqueous
vapour diffused in the air, is produced by the first few strokes of the
pump. It is, as might be expected, possible to produce clouds in
this way with the vapours of other liquids than water.
In the course of the experiments on the chemical action of light
Dr. Tyndall on the Formation and Phenomena of Clouds. 157
which have been already communicated in abstract to the Royal
Society, I had frequent occasion to observe the precipitation of such
clouds in the experimental tubes employed; indeed several days at a
time have been devoted solely to the generation and examination of
clouds formed by the sudden dilatation of the air in the experimental
tubes.
The clouds were generated in two ways: one mode consisted in
opening the passage between the filled experimental tube and the
air-pump, and then simply dilating the air by working the pump.
In the other, the experimental tube was connected with a vessel of
suitable size, the passage between which and the experimental tube
could be closed by a stopcock. This vessel was first exhausted ; on
turning the cock the air rushed from the experimental tube into the
vessel, the precipitation of a cloud within the tube being a conse-
quence of the transfer. Instead of a special vessel, the cylinders of
the air-pump itself were usually employed for this purpose.
It was found possible, by shutting off the residue of air and vapour
after each act of precipitation, and again exhausting the cylinders of
the pump, to obtain with some substances, and without refilling the
experimental tube, fifteen or twenty clouds in succession.
The clouds thus precipitated differed from each other in luminous
energy, some shedding forth a mild white light, others flashing out
with sudden and surprising brilliancy. This difference of action is,
of course, to be referred to the different reflective energies of the par-
ticles of the clouds, which were produced by substances of very dif-
ferent refractive indices.
Different clouds, moreover, possess very different degrees of sta-
bility ; some melt away rapidly, while others linger for minutes in
the experimental tube, resting upon its bottom as they dissolve like
a heap of snow. ‘The particles of other clouds are trailed through
the experimental tube as if they were moving through a viscous
medium.
Nothing can exceed the splendour of the diffraction-phenomena
exhibited by some of these clouds; the colours are best seen by
looking along the experimental tube from a point above it, the face
being turned towards the source of illumination. The differential
motions introduced by friction against the interior surface of the
tube often cause the colours to arrange themselves in distinct layers.
The difference in texture exhibited by different clouds caused me
to look a little more closely than I had previously done into the
mechanism of cloud-formation. A certain expansion is necessary to
bring down the cloud; the moment before precipitation the mass of
cooling air and vapour may be regarded as divided into a number of
polyhedra, the particles along the bounding surfaces of which move in
opposite directions when precipitation actually setsin. Every cloud-
particle has consumed a polyhedron of vapour in its formation; and
it is manifest that the size of the particle must depend, not only on
the size of the vapour polyhedron, but also on the relation of the
density of the vapour to that of its liquid. If the vapour were
light, and the liquid heavy, other things being equal, the cloud-
158 Royal Society :—Messrs. Dupré and Page on the Physical
particle would be smaller than if the vapour were heavy and the
liquid light. There would evidently be more shrinkage in the one
case than in the other: these considerations were found valid through-
out the experiments. The case of toluol may be taken as representa-
tive of a great number of others. The specific gravity of this liquid
is 0°85, that of water being unity; the specific gravity of its vapour
is 3°26, that of aqueous vapour being 0°6. Now, as the size of the
cloud-particle is directly proportional to the specific gravity ef the
vapour, and inversely proportional to the specific gravity of the
liquid, an easy calculation proves that, assuming the size of the va-
pour polyhedra in both cases to be the same, the size of the particle
of toluol cloud must be more than six times that of the particle of
aqueous cloud. It is probably impossible to test this question with
numerical accuracy ; but the comparative coarseness of the toluol
cloud is strikingly manifest to the naked eye. The case is, as I have
said, representative.
In fact, aqueous vapour is without a parallel in these particulars ;
it is not only the lightest of all vapours, in the common acceptation
of that term, but the lightest of all gases except hydrogen and am-
monia. ‘To this circumstance the soft and tender beauty of the clouds
of our atmosphere is mainly to be ascribed.
The sphericity of the cloud-particles may be immediately inferred
from their deportment under the luminous beams. The light which
they shed when spherical is conéinuous: but clouds may also be pre-
cipitated in solid flakes ; and then the incessant sparkling of the cloud
shows that its particles are plates, and not spheres. Some portions of
the same cloud may be composed of spherical particles, others of
flakes, the difference beg at once manifested through the calmness
of the one portion of the cloud, and the uneasiness of the other.
The sparkling of such flakes reminded me of the plates of mica in
the river Rhone at its entrance into the Lake of Geneva, when shone
upon by a strong sun.
March 11.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—
“On the Specific Heat and other physical properties of Aqueous
Mixtures and Solutions.” By A. Dupré, Ph.D., and F. J. M. Page.
Part I.
Mixtures of Hthylice Alcohol and Water.
Section 1. Specific Heat.
For the methods employed in estimating the specific heat of these
mixtures, see a former abstract, ‘ Proceedings of the Royal Society,’
vol. xvi. p. 336 (Phil. Mag. 8. 4. vol. xxxv. p. 464).
- the present paper the authors give the specific heat of an ad-
ditional number of mixtures, so as to complete the series for every
10 per cent. from water to absolute alcohol.
The following Table gives the mean of the results obtained in all
experiments, details of seventy-four of which are given :—
Properties of Aqueous Mixtures and Solutions. 159
Percentage of Specific heat Specific heat .
alcohol, by eit ‘ found. EaagSe Dilenaing:
5 Tey toy a ne. ee Soe er ee
10 103°576 96043 7 533
20 104°362 92086 12°276
30 102'602 38°129 14°473
40 96°805 : 84°172 12°633
45 94/192 82°193 11°999
50 90°633 80°215 10°418
60 34.°3 32 76258 8°074.
70 78°445 72°301 6144
80 71°690 68°344. 3°346
go 65°764 64°387 1°377
100 60°4.30 So PETA PaNOURS Mame: So Dey!
Section 2. Heat produced by the mixing of Alcohol and Water.
This was estimated as follows:—The liquid which formed the
smallest portion of the mixture was sealed up in a thin glass bulb ;
this was then introduced into the calorimeter, the glass bulb was
broken, the mixture formed, and the rise in the temperature of the
calorimeter observed.
The units of heat evolved in the formation of 5 grms. of each
mixture were thus calculated, and found to be—
10 per cent. spirit .... 26°6850 | 50 per cent. spirit .... 35°5850
20
= i ee 435°9545"+ 60 ps ss Be earl iy.)
30 » ie ene 1479500, ) 70 % Fe ete 1Os8200
40 t. Pan 5s 144-3630; % SO Pe > dal! D247 7 5
45 ”? 99 ~ 38°8095 90 ” 99 es eee 7°7025
Section 3. Bozling-points.
A smail flask was taken ; into this 100 cub. centims. of the mixture
was introduced, and the mouth of the flask closed by a doubly perfo-
rated cork. Into one of these perforations a thermometer was intro-
duced, into the other a bent tube, dipping beneath the surface of the
liquid in the flask, and connected at its other extremity with a Liebig
condenser. This tube had a lateral opening (inside the flask) just
beneath the cork; by means of this the vapour escaped to the con-
denser, and trickled back into the flask after being condensed. Thus
Percentage of Boiling-point Boiling-point
alcohol, by weight. observed. calculated *. Difference.
° BO A ee eee alh | eewieet saree AC Orly) She cperataay ae
10 90°98 97°25 — 6:27
20 86°50 95°10 — 8°60
30 84°01 92°95 — 894
40 32°52 go"go — 3°38
45 81°99 89°72 HY s
50 31°33 88°60 —7'27
60 80°47 86°50 — 6°03
79 79°61 84°35 —4°74
80 73°34. 32°20 —3°36
90 73°01 80°05 —2°04
100 FARGO Pah MIS) Ne els Bieta 8 Kas 3
* Calculated on the assumption that the alcohol and water in a mixture have
an influence on the boiling-point of the mixture proportional to their respective
weights.
160 Royal Society :—Messrs. Dupré and Page on the Physical
the composition of the mixture was retained as uniform as possible.
Thus estimated, the barometer standing at 744°4 millims., the boil-
ing-points are given in the preceding Table.
Section 4. Capillary Attraction.
This was estimated by carefully observing the heights to which
the several mixtures rose ina capillary tube 0°584 millim. in diameter.
These heights were measured by means of a telescope and a mil-
limetre-scale etched on a glass rod. This glass rod was fixed to the
capillary tube, and terminated at its lower extremity in a point,
which was made just to touch the surface of the liquid.
Several precautions were necessary to render the measurements ac-
curate.
The results are contained in the following Table :—
Percentage io . ine :
ge | Height, assuming Relative molecular
of alcohol, by water eta Aha Height caleulated.| Difference.
weight. = 100 millims.
re) I00°0O Io0o°o0o TOO%0O% = ba eee ete e itt °
10 69°17 68°07 93°11 —25°04
20 56°43 54°33 86°22 — 31°39
30 48°19 46°15 79°34 — 33°19
40 45°30 42°56 72°45 —29°89
45 43°74 40°64, 69°00 — 28°36
50 42°93 39°43 65°56 —26°13
60 42°30 37°89 58°68 —20°79
70 41°76 36°42 51°79 5537
80 41°29 35°03 44°90 ST
go 40°54 33°35 38°02 — ae
100 39°21 31°13 31°13 an sip eee
The third column gives the length of a column of water equal in
weight to the thread of alcoholic mixture contained in the second
column, and gives, therefore, a measure of the relative strength of
the molecular attraction in the various mixtures.
The experiments were made at a temperature of 16° C.
Section 5. Rate of Expansion.
This was determined by estimating the specific gravity of the dif-
ferent mixtures at the temperatures 10°C., 15°°5 C., 20°C.
The specific-gravity bottle has two necks ; into one was fitted a ther-
mometer with a long bulb, whilst the other ended in a capillary tube.
This bottle was placed in a water-bath, whose temperature was
under perfect control, and thus the specific gravity could be accu-
rately estimated at the above-named temperatures.
Section 6. Compressibility.
This property was estimated by an apparatus similar to the one em-
ployed by Regnault and Grassi, but of simpler construction.
The piezometer was of glass; pressure was applied to the inside
and outside by forcing air into the apparatus by means of a small
pump ; 0°000002 was always added as a correction for the compres-
sibility of the piezometer.
The two following Tables give the results obtained in Sections 5
and 6,
Properties of Aqueous Mixtures and Solutions. 161
Percentage ° °
Volume at | Volume at 20° C.,| Volume at 20°C., :
pF steohol, by 10° C. found. calculated, IDRIS EG
weight.
fe) 100 TOO"I 54. 100154. pieeehietd
fe) 100 100°2 12 100°272 —o6o0
20 100 100°405 100°386 +019
30 100 100°632 100°498 +°134
40 100 100°733 100°601 +°182
45 100 100°827 100°652 +175
50 100 100°868 100°700 +'168
59°77 100 100°914, 100°789 +°125
69°73 100 100°980 100'3874 +°106
79°81 100 TOI'O20 1009 54. +'066
89°89 100 IOI"O52 IO1°034. +:o18
100°00 100 101088 TODOS Ss buyer ine aaleteey ae
Percentage | Compressibility | Compressibility for
of alcohol, by for one one atmosphere, Difference.
weight. _jatmosphere, found. calculated.
fe) 0°00004774. GiOGCOAT IAAL MAGE POLC et seres
fe) 0°000043 51 0°00005387 0°00001036
20 0°00003g911 0700005998 0'00002087
30 0°00003902 0°00006 534. 0°00002682
40 0°00004.347 0°00007118 0°00002771
45 0700004608 0°00007366 0°00002758
50 0°00004878 0°00007600 0°00002722
59°77 0°0000 5620 0°00008029 0°00002409
69°73 0°00006159 0°00008426 0°00002267
73°31 0°00006942 0°00008775 0°00001833
89°89 0*000079 50 0°00009140 O*0O0001 190
100°00 0°00009349 0°00009 349
Weight of water contained in the piezometer 114°9727 germs.
In conclusion the authors confine themselves to pointing out cer-
tain relations which connect the various physical properties examined.
These properties may be divided into two classes, according as
they reach a maximum deviation from the theoretical mean a 30
per cent, or 40 per cent.; each of these is divided into two sub-
classes, one containing those properties in which the numbers found
are above those calculated, and the other containing those in which
they are below.
Class I
Subclass a.
Specific heat.
Heat produced by mixing.
oe 6. Boiling-point.
Capillary attraction.
Class IT.
Subclass c. Rate of expansion.
d. Compressibility.
Other characters, examined by previous investigators, are :—
1. Vapour-tension: this falls under Class I. Subclass 6.
2. Specific Gravity.
3. Index y refraction.
Phil. Mag. 8.4. Vol. 38. No. 258. Aug. 1869. M
162 Geological Society :—
The two latter form a new class, coming to a maximum deviation
from their theoretical value at 45 per cent.
In subclass a, specific heat—by reference to the Tables given, it
will be seen that the first addition of alcohol to water (though
alcohol has a specific heat much lower than that of water) produces
mixtures which have a higher specific heat than water, and that a
mixture containing between 30 and 40 per cent. alcohol has the
same specific heat as water.
Similarly alcohol, though much more compressible than water,
yet, when added to it, forms mixtures less compressible than water ;
so that a mixture containing between 45 and 50 per cent. alcohol
has the same compressibility as water.
The rate of expansion is remarkable, as, starting from water, it at
first 1s below the theoretical value, then rises; at 17 to 18 per cent.
the rate of expansion is identical with the calculated expansion ; for
all mixtures stronger than this, the rate of expansion is constantly
above that calculated.
The whole of the physical characters of mixtures of alcohol and
water come to a maximum deviation from their theoretical values
somewhere between 30 per cent. and 45 per cent. alcohol by weight.
The 30 per cent. nearly corresponds to the formula C, H,O+6 OH,
(=29-87 per cent.) ; the 45 per cent. has approximately the formula
C, H, 0+3 0 H, (=46 per cent.).
Some of the physical properties examined seem to be especially
connected with each other; these are :—
1. Specific heat and heat produced by mixing; for by dividing
the number of units of heat evolved by 5 grammes of any
mixture by 3°411, the elevation of the specific heat of such
mixture above the theoretical specific heat is obtained.
2. Boiling-point and capillary attraction ; by dividing the depres-
sion of the capillary attraction by 3°6, the depression of the
boiling-point is obtained.
Deville & Hoek have shown the specific gravity and index of re-
fraction to be connected with each other (Ann. de Chim. et de Phy-
sique, 3rd ser. vol. v. Pogg. Ann. vol. cxii.).
Whether the relations thus established between the various phy-
sical properties of alcoholic mixtures hold good with other similar
substances, or whether these mixtures ferm a singular exception,
must be decided by further research.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 376. ]
December 9th, 1868.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
2. “On the occurrence of Celestine in the Tertiary rocks of
Egypt,” By H. Bauerman, Esq., F.C.S., and C. Le Neve Foster,
D:8e,,.8:G.8.
This communication referred to the presence of celestine at two
different horizons in the Tertiary escarpment of Mokattam. The
beds forming the escarpment may be divided into two parts, namely;—
Dr. P. M. Duncan on Echinodermata, &¢. of Sinai. 168
the upper beds, which are brown, sandy, cellular limestones with
numerous oyster-beds; and the lower, or white Nummulitic lime-
stone proper. A bed of marl with fibrous gypsum generally occurs
at the junction of the two groups of strata.
In the upper or brown beds celestine occurs with gypsum, some-
times in isolated crystals, but more generally in stellar or spheroidal
nodular aggregates, the points of the crystals being turned outwards.
About thirty feet lower down in the white limestone, rough irregular
erystals of the same mineral are found in open hollows or druses.
They are often large, but much decomposed, and apparently crusted
with Nummulites, Bryozoa, &c., which are in reality included in
the crystals, and have become exposed by erosion. The erosion
and alteration of the crystals commences by the roughening of the
faces of the prism, owing to the formation of numerous fine stria-
tions parallel to the basal planes, and goes on frequently until the
entire disappearance of the crystals. The ultimate product is a
hollow cast of the crystal, which may then be filled with limestone,
forming a pseudomorph by total replacement. This, however, ap-
pears to be rare. More generally the dissolved celestine has been
redeposited upon the altered crystals, forming macled groups. The
secondary crystals are compact, brilliant, and well formed, without
included foreign bodies. These phenomena were attributed by the
authors to the solubility of sulphate of strontia in chloride of sodium.
3. “Note on the Echinodermata, Bivalve Mollusca, and some
other Fossils from the Cretaceous Rocks of Sinai.” By Dr. P. Martin
Duncan, F.R.S., Sec. G.S., &e.
The author identified the fossils brought by Mr. Bauerman from
Sinai as belonging to the Upper-Greensand and Hippuritic-Chalk
horizons, and correlated them with those of Algeria and South-
eastern Arabia. He determined the following species :—
Heterodiadema Libycum, 4g. & Desor, | Neithia tricostata, Bayle.
we Exogyra plicata, Goldfuss.
Discoidea subucula, Klein. Ostrea Auressensis, H. Coq.
Forguemolli, H. Coq. , var. major, Dune.
Epiaster distinctus, Agass. Mermeti, H. Cog.
tumidus, Desor. Exogyra Overwegi, von Buch.
Periaster oblongus, D’ Orb. Ostrea Delattrei, H. Cog.
Hemiaster Cenomanensis, Cotteau.
Phymosoma Delmarrei, Desor.
Pseudodiadema variolare, Brongn.
eurvirostris, lVi/ss.
Caprotina Toucasiana, D’ Ord.
subequalis, D’ Ord.
Pedinopsis, sp. —— Archiacianus, D’ Ord,
Plicatula Fourneli, H. Cog. Radiolites, sp.
Pecten asper, Lam. Clavagella, sp.
Neithia alpina, D’ Orb.
4, “On the Existence during the Quaternary Period of a Glacier
of the Second Order, occupying the ‘ cirque’ of the valley of Palheres
in the western part of the granitic ‘massif’ of the Lozére.” By M.
C. Martins, For. Corr. G.S.
After mentioning that no one had satisfactorily proved the former
existence of glaciers in the Puys of Auvergne, the Cevennes moun-
tains, or the massif of the Lozere, the author stated that, from study-
ing the Government map, it occurred to him that traces of a glacier
ought to be found in the eastern part of the granitic massif of the
M 2
164 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
Lozére, at the upper portion of the Valley of Palheres, which opens
near Villefort. An examination of the district in question proved
the former existence of a glacier which was limited to the cirque
which enclosed it, and did not descend into the valley. A lateral
and a terminal moraine were found, and roches perchées were ob-
served on the sides of the valley. No striz or polished surfaces
were seen, owing to the schistose rocks being easily decomposed.
XVIIL. Intelligence and Miscellaneous. Articles.
ON THE COMPRESSIBILITY OF LIQUIDS.
BY MM. AMAURY AND DESCAMPS.
N June 1868, in conjunction with M. Jamin, we laid before the
Academy a method for measuring the compressibility of liquids ;
since then M. Jamin has intrusted to us the task of continuing this
research. We have made a great number of determinations, the
results of which we have the honour to lay before the Academy.
The following Table gives the coefficients of compressibility for one
atmosphere :-— 35
Distilled. water athe ols Chara. mae 0:0000457
INOUE aoa) fu tones ore G@UAODODS 3a
Wilicolt@his. cert tens 15 sees th. « nO OO0OS IE
Hehenmea hea ects Otis intern Se 0:000109
ther. sey ase la Jeeteis wes -, pOVOOOI
Sulphide vongcanbony Iisa ore cea 0:0000635
MCKCUTY tact eee One te eee 0:00000187
Solution of chloride of potassium,—
Containing in 1000 of water 50 of KCl...... 0:0000419
6 ys LOOips totes Baton 0:0000388
$5 i 15) OF rere nren ots 5 « 0°0000556
sy 35 2OOs 1555 Ties Cae 0°0000332
6 ¥5 oO 8 comet tee ener 0:0000318
A sis 300 4; .. «tue 00000306
Wiater:%y. waiiiek. sts otters omar te. Ua Meer eee 0:0000457
These coefficients have been deduced from experiments in which
the pressure varied from 1 to 10 atmospheres.
We may observe that the coefficient 0°00000187 found for mer-
cury varies considerably from the coefficient 0:00000295 which
Grassi obtained by the use of M. Regnault’s method, while with the
more compressible liquids the agreement between our numbers and
those of M. Grassi is perfect. ‘This difference arises from the cir-
cumstance that, as the compressibility of mercury is very small, the
least error in the measurement of the correction due to the change
of volume in the piezometer has a considerable influence on the true
coefficient, whereas with the more compressible liquids this source
of error is less apparent.
The expansion of liquids, as is well known, gradually increases
with the temperature, and, when they reach the boiling-point, is vir-
tually equal to that of gases. We imagined it would be the same
with their coefficient of compressibility, and we made very accurate
experiments with water, alcohol, and ether from this point of view.
We measured the coefficient of compressibility under very feeble
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 165
pressures (only about a centimetre higher than the maximum ten-
sion of these liquids), but we were unable to recognize any change in
the value of the coefficients of compressibility.—Comptes Rendus,
June 28, 1869. —
MEASUREMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUIDS
HITHERTO SUPPOSED TO BE INSULATORS. BY M. SAID-EFFENDI.
M. Jamin has desired me to execute a method which he devised
for electrolyzing liquids of small conducting-power. The experi-
ments were made in the laboratory of the Sorbonne under his direc-
tion. The method is as follows :—
The quantity of electricity which passes through a conductor is
proportional to its conductivity and its section, but is inversely as its
length. If the length be diminished and the section increased, a
current may be passed even through substances supposed to be insu-
lators. In the case of liquids this is effected by superposing two
large plates of platinum, kept apart by flannel or silk or glass, and
coiling them round a tube; then, after being connected with the poles
of a battery, they are immersed in a voltameter. ‘They thus repre-
sent a conductor, the length 7 of which is the thickness of the ma-
terial which separates the plates, and the section is twice their surface
2s. In the present experiments / was about a millimetre, and 2s
amounted to 195,000 square millimetres. When the roll was im-
mersed in a liquid the conductibility of which was c, the resistance
ich tan
Mecteqian ta) —, OF tO ——— =
2s ¢ 195000 c
had become about two hundred thousand times as great.
By this means even the worst-conducting liquids are readily tra-
versed by the current. The following are the principal facts which
have been observed :—
(1) Distilled water disengages with four Bunsen’s elements as
much gas as acidulated water in an ordinary voltameter. It is there-
fore an electrolyte. Butit becomes heated ; for a portion of the gases
recombines on the surface of the platinum. ‘The volume of gas is
thus less with this pure water than with a voltameter containing
acidulated water placed in the circuit. As the intensity diminishes
the difference increases, and when the current is very weak there is
no apparent decomposition in the apparatus.
(2) It is only when subjected to the action of powerful batteries
that alcohol has hitherto afforded signs of decomposition, which might
be attributed to the presence of foreign substances. With our appa-
ratus four elements disengage considerable quantities of hydrogen,
mixed with a small quantity of oxygen.
(3) Oil of turpentine conducts far worse; eight Bunsen’s ele-
ments are necessary to produce a distinct decomposition.
(4) Rectified oil cf petroleum is decomposed with great ease.
The gas collected is inflammable, and during its combustion it de-
posits carbon upon the sides of the belljar in which it is contained.
This deposit may be due to the presence of petroleum-vapour in the
liberated gas.
Further researches will give us the composition of the products
disengaged during these experiments. I have been especially en-
gaged in measuring the conductivity of these various liquids.
It was as if the conductivity
166 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
I passed the current through the apparatus and through a tan-
gent-compass, which at the first moment indicated an intensityz. The
apparatus was then removed and replaced by coils of known resist-
ance, and by a rheostat the length of which could be varied so as to
reproduce the intensity 2. The resistance of the liquid was equal to
that of the coils and of the rheostat.
The numbers obtained are the following; they are inversely as
the conducting-power of the liquid :—
Liquids. Turns of rheostat. Conductivity.
Water ys ci ate e me eens 55 1000
Petroleuta ng si a ame anos 72
Sulphide of carbon ...... 1000 55
ACOH ON is pa ere Steusteuan 1130 49
LOLELO SH Mon Ve app AOR OR iE Ug iN 1375 40
Oil of turpentine........ 2380 23
Benzolesa.. s. : .. 3480 16
—Comptes Rendus, June 28, 1869.
ON THE HEAT DEVELOPED IN DISCONTINUOUS CURRENTS.
BY MM. JAMIN AND ROGER.
Pouillet has shown that when a current of the intensity I is passed
into a short rectilinear circuit which developes no phenomena of
induction, and which is broken at very short and regular intervals
by a vibrating apparatus, the tangent-compass exhibits an apparent
intensity I,. This intensity is equal to I diminished in the ratio
of the time a, during which the current passes, to the duration I of
one vibration of the break, so that we have
li=Te.
We may infer from this result that the broken current is made up
of successive fragments of currents which last during the time a,
and which have a real intensity I, and that there is no change either
at the moment of making or of breaking each.
On the other hand, we know that, according to Joule, the amount
of heat, C, disengaged in the unit of time in each resistance 7, by a
current having the intensity I, is proportional to this resistance r and
to the square I? of this intensity; it is equal to KrI’, K being a con-
stant. ‘This law has been found to hold good for continuous cur-
rents ; we have investigated whether it holds in the case of broken
currents.
For this purpose we passed these currents through a thermorheo-
meter, an instrument which one of us devised, and which was laid
before the Academy on the 6th of July 1868. It consists essen-
tially of a fine platinum wire, the length of which may be varied,
and which is immersed in the reservoir of a thermometer in the
middle of an isolating liquid. ‘The heat developed by the current
is transmitted to this liquid, and is measured by the expansion ob-
served. Operating in this manner, we have ascertained that broken
currents always develope more heat than continuous currents of the
same apparent intensity, I.
This fact does not contradict Joule’s law; we shall, on the con-
trary, see that, when generalized, it justifies the ideas of Pouillet. For
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 167
according to this physicist, each section of the current, having a real
intensity I and a duration a, must disengage during a vibration a
quantity of heat equal to KrI’a. If the real intensity I is replaced
KrI,
1 °
a
it will bea minimum whena=1, that is, when the current is con-
tinuous; it will increase when @ diminishes, that is, when the du-
ration of each fragment of a current decreases.
To verify this theoretical formula we used an ordinary Froment’s
break. A platinum point fitted to a vibrating spring, on sinking,
dipped into a mercury-cup and transmitted the current ; 1t emerged
from it as it rose, and broke the current. The duration of each
fragment was prolonged by raising the level of the mercury, and was
diminished by lowering it; the value of « (that is, the duration of the
immersion) was easily measured.
The following Table shows :—(1) that I,, the apparent intensity of
the broken current, may be calculated by Ohm and Pouillet’s law,
by its value a the heat should be Other things being equal,
a
A
and that it is equal to owe A being the electromotive force, and
R-+r the total resistance of the circuit; (2) that the quantity of heat
2
developed in the resistance r, divided by “1 is a constant quantity
a
equal to K (K=0°19), whether the current is broken or whether it
is continuous.
TasiE I.—Values of K and of I, without Coil.
(A=410°8, R=3°65.)
Intensity I,. a=1. a—0°06.
Resist-
Ob- Galcus (Ke Ca K= La
served. | lated. C. 714?" oe ala
14-40 14:20 25°30 1080 0:20 1620 0:18
15°45 15°10 23°62 1160 0-20 1716 0:18
16°55 16°63 21:04 1150 0:20 183 0°19
18:90 19-40 18:°}2 1120 | 0-20 2118 0:19
21:43 21-23 15°70 1470 0-20 2120 0-19
24°16 24:25 13°25 1640 0-21 2520 0°19
28°72 28 82 10-66 1800 0:20 3820 0:20
35°60 39°39 7:97 2150 0-21 3510 0:20
44:70
45°29 5°42 2490 0:23 4150 0-20
Means..c) O20. oseced. 0°19
It is known that matters are not so simple when there is placed
in the circuit a coil containing soft iron; the apparent intensity
of the discontinuous current is not given by the formula I, =Ia; it
is far smaller, and follows new laws now well known and investi-
gated by several physicists. Let us denote it by I’; it is obvious that
then each fragment of the current is very complicated—enfeebled at
the outset by the counter-current, and increased when it is broken by
the final shock (the extra current). It was probable that Joule’s
law would be modified in a thermorheometer placed in the circuit.
168 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
This was not so; the quantity of heat disengaged in this thermo-
rheometer was always represented by the formula Krl’,’, at least
when the breaks were rapid enough, just as if each section of the cur-
!
rent had a real constant intensity = ; I’, was determined by the special
action of the coil according to new laws, which are not those of Ohm.
This is shown by the following Table, obtained as the result of
experiments where a coil was interposed in the circuit.
Taste II1.—Values of K with a Coil in the Circuit.
a=. a—0'5.
Inten- | Resist-
Sity ise ance. 05) Toe Pee | Cu
C. rl',? I’,
9 25°46 440 0-20 647 0:19
9:25 23°88 350 0:17 755 0-17
9-92 21:04 376 0:18 845 0-21
11-00 18:44 381 0:17 1039 (23
12:52 15°78 466 0:18 915 0:18
13:90 13°15 426 0-18 997 0-21
15°65 10°57 427 0-16 970 0-718
18:70 7°36 476 0-17 1014 0:19
22°50 5:29 467 0:16 965 0:17
23°83 3:37 289 0-15 791 0:20
25:95 1-81 265 0-21 611 0°25
Means:.2)*. O18 tT 0:19
But if there is no change in that portion of the circuit which is made
up of the thermorheometer (that is, in the portion where there is no
induction), all is modified in the coil; and if its resistance is R, the
heat there produced is far more than that calculated by the formula
KRI'”
a
of a current upon itself in that portion of the circuit where this in-
duction takes place; but it is only changed in this portion. We
shall, before long, investigate this change.
We may be permitted to advert to a claim of priority which
M. Le Roux has made.
M. Le Roux published in 1857 some purely theoretical ideas, ac-
cording to which a fragment of a current would meet in every por-
tion of the conductor a resistance greater than the statical resistance
which Ohm’s laws assign to this conductor; and in our prece-
ding experiments he has seen a confirmation of his ideas.
Weare the more at a loss to understand this reclamation because
our formule are in entire disagreement with those of M. Le Roux,
and because, far from having justified his theory, we think we have
proved that it has no foundation.
In this investigation we prove that the basis of his reasoning is
inexact, and that a broken current acts in a rectilinear circuit like
a continuous current. ‘True, things are far more complex in a coil;
but that is a case of pure induction, as Helmholtz has proved.
— Comptes Rendus, March 22, 1869.
The law has' therefore been changed during the induction
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, ann DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.
[FOURTH SERIES.]
SEPTEMBER 1869.
XIX. On the Construction of the Galvanometer used in Electrical
Discharges, and on the Path of the Extra Currents through the
Electric Spark. By EH. Eptunp*.
I.
VELEN an electric discharge is passed through a galva-
nometer in which the individual coils are well insu-
lated, it frequently happens that the position of equilibrium of
the needle is altered, and that this alteration lasts even after the
discharge. This disadvantage may be greater or less, according
to the construction of the galvanometer and the distance from
the coils to the moveable parts of the instrument, while the
quantity and density of the discharged electricity moreover exert
great influence in this respect. If the electrical discharges are
very powerful, it may happen that the galvanometer becomes
quite spoiled for accurate determinations of the discharge.
There are several causes for this imperfection of the instru-
ment in question. Itis well known that strong discharges can
bring about a change in the distribution of magnetism in the
magnet. The electrical shock can make the magnetic distribu-
tion stronger or weaker, or even invert the poles, or change the
line of connexion between them. If the galvanometer has an
astatic system, the electrical shock may easily alter the ratio of
the strength of the magnetisms in the two needles, by which the
delicacy is altered, and sometimes a change ensues in the post-
tion of equilibrium of the system of needles. Hence a galvano-
* Translated from Poggendorff’s Annalen, No. 3, 1869.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88. No. 254. Sept. 1869. N
170 Prof. E. Edlund on the Construction of
meter for electrical discharges cannot well be provided with an
astatic system: a single needle must be used; and to make it
more delicate, either a portion of the directive force of the earth’s
magnetism must be compensated by external magnets, or, what is
better, a mirror with telescope and scale may be used. Ifin using
a single needle the suspending thread had no tendency to tor-
sion, the delicacy of the instrument would be independent of the
strength of the magnetism in the needle; for the directive force
of the needle in this case would increase or decrease in the same
ratio as the action of the current upon it. The position of equi-
librium of the needle would also be independent of the strength
of the magnet, provided the position of the magnetic axis im the
needle were unchanged. The position of equilibrium is also un-
changed if the strength is increased or diminished, provided the
force of torsion of the thread only tends to bring the needle into
the magnetic meridian. Hence, in order that the instrument
may retain as far as possible its delicacy, and moreover not have
its position of equilibrium altered by changes in the strength of
the magnetism which powerful electrical discharges may cause, the
directive force which the suspending thread exerts on the needle
in virtue of its torsion must be small as compared with the action
of the earth’s magnetism, and the position of equilibrium caused
by torsion must coincide with the magnetic meridian. Accord-
ing to Professor Riess*, the magnetism of the needle is greatly
protected if between it and the coils there is a thick copper
sheath, which at the same time acts as a damper in bringing the
oscillating needle quickly to rest.
But it is easy to see that the action of the electricity on the
magnet is not the sole or even the principal cause of the change in
the position of equilibrium which results from the passage of the
electrical discharge through the coils of the galvanometer. The
galvanometer which I used in my former experiments on the
electromotive force of the electrical spark had a single needle,
which was firmly connected with a mirror, by the aid of which
the deflections were read off by the telescope and scale in the
ordinary manner. The mirror consisted of glass, and the back
was covered with a thin metal disk. The galvanometer-wire,
which consisted of copper, was 1 millim. in diameter, and was
surrounded by a coating of gutta percha 2 millims. thick. Hence
the entire thickness of the wire, including the insulating coating,
was 5 millims. This wire was wound in forty coils round a ma-
hogany frame. The aperture in the frame, in which the magnetic
needle was suspended by a cocoon-thread, was 50 millims. in
length by 30 in height. The length of the needle was 42 mil-
* Abhandlung: “Zu der Lehre von der Reibungs-Electricitat,” Berlin,
1867, p. 314.
the Galvanometer used in Electrical Discharges. 171
lims. The mirror was above the frame which was surrounded
by the wire ; and the whole was protected by a bell-jar. When
the magnetic needle was removed and replaced by a brass needle
of the same size, and the mirror with its affixed needle was sus-
pended by two cocoon-threads, by which the moveable system
obtained a definite position of equilibrium, it was observed that
this position of equilibrium was altered when a strong discharge
was passed through the galvanometer-wire. The alteration in
the position of equilibrium could not be due to a change in the
magnetism of the needle ; for there was no magnetic needle in the
apparatus. When the glass globe was carefully removed and the
mirror investigated, it was found to be electrical. This alteration
in the position of equilibrium was thus due to the fact that in
the discharge electrical induction was produced in the moveable
parts of the instrument, which acted electroscopically on the
fixed parts and produced an altered position of equilibrium.
Hence the moveable parts had to be constructed in such a
manner that the electrical action between them and the fixed
parts should be unable to turn the moveable system about its
own axis. It is clear that if the moveable body suspended by a
cocoon-thread were bounded by a surface of rotation the axis of
which were the prolongation of the cocoon-thread, and if the sur-
face were made of a conducting material, the electroscopic action
between this body and the fixed parts of the instrument could
not effect any rotation about the axis in question. If electricity
of either kind has collected upon any place (for instance on the
gutta-percha-covered wire), this induces electricity in the body
in question: the electricity of the opposite kind collects in
the point nearest to the fixed attracting point, and the other elec-
tricity is driven to the furthest. But if the body is bounded
by a surface of the kind mentioned, it is readily seen that the
line of junction between the fixed point of action and the two
corresponding points upon the moveable body will go through
the axis of rotation, and there can thus be no rotation. All
that could possibly happen is, that the system would be attracted
a little on one side, so that the axis of rotation would no longer
be vertical; but no rotation can be thereby produced, provided
the centre of gravity of the system lies in the axis. But since
a plane mirror is necessary for reading off, the moveable system
cannot have the form in question. I have accordingly endea-
voured to obtain this object in the following manner :—
The glass mirror which I previously used was exchanged for a
round plane-polished silver mirror, the diameter of which was
30 millims. The object of this was to remove the non-conduct-
ing glass. Both above and below this mirror, and in direct con-
tact with it, a horizontal circular disk of thin metal foil was placed.
N 2
172 Prof. E. Edlund on the Construction of
Both disks were of the same size (that is, 50 millims. in diame-
ter); and the axis of rotation of the system, when suspended by
the cocoon-thread, went through the centre of each. The mag-
netic needle was let into a cireular copper disk in such a manner
that the upper sides of the needle and of the disk lay in the same
plane, and their centres coincided. The disk and the needle
were soldered together so as to produce perfect conduction be-
tween them. The centre of this disk was
now made to coincide with the axis of ro-
tation, so that it became horizontal; the
adjacent figure renders this arrangement
more intelligible. s is the silver mirror,
ab the round metal rod which constitutes
the axis of rotation, and c, d,and e are the
circular disks, in the latter of which the
magnetic needle is inserted. The coils
of the galvanometer surround the disk e
and pass between d and e, so that the
disks d and cand the muror are at the top.
If, now, in the discharge electricity re-
mains upon any point, for instance at /,
in the coils, it is clear that it can produce no rotation in con-
sequence of its influence on the disks ¢, d, or e. Of the electri-
city which is produced in the mirror s in consequence of induc-
tion, one part is repelled to the disk c, and the other attracted
to the disk d, and both thereby become innocuous.
On testing, it was evident that this arrangement has a de-
cided advantage over that previously employed. In my former
experiments, a Leyden jar charged to saturation could not be dis-
charged through the galvanometer without producing a material
change in the position of equilibrium. When one of the galva-
nometer-wires was directly connected with one of the combs of
a Holtz’s induction-machine, and the other ended with a knob in
the vicinity of the other comb, so that while the machine was at
work sparks sprang across, in my previous experiments a consi-
derable alteration was produced in the position of equilibrium
after the action of the machine had ceased. Hence to avoid this
a shunt was used between the conducting-wires, so that only a
small portion of the shock traversed the galvanometer.
In the new arrangement of the moveable part of the galvano-
meter this bridge was quite superfluous, and the entire discharge
could pass through the galvanometer. There was indeed an
alteration in the position of equilibrium if the discharges were
particularly strong; but it was not so great as to act injuriously
on the accuracy of the measurements, and still less to render
them impossible. When one galvanometer-wire was connected
the Galvanometer used in Electrical Discharges. 173
with one comb of the induction-machine and the other was free
and insulated, so that the galvanometer-wire became saturated
with electricity while the machine was at work, there was a ma-
terial alteration in the position of equilibrium. But this altera-
tion disappeared immediately one of the wires was put in con-
nexion with the earth. These preliminary experiments were
made partly when the metallic disk on which was the magnetic
needle was firmly screwed to the axis of rotation, and partly
when this metal disk was removed and instead of it another
metal disk of equal size, but without a magnet, was fixed to the
axis, in which latter case the system attained its position of equi-
librium by a bifilar suspension from two cocoon-threads.» As the
experiments gave the same result in both cases, the alteration
in the position of equilibrium must have been due to some elec-
troscopic cause. When the two round disks ¢ and d were re-
moved, experiment showed that the changes in the position of
equilibrium becaine considerably greater; hence the disks per-
formed their expected service. That the galvanometer with the
new arrangement of the moveable parts was not quite unaffected
by very strong discharges was doubtless due to the moveable
system being somewhat obliquely attracted by the electrical ac-
tion; so that the axis of rotation cannot have hung quite ver-
tically. If in this case everything is not accurately centred, so
that the centre of gravity lies in the axis of rotation (which is very
difficult, if not impossible), it is clear that a change in the posi-
tion of equilibrium must ensue. Seeing that electroscopic phe-
nomena may under certain circumstances so closely resemble
magnetic ones that a confusion between them is possible, before
a galvanometer is used for actual measurements we must satisfy
ourselves that under the present circumstances no electroscopic
actions occur.
IT.
When a closed conducting-wire is in the vicinity of the circuit
of an electrical battery, an electric current is produced in the
former when the battery is discharged through the latter. This
secondary current in the conducting-wire is stronger the longer
the portions of the wires which act upon each other. Hence, in
order to obtain strong inductive actions, the wire and the circuit
must be coiled spirally near to one another. ‘These currents
were discovered almost simultaneously by Henry, Marianini, and
Riess. A similar inductive action is also produced if the circuit
at one part consists of two branches, one of which is long and
coiled as a spiral. In the discharge of the battery, which
in this case partially traverses both branches, an induction-cur-
rent is formed in the spiral, which discharges itself through the
other branch. Baron Wrede has shown from theoretical consi-
174 Prof. E. Edlund on the Path of the
derations that, like those resulting from voltaic induction, these
currents are formed of two currents equal in quantity, one of
which has the same and the other the opposite direction to that
of the primary current*. As these currents are equal in quan-
tity, and in opposite directions, they cannot deflect the magnetic
needle; but they can disengage heat, and, as their intensities
may be unequal, can also produce magnetic induction in har-
dened steel needles. This view as to the nature of the induction-
currents in question, which rests upon theoretical considerations,
has been confirmed since the discovery of the electrical valve has
furnished an unfailing means of distinguishing between the two
opposed currents. The electrical valve consists of a hollow glass
cylinder in which air is rarefied at pleasure. One end of this is
closed air-tight by a glass disk; and at the other end is a brass
cap with a stopcock, by which it can be connected with an air-
pump. Through the glass disk passes a platinum wire, of
which one end is level with the inner surface of the glass disk,
and the outer end can be connected with a conducting-wire.
Inside the cylinder a brass rod extends from the brass cap; the
rod terminates in a brass disk, which is parallel with, and at a
short distance from, the glass disk. When the air is adequately
exhausted, and the platinum wire connected with one and the
brass cap with the other end of the induction-spiral, it is proved
that only one of the two mduction-currents can traverse the
valve; for Riess found that when a galvanometer is placed in
the circuit, the magnetic needle gives a deflection in a direction
which differs according as one or the other end of the induction-
spiral is connected with the platinum wire fF.
In my investigation on the electromotive force in the electrical
spark, there was no other spiral in the circuits than those which
were formed by the forty coils of the galvanometer{. In this
spiral induction-currents were of course formed when the elec-
trical discharge traversed them; but it is readily seen, from the
manner in which the experiments were arranged, that these in-
duction-currents could have no influence upon the deflection of
the magnetic needle. In the adjacent figure, A B represents the
rotating induction-disk, and ab the two combs. An insulated
copper wire, ac, was directly connected with a, whereas the insu-
lated wire de terminated in a brass knob d in the neighbourhood
of 6. From ¢ and e insulated conducting-wires passed to the
knobs f and g. Two other conducting-wires went from the
points c and e to the galvanometer G. Atma rheostat was in-
serted, consisting of an insulated thin German-silver wire. Be-
* Berzelius, Jahresbericht, vol. xx. p. 119.
+ Pogg. Ann. vol. exx. p. 513.
{ Ibid. vol. exxxiv. p. 337. Phil. Mag.S. 4. vol. xxxvu. p. 41.
Extra Currents through the Electric Spark. 175
tween the points 2 and & was a bridge
of German-silver wire; andthe pomt A B
k& was moreover connected by the
conducting-wire/ with the water-
pipe in the house, and was thus placed
in conducting communication with
the earth. When the disk AB was
rotated, sparks passed between J and
d as well as between f and g, and the
needle made a deflection. The re-
sistance in the wire / was infinitely
small, compared with that of the rheo-
stat » and in the spark between f
and g. Hence the induction-currents
formed in the coils of the galvanome-
ter passed almost exclusively through
the bridge 4; and as they were equal
in quantity while opposite in direc-
tion, their action upon the needle
was of course imperceptible. This
would not have been the case if the
bridge / had not existed, and the currents had had to pass through
the spark between f and g; for this, as will afterwards be shown,
acts like an electrical valyve—that is, transmits one current but
stops the other. Polarization-experiments showed, moreover, that
the current obtained arose from the spark between fand g, and not
from the induction of the discharge-current in the galvanometer-
coils; for in these experiments the galvanometer was removed,
and there was no other spiral in the conductions; so that there
could be no induction. After the galvanometer, as previously
shown, had been so much improved that the bridge h could be
removed without disadvantage, I investigated more closely the
phenomena in question ; and as the results obtained seem to offer
some interest, I will give them here.
At the time the galvanometer was made I also had a coil con-
structed for making induction-experiments, which in all respects
was like the coil of the galvanometer. The wooden frame had
the same dimensions ; the wire covered with gutta percha was of
the same kind ; and the number of windings in both coils was
the same, namely forty. Hence under the same circumstances
both coils must exert the same inductive actions. If the vol-
taic resistance in the rheostat m was called 100, it was found
that the resistance in each of the coils was 4°5, and the resist-
ance in the two conducting-wires from the Points c and e to
the galvanometer amounted to about as much. The following
experiments were made with this coil, which in the sequel will
be called R :—
176 Prof. E. Edlund on the Path of the
Experiment I.—The bridge 4 was removed, so that the entire
discharge traversed the galvanometer :—
52°5
50:5
49-0
——_
Mean= 730. . -a0zz,
The coil R, was thereupon interposed between e and m, and the
deflections obtained were
30:1
27°38
27°
27°6
Meany A) entre sie
When R was placed towards n on the opposite side, there was
obtained 93-3
28°1
27°9
Mean ie) caco
The coil R was then removed, and, in order to ascertain if there
had been any change in the induction-machine, the first experi-
ments were repeated. The following deflections were observed :—
51:2
50:2
46:2
Mean . . 49:2
The mean of the first and last experiments is 50:0, and that of
the middle ones 28:1. Hence the induction-currents in the
coil R had diminished the deflection of the magnetic needle by
21-9 divisions. Of these induction-currents, one had the oppo-
site and the other the same direction as that of the discharge.
The first may be designated as A, and the latter as B. Hence
in these experiments the currents A traversed the spark between
f and g more easily than the currents B. The spark accordingly
acts in this case like an electrical valve.
Experiment 11.—This experiment was made in order to in-
vestigate the action of induction-currents upon the deflection when
R. was interposed between g and e. ‘The currents now traversed
R in the opposite direction to the former one. When no coil
was interposed in the conduction the following deflections were
observed :—
40°5
42-0
Mean. - 41:3
Extra Currents through the Electric Spark. 177
R was inserted between g and e, by which there was obtained
27°38
27°38
Miran? 7. (27°73
After removing R there was once more observed
40°3
41-3
Mean... .. 40:3
In this case also the deflection was diminished by the induc-
tion-currents. It is easily ascertained that it was the currents
B which traversed the spark between f and g with greater facility.
By introducing the coil R into the circuit the resistance was a
little increased. To convince myself that this was not the cause
of the diminution in the deflection of the magnetic needle, a few
experiments were made in which the resistance of the rheostat
when R was interposed was so much diminished that the total
resistance was a little less than when R was removed. But
these experiments gave just the same results as the above. The
small alteration in the resistance had therefore no perceptible
influence upon the result obtained. The experiments were made
in such a manner that the place where the spark was formed
was removed from the position indicated by the figure, a little
towards n, while the rheostat took its place between c ande. But
in this case also the deflection was lessened in the same manner
as before by the induction-currents.
It may at first sight appear unexpected that in one case the
currents A, but in the other the currents B, should be able more
easily to traverse the spark. Yet closer consideration shows that,
in one view, A in the first and B in the second experiment have
a common character, upon which some stress must here be laid.
In the first case it is the current A which traverses the spark in
the same direction as the electrical discharge, while in the second
it is the current B. It follows hence, that of the induction-cur-
rents formed by electro-induction, those which endeavour to tra-
verse the spark in the same direction as the discharge also penetrate
it most readily.
That the induction-currents which are formed in the coil of
the galvanometer itself also diminish the deflection of the needle,
necessarily follows from what has preceded, and scarcely needs
any proof. Yet it was very easy to demonstrate this experi-
mentally in the following manner. In front of the galvano-
meter a German-silver wire was iiserted between the points z
and k, the resistance of which was thrice that of the resistance
in the coil of the galvanometer. Hence, of the currents which
178 = On the Extra Currents through the Electric Spark.
arose in the electric spark, only three-quarters traversed the
galvanometer. If there is a bridge between 7 and 4, the re-
sistance of which is small as compared with the resistance in the
spark and in the rheostat m, the greatest part of the induction
produced in the galvanometer passes through the bridge; and as
they are equal in quantity and opposite in direction, their action
on the magnetic needle is eliminated. But if the bridge is re-
moved, the induction-currents act upon the magnetic needle.
If, now, this action is in the opposite direction to that which is
caused by the spark, the deflection on inserting the bridge must
be more than three-fourths of that which ensues when the bridge
is removed.
The following experiments show that the first deflection is even
considerably greater than the latter.
Experiment I11.—The bridge inserted between the points 2
andk. There were thus obtained the following deflections when
the machine was at work :—
Divisions.
24:0
26:0
25:5
Mean . . 25°2
Without the bridge the deflections were
13°3
12:3
13°3
12°8
Nieange. a e-9
The bridge was again introduced, upon which the deflections
became
26:2
23°2
23°7
20°7
Mean.) .\5. 2338
If the mean be taken of the first and third means, the number
24°35 is obtained, which is double as much as when the bridge
was removed. A few other experiments, which it is superfluous
to publish here, showed that the amount of diminution in the
deflection of the magnetic needle which the induction-currents
produce was, by far, not proportional to the number of turns of
the induction-spiral, but increased much more slowly.
pois]
XX. On some Phenomena of Binocular Vision. By Josnru
LeConte, Professor of Chemistry and Geology in the Univer-
sity of South Carolina*.
(Continued from vol. xxxvii. p. 140.]
II. Rotation of the Eye on the Optic Ais.
a all the experiments described in this paper had
already been made and the results obtained, when my
attention was called to Helmholtz’s Croonian Lecture “ On the
Normal Motions of the Eye in relation to Binocular Vision’’+.
From this lecture I received some useful hints as to the best
method of experimenting on this subject, which have been of
great service to me, and have made my results much more satis-
factory, without, however, materially modifying them. As these
results differ very greatly and fundamentally from those of
Helmholtz, I repeated the experiments daily for many weeks,
modifying them in every conceivable way to avoid the possibility
of error. I am perfectly sure, therefore, that the results are
true for my own eyes; and as far as I have been able to have
them verified, they are true also for most other normal eyes.
Unfortunately, however, the difficulty of verification for other
eyes is very great. Many of these experiments, which I find
perfectly easy, are almost impossible for most persons.
Helmholtz’s lecture, I suppose, is the most authoritative state-
ment which we have of the present condition of science on the
subjects of the motions of the eye and of the horopter. It
seems to be an abstract of more extended researches which I have
not seen. Qn this account it is obscure in some parts; yet I
think I cannot be mistaken in his general results. In order to
make myself clear, whether in discussing Helmholtz’s results or
in describing my own experiments, I find it necessary to detine
the terms I shall most frequently use. The position of the eye
when the optic axes are parallel and at right angles to the
vertical line of the face, as when with head erect we look ata
point on a distant horizon, is called by Helmholtz the primary
direction of the eye, and the visual line in this case 1s the primary
direction of the visual line. All other directions are called
secondary directions. A plane which passes through the visual
line is called a meridian plane of the eye, and the intersec-
tion of such a plane with the retina we will call a meridian of the
eye. The vertical line of demarcatian is that meridian of the eye
upon which the image of an apparently vertical line falls when
we look directly at the line, and which therefore divides the
retina into two equal halves containing corresponding points
* From Silliman’s American Journal for March 1869.
t+ Proc. Roy. Soc. April 1864, vol. xi. p. 186.
180 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
in the two eyes. The horizontal line of demarcation is that me-
ridian of the eye upon which, under similar circumstances, the
image of an apparently horizontal line falls. The plane which
passes through the two visual lines we will call the visual plane,
and that visual plane which is at right angles to the line of the
face the primary visual plane. The line joining the root of the
nose and the point of sight, and which therefore bisects the angle
of optic convergence, we will call the median line of sight.
Now Helmholtz gives as the law controlling all the move-
ments of the eye the following, viz. that when the eye turns
from its primary to any secondary position, zt turns “on a fixed
axis which is normal both to the primary and to the secondary
visual line.’ In other words, the eye may turn on any axis at
right angles to the optic axis, but does not rotate about the optic
axis. Again, he states that “vertical and horizontal lines keep
their vertical or horizontal position in the field of vision when
the eye is moved from its primary direction vertically or hori-
zontally.” This law had been previously stated by Listing, but
without proof; Helmholtz claims to have established it by ex-
periment. His method is very ingenious. It is well known
that if we look for some time at a bright object, and then turn
the eye upon a comparatively obscure field, a spectrum having
the form of the object will be seen. As such spectra are the
result of a temporary modification of the retina itself, they must
follow the motions of the eye with the greatest exactness. If
therefore the bright object be a dine, then if there be any rota-
tion of the eye on the optic axis, in turning the eye in various
directions the linear spectrum ought to incline to one side or the
other. Suppose, then, the object be a bright-red vertical line
on a grey wall at the exact height of the eye: Helmholtz finds
that on gazing at the bright line with one eye, taking care that
the eye shall have its primary direction, and then turning the
eye in a horizontal plane to the night or left, the spectrum retains
perfectly its verticality. ‘1 found,” he says, “the results of
these experiments in complete agreement with the law of List-
ing.’ For the ingenious device of Helmholtz for getting the
primary position of the eye we must refer the reader to his lec-
ture. I have tried Helmholtz’s experiments with similar results.
Nevertheless I believe it may be demonstrated that though rota-
tion of the eye does not take place under the circumstances of
these experimeuts, yet it does so under other circumstances not
touched by them, and that ina manner which deeply affects the
question of the horopter. The law of Listing 1s doubtless true,
or nearly true, when the eyes move together parallel to each
other, but is far from being true in strong convergence. ‘The
experiments which follow prove beyond a doubt that in my own
of Binocular Vision. 18]
case, and in most other cases tried, the eyes in convergence rotate
on the optic axes outward, and that the amount of rotation in-
creases with the degree of convergence. Meissner* has attempted
to determine experimentally the position of the horopter, and
from the position thus determined he infers the rotation of the
eyes: my experiments prove directly the rotation of the eyes;
and from this, as well as from direct experiment, I hope to esta-
blish the position of the horopter.
Helmholtz, it is true, admits some degree of rotation of the
eye on the optic axis, particularly when the eye makes wide ex-
cursions in the field of view; but that he does not regard this
as sufficient to interfere seriously with the law of Listing is evi-
dent from the form of the horopter which he deduces. More-
over, according to Helmholtz, these slight rotations are con-
trolled by the law of Donders, viz. ‘ that the eye returns always
into the same position when the visual line is brought into the same
direction.” He regards this law as rigorously exact. ‘ Every
position of the visual line,” he says, “is connected with a deter-
mined and constant degree of rotation.” But the experiments
about to be described prove that under certain circumstances the
law of Donders, too, is far from being true.
We have already stated (p. 186) that when the squares of the
ruled diagram (fig. 5) are combined by converging the optic
Fig. 5.
axes, if the amount of convergence be great, the horizontal lines
of the two images are distinctly observed to cross each other at a
small angle. After my attention was once directed to this fact,
I could see slight crossing of the horizontals for every degree of
convergence ; but the verticals seemed to coalesce perfectly. By
placing, however, both the diagram and the head perfectly
* Bib. Un. Archiv. des Scien. II. vol. ii. p. 160.
182 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
perpendicular, looking straight forward at a point exactly at
the same height as the eyes, the visual plane therefore in the
primary position, and then slowly increasing or decreasing the
convergence of the optic axes so that the vertical lines of the two
images passed slowly over one another, it was plainly seen that
the verticals of the two images were not parallel, but crossed
each other at a small angle.
This, my original diagram, however, is not well adapted to
experiments on this subject, for two reasons: (1) it is difficult to
distinguish the image of one eye from that of the other; (2) it
is difficult to control perfectly the convergence of the eyes. When
the vertical lines approach each other, they, as it were, leap and
cling together as a single line, even though they really cross at
a considerable angle; the really crossing lines, by a well-known
law of stereoscopic combination, being seen as a single line in-
clined to the visual plane. I therefore constructed a similar
diagram, one-half of which consisted of black lines on a white
ground, and the other half of white lines on a black ground. It
is convenient also to have two small circles, one on each half and
similarly situated (fig. 6). IfI place such a diagram perfectly
Fig. 6.
perpendicularly before me, Lith the head perfectly erect and the
eyes at precisely the same height as the small circles, and then
stereoscopically combine the circles by crossing the eyes, I dis-
tinctly see the white and black lines, both vertical and hori-
zontal, crossing one another at small angle, as if the images
of both eyes had rotated on the visual line in opposite direc-
tions. This angle of crossing increases as the plane of the
diagram is brought nearer, and decreases as the diagram is
carried further from the eyes. Or these different angles of cross-
ing may be obtained without moving the diagram or the head,
by converging the eyes more and more and causing the white
of Binocular Vision. 183
and black vertical lines to pass successively over each other. This
is more easily done if there are several small circles on each half,
similarly situated but at different distances from each other. In
this diagram, the lines being of different colours do not stereo-
scopically combine easily—they do not cling together as in the
other case. Their approach toward, or recession from, one an-
other, and the angle which they make with one another, may be
marked with the utmost exactness. Nor is there any danger of
confounding the two images; for since the eyes are crossed, we
know that the white lines belong to the right eye and the black
lines to the left eye; we can therefore determine the direction in
which each image rotates. I find always that the black lines or
the image of the left eye rotates to the right #—, and the white
lines or the image of the right eye rotates to the left ~-«. Now,
as the image always moves in a direction contrary to the motion
of the eye (differing in this respect from spectra), this indicates
a rotation of both eyes on the optic axes outward .-« *-,
To test this question still further, I constructed another dia-
gram, with the horizontal lines continuous across, but the verticals
not perfectly vertical, the upper ends of those of the right half
inclining to the left, and those of the left half to the right, by
about 1° 20! (fig. 7). On bringing the circles together I found
that at a certain distance of the diagram (but only at a certain
Fig. 7.
SSS SS SSS SS
distance, depending upon the interval between the circles) the ver-
ticals coalesced perfectly ; the horizontals, however, as might have
been expected, still crossed at a small angle, and in the same direc-
tion as before ; viz. the whites or right-eye image thus ——_ ,
and the blacks or left-eye image thus ~~~_, indicating in this
case also rotation of each eye outward. Beyond the proper dis-
184 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
tance the verticals approach but do not attain parallelism ;
within the proper distance they cross in a direction contrary to
that in the diagram. When the circles are ten inches apart, the
proper distance is nearly three feet, and the image therefore
about seven inches from the eyes.
Helmholtz has a diagram similar in all respects to my own,
except turned upside down, in which, he states, both verticals
and horizontals coincide perfectly when the circles are combined.
Our own figure (fig. 7) turned upside down will answer for Pro-
fessor Helmholtz’s. We quote his own words :—“ The horizontal
lines are parts of the same straight line; the vertical lines are
not perfectly vertical. The upper end of those of the right
figure are inclined to the right, and those of the left figure to the
left, by about 13°.” But his experience differs from our own in
a most unaccountable manner. He says: “Now combine the
two sides stereoscopically, either by squinting or by a stereoscope,
and you will see that the white lines of the one coincide with the
black lines of the other as soon as the centres of both figures
coincide, although the vertical lines of the two figures are not
parallel to each other.’ He accounts for this, not by rotation
of the eyes, but by ¢he principle of the difference between real and
apparent verticality. The ignorance of this principle he believes
has vitiated the results of all previous observers. He illustrates
this principle thus: “ When you draw on paper a horizontal
line, and another line crossing it exactly at right angles, the
right superior angle will appear to your right eye too great and
to your left eye too small; the other angles show corresponding
deviations. ‘Tl'o have an apparently right angle, you must make
the vertical line incline by an angle of about 11° for it to appear
really vertical. We must distinguish, therefore, between the
really vertical lines and the apparently vertical lines in the field
OlVIEW. . ca: Now look alternately with the right and the left
eye at these figures (fig. 7 turned upside down). You will find
that the angles of the right figure appear to the right eye equal
to right angles, and those of the left figure so appear to the left
eye; but the angles of the left figure appear to the right eye to
deviate much from a right angle, as also do those of the right
figure to the left eye.’ Professor Helmholtz therefore believes
that the perfect stereoscopic coincidence of the vertical lines of
his diagram is the result of this principle. ‘ Therefore,” he
says, “not the really vertical meridians of the two fields corre-
spond as has been hitherto supposed, but the apparently vertical
meridians. On the contrary, the horizontal meridians really cor-
respond, at least for normal eyes which are not fatigued.”
On this principle Professor Helmholtz builds his whole theory
of the horopter. But that this principle cannot account for the
of Binocular Vision. 185
phenomena he observes, I think can be proved. In the first
place, I find that if there be any distinction between real and
apparent verticality for my eyes, the difference is too small to be
detected by the simple observation of lines drawn at right angles
with each other. For my own eyes really vertical lines are also
apparently vertical, and lines inclined 11° from verticality are not
at all apparently vertical. I have tried several other normal
eyes with the same result. But, leaving this aside, in the
second place, it is by no means indifferent whether the two
halves be combined by a “ stereoscope or by squinting.” If they
are combined by a stereoscope as stereoscopes are usually con-
structed, the right half is looked at by the right eye and the left
half by the left eye, so that the point of sight and the plane of
combination is beyond the diagram; coincidence in this case,
therefore, would be a true illustration of Professor Helmholtz’s
principle. But if they are combined by squinting, the eyes are
crossed, and therefore the right eye is looking at the left half and
the left eye at the right half of the diagram, and therefore, in
Professor Helmholtz’s own words, the verticals should ‘ deviate
much froma right angle,” viz. 24°. I have tried many eyes
and I have yet found none in which the coincidence of the verti-
cals of Professor Helmholtz’s diagram was perfect when com-
bimed by means of a stereoscope, 7. e. beyond the diagram ; but
I have found one person to whom the coincidence seemed to be
perfect when the combination was made by squinting.
Tt is evident, then, that Professor Helmholtz’s principle can-
not explain the stereoscopic coincidence by squinting in his own
experiment. I myself believe that if the coincidence takes place
only by squinting (as in the case mentioned above), it can only
be explained by rotation of the eyes inward. It is true that in
this case the horizontals ought to cross also ; but Professor Helm-
holtz himself admits that such is sometimes the fact, but attri-
butes it to fatigue. ‘“ After keeping the eyes,” he says, “a long
time looking at a near object, as in reading or writing, I have
found that the horizontal lines cross each other; but they became
parallel again when | had looked for some time at a distant object.”
On reading Professor Helmholtz’s lecture and finding his re-
sults so different from my own, I immediately tried his figure
by squinting, but found the verticals cross one another at an in-
clination much greater than in the diagram itself, while the ho-
rizontals also crossed but at a less angle. On turning the figure
upside down, however, the verticals coincided perfectly when the
proper distance was obtained, though the horizontals crossed as
before. All these phenomena are easily explained by rotation of
the eyes outward. To test the question still more thoroughly, I
then constructed other diagrams in which both verticals and
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 254. Sept. 1869. O
186 Prof. J. LeConte on sume Phenomena
horizontals were inclined so as to make an angle of 1}° with
the true vertical and the true horizontal (fig. 8), and therefore
perfect squares with one another. At the proper distance, when
the small circles were brought together, the coincidence of both ver-
ticals and horizontals seemed to be perfect. When the plane of the
diagram was too near or too far, all the lines crossed, in the one
case 1u one direction and in theother case in the other direction.
I then constructed still other diagrams, in which the inclination
of the lines with the true vertical and the true horizontal were
40 minutes, 24 degrees, and 5 degrees. Im all cases I brought
the lines into coincidence, but of course by different degrees of con-
vergence. In the last the optic convergence necessary was ex-
treme, and the strain on the eyes considerable ; but in the other
cases there was not the slightest difficulty or strain. Recollect-
ing, however, that Professor Helmholtz supposed that the change
of position of the horizontals might be the result of fatigue, I tried
repeatedly after long rest, but always the phenomena were pre-
cisely the same. In the diagram in which the inclination of the -
lines was 5 degrees I observed, however, that a greater degree of
convergence was necessary to bring the horizontals into coincidence
than to bring the verticals into coincidence. The difference in the
distance of the diagram in the two cases was about two inches,
and the difference in the distance of the point of sight was about
half an inch. I cannot explain this except by supposing that
the form of the optic globe was changed by the excessive action
of the muscles.
I can conceive of no possible source of fallacy in these experi-
ments. From long practice they have become almost as easy to
me as any ordinary act of vision. ‘They do not now fatigue my
eyes in the slightest degree. I see the lines of the two images,
of Binocular Vision. 187
which I bring together just as plainly as if they were black and
white threads. While watching them [control their motions almost
as perfectly as if I was sliding with my hands two frames with
white and black threads stretched across them. There is not the
shadow of a doubt, therefore, that in my own case the eyes in con-
vergence rotate slightly outward, and that the amount of rota-
tion increases with the degree of convergence.
I next proceeded to determine the amount of rotation for dif-
ferent distances of the point of sight. In the diagram in which the
inclination of the lines was 5 degrees, the distance of the image
was only 2 to 24 inches; for the lines inclined 24 degrees, the
distance of the image was 4 inches; for lines inclined 14 degree
the distance was 7 inches; and for 40 minutes the distance was
about 12 to 14 inches. I am able by great strain to obliterate,
or nearly obliterate, the common field of view of the two eyes. In
this case, of course, the eyes both look at the root of the nose.
In this extreme convergence I find that limes coincide which
make with each other an angle of 22°, or 11° with the vertical.
This would seem, therefore, the extreme rotation for my eyes.
The distance of the image in this case is nearly at the root of
the nose.
If, however, in extreme convergence rotation on the optic axes
takes place to the extent of 11°, this rotation ought to be de-
tectable by means of ocular spectra, or even by direct observa-
tion of the eye itself. I determined to try these also. My
method of experimenting with ocular spectra is as follows :—
Standing in a somewhat obscure room, I gaze with the left eye
(the other being shut) at a vertical crevice in a closed window
until a distinct spectrum is obtained. Placing myself now op-
posite a vertical line on the wall of the room, with my right side
toward the wall, I turn my head until my left eye II (fig. 9), look-
Fig. 9.
2 Of Cc
aol :
a
¢<
ing across the root of my nose, n, can see the vertical line. I
now gaze at a point very near the vertical line, and, by inclining
my head to one side or the other, bring the spectrum exactly
parallel to the vertical line. In this position, if the wall be at
02
188 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
some distance from the observer, the axes of the eyes may be re-
garded as nearly parallelas 1c, 16. Inow by a voluntary effort
bring the point of sight along the line IIc nearer and nearer,
until it reaches a near the root of the nose. In doing so the
spectrum is always seen to incline to the left, thus \ . On re-
laxing the convergence and looking again at the wall, the spec-
trum retains its inclined position for an appreciable time and
then gradually recovers its original verticality. In similar ex-
periments with the right eye the spectrum is always seen to in-
cline to the right, thus /
I next tried direct observation of the eye itself. As I could
not find ony one with the necessary control over the eyes, I
was compelled to make myself the subject of this observation.
While, therefore, with the right eye shut I gaze with the left eye
across the root of the nose on vacancy, or on a distant object as
in the figure (fig. 9), an observer, conveniently placed near the
visual line, carefully examines the iris of my eye so as to recog-
nize the position of the radiating lines. When now, without
changing the position of the visual line of the left eye, I turn the
right eye inward as in the previous experiment, until the point
of sight is at a, the globe of the left eye is distinctly seen to ro-
tate outward. I got four different persons to make this obser-
vation upon my eye, and the testimony of all was the same.
I had proceeded thus far in my experiments when I was led
to reflect further upon the phenomena presented by the diagram
in which the lines were highly inclined. In this diagram, it will
be remembered, the verticals were combined with more facility
than the horizontals. I now repeated all my experiments with
more care and with especial reference to this point. As I ex-
pected, I found the same true for all the diagrams; but the dif-
ference was so small that it had escaped detection. This led me
to suspect that there might be some truth in Professor Helm-
holtz’s principle of real and apparent vertical. I therefore con-
structed many other diagrams to test this point. I constructed
first a diagram exactly like fig. 6, except that the circles were the
same distance apart as my eyes, viz. 25 inches. On placing this
diagram before me and gazing on vacancy, the eyes therefore in
their primary position, the circles were brought together. In
this experiment the verticals came together parallel. 1 sometimes
thought there was a scarcely perceptible inclination in the diree-
tion required by Helmholtz’s principle, viz. thus /\. If any
such inclination really existed, it could not have been more than
of Binocular Vision. 189
10! for each line with the vertical, or 20! with one another ; for
this angle I can distinctly detect under these circumstances. [
next constructed a diagram like Professor Helmholtz’s, except
that the outward inclination of the verticals was only 40! in-
stead of 11°. On combining the two halves of this diagram by
means of a stereoscope, there really seemed to be perfect coin-
cidence of both verticals and horizontals ; but I soon found, by
trying several, that stereoscopes differ much in this respect. I
therefore discarded them as unreliable. On combining the same
diagram with the naked eye in the manner of a stereoscope, 2. e.
beyond the plane of the diagram, the verticals coincided per-
fectly when the point of sight was about twelve inches distant,
but the horizontals very perceptibly crossed, though certainly, I
think, at an angle less than 40! (it seemed about 20'). On com-
bining the two halves by squinting (of course turning the dia-
gram upside down), I found the result precisely the same when
the point of sight was at the same distance, viz. 12 inches. In
the next diagram which I constructed the verticals inclined 11°
and the horizontals 50', the difference being therefore 25’. In
this case both seemed to combine perfectly when the point of
sight was distant 74 inches. The next diagram tried had the
verticals inclined 5° and the horizontals 3° 45/, the difference
being 11°. In this case both verticals and horizontals combined
perfectly at the distance of 2°2 inches. I then tried one in
which the verticals inclined 10°. In this case I could not make
perfect coincidence of both verticals and horizontals until the dif-
ference of inclination was made as great as 5°. The diagram
used is shown reduced in the figure (fig. 10). The point of
Fig. 10.
sight in this experiment was only 11 inch from the line joining
—— ae ess ASS
eee
eee
190 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
the optic centres, or about a quarter of an inch from the root of
the nose.
I attribute these phenomena to a slight distortion of the
ocular globe under the action of the oblique muscles—a distor-
tion which increases with the degree of optic convergence. We
will refer to this again.
In all the experiments described above, the greatest care was
taken that the visual plane should be in the primary direction,
2. e. at right angles to the line of the face, and especially that
the median line of sight should be at right angles to the
plane of the diagram. I now wished to try the effect of turn-
ing the visual plane upward and downward. Meissner, from
his experiments on the position of the horopter, had arrived
at the conclusion that the rotation of the eye was zero, what-
ever the degree of convergence, when the visual plane was in-
clined downward 45° from its primary position, and that the
rotation increased as the plane was elevated toward the eye-
brows. I was anxious to test this result. The plane of the
diagram still remaining vertical, I now turned the face upward
(taking care, however, that the eyes should still be on an exact
level with the circles of the diagram) until the eyes looked in
the direction of the point of the nose. In this position, on ste-
reoscopically combining the small circles, the lines, both vertical
and horizontal, in all cases maintained their true position: i. e.
in the diagram with parallel lines (fig. 6), the coincidence of all
the lines was perfect; in the diagram with inclined verticals
(fig. 7), the horizontals coalesced perfectly and the verticals
crossed at their true angle of inclination; while in the diagram
with the verticals and horizontals both inclined (fig. 8), both
the verticals and horizontals crossed at their true angle of in-
clination. JI tried the same experiment for various distances,
and therefore various degrees of optic convergence, but always
with the same result. There is, therefore, no rotation of my
eyes when the plane of vision is inclined 45° downward. In con-
tinuing the inclination still further downward, I observed a de-
cided rotation of the eyes in the contrary direction, i. e. in-
ward. As the eyes are raised from the position 45° downward,
the rotation increases until the visual plane is again in its pri-
mary direction. When the visual plane is raised above this,
however, I do not find the rotation to increase as stated by
Meissner, except in cases of extreme convergence, but rather to
decrease again, although it does not again become zero*. In
* More recent experiments, just concluded, have convinced me that in
my own eyes, if the convergence is very slight, the outward rotation does
reach zero and may even be converted into an inward rotation. The reason
of Binocular Vision. 191
strong convergence, however (as, for instance, when the point
of sight is less than seven inches distant), the rotation continues
to increase as stated by Meissner.
In all these experiments, in order to detect the true rotation,
it is absolutely necessary that the median line of sight should be
exactly at right angles with the plane of the diagram. The least
error in this respect will cause perspective convergence of the pa-
rallel verticals, or increase or decrease of the angle of inclination
of the inclined verticals. With the diagram three feet distant, if
my eyes look one inch above or below their true level, on combi-
ning the two halves of the diagram I can detect the perspective
convergence, upward or downward, with the greatest ease. In’
all cases also, but particularly when the convergence is very
strong, it is necessary to fix the attention on that horizontal
which passes through the small circle ; for those above and below
converge by perspective.
In these experiments the size of the diagrams is of little 1m-
portance. I have used them of every size from 5 by 10 inches
to 15 by 30 inches.
My next desire was to determine how far these results were
general for normal eyes. The great difficulty was to find any
one who was able to repeat the experiments. Nevertheless I have
found four young persons with normal eyes who, with some
practice, have succeeded in all except the most difficult of them.
Their results agreed perfectly with my own. In a fifth case, how-
ever, in which great difficulty was experienced and the results
were uncertain, I was led to believe that the eyes in convergence
rotated inward. It is not improbable, therefore, that normal
eyes differ in this respect.
We believe, therefore, that we are justified in the conclusion
that when the eye is in its primary position and therefore pas-
sive, the vertical line of demarcation coincides with the vertical
meridian, and the horizontal line of demarcation with the hori-
zontal meridian of the eye, and therefore these two lines of de-
marcation are at right angles to each other. But as soon as the
eyes begin to converge, the oblique muscles (particularly the
inferior oblique) begin to act, rotating the eye on the optic axis
and slightly distorting its form; so that the vertical line of de-
marcation is now not only no longer coincident with the vertical
meridian, but also no longer at right angles to the horizontal
is, that when my eyes are parallel or nearly so, elevation of the visual plane
causes inward rotation. In some other eyes, however, I have found that
elevation of the visual plane when the eyes are parallel causes outward
rotation as stated by Meissner. In these cases, therefore, Meissner’s
results on this point are entirely true.
192 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
line of demarcation. Both the rotation and the change in the
relation of the two lines of demarcation increases with the degree
of optic convergence. It is possible that the frequent action of
the muscles distorting the globe of the eye may leave some per-
manent impress upon the form of the globe, so that even in a
passive state the vertical line of demarcation does not coincide
perfectly with the vertical meridian. If so, then to that extent
Helmholtz’s principle of real and apparent vertical in the primary
position of the eye will be true. Or, to express it differently,
we have seen that the inclination of the vertical upon the hori-
zontal line of demarcation decreases as the point of sight recedes ;
at 17 inch it is 5°, at 2:2 inches it is 11°, at 7:5 inches it is 25/,
andat 12 inches 20/. It is possible that even when the point of
sight recedes to infinite distance, and the horizontal line of de-
marcation becomes coincident with the horizontal meridian, the
vertical line of demarcation may still make a small angle with
the vertical meridian. Ifso, this angle is the difference between
the real and apparent vertical spoken of by Professor Helmholtz.
We do not yet admit this as probable, however; for the natural
position in which all lines at all distances combine when the
visual plane is inclined 45° downward seems inconsistent with
this idea.
The decrease of the rotation of the eye when the visual plane
is inclined downward, and its increase when the visual plane is
inclined upward, seem to be the result of the relative power of
the two oblique muscles. Ordinarily the inferior oblique is the
stronger, and the rotation is therefore outward ; but as the visual
plane is inclined downward, the action of the two become more
and more nearly equal, until at 45° they balance each other and
there is no rotation. Below 45° the action of the superior
oblique predominates, and the eye therefore rotates inward. In
turning the visual plane upward and converging strongly, the
action of the inferior oblique predominates more and more.
It will be observed that the rotation of the eye which we have
demonstrated necessitates, in optic convergence, a difference be-
tween the real and apparent vertical ; but our views differ entirely
from those of Professor Helmholtz in the following respects :—
(1) Professor Helmholtz admits only a difference between real
and apparent vertical; we have shown a difference between the
real and apparent horizontal as well as the real and apparent
vertical. (2) Professor Helmholtz’s difference is a constant one,
viz. 14°; ours varies from 11° to 20', and probably to zero.
(3) According to Professor Helmholtz, the relation of the appa-
rent vertical to the apparent horizontal is a constant one, viz. an
angle of about 883°; our experiments prove that this relation
varies to the extent of 5°.
of Binocular Vision. 193
It is certain, therefore, that the law of Listing is far from
being true in strong convergence. Evidently the reason is, that
in convergence muscles are used which are not used in simply
turning the eyes from side to side, as in the experiments used by
Helmholtz to prove this law (p. 180). That different muscles
are used in strong convergence is easily shown as follows :—It is
easy to turn either eye inward until it looks in the direction of
the root of the nose, provided the other eye moves parallel with
it, 2. e. outward; but it is almost impossible to turn both eyes
at the same time so as to look at this point. Great strain is
experienced in producing convergence even much short of this.
The eyes are turned from side to side, parallel to each other, by
means of the interior and exterior recti muscles, while in con-
vergence the oblique muscles are also used. For this reason
Professor Helmholtz’s experiments on spectra do not apply to
convergence.
The law of Donders is equally untrue for strong convergence.
This law asserts that the position of the eye is rigorously con-
stant for every position of the visual line. But in the experi-
ment represented by fig. 9, the eye II, although the direction of
its visual line ts unchanged, rotates on its axis when the visual
line of the other eye is turned from the direction Id to the di-
rection La.
The reason is, that as I turns toward a the oblique muscles
in both eyes begin to act. It is probable that the action of the
oblique muscles, and therefore the rotation of the eye, is consen-
sual with the two adjustments and with the contraction of the
pupil; and it is well known that, under the circumstances repre-
sented by the figure, the pupil of the eye II would contract also,
although the direction of the visual line is unchanged.
III. The Horopter.
If we look intently at any point, the visual lines converge and
meet at that point. Its image is therefore impressed on exactly
corresponding points of the two retinz, viz. on the central spot
of each. A small object at this point is therefore seen single.
We have called this point the poznt of saght. Allobjects beyond
or on this side of the point of sight are seen double, for their
images do not fall on corresponding points of the two retine.
But objects above or below, or to one side or the other of the
point of sight, may possibly be seen single also. The sum of all
the points which are seen single, while the point of sight remains
unchanged, is called the horopter. Or it may be expressed dif-
ferently thus: each eye projects its retinal images outward into
space, and therefore has its own field of view crowded with its
194. Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
own images. When we look at any object, we bring the two
external images of that object mto coincidence at the point of
sight. Now the point of sight, together with all other corre-
sponding points of the two fields of view which coalesce at that
moment, constitute the horopter. Of course the images of all
points lying in the horopter fall on corresponding points of the
retina.
Is the horopter a surface or is it a line? In either case what
is its form and position? These questions have tasked the inge-
nuity of physicists, mathematicians, and physiologists. If the
position of identical points of the retine under all circumstances
were known, then the question of the form of the horopter would
become a purely mathematical one. But the position of identical
points evidently depends upon the laws of ocular motion. It is
evident, therefore, that it is only on an experimental basis that a
true theory of the horopter can be constructed; and yet the ex-
perimental investigation as usually conducted is very unsatisfac-
tory, on account of the indistinctness of vision when the object
is at any considerable distance from the point of sight in any
direction.
The most diverse views have, therefore, been held as to the
nature and form of the horopter. Aguilonius, the inventor of
the name, believed it to be a plane passing through the point of
sight and perpendicular to the median line of sight. Others
have believed it to be the surface of a sphere passing through the
point of sight and the optic centres; others, a torus formed by
the revolution of a circle passing through the point of sight and
the optic centres on a line joining the optic centres. The sub-
ject has been investigated with great acuteness by P. Prévost, A.
Prévost, J. Miller, G. Meissner, E. Claparéde*, and, lastly, by
Helmholtz+. A. Prévost determines in it, as he supposes, a circle
passing through the optic centres and the point of sight, which
he calls the “ horopteric circle,’ anda straight line passing
through the point of sight at right angles to the visual plane,
which he calls the “ horopterie vertical.”
Until the investigations of Meissner, almost all attempts to
determine the form of the horopter have been by mathematical
calculations, based upon the doctrine of identical points, and
assuming the law of Listing. Meissner attempts the same ques-
tion experimentally. We condense the following account of his
admirable investigations from Claparéde’s memoir on this sub-
ject t already referred to.
* Bib. Un. Archiv. des Scien. I. vol. ii. pp. 1388 & 225.
t Proce. Roy. Soc. April 1864.
t Bib. Un. Arch. des Scien. II. vol. iu. p. 138.
of Binocular Vision. 195
Let R (fig. 11) be an observer and I, II his two eyes, A the
point of sight, B an
object beyond and Bi Fig. 11.
an object nearer than
the point of sight, but
all in the same line,
joining the root of the
nose and the point of
sight. Of course both
B and B! will be seen
double. If,now, while
the sight is still fixed
uponA, B be elevated,
its two images, ac-
cording to Meissner,
will approach until at some point, W, they coalesce. If, on the
contrary, B be depressed, its images separate more and more. If,
now, B! be elevated, its images separate; but if it be depressed,
its images approach and coalesce at O. The line WAO is,
therefore, the horopter or line of single vision. It is not at
right angles, but inclined to the plane of vision. Again, accord-
ing to Meissner, if instead of pots we have vertical lines like
threads, W B and OB) (fig. 11), then O B! will double at B’,
the images being crossed, and they will approach one another and
\ IBF
meet at O, in other words, will appear thus, ; while BW will
O
also double at B but not cross (2. e. each image will have the
same name as the eye), and will be seen to converge and meet
WwW
at W thus, / \ Lastly, if the vertical line pass through the
point of sight A, the images will cross one another like an X.
Meissner accounts for these phenomena by supposing that, in
converging the optic axis, the eyes rotate on the optic axis out-
ward, so that the vertical lines of demarcation C D (fig. 12) no
longer coincide perfectly with the vertical meridians A B, as
they do when the eyes Fig. 12.
are in the primary direc-
tion (the axis parallel),
but cross them at a small
angle. In the primary
direction of the eye the
image of a vertical line,
according to Meissner,
falls on the vertical line
of demarcation C D in both eyes (for these lines then coincide
-— SS — —— ‘
oS SS
196 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
with the vertical meridian) and is therefore seen single. But if
the eyes rotate on the optic axes outward, then the image of a
vertical line still fallimg on the vertical meridian must cross the
line of demarcation in opposite directions in the two eyes, and
therefore cannot be seen single except at the point of sight, the
image of which corresponds to the central point O of the retina
of each eye. In order that the image of a line shall fall on the
line of demarcation in both eyes and thus be seen single, it must
be inclined at a certain angle with the vertical, the lower end
being nearer and the upper end further away. It is moreover
evident, upon a little reflection, that when the eye rotates, the
horopter cannot be a plane or a surface of any kind; for objects
right and left of the horopteric line must all be doubled by dis-
placement of the horizontal line of demarcation GH (fig. 12),
which therefore no longer coincides with the horizontal meri-
dian, EF.
From various experiments made at different distances and
with different degrees of inclination of the visual plane upward
and downward, Meissner concludes :—(1) That, looking straight
forward at an infinite distance, the horopter is a plane at right
angles to the visual lines. (2) That for all other distances, the
visual plane remaining the same, the horopter is a straight line
passing through the point of sight and increasing 1n inclination
to the visual plane as the convergence of the optic axes increases.
(3) That in turning the visual plane downward, the inclination
of the horopteric line with that plane becomes less and less,
until at 45° downward it becomes perpendicular, and therefore
the horopter again expands into a plane at right angles to the
median line of sight. (4) That in raising the visual plane up-
ward toward the eyebrows, the inclination of the horopter to the
visual plane increases.
We have given Meissner’s investigations more in detail, be-
cause by entirely different methods we have confirmed almost all
of them.
Claparéde by similar experiments fails to confirm the conelu-
sions of Meissner, and therefore rejects them. He concludes,
partly from his own experiments and partly from calculation,
that ‘‘ the horopter is a surface of such a form that it contains
a straight line perpendicular to the plane of vision and passing
through the point of sight, and that every plane passing through
the optic centres makes, by intersection of this surface, the
circumference of a circle.” In other words, he believes that
the horopter is a surface which contains the horopteric vertical
BAB! (fig. 13) and the horopteric circle OAO of Prévost,
and that in addition the surface is further characterized by the
fact that, while the point of sight remains at A, the intersection
of Binocular Vision. 197
with it of every plane passing
through the optic centres O, O!
upward or downward as O B O!
and O B’O'is also a circle. It
is evident that as these circles
would increase in size upward
and downward, the horopter,
according to Claparéde, must
be a surface of singular and
complex form.
Finally, Helmholtz arrives at
results entirely different from
those of all previous observers. R
He sums up his conclusions as
follows :—
“When the point of conver-
gence is situated in the middle
[vertical] plane of the head,
the horopter is composed of a
straight line drawn through the
point of convergence [direction
not stated, but evidently not at
right angles to the visual plane,
for see below the sentence marked 4], and a conic section passing
through the optic centres and intersecting the straight line.”
“When the point of convergence is in the plane which con-
tains the primary visual lines [primary visual plane], the horop-
ter is a circle going through that point and the optic centres
| Prévost’s horopteric circle] and a straight line intersecting the
circle [ where and in what direction not stated | ee
‘When the point of convergence is situated as well in the
middle plane of the head asin the primary visual plane, the ho-
ropter is the circle just described [ Prévost’s horopteric circle]
and a straight line going through that point [direction not
stated |.”
“There is but one case in which the horopter is really a plane,
viz. when the point of convergence is in the middle plane of the
head and at an infinite distance. Then the horopter is a plane
parallel to the visual plane and beneath it, at a certain distance
which depends upon the angle between the really and apparently
vertical meridians, but which is nearly as great as the distance
of the feet of the observer from his eyes when he is standing.
Therefore, when we look at a point on the horizon, the horopter
as the ground on which we stand. *When we look at the ground
on which we stand at any point equally distant from both eyes,
the horopter is not a plane; but the straight line which is one of
198 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
its parts coincides completely with the horizontal plane on which
we stand.”
These conclusions of Helmholtz are the result of refined ma-
thematical calculations based entirely upon the supposed constant
difference between the real and apparent vertical. If this principle
be true for all normal eyes, then it is probable that Helmholtz’s
conclusions in regard to the form and position of the horopter
are also true for those cases in which the point of sight is at a
considerable distance, and in which, therefore, the rotation of
the eye is very small. JI am not able to test all of Professor
Helmkoltz’s conclusions by calculations based upon this prin-
ciple, but I easily see that the position of the horopter lying
along the ground is the necessary consequence of a difference of
11° between the real and apparent vertical when the eyes are in
their primary direction. For if a line be drawn from each pupil
downward, making an angle of 24° with each other or of 11°
with the vertical, they will intersect each other at the distance
of about five feet below the eyes or about the feet of the observer
standing erect. Now if these two lines be placed thus \ i be-
fore the observer whose eyes are in the primary direction, it is
plain that their stereoscopic combination would be a line lying
along the ground to infinite distance. if the difference between
the real and apparent vertical be less than 11°, then the distance
below the eyes of the horopteric plane will be greater. We
have already shown that if there be any such difference in our
own eyes, it cannot be more than 10'; in this case the horopteric
plane will be at least 35 to 40 feet below the eyes. But Pro-
fessor Helmholtz takes no account of rotation of the eyes on the
optic axes, which greatly affects the form and position of the ho-
ropter when the point of sight is near; and we believe that it is
only when the point of sight is near that the form and position
of the horopter is of any practical importance in vision, for it is
only then that the doubling of images lying out of the horopter
is perceptible.
It has been with much hesitation that I have ventured to eri-
ticise the conclusions of so distinguished a physicist. My ability
to do so, if well founded, I attribute entirely to a facility in the
use of the eyes such as I have never seen equalled in the case of
any other person.
Although I believe Meissner has arrived at truer results than
any one who has yet written on this subject, yet [ think his me-
thod very unsatisfactory. I have wondered at the skill and
patience which could attain such true results by such imperfect
methods. I have tried Meissner’s experiments without any sa-
tisfactory results, and [ confess I commenced these experiments
of Binocular Vision. 199
with the conviction that his theory was untenable; but, contrary
to my expectations, his views have been in a great measure con-
firmed. The difficulty with Meissner’s method, and, in fact, with
all previous experimental methods, as already stated, is the in-
distinctness of objects at any considerable distance from the
point of sight in any direction. In Meissner’s experiment with
the three points B’, A, and B (fig. 11), in lowering B! or eleva-
ting B the indistinctness was so great that I could not tell with
certainty whether the images approached each other or not ; and
in his second experiment with the thread, the obstinate disposi-
tion on the part of the eye to see single by stereoscopic combi-
nation, even when the images cross, interferes seriously with the
certainty of the result. But in my experiments, by virtue of
the complete dissociation of the axial and focal adjustments, the
lines are seen perfectly clearly ; and by making them pass each
other slowly, their relation to each other may be observed with
great exactness.
I will now state my own results in regard to the horopter.
It is evident that if, in convergence, the eyes rotate on the
optic axes, as my experiments prove, then in this state of the
eyes the horopter cannot be a surface, but a line; and this line
cannot be vertical, but inclined to the visual plane. Perhaps
this requires further explanation. If the eyes in a state of con-
vergence be fixed on a vertical line, then if the eyes rotate the
line must be doubled except at the point of sight. This doubling
is the result of horizontal displacement of the two images in op-
posite directions ; and therefore the two images may be brought
together by bringing the doubled portion of the vertical line
nearer or carrying it further away. This is done in inclining
the line as in fig. 11. But all points to the right and left of the
horopteric line are also doubled by rotation; but this doubling
is the result of vertical displacement of the images: now vertical
displacement cannot be remedied by increasing or decreasing the
distance, because the eyes are separated horizontally. Therefore
no form of surface can satisfy the conditions of single vision
right and left of the horopteric line. The restriction of the
horopter to a straight line and the inclination of that line to
the visual plane are therefore necessary results of rotation on
the optic axes. But I have also proved this by direct experi-
ment:
If two lines, one white on black and the other black on white
(fig. 14), be drawn at an angle of 11° with the vertical, and
therefore 24° with each other, then by bringing my eyes so
near to them at any point aa (taking care that the median
line of sight shall be perpendicular to the plane of the lines)
that the visual lines without crossing shall meet beyond the
200 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
diagram at the distance of seven inches from
the eyes, the two lines are brought into per-
fect coincidence. If, on the contrary, the
same figure be turned upside down and the
eyes be placed a little further than seven
inches, so that the two points a,a are brought
together by crossing the optic axes at the
distance of seven inches, then also the lines
are brought into perfect coincidence. The
accompanying figure (fig. 15),in which O, O!
are the eyes, A the point of sight, aH, a H,
and a! H’, a’ H’ are the lines in the two po-
sitions, will explain how the stereoscopic
combination takes place in each case. ‘The
lime H'A H is the horopter. This experi-
ment is difficult to perform satisfactorily.
When the lines come together it is difficult
to determine whether there is real coinci-
dence or not. I have observed, however,
that when the coincidence is not perfect the
white and black lines seem to run spirally
round each other. The best plan is to observe them at the mo-
ment of coming together or of separating. I feel quite confident
of the reliability of the conclusions reached.
Fig. 15.
I made many calculations, based upon these experiments and
on the previous experiments on the rotation of the eye, to deter-
mine the inclination of the horopteric line for different degrees
of convergence, 2. e. for different distances of the point of sight.
The results of these calculations were not entirely satisfactory.
I had expected from Meissner’s results that there would be found
a progressive increase as the distance decreased. But I could
not be sure from my calculations of any increase or decrease
with distance. For all distances the inclination seemed to come
of Binocular Vision. 201
i AO)
out about 7°—in some a little less, in some a little more.
Beyond 3 inches there seems to be a slight progressive increase
rather than decrease ; within 3 inches the action of the eyes was
irregular.
I then adopted another method. I used the diagram of pa-
rallel lines (fig. 6) and inclined it at an angle of exactly 7° from
the perpendicular in the supposed direction of the horopter and
at the distance of 3 feet. In this position the verticals, of course,
all converge by perspective. I then brought together sueces-
sively the lines 3 inches apart, then those 6 inches apart, then
those 9 inches, 12 inches, 15 inches, 18 inches, and so on even
to the last, which were 30 inches apart: in each case the lines
seemed to come together parallel; or at least the divergence, if any,
was so small that I could not be sure about it. Now in this
experiment the point of sight varied from 164 inches to only
2°8 inches in distance, and yet the inclination of the horopterie
line seemed to be nearly the same for all, viz. 7°. If there was
any difference at all, it seemed to be in favour of greater inclina-
tion at greater distance. ‘This result (which I arrived at, though
doubtfully, by experiment alone) would be the necessary result of
any residual difference between the real and apparent vertical,
or, in other words, any residual inclination of the vertical upon
the horizontal line of demarcation of the eye in its primary po-
sition, such as Helmholtz maintains and as I have supposed
possible. Still it by no means proves the existence of this resi-
dual difference.
It must not be supposed, however, because the lines 3 inches,
6 inches, 9 inches, 12 inches, &c. apart are all brought into
coincidence at the same or nearly the same inclination, that
therefore the amount of rotation of the eye is the same for all.
The perspective convergence of the lines, of course, increases
with their distance apart, and therefore the rotation of the eye
necessary to bring them successively into coincidence increases
also. It is quite possible that the rotation should increase with
the optic convergence, and yet the inclination of the horopteric
line remain constant or even decrease with the convergence.
Whether the inclination of the horopteric line increases or de-
creases with distance would depend upon the law of increase of
rotation with increasing convergence. If it increases with dis-
tance, then it is possible that when we look at the ground before
us the horopter may be a line lying along the ground, as main-
tained by Helmholtz.
I next tried the same experiments with the eyes inclined
downward 45°. The lines do not change at all their natural per-
spective convergence. In all the experiments made with eyes in
this position the inclination of the lines in the image was the
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 254, Sept. 1869. P
202 Prof. J. LeConte on some Phenomena
same as in the object. I conclude, therefore, that in this posi-
tion of the eyes the horopter is at right angles to the plane of
vision; and since there is no rotation of the eye, the horopter
in this position expands into a surface. Below this inclination
the horopter again becomes a line, but inclined now the other way,
1. e. the upper end towards the observer. In turning the eyes
upward toward the eyebrows, I have found the rotation, except
in cases of strong convergence, less than looking straight for-
ward. I conclude, therefore, that in this position the horopteric
line inclines less to the visual plane than it does when the visual
plane is in its primary direction*.
The points in which my experiments do not confirm Meissner
ave (1) the increasing inclination of the horopterie line with m-
creasing convergence, (2) the increasing rotation of the eye as
well as inehination of the horopteric line under all circumstances
in turning the eye upward. Again, I believe that Meissner is
also wrong in supposing that the horopter i is a plane when the
eyes are depressed 45°. In this position it is a surface, but not
a plane. It is clear that the images of points situated to the
right and left of the point of sight and in the same plane with it
cannot fall on corresponding points of the two retine. As to
the form of this surface, I feel myself unequal to the task of its
mathematical investigation; and its experimental investigation
presents, I believe, insuperable difficulties.
We have seen that the eye in convergence rotates on the optic
axis. ‘The question naturally occurs, Is this rotation to be re-
garded in the light of an imperfection of the instrument (of
which there are several examples in the structure and mechanism
of the eye), and should the law of Listing be regarded as the
ideal of ocular motion, though an ideal seldom or never realized
in nature? or does the rotation of the eye subserve some useful
purpose in vision? I believe there is no doubt that the latter
view is the correct one; for there seem to be special muscles
which are adapted for this rotation, and the action of these
muscles is consensual with the adjustments of the eye and the
contraction of the pupil. This purpose I explain as follows. A
general view of objects in an extended field is absolutely ne-
cessary to animal life in its highest phases, but an equal distinct-
ness of all objects in this field would only distract the attention ;
* As stated in note on p. 190, eyes certainly differ in this respect. In
my own, if convergence be small, the outward rotation decreases with the
elevation of the visual plane, becomes zero, and is even converted into an
mward rotation; the inclination of the horopter, therefore, decreases,
becomes perpendicular, and even inclines the other way. In some other
eyes the outward rotation increases whatever be the convergence; in this
ae of course, the inclination of the horopter increases as stated by
eissner.
of Binocular Vision. 2038
therefore the eye is so constructed and moved as to restrict as
much as possible both distinct vision and single vision. Thus as
in monocular vision the more elaborate structure of the central
spot of the retina restricts distinct vision to the visual line, and
the focal adjustment still further restricts it to a single point in
that line, so also in binocular vision, axial adjustment restricts
single vision to the horopter, while rotation restricts the horop-
ter toa single line.
Conclusions.
The most important conclusions arrived at in this paper may
be briefly summed up as follows :-—
(1) The axial and focal adjustments of the eye are not so in-
sepatably associated as is generally supposed; but, on the con-
trary, when distinctness of vision requires it they may be com-
pletely dissociated*,
(2) In this dissociation the contraction of the pupil associates
itself with the focal in preference to the axial adjustment.
(3) In optic convergence there is a rotation of both eyes on
the optic axes outward, and this rotation increases with the degree
of convergence.
(4) In inclining the visual plane downward, the rotation of
the eyes for the same degree of convergence decreases until, when
the visual plane is inclined 45° downward, the rotation becomes
zero for all degrees of convergence. Below the inclination of
45° the rotation is inward. In turning the eyes upward, except
in cases of strong convergence, the rotation also decreases
shghtly but does not reach zeroy+; in strong convergence it in-
creases as stated by Meissner.
(5) Besides the rotation produced by optic convergence, there
is also a decided inclination of the vertical line of demarcation
upon the horizontal line of demarcation, which increases with
the degree of convergence. ‘This change in the relation of these
two lines is probably the result of distortion of the ocular globe.
(6) As a necessary consequence of the rotation of the eyes,
for all degrees of convergence in the primary visual plane the
horopter is a dine inclined to the visual plane, the lower end
nearer the observer; but whether the inclination increases or
decreases with distance I have not been able to determine with
certainty. It probably increases with distance.
(7) In inclining the visual plane below the primary position,
the inclination of the horopteric line becomes less and less until,
* While these pages were passing through the press, I discovered that
in this conclusion I had been anticipated by Donders and others. All
previous experiments, however, were made by means of glasses. Mine
were made with the naked eye.
T See this statement modified in note on p. 190.
P2
204: Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Formation of
when the visual line is lowered 45°, the horopteric line becomes
perpendicular to that plane and at the same time expands into a
surface. Below 45° the horopter again becomes a line, but now
inclined in the contrary direction, 7. e. the upper end nearer the
observer.
(8) In inclining the visual plane upward or toward the brows,
if the optic convergence be strong the inclination of the horop-
teric line increases ; but if the optic convergence be small it de-
creases, but does not reach zero or become perpendicular*.
(9) In looking downward 45°, for all distances the horopter
is a surface passing through the point of sight and perpendicular
to the median line of sight; but the form of the surface I have
not attempted to determine. In looking straight forward at in-
finite distance, the horopter is also a surface passing through the
point of sight ; but the inclination of this surface I am unable to
determine.
(10) It is possible that in some eyes which would be consi-
dered normal there is, in convergence, a rotation of the eyes
inward, probably from greater power in the superior oblique. In
such cases the position of the horopter would be different.
Columbia, 8.C.,
November 16, 1868.
XXI. On the Formation of Bubbles of Gas and of Vapour in In-
quids. By Cuartus Tomutinson, #.R.S., F.C.S.7
io the fifth Number of Poggendorff’s Annalen for the present
year, dated May 31, and published, I suppose, early in
June, is a paper by Herr Schréder on the conditions under
which bubbles of gas and of steam are formed in liquids{. The
paper is dated “ Mannheim im December 1868,” and a conti-
nuation is promised for a future Number. In paragraph 4,
which is devoted to the history of the subject, the author does
me the honour of referring to two papers of mine which appeared
in the Philosophical Magazine just two years ago§, although he
says he was not aware of the existence of my papers nor of those
of M. Gernez||, until he had completed the greater part of his
researches on this subject. Still he: does not think it super-
fluous to publish his paper, since he believes it will add new re-
sults to those obtained by M. Gernez and myself.
* See this statement modified in note on p. 202.
+ Communicated by the Author.
* “Untersuchungen tiber die Bedingungen, von welchen die Entwick-
lung von Gasblasen und Dampfblasen abhiingig ist, und uber die bei ihrer
Bildung wirksamen Krafte,” p. 76.
Si. On the so-ealled iiaciee Condition of Solids,” Phil. Mag. for Au-
eust and September 1867.
|| Comptes Rendus for 1866 and 1867.
Bubbles of Gas and of Vapour in Liquids. 205
I am not aware whether Herr Schréder has seen my subse-
quent papers on the subject of which he treats* ; but as he uses
the same authorities, and no other, it is probable that he has.
It cost me a considerable amount of research to find out the
various memoirs of Ctrsted, Schénbein, Liebig, and Gernez on
the hberation of gases from solution under the influence of nu-
clei—of Watt and Southern, Achard, Gay-Lussac, Rudberg,
Marcet, Bostock, Magnus, Donny, Grove, and Dufour on the
phenomena of boiling liquids; and yet all these authorities, and
no other, are made use of by Herr Schroder.
It is equally remarkable that Herr Schréder should use the
terms “clean” and “unclean” in precisely the same sense that
I do, in distinguishing between a body that is “inactive” in
liberating gas or vapour from liquids and one that is “active”
in doing so—and that he should describe an inactive body as
being made active by drawing it through the “finger and thumb”
(I say “the hand ”’), when it becomes contaminated with greasy
or fatty matter which renders it active. It is also remarkable
that Herr Schroder should have hit upon the same explanation
of the action of flame, sulphuric acid, alkaline solutions, alcohol,
&e. in rendering dirty bodies chemically clean, and therefore in-
active as nuclei in gaseous and vaporous solutions.
I should have been quite content to leave all these matters
unnoticed, seeing that priority of publication is in my favour,
were it not that Herr Schroder claims for his distinguished coun-
tryman Schonbein the merit of first distinguishing in 1837 be-
tween an “inactive” and an “unclean” body in liberating gas.
Now-in Schénbein’s short paper} there is not the slightest
evidence that the author had any idea whatever of the difference
between clean and unclean bodies in liberating gas from solution.
His theory was that solids acted by carrying down air, into which
the gas in solution expanded and so got liberated. He expressly
says that metals from whose surface the adhering film of air has
been removed by dipping them into boiling water, do not disen-
gage bubbles of steam from boiling liquids. Herr Schroder also
makes Schonbein refer to the action of porous bodies as nuclei,
whereas Schénbein does not even mention permanently porous
bedies, such as charcoal, pumice, &c. He states, as Bostock
had done twelve years before, that bits of wood are particularly
* ee . > Nee . = =
Poren noch mit Luft angefiillt sind, aber gar nicht mehr, wenn diese aus-
getrieben ist.”
i; 2070.
XXII. On the Production of a Columnar Structure in Metallic
Tin. By Dr. T. Frirzscun of St. Petersburg*.
HE occurrence of a curious structural change in block tin
from Banca was observed by Dr. Fritzsche. The metal
became crystalline, and fell into small pieces having a columnar
form. This change was attributed to the intense cold prevailing
in St. Petersburg at the commencement of the year 1868.
Dr. Fritzsche thus describes the experiments instituted to
confirm his view :—‘“‘ Although I was persuaded that this phe-
nomenon was produced by the intense cold that we had at the
beginning of 1868, I wished to prove it by experiments. These
experiments I have lately completed. I exposed some fragments
cut from a block of Banca tin in an alcohol-bath reduced to the
temperature of —32°-35° R. They underwent a change exactly
similar to that in the blocks in question.
“It is necessary for a like cold to be sustained for some hours
to induce the commencement of the crystallization, which showed
itself by the appearance of button-like prominences of a steel-grey
colour rising from the surface of the tin. Hach prominence re-
presents acentre from which the crystallization proceeds, if the
cold be sustained. Gradually the meeting of the acicular erys-
tals produces fissures at the points of contact, and the fragment,
the volume of which is much augmented, falls in pieces, which
are very friable and crumble between the fingers.
“A remarkable fact is that elevation of temperature causes
the steel-grey colour to disappear. This may be shown by
plunging the steel-grey tin (enclosed in a sealed glass tube) into
hot water, when the natural white colour reappears but without
the former metallic lustre. This change of colour is not attended
by a loss of weight; neither is the transition of cast tin into
the crystalline modification, in the presence of air or in alcohol,
attended with any loss of weight. Ihave met with cavities in the
altered blocks, one of which had a capacity of -80 cub. centim. ;
I do not believe that such large cavities were formed during the
cooling of the blocks. I attribute their formation to the act of
crystallization ; but on cutting these blocks I found that the
change was only superficial, the centre being in the natural con-
dition. I have there found similar cavities; and it is beyond
doubt that they existed before the commencement of the change.
As yet English tin has resisted the crystallization ; but Banca tin
also undergoes the change even after being melted.
“J shall continue my researches, as it 1s necessary to compare
specific weights and to make analyses. I will communicate the
ultimate results if they are of sufficient importance.”
* Fyom a letter to Mr. Graham, dated June 18, 1869. Communicated
by Mr. Graham.
|. 208° 4
XXII. Fundamental Principles of Molecular Physics. Reply to
Professor Bayma. By Professor W. A. Norton.
[Continued from p. 41.]
A FTER replying to the general remarks in the first part of
my paper, Professor Bayma proceeds to the consideration
of my answer to his criticisms of my original paper on ‘ Mole-
cular Physics,’ and ends by reaffirming his objections. I pro-
pose to examine briefly the more salient points in this portion
of his elaborate reply.
Three Forms of Matter.—On this point we shall most readily
eet at the true state of the case by quoting the postulates im my
original memoir bearing upon it. They are the following :—
‘All bodies of matter consist of separate indivisible parts,
called atoms, each of which is conceived to be spherical in form.”
“‘ Matter exists in three essentially different forms. These
are (1) ordinary or gross matter, of which all bodies of matter
directly detected by our senses either wholly or chiefly consist ;
(2) a subtile fluid or ether associated with ordinary matter, by
the intervention of which all electrical phenomena originate or
are produced. This electric ether, as it may be termed, is
attracted by ordinary matter, while its individual atoms repel
each other. (3) A still more subtile form of zether which per-
vades all space and the interstices between the atoms of bodies.
This is the medium by which light is propagated, and is called
the luminiferous ether, or the universal eather. The atoms or
‘atomettes’ of this ether mutually repel each other; and it is
attracted by ordinary matter, and is consequently more dense in
the interior of bodies than in free space.”
In what sense the term form is here used would seem to be
abundantly manifest. It is plain that the “ three different forms”
of matter are regarded as differing from each other in certain
attributes which determine the precise office each fills im the
scheme of Nature—and that the idea of a difference of geome-
trical form could not have been entertained, since it 1s distinetly
asserted that all atoms are conceived to be spherical in form. In
the next paragraph of my memoir I consider the question of the
probable constitution of a single primitive molecule, and remark
as follows :—‘“ We are thus led to conceive of a molecule as con-
sisting of an atom of ordinary matter surrounded with two atmo-
spheres, ethereal and electric, the former being the more attenu-
ated and pervading the other.” ‘The three “ forms of matter,” so
called, are then the central atoms of molecules and the atoms of
the two ethers. Each of these three general classes of atoms has
certain characteristic attributes, in consequence of which their po-
Prof. W. A. Norton on Molecular Physics. 209
sition and office in nature are different. Professor Bayma also
recognized, in his ‘ Molecular Mechanics,’ three distinct portions
or general varieties of matter differimg in certain attributes, viz.
the attractive nucleus or “nuclei” of a primitive molecule,a repul-
sive “envelope” surrounding the nuclei,‘and the ether of space.
In my reply to his criticisms, I stated that we agree in admitting
the existence of two kinds of matter and three forms of matter.
Thus, according to my view, ordinary or gross matter, 7. e. ordi-
nary material atoms or elements, constitutes one kind of matter,
and ethereal matter another kind. The latter has the same fun-
damental properties, inertia, &c. as the former, but differs from
it in some special property or attribute. Thus the atoms of or-
dinary matter were regarded as mutually attractive, and those of
ethereal matter as mutually repulsive. It was also conceived
that the active forces of the atoms of ordinary matter might be
much less intense than those of ethereal matter—although the
enormous difference between the elastic forces of the ether of
space and of the electric ether and those in operation within
bodies of ordinary matter might be wholly due to the fact that
the latter forces are the reciprocal effective actions of molecules,
which are differential, being the resultant of antagonistic actions.
I will here take occasion to remark that the notion that the
atoms of ordinary matter are mutually attractive, at first adopted,
does not seem to be a necessary one; for if we regard them as
mutually repulsive, it is conceivable that the attraction of gra-
vitation might consist in a feeble excess in the attraction of the
central atom of each molecule for the atmosphere of every other
over and above the repulsion subsisting between the atmospheres
of the two molecules, together with the corresponding excess in
the attraction of the electric atmosphere of the first molecule for
the central atom of every other over the repulsion subsisting be-
tween the central atoms of the two molecules. In fact the ex-
istence of the former excess is one of the theoretical deductions
of my ‘Molecular Physics.2 Upon the view now taken, an
atom of ordinary matter may differ from an eether-atom only in
exerting a less energetic repulsion (in accordance with the theory
propounded in my former answer to Professor Bayma), and in
exerting a direct attractive action upon the atoms of the electric
ether. The two ethers, which differ only in subtilety, and ordi-
nary matter, as it has been defined, constitute the “ three forms
of matter.”
With Professor Bayma the distinction between two kinds of
matter lies wholly in the kind of activity manifested. The one
kind is essentially attractive for all other elements, and the other
essentially repulsive. He recognizes two varieties or forms of
attractive matter—the molecular nuclei and the luminiferous
210 Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental
eether,—and one form of repulsive matter, viz. the molecular
envelope.
If, after the explanation I have now given of my meaning in
the phraseology used and of the conceptions actually formed, our
author is still disposed to renew the question “ on what evidence
are we to grant that matter exists in three forms essentially dif-
ferent from each other,” 7. e. one attractive in the mutual action
of its elements, and two repulsive in the same sense, or all re-
pulsive in this sense, but exerting different intensities at repul-
sion, I will reply by asking him ‘the same question, “on what
cqidente are we to grant that matter exists in three forms,” viz.
one repulsive and two attractive. If he should refer me to his
‘Molecular Mechanics’ for the evidence, I should respond by re-
ferring him to my ‘ Molecular Physics’ for the evidence.
There is no occasion to add anything more on the question of
the three forms of matter, except to remark that Professor
Bayma’s apparent success in exposing the “fallacy of my argu-
ment” about “ gross matter” is attributable to the fact that he
represents me as holding that gross matter is made up of mole-
cules, whereas, as I have already shown in my conception and
characterization of the three forms of matter, the gross or ordi-
nary matter is simply the central atoms of the molecules. It
may be as well to remark, also, that the term ‘ gross matter”
was adopted in conformity with common usage, m ‘designation of
what is universally called matter, without “intending to imply
that the atoms of necessity « differed from the ethereal atoms,
except in the intensity of their active forces as compared with
the quantities of matter in the atoms.
Two Atthers.—It is asked, ‘‘ Why two ethereal fluids when
one might suffice.’ The “clear and positive answer” I have to
give 1s this :—for the simple reason that, as I have endeavoured
to show in my ‘ Molecular Physics,’ from the conception of two
ethers, the recognized molecular forces and the different classes
of molecular phenomena in their diverse mutual relations and
interdependence may be evolved, while all attempts to accom-
plish this result by means of the hypothesis of a single ether
have signally failed. If our author or any other physicist will
give us any substantial reason to believe that the notion of a
single ether may really suffice to explain electric phenomena,
we shall be ready to admit that his query throws a shadow of
doubt on the hypothesis of two ethers. But we certainly can-
not make the same admission in deference to his mere assertion
that “one ether might suffice.”
The proof, or, rather, strong evidence (which is all that the case
admits of), that two eethers, both repulsive, exist in nature, 1s that
optical and electric phenomena have given direct indications of
Principles of Molecular Physics. all
their existence, and the entire range of molecular phenomena
can be shown to be deducible from their fundamental properties
and relations to ordinary matter.
Electric Aither.—My critic still cherishes the illusion that a dis-
crepancy or fallacy exists in my conception of the electric ether.
It is true that in my original memoir 1 hinted that the effective
mutual repulsion of the electric atoms might have its origin in
a repulsion between ethereal atmospheres condensed around
them by an attraction; but in my reply to Professor Bayma it
was distinctly averred that I did not advocate this doctrine, and
was only disposed to admit the possibility of its truth. If my
pertinacious critic is still disposed to run a tilt, against it under
the hallucination that it is one side of my citadel, I can only look
upon his adventure with the same sort of interest with which we
contemplate the exploits of a knight-errant in a romance.
I will take occasion in this connexion to remark that the con-
viction entertained by our author and other eminent physicists,
that the supposed electric fluid or ether is not to be regarded as
a vera causa in nature, appears to have its origin in certain mis-
conceptions or groundless assumptions.
(1) It is deemed more philosophical to seek for the true origin
of electric and kindred phenomena in some mode of motion of
the ultimate parts of bodies, notwithstanding that the existence
of an ether (the luminiferous) having the same character of sub-
tilety and enormous energy of elastic force as the supposed elec-
tric wether is distinctly recognized. This is as much as if, after
Cavendish had discovered the properties of hydrogen gas, and
the phenomena exhibited by oxygen had been carefully studied,
it had been insisted that chemists must seek to explain these
phenomena by some imagined modification of the mechanical
condition of hydrogen, instead of attributing them to a new gas
having certain specific differences of property from oxygen. Why
should the hypothesis of a new ether similar to the luminiferous
be regarded as inherently less probable than several hypothetical
motions of the atoms or molecules of ordinary matter.
(2) It is imagined to be a simpler conception to refer electric
phenomena to some mode or modes of motion of the atoms or
elements of bodies than te a new ether. Atoms may be con-
ceived to have any one of three different motions, viz. a vibra-
tory motion, a motion of rotation, or a motion of revolution.
Now let any one of these motions be hypothetically taken, and
the attempt made to obtain some glimpse of the manner in which
the phenomena might possibly evolve themselves. In the first
place, there must be two different motions answering to the posi-
tive and negative electric states. In the next place, these mo-
tions must be capable of propagation from molecule to molecule
212 Prof. W. A. Norton on the Fundamental
without changing their character, to represent a current of free
electricity. Again, they must be capable of propagation from
molecule to molecule with a continued reversion of their cha-
racter, to explain the phenomena of induction. Still, again,
these atomic or molecular motions must take place simultane-
ously with some other mode of motion, answering to heat, and
another, representative of the magnetic or diamagnetic condition ;
and these different modes of motion must be convertible each
into every other, &c. So far from being led into a region of
attractive simplicity, the complexity of the scene that presents
itself to the mind’s eye would scem to be enough to appal the
most determined explorer in the field of speculative science.
(3) It is conjectured by some physicists that the luminiferous
eecther may be equal to the duty assigned to the electric. But
no approximation to a successful attempt has yet been made to
realize this idea. It is a mere conjecture, and therefore un-
worthy of serious regard.
My own position on the question of the existence of an electric
eether was not, as intimated by Professor Bayma, that it is an
established truth, at least with the same degree of certainty that
the existence of a luminiferous ether is, but an hypothesis (and
the only definite hypothesis hitherto suggested by electric phe-
nomena) which had been shown to be in accordance with the en-
tire range of such phenomena, and thus come to be generally
received. If it be true, as I maintain, that the molecular forces
and molecular phenomena generally, in all their interdependence
and mutual convertibility, can be derived from this hypothesis,
when this shall come to be acknowledged it will then be admitted
that full confirmation of the principle reached by induction has
been furnished by the deductive test. The existence of an elec-
tric ether will then become an established truth in the most po-
sitive sense in which this can be affirmed of any principle m
physics.
Origin of Heat.—In expressing the strong conviction that
heat does not originate in the vibrations of gross molecules, re-
ference was had to vibrations of the molecules as a whole, to the
one side and the other of the positions of equilibrium. What is
meant by “ vibrativity 7” I do not fully comprehend. If we are
to understand by it an alternate contraction and expansion of the
repulsive envelope of a molecule, then Professor Bayma’s theory
of heat bears a certain analogy to my own, and may, for all that
appears to the contrary, be free from the objections that may be
urged against the doctrine that heat consists in a true vibration
of atoms or molecules.
Luminiferous Aéther.—There need be no hesitation as to the
proper answer to be made to our author’s argument to show that
Principles of Molecular Physics. 213
the discovery made by Encke, that the comet which bears his
name affords decisive evidence of the existence of a resisting me-
dium in the fields of space, is really no discovery at all. In the
first place, the attraction of unknown bodies would in all proba-
bility produce effects not recognized in the disturbed motions of
Kincke’s comet—for example, would alter the position of the
plane of the orbit. In the second place, Professor Bayma’s me-
chanics is at fault; for though the direct tendency of the resist-
ance of the supposed medium is to diminish the orbital velocity,
a resulting effect is that the orbit is contracted, and the return
of the comet to its perihelion expedited. This is Encke’s view
of the matter, and it has hitherto met with general acceptance.
The words that issue from the filmy trumpet of this unwearied
celestial traveller on each successive return have, then, quite a
different meaning from those attributed to them by our author,
and proclaim the insufficiency of the foundation on which his doc-
trine of an attractive ether has been erected. .
As to Professor Bayma’s comments on the objections urged
against this doctrine, I think it must be admitted by the candid
reader that the evidence in favour of my view of the constitution
of a primitive molecule has been in no degree impaired by his
criticisms. His idea that ‘‘no possible production of heat and
electric currents affords a sufficient ground for assuming a re-
duction of resistance and retardation” is altogether fallacious ;
for if the impmging atoms of the ether of space take effect
directly upon dense electric or ethereal atmospheres enveloping
the atoms of gross matter, they may give rise to waves and cur-
rents in those atmospheres, propagated thence to other molecular
atmospheres, and the energy conveyed by them eventually ra-
diated in waves of heat through the interstitial ether and into
free space from all sides of the atoms, and with no less tensity
from the further sides than from those in advance. A similar
principle to this is admitted in the theory of overshot water-
wheels, when it is assumed that the mechanical effect due to the
water received into the cell is lost—not communicated to the
wheels—being expended primarily in imparting agitations on
waves and currents to the water already in the cell, and eventu-
ally passing off in the form of heat. The state of the case then
is this: the resistance of an ethereal medium in space will
not of necessity retard the motions of the planets, if their atoms
be surrounded by dense ethereal atmospheres, as I have been
led to conceive them to be, on quite different grounds.
We come now to consider the answer given to my objection
to Professor Bayma’s doctrine of an attractive medium, viz. that
it really involved the operation of an energetic resistance. I
freely admit the sufficiency of his answer, if it follows from his
214 Prof. W. A. Norton on Molecular Physics.
views that the repulsive envelope of each molecule must “ beat
back” the ether of space which it encounters before it comes
within the range of the attraction of the central “ nuclei.” But
does he not, in thus escaping one difficulty, encounter another
equally great? This “beating back” of the ether implies that
the molecules of the earth’s mass in the advance are, by reason
of the earth’s motion, at such a diminished distance from the
ethereal atoms immediately contiguous to them that a repulsive
action of the molecular envelopes upon these atoms comes into
play superior to that due to the condition of equilibrium that
would obtain if the earth were at rest. If this be admitted,
it must then at the same time be admitted that the molecules on
the following side of the earth are at a corresponding increased
distance from the ethereal atoms immediately behind them. If,
then, the atoms of the ether are attractive, as our author main-
tains, since they are in closer proximity to the envelopes of the
molecules of the earth on its preceding than on its following side,
the attraction exerted by the ether upon the molecules must be
more energetic on the former than on the latter side of the earth,
and hence the earth should be accelerated in its motion through
space by the operation of the attractive ether supposed. J must
therefore conclude that the logical necessity still exists of “ abo-
lishing the ether of space altogether.”
“A Molecule.’—The position called in question under this
head had a phenomenal bearing only, as is sufliciently evident
from the expression “in all outward relations,” and the subse-
quent allusion to the production of phenomena. I was well
aware that his “ molecule” was, in the details of its constitution,
quite different from my own—and in another connexion alluded
to the multiplicity of assumptions made by the learned author of
the ‘ Molecular Mechanics’ in fashioning so complex and artifi-
cial a structure, and urged the objection that if we admit his
conception of matter and of the several material activities, we
still require the miraculous interposition of the Creator in the
construction of every individual molecule in the universe. The
eround taken was that in the evolution of phenomena, the nu-
cleus or “nuclei” and envelope must each play, to all intents
and purposes, the parts I had assigned to the central atom and
electric atmosphere of my own molecule. If Professor Bayma is
not disposed to admit this, I shall await with curiosity the fur-
ther development of his theory, when I shall be in a position to
decide with certainty how far | may have been in error in taking
the ground just mentioned.
[To be continued. ]
XXIV. Ona Remarkable Structural Appearance in Phosphorus.
By Cuarves Tomuinson, F.R.S., F.C.S*
HE following remarkable appearance in phosphorus was
described to me some months ago by Mr. James John
Field, F.C.S., who requested me, if possible, to account for it.
About four years ago Mr. Field placed half a dozen sticks
of phosphorus in a cylindrical jar containing water which rose
about half an inch above the ends of the sticks, and the jar
was closed with a bung. This jar was placed in a cellar, where
it remained undisturbed for about three years. The cellar is
flagged with stone, is surrounded by damp w alls, and almost en-
tirely protected from light and currents of air. The maximum
temperature probably does not exceed 50° or 55° F.
After this long repose the jar was taken into the laboratory,
when it was found that the level of the water had sunk to about
one-third of its original height, and the liquid left in the jar had
become as dense and thick as the strongest syrup; it consisted
of a solution of PO? and PO.
The portions of phosphorus that rose some inches above the
liquid, instead of being cylindrical as before, were conical from
a sharp point to the full diameter, and each cone had a double
spiral running down it from left to right, as if two flat tapering
bands of the substance had been made to cohere at right angles
lengthwise, and then twisted into a pointed Cee just as if
the sticks had been mounted in a screw- -cutting lathe, geared to
cut a coarse tapering double spiral. The sticks had also y changed
from the creamy opaque surface to a translucent barley-sugar
appearance from the surface of the liquid up to the points.
In attempting to explam the appearances described, we must
consider, fist, the wasting away of the sticks and their conical
form, and, secondly, the twisted structure.
First. The wasting away of the sticks and their conical form
are clearly effects of ‘slow combustion, diminishing in intensity
downwards. The continued combustion and also the evapora-
tion of the water must have been due to a badly fitting cork
which, during a falling barometer, allowed a portion of the moist
air to escape from the j jar, and during a rising barometer allowed
a portion of comparatively dry air to stream in. Had the jar
been subject to considerable variations in atmospheric tempera-
ture, the effects would have been more rapid; but as the tempera-
ture of the cellar was pretty constant, there is nothing to detain
us here. Going back, then, to variations in atmospheric pres-
sure, the level of the water in the j jar would be gradually lowered
* Communicated by the Author, haying been read at the British Asso-
ciation at Exeter, August 19, 1869.
216 Ona Remarkable Structural Appearance in Phosphorus.
during the oscillations of the barometer, until at length the tops
of the sticks of phosphorus became exposed. Slow combustion
would then set in, the resulting acid would go into solution, and
small quantities of fresh air would stream in to supply the par-
tial vacuum, and so continue the action. During a falling ba-
rometer nitrogen and moisture would stream out “of the j jar, the
level of the water would be again slightly lowered, and a fresh
portion of phosphorus be exposed to the attacks of the next
portion of oxygen drawn in. In this way by very slow degrees
the liquid would be lowered and fresh portions of phosphorus
exposed. Those already out of the water would be attacked by
every ingress of air, and thus being acted on not only more ener-
getically, but also for a longer time than the lower portions,
they would necessarily have a conical shape. Moreover the air
that streamed into the jar would gradually lose its oxygen in
descending, so that the lower portions would be acted on less
strongly than the upper. The phosphoric acids as generated
would also pass into solution with a certain rise of temperature
and a certain expansion of the nitrogen left in the jar. As this
cooled down, a little more air would be drawn in, and combus-
tion and solution would go on as before. But the most ener-
getic action would take place when under a falling barometer a
quantity of moist nitrogen streamed out of the jar, and duringa
rising barometer a fresh supply of atmospheric air streamed in, as
already explained.
Secondly, as to the spiral markings. ‘These cannot have been
formed by any action that took place in the jar; but they show,
I think, the new and interesting fact that the curves which the
theory “of hydraulics assigns to liquids flowing from an ori-
fice, and producing the vena contracta, actually form part of the
structure of a body suddenly arrested in its flow by being made
solid.
It is well known that in the ordinary mannfacture phosphorus
is formed into sticks by being made to flow from a fead or re-
servoir of the molten element along a short pipe or qoutage
into cold water ; or, rather, as soon as the stick of phosphorus
begins to emerge from the warm ajoutage and shows itself in
the cold bath, it is seized by hand and cut off at intervals, or
drawn out by machinery into a continuous length, so that from
15 to 20 lbs. and upwards of phosphorus can be moulded in less
than a quarter of an hour.
Now, of course, in the flow of the molten phosphorus Torri-
celli’s theorem applies; viz. that particles of fluid on escaping
from an orifice possess the same velocity as if they had fallen
freely in vacuo from a height equal to that of the fluid-surface
above the centre of the orifice. If the head of phosphorus were
On the Supposed Action of Light on Combustion. 21%
not too deep, there would be seen immediately over the orifice a
hollow depression which increases until it becomes a cone or funnel
the centre or lowest point of which is in the orifice, and the liquid
flows in lines directed towards the centre. In this condition of
the liquid a rotatory motion is necessarily imparted to it; and
this rapidly increases, because all the particles are approaching
. the centre, and by virtue of their inertia they tend to maintain
the same velocity which they had ima larger circle, so that their
angular velocity (or the number of revolutions in a given
time) is constantly being increased. As the particles approach
the orifice they converge to a point beyend it, so that the liquid
in escaping is narrower or more contracted at the point to which
it converges than it is either before it arrives at that point, or
after it has passed it. But as this point in the phosphorus to
which the rotating lines converge, though fixed in or uear the
tube, is being constantly shifted in the phosphorus by being
drawn out and moulded in the tube, the converging lines are
also drawn out, and thus give the appearance of a double spiral.
Of course some of the lines are obliterated by the moulding
action of the tube, and are probably of a different texture as to
hardness as compared with the drawn-out lines. These flattened
or moulded portions first yield to the action of slow combustion,
and leave the harder drawn-out lines in relief.
Highgate, N.,
July 31, 1869. :
XXV. On the Supposed Action of Light on Combustion.
By Cuaries Tomuinson, F.R.S., F.CS.*
aoe popular idea that “light puts out the fire”’ is so fixed,
that probably no conclusions drawn from actual experi-
ment are likely to disturb it, especially if they be adverse to the
notion. It is a matter of daily experience, people say, that if the
fire is nearly out and you put a screen before it, or draw down
the blind, or close the window-shutters, it will immediately
begin to revive. It is generally forgotten that a fire which looks
dull or “‘out” in a well-lighted room will appear to be in tole-
rable condition in the same room when darkened. It only re-
quires to be “ put together”? to make it burn up, and it might
have done so just as well in the light.
Experiments on this subject are not easy to make, on account
of the many disturbing causes. In an old volume of the ‘Annals
of Philosophy’ is an account of some experiments by Dr.
M‘Keever, who took two portions of green wax taper, each
* Communicated by the Author, having been read at the British Asso-
ciation at Exeter, August 20, 1869.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 254, Sept. 1869. Q
218 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Supposed Action
weighing ten grains, and ignited both at the same moment.
One piece was placed in a dark room at 67° F., the other was
exposed to broad sunshine at 78° F. In five minutes
The taper in sunshine lost 8} grains.
The taper in the darkened room lost 91 grains.
The taper, divided into inches, was also burnt in the coloured
portions of the solar spectrum, when it was found that the time
required to burn two inches of taper varied as follows :—
Inthe redmay it toolo tae. Gao
In the ‘green’vay it tooki: “9. S720
Tnothe violet ‘ray 1b tooks 2) 2192 NSho9
At the verge ofthe violet it took 8 57
The conclusion is that the solar rays, in proportion to their
intensity, have the power of retarding to a considerable extent
the process of combustion ; and it is supposed that the chemical
rays act in some way on the portion of oxygen about to combine
with the fuel so as to delay, if not prevent, combination.
Supposing in these experiments the taper was so uniform that
one inch contained precisely the same quantity of matter as an-
other inch, the time occupied in burning was too short to justify
so important a conclusion as Dr. M‘Keever arrived at, whether
the results were taken by measure or by weight.
Every one engaged in photometrical observations must be
aware of the difficulty of getting rid of disturbing causes and
perplexing results. In comparing candles of the same make,
the light is affected both in quantity and economy by a number
of small circumstances, such asthe warmth of the room, the ex-
istence of shght currents of air, the extent to which the wick
curls over when burning, and so on. In testing the quality of
gas, the standard candle defined by Act of Parliament is a sperm
candle of six to the pound, burning at the rate of 120 grains per
hour. From such a standard we get the terms “12-candle gas,”
“]4-candle gas,’ &e. Mr. Sugg, in his ‘Gas Manipulation,’
has pointed out some of the difficulties in obtaining a uniform
standard candle. The wick does not always contain the same
number of strands; they are not all twisted to the same degree
of hardness ; the so-called sperm may vary in composition, one
candle containing a little more wax than another, or variable
quantities of stearime, or of paraffine ; the candle may have been
kept in store a long or a short time; the temperature of the
store-room may have varied considerably, and the temperature
of the room in which it was burnt may have been high or low.
All these circumstances affect the rate of combustion and the
illuminating-power of candles, irrespective of the action of light,
if such action really exist.
of Light on Combustion. 219
I have lately had a good opportunity of testing this action at
the works of Price’s Patent: Candle Company at Battersen: Under
the direction of Mr. Hatcher, the accomplished chemist of the
Company, the greatest possible care is taken to ensure identity
of composition and illuminating-power in candles of the same
name. ‘There has lately been an extensive series of experiments
on the photometrical value of sperm candles, during which, at
my request, Mr. Hatcher was good enough to note the rate of
combustion of such candles in a darkened room, and also in broad
daylight and even in sunshine.
In the first observation, three hard and three soft candles
were burned each for four hours in a dark closet. A similar
set of candles taken from one and the same filling were burned
during the same time in open daylight, partly in sunlight. The
average consumption per hour of each candle was as follows :—
Sperm mathe dark .° . . ., 134 grains.
meoememin tne leht’. ’. . °. V4
No. 2 Composites in thedark. 1383 ,,
» Compositesinthelight. 140 ,,
d3
It must be noticed that the temperature in the light was 72°,
and in the dark 71°. Moreover in the light there was a much
greater motion of the air than in the dark closet. Both these
circumstances would operate in producing a larger consumption
of candle.
Im a second trial with No. 2 composites the results were :—
In the dark . . . 140 grains each candle.
imtiedicht .. ... 4, 134 3 i
In a third, also with No. 2 composites, the results were :—
Mi the dark +. 3. Pl. prams.
iitthGnevheht as 3 xe L208,
In these two trials the flames were protected as far as possible
from currents of air, and in the third trial the temperature both
in the light and in the dark was nearly equal.
The fourth trial was made ona bright sunshiny day with hard
sperm candles, which are less affected by variations of tempera-
ture than the composites. The results were—
In the dark (temp. 81°) . . 544 grains,
or 136 grains per hour.
In the light (temp. 84°) . . 567 grains,
or 142 grains per hour nearly.
It is evident that in this case the inerease of temperature
eaused by the bright sunshine led to an increased consumption
of material. 4
a2
220 =Mr. J. Croll on the supposed greater Loss of Heat
Tt will be seen that in the first and fourth trials there is a
ereater consumption of material in the light than in the dark,
and in the second and third trials the consumption is greater in
the dark than in the light; but im any case the difference 1 1s SO
small, amounting only to from 2 to 7 grains per hour, that it
may fairly be referred to accidental cireumstances, such as differ-
ences in temperature, in currents of air, and in the composition
and make of the candles, the final conclusion to which I am led
being that the direct light of the sun or the diffused light of day
has no action on the rate of burning, or in retarding the com-
bustion of an ordinary candle.
Highgate, N.,
July 1869.
XXVI. On the Opinion that the Southern Hemisphere loses by
Radiation more Heat than the Northern, and the supposed Influ-
ence that this has on Climate. By James Crottu, of the Geo-
logical Survey of Scotland.
HE total amount of heat received from the sun between
the two equinoxes is the same in both halves of the year,
whatever the eccentricity of the earth’s orbit may be. For ex-
ample, whatever extra heat the southern hemisphere may at pre-
sent receive from the sun during its summer months owing to
greater proximity to the sun, is exactly compensated by a cor-
responding loss arising from the shortness of the season; and,
on the other hand, whatever deficiency of heat we in the northern
hemisphere may at present have during our summer half year
in consequence of the earth’s distance “from the sun, 1s also ex-
actly compensated by a corresponding length of season.
But the surface-temperature of our globe depends as much
upon the amount of heat radiated into space as upon the amount
derived from the sun, and it has been thought by some that this
compensating principle holds only true in regard to the heat
directly received from the sun. In the case of the heat lost by
radiation the reverse is supposed to take place. ‘The southern
hemisphere, it is asserted, has not only a colder winter than
the northern in consequence of the sun’s greater distance, but
it has also a longer winter; and this extra loss of heat from
radiation is not compensated by its nearness to the sun du-
ring summer months, for it gains no additional heat from its
proximity. And on the same principle our winter im the north-
ern hemisphere, owing to the less distance of the sun, is not only
warmer than that of the southern hemisphere, but is also at
* Communicated by the Author.
by the Southern than by the Northern Hemisphere. 221
the same time shorter. Consequently it is concluded our hemi-
sphere is not cooled to such an extent as the southern, and thus
the mean temperature of the winter half year, as well as the in-
tensity of the sun’s heat, is affected by a change in the sun’s
distance.
This circumstance was, so far as I am aware, first noticed by
Humboldt in his memoir “ On Isothermal Lines and the Distri-
bution of Heat over the Globe”*. Upon it M. Adhémar has
founded a theory of change of climate, and attributes the great
extension of the ice around the south pole to this extra amount
of heat lost by radiation in consequence of the seven or eight days
of excess in the length of the southern winter over the northern.
“The south pole,” says Adhémar, “loses in one year more heat
than it receives, because the total duration of its nights surpasses
that of the days by 168 hours; and the contrary takes place
for the north pole. If, for example, we take for unity the mean
quantity of heat which the sun sends off in one hour, the heat
accumulated at the end of the year at the north pole will be ex-
pressed by 168, while the heat lost by the south pole will be
equal to 168 times what the radiation lessens it by in one hour, so
that at the end of the year the difference in thé heat of the two
hemispheres will be represented by 336 times what the earth re-
ceives from the sun or loses in an hour by radiation” fF.
Adhémar supposes that about 10,000 years hence, when
our northern winter will occur in aphelion and the southern in
perihelion, the climatical conditions of the two hemispheres
will be reversed; the ice will melt at the south pole, and the
northern hemisphere will become enveloped in one continuous
mass of ice, leagues in thickness, extending down to temperate
regions,
Although I always regarded this cause of Humboldt’s to be
utterly madequate to produce such effects as those attributed
to it by Adhémar, still in former papers { I stated 1t to be a vera
causa which ought to produce some sensible effect on climate.
On a more careful consideration of the whole subject, I now feel
inclined to suspect that the circumstance in question can, accord-
ing to theory, produce little or no effect on the climatic condition
of our globe.
The rate at which the earth radiates into space the heat re-
ceived from the sun depends upon the temperature of its surface ;
and the temperature of its surface (other things being equal)
depends upon the rate at which the heat is received. The greater
the rate at which the earth receives heat from the sun, the greate
* Edinb. Phil. Journ. vol. iv. p. 262 (1821).
+ Révolutions de la Mer, p. 37 (second edition).
{ Phil. Mag. S. 4. vol. xxvin. p.131. Reader, December 2, 1865.
222 Mr. J. Croll on the supposed greater Loss of Heat
will therefore be the rate at which it will lose that heat by radia-
tion. The total quantity of heat received during winter by the
southern hemisphere is exactly equal to that received during
winter by the northern. But as the southern winter is longer
than the northern, the rate at which the heat is received during
that season must be less on the southern hemisphere than on
the northern. Now this less rate, were it not for a circum-
stance presently to be noticed, ought exactly to compensate
for the longer winter. The southern hemisphere loses heat
during a longer period than the northern; but then it does not
lose it so rapidly. Therefore the total quantity of heat lost, were
it not for the circumstance alluded to, would be the same on both
hemispheres. The same mode of reasoning is equally applicable
to the summers of the two hemispheres. The southern sammer
is shorter than the northern; but the heat is more intense, and
the surface of the ground kept at a higher temperature; conse-
quently the rate of radiation into space 1s greater.
When the rate at which a body receives heat is increased, the
temperature of the body rises till the rate of radiation equals the
rate of absorption, after which equilibrium is restored; and when
the rate of absorption is diminished, the temperature falls till
the rate of radiation is brought to equal that of absorption.
But notwithstanding all this, owing to the slow conductivity
of the ground for heat, more heat will pass into it during the
longer summer of aphelion than during the shorter one of peri-
helion; for the amount of heat which passes into the ground
depends on the length of time during which the earth 1s receiving
heat, as well as upon the amount received. Also in hke manner
during the longer winter in.aphelion, more heat will pass out of
the ground than during the shorter onein perihelion. Suppose
the length of the days on the one hemisphere (say the northern)
to be 23 hours, and the length of the nights, say, 1 hour; while
on the other hemisphere the days are 1 hour and the nights 23
hours. Suppose also that the quantity of heat received from the
sun by the southern hemisphere during the day of 1 hour to be
equal to that received by the northern hemisphere during the
day of 23 hours. It is evident that although the surface of the
ground on the southern hemisphere would receive as much heat
from the sun during the short day of 1 hour as the surface of
the northern hemisphere during the long day of 23 hours, yet,
owing to the slow conductivity of the surface for heat, the amount
absorbed by the ground would not be nearly so much on the south-
ern hemisphere as on the northern. The temperature of the
surface during the day, it is true, would be far higher on the
southern hemisphere than on the northern, and consequently
the rate at which the heat would pass into the ground would be
by the Southern than by the Northern Hemisphere. 223
greater on that hemisphere than on the northern; but notwith-
standing the greater rate of absorption resulting from the high
temperature of the surface it would not compensate for the short-
ness of the day. On the other hand, the surface of the ground
on the southern hemisphere would be colder during the long
night of 23 hours than it would be on the northern during the
short night of only 1 hour; and the low temperature of the
ground would tend to lessen the rate of radiation into space.
But the decrease in the rate of radiation would not compensate
fully for the great length of the night. The general and com-
bined result of all those causes would be that a slight accumula-
tion of heat would take place on the northern hemisphere and a
slight loss on the southern. But this loss of heat on the one
hemisphere and gain on the other would not go on accumula-
ting at a uniform rate year by year, as Adhémar supposes.
Of course we are at present simply considering the earth as
an absorber and radiator of heat, without taking into account the
effects of distribution of sea and land and other modifying causes,
and are assuming that everything is-the same in both hemi-
spheres, with the exception that the winter of the one hemi-
sphere is longer than that of the other.
What, then, isthe amount of heat stored up by the one hemi-
sphere and lost by the other? Is it such an amount as to sen-
sibly affect climate ?
The experiments and observations which have been made on
underground temperature afford us a means of making at least
a rough estimate of the amount. And from these it will be seen
that the influence of an excess of seven or eight days in the
length of the southern winter over the northern could hardly
produce an effect that would be sensible.
Observations were made at Edinburgh by Professor J. D.
Forbes on three different substances, viz. Sandstone, Sand, and
Trap-rock. By calculation, we find from the data afforded by
those observations that the total quantity of heat accumulated
in the ground during the summer above the mean temperature
was as follows :—In the sandstone-rock the quantity accumu-
lated was sufficient to raise the temperature of the rock 1° C.
to a depth of 85 feet 6 inches. In the sand the quantity
was sufficient to raise the temperature 1° C. to a depth of 72 feet
6 inches. And in the trap-rock the quantity stored up would
only suffice to raise the temperature 1° C. to a depth of 61 feet
6 inches.
Taking the specific heat of the sandstone per unit volume as
determined by Regnault, at -4623, and that of sand at -3006,
and trap at ‘5283, and reducing all the results to one standard,
viz. that of water, we find that the quantity of heat stored up
924 Mr. J. Croll on the supposed greater Loss of Heat
in the sandstone would, if apphed to water, raise the tempera-
ture of the water 1° C. to a depth of 39 feet 6 inches; that
stored up in the sand would raise the temperature of the water
1° C. to a depth of 21 feet 8 inches, and that stored up in the
irap would raise the water 1° C. to the depth of 32 feet 6 inches.
We may take the mean of these three results as representing
pretty accurately the quantity stored up in the general surface
of the country, This would be equal to 31 feet 3 mches depth
of water raised 1° C. The quantity of heat lost by radiation
during winter below the mean was found to be about equal to
that stored up during summer.
The total quantity of heat per square foot of surface received
by the equator from sunrise till sunset at the time of the equi-
noxes, allowing 22 per cent. for the amount cut off in passing
through the atmosphere, is 1,780,474 foot-pounds. In the
latitude of Edinburgh about 938,460 foot-pounds per square
foot of surface is received, assuming that not more than 22 per
cent. is cut off by the atmosphere. At this rate a quantity of
heat would be received from the sun in two days ten hours (say,
three days) sufficient to raise the temperature of the water 1° C.
to the required depth of 31 feet 3 inches. Consequently the
total quantity of heat stored up during summer in the latitude
of Edinburgh is only equal to what we receive from the sun
during three days at the time of the equmoxes. Three days’
sunshine during the middle of March or September, if applied
to raise the temperature of the ground, would restore all the
heat lost during the entire winter; and another three days’
sunshine would confer on the ground as much heat as is stored
up during the entire summer. But it must be observed that
the total duration of sunshine in winter to that of summer in
the latitude of Edinburgh is only about as 4 to 7. Here is a
difference of two months. But this is not all; the quantity of
heat received during winter is scarcely one-third of that received
during summer; yet notwithstanding this enormous difference
between summer and winter, the ground during winter loses
only about six days’ sun-heat below the maximum amount pos-
sessed by it in summer.
But if what has already been stated is correct, this loss of heat
sustained by the earth during winter is not chiefly owing to the
fact of the longer absence of the sun durmg winter, but to the
decrease in the quantity of heat received in consequence of
his longer absence combined with the cbliquity of his rays
during that season. But in the case of the two hemispheres,
although the southern winter is longer than the northern, the
quantity of heat received by each is the same. But suppo-
sing it held true, which it does not, that the loss of heat sus-
by the Southern than by the Northern Hemisphere. 225
tained by the earth in winter is as much owing to the excess
in the length of the winter nights over those of the summer as to
the deficiency of heat rceccived in winter from that received in
summer, three days’ heat would then in this case be the amount
lost by radiation im consequence of this excess in the length of
the winter nights. The total length of the winter nights to
those of the summer is, as we have seen, about as 7 to4. This
is a difference of nearly 1200 hours. But the excess of the
south polar winter over the north amounts to only about 184
hours. Now if 1200 hours give a loss of three days’ sun-heat, 184.
hours will give a loss of scarcely 54 hours.
It is no doubt true that the two cases are not exactly analo-
gous; but it is obvious that any error which can possibly arise
from regarding them as such cannot materially alter the con-
clusion to which we have arrived. Supposing the effect were
deuble, or even quadruple, what we have concluded it to be, still
it would not amount to a loss of two days’ heat, which could
certainly have little or no influence on climate.
But even assuming all the preceding reasoning to be incor-
rect, and that the southern hemisphere, in consequence of its
longer winter, loses heat to the extravagant extent of 168 hours,
supposed by Adhémar, still this could not materially affect cli-
mate. The climate is influenced by the mere temperature of the
surface of the ground, and not by the quantity of heat or cold
that may be stored up under the surface. The climate is deter-
mined, so far as the ground is concerned, by the temperature
of the surface, and is wholly independent of the temperature
which may exist under the surface. Underground temperature
can only affect climate through the surface. If the surface
could, for example, be kept covered with perpetual snow, we
should have a cold and sterile climate, although the tempera-
ture of the ground under the snow was actually at the boiling-
point. Let the ground to a depth of, say, 40 or 50 feet be de-
prived of an amount of heat equal to that received from the sun
in 168 hours. This could produce little or no sensible effect on
climate ; for, owing to the slow conductivity of the ground for
heat, this loss would not sensibly affect the temperature of the
surface, as 1t would take several months for the sun’s heat to
penetrate to that depth and restore the lost heat. The cold, if
I may be allowed to use the expression, would come so slowly
out to the surface that its effect in lowering the temperature of
the surface would scarcely be sensible. And, again, if we sup-
pose the 168 hours’ heat to be lost by the mere surface of the
ground, the effect would certainly be sensible, but it would only
be so fora few days. We might in this case have a week’s
frozen soil, but this would be all. Before the air had time to
226 Mr. J. Croll on the supposed greater Loss of Heat
become very sensibly affected by the low temperature of the sur-
face the frozen soil would be thawed.
The stormg up of heat or cold in the ground has in reality
very little to do with climate. Some physicists explain, for ex-
ample, why the month of July is warmer than June by referring |
it to the fact that by the month of July the ground has become
possessed of a larger accumulation of heat than it possessed in
June. This explanation is evidently erroneous. The ground in
July certainly possesses a greater store of heat than it did in
June; but this is not the reason why the former month is hotter
than the latter. July is hotter than June because the air (not
the ground) has become possessed of a larger store of heat than
it had in June. And why the air is warmer in July than in
June is this: it is with extreme difficulty that the air can be-
come heated by the direct rays of the sun; itis by means of
contact with the hot surface of the ground and by radiation
from the earth that the air becomes slowly heated. Conse-
quently, although the sun’s heat is greater in June than it is in
July, it is near the middle of July before the air becomes pos-
sessed of its maximum store of heat. We therefore say that
July is hotter than June because the air is hotter in the former
month than in the latter, and consequently the temperature in
the shade is greater in the former month than in the latter.
If the distribution of sea and land were the same in both
hemispheres, it follows, according to theory, that, owing to the
excess of 184 hours in the length of the southern polar winter
over the northern, there would be a very slight loss of heat
on the southern hemisphere and a very slight gain of heat on
the northern. But owing to the present distribution of sea and
land, the very reverse in reality takes place. At present the
northern hemisphere loses by radiation far more heat than the
southern. The reason of this is obvious. The greater part of
the southern hemisphere is occupied by sea. Water is a much
worse radiator than land. There are a great many reasons for
this, afew of which may be enumerated :—(1) The temperature of
the surface of the water does not rise so high under the direct rays
of the sun as that of the surface of the ground. (2) The heat-rays
from the sun penetrate the water to a considerable depth, and in
this case it is only a part of the heat that is received by the surface
of the water, whereas in regard to land all the heat is received
by the surface. The temperature of the surface of the land is
thus raised enormously, and the heat rapidly thrown back into
stellar space; this effect is also increased by the fact that the
specific heat of the land is not one-half that of water. (3) The
ground can only store up heat by the very slow process of con-
duction, whereas water, by the mobility of its particles and
by the Southern than by the Northern Hemisphere, 227
transparency for heat-rays, especially those from the sun, be-
comes heated to a considerable depth rapidly. The quantity of
heat stored up in the ground is comparatively small; the quan-
tity stored up in the ocean is great. (4) The aqueous vapour of
the air acts asa screen to prevent the loss by radiation from
water, while it allows radiation from the ground to pass more
readily into space. (5) The air is heated more rapidly by con-
tact with the hot surface of the ground than it is by contact
with the surface of the ocean. Consequently the heat which
is carried up into the higher regions of the atmosphere and
thrown off into stellar space chiefly comes from the land.
But it may be asked, If the southern hemisphere absorbs far
more heat than the northern, why, then, is its mean tempera-
ture so much below that of the northern? The lower tempera-
ture of the southern hemisphere is evidently due, not to the
loss of heat by radiation as supposed by Adhémar and others,
but to a cause which has been completely overlooxed, viz. to the
normous amount of heat transferred from that hemisphere to
the northern by means of ocean-currents.
The great ocean-currents of the globe take their rise in
three immense streams from the Southern Ocean, which, on
reaching the tropical regions, become deflected in a westerly
direction and flow along the southern side.of the equator for
thousands of miles. A considerable portion of these currents
returns into the Southern Ocean without ever crossing the
equator, but the greater portion of them crosses over to the
northern hemisphere. Since there is then a constant flow of
water from the southern hemisphere to the northern in the form
of surface-currents, it must be compensated by undercurrents of
equal magnitude from the northern hemisphere to the southern.
The currents, however, which cross the equator are far higher
in temperature than their compensating undercurrents; conse-
quently there is a constant transference of heat from the south-
ern hemisphere to the northern. Any currents taking their
rise in the northern hemisphere and flowing across into the
southern are comparatively trifling, and the amount of heat
transferred by them is also trifling. There are one or two cur-
rents of considerable size, such as the Brazilian branch of the
great equatorial current of the Atlantic, and a part of the South
Equatorial Drift-current of the Pacific, which cross the equator
from north to south: but these cannot be regarded as northern
currents ; they are simply southern currents deflected back after
crossing over to the northern hemisphere. The heat which
these currents possess is chiefly obtained on the southern he-
misphere before crossing over to the northern; and although
the northern hemisphere may not gain any temperature by
228 On the Loss of Heat by the Southern Hemisphere.
means of them, it, on the other hand, does not lose much ; for
the heat which they give out in their progress along the southern
hemisphere does not belong to the northern hemisphere.
But after making the fullest allowance for the amount of heat
carried across the equator from the northern hemisphere to the
southern, we shall find, if we compare the mean temperature of
the currents from the southern hemisphere to the northern with
the mean temperature of the great compensating undercurrent
and the one or two small surface-currents, that the mean tempe-
rature of the water crossing from the southern hemisphere to the
northern 1s very much higher than the mean temperature of the
water crossing from the northern to the southern. The mean
temperature of the water crossing the equator from south to north
is probably not under 65° F., while the mean temperature of
the undercurrent is probably not over 39°F. But we must add
to them the surface-currents from north to south. And let us
assume that this will raise the mean temperature of the entire
mass of water flowing from north to south to, say, 45° F. Here
we have a difference of 20° F. Hach cubic foot of water which
crosses the equator will in this case transfer about 1250 units of
heat from the southern hemisphere to the northern. If we had
any means of ascertaining the volume of those great currents
crossing the equator, we should then be able to make a rough
estimate of the total amount of heat transferred from the southern
hemisphere to the northern; but as yet no accurate estimate has
been made on this point. Let us assume, what is probably much
below the truth, that the total amount of water crossing the
equator is at least double that of the Gulf-stream as it passes
through the Strait of Florida, which amount we have already
found to be equal to 133,816,320,000,000 cubic feet daily*.
Taking the quantity of heat conveyed by each cubic foot of water
of the Gulf-stream at 1500 thermal units, it is found that an
amount of heat is conveyed by the current equal to all the heat
that falls within 63 miles on each side of the equatort. Then,
if each cubic foot of water crossing the equator transfers 1250
thermal units, and the quantity of water is double that of the
Gulf-stream, it follows that the amount of heat transferred from
the southern hemisphere to the northern is equal to all the heat
falling within 105 miles on each side of the equator, or equal to
all the heat falling on the southern hemisphere within 210 miles
of the equator. This quantity taken from the southern hemi-
sphere and added to the northern will therefore make a differ-
ence in the amount of heat possessed by the two hemispheres
equal to all the heat which falls on the southern hemisphere
* Phil. Mag. for June 1867, p. 433. Geol. Mag. for April 1869.
tT Ibid, p. 434,
Prof.G. C. Foster on some Lecture-experiments in Electricity. 229
within somewhat more than 420 miles of the equator, supposing
the sun to be vertical over the whole area.
This enormous difference is quite sufficient to account for the
lower mean temperature of the southern hemisphere.
But it may be noticed that although the return currents at the
equator are colder than the direct currents, yet they are not so
in the polar regions. The water which leaves the polar seas is
much colder than the water which replaces it from the tropical
regions.
The general tendency of the great system of ocean-currents is
to cool the equatorial region of the globe and to warm the tem-
perate and polar regions. Also, owing to the present distribu-
tion of sea and land, and partly to the effects on the trade-winds
resulting from the eccentricity of the earth’s orbit**, small as that
eccentricity is at present, there is a constant transference of heat
by means of currents from the southern hemisphere to the
northern. Ocean-currents tend to reduce the enormous differ-
ence of temperature which, according to theory, ought other-
wise to exist between the equator and the polest.
On a former occasion it was shown that aérial currents at the
equator only tend to cool the equator; they do not carry heat
to higher latitudes. But aérial currents in temperate and polar
regions diffuse over the land the heat carried by ocean-currents.
It is the ocean and not the air that conveys the heat from the
tropics to the temperate and polar regions {,
XXVIII. Description of some Lecture-experiments in Electricity.
By Professor G. C. Fostrer, F.R.S.§
mpeue object of this communication is simply to point out
methods, differing somewhat from those commonly de-
scribed in the books, of demonstrating two or three familiar
truths of electricity. The experiments [ am about to describe
may probably be well known under one form or another, espe-
cially to practical electricians, who often have opportunities of
using apparatus and witnessing phenomena which do not fall to
the lot of mere scientific students. Idonot claim for them any
novelty, unless it be as lecture-room illustrations, _
1. Haperiments with the Hlectrophorus.—So far as Iam aware,
the experiments by which the accepted explanation of the action
of the electrophorus is supported refer exclusively to the statical
conditions of the instrument, or, in other words, to the states of
* Phil. Mag. 8S. 4. vol. xxvii. p. 135; vol. xxxu. p. 122.
+ Ibid. vol. xxx. p. 435; vol. xxxiv. p. 128.
{ Ibid. vol. xxxii. pp. 127-130. Geological Magazine for April 1869,
§ Communicated by the Author,
230 Prof. G. C. Foster’s Description of some
electrical equilibrium which it exhibits. The dynamical pro-
cesses by which these statical conditions are brought about are
no doubt, in their main features, very easily traced, and are per-
fectly well known; but, until quite recently, it has been a rare
exception for clectricians to be in possession of the instrumental
means requisite for making them the subject of direct investi-
gation. Now, however, the form of reflecting galvanometer de-
vised by Professor Sir William Thomson is in the hands of a
great many experimenters; and it accordingly seemed to me
that, with the view of calling attention to the ease with which
the transient electric currents accompanying the production and
disappearance of electrostatical charge in various familiar cases
can be observed, and even measured, by means of this instrument,
it might be worth while to describe the following experiments.
An insulating table was made by laying a thin board across
two insulated cylindrical conductors, such as are to be found in
every collection of electrical apparatus. On this was placed a
piece of sheet zinc, to serve as the lower plate of an electropho-
rus, the “cake” of which consisted of a circular piece of vulca-
nized india-rubber, about 15 inches in diameter and 4 inch
thick, and the “cover” of a circular brass plate 12 inches in
diameter, with a glass handle. The lower metal plate was con-
nected, by means of an insulated wire, with one terminal of a
Thomson’s astatic galvanometer having copper-wire coils of up-
wards of 6900 B.A. units resistance, the other terminal of which
was connected with a gas-pipe in the laboratory, so as to make
a good earth-contact. On rubbing the india- rubber with the
hand, the cover having been removed, the galvanometer showed
a deflection which, as soon as it had become steady enough to
be read, amounted to 35 divisions of the scale on the side indi-
cating the passage of a positive current from the earth into the
electrophorus- plate. This deflection gradually diminished while
the rubbing was continued, the spot of light finally returning to
zero. The earth-wire was now removed from the galvanometer
and replaced by a wire connected with the cover: on laying the
cover upon the india-rubber, the galvanometer gave a deflection
of 250 divisions on the opposite side to that observed during
the rubbing. On lifting the cover again, there was a deflection
of 230 divisions in the original direction, followed by a deflection
of 200 to the other side on replacing it. On repeatedly lifting
and replacing the cover, deflections were obtaimed every time,
though gradually diminishing in amplitude in consequence of
the imperfect insulation of the india-rubber.
In a second similar experiment, the maximum deflection during
the rubbing was 40 divisions ; the deflection on putting on the
cover, 260 divisions; on removing it, 240.
Lecture-experiments in Llectricity. 231
These results show very plainly the nature and importance of
the electrical changes which take place in the lower plate of the
electrophorus while the apparatus is being used. Their mean-
ing is too obvious to require further comment.
Equally decisive results are obtained if the lower plate is left
constantly in connexion with the earth through the galvano-
meter, and the cover is repeatedly put on, touched, raised, dis-
charged, and replaced, as in the common way of taking a series
of charges from the electrophorus. On putting on the insu-
lated cover, the galvanometer is not affected; but on afterwards
touching the cover, a strong deflection is obtained in the direc-
tion indicating a downward positive current (that is, a current
through the galvanometer into the ground). When the cover is
raised, there is a deflection to the opposite side, indicating an
upward positive current, which is again inverted if the cover be
replaced without having been discharged; but, if it be touched be-
fore being replaced, no deflection is caused on putting it on again.
The importance of free electrical communication between the
lower plate of the electrophorus and the earth is still further
illustrated by the following experiments. First, the lower plate
was insulated, both during the rubbing and afterwards, and the
cover was connected through the galvanometer with the earth-
wire : On now putting the cover on or taking it off by means of
the glass handle, a deflection of from 5 to 10 divisions was ob-
tained alternately on the two sides of zero. Next, the expert-
ment was repeated, the india-rubber being rubbed the same
number of times, in the same manner as before, but during the
rubbing the lower plate was uninsulated ; this time the deflec-
tion caused by putting on the cover amounted to 180 divisions,
and on taking it off to 127.
A Thomson’s galvanometer also serves very conveniently
for proving the movement of electricity which takes place when
a conducter is charged by statical induction. For example, one
terminal of the galvanometer being connected to earth and the
other with an insulated brass cylinder 2 inches in diameter and
17-5 inches long, a deflection of 10 or 12 divisions was obtained
on bringing the slightly charged cover of the electrophorus near
to the cylinder, and an equal deflection on the opposite side on
removing it. These deflections, which might easily have been
increased by using a body more strongly electrified, could be
reproduced an indefinite number of times by simply moving the
electrophorus-cover towards or away from the brass cylinder.
2. Comparative Measurement of the Electrical Capacity of Con-
ductors.—The quantity Q of electricity which passes into or out
of any insulated conductor, when put into electrical communi-
cation with any source of constant electrical potential, is pro-
232 Prof. G. C. Foster’s Description of some
portional to the difference of potential EK between the insulated
conductor and the source, and to a coefficient S called the elec-
tric capacity of the conductor and depending on the extent and
disposition of its surface, and its position relatively to other con-
ductors. This relation is very easily proved by means of a
Thomson’s galvanometer connected with a Leyden battery and
a galvanic battery in the way shown in the figure.
= galvanometer.
B=galvanic battery.
C=Leyden battery.
K=key.
E=earth-contact.
E
For example, a Leyden battery of six jars, each jar having a
diameter of 18 centims. and being coated to a height of 24 cen-
tims. from the bottom, was charged and discharged through the
galvanometer by four Grove’s cells arranged in series. The sum
of the deflections on both sides of zero, due to the charge and
discharge, was (as the mean of several experiments) 88°8, the
highest reading being 90, the lowest 88. When three of the jars
were removed, so as to leave a battery of only half the previous
capacity, the mean reading of several experiments was 45:1, the
maximum being 45°5 and “the minimum 44:5.
3. Comparative Measurement of Electromotive Force.—Pre-
cisely the same arrangement of apparatus and mode of experi-
menting that serves for comparing the capacities of conductors,
also serves for comparing the electromotive forces of batteries ;
but, in order to make the comparison more accurate, it is ad-
visable to substitute a conductor of greater capacity for the Ley-
den battery mentioned in the last paragraph, unless the electro-
motive forces to be compared are rather considerable. In the
following experiments the condenser of a medium-sized Ladd’s
induction-coil was used.
When the condenser was charged and discharged through the
galvanometer by one Grove’s cell, the sum of the readings on
Se
ane
a
\
Lecture-experiments in Electricity. 233
the two sides of zero was
252 divisions ;
with two Grove’s cells, the sum of the readings was
507 divisions.
Divisions.
With one Daniell’s cell, the sum of the readings was 152
fvismeanother Daniell’s cell, itwas; .. 2 . . » 155
ol 90) alee eee a aS 307
With the two Daniell’s cells connected in series, the sum of the
opposite deflections was 307 divisions.
These numbers give, as the mean ratio of the electromotive
force of one Grove’s cell to that of one Daniell’s cell,
J07 2007 —1-Go = 1.
According to Poggendorff, the ratio, as determined by his me-
thod of compensation, is 1°68 : 1.
The mode of comparison by means of the galvanometer and
condenser may be rendered more accurate by increasing the ¢a-
pacity of the latter, so as to get larger readings and so diminish
the relative importance of the errors of observation. The above
numbers, however, which are of course given merely for the sake
of illustration, do not represent the limit of accuracy attainable
with the apparatus I employed: by simply altering the position
of the adjusting magnet of the galvanometer, so as to render the
suspended magnets more perfectly astatic, a deflection of 355
was obtained instead of 307. For proving to a class the way in
which the electromotive force of a galvanic battery depends upon
the mode in which the cells composing it are connected together,
and other fundamental facts of a like nature, this method can
easily be made abundantly accurate, and is probably as conve-
nient and rapid as any of the methods in common use.
4, Method of demonstrating the existence of the Inverse and
Direct Extra-currents.—The only method of rendering distinctly
evident the retardation in the establishment of electric currents
in coiled conductors, or Faraday’s extra-current on making bat-
tery-contact, which I have found described in any of the ordinary
text-books of physics, is one due to Edlund, and requires the use
of a differential galvanometer. By an arrangement of apparatus,
which may be regarded as a modification of that employed by
Edlund, it is easy to show the extra-current both on making
and breaking the circuit upon an ordinary galvanometer. This
arrangement will be understood by reference to the figure, where
Phil. Mag. 8, 4. Vol. 38. No. 254. Sept. 1869. R
234 Description of some Lecture-eaperiments in Electricity.
B represents a galvanic battery of one
or two cells, K a key for making and
breaking the battery circuit, G the gal-
vanometer, C and C! two coiled conduc-
tors, with or without iron cores, and R
and Ri two zigzag or uncoiled conduc-
tors, of which the resistances are so ad-
justed relatively to the resistances of C
and C! that, when the battery-contact
is permanently maintained, no current
passes through the galvanometer. Then,
on completing the circuit, there is a
temporary deflection of the galvanome-
ter due to the inverse extra-current,
and on breaking it there is an opposite
deflection due to the direct extra-cur-
rent. The reason of this is easily seen.
Supposing p to be the positive and n
the negative pole of the battery, when
the key K is pressed down the current
is immediately established in the circuit
BRadR'B, causing a corresponding deflection of the galvano-
meter ; after a very short interval, however, the current is also
established in the circuit BCdaC'B, and brings the galvano-
meter-needle to rest. On raising the key the current ceases in-
stantaneously in the uncoiled conductors R and R,, but continues
for a short time in the coiled conductors C and C’, traversing
the galvanometer from 6 to a and causing a momentary deflec-
tion in the opposite direction to that produced on making the
battery-circuit. Using for the conductors C and C! the primary
wire of a medium-sized Ladd’s mduction-coil and the wire of a
straight electromagnet, and uncoiled German-silver wires for
the conductors R and R/, I obtained with one cell of Grove’s bat-
tery a swing of from 50° to 60° on a large astatic galvanometer
with heavy needles 8 inches long on completing the battery-cir-
cuit, and an equal swing in the opposite direction on breaking
contact after the needles had come to rest. ‘The directions of
the swings were such as to indicate that the current both com-
menced and ceased more suddenly in the uncoiled than in the
coiled conductors.
The only special precaution that need be pointed out in order
to ensure the success of this experiment, is that the resistances
of the several conductors shall be so small, and their mass so
great, that they may‘not become sensibly heated and so have
their relative resistances changed during the passage of the
current.
Geological Society. 239
It will be seen that the combination of conductors that has
been described is essentially the same as that constituting Wheat-
stone’s “ electrical balance ;” in fact the whole experiment con-
sists in purposely exaggerating an effect which, in comparing
electrical resistances by means of that arrangement, it is neces-
sary to get rid of by a well-known artifice in the mode of making
contact.
XXVIII. Proceedings of Learned Societies.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 164.]
December 23rd, 1868.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
VHE following communications were read :—
1. “ On the so-called ‘ Kozoonal’ Rock.” By Prof. W. King and
Dr. T. H. Rowney. Communicated by Sir R. I. Murchison, Bart.,
OCB: B.RS., V.P.G:S.
The authors noticed that, since the reading of their former commu-
nication in 1866, further descriptions of Hozoon have been published
by Hochstetter, Giimbel, Carpenter, Dawson, and Logan ; and aftera
few words on those by the first two, they proceeded to criticise the
others more fully, intimating that the English and Canadian observers
have by no means mastered all the difficulties of the subject, nor
answered the objections brought forward by them. In the course of
these remarks, Messrs. King and Rowney, objecting to the specimen
from Tudor, of which they have seen the photograph, and which was
described and figured in 1867 (Q. J. G.S. No. 91), suggested that
it is nothing more than the result of infiltration of carbonate of
lime, with entangled impurities, between two layers of the sandy
limestone. They also stated their belief that the term ‘“ Hozoonal”’
is applicable to any of the ophites they describe, inasmuch as, it was
contended, the structure of the latter is similar to that of the Cana-
dian rock containing the so-called Hozoon.
The authors then proceeded to treat of the supposed foranunferal
characters of “ Eozoon.” First, as to the “ cell-wall” or “ nummu-
line layer,” they advanced repeated evidence of the value of their
former proofs that the typical form is due to aciculate serpentine
(or modified chrysotile) of inorganic origin, having examined, be-
sides others, a Canadian specimen presented by Dr. Carpenter.
Secondly, nothing new was adduced with regard to the mineral
structure of the so-called “intermediate skeleton.” ‘Thirdly, in proof
that the “chamber-casts” are not of organic origin, the authors
referred to their former work, and stated that chondrodite and pyral-
lolite may be added to the list of minerals that occur, as such, disse-
minated in limestones. They thought it strange that a carbonate, as
well as a silicate, should not have been found filling the so-called
R2
236 Geological Society :—Messrs. Rowney and King on the
chambers; and they decidedly refused to accept the Tudor spe-
cimen having some tubuli filled with calcite, to which they suppose
Dawson refers when speaking of chambers filled with calcite, as
a case in point; they were unacquainted with any published in-
stances of this mineral being an infilling. Fourthly, reiterating
their observations on the so-called “ canal-system,” they suggested
that the globoso-vermicular bodies noticed by Dawson and Giimbel
may be metaxite; and they insisted on the difficulty of explaining
the presence of isolated unbroken tube-casts in patches of pure
limestone. The Madoc specimen, described by Dawson as having its
“canals” and “ chambers” filled with calcite, was next referred to ;
and it was argued that the so-called calcite, both in this and in
another specimen, described by Carpenter, is doubtful and not
proved; for they had not been able to confirm the accuracy of the
observations in these cases, having examined a Canadian specimen,
presented by Dr. Carpenter as an example of the kind, which had in
it ‘“ homogeneous and structureless forms of the canal-system” that
were not dissolved in the decalcification. Fifthly, the organic nature
of the so-called ‘‘ stolons” was regarded as quite disproved. .Minera-
logical considerations of Kozoonal rocks were next entered upon ;
and from the study of Canadian specimens, and of others from Con-
nemara and Neybiggen (?), described in full, the authors concluded
that they fully prove the “ canal-system,” ‘‘ chamber-casts,” and
“ nummuline layer” to be structural and inorganic modifications of
serpentine—that the whole have originated from the change or waste
of granules, plates, &c. of serpentine; and they incline to the belief
that the calcite of the “intermediate skeleton ” is pseudomorphic
after one or other form of serpentine by infiltration and replacement.
The rounded form of the granular masses of chondrodite, cocco-
lite, &c. in some limestones was also referred by the authors to the
gradual removal of their surfaces by deep-seated hydrothermal
agency.
It was then argued that the organic nature of Hozoon cannot be
supported by the cumulative evidence afforded by the combination
of foraminiferal features ; for these features, combined and due to
purely mineral paragenesis, had occurred to the authors in certain
ophites, though some are wanting in other ophites, just as they
are not always present in the Eozoonal rock of Canada.
Serpentine has been described as having been deposited in the
cavities of Hozoon, and having taken the place of its sareode; but
the authors criticised all the quoted analogies of such a precipitation
of any siliceo-magnesian substance, disbelieved them, and put aside
glauconitic infiltration as beside the question.
Considered geologically, with reference to its occurrence in a
metamorphic rock, the authors regarded the Hozoon as an organic
impossibility ; and they asked why it should never be found in any-
thing but crystalline or semicrystalline rocks—in ophites or ophi-
calcites of widely different ages. Particularly they found eozoonal
structure in the Liassic ophite of Skye; and this they described in full.
They criticised Sterry Hunt’s change of opinion, who used to think
so-called § Eozoonal Rocks.’ 237
that the serpentinous rocks of Canada were once earthy amorphous
silicates, and afterwards metamorphosed, but who now supposes they
were deposited in a crystalline state; and they asked why, if so, may
not all the Laurentian rocks have been so deposited? In conclusion,
they totally denied that Eozoonal structure has anything to do with
any organism ; and repeated that, like all analogous conditions of
serpentine, chondrodite, &c., it is of purely mineral origin.
Dr. Carpenter need not repeat the grounds on which he regarded
this as an organic structure. He objected to criticisms unless founded
on examination of actual specimens. Sir Wm. Logan had been first
led to regard the Hozoon as organic by finding alternations of cal-
careous and siliceous layers in various minerals. A specimen which
Sir William had brought from Canada contained much iron, and had
the canal system wonderfully preserved ; and it presented this cha-
racter—that the larger branches were infiltrated with serpentine,
and the middle branches with sulphide of iron, while the smallest
branches were filled with carbonate of lime, of the same nature as
the matrix. It was only under a favourable light that these smaller
tubes were visible, as the calcite in them was of the same crystalline
character as the surrounding network. ‘This was conclusive evidence
of the structure not arising from the mere infiltration of one chemical
substance into another. Moreover this foreign matter could not
penetrate the cleavage-planes.
When cut, some specimens had given out a strong odour of musk,
which they to some extent still retained. This, again, seemed to be
evidence of organic origin. He regretted that Prof. King had not
examined the large collection of specimens in his (Dr. Carpenter’s)
collection. Recent Foraminifera, when decalcified, exhibited pre-
cisely the same asbestiform layer round the chamber-cast as the
fossil Hozoon. Different genera of Foraminifera in recent seas were
infiltrated by different minerals, which presented some analogy with
the condition of the fossil under consideration. In the great seas
of the present day, at various depths and temperatures, was a large
extension of sarcodic substance, and in this there were Rhizopods
with and without shells, but of similar low structure; and such
forms might have continued in existence through any length of time,
so that the occurrence of Hozoon'so far down as Jurassic times could
afford no matter for surprise. He would not be astonished even if
such a structure as Hozoon were found in deep-sea dredgings of the
present day.
The Prestpent mentioned the Bathybius, which he has found
with coccoliths and other forms in deep-sea soundings. In some
newer specimens of Atlantic mud given him by Dr. Carpenter he
had found Bathybius forming a sort of network, somewhat similar
to the plasmodia of botanists. He could not call it either plant or
animal. It was, however, a living substance, susceptible of appa-
rently indefinite growth. This removed one of the difficulties in
believing in the wide extension of the Hozoon. The Hydrographer
had since sent him the soundings taken by Captain Shortland in
‘The Hydra,’ In soundings from 2800 fathoms in the Arabian
238 Geological Society :—
Gulf Bathybius was plentiful; and over an area 7000 miles long the
same organism occurred in abundance. He agreed in thinking it
possible that such organisms might have gone on living from the
earliest geological times.
In answer to Prof. Ramsay, the Presiprnt stated that the sound-
ings in which the Bathybius occurs alone, as analyzed by Dr. Frank-
land, contained 14 per cent. of nitrogenous organic matter.
2. “Notes on the Geology of China, with more especial refer-
ence to the provinces of the Lower Yungtsi.” By Thomas W,. Kings-
mill, Esq.
The sedimentary deposits of the south of China were described as
commencing at the base with a series of coarse grits and sandstones,
having a thickness of about 12,000 feet, and overlain conformably
by limestones and shales (with coal in the lower part), attaining a
thickness of between 6000 and 8000 feet. The whole of these
rocks were described by the author as the ‘“ Tung-ting Series.”
In the Nanking district this formation is succeeded by sandstones,
erits, and conglomerates, which the author has grouped together
under the name of the ‘“‘Chung-shan Series.” Its uppermost member
contains beds of coal, and possesses an unknown thickness; but the
remaining beds are together about 2400 feet thick. Mr. Kingsmill
described in detail the geological relations and geographical extension
-of these rock-masses; he then gaye a sketch of the superficial
deposits, which occupy an important position in the geology of
China, and from the older of which Mammalian bones and teeth
have been obtained ; and he concluded by stating that he had been
uniformly unsuccessful in his frequent searches for traces of glacial
action.
January 13th, 1869.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. On Hyperodapedon.” By Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
Pres. G.S.
The author described the characters of the genus Hyperodapedon,
dwelling especially upon those presented by the head and dentition.
The head presents indications of a bone forming a second zygomatic
arch on each side; the upper jaw is produced and bent downwards,
forming a strong beak; and the lower jaw is produced on each side
of the symphysis into a pointed process, between which the decurved
beak of the upper jaw is received. The maxillary and palatine teeth
are arranged in rows, and present some resemblance to the large nails
in the sole of a boot; they are inserted on each side of the upper jaw
upon the sloping sides of a deep groove, and are worn down and
polished by the action of the mandibular teeth, which form a con-
tinuous and very close single series along the upper edge of the
mandible. The author remarked upon this peculiarity of arrangement,
which, he said, enables the teeth of Hyperodapedon to be recog-
nized wherever they may occur. The vertebrae have their centra
slightly concave at each extremity. The other known parts of the
Prof. Huxley on Hyperodapedon. 239
skeleton described by the author were the ribs, scapula, coracoid,
and part of the humerus, the pelvis, femur, and proximal ends of
the tibia and fibula, and the abdominal false ribs, which are largely
developed in this Reptile.
The author declared the affinities of Hyperodapedon to be de-
cidedly Lacertilian. Its nearest fossil ally is the Triassic genus
Rhynchosaurus, and in the present day its type of structure is
most closely reproduced by the singular genus Sphenodon (= Hat-
teria) of New Zealand. In its habits Hyperodapedon was probably
terrestrial, or perhaps fluviatile; in Warwickshire and India it is
associated with Labyrinthodonts. The remains hitherto met with
do not justify the formation of more than one species, Hyperoda-
pedon Gordoni; and the genus ranges from Britain to Central India,
indicating a great extent of dry land during the period to which it
belongs.
Specimens of Hyperodapedon from the Trias of Warwickshire,
collected many years ago by Dr. Lloyd, were exhibited; but
in discussing the question whether Hyperodapedon is to be re-
garded as determining the Triassic age of any rock in which it may
be found, the author referred to the fact that Crocodiles bridge over
the whole interval between the Mesozoic and existing conditions,
and Bery« in like manner connects the Cretaceous with our present
fish-fauna. As Hyperodapedon is at least as nearly allied to the
existing genus Sphenodon (= Hatteria) as it is to the Triassic hyn-
chosaurus, the author inquires why may it not have inhabited the
dry land of the Permian, Carboniferous, or Devonian period? Car-
rying the idea thus raised still further, he indicates, from certain rela-
tions between the Reptilian faune of Kurope, 8. Africa, and India at
the period when Hyperodapedon lived in the first and third of these
localities, not only that there must then have been a vast extent of
continental land, but that this may have persisted with but little
change in the nature of its inhabitants, while the fauna of the
neighbouring seas underwent great alterations. He remarked that
our geological chronology rested too much upon a marine founda-
tion, and that such a persistence of dry land as was now suggested
by him was not only possible, but, in the present case, probable.
He suggested the use of Conybeare’s term ‘“ Poikilitic” for the
series of deposits containing the remains of terrestrial and fluviatile
plants and animals and corresponding with the marine beds deno-
minated Permian and Triassic, Finally, the author remarked upon
the important light thrown upon the question of the geographical
distribution of animals as affected by the discovery of these Reptiles
and other recently detected fossils, and upon the interest attaching to
them from their high grade of development. The five great classes of
Vertebrata were represented during the “ poikilitic” epoch by
species so high in the scale that we can hardly doubt their having
been preceded by other forms, so that some of us may hope to sce
the fossil remains of a Siluriam mammal.
Sir R. I. Murcutson argued in favour of the overwhelming im-
portance of paleontological evidence, and maintained that /Hypero-
Oi
240 Geological Society:—
dapedon was Triassic. He objected to the use of the term “ poiki-
litic,” which was merely indicative of the spotted character of the
beds, and protested against the mingling of the Permian and Triassic
series.
2. “On the Locality of a new Specimen of Hyperodapedon onthe
South Coast of Devon.” By W. Whitaker, Esq., F.G.S.
The author described the section presented by the South Devon
coast westward from the great landslip at Dowlands. The cliffs here
show Rheetic beds passing down into Red Marls of Upper Triassic
age, which have greenish layers among them, favouring the view that
the Rheetic beds might as well be classed with the Trias as with .
the Lias. Below these beds are Red Marls and Sandstones; and at
Budleigh Salterton a bed of quartzite pebbles occurs. West of the
Exe the cliffs are of sandstone with layers of breccia; and beyond
Dawlish the breccia gradually predominates, until towards Teign-
mouth the cliffs are almost wholly formed of it. This breccia forms
the base of the New Red of Devonshire. The thickness of the whole
series is several thousand feet; Mr. Pengelly estimates that 1t may
be four miles or more. The jaw of Hyperodapedon referred to by
Professor Huxley was found in the sandstone on the left bank of
the Otter, immediately above the Budleigh-Salterton pebble-bed, in
the lower part of the uppermost bed of sandstone, which, with the
other sandstones and marl-beds, the author regarded as belonging
to the Keuper. He referred to the opinions of Mr. Pengelly and Mr.
Ormerod, and suggested that the breccias might possibly be of Per-
mian age.
Sir Cuaruus Lyett, referring to the occurrence of Hyperodapedon
with Stagonolepis and Telerpeton in the uppermost sandstones of
Elgin, remarked that he came to the conclusion in 1859 that these
beds were Triassic, and that Mr. Symonds had in that year stated
them to be the equivalents of the Rhynchosawrus-sandstones of
Shropshire.
Professor Ramsay regarded the Red Marls and Sandstones de-
scribed by Mr. Whitaker as Keuper, and the lower members of his
section as of Permian age. He confirmed Prof. Huxley’s views as
to the existence of a great extent of continental land at the epoch
when Hyperodapedon and the Reptiles associated with it were in
existence, and remarked that these Reptiles inhabited the shores of
the great salt lakes of the Triassic land. He objected to the use of
the term ‘“ poikilitic,” and remarked that if the idea embodied by
Prof. Huxley under it were to be accepted, it would have to be
extended to all terrestrial deposits from the Silurian period to the
present day.
Dr. Ginrner referred to his description of Sphenodon (=Hat-
teria), and remarked that in that genus there are uncinate processes
on the ribs, asin Birds, which do not exist in Hyperodapedon. He
remarked upon the resemblance of the beak in the latter to that of
the Tortoises, especially Trionya, and suggested that the jaws might
have had a horny covering,
Mr. W. H. Baily on Graptolites and allied Fossils in Ireland. 241
Dr. Mrryon inquired as to the implantation of the teeth in the
jaws of Hyperodapedon, and suggested that the position and direc-
tion of the orbits were not accordant with terrestrial habits, and
also that the absence of processes on the ribs indicated a flexibility
of the body consistent with a fluviatile mode of life.
Prof. Huxtey showed that no conclusion could be drawn from the
want of processes on the ribs or the position of the orbits as to the
habits of the animal, and remarked that the processes in Sphenodon
were not anchylosed to the ribs; he considered it possible, but not
probable, that the jaws had a horny covering. He stated that in
using the term “ poikilitic,’ he was desirous of indicating that,
while several marine formations with changing forms of life suc-
ceeded each other, the terrestrial fauna may, in certain cases, have
been continuous. He believed that terrestrial forms were at least
as persistent as marine.
Dr. CarrutHErs remarked that the Permian vegetation showed
mesozoic affinities, and in fact that the commencement of the Meso-
zoic flora was to be sought in the Permian.
January 27th, 1869.—J. Gwyn Jeffreys, Esq., F.R.S., Treasurer,
in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. “ Notes on Graptolites and allied Fossils occurring in Ireland.”
By W. H. Baily, F.G.S. [First Paper. |
After remarking that the Graptolites are now generally regarded
as belonging to the class Hydrozoa, the author detailed the various
localities in the south of Ireland in which they had been found, and
indicated the species occurring in each place. The localities are
situated in the counties of Waterford, Wexford, Clare, and Tipperary ;
and the species are as follows :—
Didymograpsus sextans, Hall. Cladograpsus gracilis, Hall,
elegans, Carr. (=D. flaccidus, | Diplograpsus pristis, Hs.
Hall?, Nich.). mucronatus.
caduceus, Salt. -—— teretiusculus.
— -- Forchhammeri. dentatus, Brongn.
Graptolithus (sagittarius) Hisin- | Climacograpsus bicornis, Had/.
geri, Carr. Dicranograpsus ramosus, Hail.
Sedgwicki. Cyrtograpsus gracilis, Hal/.
tenuis.
hamatus, Bavly.
priodon.
The most widely distributed of allis Diplograpsus pristis, to which
the author thinks D. mucronatus and dentatus probably belong. ‘The
fossils described by the author as T’heca cometoides may probably be
the gonothecee of D. pristis, as had been suggested by Mr. Carruthers.
2. “ Notice of Plant-remains from beds interstratified with the
Basalt in the county of Antrim.” By W. H. Baily, Esq., F.G.S.
The deposit referred to by the author was discovered by the late
M.G. V. Du Noyer in cuttings of the Northern Railway of Ireland
near Antrim ; it consists of a layer from 4 to 8 inches in thickness,
separated by a conglomerate bed of 10 or 12 feet from the under-
lying basalt, and by earthy beds of about equal thickness from the
242 Geological Society.
superficial basaltic layer. The remains are imbedded in a Red Clay,
and associated with heematitic iron ore.
The author regarded a large cone as that of a true Pimus, and
branches of another coniferous tree as belonging to a Sequoia nearly
allied to S. Sternbergi, Heer; of this a smali imbricated cone might
possibly be the fruit. Other fragments of Coniferee seem to belong
to Cupressites or Tuaites. The fossils consist chiefly of leaves of
true Dicotyledonous plants. The author identified some of these
with species of Fthamnites, Olea, Fagus, and Quercus. Leaves of
endogenous plants, such as Sedges and Grasses, occur not unfre-
quently. A large mass of fossil wood of dicotyledonous structure
was obtained from the hematitic conglomerate. Carpolithes are also
found. The vegetable remains are accompanied by a few elytra of
Beetles.
The author remarked that these remains seem to differ as a group
from those of the island of Mull. Their alliance appears to be with
Mid-European forms, and they are certainly of Upper-Tertiary age,
probably Miocene.
3. Remarks upon the Basalt Dykes of the Mainland of India
opposite to the Islands of Bombay and Salsette.” By G. T. Clark,
Esq., F.G.S.
The author described the general features of the country referred
to, and stated that the dykes which traverse it vary from | or 2 to
100 or 150 feet in width, and often extend many miles. ‘They are
all basaltic, with a tendency to prismatic structure, but neyer co-
lumnar. The adjacent Trap is but little modified, only somewhat
hardened, so as to resist weathering; by this means long, narrow
ridges, more or less deeply furrowed aboye by the weathering of the
basalt dyke itself, are produced. ‘The general direction of the dykes
is parallel to the lines of volcanic vents; those near the main axis of
the Concan lying N. and 8., and those near the subordinate axis in
the Malseji valley, about E.N.E. and W.S.W. They run nearly
straight, and have their faces usually parallel, but sometimes swell out
or contract, or include a rider. The author considered that these
dykes were formed probably during the latest periods of volcanic
action in Western India. They probably belong, in his opinion, to
two periods, as dykes of different grain frequently intersect each
other. The dykes running N.E. and 8.W. often traverse and slightly
dislocate those lying more N. and §., and are probably of later date.
4, “ On Auriferous Rocks in South-eastern Africa.’ By Dr.
Sutherland,
Fourteen years ago the author expressed the opinion that gold
would be found in the metamorphic rocks of Natal. A few months
since Mr. Parsons found this metal by washing the iron-sand of
some of the southern rivers of the colony. The gold is in micro-
scopic rounded grains. Dr. Sutherland considers that the gold is
diffused as minute particles in the granite and gneiss underlying the
Silurian rocks of South Africa.
These old gneissic rocks are yery much contorted, include ex-
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 243
tensive veins and lenticular masses of quartz, and are traversed by
basalts. The Silurian strata, resting unconformably on the gneiss,
haye been invaded byjgneous matter (which is never granitic), and,
though generally horizontal, are frequently flexuous, and in some
places greatly faulted, to the extent of even 1000 feet, together
with the gneissic rocks beneath. These latter have been deeply
eroded by the rivers, frequently to the depth of 500-1000 feet, and
even of 3000 feet in some valleys; and in the alluvia of these
valleys the gold occurs. The valleys have sometimes evidently com-
menced in great displacements, forming “ valleys of elevation,” on
which the denuding agency has been operating ever since.
In certain mountains in the basin of the St. John’s River,
Natal, dioritic rock traverses the secondary strata; and along the
line of contact it contains copper-ores with 100 grains of gold to
the ton.
Mr. Davip Forzns was glad to find that Dr. Sutherland corrobo-
rated his views as to the occurrence of gold in two ways :-—
1. In auriferous granite, as in Wicklow and elsewhere.
2. In eruptive diorite, a basic rock without free quartz, and cer-
tainly of postoolitic date, almost always accompanied by copper
veins. Most Californian alluvial deposits of gold were derived from
this class of rocks.
In constructing some of the railways of South America the granite
was found to be so soft, from decomposition, that 1t could be cut with
the pick and spade; and this softened granite, when washed, pro-
duced gold.
Prof. T. Rupert Jones considered that, by means of Dr. Suther-
land’s communication, the Laurentian and Silurian rocks were now,
for the first time, to be recognized as existing beneath the Dicy-
nodon-rocks of the Natal ridge.
XXIX. Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
NOTE ON ELECTROLYTIC POLARIZATION. BY PROFESSOR TAIT.
| HAD just obtained one of Sir W. Thomson’s most recent forms
of quadrant electrometer, and it occurred to me that ¢his must be
the proper instrument for determining polarization, as its indications
are not affected by electric resistance, and give directly (that is,
without assuming the truth of Ohm’s law for reverse electromotive
forces, and the consequent necessary determinations of resistance)
the quantities required. The method employed by Wheatstone,
Poggendorff, Buff, and others assumes that the whole electromotive
force in the circuit is the algebraic sum of those of the decomposing
battery and of the electrodes—an assumption whose truth some may
consider to require proof, and which it is certainly useful to verify
by an independent process. Again, after the decomposing action
has ceased, the resistance of the films (of gas or oxide) which are
deposited on the electrodes may change in value, ‘That neither of
,
‘
|
‘
24.4 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
these circumstances produces any marked effect is, however, amply
proved by the numbers which follow, which, though given only as
first approximations, are within the limits of difference of the results
given (from galvanometric determinations) by former experimenters.
As the polarization in most cases diminishes with very great rapi-
dity from the instant of breaking contact with the decomposing
battery, and as (for this and other reasons) the mode of measurement
by the first swing of the index-needle of the electrometer is not de-
serving of much confidence, it was necessary to devise a process by
which the electrometer could be charged at leisure up to any desired
potential, and then, for an instant only, placed in connexion with
the electrodes. ‘The apparatus I employed bears a certain analogy
to the Wippe of Poggendorff, but differs from it in some essential
particulars, both of construction and mode of working.
In aplate of vulcanite, or other good insulator, ten holes are cut
as below, and filled with mercury. ‘Those marked E are connected
with pairs of opposite quadrants of the electrometer, P with the
electrodes, B, with the decomposing battery, and B, with the auxi-
liary (or charging) battery. Also metallic connexion, as indicated
in the sketch, is permanently established between the two central
holes and the holes connected with the electrometer.
The rocker consists of four wires, supported on an insulating bar
of vulcanite, the two outermost having three points, the middle one
longer than the others, and the two inner being similar, but wanting
one of the extremities. When the four middle stems dip vertically
into the four central mercury-cups, the other stems do not reach the
mercury in any of the other six cups. If the instrument be inclined
to the right the four prongs enter the holes to the right, thus simul-
taneously connecting the electrodes with the decomposing battery,
and the electrometer with the charging battery. When the instrument
inclines to the left, the electrodes are shunted from the decomposing
battery on to the electrometer, the latter having just before, by the
same action, been cut off from the charging battery, and thus left
charged.
The modus operandi is simply this :—Leave the rocker leaning to
the right by its own gravity, decomposition and polarization going
on; adjust the wires B, to different points ina wet string (or a nar-
row canal of water) closing the circuit of the charging battery;
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 245
work the rocker quickly to the left, and allow it instantly to fall
back again-—a process which need not occupy more than a small
fraction of a second, yet which must not be performed too quickly,
on account of the inertia (small as it is) of the needle and mirror of
the electrometer. If the deflection of the electrometer be suddenly
increased or diminished by this action, slide one of the wires B,
along the wet string, a little further from or nearer to the other,
and rock again,—continuing this process till a charge is found which
leaves the electrometer at rest when the rocking to and fro is per-
formed. Reverse a commutator attached to the wires E, and repeat
the operation. The difference of the scale-readings in these two
cases gives a number proportional to the electromotive force of the
polarized plates—(I say difference, because the scales commonly
used with Sir W. Thomson’s instruments are, to avoid confusion,
graduated from one end to the other, as they ought to be, instead
of being graduated opposite ways from the middle). ‘To enable this
measure to be reduced to absolute units, a normal Daniell’s cell was
applied at intervals, during each day’s work, directly to the elec-
trodes of the electrometer, then reversed; and the difference of the
readings was tabulated as representing its electromotive force.
In the other experiments I used a plate of gutta percha in which
the ten holes were bored, but for a time discontinued its use on sus-
pecting that it sometimes led to irregular working of the apparatus
by imperfect insulation. ‘The cups were then separately mounted
on insulators 3 inches high; but this was not found to be an im-
provement of any consequence, and the holes are now made ina
small, but thick, plate of vulcanite.
In this note the numbers presented must be looked upon only as
first approximations; but the apparatus has now been carefully con-
structed by an instrument-maker, and Mr. Dewar has begun an
elaborate series of experiments with it, from which valuable results
may soon be expected. In the trials which have as yet been made
we employed a temporary apparatus, rudely built up of wires, seal-
ing-wax, and gutta percha. We have rather been endeavouring to
determine whether the process, complicated as it is by the inertia of
the moveable part of the electrometer, the quickness with which the
rocking can be conducted, and the rate at which the polarization
begins to diminish as soon as the polarized plates are detached from
the decomposing battery, is capable of being made to give good re-
sults, than in actually attempting to getsuch. So far as I can yet
see, the first of these complications is alone likely to cause any
serious embarrassment; and should such be the case, which I do not
anticipate, a form of experiment a little more laborious than that
above described, and which I have already once or twice tried, seems
to be well adapted to meet it.
The following are, for the most part, means of a great number of
determinations. ‘The electrolyte was usually dilute commercial sul-
phuric acid, 1 part acid to 10 of water; and to the lead and other
impurities it was found to contain we may ascribe the fact that the
results were not very accordant from day to day, so that it was not
SSS mes
246 Intelligence und Miscellaneous Articles.
easy to decide how to take the means.. Mr. Dewar is now working
with substances chemically pure, and obtains much more constant
results.
The unit employed is the electromotive force of an ordinary Da-
niell’s cell. The Grove’s cells used in the electrolysis had (very
constantly) an electromotive force about 1°74 as great.
I. Freshly-burned Platinum Plates.
eS of Grove’s cells in \ 1 9 3 4 9
ecomposing battery
Resulting polarization .. 1°64 gs 2°01 2°12 2°30
II. Platinum +, Palladium —.
Gelisoleatemeh, Aneeadk l 2 4°
Polarization \saG, <1. «2 1750 1°82 1°85
Ill. Palladium +, Platinum —.
Cells INTE nha Metnd 2 4
Polarizavom 0. fo: 1°60 92 “Sane
lV. With Three Cells.
Platinum +, Iron —. Platinum —, [ron +. Iron plates.
Polarization... 2°16 0-0 0:0
V. Aluminium Plates.
Celis is nie 9 1 2 3 4 6
Polarization . 1:09 Daley, 2°44(?) 4:01 5°20
The last results are very remarkable, showing, as they do, from
aluminium electrodes a reverse electromotive force of more than five
Daniell’s when six Grove’s are in circuit. The polarization alters
so rapidly during the electrolysis (in the case of aluminium) that I
cannot be certain that the numbers above given represent fully the
maximum effect. Various other combinations have been tried, but
are being repeated by Mr. Dewar.—irom the Proceedings of the
Royal Society of Hdinburgh, Session 1868-69.
SPECTRUM OF THE AURORA BOREALIS.
fo)
BY J. A. ANGSTROM.
From the time when Franklin made his remarkable experiments
on lightning, to the present time, a complete parallelism has been
shown tc exist between the actions of the forces of nature and those
of frictional electricity ; and hence it might have been expected
that the spectrum of lightning would be like the spectrum produced
by the ordinary electrical discharge. This has also been fully proved
by M. Kundt’s observations. As, moreover, the aurora borealis and
terrestrial magnetism are so intimately connected that the occurrence
of the former phenomenon is always connected with disturbing ac-
tions on the magnetic needle, it might be assumed that the northern
light is nothing more than an electrical luminosity, such as is pro-
duced in the electrical egg in rarefied air.
This, however, is not the case. In the winter of 1868-69 I was
several times able to observe the spectrum of the luminous are which
surrounds the dark segment, and is never wanting in faint aurore.
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 247
The light was almost monochromatic, and consisted of a single bright
line, which was on the left of the well-known group of lines of cal-
cium. By measuring its distance from this group I determined the
wave-length of the line, and found it
A\=5567.
Besides this line, the intensity of which is relatively very great, I
observed, after the slit had been widened, traces of three very faint
bands which extended nearly as far as F. Only once, when the lu-
minous are was much agitated, owing to undulations which altered
its shape, did I see the regions in question momentarily illuminated
by some faint spectrum-lines; yet, from the feeble intensity of these
rays, we may still say that the light of the luminous arc is almost
monochromatic.
One circumstance imparts to this observation of the spectrum of
the aurora borealis a far greater, | may almost say cosmical, interest.
In March of 1867 I observed for a whole week the same line in the
zodiacal light, which at that time displayed an extraordinary in-
tensity. Finally, on a starlight night, when the whole sky was in
some degree phosphorescent, I found traces even in the faint light
which proceeded from all parts of the heavens.
It is a remarkable fact that the line in question does not coincide
with any of the known lines in the spectra of simple or of compound
gases—at any rate, as far as I have investigated them.
From what has just been said it follows that an intense northern
light, such as can be observed within the polar circle, will probably
give a more complex spectrum than that which Ihave observed. If
this be the case, we may also hope that in the future we shall be able
to explain more easily the origin of the lines found and the nature of
the phenomenon itself. But since I cannot at present give this ex-
planation | intend to revert to it on a future occasion.—Poggendorff’s
Annalen, May 1869.
ON THE THERMAL ENERGY OF MOLECULAR VORTICES. BY W. J.
MACQUORN RANKINE, C.E., LL.D., F.R.SS. LOND. & EDINB. ETC.*
In a previous paper, presented to the Royal Society of Edinburgh
in December 1849, and read on the Sth of February 1850 (Transac-
tions, vol. xx.), the author deduced the principles of thermodynamics,
and various properties of elastic fluids, from the hypothesis of mole-
cular vortices, under certain special suppositions as to the figure and
arrangement of the vortices, and as to the properties of the matter
which moves in them. In subsequent papers he showed how the
hypothesis might be simplified by dispensing with some of the special
suppositions. In the present paper he makes further progress in the
same direction, and shows how the general equation of thermody-
namics and other propositions are deduced from the hypothesis of
molecular vortices when freed from all special suppositions as to the
figure and arrangement of the vortices, and the properties of the
matter that moves in them, and reduced simply to the following
form—that thermometric heat consists in a motion of the particles of
* Communicated by the Author, having been read before the Royal
Society of Edinburgh, May 31, 1869.
.
248 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
bodies in circulating streams with a velocity either constant or fluctua-
ting periodically. ‘This, of course, implies that the forces acting
amongst those particles are capable of transmitting that motion.
The principal conclusions arrived at are the following :—
(1) In asubstance in which the action of the vortices is isotropic,
the inteusity of the centrifugal pressure per unit of area is two-thirds
of the energy due to the steady circulation in a unit of volume.
The centrifugal pressure is the pressure exerted by the substance in
the perfectly gaseous state.
(2*) If there be substances in which the action of the vortices is
not isotropic, then in such substances the proportion already stated
applies to the mean of the intensities of the centrifugal pressures in
any three orthogonal directions.
(3*) The proportion which the whole energy of the vortices, in-
cluding that of the periodic disturbances, bears to the energy of the
steady circulation alone may be constant or variable.
(4) Absolute temperature is proportional to the energy of the
steady circulation in unity of mass, and to the specific volume in the
perfectly gaseous state.
(5) In substances which are nearly in the perfectly gaseous state,
experiment shows the proportion in which the whole energy exceeds
that of the steady circulation to be sensibly constant; and its value
may be found by computing in what proportion the dynamical value
of the specific heat at constant volume exceeds once and a half the
quotient found by dividing the product of the pressure and volume by
the absolute temperature. *The following are examples :—air, 1°634;
nitrogen, 1°630; oxygen, 1'667; hydrogen, 1°614; steam-gas,2°242,
(6) The known general equation of thermodynamics is deduced
from the hypothesis of molecular vortices*, freed from the special
suppositions made in the paper of 1849-50.
The new conclusions obtained in the present paper are marked *,
Those not so marked were arrived at in the paper of 1849-50.
[The general equation of thermodynamics is here stated for con-
venience :—Let dQ be the thermal energy which must be given to
unity of mass of a given substance in order to produce a given inde-
finitely small change in its temperature and dimensions; then
dQ=7d.¢;
in which 7 is the absolute temperature, and ¢ the thermodynamic
function. ‘The value of that function is
dU
dr’
Jc being the dynamical value of the real specific heat, U the potential
energy of the elasticity of the body at constant temperature, and
x(7) a function of the absolute temperature, which is null or inap-
preciable in a substance capable, at that temperature, of approxi-
mating indefinitely to the perfectly gaseous state, and is included in
the formula in order to provide for the possibility, suggested by
Clausius, that there may be substances which have not that property
at all temperatures. ]
¢=Jchyp. log r+y(7)+
|
;
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, ann DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE
[FOURTH SERIES.]
OCTOBER 1869.
XXX. On the Spectra of Carbon. By W.M. Watts, D.Sc.,
_ Physical-Science Master in the Manchester Grammar School*.
[ With a Plate.]
Lepeapiiadads considerable progress has been made in spec-
trum-analysis since its first principles were enunciated by
Bunsen and Kirchhoff, we still seem to be in considerable un-
certainty as to the changes in the spectrum of an element which
it is possible to bring about by altering the conditions under
which itis produced. The interesting investigations of Pliicker
and Hittorf and of Willner have shown that it is possible for
an element to have more than one spectrum; and these totally
different spectra have been supposed to belong to different allo-
tropic modifications, apparently on the supposition that changes
of temperature produce changes in the spectrum consisting
merely in the addition of new lines. The following observa-
tions, in which four different spectra are described as belonging
to the element carbon, are offered as contributions to our know-
ledge of this subject.
The principal previous investigations on the spectra of the
carbon-compounds, to some of which reference is afterwards
made, are comprised in the following list :—
Swan, Edinb. Phil. Trans. vol. xxi. p. 411 (1856).
Attfield, Phil. Trans. 1862, p. 221.
Plicker, Pogg. Ann. vol. evil. p. 497.
Dibbits, Pogg. Ann. vol. exxii. p. 499, and De Spectraal
Analyse.
* Communicated by the Author.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 255. Oct, 1869. S
MPF a
250 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
Pliicker and Hittorf, Phil. Trans. 1865, p. 1.
Morren, Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. 1865, vol. iv. p. 805.
Lielegg, Phil. Mag. S. 4. vol. xxxiv. p. 302; vol. xxxvil. p. 208.
Deville, Lecons sur la Dissociation, and Phil. Mag. S, 4. vol.
KRW. LI.
Willner, Phil. Mag. S. 4. vol. xxxvu. p. 405.
Frankland, Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xvi. p. 419.
I select as the typical form of the first carbon-spectrum that
obtained when olefiant gas and oxygen are burnt together in an
oxyhydrogen blowpipe-jet. The flame thus obtained exhibits a
central cone of intense green, which, examined by the spectro-
scope, gives the spectrum first obtained by Swan, and ascribed
by Attfield to the vapour of carbon. The spectrum which is
drawn, Plate I. fig. 1a, is one of the most beautiful which ean be
imagined, and consists of five groups of lines—e in the red, yin
the greenish yellow, 6 brilliant emerald-green, ¢in the blue, and
f violet.
Group «* contains five lines, of which the third 1s the bright-
est. ry contains seven, of which the least refracted is the brightest,
and each succeeding line is less brilliant than the one before; so
that the group rises sharply out of darkness on the left, and
fades gradually away on the right. The group 6, which con-
tains four lines, presents the same gradation of intensity : €con-
tains four lines of nearly equal intensity, the fourth being double;
and f consists of a broad band, then a fine bright line, and then
a band fading away on the most refracted side. When the spec-
trum is obtained very brightly, there may be observed in addition
six very fine bright lines of equal intensity, which gave the
readings 86, 87:5, 89, 91, 98, 95. The band 128-133 is also
seen to be shaded by a large number of nearly equidistant fine
dark lines; and the least refrangible band of the group f (121-
126) is resolved into lines.
This spectrum may be obtained from the flame of any hydro-
earbon, though in many cases, owing to the faintness of the
spectrum, only some of the groups can be recognized. In the
flame of an ordinary Bunsen burner 6 and ¢ are easily seen, y and
f are much fainter, and the red group cannot be detected.
This spectrum is proved to be that of carbon, inasmuch as it
can be obtained alike from compounds of carbon with hydrogen,
with nitrogen, with oxygen, with sulphur, and with chlorine.
I have obtained it, namely, from each of the following com-
* This is the group described as new by Professor Lielegg, Phil. Mag.
March 1869. It is true, as he notes, that Dibbits strangely omits it, and
that Plucker and Hittorf give only three lines; but the group of five lines
is given by Morren, and they are distinctly figured in the drawing to my
paper on the Bessemer-spectrum in the Philosophical Magazine for De-
cember 1867.
OO
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 251
pounds :—olefiaut gas, cyanogen, carbonic oxide, naphthalin, car-
bonice disulphide, carbonic tetrachloride, amylic alcohol, and
marsh-gas.
It may be obtained from olefiant gas either by burning the gas
with oxygen, as already described, or by taking the spark of an
induction-coil in the gas at the ordinary pressure. In the lat-
ter case, however, carbon is rapidly set free and the spectrum
becomes continuous. The electric discharge in olefiant gas under
diminished pressure gives a different spectrum, which will be
afterwards described.
The spectrum obtained from cyanogen varies with the mode
of production. The flame of cyanogen in oxygen exhibits y, 6,
ande. ‘The red group is replaced by a series of bands which
show an opposite character to the rest of the spectrum, inasmuch
as each band is brightest at the most refracted edge. If cyano-
gen be burnt in air instead of in oxygen these bands are more
numerous, extending nearly to 6, and replacing y, which is
then not to be seen*. Instead of the group f we have two very
brilliant groups of lines—&, which includes seven lines (105-113),
and @, which is composed of six lines (186-142). Fig. le isa
reduction of Dibbits’s drawing of the spectrum of cyanogen burn-
ing in air (De Spectraal Analyse), and agrees well with my own
observations.
If the cyanogen, instead of being burnt, be rendered incan-
descent by the discharge of an induction-coil in the gas at the
ordinary pressure, a spectrum is obtained which contains y, 6, ¢,
€, and 0, but which does not exhibit f. The red group e may
be obtained precisely the same as from the olefiant-gas flame;
but when the intensity of the spark is increased a different aspect
comes out, which is represented in the Plate, fig. ld.
Precisely the same spectrum is obtained from a Geissler’s tube
enclosing cyanogen of a few millimetres pressure. The spectrum
consists of a, y, 6, €, & and @.
When a Leyden jar is included in the circuit, the relative in-
tensity of the lines is altered, but the spectrum is essentially the
same, with the addition of the nitrogen-lines obtained from the
spark in air.
The flame of carbenic oxide gives only a continuous spectrum ;
but if the induced spark be taken in the gas at the atmospheric
pressure, we obtain again the carbon-spectrum, comprising
sometimes y, 6, e, and f, and sometimes y, 6, ¢, ¢, and 8. The
red end is too faint to determine. The replacement of the
group f by € and @ is very curious, but I have been unable to
* These bands are thus obtained more completely developed at the lower
temperature of the flame in air, and are doubtless due to the compound
cyanogen itself,
a
S2
252 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
determine the conditions on which the presence of one or the
other of these groups depends. A touch of the contact-breaker
will sometimes cause f to disappear and be immediately replaced
by the other two groups. The change of temperature (if it be
so) thus caused is not attended, then, simply by the addition of
new lines, but causes the disappear ance of one group and its re-
placement by two other quite different groups of lines. When
a Leyden jar is included in the secondary circuit, no trace of the
carbon-lines is obtained if the jar be large enough, but instead a
brilliant spectrum, which is described afterwards as the fourth
carbon-spectrum and is represented in fig. 4a.- I have employed,
instead of a Leyden jar, a graduating condenser consisting of two
opposed disks of metal, the distance between which could be
varied at pleasure. When the plates are separated, the conden-
sation is so feeble that the spark in carbonic oxide shows the
carbon-spectrum only; but as the plates are gradually approxi-
mated, the fourth carbon-spectrum appears gradually replacing
the old spectrum and finally completely extinguishing it. The
blue band / is the first to disappear, and is replaced by “the group
123-1383 of fig. 4, and the conspicuous line 76 of fig. 4: appears
nearly bisecting the interval between the first and second lines
of the group 6.
When the density of the carbonic oxide is increased while the
spark (without condenser) passes through it, the gas is more
rapidly decomposed, the spark becomes more luminous, and the
spectrum more nearly continuous. At two atmospheres’ pres-
sure the spectrum obtained is the carbon-spectrum, consisting
of ry, 6, €, € and @ (the red end probably contains «), e, & and @
being very brilliant. Increase of pressure up to about ten atmo-
spheres only produces the effect of filling up the intermediate
spaces with white light.
The spectrum, including the groups € and @, is also obtainable
from compounds of carbon with hydrogen. A Geissler’s tube
enclosing naphthalin gives a splendid carbon-spectrum, in which
the groups € and @ are especially brilliant. They are therefore
abundantly proved to be produced by carbon itself.
By passing the spark through the vapour of carbonie disul-
phide, there can be obtained at will either Pliicker’s sulphur-
spectrum of the second order or the carbon-spectrum on a
background of continuous light due to the separation of sul-
phur.
The spark in the vapour of carbonic tetrachloride gives either
the carbon-spectrum or the chlorine-spectrum, according to cir-
cumstances.
A Geissler’s tube enclosing amylie alcohol gives the carbon-
spectrum, consisting of a, y, 6, ¢, and f.
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 253
A Geissler’s tube enclosing marsh-gas gives y, 6, ¢, and @,
but the group ¢ is not observed. This spectrum contains also
a line at 74, which may belong to the second carbon-spectrum.
Carbonic oxide has been stated to yield the ordinary carbon-
spectrum when the induced spark is taken in the gas at the or-
dinary pressure. The discharge through a Geissler’s tube,
however, exhibits an entirely new spectrum which contains none
of the ordinary carbon-lines. That this new spectrum is also
due to carbon itself is shown by the fact that it is obtained either
from a vacuum-tube enclosing carbonic oxide, or from one enclo-
sing olefiant gas*; and it becomes a question of much interest
to determine upon what conditions the production of one or the
other of these forms of the carbon-spectrum depends. Olefiant
gas is capable of yielding either spectrum. When the discharge
is passed through a tube containing olefiant gas of only a few
millimetres pressure, the spectrum drawn (fig. 2e) is obtained,
but the gas at the ordinary pressure yields the first form. In
order te determine at what pressure the second spectrum dis-
placed the first, a tube provided with platinum wires was con-
nected with the air-pump so that it could be exhausted, and by
means of a tap with a source of olefiant gas. It was also pro-
vided with a gauge-tube, by means of which the pressure could
be measured. When the pressure is about 12 millims., the
spark is violet and gives the carbon-spectrum of fig. 2; when
the pressure of the gas was gradually increased the spark became
blue; and ata pressure of about 100 millims. the spectrum
changed to that of the first form. When still more gas was ad-
mitted the spark became white, and carbon was rapidly sepa-
rated.
Plucker} has observed these lines of the second carbon-spec-
trum. In his earlier paper he describes them as lines belonging
to the compound carbonic acid; but in the paper published in 1865
he represents them as belonging to carbon itself. Fig. 2,a& 6,
shows the observations of Pliicker, reduced from the drawing to
his paper in the Philosophical Transactions to the scale employed
throughout this paper. Fig. 2a shows the spectrum obtained
from spectral tubes enclosing carbonic oxide of 82 millims. pres-
sure. A comparison of this spectrum with that of carbonic oxide
(fig. 2c) and with that of olefiant gas (fig. 2 e), shows that Plucker
did not succeed in completely separating the two spectra. I
have, however, repeatedly obtained the second spectrum alone,
consisting of the bands A, 7, k, 1, m, n, and o, and exhibiting no
* This curious difference in the spectra obtained from different carbon-
compounds was first noted by Dr. Roscoe, in a lecture delivered before the
Royal Institution in May 1864.
f Poge. Ann. vol. evil. (1859). Phil, Trans. 1866,
204 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon,
trace of a,y, 6, ¢. Fig. 2, ¢ and d, shows the result of a direct
comparison of the carbonic-oxide vacuum-spectrum with that of
the olefiant-gas flame when the two are seen simultaneously in
the spectroscope.
The carbonic-oxide vacuum-spectrum shows the lines A, 7, k,
l,m,n,andoe. A spectrum-tube enclosing olefiant gas (or coal-
gas, or a mixture of equal volumes of olefiant gas and hydrogen)
gives h, 7, k, l, m,n, and o, and sometimes the group @ of the
first carbon-spectrum; occasionally 6 is also faintly visible.
Pliicker* has obtained from a vacuum-tube containing carbonic
disulphide, carbon fh, 7, k, J, m, and n.
I believe that we have a third form of the carbon-spectrum in
that obtained from the Bessemer-flame, which I described in a
paper published in this Magazine for December 1867. Professor
Lielegg+ regards the Bessemer-spectrum as that of carbonic
oxide. It is, however, impossible to obtain it either from the
flame of carbonic oxide or from the gas rendered incandescent by
electricity: in the first case a continuous spectrum only is ob-
tained ; and in the latter either the spectrum of carbon (fig. 1) or
that obtained also from carbonic anhydride (fig. 4) 1s produced.
I have always looked upon this spectrum as that of carbon
itself, and have sought to obtain it from compounds of carbon
with nitrogen or with hydrogen, but without success. It appears
to be produced only under conditions very nearly the same as
those of the Bessemer-flame itself. Thus I have observed it in
one or two furnace-flames in which a very high temperature is pro-
duced. The flame of carbonic oxide in an ordinary melting-cupola
gives a very brilliant continuous spectrum, but exhibits only the
sodium-line. In the working of a blast-furnace it is usual, after
the iron has been run, to turn on the blast so as to help the iron
out. This produces a large white flame from under the tymp,
which exhibits a very bright continuous spectrum with the so-
dium- and lithium-lines brilliant, together with a faint Bessemer-
spectrum. I have observed the lines of the Bessemer-spectrum
also in the flame of a small furnace, used on the works at Crewe
for loosening the tyres of wheels, in which coke is burnt by a
blast of air; and the Bessemer-spectrum is always obtained in
the combustion of coke alone in the convertor. The spectrum
of the coke-flame exhibits the Bessemer-lines faintly, and the
lines of sodium and lithium: the introduction of the charge of
molten pig iron seems to cool down the flame, so that for two or
three minutes after the commencement of the blow a continuous
spectrum only is seen. As the temperature rises the sodium-
* Pogg. Ann. vol. evii. p. 538.
Tt Phil, Mag. 8.4, yol, ysxiv. p. 302.
. Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 255
line first becomes visible ; then the lithium-line is added, and
gradually the lines of the Bessemer-spectrum, increasing in bril-
lianey to the end of the. blow.
The spiegel-spectrum, as I have pointed out, is only the Bes-
semer-spectrum in which some of the lines are still further in-
creased in brilliancy, and is doubtless due to the highest tempe-
rature of all ; for we have the hot carbon of the molten spiegeleisen
burnt by the intensely heated oxygen absorbed by the liquid
steel. The spiegel-spectrum 1s occasionally identical with the
ordinary Bessemer-spectrum, when, namely (as shown by the
spectroscope and by the analysis of the steel), the blast has been
stopped somewhat short of the proper point. The effect of an
increase of temperature is thus to split up the Bessemer-spectrum
into groups of lines, in each of which the brightest line is the
most refrangible—an aspect which is exactly the reverse of that
so noticeable in the ordinary carbon-spectrum, where each group
has its strongest line on the left hand.
A fourth spectrum, also probably due to incandescent carbon,
is obtained from the induced spark in either carbonic oxide or
carbonic anhydride when a Leyden jar is included in the circuit,
and is represented in fig. 4. It is one of the spectra termed
by Plicker “spectra of the second order,’ consisting, not of
bands, but of sharply defined lines, frequently in pairs. It
has been already stated that the induction-spark (without con-
denser) gives in carbonic oxide the carbon-spectrum No. 1, and
in carbonic anhydride a continuous spectrum. With a suffi-
ciently large condenser the spectrum obtained from carbonic
oxide is identical with that obtained from carbonic anhydride, as
will be seen on comparing fig. 4.a@ (spectrum of carbonic oxide)
with fig. 45 (spectrum of carbonic anhydride). The carbonic
oxide was prepared from potassium ferrocyanide and well washed
with caustic potash. ‘The spectrum obtained from air under
similar conditions is es for the sake of comparison. The
carbon double band 1565 6-5
double band in the air-spectrum. If, however, while the spark
continues to pass, the carbonic anhydride be blown out of the
discharge-tube and replaced by air, it is distinctly seen that the
two are not coincident. The left-hand nitrogen-line is slightly
more refrangible than the left-hand carbon-line; the right-hand
members are (with one prism) apparently coincident.
The continuous spectrum obtained by the discharge of an in-
duction-coil in carbonic anhydride may be converted into this
fourth carbon-spectrum, either by increasing the electric conden-
sation as described above, or by increasing the density of the gas.
Carbonic anhydride in the compression-apparatus which [ have
is at first sight identical with the
i
|
|
2. Se ae
a Pf ae BE
256 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
used for experiments on gases under pressure, shows at the or-
dinary pressure only a faint continuous spectrum ; at two atmo-
spheres’ pressure the spectrum is much brighter but still conti-
nuous ; andat pressures between seven and ten atmospheres’ the
spark passes with difficulty, and the spectrum shows a number
of bright bands which agree in position with the lines 76, 99,
108, and 106 of fig. 46. They differ in character, however,
being bands instead of fine lines, thus bearing the same relation
to the fine lines obtained from carbonic anhydride at the ordinary
pressure as the expanded lines of hydrogen do to the fine lines
obtained from a hydrogen vacuum-tube. These bands are ob-
tained also in the spectrum of the condensed spark in the vapour
of amylic alcohol,
The spectrum of the direct discharge in a tube containing
hydrogen of a few millimetres tension only and a trace of methyl-
oxalic ether is faint, but contains the lines k, /, m of the second
carbon-spectrum ; but when by warming the tube the ether is
volatilized, the spark passes only in brilliant flashes, and the
spectrum then contains lines 34, 75, 85-90, 99, 103, 106, 120,
125, and 140 of the fourth carbon-spectrum again as bands.
This fourth spectrum, obtained from carbonic oxide and car-
bonic anhydride, may either be due to carbon, or to carbonic
oxide, or to carbonic anhydride. It is, of course, not the spec-
trum of oxygen. I believe it to be due to carbon; but I have
not been able to obtain such complete evidence as is afforded for
the spectra Nos, 1 and 2 in their production from different car-
bon-compounds. Thus I have not been able to obtain this fourth
spectrum from a compound of carbon with hydrogen alone; the
condensed spark in cyanogen at the ordimary pressure gives,
however, together with the carbon-spectrum No. 1] and the ni-
trogen-spectrum of the second order, the lines 34, 56, 76, and
103 of the carbon-spectrum No. 4. This conclusion (that the
spectrum is really due to carbon itself) seems to be supported by
the fact that, when this spectrum is obtained from either carbonic
oxide or carbonic anhydride, there is always a perceptible deposit
of carbon ; since if it were due to carbonic oxide we should not ex-
pect to have carbon deposited in either case ; and if it were due to
carbonic anhydride, though carbon would be set free from the car-
bonic oxide, there would be none from carbonic anhydride itself,
It would appear that carbonic oxide is more easily decomposed
than carbonic anhydride, either ito carbon and carbonic anhy-
dride, or into carbon and oxygen ; so that at the low temperature
of the direct discharge carbonic oxide is decomposed and gives
the carbon-spectrum No. 1, while carbonic anhydride resists de-
composition. Ifthe temperature of the spark be increased either
by the intercalation of a Leyden jar or by increasing the density
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 257
of the gas, the carbonic anhydride is decomposed and the new
earbon-spectrum becomes visible.
If we attempt to define the conditions under which these dif-
ferent forms of the carbon-spectrum are produced, we are met
by very considerable difficulties. The knowledge we possess of
the temperature of gases ignited by the electric discharge is so
small, that we cannot with any certainty compare the spectra
produced in this way with those obtained from the flames of car-
bon-compounds. Indeed it seems by no means certain that
we are right in attributing the differences obtained in electric
spectra simply to the different temperature to which the gas is
heated.
In comparing the spectra of fig. 1, we notice that the changes
take place at the ends of the spectra, the central groups y¥, 6, ¢
remain substantially the same. If we pass from the spectrum
of the olefiant-gas flame to that of the cyanogen-flame, we find
the change at the blue end of the spectrum consisting in the dis-
appearance of the group f and its replacement by the groups €
and @. The group fis not absolutely proved to belong to car-
bon (that is, it may be caused by carbonic oxide or carbonic
anhydride) ; but the groups € and @, since they are common to
carbonic oxide, cyanogen, and naphthalin, must be due to car-
bon, and their presence may with much probability be attributed
to the higher temperature of the cyanogen-flame.
The temperatures of flames, calculated on the assumption that
the total heat of combustion is expended _in heating up the pro-
ducts of combustion, have been shown by Deville to be immensely
too high. Thus, for example, the temperature of the oxyhydrogen-
flame, which calculation fixes at 6880° C., is determined experi-
mentally by Deville* to be not higher than 2500° C., and by
Bunsen not higher than 2800° C. The following are the cal-
culated temperatures of some flames, with which are compared
the recent experimental results of Bunsen +:—
Calculated. Experimental.
Fliyaroxen Imalr’ .1) 1 2738.0. | 202410.
Hydrogen inoxygen. . . 6880 2844
Carbonic oxide inair. . . 2996 1997
Carbonic oxide in oxygen . 7067 3033
Cyanczentinlar? 00s |e BdolD 3297
Cyanogen in oxygen. . . 10557
Olefiant gasinair . . , 2619
Olefiant gas in oxygen . . 8626
* Legons sur la Dissociation, p. 281.
Tt Pogg. Ann. vol. cxxxi. p. 161.
258 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
- There is another element of uncertainty which must not be
forgotten. The calculated temperatures and those obtamed ex-
perimentally by Bunsen are the mean temperatures of the flames,
and it is quite possible for one part of a flame to be 1000° C.
hotter or 1000° C. colder than the temperature given as the
temperature of the flame. ‘The blue cone of a Bunsen gas-
flame, from which the carbon-spectrum is obtained, is certainly
such colder than the exterior cone of the flame at the same
point.
I have made several attempts te reduce the temperature of the
olefiant-gas flame, but have not succeeded in altering the spec-
trum at all. Olefiant gas, burnt by means of oxygen in an
atmosphere of hydrogen, gives the carbon-spectrum brilliantly
with all the fine limes previously described; and a mixture of
olefiant gas and steam burns with a colourless flame which ex-
hibits the same spectrum.
A mixture of 2 vols. carbonic anhydride and 1 vol. olefiant
gas burns with a barely luminous flame, the blue part of which
gives the groups y, 6, e, and f of the carbon-spectrum. ‘The
calculated temperature of such a flame is 2016° C.; but in all
probability the temperature is much less, as no allowance 1s made
in the calculation for any refrigerating effect produced by the
decomposition of the carbonic anhydride.
The fusing-point of gold is given by Deville* as 1300° C.,
and of platinum as 2000° C. The interior blue cone of a Bun-
sen-flame about 10 millims. above the jet, which is the part
which yields the carbon-spectrum most plainly, 1s capable of
melting gold, but does not melt platinum. It is incapable of
fusing steel, which 1s fused by the outer cone at the same point ;
and platinum resists the flame at any pointy. We may therefore
probably assign to the inner blue cone a temperature of about
1500° C.
The temperature of the flame of olefiant gas and oxygen has
not been determined by experiment; but it can hardly be above
2500° C., and we may therefore conclude that the groups y, 6, ¢
are produced by incandescent carbon between the temperatures
of about 1500° C. and 2500° C.+
In order to determine the inferior limit of the groups and @,
a mixture of equal volumes of carbonic anhydride and cyanogen
was made; it burnt with a violet flame of small intensity, yield-
ing the carbon-spectrum, including the group @ and the bands
* Lecons sur la Dissociation, p. 284.
+ A fine platinum wire, which could not be fused in any part of a Bun-
sen-flame, was easily fused at one point in an ordinary bat-wing gas-burner.
{ The groups y, 6, € are those observe ¢by Huggins in the spectrum of
Winnecke’s comet.
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 259
of cyanogen. As the temperature calculated for the cyanogen-
flame agrees closely with the experimental result, we are probably
justified j in accepting the calculated temperature in this case also
as not very far from the truth, and may therefore conclude that
0 begins to be visible about 2200° C. Platinum and steel are
easily fused in the flame of cyanogen burning in air.
The temperature of a gas ignited by the electric discharge de-
pends upon the resistance and upon the quantity of electricity
transmitted in each spark ; and this may be increased either by
increasing the condensing surface, or by increasing the tension of
the electricity at discharge. This tension depends upon the
nature of the gas: thus the spark passes with great ease through
hydrogen, with more resistance through carbonic oxide, carbonic
anhydride or oxygen, and with extreme difficulty through cya-
nogen. But for one and the same gas the tension at discharge
and resistance experienced are increased by increasing the den-
sity ; and the heat produced thus increasing more rapidly than
the quantity of matter to be heated, the temperature rises*.
Hence we understand why the groups ¢ and @ are added to the
spectrum of the spark in carbonic oxide when the density of the
gas is increased, and why the spark in the gas cyanogen, which.
offers 80 great resistance ,always gives a spectr um contaiming ¢ and
@. We have also the explanation of the fact that a vacuum-tube
containing either the dense vapour of naphthalin, or the badly
conducting gas cyanogen, gives always the spectrum of carbon
belonging t to the high temperature, although the pressure of the
gasis only a few millimetres.
It is impossible to assign any temperature as the superior
limit of this first form of the carbon-spectrum which shall have
any meaning, or to guess with any probability at the temperature
of the condensed spark. It cannot be less than 10,000° C.; but
the temperature calculated for the flame of cyanogen in oxyg “en
(without doubt the hottest flame known) can hardly be trusted.
The carbon-spectrum No. 4 may then roughly be said to be due
to incandescent carbon above 10,000° C.
It has been shown that carbon -at 1500° C. gives the first form
of carbon-spectrum, and that the same spectrum is given by the
electric spark in either carbonic oxide or olefiant gas at the ordi-
* I have repeatedly observed this increase of resistance in the experi-
ment on condensed gases. The spark which passed with ease in carbonic
anhydride at the ordinary pressure could hardly be got through the gas at’
7 atmospheres’ pressure, while there was no perceptible increase in the re-
sistance afforded by hydrogen when the pressure was increased to 9 atmo-
spheres; and the spark which passed with ease through 7 millims. in
hydrogen at 9 atmospheres’ pressure would hardly pass through 5 millims.
in cyanogen at the ordinary pressure, and through only a fraction of a mil-
limetre in cyanogen at 4 atmospheres’ pressure.
I
260 Dr. W. M: Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
nary pressure, but that when the pressure of the gas is increased
the temperature of the spark rises. When, then, we find that
on gradually diminishing the pressure the same spectrum is
given until the pressure falls to about 100 millims., and then
suddenly changes to the third form, we can hardly resist the
conclusion that this third form of carbon-spectrum is due to
carbon rendered luminous below 1500° C. The result that
the temperature of the discharge in a vacuum-tube may be
below 1500° C. is certainly unexpected, but it can hardly be
rejected* unless we give up the attempt to account for the dif-
ferences in the spectra of the same element by differences in the
temperature of ignition. We may, of course, suppose the exist-
ence of allotropic modifications of carbon-vapour, but we have no
proof of the existence of such.
The explanation of the Bessemer-flame is extremely difficult.
I have endeavoured to obtain some approximation to the tempe-
rature of the flame both by calculation and by experiment. The
calculation is based upon the composition of the gas issuing from
the convertor. A sample of the gas collected from the converter
at the Steel-works at Crewe was analyzed by Mr. C. R.A. Wright,
B.Sc., and gave the following result :—
Carbonic anhydride . . . 3878
Carbonicoxide) ac 4% gee aie 6:20
Oxyeen php ana earits ane Od
Nitropenigsrovell a, ne Nsanpmi sad Orick
99°99
The temperature is calculated on the assumption that the
oxygen of the air is used up in burning the carbon of the cast
iron to carbonic oxide and carbonic anhydride, and in burning
the iron to ferroso-ferric oxide.
litres. Ts. ors.
3°78 carbonic anhydride weigh 7:43 and contain 2:03 carbon.
16°20 carbonic oxide a 20°27 iS 8°69
0°57 oxygen 53 0°82
79°44 nitrogen 3s 99°92
33
The total volume of oxygen contained in the gaseous products
of combustion is
* Willner (Pogg. Ann. Dec. 1868) regards the temperature in a hydro-
gen vacuum-tube as at a maximum when the tension is about 30 millims.,
being lessened either by increase or diminution of the pressure.
Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon. 261
litres. litres.
3°78 in 3°78 carbonic anhydride.
8:10 in 16°20 carbonic oxide. |
0°57 |
12°45
But 79°44 litres of nitrogen are mixed in air with 21 litres of
oxygen. Hence 21—12:45=8°55 litres of oxygen have com- i
bined with iron.
The heat produced by the combustion is as follows :— — :
Thermal units.
ers. |
2°03 carbon burning to CO? ialve™® 2-03 x 8080= 16402 i
8:69 y » 869x2474= 21499 ‘
82°08 iron __,, Fe? Of ,, 82°08x1582= 50778 }
88679 |
The products of combustion and their specific heats are as i
follows :— i
es
FA3 CO” © X'0:216- =" 1-60 i
20°27 CO x0:248 = 5:03 "
44°26 Fe? O* x0°152*= 6°73 !
99:92 N x 0°244 = 24°38
0:82 O x 02138" = 018
37°92
and the temperature of the flame is therefore
88679
—~ =23389° C.
37-99 =e oes Onl
The result of this calculation is, of course, open to the same
objection as all calculated flame- temperatures, that no allowance
can be made for dissociation. It is too high also for another
reason—that a very considerable part of the heat produced is
expended in heating up the molten metal itself, which is im-
mensely hotter at the end of the blow than it is at the beginning. |
If we assume that, together with the quantities given above, we |
have 300 girs. iron heated up from 1000° C. to the temperature
» 3X644+4x4 _ 9. 159.
at. wt. Fe? O* |
T This calculation represents 10 grs. carbon burnt for 32 grs. iron. As- i
suming the pig-iron to contain 3 per cent. carbon, this would give a loss of
32 iron for Ae X 10=333 pig iron, or about 10 per cent. The average |
loss from all causes is reckoned, I believe, at about 15 per cent.
262 Dr. W. M. Watts on the Spectra of Carbon.
of the flame (which is, of course, not really the case), we obtain
as the temperature of the flame 1700° C. instead of 2339° C.
Mr. Ramsbottom has kindly placed at my disposal the result
of an experiment made at Crewe to determine the ‘heat of the
Bessemer-flame, in which it was found that on exposing a bar of
cast iron (quality not stated), 1} inch in diameter, to the action
of the flame at a distance of about 12 inches from the mouth of
the vessel, it began to melt mm about 54 minutes, the iron drop-
ping off in small globules at the rate of about 380 or 40 per
minute. or, if s is the intensity,
=ces. But, from what has been said, as much heat must disappear
in the electromotor or be converted into electricity. Hence
there must be an absorption of heat whichis proportional to the
electromotive force multiplied by the intensity of the current.
If there are two electromotors whose electromotive forces are
e+e', and these both act in the same direction, the entire quan-
she
tity of heat developed by the current is oe = (e+e')s,, if s,
1
and /, denote respectively the intensity and the resistance. Hence
this quantity of heat must be absorbed in the two electromotors
together. It follows thence that in each electromotor there
must be an absorption of heat which is proportional to the com-
mon intensity multiplied by the electromotive force. The result
will, of course, be the same if there is a larger number of electro-
motors, provided only they act in the same direction.
If the electromotive forces act in opposite directions and e is
greater than e,, a current is obtained in the direction of the first
force; the total quantity of heat developed by the current is
= (e—e,)s, when the intensity is s,; and just this quantity of
heat must disappear in the two electromotors. But in the first the
* Ann, de Chim. et de Phys, S. 3. vol. xl. p. 293.
of Voltaic Cooling and Heating. 267
quantity of heat es,, will be absorbed, which is greater than that
produced by the current. The difference between the two, or e's,
must therefore be produced in the other clectromotor, so that the
algebraic sum of that which is produced and of that which dis-
appears may be equal to zero. It therefore follows that if a
current traverses an electromotor in the opposite direction to the
current which is produced by it, heat is developed in this elec-
tromotor proportional to the product of the electromotive force
into the intensity. Hence is obtained the final result :—If a
voltaic current traverses an electromotor in the same direction as
the current which is produced by the electromotor, absorption of
heat ensues ; if the current is in the opposite direction, heat is pro-
duced ; the quantity of heat which is absorbed in the first case and
produced in the latter is proportional to the intensity of the current
multiplied by the electromotive force at the place where the change
of heat ensues.
If two heterogeneous metals are brought into contact with one
another, an electromotive force ensues at the point of contact.
If a voltaic current traverses the place of contact, there must
either be absorption or production of heat. Here, then, we have
the cause of Peltier’s phenomena. The quantities of heat ab-
sorbed in the one and produced in the other case are propor-
tional to the product of the intensity into the electromotive
force. Hence, if with different intensities experiments are made
with the same two metals, the differences in temperature must
be proportional to the intensities, as has already been experi-
mentally shown. But if, retaining the same intensity of the
current, experiments are made with different metals, the quanti-
ties of heat must be proportional to the electromotive forces.
Hence by measuring the quantities of heat we should be na
posit:on to arrange the metals in the actual electromotive series.
But this series must be quite different from that obtained when
the metals are arranged according to the observed differences in
temperature; for these differences, besides depending on the
quantities of heat absorbed and produced, depend also on the
thermal capacities of the metals, on the greater or less degree of
cooling during the experiment, and so forth. All experimenters
who have worked at this subject have found the difference in
temperature to be greatest at the contact of bismuth and anti-
mony; but this by no means proves that the contact between these
metals produces the greatest electromotive force. The difference
in temperature must, as has been said, depend essentially on the
capacity for heat. Comparing the thermal capacities for equal
volumes of the metals with which Peltier’s experiments were
made, it is found that bismuth has the least capacity of all me-
tals, and next to itantimony. Hence, when the current passes,
A
268 Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
the contact between these two metals must show relatively great
variations in temperature, without these indicating any consider-
able electromotive force between them.
If the metals are arranged according to the quantities of heat
which are absorbed or produced in case a voltaic current traverse
the place of contact, it does not seem to me that it is a priort
certain that we should obtain the same series as that formed
when they are arranged according to their electrical tension on
contact. It seems conceivable that the magnitude of the cur-
rent which a contact can produce does not depend simply on the
tension which. the electricity can attain when the insulated
metals are placed in contact, but also on the time necessary
for the production of this state. Though this time is certainly
very short, it may doubtless be comparable with the time for
the passage of the current from one pole to the other. If it
is indeed so, the ordinary electrical series for the case in which
a real current is produced cannot without further proof be re-
garded as the right one. What is the real state of the case must
be decided by trustworthy measurements of the heat absorbed
and produced. Peltier’s phenomena obtain thus an unexpected
interest. If time and circumstances permit, I hope before long
to make an experimental determination of the quantities of heat
In question.
———
XXXII. Comparison of a Theory of the Dispersion of Light on the
Hypothesis of Undulations with Ditscheiner’s determinations of
Wave-lengths and corresponding refractive Indices. By Pro-
fessor Cuanuis, M.A., F.R.S.,; F.R.A.S*
Te Theory of the Dispersion of Light which I proposed in
this Journal in 1864 is, I believe, the only one which may
be strictly said to rest on the hypothesis of undulations. It was
commenced in the Number for June of that year; and in the
Supplementary Number for December it 1s compared with the
refractive mdices of two substances for seven principal rays,
Fraunhofer’s values of the wave-lengths of the rays being adopted.
At the end of an article on the Undulatory Theory of Light in
the Philosophical Magazine for May 1865 the same comparison
is made by means of Angstrdém’s values of 2 for the same rays.
The theory is reproduced in my work ‘On the Principles of Ma-
thematics and Physics ’—at first, just as 1t was originally pro-
posed; but subsequently, while the work was in the press, it
occurred to me that a course of reasoning somewhat different in
principle would be more exact, and, accordingly, by another in-
* Communicated by the Author.
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light. 269
vestigation (in pages 421-426) I obtained a new formula for
dispersion. The numerical results from the two investigations
(exhibited in page 427) show that the second formula accords
with the experiments in a slight degree better than the first.
Since the publication of that volume I have become acquainted
with Ditscheiner’s measures of a large number of wave-lengths
for dark rays of the solar spectrum, and of corresponding refrac-
tive indices ; and my present object is to compare these data with
the theory modified as above stated, Ditscheiner’s measures,
accompanied by investigations of appropriate formule, are given
in a memoir in the Sztzungsberichte of the Mathematico-physical
Class of the Imperial Academy of Sciences at Vienna (vol. 1.
part 2 (1864), p. 296). The values of X% were determined,
according to Fraunhofer’s method, by the diffraction-spectrum.
The mean interval between the lines of the grating, in default
of means of measuring it directly, was, at first, inferred, by ob-
servation and calculation combined, from Fraunhofer’s determi-
nation of the value of for that component of the double Ime D
which is nearest the violet end of the spectrum; and the wave-
lengths obtained for the other lines were thus made dependent
on that determination. Subsequently, having learnt that Ang-
stro6m had employed a value of the interval between the lines of
his grating obtained by direct mechanical means, Ditscheiner
succeeded in effecting a like determination with respect to his
own grating, and was thus enabled to calculate independent
values of all the wave-lengths. The results of this calculation,
which differ but little from those previously obtained, are given
in the above-cited publication (vol. li. part 2 (1865), p. 289).
Those of these values to which there are corresponding determi-
nations of refractive indices, the number of which is seventy-
three, are used in the subjoined comparison with theory.
Before entering upon this comparison, I propose to give some
account of the principles of the theory, and of the above-men-
tioned modification of it. The diminished rate of propagation
of waves in transparent substances is ascribed to the obstacle to
the free motions of the particles of the ether caused by reflec-
tions due to the incidence of the waves upon the atoms. These
reflections are supposed to take place as if the fluid were incom-
pressible ; and as they would thus be transmitted instantane-
ously, the mean effect, at a given position, of the simultancous
reflections from a vast number of atoms may be conceived to
bear a finite ratio to the incident velocity, even though the space
occupied by atoms should be extremely small compared to the
intervening space. It is presumed that that ratio may be the
same at different parts of the same wave, and, consequently, that
the retarding force due to the atoms has a constant ratio to the
270 Prof, Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
effective accelerative force of the ether. Hence putting «'a?f
for the latter force, Kx'?a*f for the retarding force, and «?a?f for
the accelerative force of the ether due to the actual variations
of density, we have
wa? f= K2a®f—Kr?af, or K?(14+ K)=k?.
Putting, therefore, w for the ratio of « to x’, which is the ratio
of the rate of propagation outside the medium to the rate within,
it follows that 1+ K=,p?. Hence, since the retardation must
vary ceteris paribus as the number of atoms in a given space
(that is, as the density of the medium), if we put 6 for the den-
sity, and H6 for K, we getu?=1+H6. The constant K, being
by hypothesis the same for different parts of the same wave, will
also be the same for waves of different breadths.
In this reasoning the atoms are regarded as fixed. Supposing,
as must be the case, that they are moveable about their mean
positions of equilibrium, the retardation due to the reflections
from each atom will be altered in the ratio of the velocity of the
eether relative to the atom to the actual velocity of the ether.
That is, @ being the distance at the time ¢ of the centre of the
atom from a fixed plane perpendicular to the direction of the
propagation of the waves, and V the velocity of the ethereal par-
ticles at that distance, we shall have
we—l= Hai
_ we
Vat)
the medium being supposed at present to be a simple one. In
order, therefore, to obtain a formula for yw it is necessary to cal-
culate a
dt Vie
Now the velocity or of the vibrating atom may be considered
to result from three different actions :—(1) the distribution about
the surface of the atom of the condensation and pressure due to
the incidence of a given series of ethereal waves, which, in fact,
is the primary cause of its movement; (2) the resistance of the
sether to the motion of the atom; (8) the action of the proper
molecular forces of the medium called into play by the displace-
ment of the atom. In my original researches I supposed that
the first of these actions depended on the relative motion of the
atom and the ether; but afterwards it occurred to me to reason
as follows. The atom being supposed to have a vibratory mo-
tion from any cause, conceive to be impressed upon it and upon
the whole of the fluid at each instant this motion in the opposite
direction. The atom will thus be brought to rest; and as the
motion and propagation of the wayes will in no manner be
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Liyht. 271
affected by a motion common to all the parts of the fluid, they
will be incident on the atom just as before, excepting that by
reason of this common motion a given condensation will reach a
given point of space a little earlier or a little later than it other-
wise would. As the effect of this inequality, as far as regards
the action on the atom, is a quantity of the second order, it may
be neglected in this investigation. Consequently the distribution
of condensation about the surface of the atom is to be determined
just as if the atom were fixed.
The problem for the case of the fixed atom is discussed in the
Number of the Philosophical Magazine for May 1866 (pp. 353-
360), and in ‘The Principles of Mathematics’ (pp. 279-287 &
441-446) ; and the expression obtained for the accelerative ac-
tion on the atom, insignificant terms being omitted, 1s
3H, dV
EE wucaitia
A being the ratio of the density of the atom to that of the ether,
and H, a certain constant factor depending in an unknown man-
near on the breadth of the undulations.
The resistance of the ether to the motion of the atom may be
at once inferred from the solution of the well-known problem of
the resistance of the air to the motion of a ball-pendulum; and
accordingly the part of the accelerative action due to this cause
1 dx
Bek at’
The molecular force of the medium called into action by the
relative displacement of its atoms will, when the condition of
transparency 1s satisfied, have a fixed ratio to the actual accelera-
tion of the atom. I have therefore given it the expression
etn. nara
a? dt?”
elasticity of the medium.
From these considerations it follows that
Gave Olle ON oly Oey, Ce ew
Bet ON da 2A de Tat dP
18
the constant e? depending on the proper molecular
: dx i ane:
Hence, supposing V and a to vanish at the same time, which is
di
another necessary condition of transparency, we have by inte-
grating,
da OH x'?a?
Vdt ~~ (1+2A)«'?a? — 2Ae?
It appears from reasoning contained in the discussions above
mentioned, that the constant H, is equal to unity for an incom-
272 Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
pressible fluid, and that for a compressible fluid it is different for
different values of X. According to the adopted hydrodynamical
principles, this quantity becomes a function of only in conse-
quence of the effect produced on the distribution of condensation
about the surface of the atom by lateral spreading due to trans-
verse vibrations, these vibrations being brought into action by
the disturbance of the waves caused by their incidence on the
atom. I have not succeeded in obtaining by a priori investiga-
tion an exact expression for the condensation thus modified ;
but from the general expression for the condensation in trans-
verse vibrations I have inferred that the distribution of conden-
peas Feu 1 :
sation in this case must be a function of ' being the effec-
i /2?
tive breadth of the waves. (See Phil. Mag. (Supplement) for
December 1864, p. 500, and ‘Principles of Mathematics,’ p.370.)
Accordingly it has been assumed that, to a first approximation,
k!
H,=s(1— <3)
k and k’ being unknown physical constants. Consequently,
since N=pA! and c=px', the formula for dispersion in a simple
Ea da
medium becomes
ERO:
Bah -- nes )
a
Hoo Vai > Sea 2A) Soe
The same form of expression applies to a compound medium, as
is shown in ‘ The Principles of Physics,’ pp. 429 & 430. In the
existing state of physics it does not appear possible to obtain,
either by theoretical calculation or by experiment, the values of
the constants H, 4, 4’, A, and e?. But since the equation may
be put under the form 3
the values of A’, B’, and C! may be found by means of three sets
of corresponding values of « and 2X given by observation. The
formula may then be employed to calculate values of > from
other given values of w; and a comparison of the results with
the corresponding observed values of » will, in proportion to the
degree of accordance, be evidence of the truth of the theory.
Having gone through such calculations by making use of the
before-mentioned values of 4 and X obtained by Ditscheiner, I
have collected the results in the annexed Table, in which also
Kirchhoff’s measures are inserted for the sake of identification
of the lines. Instead of calculating the constants A’, B’, C
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light. 273
from the values of w and A for Fraunhofer’s lines B, E, H, which
would probably be the most favourable for obtaining results in
accordance with observation, in order to put the theory to a
severer test I have calculated, first, with the data for the lines
B, E, G, and then with those for C, F, H. As the comparisons
in the two cases would necessarily be affected by errors in the
data, and as I had no reason to prefer one set of data to the
other, I have considered the mean between the values of » given
by the two calculations to be a more correct expression of the
theoretical result than either value taken separately.
By the preliminary calculations the constants A’, B!, C’ were
determined as follows :—
By 1, log A'=1:0708283, log B’=0°30138700, C’=7-161816.
By 2, log A'=1:0604669, log B'=0°2746509, Cl=7:057775.
Excess of calculated wave-
Designa-| 5. hoff? Ditschei- | Ditschei- Henge
tion of IPCHAOH'Siner’s refrac-|ner’s wave-
ray. measure. | tive index.| length. | By first |Bysecond
calcula- | caleula- | Mean.
tion. tion.
Bers s: 593:0 1:61358 68833 0 +1317 + 58
CIV hare. 694-0 1-61537 65711 — 80 0 — 40
877°0 1-61824 61470 —106 — 66 — 86
1D ey aise 1004:8 1-62020 59021 —100 — 78 — 89
1135:0 1:62166 57193 + 92 +104 + 98
1207°5 1:62274 56240 — 70 — 64 — 67
1280-9 1:62363 55368 — 64 — 64 — 64
1324°8 1:62415 54854 — 37 — 39 — 50
1351°3 1:62448 54549 — 34 — 37 — 35
1389-6 1:62494 54132 — 28 — 33 — $l
1421°6 1:62530 53792 — 3 = {Y) = §
Be ac 1523°5 1:62650 52783 0 — I] = &
15775 1:62705 52349 — 7 — 19 = 1183
1634:0 1-62760 51912 + 2 — 12 = &
1648°8 1:62775 51809 — 10 — 24 — 7
1655°6 1°62782 51754 — 8 — DY — 15
1693°8 1:62817 515038 — 21 — 36 = Wo)
1750-4 1-62872 51068 + 9 = § fo
17774 1:62897 50879 el 0 JL
1834:0 1:62953 50493 =O = 1183 A
1885°8 1:63003 50145 a2 — iil = @&
1920-0 1°63038 49914 en — 1% eo he
1961°0 1:63075 49653 eels = & fe
1989-5 1:63113 49412 + 7 — 13 = §
2005:0 163133 49269 + 2] 0 + 10
2041-4 163177 48990 + 19 = & He
2067-0 1:63205 48791 + 42 + 20 + 31
its Beane 2080°1 1:63225 48687 = 22 0 =e
21198 1:63269 48317 +122 +100 +111
2187-1 1:63390 47717 + 7 — 17 — §
| | Excess of calculated wave-
aaa Kirchhoff’s Ditschei- Ditschei- | =
ion of | easure, (Bers refrac-\ner’s wave- )
ray. * | tive index.| length. | By first |Bysecond
calcula- | caleula- | Mean.
| tion. tion.
2233°7 163446 47271 + 33 | + 9 |4 21
2264-3 163492 47106 | + 42 |4+ 17 | + 30
2309-0 1-63560 | 46742 | + 35 | + 10 | + 22
2416-0 163718 46097 | —1438 | —169 | —156
2436°5 1-63743 45901 — 7d — 99 — 86
2467-4 1-63789 | 45606 |— 7 | — 32 | — 20
2489-4 1-63818 45409 | + 49 | + 23 | 4+ 36
2537-1 1-63886 45089 | + 42 |4+ 17 | + 30
2566-3 1-63928 44880 | + 54 | + 28 | + 41
2606-0 1-63986 44633 | + 33 | + 7 | + 20
2627-0 1-64013 44498 | + 45 | + 20 | + 32
2638-6 1:64031 44418 | + 44 |} + 18 | + 3]
2670-0 1-64080 419392 | 4-22 |— 42 es
2636-6 1-64101 44121 |} +30 |4+ 5 |4+ 9
2721-6 1-64150 43908 |} +30 |;+ 5 |+ 18
2734-9 1-64168 43813 | + 48 | +33 |4 —@
27756 164224 43600 | + 23 |— 2 |
2797-0 1-64251 43466 | + 44 | + 20 | + 32
| 2822-8 1-64287 43314 | + 48 | + 23 | + 36
SG eacds 2854-7 164334 43170 0 |=—- 24 | — Bb
2869-7 1-64352 43070 + 27 + 3 + 15
a Niewcsd) | wakbliccss 1-64369 42953 | + 76 | + 52 | + 64
, foe ae eee 1-6442] 42789 | + 34 |+ 10 | + 2
ers 164448 42668 | + 50 | + 26 | + 38
DB Wibecs| chien 1-64476 42555 | + 54 | + 31 | + 4
aoe ee ee 164511 42425 + 50 + 27 + 38
ee a 1-64536 49325 | +55 | +32 |4+4
a en a 1-64569 42938 |} +18 |— 5 |+ 7
ee ee ean 1-64606 42069 | + 49 | = a7 |= S85
oe pe ee 1-64630 | 41871 | +159 | +136 | +148
ee ee ee 164687 | 41792 | +31 |+ 9 |+2
a er 1-64742 41626 | + 1 |— 22 | — 11
BP Cbcssall | nsdn 164771 41498 |} + 27 | + 5 | + 16
Po deses| © hhc: 1-64819 41392 |— 35 | — 56 | — 45
ee oe a 1-64893 41077 |} + 27 | te FTF 1+
B Sod! adhe 16494] 40876 | + 67 | 4+ 47 | 4+ 57
= one ee. 1-64966 40829 + 31 + il + 21
oi) 165009 | 40685 | + 34 | + 14 | + 2
Me css 1-65064 40506 | + 385 | + 16 | + 25
Be cessed. mitectcnanc 165113 40392 — 7 — 26 — 17
a ene ee ee 1-65194 40117 | + 15 |;— 8 /+ 6
a? See ee 165317 39742 +17 | 0 |;+ 8
ED scecwa) | Bc 1-65435 39405 | + 8 |— 8 0
Table (continued).
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
In the foregoing Table Fraunhofer’s principal rays are indi-
cated, as usual, by the letters B,C, D, E, F, G, H. The other
letters were employed by Ditscheiner to designate lines for which
there were no measures by Kirchhoff. The numbers opposite to
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light. 275
the double line D apply to the mean position between the com-
ponents. ‘The refractive index corresponding to the measure
1989-5 has been altered conjecturally, the given value (1-63133)
having been the same as that corresponding tothe measure 2005:0.
Respecting the numbers in the last four columns, it is to be
stated that they express actual lengths in millimetres multiplied
by 10°. It will hence be seen that the differences between the
calculated and observed values of X are generally very small. The
larger differences occur so exceptionally that they must plainly be
referred to errors of the data from observation. This is especially
the case with respect to the rays whose measures by Kirchhoff
are 1135-0, 2119-8, 2416-0, and 2436°5, and the ray designated
by the letter «. Leaving out of account the discordant results
for the ray 1135-0, there seems to be a systematic variation be-
tween the calculated and observed wave-lengths in the part of
the spectrum from B to E, but not nearly in the same degree in
any other part. Also it is to be noticed that there is a close
agreement between the results from the two calculations, the
difference in no case exceeding 26, excepting in the first three
comparisons, for which the differences are respectively 117, 80,
and 40. This circumstance might be supposed to indicate a
discrepancy in the data for the rays B and C.
Tn order to clear up this point, 1 went through for the seven
principal rays the same calculations as those by which the Table
above was constructed, only using, instead of Ditscheiner’s values
of X, those given by Angstrom in his Recherches sur le Spectre
solaire, pp. 81 & 32. The results in the two preliminary calcu-
lations of the constants A’, B’, C’ were
log A'=1°0870469, log B'=0°3399332, C'’=7:343192;
log A'=1:0576341, log B/=0°2657302, C’=7-028368.
The excesses of the calculated values of X resulted as follows :—
| l
i
| A Angstrom’s Excess of calculated wave-length. |
_ Former
Ray. Wave- |
| length. | By first | By second | M ee |
} . 3 . Mean.
| calculation. calculation.
| Bijis.- | 68671 | Oo | +191 | +95 | +658
See | 65621 | —I31 | 0 |. —65 .| . —40
Dy sseee: | 58921 | —108 | — 67 | iden (ellie
Bit. | 52691 | 0 Ae aig miceigs !ijy venus
a | 48607 | + 13 Sane 1G dpe
Bees... _ 45073 Pes | ke 12
= ode | 39681 | - 52 | eet 16 + 8
276 Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
nearly the same law as in the former comparison, and that the
differences between the results of the first and second calcula-
tions are, for these three rays, even greater than before. These
inferences make it probable that the discrepancies are not due to
error in Ditscheiner’s wave-lengths for the rays B and C.
I next performed the same calculations with Fraunhofer’s
values of w for flint-glass No. 13 and Ditscheiner’s values of X,
and obtained the following results :—
By first calculation,
log A'=1-1982448, log B/=0-5816970, C!’=8-687700;
by second calculation,
log A'=1°1255825, log B'=0°4350178, C!’=7-746712.
Excess of calculated wave-length.
Ray. | Value of pw.) Value of 2.
By first | By second Mean
calculation.| calculation. ;
1B} dgagoe 162775 68833 0 + 32 + 16
(ipl eas: 162968 65711 +7 0 + 4
Ro! 59053 —88 —147 —117
IBY césoed 163504 58989 Gey oly 95 _ 53
1B) o5 386 164202 52783 0 — 65 — 32
BF accee 164826 48687 +47 0 + 23
Go en ee 1-66029 43170 0 + 10 + 5
HM S48 1:67106 39742 —69 0 — 35
In this case there is not the same discrepancy between the
comparisons for the rays B and C as in the two former calcula-
tions, and the law of the mean excesses is in some degree altered.
It must not, however, be concluded that the previous discord-
ances arose from inaccuracy in either or both of Ditscheiner’s
values of yu for those rays, because it is possible that differences
in the character of the results may be due to differences in the
qualities of the glasses employed, and that the dispersion-formula,
which can only be regarded as approximate, may apply more
accurately in proportion as the refractive and dispersive powers
are larger. This point will be adverted to again presently.
It being uncertain to which of the two lines D Fraunhofer’s
determination of mw applies, I have compared the calculated
value of X with the observed value for each line. ‘The excesses,
given above within brackets, show that the more refrangible line
is considerably more in accordance with the theory than the other.
The calculations were then repeated with the same values of
pw and with Angstrom’s values of © already cited, and the wave-
length obtained for D was compared, as above, with the observed
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light. 277
wave-lengths of both lines, viz. 58951 and 58891, the mean be-
tween which was used in the previous comparison. The results
from the two sets of data were as follows :—
log A’=1-2351358, log B'=0-6461311, C!=9-229205 ;
log A'=1°1215922, log B/=0:4245740, C'=7-699899.
Excess of calculated wave-length.
Ray.
By first By second
Wire iion. Ne iG Mean.
Beast . 255.5: « )) +106 + 53
Oe Geen -43 0 = 4)
D j —94 —135 —I114
Se ae i) | —34 Ypy 75 ae 54
Big tet seis. 0 — 58 — 29
te a +37 0 + 18
(Cri a 0 + 30 + 19
PME ees cetecs —118 0 — 59
Here again the mean excesses for B and C are more accord-
ant than those deduced by the former calculation from Ditschei-
ner’s values of uw and the same values of A. Also the law of the
mean excesses agrees generally with that of the means obtained
by the next preceding calculation, although their amounts are
somewhat larger. As the more refrangible of the lines D again
gives more consistent results than the other, the theory, I think,
may be considered to have decided that this line was bisected by
Fraunhofer. In future calculations I shall assume that this was
the case.
It remains to discuss more particularly the consequences of
applying the dispersion-formula to substances of different densi-
ties and different refractive powers. With this object in view I
begin with comparing Ditscheiner’s values of » for the seven
principal rays (that for D being 58989), with values calculated
by the formula from Fraunhofer’s refractive indices for flint-glass
No. 23 (prism of 60°) and flint-glass No. 8. The specific gravi-
ties of the two substances are respectively 3°724 and 3°512 (that
of No. 13 is 3°723). In these two instances the calculation of
A', B', C' was made from one set of data, viz. the observed values
of w and X for the rays B, KH, G. The following results were
obtamed, C.—O, signifying the excess of the calculated above
the observed value of %:—
For No. 23,
log A’=1:0667953, log B'=0°2920263, C'=7-095094;
for No. 3,
log A'=1:0581414, log B!=0°2846254, C’=7-061636.
278 Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
Flint-glass Flint-glass
Ray. No. 23. Ca—O,. No. 3. Cva—O,.
Value of z. Value of pu.
SL Baccaoe 1:62660 0 160204 0
Gcpaoe 162847 6 1:60380 —128
LD pendehaes 1:63367 —36 1-60849 —131
Bees es 164050 0 1°614538 0
Hat ce sc 1-64676 + 6 162004 + 48
Gee 1:65885 0 163077 0
EL oes 1-66969 +23 1:64037 — 28
Here it is observable that the values of C,—O, for No. 23,
like those for the similar substance No. 13, are very small, and
considerably less than the values for No. 3. The law of the
excesses of calculation for the latter substance is nearly the same
as that of the excesses deduced with the same values of X from
Ditscheiner’s values of w, but they are of larger amount, at the
same time that the refractive indices are less. It seems, therefore,
that the dispersion-formula becomes inexact in proportion as the
refractive power of the substance is less than that of No. 13 or
No. 23. I found, in fact, on applying it, just as in the last two
instances, to Fraunhofer’s crown-glass No. 138, the specific gra-
vity of which is 2°535, and the refractive and dispersive powers
very low, that it altogether failed. Yet, since the results of the
other calculations seemed to indicate generally a systematic de-
viation of the calculated from the observed vaiues cf X, there
was a probability that the deviations were such as might be cor-
rected by a more approximate formula, and that the failure in
the instance of the crown-glass might be due to inadequate ap-
proximation, and not to error in the principles on which the
formula was founded. In order to obtain a nearer approxima-
tion I reasoned as follows.
Ii the principles of the theoretical investigation be true, the
variations of «* for a given substance depend wholly on varia-
: ; é 1
tions of 503 that is, “2 is a function of 52 and constants. We
may therefore assume that
Uo ay gu
what SESE
To ascertain the degree of approximation attainable by this series,
I first applied it in the instance of the crown-glass No. 13,
taking only the first three terms. The values of Ag, Aj, Ao, cal-
culated from the subjoined values of « and A for the rays B, H, H,
were found to be
A =2'254474, A,=[0-4926929], —A,=[1:2120022].
+ —* + &e.
Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light. 279
Hence the following results were obtained, C,—O, signifying
the excess of the calculated above the observed value of p:—
Ray. [en Ye GAO.
iz) oadeeaae 152431 68833 0:00000
feeb). 152530 65711 — (00288
te 1-52798 5:8989 —0-00142
Pt ca. : 1-53137 52783 0:00000
1.1 iin ea 153434 4:8687 | -10-00080
Gee a 1-53991 43170 | +0-00100
Hine. 2S. 154468 39742 0:00000
The values of C,—O, forthe rays C, D, F, G, inasmuch as they
correspond to large values of C,—QO,, show that it is necessary
to take into account a greater number of terms of the series. It
was, in fact, to be expected, from what was said above, that an
approximation could not be obtained by determining only three
constants.
The above data for the rays B, D, F, H having been employed
for calculating the constants of four terms of the series, the
results were
A =2'290885, A,=[0-2260364], —A,=[0-8234811],
Ag= [1°7942593)].
Hence on calculating the values of w for the rays C, E, G by
means of these constants and the above values of X for the same
rays, the excesses C,,—O,, to five places of decimals were found
to be respectively + 0-00001, 0-00000, —0-00006. These re-
sults prove that the relation between mw and X for this substance
is very closely expressed by taking account of only four terms of
the series.
Lastly, I employed the same series to four terms to calculate
C,—O,, for the rays C, EH, G for water, the means (to five places
of decimals) of two determinations of the refractive indices by
Fraunhofer being adopted, viz.
Bu=1:33096, Cu=1:33171, Dw=1:33358, Ew=1-33585,
Fu=1:33780, Gu=1:34128, Hu=1°34417.
Calculations made with the data for B, D, F, and H gave
Ape 7438267, 7A = (010493790) A, — [(0:9854382"
Aa— (l-8i7 2302) ;
and the values of C,—O, found for the rays C, EH, G were re-
spectively —0:00002, +0°00002, —0-00005. These differences,
280 = Prof. Challis on a Theory of the Dispersion of Light.
which are of the same order as those between the different expe-
rimental determinations of yw, sufficiently attest the accuracy of
the formula. 7
I take occasion to advert here to a memoir by the Astronomer
Royal in the Philosophical Transactions for 1868 (part 1, p. 29),
the object of which is to calculate the wave-lengths correspond-
ing to Kirchhoff’s scale-measures of lines of the spectrum, in
order to increase the scientific value of these measures. The
calculations for this purpose are based upon Ditscheiner’s deter-
minations of the wave-lengths for the lines B, C, D, H, F, G.
Kirchhoff’s measure is expressed as a function of the correspond-
ing wave-length by a simple algebraical formula of interpolation
containing six constants, the values of which are found by means
of the scale-measures and wave-lengths of the above six lines.
Mr. Airy chose this method because he did “ not know any phy-
sical reason for adopting one formula in preference to another.”
The method appears not to have been successful, several of the
differences between the computed and observed wave-lengths in
the part of the spectrum between F and G ranging between 800
and 900, and in some cases exceeding the latter number. In
the Table given in this communication, the greatest difference
between the calculated and observed values of X in the case in
which the calculations were founded on the values of w and X
for only the three lines B, BH, G is 106, a few larger (evidently
affected by errors of observation) being excepted. The superior
accuracy of the results thus obtained is not to be attributed to
my calculations having been made with refractive indices instead
of Kirchhoff’s measures, because these are data of the same kind as
the others and equally trustworthy. My better success is rather to
be accounted for by the advantage I have taken of the indications
of the Undulatory Theory of Light, and may, I think, be justly
regarded as some evidence of the truth of the proposed theory of
Dispersion. Since Kirchhoff’s scale-measure is a function of p,
the results of the foregoing calculations made by assuming for
2 Ne cod: rag ae ei oni
#" a series proceeding according to powers of <3, would seem to
prove that, by the intervention of a like series for the scale-
measure, it would be possible to calculate the corresponding
wave-length with great accuracy,
Cambridge, August 20, 1869.
fe 2S la}
XXXIII. Observations of the Corona during the Total Eclipse,
August 7th, 1869. By Professor Epwarp C. Pickrrine*.
AMONG other expeditions to observe the recent eclipse was
one under the direction of Professor Henry Morton, sent
by the Nautical-Almanac Office to photograph the sun. I was
attached to this party to make general and physical observations,
and from our station at Mount Pleasant, Iowa, arrived at the
following results.
It is commonly supposed that the light of the corona is polar-
ized in planes passing through the sun’s centre, and that it shines
by reflected light. Wishing to verify this observation, I pre-
pared an Arago’s polariscope (in which the objects are viewed
through a plate of quartz), and a double-image prism of Iceland
spar. The two images appear of complementary colours when
the light is polarized, the tint changing with the plane of polar-
ization. I therefore expected to see two coloured coronas, the
tint of each portion being complementary to that of the part at
right angles to it, and the colour revolving with the polariscope.
In reality the two images were pure white without any traces of
colour; but the sky adjoining one was blue, adjoining the other
yellow. As the instrument is of considerable delicacy, we must
conclude that little or no polarized light is emitted by the co-
rona. The sky adjoining it, however, is polarized in a plane in-
dependent of the position of the sun, since its colour (as seen in
the polariscope) is the same whether above, below, or on one
side of it. The most probable explanation of this curious phe-
nomenon is, that the earth beyond the limits of the shadow, being
strongly illuminated, acts as a new source of light, and thus gives
rise to a polarization in a plane perpendicular to the horizon.
In hopes of determining the cause of discrepancy between
this observation and those previously made, I have endeavoured
to learn what form of polariscope has heretofore been used ; but,
unfortunately, in most cases no description has been published.
One observer used a Savart’s polariscope, and, holding it with
its principal plane vertical, found strong traces of polarization in
this plane. This observation, however, agrees with mine if we
suppose that the polarization of the sky was taken for that of
the corona, a natural mistake with this form of instrument.
Another observer, who used a single plate of tourmaline, saw no
evidence of polarization, that of the sky being too feeble to be
perceived in this way. I verified my results with a simple prism
of Iceland-spar, with which two images of the corona were seen
precisely alike and showing no signs of polarization. We can-
not infer from this that the corona is self-luminous, since polar-
* Communicated by the Author.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 255. Oct. 1869. U
282 Prof. E. C. Pickering’s Observations of
ization is produced only by specular and not by diffuse re-
flection.
The spectrum of the corona was observed in the following
manner. A common chemical spectroscope was used; but in-
stead of attaching it to a telescope, it was merely pointed in the
proper direction a short time before totality. As its field of
view was 7 or 8 degrees in diameter, the sun remained in it for
a considerable time, and the spectrum obtained was that due to
the corona, protuberances, and sky near the sun. Qn looking
through the instrument during totality, a continuous spectrum
was seen free from dark lines, but containing two or three bright
ones—one near H, anda second near C. At the time, I supposed
that these were due to the protuberances; but Professor Young,
with a large spectroscope of five prisms, found a line near HE
which remained visible even when the image of the protuberance
‘was moved off the slit, and therefore inferred that it was due
to the corona. He also found the continuous spectrum free
from dark lines—and that one, perhaps three of the bright
lines coincide with those of the aurora borealis. These results
would lead to the belief that the corona is self-luminous, the
bright lines rendering its gaseous nature probable. If it isa
part of the sun, even the remoter portions are one hundred times
as near as the earth, and would receive ten thousand times as
much heat, which would be sufficient to raise any known. sub-
stance to incandescence.
Other observations, however, point to quite a different con-
clusion. A thermometer with blackened bulb was exposed to
the sun’s rays and the temperature recorded every five minutes.
I found that it began to rise some time before contact, descend-
ing again as soon as the moon’s limb became visible. It did
not reach its former temperature until about a quarter of an hour
after the eclipse began, or until a seventh of the sun’s disk was
obscured. The approach of the moon, therefore, appeared to
cause an increase in the sun’s heat. The amount of the change
was only about 1°°3 C., the total difference between this ther-
mometer and one in the shade being about 18° C., or in the
ratio of 1 to 14. This fraction is but one-half of that given
above, owing perhaps to the diminution of heat on the borders of
the sun. During totality the difference between the two ther-
mometers was almost nothing. In examining the photographs
taken by the party, it was noticed that, while the light dimi-
nished near the edge of the sun, the moon’s limb was very di-
stinct, and that there was a marked increase in the light of the
parts nearest it. It was suggested that this might be a subjec-
tive effect ; but an examination of the photographs is sufficient to
convince any one that the appearance is areal one. The glass
the Corona duriny the Total Eclipse, August 7, 1869. 283
positives especially show that this effect extends over a large part
of the sun’s disk. The exposure was rendered instantaneous by
passing a diaphragm with a slit in it in front of the camera, the
rapidity of motion being regulated by a series of springs. Any
irregularity in the motion would cause variations in shade in the
photographs; but these would form bands parallel to the slit,
while the shade mentioned above was not parallel to it and was
curved so as to follow the moon’s edge. Since, then, there is an
increase both of the actinic power and of the heat, it would seem
that these effects are real, since the methods of observing them
are so totally different that no error in one could be introduced
into the other. The only explanation of the phenomenon that
seems possible is to assume the presence of a lunar atmosphere.
The corona would then be caused by refraction, light reaching
the observer from parts of the sun already eclipsed. Although
for various reasons this hypothesis is unsatisfactory, yet it is
strengthened by other observations. The protuberances have
often seemed to indent the moon’s edge, an appearance usually
ascribed to irradiation. Several of the photographs, however,
show this same effect ; and in some of them the exposure was so
short and the edges of the protuberances are so well defined that
it cannot be caused by the intensity of their light, but must have
its origin outside of the eye of the observer. It is noticeable on
all sides of the moon, sometimes in half a dozen protuberances
in a single photograph. An atmosphere of rapidly increasing
density might produce this effect by reflection, and of course
would not influence the corona if it was caused by refraction. On
this supposition reliance could not be placed on measurements
of the moon’s diameter by occultations, or by contacts during
eclipses, and would account for the uncertainty of this constant.
The principal reason for supposing the corona a portion of the
sun is, that during totality it does not appear to move with the
moon, but remains concentric with the sun, or, more properly,
is brightest where the sun’s edge is nearest. Many of the pho-
tographs show this very well, the difference on the two opposite
sides of the moon being very marked. Now this effect would
be explamed equally well by supposing the corona caused by
refraction. For the centres of the sun and moon never differ
during totality by more than half a digit, while the breadth of
the corona is sometimes several times as much ; so that merely
covering a small portion of it would not produce a greater di-
minution of light than would be caused by a slight change in
the direction of the sun’s rays shining through a lunar atmo-
sphere. On the other hand, it is difficult to conceive of an at-
mosphere dense enough to produce these effects, and yet so
transparent that the edges of the full moon are perfectly di-
U2
284 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
stinct, and that the light of the sun during an eclipse should be
increased rather than diminished. Again, we should expect
that such variations would be produced by changes of tempera-
ture that they could scarcely fail to be detected.
We then conclude that the polariscope gives only negative re-
sults, and cannot be regarded as proving that the light is reflected.
The evidence of the spectroscope needs confirmation, since the
dark lines may have been invisible owing to the feeble light of
the corona. but if the observations with it are correct, the self-
luminous character of the corona is established. The thermo-
metric and actinic experiments point towards a lunar atmosphere
as the cause of the corona.
In the above I have endeavoured to give the evidence in favour
of each view, unbiased by any theory, leaving to those best able
to judge to determine whether either explains all the facts ob-
served. The absence of a lunar atmosphere is so generally ad-
mitted, that its existence is suggested only with reluctance, and
merely as the most natural explanation of the observations.
Boston, U.S., Sept. 1, 1869.
XXXIV. Investigations on the Conformity of Vapours to Mariotte
and Gay-Lussac’s Law. By Dr. Hermann Herwie*,
[With a Plate. ]
oni
HE relation which, according to the twofold law of Mariotte
and Gay-Lussac, in the case of an elastic fluid connects
the three quantities the pressure P, the volume V, and the ab-
solute temperature a+¢, cannot, after the experiments of Reg-
nault, be considered strictly valid for permanent gases. Many
important deviations from this law may be acounted for by the
vapours being near their point of condensation. Very few direct
experiments have been made as to the actual relation holding in
the case of vapours between the quantities P, V, and (a+/¢).
More frequently has half this problem been attacked, by assuming
the constancy of one of these three quantities and deducing the
reciprocal dependence of the other two.
The first more nearly exact numbers were given almost simul-
taneously by Bineau and Cahours. Bineaut+ found the vapour-
densities of aceticacid, of formic acid, andof sulphuric acid too high;
whereupon Cahours pointed out the influence of the selection
of too low temperatures by Bineau; for he showed for several
bodies under a constant pressure (of one atmosphere) the mutual
* Communicated by the Author, having been read before the Nieder-
rheimische Gesellschaft fir Natur- und Heilkunde, August and November
1868. Translated by H. R. Greer, Esq., B.A.
t Comptes Rendus, vol. xix. p. 767.
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law. 285
dependence of temperature and density, 7. e. of temperature
and volume. Cahours’s investigations do not justify a wider
conclusion than the general one that these bodies exhibit a
vapour-density more widely different from the theoretical one the
nearer they are to their condensation. Bineau then furnished a
few numbers concerning the relation between all three quantities,
P, V, and a+¢, for the three above-named acids. However,
these few numbers demonstrate only the absolute fact of a de-
parture of vapours from the laws of the ideal gaseous condition.
Regnault showed later* for aqueous vapour, that at low tem-
peratures (from 30° to 55°) it does not conform to the laws of
gases until the tension amounts to about ‘8 of the maximum
tension corresponding to the particular temperature.
More detailed investigations respecting the same vapour were
instituted by Fairbairn and Tate+. These physicists determined
the specific volume of perfectly saturated vapour for temperatures
from 136° to 199° and from 243° to 288° Fahr., and, further,
deduced the coefficient of dilatation for vapour heated some de-
grees above the latter temperature. Their method consists in
heating different quantities of water to the same degree in two
communicating globes; a change in the levels of the mercury
enclosed in them indicates the moment when the smaller mass
of water is changed entirely into vapour, and so a less ten-
sion commences to be exerted. But in this mode of operating
there lurk many sources of error. My own experiments have
above all things assured me of this, that it is by no means at the
same instant when the temperature that has been reached requires
theoretically a certain density that the vapour will indicate the
corresponding pressure, but a certain time is requisite for the
manifestation of this condition. I have found generally that the
vapour does not pass instantaneously even from a superheated
state into another degree of superheating as soon as the external
circumstances are produced. Much more slowly will the forma-
tion of stable conditions proceed at the limit of the saturated
State.
Besides this incorrectness in the method of Fairbairn and
Tate, it appears also, from the arrangement of their bath, to be
scarcely possible that the temperatures prevailing im the globes
should be sharply defined.
Hirn also has investigated the case of aqueous vapourt. He
has calculated the volume of the (superheated) vapour under
pressures of 1, 3°5, 4, and 5 atmospheres, and at a few different
temperatures for each. Thus the degree of the dilatation of super-
heated aqueous vapour is maintained under different circum-
* Mém. Acad. Scien. vol. xxvi. p. 700.
+ Phil. Mag. S. 4. 186], vol. xm. p. 230.
{t Théorte Mécanique de la Chaleur,
286 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
stances. Unfortunately these experiments are not very numerous
(in all about twenty).
Quite recently Horstman has published* experiments on the
interdependence of the pressure, volume, and temperature of the
vapours of bisulphide of carbon and of ether; but these he does
not consider sufficiently trustworthy to warrant the deduction of
a law from them. More correct are his experiments on the inter-
dependence of temperature and vapour-density, under a pressure
of one atmosphere, for ether, water, and acetic acid, which lead
to the same result as the experiments of Cahours.
The survey of these incomplete observations shows that many
experiments are still necessary in order that the problem so
peculiarly interesting for the mechanical theory of heat may
meet with its solution. Even for one limit of all the conditions
of vapour which come into question here, viz. the case of perfect
saturation, a very imperfect support has been afforded by obser-
vations to the theoretical speculations concerning the mecha-
nical theory of heat. According to a method which I will pre-
sently describe, I have attempted to furnish some contributions
to the solution of this problem.
§ 2.
The apparatus, which is intended to render a simultaneous
variation of pressure, volume, and density possible, was indicated
to me by Professor Willner, to whom I return my best thanks
for the friendliness with which he always allows my work to be
carried on in his laboratory.
The vapour was placed over mercury, in a divided carefully
calibrated tube (ad, fig. 1, Plate II.), of 3-9 centims. diameter
and 48 centims. length, which was firmly clamped, with its lower
end open, by means of an india-rubber plug im an iron sheath.
By means of a screw and a piece of caoutchouc this sheath was
fastened in a cavity in a thick iron plate (7 s), 15 centims. long
and 10 broad; in this plate was a second cavity, connected with
the former by an interior canal, and in which a smaller iron
sheath was similarly fastened. In this last sheath there was
fastened, by means of an india-rubber plug, a tube 6°8 centims.
wide, 2°6 centims. long, terminating above in a narrow tube (cd),
which served as a reservoir for the mercury which would overflow
from the calibrated tube when filled with vapour. The apparatus
was placed in a copper bath, 64 centims. high, 25 long, and 16
broad, in the two front sides of which were glass plates, so that
both tubes were visible in their whole circumference during the
observation. On the two other sides of the bath there were cases
closed at the top and cut out of sheet iron; under these the heating
gas-flames could be keptquite steady. The temperature of the bath
* Liebig’s Annalen, Suppl. vol. yi. p. 51.
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law. 287
was indicated by fine Geissler normal thermometers graduated to
the tenth part of a degree, which were controlled by comparison
with other normal thermometers, and by repeatedly checking their
fixed points. By means of a double stirrer, which could be rapidly
moved up and down, a uniform temperature was preserved
throughout the bath. Outside the bath a T-shaped glass tube,
pomn, was now connected with the protruding end of the tube,
ed, by an india-rubber tube and some luting-wax. The descend-
ing branch (0 n) of this tube, which was provided with a perforated
glass cock, was connected with an air-pump, while the other end,
om, conducted into a chloride-of-calcium tube, ~, and thence
into-a manometer, ef. The connexion between these last two
ends was made by means of an india-rubber plug, which em-
braced the narrow tube and was forced into the larger one. All
the points of connexion were so tightly secured that the appara-
tus, so long as it was in use, was perfectly air-tight, even under
the highest ranges of the manometer. A barometer (9) of a
very wide bore gave the atmospheric pressure, whilst a thermo-
meter (¢') placed beside this and the manometer gave the corre-
sponding temperature.
The course of investigation was as follows :—As soon as the
calibrated tube, being perfectly dry, was filled with warm, very
pure and dry mercury, freed to the utmost from air, and when a
bursting bulb containing a weighed quantity of fluid had been
placed on this, it was closed by means of a small wooden
disk, lied on one side with caoutchouc and provided with a
knob on the other, and being then inverted was placed in the
larger iron sheath. The latter operation was rendered possible
by placing about the sheath a wooden case which, filled with
mercury, afforded plenty of room for the purposes of manipula-
tion. Into the smaller iron sheath the tube cd was introduced
half filled with mercury. The remaining half of the same, being
still free, served for the reception of the mercury that over-
flowed from the calibrated tube in the course of the experiment,
while the circumstance that the lower half already contained
mercury facilitated the necessary compression. For compres-
sions, the calibrated tube a 0, as well as the mdia-rubber collar
embracing it, was secured firmly to the iron sheath by means of
iron rods and a cross tie. ‘This portion of the apparatus being
thus prepared was placed in the bath, and, with the principal
.tube in a strictly vertical position, was united, after the fashion
described above, to the other part, which was fastened to a strong
fixed table on which the whole stood. Now, to measure the
mass of air from which such a large tube could scarcely be kept
entirely free, the air in the intermediate part of the apparatus
(dp omue) was greatly rarefied by means of the air-pump while
the bath was kept at a given temperature; and after closing the
288 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
stopcock at n the apparatus was thus kept unchanged for some
time. Hence the air collected itself over the mercury which
lay deep in the tube ab; and when this had been effected, the
tightness of all the communications of the apparatus could be
simultaneously controlled.
Then by varying the pressure of the air in the intermediate
part of the apparatus, the volume of the air confined in the tube
ab was made to vary, and that from the largest to the smallest
possible volume, while the simultaneous states of pressure and
volume were, naturally, measured with the bath at constant
temperature. To determine the pressure there were six mercury-
levels to be measured—besides those of the barometer and ma-
nometer, those in the tubes ab and cd. A very excellent ca-
thetometer with a corrected telescope, by Staudiger of Giessen,
which admitted of reading off to the tenth part of a millimetre,
was used for this purpose. From one set of determinations of
the simultaneous pressure and volume of the enclosed air, the
quantity itself was determined with perfect accuracy. They
could also be applied to the purposes of direct calculation im
afterwards measuring the total tension exerted in the tube ad;
this, however, was never very great.
Now the bulb filled with hquid was burst, and to obtain
the solution of the real problem, viz. the determination of the
volume, pressure, and density of vapour formed under differ-
ent circumstances, we proceeded as follows. The relation be-
tween pressure and volume, always at a constant temperature,
was to be sought from the point of saturation of the vapour up
to the point where, for this temperature, it follows Mariotte’s law ;
and different temperatures would be investigated in this wise. For
this purpose, first of all, a definite temperature of the bath was
maintained with the greatest care, which could be effected very
readily by reason of the large size of the bath (25 litres) and
the mode of heating employed, which was scarcely disturbed by
draughts. It was possible to maintain the temperature invariable
within 0:1 of a degree for a series of hours, and during the time
of measurement to keep it steady to :05 of a degree. The
temperature being constant, then, as in the measurement of
the air, as large a volume as possible of vapour was produced,
and made to pass thence into a smaller volume by means of
the gradual introduction of air into the intermediate part of the
apparatus. However, before taking a measurement of the coex-
isting pressure and volume, a considerable pause was made each
time so as to allow the condition of the vapour to become sta-
tionary. The commencement of the stationary condition could
be recognized by the repeated measurements.
We may remark that the converse process (of passing to a
larger volume from the state of saturation of the vapour by
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law. 289
means of a gradual rarefaction of the air in the intermediate
part of the apparatus) does not recommend itself. We should
then run the risk of individual particles of fluid adhering to the
glass, without evaporating, perhaps much longer than would
correspond with the par ticular temperature and rarefaction of the
air. However, before any measurement was taken, we kept the
vapour for a long time dilated to such a volume that it obeyed
Mariotte’s law a the defined temperature, and then allowed it
to proceed to asmaller volume by the gradual introduction of the
air, whereby a longer time was allowed for the acquisition of a con-
stant condition before each measurement of the vapour, so that we
had more confidence that we were observing circumstances which
actually corresponded to the external pressure and temperature.
The determination of the pressure by the measurement of the
six mercury-levels could be made very accurately with the above-
named cathetometer. The cathetometer itself, which stood on a
strong fixed table, was daily corrected.
Through the telescope of the cathetometer we could clearly
read off the volume of the vapour found in the calibrated tube to
the tenth part of a cubic centimetre. Having measured the
volume and pressure coexisting at the given temperature, we
then subtracted from the latter the pressure exercised under these
circumstances by the air-bubble, which had been determined
first of all. For each temperature, the volume v and the pres-
sure p of the vapour were measured from the maximum of ten-
sion, 2. e. from the saturation of the vapour, to such a distance
from saturation that the vapour followed Mariotte’s law. The
commencement of this latter was manifested by the constancy of
the product pv, which up to this time had been always increasing.
3.
One word here as to the ioetbaey of the numbers thus arrived
at. Neither the apparatus nor the method of investigation can
admit of errors from any other source than the two usual ones,
which cannot be quite avoided, viz. slight variations of tempera-
ture in the bath, and slight irregularities in placing the catheto-
meter on the six quicksilver-levels. As to the first, it has been
already remarked that the variations of temperature arising du-
ring the measurement did not amount to ‘05 of a degree. The
error arising hence in the estimation of the tension (which was not
necessarily in strict accordance with the same temperature, yet at
most could vary from the specified temperature on either side to
the extent of 0°5 of a degree) 1s greater or smaller as the variation
of the tension with the temperature is greater or smaller. The
extreme case must be that of the maximum tension. Taking the
maximum tension of alcohol at 69° as 537°63, a variation of tem-
perature of 0°°05 would correspond to about Lmillim. However,
that the errors which actually occurred never reached these amounts
290 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
is shown by a mutual comparison of the maximum tensions at dif-
ferent temperatures. ‘l’o the sum of the errors in tension 1s still
to be added the influence of the second of the above-named cir-
cumstances, viz. the variation in the position of the cathetometer
when placed successively on the six quicksilver-levels, which can-
not have been of precisely similar form in all respects. But
in general we found under the maximum tension a deviation of
only O°5 of a millim. from the mean; the greatest deviation that
occurred is *6 of a millim. in the case of aleohol at 62°-9, where
the mean of eight measurements of maximum tension amounted
to 96°83 millims., while the measurement in which the aberra-
tion was greatest was 397°43.
From a variation in adjusting the cathetometer on the mercury-
level in the tube contaiming the vapour, and from placing the
tube in a position not exactly vertical, a further error in taking
the volume might be committed, to the amount, perhaps, of 0: 3
of a cubic centimetre. In order to check the errors arising from
this source, we had to see how much one of the products pv,
which for any one temperature already obeyed Mariotte’s law and
were constant, deviated from the mean of all these pv’s, and,
moreover, how widely this mean deviated from the mean values
holding for other temperatures, differently from what is required
by Gay-Lussac’s law. We had also to take the mean of the
vapour-densities for the different temperatures which are derived
from the constant p v of each temperature, and calculate accord-
ingly the true mean values of the constants pv for each tempe-
rature,and then seek for the greatest deviation therefrom. Besides
these errors in volume, the errors in tension already spoken of
would also naturally come into consideration. But we invariably
found much smaller deviations than the extreme deviation, which
arises in the case of alcohol at 69°-9, where, with a volume of 98
cubic centims. and a tension of 127:54 millims., the product
11861 was calculated instead of the true mean value 11797. If
we here assume an error of ‘3 cubic centim. in volume, the ad-
ditional error in tension will only amount to 0:3 millim., which
is far within the specified limits. Upon the whole it follows,
then, that the greatest errors in tension are to be taken at most
at O°6 millim., and of volume at °3 cubic centim., and that these
limits were reached in very exceptional cases only.
§ 4. Hxamination of the Vapour of Alcohol.
The first numbers found, according to the method sketched out,
were those given in the following Table for alcohol. They con-
tain the values of the volume v (in cubic centims.) and of the
tension p (in millimetres of mercury) corresponding to the eight
temperatures examined. ‘There are also given the products pv.
The cessation of saturation, as well as the occurrence of Ma-
riotte’s law, is indicated on each occasion by the horizontal lines.
291
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law.
ZLLLTLFL-801 | &-SOUFFSIL Ze-SFI |9-62
G6LTL 98-11 | L-ZO1OZE11/S3-ES1 GCL
LOSTL FE-L2a1 G6 JO9ELL\CO-FOL |9-02 cSElI
O98SIL FO-6E1 | €-S8 PESLLFPR-LZL| G9 FErll
GESLL9F-FSI | 9-92 a Pow Scelt
CE8IL£9-Z91 | 9-02 9ZSIT GL-861 SCILIFLI
CrSII8é-081 L-C9 IGGFLLGF-S6%| 1 h(SéLl
PEST LZ-S6L | 9:09 JOFFII\Z6-ZFS |T-ZP IZ6E 11
SELL ES-Z1Z | SSS |PGFLI/S0-89% 9-GF IGZELI
IGSLIIFF-91Z | 9-FE JG9ELL|F8-Z0e 1-28 | —_
Seas = COZLLGL-SFhE |L:E8 |66E LT
OALTL. 98-082! 1¢ IZOZLI88-68E 2-8 If 1EL1
PRLIL 20-892 | &-EP IG9LTI|F8-268 ¥-8é |c6ZTl
LLL 20-282 | 8-OF JE6801 1G 96E o-Z6 {IVE
PE9ITIG-GEE| sé -—— C6LLI
G8SLL b-ELE ib 61-L68 \6-S6 L611
(‘Testt Po-PG6E | 6-66 26-968 £-02 IS [601
68PILTE-LPPF} 92 18-968 |€:-06 -—
IPFLL 10-608 | 2-26 68-968 PSI
7 ie oy 88-968 8-LI
ce-Le¢ | 8-61 8-268 L-ZI
L2-L8¢ | 8-91 eF-268 9-91
SIL-8E¢ | €-FI 64-968 |L-F1
ad ft 2 ‘ad ‘a ‘a | cad
86-86
€8-601
¥6-061
GP-SEI
LO-LFL
PSI
90-EL1
F9-98T
86-106
6L-966
E1L-LE6
& 1-686
£0-686
69-T1€
18-S1é
LL-GIE
LLGIE
91€
99-S1E
L¥OL
e901
O90LT
990L1
OfOTl
9VOLT
CGLFEOLL
[-POUESEOrl
c-F6 |ZL01L
16 J9cOLL
£08 \SCtOLl
PL JOSOLL
LOO la
€Z601
Gc60l
Choo!
60601
6F801
peool
£09
9¢
0S
LV
L-8€
L836
ce
ee
8-6E
L1E
I¢
1€
‘ad
68-€S
82-16
GE-86
V9-86
68-201
i8€-FII
09-461
8éL
[1-61
bG-6ET
Le-061
8V-0ST
6F-691
GE-69T
EV-6L1
§0-881
80-C6[
18-G6L
FE-96T
09-961
LL-961
LE-961
PF-961
19-961
8F-961
8-I€T
¢-0é
GEL
GéLl
6-L01
64:96 19L801/69.0L
F-98 |L9801\89-€2L
G98 IScso1|sE-LZ
G64 |6E801)/02-€8
G6L |P9SOL|GP-60T
€-L SZ801/F9-FI
@-EL |LEsolZ- el
——— | F80L0F- Zé
Seo ip if
L49 (90801 62-281
19 |€&ZO19s-Zel
8G J6IZOL/ES- TFL
9-¢G JESSOL9E- EFL
Pay SS ease
SL-FPl
G-6G 8E-FFI
9V GLP
8-6P L9-FF1
£-6V [6: FFL
G-GP OG-FFI
8-86 [8-PPI
8é SL: OFT
a ‘ad | ad
ee ad ae
g8-€¢1
G-LF
6:6EL
¢-661
£-66
08-76
68
1-98
v-18
[-82
92
9-€2
6-69
£89
cg
6V
6¢
VIE
LG
ec90I
Ce90l
90901
40901
FZ9OL
&CCOL
G¢SOI
SPFOL
LOGI
crrol
9FFOL
€8-¢9 | S-T9TPOFO!
9-FL | GEFILEFOI
99-62 | €-Seyrorol
O€-G6 | €-TLIj60FOT
6-00T | 6-GOT60P01
LO-FOL | F-LOUZPEOL
OF-FOL | [- LOL
89-90L | 6-26
96-L0L | 6-S6
F0-801 | 9-68
F8-L01 | §-éL
LE-801 | G-9G
£8-LOL | ¥-OF
th a ‘ad
€8-09
60-99
BL-0L
[1-62
GP-PL
16-PL
60-92
€6-9L
PL LL
L9:LL
CLL
G8-LL
O8-LL
19:
GLLL
Lévy
L-ALWIG6GTLOL
GSSULZZOL
LVUOTZOL
V-EVUPLIOL
8-6€LEC10L
G6-8E1y-
8-9ELPPLOT
——— 6001
GEE lSs00l
—~ = 97001
6SAl
G-611
6-65
€-€8
£04
L8G
] @1aVJ,
V-SE6
GES
L616
E16
LL06
9L-2P
GO-FP
8h-9P
LL-LV
18-89
£-406
€G-6F |8-G06
8S-6P |F-E0E
€8-6F |9- L0G
GE-6P
86-0 |8-L61
|66-0¢ |€-L6E
£-0¢ 6-881
éL-6P \E-8L
1¥-0¢ |6-F9T
GF-0¢ |F- IST
292 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
The size of the air-bubble which was present amounted to
‘064 cubic centim. for 0° and a pressure of 0°760 millim. The
weight of the alcohol examined was 0248 grm. Hence are cal-
culated, for the following different temperatures, the final vapour-
densities which correspond to the mean value of the constant pv
for each temperature.
23
1550
30°5
See ee
1:555
36°4
1°555
41°9
1:550
47°8
1°552
Temperature .. 69:9
1:548
57°8 : 62:9
1-351 1-552
Vapour- density .
That these eee are all too small is due simply to this—
that the alcohol that was used was not entirely free from water,
but had been allowed to stand in the air for a considerable time
in a flask closed by only a cork. On this the first filling of the
apparatus, it was my intention only to test its accuracy. How-
ever, as it immediately proved itself to be reliable, I then carried
on this first investigation to the end. But even as regards the
object in view, it is of small consequence whether the alcohol
were perfectly pure or contained some water; it 1s only necessary
to keep in mind that the numbers obtained above refer to alcohol
not entirely free from water.
A comparison of the vapour-densities obtained at different
temperatures shows clearly that the vapour-densities are con-
stant. It therefore exhibits the simultaneous appearance of
Gay-Lussac’s law and that of Mariotte; and, indeed, nothing
different could have been expected a prior. At the same time
it is shown experimentally that by means of the apparatus here
employed the vapour-densities can be accurately determined even
at low temperatures (much below the boiling-point of the bodies
examined), which is worth noting, by reason of the difficulty
encountered in the determination of the vapour-densities of
several bodies when at a high temperature according to the
usual methods.
A further comparison of the figures entered in column pu,
the particulars of which exhibit the magnitude of the deviation
of the vapour from Mariotte’s law at different temperatures,
shows us that at each approach to condensation the deviation
increases with ascending temperatures. That it does so in the
case of water, at least, Clausius tells us in his first memoir*.
If the volume and density of perfectly saturated vapour, which
thus has absorbed the last drop of liquid, be denoted by v, and
pi, while V and P are the corresponding quantities for a condition
of the vapour in which it already obeys Mariotte’s law at the
specified temperature, then the quotient —— will increase with
increasing temperatures. 171
* The Mechanical Theory of Heat. London, 1867. Van Voorst.
293
Furthermore we may also see from the above numbers an in-
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law.
crease of the product p,v, with an increasing temperature. Put
PV
=a (¢) and p,v,=¢(¢); then we shall have f(t) and (2)
1
functions of the temperature ¢, and increasing with it. The
product of these functions, f(t) .(¢), or PV, must be a function
of the temperature such that PV=const. (a+2), if by (a+?)
the absolute temperature is denoted. This relation, as well
as the proportionate mode of increase of both the func-
tions f(z) and @(¢) when taken at all possible magnitudes, led
me to the conjecture that perhaps the assumption f(t) =c Va+t
and o(t)=c, “a+t, where c and c¢, are constant, might fall in
with the numbers found. In order to prove this, in the first
place I selected some of the observed temperatures in which I
had seen with tolerable precision the point of cessation of maxi-
mum tension (2. ¢. I knew the value of v,), and calculated
therefrom, as the value of c, c=:059487, on the assumption
f(tj)=ceVa+t. With these values I then calculated the value
of v, for the other temperatures, where I had not so accurately
observed the limit of the maximum tension. The following
Table contains the values of v,, as well as the two members of
the calculation.
TABLE I. a.
Temperature ¢ ......... ZS LOO cra oOe4) | -Al-O)) Agos.|'57°:8) 620-9) 690-9
eee 10191 | 10421 | 10625 | 10852 | 11038 | 11391 | 11554 | 11826
Mean PV corrected
for the mean vapour- +| 10183 | 10442 | 10644 | 10834 | 11038 | 11381 | 11554 | 11797
density 1552 ......
ae 17-205 | 17-421 | 17-590! 17-745 | 17-911 | 18-188 | 18-328 | 18-518
0:0595 Va+t= (— J 1-02347) 1-03632| 1-04638) 1-05560| 1-06547| 1-08195| 1-09028) 1-10158
17]
Py, calenlated from ]} 5) | ‘ x x
this by the aid ofPV. | 9949 | 10076 | 10172 , 10263 | 10359 | 10519 | 10597 | 10709
SS aaa 50-23 | 77-58 | 108-00 | 144-70 | 196:50 | 315-80 | 396-83 | 537-63
», calculated from this.) 198-1 |129:9 | 94:2 | 709 | 52-7 | 333 | 267 | 19-9
Since the accurate determination of v, can hardly be made
in this way by experiment, because the tension recedes so slowly
from the maximum that the differences of the tension in the
neighbourhood of the real v, he within the errors of obser-
vation, and since in the investigation of alcohol I had not so
carefully noticed the cessation of the maximum tension, I give
therefore, as follows, the extreme limits between which v, must
always fall without directly contradicting the observations ; also
I have calculated for these limits the values of ¢ in the formula
f(t)=c Vatt.
294 Dr, H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
TaBLeE I. 0.
pe i 23° | 30°-5 | 36°4 | 41°-9 | 47°-8 | 57°-8 | 62°-9 | 69°-9
| |
Tate of 197°8 125°9 89-6 69:9 52-5 on yy. 19-8
se of 201-6 | 133 95 72 544 | 342 | 275 | 205
‘Correspond- 0:05957,) 0: 06137, 0:06247) 0:0 F036) 0:05974' 0:06004' 0:06304' 0:05977
ING, Cae «i. 0:05613! 0:05809 0:05898) 0:05860) 0: 05765, 0: 03793 0: 0577, 0.05773
A consideration of these figures gives great Seba to the
assumption that in ¢ we have a genuine constant; and compa-
ring the v, calculated with c=:0595, as above, with the parti-
culars of the tension in the neighbourhood of these volumes, as
they may be seen in Table I., it would appear with the highest
probability that these values are correct. Hence it appears to
me that the relation ='0595 Va+t holds actually, at least
joey
for such temperatures of alechol-vapour as have been ex-
amined, ‘Taking this relation as universally correct for alcohol,
it follows hence that, for the particular temperature at which
0595 /a+t=1, the product p,v,=PV,; 2. e. that at this tempe-
rature the vapour of alcohol, so soon as it 1s separated from the
fluid, already follows Mariotte’s law. As to the temperature at
which this happens, it is calculated from the value c=:059487
as £=9°'589 Celsius. The investigation, unfortunately, could
not be carried on as far as this temperature in the warm weather
of the season; ice thrown into the bath would not have given
sufficiently steady temperatures. Moreover the deviation of the
vapour from Mariotte’s law which exists at 23° is already so small,
that it only slightly oversteps the possible errors of observation
in the slight tension belonging to that temperature. Now,
whether the relation PAG )="0595 Vatt holds good quite to
the temperature of 9°°5 for vapour of alcohol, and whether at’
that and lower temperatures the vapour follows Mariotte’s law
when free from fluidity, or whether a slight departure from
Mariotte’s law takes place in the opposite direction (perhaps
even according to the law f(é)=c Vatt t), just as Regnault
found for hydrogen under a high pressure*, is a question which
must be decided by further investigations, attended, of course,
by greater difficulties; and these I intend to execute.
With respect to the particulars of the products pv which lie
between p,v, and PV, after many trials I have not been able to
find any formula to which these products would conform as to an
actual law. It is probable that the relation actually existing for
these products is complicated, like the tension-curve of saturated
vapours, the theoretical expression for which has hitherto been
sought in vain.
* Mém. del’ Acad. des Sciences, vol. xxi. p. 395.
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law. 295
§ 5. Examination of the Vapour of Chloroform.
As the second fluid I took chloroform ; during the examination
of this, in order to avoid the chemical influence of light, I
covered the side of the bath which was turned towards the win-
dow with a piece of yellow glass. For this preparation, as well
as for the bisulphide of carbon, which will be discussed further
on, both of them perfectly pure, I return my best thanks to Dr.
Glaser. The following Table gives the numbers for chloroform,
obtained in the same manner as those given for alcohol :—
TaBLE IJ.—Chloroform.
30°°4, 39°°8. 49°°8, 64°°8.
v. D- pu. | v. Ps de| PVN Bs es hl ganas gS 2 Del Pye
29-3 | 243-21 35°6 | 354:58 2192 51413,
48-1 | 243°19 38 | 354:98 28-2 | 514-25
55°7 | 242-92 48:4 | 354-76 35°6 | 514-14 27°4 | 843°75/23144
61°3 | 243-19 57°5 | 854°67 42-1 | 513-76 34:4 | 687°31/23664
70°7 | 243-24 60°5 |:354°86 —|———-—|——__}_ 40°5 | 588°72 23856
74:7 | 243-08 - -| 45 | 504-74/22730) 40:8 | 584-78 23871
83°5 | 242°78 63°4 | 382°73.21761} 51-7 | 443°84|22946) 47-4 | 505°42/23962
87:2 | 242-99 70:6 | 314-08 22175} 58-9 | 390-70, 23016] 57 =| 421-49, 24025
—— 77-~—(| 290°57|22372) 65-7 | 851-07|28065] 63 | 382°92/'24124
91 | 238-56|21709) 83 | 269-94'22403} 74:2 | 311-77|23183) 70-7 | 841-58/24149
92°7 | 234:55/21738} 91-6 | 244-96. 22434] 83-7 | 276°63/238151] 83:3 | 290:98)'24236
98-9 | 220:09|21776] 98-6 | 227-66,22452} 91-4 | 253-75|23188) 92-7 | 261-69,24254
104-8 | 208-10|21809/103-8 | 216:99,22524] 97-7 | 237-40|23193)100°8 | 240-94 24295
112-4 | 194:53|21862|— 191-6 | 228-43)/23215}100°9 | 240-74 24304
120 | 182-44,21899]109°5 | 206-14 22572)108-4 | 214-58/23260/11 1-2 | 218-69 24315
——125'6 | 179°75|22572H117 =| 198-98)/238271j113-1 | 215-13/24827
132°5 | 165-54 /21930}129-9 | 173-90 22589j; ——- 116 | 209°96 24347
140-7 | 155°70/21908]1380 | 173-60,22567}118°6 | 196°44,23306)122 | 199-90)/243938
(141°3 | 155:25/21931)141-2 | 160°33'22644}124 =| 188-05|23319 — -
183°1 | 175-25)23321j128 | 190°95|24442
145-4 | 160°29|23307/128'3 | 190°37|24423
128-6 | 189-79 24407
136°5 | 179-15)24447
140°8 | 173°64, 24450
The air-bubble amounted in this case to 0°31 cubic centim.
at O° and under a pressure of 760 millims. The weight of the
chloroform examined was ‘1406 grm. The final constant vapour-
densities calculated therefrom are, for the different temperatures,
the following, which agree sufficiently :—
Temperature ......| 30°4 | 39°8 | 49°8 | 642-8 |
| ee i
Vapour-density ....../ 4190 | 4191 | 4-191 | 4-185 |
These vapour-densities differ more from the theoretical one
(4°138) than can be accounted for by small errors in weighing.
Indeed I think I remarked for some hours (before the beginning
96 Dr. H. Herwig’s Investigations on the Conformity
of the measurements), when the chloroform was not yet protected
by the yellow glass, that a small trace had been already decom-
posed. This, however, could not make a greater difference in the
weight than 1:5 milligrm. The examination of bisulphide of car-
bon, which will be subsequently described, gave a similar result,
where the traces of the sulphur which might be separated during
the boiling out and sealing of the bursting bulb also could not
have produced the difference of weight necessary in order to bring
the vapour-densities actually found into accordance with the theo-
retical ones. That in both these cases no error can lurk in the
method which would induce the differences may be indubitably
recognized from this, viz. that at each temperature the final
vapour-densities for the most various volumes are, within the
limits of errors of observation, exactly proportional to the final
vapour-densities at all other temperatures. Besides, in general
the experimental determinations of the vapour-densities do not
rigorously lead to the theoretical densities. Even though many
of the old determinations could not give any exact results because
no attention was paid to the question whether the vapours were
sufficiently far from their condensation, yet deviations from these
causes must always give only an increase in the vapour-density
over the theoretical values, while a converse course of determina-
tions would furnish equally important smaller values.
Now, as to the relation holding for vapour of chloroform cor-
d
responding to that found for alcohol, viz. eee Vatt, I
11
first of all conjectured that, even if the like holds here also,
the constant ¢ might perhaps be different from that found to be
valid for chloroform, in such sort that the temperature at which
the perfectly saturated vapour follows Mariotte’s law might,
for chloroform, lie as much under 9°°5 as the boiling-point of
chloroform under atmospheric pressure lies under the boiling-
point of alcohol. Meanwhile the first set of experiments showed
decisively that this was not the case; on the other hand, the
surprising result presented itself, that in the admittedly valid
formula Lae Wa+t the constant ¢ had the same value as for
1
alcohol. in what follows I give the Table of v, calculated from
the specified relation with c=-0595, and at the same time, as for
alcohol, the extreme limits of v, and c, which are consistent with
the observations. In this case I have sought to observe more
accurately the exact point of retreat of the vapour from the state
of maximum tension. I must remark that at the last tempera-
ture (64°°8) the apparatus unfortunately did not sustain the
compression which was necessary in order to arrive at the state
of maximum tension. The only observations that I could make
of Vapours to Mariotte and Gay-Lussac’s Law. 297
with certainty at 64°°8 are those given in Table II. But by the
help of one approximately estimated maximum tension, which is
taken from the relation of the remaining maximum tensions to
those of Regnault* (touching which I may remark that the
difference between the two is greatly affected by the difference
in the preparations), the probably correct value of v, may be
caleulated, since with a small value of v, and a high value of p,a
mistake in the latter to the amount of a few millimetres would
alter the value of v, only very little.
TasueE II. a.
@ewmmperature 2.1 605 5....4.. 30°°4 39°°8 49°8 64°°8
Mean of the observed PV...) 21923 22590 23313 24434
Mean PV corrected for
the mean vapour-den- 21928 22602 23313 24399
STS) ts
eos PV
00595 Natt(=—) eee] 103614 1:05209 1:06881 109331
) ves | . :
Pv, calculated from this by 216 ;
‘the aid of PV corrected ae ASE alle Se
P,, mean of the observations.| 243-08 3894°77 514:07 870 nearly
v, calculated from this ...... 87°] 60:6 42-4 25°7
Table II. d.
MeMpPErAtUrert, 2326..60).0.60 30°°4, 39°°8. 49°°S.
Extreme limits i Wooe see ou ae rk
pe orespomding ¢ in: the 0-05949 0-:05961 | 0-05997
ratio 7 Se NGeEp (|| . 0.08858 0-05864 005871
iar
A survey of these Tables shows how closely the assumption
pe, =0:0595 “a+¢ harmonizes with the observations. Hence
1
also for alcohol and chloroform the same temperature (9°°5) must
exist at which the vapours of both fluids, so soon as they pass
from a fluid state, follow Mariotte’s law; the point of maximum
tension (very different at 9°5 5) appears to have no influence on
the position of this temperature.
§ 6. Examination of the Vapour of Bisulphide of Carbon.
To prove perhaps the universal validity of this remarkable
phenomenon, there was taken for the third body bisulphide of
carbon, the maximum tension of which at 9°°5 is considerably
greater than that of chloroform. This body, having been pre-
pared so as to be quite pure, was protected from the hight during
the investigation by a piece of yellow glass. The following Table
gives the simultaneous v and p for five temperatures, and there-
with the EUs products pv.
* Mém. de l Acad. des Sciences, vol. xxvi. p. 403.
Phil Mag. Ss. 4. Vol. 38. No: 255. Oct. 1369. xX
H
f
i
’s Investigations on the Conformity
o
5
i
Dr. H. Herw
298
“‘uoqdey jo opiydinsiq—"] J] Z1aV I,
6-EF1
V-LPL
TA I
V-Sél
6-661
F611
8-COL
6-G6
G18
ECL
L-é£
L-2L
61
6:69
£09 laa
L-€9
GIG
LIV
€689t | 0¢-9LT cr
CL89L | 86-1ZL €-SE1
6SS9L | Z8-LéL 6-181 PECOl | 68-FIT
C6LLT | GILT T-991 O889L | ¢8-08T 661 CeS9T | L8-91T
LLLIA | G@1il 8-6¢1 LEB9l | SP-LET V-éél ElS9t | €0-061
PE8LI 161 €-L¥I LYSLI | 8S-LO1 Los ee ele rLsat
SOLLI | SY-FEL GGEl IPGLL | SV-GIL | C6-SST [OS9L | 88-€9T ¢-ZOL EEC9T | £6-L61
108Z1 | 0S-0FI L-961 CLELL | 60-FET 9-IFL SZL9I | 8Z-I8T €-26 CEcCOL | PP-SEL
a oe GGG Ie OL Ook 6-G6l 6IZ9T | OL-261 8-98 GOS9OT | £6-S¢T
SELL | EP-FSI CHL ia ——— |} 68991 | £0-SIé OTF eee ee
669L1 | 10-841 ¥:66 SSFZL | €1L-8¢I 9-011 OL99L | 06:91L6 09 S9OFOL | 99-821
S99LT | IIL-L1G L-&8 6CFLL | GE-ELT LO == Ss | | OW ORCS Le) 6e:c0c
G6ELL | PE-S9S €-99 OZELIL | 6P-EIS 9-18 98-€66 G9 L6E9L | 62-926
LVGLI | ¥S-SIE 9-G¢ SSELI | £8-086 8-9 CO-V66 L-¢¢ I8€9L | 06-L66
PLFLI | S6-68E SPV I6ZZ1 | Z1-(Ee G:6G 06-€66 ¢-P¢ GOE9L | PE-LES
ereZt | 6£-60¢ té S6IZI | 99-20F L-GV 16-862 6-E¢ PLEOL | EL-L6%
——— aa |. COLL sh POsSSP. 9-LE LG-¥66 S2G pc; aa > ae
16-L€¢ Pall Geese aoa eg ee ae eon 18-€66 P-9E 86-VES
LG-1E¢ 1-L6 8¢-19P LVE 0&-V6%6 LVE GL PES
@L-18¢ 9-FG O€-L9P 6-68 EV-V66 C-€6 C9-PE&S
SF-1é¢ GES Ce 19P 1:82 GO-F66 0G 8S: PES
8é-[E¢ 1-16 66: L9F 6-E1 LE-F6EG ial 09-FES
“ad a “a sad a 1) cad “a a ‘ad “d
*6- 36°5
: nutes’ exposure)
2060. Pierre Pointue, fasting.... (5 minutes’ | 35:5
exposure) |
2080. Planpraz, about 4 hours after prea 345
fast. . (4 minutes’ exposure)
About 2100. Under Pavillon ‘du Mont Fréty, fasting 35-0
(about 5 minutes’ exposure)
About 2260. Arriving at Pierre a échelle, in full di-?! 36:5
gestloOn ...% 5% (6 minutes’ exposure) {
3050. Arriving at “ Grands Mulets,” fasting... 395°8
3362. Arriving at Col du Géant, fasting .. (over | 34:5
5 minutes’ exposure) {
3900. Arriving at Grand Plateau (Mont Blanc), [
about 100 metres below, fasting.. (60r} 35°6
7 minutes’ exposure) |
4000. Immediately on arrival at Grand Plateau,
not walking, fasting (rose very rapidly > 34°5
tOVAHNS) swe eavhoa we cee Belek
4331. Déme du Gouter (Mont Blanc)...... 34°6
MM carte’ Set eer 353
Twelve observations. Lowest temperature 34°°5
XL. On that portion of the Report of the Astronomer to the
Madras Government on the Eelipse of August 1868 which
recounts his Spectroscopic Observations. By J. Herscuen,
Lieut. RB
6 ies instrument used by Mr. Pogson for this portion of his
observations was of the same pattern, it 1s believed, as
that used by the present writer. In the annexed Table the
positions of Mr. Pogson’s bright hnes are fixed with all the ac-
curacy at present attainable, by comparison with data in the
writer’s possession.
The first column indicates Fraunhofer’s lines.
The second shows readings taken im the early part of 1868
with the Royal Society’s spectroscope referred to above.
The third is deduced from the second by the empirical for-
* Communicated by the Author.
Lieut. J. Herschel on the Eclipse of August 1868. 339
mula 86:°2H +1440, which refers the readings to another scale
and zero.
In the following column are shown Mr. Pogson’s readings of
the solar lines, of which those in ztalics are bright-line measures*.
The dark-line measures correspond with converted measures in
the previous column; and the close agreement shows that the
empirical formula is correct, and that the dispersions of the two
instruments are commensurable throughout. Mr. Pogson’s dark
solar lines are also unmistakably identifiable with B, C, D, 4, F,
aud another, unnamed line, instead of those whose names he has
assigned,
In the fifth column, those in the fourth are converted by the
empirical formula 4°40 P — 6207, which refers the readings to
the scale and zero of that part of Kirchhoff’s map in which the
bright lines must be placed.
The sixth column is derived from the second by the formula
440(86°2 H + 1440) —6207, or 379°311+129, and is merely
a check on the identity of the lines supposed to have been mea-
sured.
The seventh column shows Kirchhoff’s measures. Compared
with the two previous ones, it is evident that the empirical for-
mulz by which they are obtained are only applicable strictly to a
small portion of the spectrum—as was to be expected.
The last columns show the positions on Kairchhoff’s scale of
all the bright solar lines of which measures are available, with
their (temporary) reference letters.
Mr. Pogson’s data would be more valuable had the dark solar
lines been measured zmmediately before and after the event ; but
he assures the writer that there was little, if any, change of zero
to be detected. He is also quite confident of the accuracy of the
bright-line measures.
It is very remarkable that the red lme Ha was quite unseen.
Equally noteworthy is the evident preeminent brilliance of the
green lines (measured) which he describes as very bright,
although (owing perhaps to distressed eyesight) he was uncon-
scious at the time of their absolute colour.
No green lines have yet been seen here with an uneclipsed
sun, although H y is frequently seen. Unless, therefore, greatly
increased dispersion can be brought to bear, future eclipses must
be depended on for the identification of these lines, whose exist-
ence has been vouched for by four observers of the late memorable
one.
* [Sic in MS. The italics indicated are evidently the measures corre-
sponding to P; and P, in column 9,—J. F. W. H.]
340 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
Taste showing the identification of Mr. Pogson’s Solar Dark
Lines, and calculated places of his Solar Bright Lines, and
also the positions of the other known bright fines.
ie DL aes: 4, 5. 6. 7 8. 9.
aan Positions
ene with Mr. Pog- of known
hofer’s Sey ae Fd son’s [py — gt — erent Reference
letters. spectro- 86'2 H |measures.} 4°40P | 379°3H KS ieee letters.
scope +1440. 1 — 6207. “205 hoff’s
1a fp scale.
basen 0°86 1514 dors) aes aR 593
655 ?? €
Oa 1:25 1548 1547 ru 603 694 | 694 He
Ds tee 2°30 1638 1639 1005 1001 1005
1014-5 )
OOO: ideas sean: Amn Ae 1210 1207
M743 | Ma Goeee eee 146222] P,
SrA as ae eel rede a Meeerece 1464 1463
Byers SOSA IE. cece RES Re APA sia See 1525 1523
17633) 5508 | ee ee 155022] P,
One. a 3°97 1782 | 1782; | 1634 1635 1634
1784 f
As Gig) wees Salle, Sens ies. ae 1893 1909
4:79 cash all MRE oMTe Okamoto 1946 1961
| teste 5:03 1873 Ike }7 Ae lipases 2037 2080 | 2080 Hp
2596?
710 2052 QOD a Riheen ce Hieewerhe 2721
2796
Gree LEDOTE ace snol lt. seeen Sexi Uae eesen alpen 2855
1. The accordance between H! and P proves the commensu-
rability of H and P throughout.
2. The accordance between H" and K from D to b is a mea-
sure of commensurability of H and K, and .*. of P and K within
those limits.
3. Therefore P! within those limits is equivalent to K.
Bangalore, August 30, 1869.
XLI. Short Account of the Winterings in the Arctic Regions
during the last fifty years. By C. Boreun and R. Copenann,
Astronomers and Physicists to the second German Polar Expe-
dition*.
pre cy the present moment, when it is intended to send out a
second expedition to the arctic regions from Germany
with the purpose of wintering there, it may not be uninteresting
to give a short historical review of the winterings which have
* Translated by W. S: Dallas, F.L.S., from Petermann’s Mittheilungen,
1869, pp. 142-154,
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 341
been effected during the last fifty years. The precautions which
were found useful in these, the number of deaths and accidents,
the occupations and scientific operations will be particularly in-
dicated, in order to show how unfounded is the opinion still fre-
quently entertained by the general public that it is impossible
for Europeans to endure the winter in those climates, and at the
same time to lay down more accurately the scientific operations
which may be carried out during the winter.
The first wintering of an exploring expedition of which we
have any knowledge is the unfortunate one of Sir Hugh Wil-
loughby in the year 15538, who, being cast away by a storm,
was frozen in upon the coast of Lapland, and perished by hunger
and cold with his whole crew.
This melancholy occurrence did not, however, deter other bold
seamen from repeatedly making the attempt to discover a com-
mercial route north of Kurope and Asia to the fabulous kingdom
of Cathay ; and by these expeditions Spitzbergen, Nowaja Semla,
&c. first became known to western Europeans.
One of these expeditions sailed from Holland in the year
1596; its conduct was entrusted to Jakob Heemskerk and his
truly wonderful pilot,William Barents. Their ship was beset by
the ice on the north-east coast of Nowaja Semla, and they them-
selves compelled to pass the winter on that inhospitable shore.
Of the crew, which consisted of seventeen persons, five died—
two during the residence on Nowaja Semla, three during the
return voyage, among whom was Barents; all of them suffered
more or less from scurvy. Nevertheless this wintering must be
regarded as a very successful one for that time; and even to the
present day our entire knowledge of the north and north-east
coasts of Nowaja Semla is founded upon this voyage, as no one,
since Barents, has succeeded in reaching the “ Hishafen”’ where
he wintered.
Many attempts have subsequently been made to pass the win-
ter in the arctic and otherwise uninhabited regions, upon Spitz-
bergen, Jan Mayen, and in the Hudson’s Bay Territories, but
of these unfortunately by far the greater part were failures.
The causes of this in most cases were scurvy and the necessity,
owing to the want of sufficient clothing, of keeping too carefully
shut up inthe huts. We must, however, admire the courage and
steadfastness of these people, who exposed themselves in such com-
plete dependence upon good luck to the inclement climate, and at
the same time, with the greatest perseverance, so long as the hand
weakened by illness could barely guide the pen, continued to
write in their journals, in which they described the course of the
weather and the conditions of temperature.
342 MM. C. Borgen and Rh. Copeland’s Short Account of the
Successful wintering are, however, to be noted even among
these, and indeed one in which this was hardly to be expected.
In the year 1630, eight sailors belonging to an English whaler
were separated from the ship and compelled to pass “the winter
on Spitzbergen under 77° N. lat. Of course they had no pro-
visions from the ship, aia we might therefore have anticipated
that they would not live through ‘the winter. But this very cir-
cumstance was their salvation; for in order to obtain nourish-
ment they were obliged to go hunting, and were fortunate
enough to kill a sufficient number of reindeers and bears to fur-
nish them with fresh meat and warm clothing. The fresh meat,
in conjunction with much moving about in the open air (the two
conditions of health in this climate), kept them strong and
healthy, and thus they were found and brought home in May of
the following year by their former ship, without any of them
having been “seriously ill during the winter.
But unfortunately such a successful wintering as this was at
that time an exception; and it 1s therefore no wonder that fifty
years ago the opinion was still entertained that 1t was impossible
for Europeans to pass the winter safely im the arcticregions. In
the present day we may certainly say that at that time, and
with the equipment in provisions and clothing then supplied, a
wintering was attended with great danger to life; but that it
is now no longer perilous has been sufficiently proved by the
recent voyages.
For more than two centuries the idea of a “ north-west pas-
sage,” north of America from the Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean,
as a commercial route to the Hast Indies and China, produced a
series of English expeditions which led to the exploration of
Hudson’s and Baffin’s Bays, to the discovery of Lancaster,
Smith’s, and Jones’s Sounds, &c. But they showed at the
same time that, if anorth-west passage really existed, 1t was not
fitted for commercial purposes. Hence, after Cook, in his last
voyage in 1779, had made an attempt to penetrate through
Behring’s Straits, these voyages, which were commercially
useless, were given up, and people contented themselves with
working the rich fisheries found on the previous voyages of
discovery.
For nearly forty years voyages of discovery towards the north
ceased, until in 1815 Kotzebue made a fresh attempt to force
the north-west passage from Behring’s Straits. He got no
further, however, than to the sound which is named after him.
Now also a series of attempts was again made on the part of the
English, to discover the north-west passage. But the object was
now no longer to find a commercial route to China, but rather
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 343
to explore the wide unknown regions to the north of America,
to determine how far the continent extended towards the pole,
or whether islands lay off the coast, &c.
As the first of these voyages, we must name that undertaken
in 1818 by Sir John Ross. Properly speaking, he only repeated
the voyage made two centuries previously by Baffin, but did not
consider it advisable to penetrate any further than the latter, and
returned to England in the autumn of the same year, after making
the rich fisheries in Lancaster Sound and Pond Bay accessible.
If, therefore, this voyage did not essentially advance discovery,
it nevertheless cpened up a perfectly new region for the fishery
in these waters.
The next expedition which sailed from England, well equipped
scientifically and indeed with the intention of wintermg, was
sent out in the following year under Parry*, who had accom-
panied the preceding expedition under Ross. As this is the
first wintering of a scientific expedition that produced valuable
results, and the leaders of all subsequent voyages having guided
themselves by the observations collected in it by Parry, we may
be allowed to consider it somewhat in detail.
The expedition consisted of two ships, the ‘Hecla’ and
‘Griper, the former of 375, the latter of 180 tons burthen ;
the crews respectively of 51 and 386 men, officers and sailors
together. On the 15th of May Parry left Yarmouth Roads, and
on the 4th of September passed the 110th degree of longitude
west of Greenwich, which had been appointed by the Admiralty
for the gaining of a prize of £5000. He wintered in Melville
Island, in the place named by him “ Winter Harbour,” under
110° 48! 29"-2 W. long. and 74° 47! 19"-4, N. lat.; but in the
summer of the following year by a land expedition he attained
113° 48! W. long., halfway between Baffin’s Bay and Behring’s
Straits.
The expedition was equipped for two years, and especially
well-furnished with the known antiscorbutic materials, such as
dried vegetables, sauerkraut, pickles, vinegar (partly in a very
concentrated state), lemon-juice with sugar &c., as also with
preserved meat, all of the best quality and packed in air-tight
vessels. Instead of bread a large stock of carefully dried flour
was taken, so that fresh bread,. baked on board, could always
be had.
* Journal of a Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Passage from
the Atlantic to the Pacific, performed in the ears 1819-20 in H.M.SS.,
‘Hecla’ and ‘Griper’ under the orders of William Edward Parry, R.N.,
F.R.S.: London, 182]. And Supplement to the Appendix of Captain
Parry’s Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Passage in 1819-20,
containing an account of the subjects of Natural History: London, 1824.
344 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
These precautions proved to be extraordinarily beneficial to
the health of the wintering party. The sick-list of the surgeon,
Dr. Edwards, usually bore only one, or at the utmost two names
of people who had slight attacks of scurvy ; and these were cured
in a few weeks by the administration of an extra dose of lemon-
juice with sugar. On one occasion, however, when a fire
broke out m the observatory, a considerable number (sixteen)
of the people suffered a good deal from frost, as in their ex-
citement they had neglected the necessary precautions; and
this led in some cases even to the amputation of fingers.
The expedition had only one death to lament; and this was
caused by disease of the lungs, which became combined with
scurvy. The sanitary condition of this wintering was there-
fore excellent, thanks to Parry’s indefatigable care and its ad-
mirable equipment.
The ships were laid up for wintering in the followmg man-
ner; but itis to be observed that in subsequent winterings these
arrangements were altered and improved in some few particulars,
which will be noticed hereafter. ‘The moveable ropes and yards
were taken down. The former were left lying in the open, where
they froze quite hard, and in this state were completely protected
from rotting, to which they would have been exposed in the
moist air between decks.
The entire deck was then provided with a high-pitched roof
of oil-cloth, and served during the winter, in bad weather, as an
exercise-ground and promenade for the officers and men. At
first Parry had the water kept open around the ships, until he
found that this would be too troublesome. Then he allowed the
ships to be frozen in, and had snow shovelled up against their
sides in order to keep in the heat; and this at the same time had
the great advantage that the ice round the ship did not become
so thick as where no snow covered it.
The greatest evil that Parry had to contend against was the
great amount of moisture in the cabins, which in some eases
reached such a pitch that the beds were one half frozen, and one
half completely wet through. At first the ice condensed on the
walls was removed daily ; and once when this had been omitted
for some weeks, no less than 5000 or 6000 pounds of ice were
taken out of the cabins. Twice a day, when the crew were abroad,
their quarters were examined by the commander and the surgeon ;
and in general the actual observance of the precautions was most
rigidly watched by the officers: thus, for example, the people
were obliged every day to take the pr escribed quantity of lemon-
juice and sugar in the presence of one of the officers. The damp-
ness was very much increased by the circumstance that Parry
was obliged to have all the clothes washed during winter dried
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 345
between decks. The fixed berths, which had been introduced
into the ships quite against the ordinary practice of a man-of-
war, had to be exchanged for hammocks, entirely on board the
‘Griper,’ and partially on board the ‘ Hecla;’ and this (from the
great amount of moisture) contributed greatly to the mainte-
nance of good health; nay, one officer, whose life was consi-
dered in some danger, was thereby completely restored in a few
weeks.
That the cabins could not be cleaned with water under such
circumstances was a matter of course. Instead of this the floors
were scrubbed with stones and hot sand which had stood all
night upon the stove.
All these precautions would not, however, have sufficed for the
preservation of health if the people had not played and been ex-
ercised in the open air for several hours daily. Hunting parties
obtained a provision of 8766 pounds of fresh meat, which formed
a welcome addition to the stock of provisions, leaving out of con-
sideration the good effect of movement upon the health. To
keep up their spirits, which might well evaporate even from the
boldest heart during the long polar night, a weekly journal was
edited by Captain Sabine (now General Sabine, and President of
the Royal Society), which contained articles of a mixed, serious
and lively character; and a theatre was set up on which some
small piece was acted every fortnight; and this was carried on
with so much zeal that even a temperature of —2° F. (—15° BR.)
upon the stage did not deter the improvised actors from contri-
buting to their own and their companions’ amusement.
That the scientific objects of the expedition were not at the
same time neglected is proved by the long series of observations
and investigations which are appended to Parry’s report, and of
which we shall shortly have to speak more in detail.
As a precaution in case of fire, a hole was kept open in the
ice near the ships; but this fortunately was never required ;
for the observatory, in which a fire broke out, was at a distance
of 2100 feet from the ships, and must therefore have been ex-
tinguished in some other manner, during which operation, as
already mentioned, sixteen of the people suffered a good deal
from frost.
As regards scientific results, we must mention in the first
place the discovery of Barrow’s Strait, and the opening up of an
extent of coast of 35° of longitude, which subsequently proved
to be the south coast of a series of islands; and towards the
south the existence of a broad strait (Prince-Regent Inlet) was
ascertained, which was further investigated by Parry on a sub-
sequent voyage. On the return voyage the whole east coast of
Cockburn’s Land, extending for 8° of latitude, was surveyed.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No, 256. Nov. 1869. 2A
346 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
Here Sabine commenced his pendulum-experiments for the
determination of the figure of the earth, which have since been
continued with so much success and completeness; he also de-
termined the magnetic constants of various points by very ex-
tensive observations. To the meteorology of the arctic regions
the expedition devoted a series of observations continued unin-
terruptedly for twelve months between the parallels of 74° and
75° N. lat. The geographical position of Winter Harbour was
established by the enormous number of 6862 moon-distances
and 39 meridian altitudes. Tidal observations were regularly
made; and, further, no fewer than fifteen chronometers, partly
taken for the purpose of being tested, were examined as to the
uniformity of their rates. Zoology and botany found in Dr. Ed-
wards a zealous representative, who, with the assistance of Sabine,
Parry,and James Ross, brought back a rich collection of specimens
belonging to the animal and vegetable kingdoms, among which
were several previously unknown species. At the same time he
fulfilled his important duties as surgeon with the greatest zeal and
care ; and to his exertions and ceaseless watching of the sanitary
condition the small number of cases of illness and death during the
winter is mainly to be ascribed. This voyage, which laid down the
rules for all subsequent wintering expeditions, was also scienti-
fically the richest of all in results. It was followed by two other
voyages of Parry’s, one of them in the years 1821-238, in which
two winters were passed in the arctic regions with equally fa-
vourable results with regard to health as in the first case*.
The two winterings were performed exactly in the same fashion
as in the preceding voyage ; it would therefore lead only to un-
necessary and tedious repetitions if we were to describe the ship
in its winter harbour &c. In fact Parry himself says that we
cannot easily imagine two things possessing more resemblance
to each other than two winters in the higher latitudes of the
arctic regions. }
The first of the two winters was passed by Parry in Lyon’s Inlet.
Heproved in it that Melville Peninsula is united to the mainland of
North America, whereas it had previously been supposed that there
was in this region a passage to Prince-Regent Inlet. Inter-
course with the Eskimos during the winter furnished him with
much important information as to the configuration of the land,
and the existence of a great extent of open water in the north-
west. Subsequent investigations showed the correctness of this
and of many other geographical statements of the aborigines. In
* Journal of a Second Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Pas-
sage, performed in the years 182], 1822, 1823 in H.M.SS. ‘Hecla’ and
‘Fury,’ under the orders of W. E. Parry, R.N., ¥.R.S. London, 1824:
Murray.
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 347.
the following year only a small advance towards the north was
made, and the winter was passed in Iglulik, when the Fury and
Hecla Straits were discovered and examined during the winter
by Parry’s officers, who actually obtained a sight of the great
sea of the Eskimos as a large surface covered with ice, which
was afterwards known as the Gulf of Boothia.
After this second successful wintering, Parry returned with his
two ships in good condition to England, having furnished, by
passing two consecutive winters in the arctic regions with very
little loss of life, a proof that it was very possible for Europeans
to dwell in winter in those latitudes.
In the following year (1824) Parry sailed again for the
discovery of the north-west passage, having set before him for
this purpose the examination of the great passage, Prince-Re-
gent Inlet, which had been observed on his first voyage. Being
detained by the unfavourable condition of the ice in Baffin’s
Bay, Parry was compelled to winter in Port Bowen, a small har-
bour on the east coast of Prince-Regent Inlet. Here he had
the misfortune of having one of his crew drowned.
He examined by land the west coast of Cockburn’s Land, from
his winter-harbour southwards to 72° N. lat., and northwards to
Lancaster Sound. In the summer of the following year Parry
went to the other side of Prince-Regent Inlet and investigated
Creswell Bay, but lost his ship the ‘Fury.’ With his usual
foresight Parry had the provisions and the extra stores of
clothing brought on shore and enclosed in a wooden house built
for this purpose. This depdt was of incalculable value to sub-
sequent expeditions ; and the stores assisted the last Franklin-
expedition under M‘Clintock, as much as thirty-three years after-
wards, to complete their own equipment.
The land and coast expeditions in the north of America, car-
ried out before 1830 by Richardson, Franklin, and Beechey,
were obliged to winter under very different conditions; and as
we have here chiefly to show what has been attained by means
of ships, and how the dangers of the arctic winter may be dimi-
nished in naval expeditions, they need not be taken into consi-
deration. It is sufficient to say that, with enormous toil and the
loss of many men, they discovered and surveyed the north coast
of North America from Cape Turnagain in 109° W. long. to
Return Reef in 148°.
The next great naval expedition was undertaken by Sir John
Ross in 1829%. It was fitted out by Sir Felix Booth, a rich mer-
chant ; and Ross desired by this voyage to reestablish his fame
* Narrative ofa Second Voyage in search of a North-west Passage, and
of a residence m the Arctic Regions during the years 1829, 1830, 1831,
1832, 1833. by Sir John Ross, Captain in the Royal Navy. London, 1835.
2A2
348 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
as a discoverer, which since 1818 had been frequently and vio-
lently attacked. in this he and his nephew, Sir James Clarke
Ross, who has since become so famous by his antarctic voyages,
most perfectly succeeded.
The expedition sailed from London in a paddle-steamer (the
‘ Victory’) of 150 tons, with a crew of twenty-three persons,
officers and men. ‘The engine soon proved to be quite useless ;
and after a stoker had unfortunately lost his arm by means of
it, and some unsuccessful attempts to employ it had been made,
it was given up and finally disembarked at Fury Point (where
Parry lost his ship). The unfortunate stoker had been left be-
hind on the coast of Scotland and replaced by another.
Ross sailed through Lancaster Sound into Prince-Regent
Inlet and wintered in Felix Harbour in 69° 58! 42" N. lat. and
92° 1'7" W. long. On landing the engine, be took some pro-
visions from the store left by Parry at Fury Point, so that at the
beginning of the wimter he was completely provisioned for two
years and ten months. In arranging the ship for the winter,
Parry’s precautions and experiences served in general as a guide ;
but Ross introduced the essential improvements of covering the
whole deck with snow, and establishing condensers for the pur-
pose of keeping the space between decks dry. The latter were
large metallic vessels turned upside down over openings of several
inches in diameter made in the ceilings of the cabins. They were
covered with snow, and the moist vapours arising from the space
below were condensed in these cold cupolas, so as to prevent all
moisture below the deck; the ice collected in them was removed
weekly, when it amounted on an average to 500 or 600 pounds.
For the entertainment of his little crew a school was esta-
blished, and otherwise the time was passed as in Parry’s expedi-
tion. By frequent journeys in the summers of 1830 and 1831,
James Clarke Ross investigated the two coasts of Boothia Felix,
and ascertained that this land was connected with the American
continent by the Isthmus of Boothia. On one of these journeys
he reached the magnetic pole. Frequent intercourse with the
Eskimos, who here again displayed great knowledge of their
native country, gave him information of a large open water still
further to the west (Victoria Strait)—just as Parry, when on the
other side of the Melville peninsula, had heard much of the
Gulf of Boothia, which was now cleared up by Ross. The na-
tives even mentioned to him the subsequently discovered Bellot
Strait which unites Prince-Regent Inlet with Franklin’s (Peel’s)
Strait*; but when he examined the place described by them, the
strait, which was concealed by several islands lying in front of
it, escaped his observation, and he regarded the indentation of
* Op. cit. pp. 299 & 338.
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 349
the coast as a bay (Brentford Bay). The second winter he was
obliged to pass nearly in the same place where he had remained
during the first winter ; and he then had to decide upon wintering
for the third time quite close to his previous winter quarters, in
Victoria Harbour. At the end of May 1882 he was obliged to
quit his ship (the ‘ Victory’) and to endeavour to save himself
by means of sledges, taking his boats with him. They reached
Fury Beach and afterwards Batty Bay. In this retreat Parry’s
precaution of bringing the,‘ Fury’s’ stores on shore saved the
brave band from “ipPePiauite After pressing on to Batty Bay,
Ross was surprised by the winter, and compelled, in order to
save the lives of himself and his men, to return to Fury Beach.
Here, in a house built of planks and coated with blocks of ice,
they continued, by means of good stoves, to provide themselves
with a comparatively warm and comfortable dwelling.
In the following summer they at last succeeded in reaching
Barrow’s Strait, and thence they sailed on in their boats and
were taken up at the entrance of Lancaster Sound by the
‘ Tsabella,’ which had been sent to their assistance.
As regards the health of this expedition, we may say that in
the first two winters it was very good. In the winter of 1829-30
Ross lost only a single man, who had concealed a disease of the
lungs which had previously brought him several times to the
hospital. No scurvy made its appearance. The first case of
this disease occurred on the 20th of November, 1831, conse-
quently at the beginning of the third winter, and it carried off
two men.
When the expedition at last returned to England, after an
absence of four years and a half, the crew was naturally in a very
low state, and one of them died after the return to England in
consequence of the hardships he had undergone ; but nevertheless
it must be a matter of wonder that no more fatalities occurred
during so long a sojourn.
Again there was a period of twelve years during which all ex-
peditions for the discovery of a north-west passage ceased. But,
much as had been done in the exploration of the arctic regions
of North America, there was still much to do before these regions
could be regarded as even tolerably well known. ‘The question
as to the theoretical or practical possibility of a north-west pas-
sage was still unsolved; and the Government, finally yielding to
the pressing instances of the Secretary to the Admiralty, Sir
John Barrow, and to public opinion, ordered the ships ‘ Erebus’
and ‘ Terror,’ which had just returned from the antarctic expe-
dition under Sir James Clarke Ross, upon a new voyage of dis-
covery in the regions already so frequently visited, and conferred
the command upon Sir John Franklin.
350 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
The unfortunate termination of this expedition is well known.
Although the history of the last desperate attempt to escape
contains many doubtful and unexplained points, we may obtain
much information upon the earlier part of the expedition from
the short report which was left on King William’s Land by Cro-
zier and Fitzjames, and discovered by Lieutenant Hobson, who
accompanied the last searching expedition under M‘Clintock.
The portion of this short report which is particularly interest-
ing to us relates to the number of deaths, and runs as follows :—
25 April, 1848..... Sir John Franklin died on the 11th
of June 1847, and the total loss by deaths in the expedition has
been to this date nine officers and fifteen men.” When the ex-
pedition sailed in the summer of 1845 the entire crew consisted
of 129 people, officers and men, deducting the few who were
sent back from Baffin’s Bay on account of illness. The provi-
sions were calculated for three years; but unfortunately a great
part of them was supplied by the marine purveyor Goldner, who
sought by the most shameful fraud to make a fortune, and filled
the preserved-meat cases with completely useless offal instead of
with eatable materials. By this means the provision was con-
siderably diminished; but as Sir John Franklin wrote from
Baffin’s Bay full of hope that, if necessary, he should be able
to hold out for five or even seven years by renewing his stores
from the produce of the chase, we may assume that, notwith-
standing the loss of what was useless, the provision was sufficient
for three years in case of need.
The ships were abandoned in April 1848; and we may sup-
pose that want had not then reached any very high degree. Up
to this moment the expedition had hardly been in any worse po-
sition than that under Ross, for example, after the same lapse of
time; and the number of deaths reported up to this period,
although doubtless considerable, is by no means very surprising,
especially when we consider that three of them occurred as early
as the first winter (1845-46), on Beechey Island. What became
of the 105 who were still living after the abandonment of the
ships, will probably always remain in obscurity.
The apprehensions as to the fate of Franklin and his compa-
nions gave rise to a long series of searching expeditions, which
are known in the history of arctic voyages as the Franklin-expe-
ditions. . To go through all the numerous expeditions singly
would lead us too far. In M‘Dougal’s account of the voyage
of the ‘ Resolute’ in the years 1852-54*, there is an account of
the numbers of the crews who wintered and the deaths which
* The eventful Voyage of H.M. Discovery Ship ‘ Resolute’ to the Arctic
Regions in search of Sir John Franklin, by George F. M‘Dougall (London,
1857), p. 498.
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 351
occurred during the winterings. The following are English ex-
peditions :—
Crews. Deaths.
1848-49, Sir James Clarke Ross . 188 7
1850-51, Captain Austin . . . 180 1*
1850-51, Captain Penny. . . . = 46
1849-50, Mr. Saunders. . . . 40 4.
1850-54, Captain M‘Clure ... . 66 5+
1852-54, Sir E. Belcher. . . . 90 2
1852-54, Captain Kellett . . . 90 At
1852-54, Commander Pullen . . 40
The great scientific results of these expeditions, and especially
the enormous extent of coast which was explored by them, are
well known. Inthe first place, towards the north, Smith Sound
was investigated by Kane; and the coasts of Wellington Channel
and the entire north coast of Parry Island were examined by
Belcher. M‘Clure penetrated from Behring’s Strait through
Investigator Sound, wintered three times in Banks’s Land, and
once, when he was obliged to abandon his ship, on Melville
Island with Kellett ; and he was the first who demonstrated the
existence of a north-west passage by his actually tracing water-
passages from Behring’s Strait to Baffin’s Bay, although these
were in part impassable for ships. Kennedy and the French
officer Bellot, who attached themselves to the expedition as vo-
lunteers, discovered Bellot’s Strait, named after the latter, ex-
plored Prince-of-Wales’s Land on the further side of Franklin’s
(Peel’s) Strait, and returned northwards round North Somerset
to their winter harbour in Batty Bay.
This is the longest sledge-journey that has been undertaken
during the arctic explorations; its entire length amounts to 1200
nautical miles ; and it was performed without any depots for the
return journey. Of his crew of eighteen men Kennedy did not
lose one, and he had only a few quite unimportant cases of ill-
ness. He succeeded in bringing his little vessel (892 tons) back
to England in safety.
M‘Clintock, in Austin’s expedition, gave a quite unprece-
dented development to sledge-journeys; he improved the con-
struction of the sledges and the mode in which the depots were
* Sickly from the first, and died in consequence of hardships on sledge-
journeys.
+ All the deaths in the last year, from scurvy.
{ One from disease of the heart, two from weakness in consequence of
hardships, and one upon asledge-journey.
It is unfortunately not stated, J. c., what the causes of death were; and
only in the cases here cited in the notes are we able to give any account of
them.
352 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
thrown out; and it was only by means of these improvements
that the important results were secured.
The principal service done by this expedition was the enlarge-
ment of our yeographical knowledge of these regions, which,
indeed, was the necessary consequence of its object. Allits en-
deavours were directed to one end, namely the discovery of
Franklin or of his traces; and hence it follows, as a matter of
course, that whatever was not connected with this must have been
regarded as a subsidiary matter.
Among the searching expeditions the two Grinnell expeditions
were of scientific importance, and also very instructive in other
respects; they were fitted out by a New York merchant named
Grinnell, and accompanied by Dr. EK. K. Kane.
The first of these expeditions* left New York on the 22nd of
May, 1850. It consisted of the ships ‘ Advance’ and ‘ Rescue,’
and was under the orders of Lieutenant de Haven, who himself
commanded the ‘ Advance,’ whilst the ‘ Rescue’ was commanded
by Griffin. In the ‘Advance’ was the most important person
of the company im a scientific point of view, Dr. Khsha Kent
Kane. The crews of the ships, which were of 144 and 91 tons,
consisted in all of 17 and 16 men. Their equipment was rather
hastily performed ; and hence there was no superfluity, especially
of antiscorbutic agents. Kane himself, who was stationed in the
Gulf of Mexico, received the order to take part in the expedition
only two days before its departure, and had only forty hours in
New York to look after his personal equipments and procure
some scientific instruments; the latter, however, unfortunately
were not put on board.
They reached Beechey Island in good time, and in conjunction
with the English expeditions under Austin and Penny, which
were there at the same time, undertook the investigation of
Beechey Island, where the first certain traces of Franklin’s expe-
dition were found; they then made their way into Wellington
Channel and discovered Grinnell Island. When they were then,
in accordance with their instructions, about to return to New
York, they were beset by the ice, and carried with it through Lan-
caster Sound and Baflin’s Bay into the Atlantic Ocean. During
this process they had to undergo many dangers and hardships ;
and the hasty and insufficient equipment now revenged itself
upon them bitterly. It was only through the almost superhuman
exertions of Kane, who, although himself ill, tended his compa-
nions in suffering with a truly affecting solicitude, that there was
no loss of life to be lamented. He not only cared for the medical
treatment of his patients, but brought from his hunting expedi-
* The United States Grinnell Expedition in search of Sir John Franklin,
by E. K. Kane, M.D., U.S.N. London and New York, 1854.
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 353
tions much fresh meat into the ship, which did much good to
the sick. But they had not only to suffer from scurvy; the cold
also could not be sufficiently kept off. The ship was lifted so
high upon the ice that it was impossible to heap the sides with
snow or to adopt other customary precautions. It contributed
not a little to heighten the difficulty of their position, that the
‘Rescue’ got into so bad a situation that she had to be aban-
doned for a time and her crew transferred to the ‘ Advance.’
Notwithstanding his heavy medical duties, Kane did not neg-
lect to do whatever lay in his power for science. His report
contains very many important notices upon the formation and
movement of the arctic glaciers, with hints as to the deficiencies
which still remain to be filled up in this field, and upon the pe-
culiar ice-structures which occur here and there.
He complains that the confined space and overloading of the
ship did not allow him to be so regularly active as he desired in
scientific matters. The observations of temperature are irregular,
but still very numerous; and in connexion with them he calls
attention to various points, to precautions which must be em
ployed in order to obtain correct readings, and to many other
things. The northern lights found in him a zealous observer;
and here also it did not escape his acute mind how much still
remains to be explained in the theory of these phenomena.
The second voyage*, which was commanded by Kane himself,
was fitted out by the two merchants, Grinnell of New York and
Peabody of London, and its object likewise was to search for Sir
John Franklin. The ‘Advance’ was again the abode of Kane
and his little crew, seventeen in number, to whom a native (Hans
Christian) was afterwards added. This vessel was a sailing brig
of 140 tons, and had proved on the previous voyage to be a good
ship for the ice. The equipment consisted of india-rubber
tents, sledges of the newest construction, and provisions consist-
ing of 2000 lbs. of pemmican, bread, flour, dried fruits, preserved
vegetables, &c., and besides these a considerable quantity of
salted meat, which had better have been left behind. As ascien-
tific equipment, there were on board a large library and a yalu-
able stock of instruments.
Kane selected Smith Sound for his base of operations, as he
had explained in a memoir read before the Geographical Society.
From this he proposed to push towards the north. That he
could find nothing there relating to Franklin’s expedition ap-
peared clearly enough from the subsequent discoveries; but he
penetrated far to the north, surveyed the shores of Smith Sound
* Arctic Explorations.—The Second Grinnell Expedition in search of Sir
John Franklin, 1853, 1854, 1855, by Elisha Kent Kane. 2 vols, Philadel-
phia, 1856.
354 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the
and Kennedy’s Channel as far as 81° N. lat., and discovered the
enormous Humboldt glacier, which extends more than a degree
in width. He was oblised t@eeniaintin Rensselaer Bay, in 78° 37!
N. lat. and 70° W. long., where he passed one winter, which
threw many of his companions and himself upon a sick bed.
Nearly all had scurvy; and the fatiguing sledge-journeys were
by no means adapted to improve the health of the expedition.
Upon one of these journeys, made by some of the crew in order
to establish a depot of provisions, they were beset by the ice,
and would have been destroyed if Kane had not relieved them ;
he could not, however, prevent two of them from dying in con-
sequence of the fearful hardships. Hunting did not furnish any
very considerable results ; and feeling certain that they would be
set free in the following summer so as to return home, they were
not so economical in the use of what was procured by the chase
as they might perhaps have been. But the summer brought
them no release, and they were compelled to hunt for their pro-
visions until the next winter, but, unfortunately, with small
results. In one of their very distant hunting expeditions, which
was led by Morton and the Greenlander Hans, they reached in
81° N. lat. a coast which was washed by a sea perfectly free from
ice and with long regular dunes.
Dr. Hayes, who was making his first arctic voyage, discovered
Grinnell Land, and, besides fulfilling his medical duties, which
were in themselves great and heavy enough, made many journeys
for the purpose of hunting and exploring, in which he was assisted
by the astronomer, August Sonntag.
The second winter was long and severe, and brought with it
many hardships and much suffering; diseases, especially scurvy,
combined with cold and hunger to put the courage and steadi-
ness of the explorers to the hardest test. As the second spring
again failed to set them free, they were forced to adopt the de-
sperate expedient of seeking inhabited regions in small open
boats. After infinite exertions, which cost one of them his life,
they reached Upernavik, and were afterwards taken up in God-
havn by the expedition under Hartstein, which had been sent to
seek for them.
Notwithstanding the many difficulties and hardships with
which this expedition had to contend, its scientific results are
by no means inconsiderable. Observations of temperature, to
which Kane attached great importance, were made hourly during
the voyage, but showed at the same time how careful it is ne-
cessary to be in such cases in order to avoid the influence of the
warm ship, which is observable at a distance of several hundred
paces. They showed further the untrustworthiness of the spirit-
thermometer at low temperatures; the eleven thermometers
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 355
which were constantly read differed at a temperature of —68° F.
from the mean of all readings by no less than 12°; the difference
increased from —20° F. downwards, at which temperature it
varied between —1°°2 and +1°2 for the different thermometers.
The mean temperatures, compared with those obtained in
other parts of the arctic regions, furnish interesting data for the
comparison of the climates, and show that the climate of Green-
land, from being an insular climate in the south, approximates
towards the north to the coast climate of the arctic archipelago
in the west of Baffin’s Bay, the character of which is not far
from that of a continental climate. We shall have to speak more
in detail upon this point hereafter. Magnetic observations were
made in great numbers by Sonntag; and during the winter of
1854-55 six magnetic terms of 24 hours each were kept, the
results of which are to be found in the appendix to the Report,
which also contains a long list, with descriptions, of the plants
and animals collected by leant upon the two expeditions.
We have already mentioned Kane’s voyages as very instructive
in every respect; and they are especially instructive negatively,
inasmuch as they show the dangers to which arctic voyages are
exposed when the greatest care is not- employed in their equip-
ment. If instead of the salted meat he had had some 1000 pounds
more pemmican, he would certainly not have had to undergo
such terrible want and suffermg. He regarded the salt meat
as so useless and so injurious to those who were ill of scurvy, that
in sending out a company to bring in the provisions stored in a
depot, he gave the strictest orders that all salted meat should
be left behind, and this at a time when the expedition was in
danger of dying with hunger.
It was a modest desire to spare as much as possible the means
of the high-spirited men who fitted out the expedition, and a
certain expectation that he would be able to return after the first
winter, that induced Kane not to provide himself with stores
of better quality and for a longer time, although he had under-
gone similar experiences on his first voyage. Far be it from us
to wish to reproach him with this; his courage and perseverance,
and his remarkable management and scientific activity, in which
he far surpassed all previous arctic voyagers, place him in the
first rank of travellers, and the smallness of the loss of human
life which this expedition had to regret is to be ascribed solely
to his medical skill and persevering care. The hardships of this
second expedition threw the brave man, soon after his return,
upon a sick bed, from which he was never again to rise.
His reports upon the two journeys are full of hints upon
the arrangements for wintering and for scientific observations,
which will be of the greatest service to future travellers. In
356 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the.
connexion with the first, he introduced the improvement of
carrying the cabin stairs not only down to the floor, but below
this into the hold, and then bringing another stair from the
latter up again into the antechamber of the cabin—an arrange-
ment which was of extraordinary service in keeping up the
temperature.
We come now to the last of the so-called Franklin-expeditions*.
It was the fourth of the expeditions fitted out by Lady Franklin ;
and the command of it was entrusted to Captain M‘Clintock.
He sailed on the Ist of July 1857, from Aberdeen, in the screw-
steamer ‘ Fox,’ of 180 tons, with a crew in all of 25 men. The
officers were Lieutenant Hobson of the Royal Navy as first, and
the merchant-captain Allen Young as second officer. Besides
these there were in the cabin a surgeon, Dr. Walker of Belfast,
two engineers, and Petersen an interpreter. The stores con-
sisted of 6000 pounds of pemmican and a large stock of pre-
served vegetables, with the well-known antiscorbutic remedies
lemon-juice and sugar), and was calculated for twenty-eight
months.
The voyage was prosperous as far as Melville Bay; but when
M‘Clintock attempted to make his way into Lancaster Sound the
ship got into pack-ice, became fixed, and drove with 1t down Baf-
fin’s Bay for 242 days. The first winter, therefore, had to be
passed in the pack-ice; but the ice was quiet, and they were ex-
posed to none of the perils which so frequently occur under similar
circumstances. No cases of illness occurred; but the second engi-
neer died in consequence of a fall in the engme-room. As soon
as the ship was again set free, they turned once more towards
the north, and succeeded this time in passing through Lancaster
Sound. An attempt to saildown Franklin’s (Peel’s) Strait was
unsuccessful, as it was completely blocked with ice in the nar-
row part. M‘Clintock then attempted to push through Prince-
Regent Inlet and Bellot’s Strait into the southern part of Peel’s
Strait and so to King William’s Land, but here also was pre-
vented by ice from penetrating further.
Nothing then remained but to allow themselves to be frozen
up in a small harbour in Bellot’s Strait, and to do by sledge-
journeys what could not be done with the ship. How far this
was successful, how the greater part of the coasts of Peel’s, Ross,
and Victoria Straits was surveyed by M‘Clintock, Hobson, and
Young, and how Hobson found that important document which
furnishes the only authentic intelligence of the condition of
Franklin’s expedition up to April 1848, is too well known to
render it necessary for us to dwell upon it here.
* The Voyage of the ‘Fox’ in the Arctic Seas. London, 1859. And
Petersen: Den sidste Franklin-Expedition med Fox, Capt. M‘Clintock.
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 357
During this second winter the first engineer and the steward
died—the former by an apoplectic attack, and the latter of scurvy,
because he obstinately rejected all precautions, lived almost ex-
clusively upon salt meat, and was also somewhat addicted to the
use of spirits. Nearly all the crew suffered more or less from
scurvy; and Lieutenant Hobson especially was rather severely
attacked by it. However, all soon recovered. On the sledge-
journeys, as might be expected, they were a good deal affected
by frost; but all evil consequences disappeared on their return
on board the ship. On the 23rd of September 1859 the ship
lay in good condition in the docks of London.
The intelligence of the melancholy fate of Franklin’s expedition
was followed by the exhaustion natural after such enormous ex-
ertions. Since this period no arctic expedition has been sent out
from England; but Dr. J. J. Hayes, the companion of Kane on
his second voyage, procured the means of fitting out an expedi-
tion to Smith Sound*, and started well equipped from Bos-
ton, in July 1860, in the sailing schooner ‘ United States,’ of
133 tons, with a company of fourteen men (among whom was
the astronomer Sonntag, who had already accompanied Kane on
his second voyage), to which were subsequently added three
Europeans and three Eskimos, and, lastly, the Eskimo Hans with
his family, already known by having accompanied Kane’s expe-
dition. Huis object was to reach a harbour on the east coast of
Grinnell Land before the commencement of winter, and thence
if possible to pass through Kennedy’s Channel and penetrate
into the polar sea seen by Morton. This object, however, he
did not attain, but was obliged to remain in Port Foulke, 20! of
latitude further south than Rensselaer Harbour, and situated at
the entrance of Smith Sound—much to his regret, as that sound
is always difficult to pass through. From this point, where he
took up his quarters for the winter, he attempted in October of
the same year to make a sledge-journey into the interior of the
country, but was compelled to return by a cutting north wind
against which it was impossible to contend for any length of
time. Nevertheless this short journey into the interior furnished
interesting information as to the glaciers of Greenland.
Whilst the people specially fitted for them undertook scientific
operations, such as meteorological, magnetic, and pendulum ob-
servations, the others were sent upon the chase, and brought an
extraordinary quantity of game into the kitchen. As they had
no dogs, Hayes sent Sonntag with Hans to the Eskimos living
further to the south in order to procure some. After an absence
of a month Hans returned alone, and reported that Sonntag had
* The Open Polar Sea, by Dr. J. J. Hayes. German edition by Coste-
noble, Jena, 1868.
358 MM. C. Borgen and R. Copeland’s Short Account of the .
fallen through a fissure of the ice into the water, had then gone
several miles in his wet clothes, and died in a hut which they
reached.
In the spring of the following year Hayes commenced one of
the most toilsome sledge-journeys that has ever yet been made.
Its object was to penetrate as far as possible upon the coast of
Grinnell Land, and to reach the polar sea which had been seen by
Morton. On the way he was obliged to leave behind him a por-
tion of his party, and went forwards with only one young man of
19 years old (Knorr) and one dog-sledge, until his further progress
was prevented, under 81° 35! N. lat. and 70° 30’ W. long., by
rotten ice and partially open water which extended as far as the
eye could reach. He was compelled to abandon his desire of
penetrating into this water with the ship, as Smith Sound was
not free from ice this year; and so Hayes returned from his
interesting voyage in the autumn of 1861, to Boston. The im-
portant scientific results of this expedition have been published
by the Smithsonian Institution.
Conclusions.
With this the series of marine expeditions which have wintered
in the north is for the present closed. They furnish evidence
that with a little care a residence in the arctic regions is by no
means impossible.
In the following Table the deaths which have occurred in these
arctic expeditions, so far as we are able to find reliable statements,
are summarized and their annual percentage for each expedition
given, in calculating which the actual duration of the expedition
has been taken into account, the duration of a voyage whieh ex-
tendedover a single winter being reckoned as a year and one-third.
|
No. Commander and year. Ships. | Crews.|Deaths see
he ence TET ine a iat Peel on bien aug
2. | John Ross, 1829-33......... GOs. 23 4:1, (20g
3. | Franklin, 1845-48. ...... 22... 2 ships.| 129 24 6:20
4, | J. C. Ross, 1848-49 ......... 1 ship. | 188 7 3°80
5. | Saunders, 1849-50 ......... 1 40 4 7:50
G.- | Austin, 1850-5) 25. 5.Gae. 4 ships.| 180 ] 0:42
Ze | Benny, USO Ho cone ce oc newer hss a) ear!) 0:00
8. | De Haven (Kane), 1850-51. ei ne Tallnes 0:00
9. | M‘Clure, 1850-54 ..,......... 1 ship.| 66 5 1:75
10. | Belcher, 1852-54 ............ 2ships.| 90 2 0:95
1]. | Kellett, 1852-54 ............ 25 90 4 1-91
12. | Pullen, 1852-54 ....,....... 1 ship.| 40 0 0-00
13. al Kane. Loon O0 non cuchcans 144 tons.| 18 3 714
14. | M‘Clintock, 1857-59 ...... 1 SON To . 25 3 5:14
15:-. (Hayes, 1860-6), 2.23.03. Lt, Jas ahy 18 1 4:17
AVCTARC ancl a scscmeois) oriesvteae 2-92
SS Ue A) ge a
Winterings in the Arctic Regions during the last fifty years. 359
Remarks.
1. Died of lung disease.
2. One of lung disease concealed on the voyage out; two of
scurvy; one after return in consequence of hardships.
3. According to the information found by M‘Clintock.
Causes of death unknown; three died in the first winter (1845-46),
4. In consequence of a sledge-journey of forty days with in-
sufficient provisions.
6. Sickly from the first; died in consequence of hardships
on sledge-journeys.
8. Suffered much from scurvy; equipment rather hasty.
9. All the deathsin the last winter, from scurvy.
™ 11. One of heart-disease ; two from weakness in consequence
of hardships; one on a sledge-journey.
13. Two died in consequence of a sledge-journey; one on
the return voyage in consequence of a dislocation.
14. One in consequence of a fall; one of apoplexy; one of
scurvy.
15. In consequence of a fall into the water. The Eskimos
that Hayes had with him are omitted.
From this review it appears, therefore, that the percentage of
deaths is on the average very favourable when compared with
the mortality upon voyages in the tropics. The result would
have come out much more favourably if we could have taken in
Collinson’s and some other winterings; but with regard to these
reliable information was wanting.
yen when compared with the ordinary mortality at the age
of 30, which, according to Milne’s Carlisle Tables, amounts to
1:19 per cent., the result may be called very satisfactory, espe-
cially if we consider that most of the deaths occurred in conse-
quence of great hardships upon sledge-journeys, or were pro-
duced either by diseases the germs of which were previously in
existence, or by accidents which could not be foreseen; the last
are possible upon any journey, even when it is not directed
towards the North. »
We believe that in the preceding statements we have furnished
a proof that a winter residence in the arctic regions is by no
means dangerous for Kuropeans, always supposing thatthe neces-
sary precautions are taken. ‘These precautions are as follows :—
First, a thoroughly good equipment of the ship, rendering its
sides as strong as possible—partly to resist the pressure of ice,
and partly for the sake of warmth. How the ship is to be
prepared for its winter quarters we have already described cir-
cumstantially, and may therefore abstain frem its repetition.
The second main point is good nourishing food, especially
fresh meat and pemmican—salt meat bemeg not good even for
360 M. F. Zollner on a New Spectroscope, together with
the healthy, whilst for those affected with scurvy it is absolute
poison. In order to keep off the latter disease, a certain and
not too small quantity of lemon-juice and sugar must be taken
daily, besides vegetables, the eating of which in abundance is of
great benefit. Nowadays, when all these things can be so easily
procured of good quality, there is not the least difficulty in pro-
visioning a ship in the most suitable manner.
The third thing upon which the vigour and welfare of a win-
tering company depend is warm clothing, which should consist
less of furs than of several layers of woollen stuffs one over the
other.
-—
XLII. On a New Spectroscope, together with contributions to the
Spectral Analysis of the Stars. By F. ZOLuNER*.
N recent times the spectrum-analysis of the stars, apart from
its disclosures as to the physical constitution of the celestial
bodies, has begun to claim attention in another and not less
interesting direction; for it affords a prospect of demonstrating
and, under favourable circumstances, even of measuring the in-
fluence which the component of the relative motion of the earth
and of the star observed, acting along the line joining them,
exerts upon the position of the lines of the spectrum in question.
A simple consideration shows that actions which two separated
bodies exert upon one another through periodical impulses of
finite velocity of propagation, must be modified by a steady alte-
ration in the distance of the two bodies. ‘To Doppler, in the year
1841+, is due the merit of having first recognized this influence,
though the conclusions which he deduced therefrom as to the
colour of the stars must be admitted to be incorrect, owing to his
having neglected the invisible part of the spectrum.
The experiments of Ballot, Mach, and others have shown that,
as regards sound, the influence in question is in accordance with
the requirements of the theory.
In the case of light, it has not hitherto been possible to con-
firm by observations magnitudes of that influence which could
with certainty be demonstrated; for even the cosmical motions,
which are the greatest we can use for this purpose, are very
small when compared with the velocity of the propagation of light.
Yet the great improvements which, since the discovery of
* Translated from Poggendorff’s Annalen, September 1869, having been
read before the Royal Saxon Society of Sciences, February 6, 1869.
+ “Ueber das farbige Licht der Doppelsterne und eimiger anderer
Gestirne des Himmels,” Abhandlungen der Bohm. Ges, d. W. vol. i.
(1841-42) pp. 465-482.
contributions to the Spectral Analysis of the Stars. 361
spectrum-analysis, have been made in the optical instruments for
observing the spectrum, open out the prospect of demonstrating
that influence on the spectra of the stars. Theory requires that
this should consist of a small displacement of the spectrum-lines,
which, for instance, for the mean velocity of the earth of 18:2
miles in a second, amounts to the tenth part of the distance
between the two sodium-lines. This magnitude, which is very
easily deduced from the velocity of light and the length of oscilla-
tion of the rays corresponding to the sodium-lines, has been
quite recently again deduced by J. C. Maxwell in accordance
with earlier calculations by F. Hisenlohr*.
Yet the magnitude of the displacement appears to Maxwell to
be so small, that he concludes his observations with reference to
the spectrose»pes hitherto constructed and the method of deter-
mining the position of the lines with the remark, “it cannot be
determined by spectroscopic observations with our present instru-
ments, and it need not be considered in the discussion of our
observations” +.
Huggins, nevertheless, in his most recent paper f{, of which the
above-mentioned investigations of Maxwell form an integrant
part, has attempted the solution of the problem in question by
using a spectroscope with not less than five prisms, of which
two are flint-glass Amici’s, and three crown-glass.
The great enfeeblement of light produced by so great a num-
ber of prisms permits the observation of only the brightest stars.
Huggins even restricts himself to the communication of his
results from observations on Sirius, and thought he had here
found a slight displacement of the line F compared with a bright
hydrogen-line produced by aGeissler’s tube. The direction and
magnitude of the displacement would indicate an increase of the
distance between the earth and Sirius with a velocity of 41°1
English miles in a second.
Eliminating the component of the earth’s motion, which at the
time of observation amounted to twelve miles, the velocity with
which Sun and Sirius move apart would be 29:4 miles in a
second.
Huggins himself considers this result as affected with great
uncertainty—an uncertainty partly due to the enfeeblement of
the light produced by numerous prisms, partly to the difficulty
of comparing the coincidences of the bright lines of terrestrial
luminous sources with the analogous dark ones of the star-
spectra. The latter have at times a different appearance—are,
for instance, indistinct at the edges and of variable breadth, as is
just the case with this line F in the spectrum of Sirius.
* Heidelberger Verh. d. phys. med. Ges. vol. iit. p. 190.
T Phil. Trans. 1868, p. 532. t Ibid. p. 535.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 256, Nov. 1869. 2B
362 M. F. Zéllner on a New Spectroscope, together with
The most important of these difficulties which have heretofore
hindered a definite solution of the problem in question, I think
I have overcome by a new construction of the spectroscope, the
first specimen of which I have the honour of laying before the
Society.
The arrangement is essentially as follows :—The line of hight
produced by a slit or by a cylinder lens is in the focus of a lens
which, as in all spectroscopes, first renders parallel the rays to
be dispersed. The rays then pass through two Amici’s direct-
vision prisms, which I obtained of superior excellence from the
optical workshop of M. Merz in Munich.
They are so fastened together that each of them transmits one-
half of the rays emerging from the object-glass of the collimator,
but so that the refracting edges are on opposite sides, and thus
the total mass of rays is decomposed into two spectra of opposite
directions. The object-glass of the observing-telescope, which
again unites the rays to an image, is cut at right angles to the
horizontal refracting edges of the prisms, as in the heliometer ;
and each of the two halves may be moved micrometrically, both
parallel to the line of section and also at right angles thereto.
Thus not only can the lines of one spectrum be successively made
to comeide with those of the other, but both spectra, instead of
being superposed, may be placed closed beside each other (so
that one is displaced in reference to the other like a nonius), or
they may be partially superposed. By this construction, not
only is the delicacy of the double image as a means for deter-
mining any change in position of the spectrum- -lines utilized, but
any such Pheri ts also doubled, inasmuch as its influence in
the two spectra is exerted in opposite directions.
The principle of the reversion of the spectra, fundamental to
the instrument described (for which I therefore propose the
name ‘‘ Reversion-Spectroscope”’), may be applied even without
using Amici’s systems of prisms. It is only necessary to reverse,
by reflection from a muror or from a prism, one part of the pen-
cil of rays emerging from an ordinary prism, and then to observe
the whole pencil as above by means of a telescope provided with
a cut object-glass. This principle also dispenses with the simul-
taneous introduction of artificial sources of ight for investigating
small alterations of refrangibility, and enables those changes to
be seen and measured by the alterations in position of perfectly
homogeneous objects.
The series of measurements which were made with the
dark lines D of the solar spectrum, as well as with the bright
sodium-lines of the flame of a taper impregnated with salt,
and which I here adduce as a criterion of the capability of the
instrument, justify the hope that by means of this spectroscope
contributions to the Spectral Analysis of the Stars. 363
we Shall succeed not only in detecting the influence of the earth’s
motion, but in determining its amount with such accuracy as is
desirable for a preliminary control of theoretical conclusions.
The numbers adduced signify parts of the micrometer-screw,
and refer to the distance of the two sodium-lines :—
Sodium-fiame. Sun.
49°5 49°5
50°5 51:5
53:0 48°]
A9°5 48:9
Mean . . 50°6+0°6 Meat 9 49. Gc00'o
In the following series of observations the reversion-spectro-
scope had been provided with another micrometer-screw with a
somewhat coarser thread, and also two other systems of prisms,
the dispersion of which in the vicinity of the sodium-line is 1°77
as much as that of the system used for the above measurements.
In this case, also, the former achromatic object-glasses of the col-
limator and of the observing-telescope were replaced by non-
achromatic ones, whereby not only was there no loss of sharpness,
but, as was intended, by increasing the intensity of light, there
was a gain in clearness and distinctness.
Sun.
Parts of the screw. Deviations from the mean.
67°1 —0°8
69°4: +1°5
68:4: +0°5
67°9 0:0
66°6 —1°3
66°1 —1°8
68:2 +0°3
68:0 +0°1
69:°6 +1°7
Mean’ 2° { 67:9-++-0'3
Hence the distance of the two D lines would be determined
with a probable error of 33, of its magnitude. From what has
been said above, an alteration of the distance between the source
of light and the spectroscope with a velocity of nineteen miles
in a second produces a reciprocal displacement of the lines of the
two spectra amounting to one-fifth of that distance—a magni-
tude, therefore, forty times that above found as the probable
error from the mean of nine readings.
Hence if, in observing stellar spectra, a sufficient quantity of
light can be used, it may be minicy decided by the way de-
2B 2
364 M. F. Zollner on a New Spectroscope, together with
scribed whether the expected displacement of spectral lines occurs
or not. In reference to the requisite intensity of light, I may
be permitted to remark that I had a non-achromatic lens* of
1 Paris foot diameter and 6 feet focal distance; the pencil was
received a few inches in front of its focus on a suitable concave
meniscus of flint glass, and, thus freed as far as possible from
spherical and chromatic aberration, it impinged on the slit of the
spectroscope. I think I must here more especially point out that,
in the use of a slit, achromatism of the optical image is not ne-
cessary for the observance of the spectrum, especially of indivi-
dual parts of it, and that therefore the above construction may
claim the advantage of being cheaper than when achromatic
glasses of great luminous intensity have to beused. Of course
in those cases in which the obiects to be observed require as
sharp separation as possible, as in the case of the double stars,
this advantage must be given up
I may be permitted, in conclusion, to make a few observations
on problems and methods which refer to spectrum-observations
of the sun, and with which I am at present occupied.
The sun possesses a velocity of rotation in virtue of which a
point on its equator moves with a velocity of about a mile in a
second. If, therefore, by means of a heliometer, or in any other
way, a double i image of the sun be produced, and if by suitable
adjustment two points of the edge of the equator be brought into
contact, parts of the sun’s surface are bounded by the point of
contact, of which one set move towards us and the other move
from us with a velocity of the amount mentioned. There is
thus produced a difference in the velocity of the parts touching
of about two and a half miles. In accordance with what has
been above said, such a magnitude of motion would produce an
alteration in the position of the sodium-lines corresponding to
the jth part of their distance. Hence if, by combining a suffi-
cient number of prisms, such a magnitude can be perceived or
measured, it is only necessary to bring the middle of the slit to
the lime of the two centres of the sun’s pictures to see in the
field of view of the spectroscope the two spectra of the sun’s
edges close to one anotier, and thus observe the displacement in
question under the most favourable circumstances. In this
manner the position of the sun’s equator might be determined ;
and, provided the measurements could be executed, the velocity
of rotation in various heliographic latitudes might also be deter-
mined, which would be of the greatest interest in reference to
opinions recently expressed upon this subject.
Apart, however, from a quantitative determination of the phe-
nomenon in question, by evena qualitative proof a simple means
* Constructed in the optical workshop of M. H.. Schroder in Hamburg.
contributions to the Spectral Analysis of the Stars. 365
would be found of separating all the lines which result from ab-
sorption in the earth’s atmosphere from those which owe their
origin to the sun’s atmosphere, masmuch as the displacement in
question can only affect the latter.
Another subject of investigation by spectrum-analysis of the
sun are the protuberances. Lockyer and Janssen have, as 1s
well known, succeeded in observing the spectrum of these ob-
jects (consisting of three bright lines) independently of a total
solar eclipse.
At present attention is directed on all sides to finding out
methods which shall enable not only those lines, but the entire
figure of the protuberances to be simultaneously observed.
The position of the bright limes corresponds to the magnitude
of the dimension of the protuberance in question which falls in
the direction of the sht. When the slit is brought successively
into various directions so that it cuts the protuberance in just so
many positions, we are in a position to construct the shape of
the body observed, as Lockyer has already done. Janssen has
proposed the construction of a rotating spectroscope, so that, with
adequate velocity of rotation, by means of the duration of the
impression of light the shape of the entire protuberance might
be seen at once.
Apart from the mechanical difficulties of such a rotating spec-
troscope, in which one of the three bright protuberance-lines
must be exactly in the axis of rotation, the object in view might
be more simply and completely obtained by oscillating the slit
at right angles to its direction. We should then be in a position
to observe the same protuberance simultaneously in three differ-
ently coloured images corresponding to the three different lines of
its spectrum. Yet in these methods with a moveable slit, the
difference in brightness, through which the protuberance stands
out against the ground, is considerably enfeebled according to
the distance traversed by the slit. With the rotating spectro-
scope more especially, the brightness of the protuberance would
be weakened from the centre of rotation towards the edge, and
the observation of the natural relative brightness of the image
would be prevented.
For this reason I intend using another very simple means for
attaining the object in question, of the practicability of which I
have convinced myself by experiments (to be subsequently de-
scribed) on terrestrial sources of hight. The principles upon
which this method depends are the following :—
(1) The apparent brightness (lustre, claritas visa*) of a protu-
berance-band is independent of the breadth of the slit, provided
that it always retains a perceptible breadth upon the retina.
* Lambert, Photometria &e. §§ 36 & 37.
366 M. fF. Zollner on a New Spectroscope, together with
(2) The brightness of the superposed spectrum increases pro-
portionally to the breadth of the slit.
(3) With an oscillating or rotating slit the brightness of the
superposed spectrum remains unaltered ; that of the image of
the protuberance decreases according to a law which depends
upon the number and duration of the impressions produced on
the place of the retina in question im the unit of time, and on
the refrangibility of the observed protuberance-band.
Assuming, for simplicity’s sake, that the entire surface overwhich
the slit moved in its rotation or oscillation were occupied by the
protuberance, and assuming that the intensity of the after-image
formed were inversely proportional to that surface (corresponding
to a uniform distribution over that surface of the light passing
through the stationary slit), then assuming the above three prin-
ciples, the ratio of the intensity between ground and protube-
rance would remain the same, whether,
First, by oscillation of the slit the brightness of the image
of the protuberance were diminished, and thus the brightness
of the superposed spectrum or of the ground (according to (2))
were left unchanged, or whether,
Secondly, the stationary slit was so far opened that its aper-
ture just extended over the space over which in the first case the
oscillation extended. Hereby, according to (1), the apparent
brightness of the protuberance would remain unchanged, while
that of the ground would be increased in the same ratio in which
it was formerly weakened when the ground was unaltered.
Hence, under the above suppositions, the intended object would
be far more simply attamed in the second way, by taking care
that, on account of dazzling, the intense direct light of the sun
did not penetrate into the slit.
The slit need then only be opened so far that the protuberance,
or a part of it, appears inthe aperture. By polarizing or absorb-
ing media, placed in front of the eyepiece, a suitable weakening
of the entire field of view must be provided for, in order that
the ratio between the intensities of the protuberance and su-
perposed spectrum may be as striking as possible.
Led by these considerations, I have attempted to realize by
means of terrestrial sources of liglit the conditions under which
the protuberances are visible, in order thus to test both methods
and convince myself of their practicability. In order the better
to understand the experiments described, the following remarks
may be premised.
The reason why, under ordinary circumstances, by deadening
the intense solar image the protuberances are not visible at its
edge, lies in the superposed strongly illuminated particles of our
atmosphere. In a total solar eclipse this superposed light is so
contributions to the Spectral Analysis of the Stars. 367
considerably weakened, that then the intensely luminous protu-
berances stand out from the illuminated parts of the corona
of the darkened sun. We may form an idea of the magnitude
of the necessary enfeeblement of the diffuse light of our atmo-
sphere, if we assume that the mean luminosity of the atmosphere
during a total solar eclipse is equal to that during an average full
moon. From my photometrical measurements* this luminosity
is 618,000 times less than that produced by the sun. Hence
the selective absorption of coloured media must stand in a similar
ratio to that of the homogeneous light of the protuberance, if,
as is attempted on various sides, we wished to make the protu-
berances visible without dispersion.
On the other hand, the possibility of attaiming this object by
the aid of the prism by dispersing the superposed atmospheric
light depends essentially upon the circumstance that this hght
consists of rays of all refrangibilities, while that of the protube-
rances only consists of three homogeneous kinds of rays.
I have in the following manner produced artificially the su-
perposition of a non-homogeneous mass of light over a body
shining with homogeneous light and bounded by sharp outlines.
The wick of an alcohol-flame was impregnated with chloride
of sodium and chloride of lithium. Ata distance of eighteen feet
from this flame, a piece of plate glass was so placed at an angle
of 45° to the direction of observation, that the reflected image of
a petroleum-flame at the side covered the feebly luminous alcohol-
flame, and by its considerably greater intensity rendered it quite
invisible. About a foot in front of the reflecting glass plate was
a small lens of 6 inches focus, which threw an image of the alco-
hol-flame upon the slit of the spectroscope. The latter was
fastened to the end of a spring about 10 inches long, by which,
removed from its position of equilibrium and left to itself, it
could for about five minutes be made to perform oscillations of
sufficient amplitude.
The breadth of the slit was first of all so far diminished, that
when the slit was at rest the double line D, and m comparison
feebly the lithium-line, appeared well defined in the field.
When the slit was made to oscillate, these lines changed into
sharp images of the alcohol-flame, of which the two soda images
were about halfcovered. The apparent brightness of these three
images was considerably smaller than that of the bright lines,
and hence their prominence on the diffusely illuminated spec-
trum-ground smaller m the same ratio than that of the lines when:
the slit was at rest.
When now I applied the second of the above proposed me-
thods, and opened the stationary slit so far that the image of
* Photometrische Untersuchungen &c. p. 105. Leipzig, 1860.
368 M. F. Zollner on the Spectral Analysis of the Stars.
the alcohol-flame was just bounded by the rectangular shit, I
was surprised by the far greater beauty and distinctness with
which the images of the flame stood out from the diffusely
illuminated spectr um-ground.
I may remark that I used in this experiment only one of the
above-mentioned newer prisms; but it is clear that, with mcrea-
sing dispersion, the enfeeblement of the superposed non-homo-
geneous light may be enhanced at pleasure.
In principle no difficulties prevent the application of this me-
thod to the sun’s protuberances*. Yet practical success, with the
given ratio of the intensities of homogeneous protuberance- and
supe posed atmospheric light, is essentially dependent on whether
a sufficiently strong dispersion for this ratio can be attained. If,
inaeiel from the ‘intensity and distinctness with which the lines
of the protuberances appear, especially the middle one (of which
I have convinced myself by my own observation at the Berlin
Observatory on the 24th of last December), it is allowable to
infer a very considerable relative brightness of the protuberances,
the means now at my disposal (four excellent systems of prisms)
will probably be sufficient to solve satisfactorily, in the way here
proposed, the problem of the visibility of protuberances.
Leipzig, February 1869.
Appendix.
M. Faye, after giving an account to the Academy of Sciences,
on September 20, of the above paper, proceeds as follows :—
“MM. Zollner has subsequently applied his new method to the
sun with the most complete success. He has been able to follow
and map from minute to minute with surprising facility and ac-
curacy the magnificent phenomena of the chromosphere ; he is
even about to photograph them, utilizing the images due to the
ray situated in the most photogenic part of the spectrum.
“Some of the drawings above mentioned have been published
by Zollner in a separate pamphlet. They show clearly that the
protuberances are violent eruptions (Mr. Lockyer has already
approximately determined their velocity), and not clouds sus-
pended in an atmosphere. They might be said to consist of a
gaseous mass projected vertically into an almost vacuous space,
expanding almost immediately, and then falling more slowly,
assuming the most capricious forms. Perhaps in this way we
shall be able to group the new manifestations of the force which
the sun exerts upon the very light material of comets,—a polar
force, according to Bessel and Olbers, like electricity and mag-
netism; a force merely repulsive according to another hypothesis,
* Owing to my not having yet completely set up the necessary imstru-
ments, I have been unable actually to test this method.
a
Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear. 369
with which M. Roche’s beautiful researches are connected. In
any case these drawings, which refer to four days, give the key
to a very curious enigma presented by the eclipses observed in
South America, in Chili, and in Brazil; I speak of the black
protuberances. They seem to me to be due merely to the dark
interval which exists for a few minutes either between two adja-
cent eruptions the plumes of which join, or between the ascending
column of an eruption and its plume falling on the side of it.
“Thus to observe the protuberances with the spectroscope at
any hour of the day, even when the sun is near the horizon, it is
sufficient to open slightly the slit of the spectroscope. Perhaps
M. Zollner will succeed in seeing them all together as in an
eclipse, by using very large prisms and aslit curved as an arc of
a circle.”
XLII. On the Structure of the Human Ear, and on the Mode in
which 1t administers to the Perception of Sound. By kh. Moon,
M.A., Honorary Fellow of Queen’s College, Cambridge.
[Continued from p. 130.]
ie my last paper I endeavoured to show :—
1. That the fact of the tympanal membrane being concave
outwards, coupled with its flexibility, adapts it as an agent for
the transmission to the sensorium of the motion arising from
rarefied waves, while the same concavity, coupled with the in-
elastic and unyielding character of the membrane, forbids the
transmission of the motion arising from condensed waves.
2. That if the ear yields to the impressions which rarefied
waves tend to produce upon it, an apparatus will be required by
means of which, after exposure to such waves, the membrana
tympani may be brought back to its original position, and the
organ generally be restored to its normal status; that the
muscles acting upon the bones of the ear are calculated to per-
form that office; and that no other adequate function has ever
been assigned to them; whence we may conclude that that por-
tion of the auditory apparatus has been contrived with exclusive
reference to the action upon the ear of rarefied waves.
3. That when either the tympanal membrane or the malleus
or incus is wanting, or the latter of those bones is disconnected
from the other or from the stapes, then, under the influence of
rarefied waves, the oscillations between the vestibular and cochlear
fenestre of the fluid in the labyrinth will still be maintained by
the alternate action, on the one hand of a difference in the ex-
ternal pressures upon the fenestra, and on the other of the sta-
pedius muscle; and that in this way a considerable power of
370 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
perception of sound may occur; at the same time, that when the
ear 1s exposed to the action of condensed waves under the same
circumstances no motion of the fluid in the labyrmth, and con-
sequently no perception of sound can occur.
The question here naturally presents itself, 1f, when the mem-
brana tympani, malleus, and incus are wanting, and the Eusta-
chian tube ceases to perform any recognizable function, hearmg
occurs in a manner, mM some cases, not very much less perfect
than when the ear is in its riorettral state, how comes it that a
machine so much more extensive and complicated is ordinarily
resorted to by nature for the accomplishment of that object ?
To this it has been replied, that in the perfect ear the ma-
chinery is much more efficiently protected from external injury,
whether arising from foreign bodies which find their way into
the meatus, or from cold*, than is the case with the mutilated
organ.
It may be added, moreover, that, on the view of the aachitions
apparatus above set forth, the unyielding character of the tym-
panal membrane must operate to protect the organ from injury
arising from condensations of the atmosphere, while the opposite
actions of the tensor muscle and of rarefactions of air must tend
to mitigate the effect upon the organ of the latter.
It may readily be conceived, too, in a general way, that the ear
in 1ts normal state must be a more powerful, more refined, and
more manageable instrument than that presented by the simple
labyrinth with its contents and closures, aided by the stapedius
muscle only.
A more important consideration, however, still remains.
If we regard the importance and delicacy of the functions per-
formed in the perfect ear by the two muscles combined and in
the imperfect ear by the stapedius alone, if we consider that
these muscles are under the influence of nerves which are not
involuntary but are subject to the action of the will, if we
advert to the very slow and gradual manner in which the recog-
nition of articulate sounds is developed in infancy, if we take
account of the apparently boundless interval between the ca-
pacity for appreciating sounds possessed by the obtuse rustic
and by the finest musical genius—if we keep in view these
various facts, I think it cannot but be evident that a long and
most delicate process of education of the nerves and muscles must
be passed through before that degree of proficiency is attained
which is requisite for the comprehension of spoken language,
and that one still more extended and refined must be undergone
“ The inconvenience from this latter cause, when the membrana tym-
pani is absent, is often very great. See papers by Sir Astley Cooper in the
Philosophical Transactions for 1800 and 1801.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 371
before reaching that degree of perfection with which many are
capable of discriminating the most complicated harmonies.
This process of education may be surmised to be greatly faci-
litated by the possession of the complete and perfect instrument ;
and it by no means follows that, because the education once ac-
quired through its instrumentality can toa certain limited extent
be turned to account by the imperfect organ, therefore the needful
training could equally have been attained by the aid of the latter
alone.
The relation of the ear in its normal condition to the ear de-
prived of the membrana tympani may be likened to that between
a violin with the ordinary provision of four strings and the same
instrument when three of its strings have been taken away:
with regard to which it may be observed that, although in the
latter case a musical prodigy has been known to elicit from it
effects which, in the absence of actual experience, would have
passed belief, it is at the same time clear that, without the skill
and dexterity acquired upon the more perfect instrument, no
such effects could have been producible.
I now propose to advert to one or two miscellaneous points of
interest connected with the subject.
I. I would in the first place recall attention to the description
of the muscles of the ear already cited from Mr. Wharton Jones
(vide anté, p. 125), who informs us that the muscles attached to
the malleus have been by some anatomists [herein following
Sommerring] stated to be three in number, of which two are
laxative and one a tensor of the tympanal membrane. Of
these Mr. Jones declares that the last named only can be strictly
demonstrated, and that the supposed laxatores tympani are
simply ligaments.
Now of these latter it isclear that, had they been attached to
muscles which would have relaxed the tympanum, being of the
nature of tendons and therefore fibrous and inextensible, they
would operate to resist any further stretching of the membrana
tympani; so that if the membrane had been elastic (which, as has
been shown, and as is well known, it is not), and to that extent
capable of being stretched by the action of condensed waves in-
cident upon it, these so-called laxatores tympani would prevent
any such effect taking place, and would thus, as it would appear,
have been of themselves sufficient to obviate any action upon the
sensorium of condensed waves—thus showing that the laxatores
tympani ligaments tend to corroborate the effect resulting from
the inelastic character of the membrane.
II. The foregoing conclusion is of peculiar importance when
we come to consider the auditory apparatus of birds, in which
and in that of mammalia alone is to be found a true tympanum.
3872 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
The apparatus among mammalia is essentially the same in
character as inman. That of birds differs (so far as regards our
present purpose) in two features :—first, that the bones are in
part replaced by cartilage, and, as regards their mutual colloca-
tion, are somewhat differently arranged; secondly, that the
tympanal membrane is convex outwards, and not concave out-
wards as in the case of mammalia.
The apparatus in birds may be described as consisting of the
labyrinth and of asingle true bone (which from the correspond-
ence of its functions with those of the stapes im mammals may
be designated as a stapedal bone), connected with the upper part
of which and with the sides of the tympanal cavity is a cartila-
ginous appendage to which the tympanal membrane is attached,
and by which the membrane is supported in its convex (out-
wards) position as upon a bent spring.
A reference to the principles unfolded in my former paper will
make it evident that the membrana tympani being convex out-
wards, its want of elasticity (even if it were inelastic) would
oppose no obstacle to the transmission to the sensorium of the
action of condensed waves; so that, so far as this part of the ap-
paratus is concerned (whatever may be the case in man and in
mammals), birds might have perception of sound through the
agency of waves of condensation—an instrument of conveyance
which, as has been stated, is slower, and therefore less efficient
than is offered by waves of rarefaction.
Any such effect as that just described is obviated by means of
a fibrous band stretching from the neighbourhood of the Eusta-
chian tube, and attached at its other extremity to the cartilagi-
nous appendage before spoken of ; which band, for the purpose
we are now considering, may be regarded as replacing the laxa-
tores tympani in man and n mammalia. Respecting this band,
M. Breschet informs us that ‘ Lorsqu’on la tiraille, on opére
la tension de la membrane du tympan”* ; that is, the effect of
the band, if it were attached to a muscle (which it is not), would
be, when the muscle was contracted, to draw the tympanal mem-
brane outwards; and its effect in the (actual) absence of any
muscle attached to it must be to resist any tendency to force the
membrane inwards ; that is, its effect is to counteract the only
effect capable of being exerted upon the membrane by a con-
densed wave.
III. Having shown the manner in which the auditory appa-
ratus in birds is adapted to suppress the action upon it of con-
densed waves, it may be proper to point out the mode in which
rarefied waves operate upon it.
* Recherches Anatomiques et Physiques sur ? Organe de l’ Audition chez
les Oiseaux (Paris, 1836), p. 24.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 378
The tympanum of birds is provided with a single muscle only,
the effect of which, when contracted, is to relax the membrane,
2. e. to draw it inwards (Breschet, pp. 24, 380). Hence the po-
sition of equilibrium of the auditory apparatus of birds (2. e. the
position which it assumes when not acted upon by any sound)
may be defined to be that in which it is placed when the muscle
or muscular fibres connected with the organ have produced their
utmost effect, by drawing in the membrana tympani to the full
extent which the fibrous band above mentioned will admit of; in
which position, of course, the membrane will be incapable of
being forced further inwards through the action of condensed
waves.
If a rarefied wave be incident upon the organ when im this
position, the tendency would be of course to move the tympanal
membrane outwards; and the membrane being convex outwards,
in order that such motion outwards may occur one of two things
must happen—namely, either the membrane must be elastic, or
else it must, when in the position of equilibrium, be somewhat
loosely stretched upon the cartilaginous spring of which we have
spoken.
I have nowhere found any statement as to the elasticity or
inelasticity of the tympanal membrane of birds; but for the sake
of perspicuity I shall assume, as seems most probable, that, like
the tympanal membrane in mammalia, it is inelastic, and conse-
quently that in the position of equilibrium the membrane rests
loosely on the cartilaginous spring which supports it.
When the general apparatus is in equilibrium, we may suppose
that the cartilaginous spring which forms part of it will also be
in equilibrium. But when through the action of a rarefied wave
the membrane has been moved outwards, the elasticity of the
spring will immediately come into play, and will tend to bring
the membrane back to its original position—a contrast being pre-
sented in this respect in the apparatus in birds and in mammalia :
for whereas in the latter case, when the membrane has been
moved outwards, the muscles of the tympanum are the essential
and only means of bringing back the organ to its original status,
there are in the former case two different and efficient agents for
producing the same result—to wit, the elasticity of the cartila-
ginous spring and the tympanal muscle. It may be observed,
however, that although the elasticity of the spring would in the
first instance tend to bring back the membrane in the manner
above described, there can be no doubt that, when the membrane
had reached the position in which its further motion inwards
would be stopped by the fibrous band above spoken of, it would
receive a sudden and complete check; and this occurring at a
time when its velocity was a maximum, the membrane would
374 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear, and on
rebound and again move outwards. A single atmospheric pulse
might thus throw the auditory apparatus into a state of oscilla-
tion for a considerable time—a circumstance which would mate-
rially interfere with the distinct perception of articulate sound.
To obviate such an effect is the special function of the tympanal
muscle in birds.
It is worthy of remark that, although in the auditory apparatus
of birds recourse is had to the principle of elasticity to the extent
above explained, the principle requires to be kept in check, and
is kept in check in the manner above described. In the more
perfect organ of man and of mammals, on the other hand, the
uncertain and unmanageable principle of elasticity is through-
out excluded, the tympanal membrane, the ligamento-fibrous
membrane wrapped about the base of the stapes, and the mem-
brane of the fenestra rotunda being alike inelastic and inex-
tensible.
IV. I would next remark that the success of the experiment
of Valsalva (which, though in general only temporary in its effects,
I apprehend to be of all known means for the diminution of
deafness the most simple and the most universal of application)
is confirmatory of the views with regard to the mode of action
of the human ear which I have endeavoured to set forth.
For if, as I have stated, the sensation of hearing is produced
primarily by the tympanal membrane and the stapes being forced
outwards, and the cochlear membrane being drawn inwards by
the operation of rarefied waves, and secondarily by these parts of
the apparatus being restored to their former status through the
operation of the muscles of the ear, the first and most natural
step to be taken in any case of defective hearing is obviously to
strengthen the tendency to move outwards of the tympanal mem-
brane and stapes when under the influence of rarefied waves ;
and this will clearly be effected by Valsalva’s experiment*, by
which the density of the air in the tympanal cavity 1s temporarily
increased. The enhanced effect of the experiment, as performed
under the improved method introduced by Politzer, is thus also
strikingly accounted for.
In the cases to which it is applicable (that is, when the tym-
panal membrane is wholly or im part present, and the connexion
between the ossicles is wholly or partially maintained) the effect
of Valsalva’s experiment, upon the principles before explained, is
precisely that of raising the voice in speaking to the patient.
On the other hand, if hearing took place through the agency
of condensed waves, the result of the experiment would be to
diminish the difference of the pressures on the two sides of the
* By this experiment, the nose and mouth being closed, air is forced
through the Eustachian tube mto the tympanal cavity.
the Mode in which it administers to the Perception of Sound. 375
tympanal membrane. If this assumption were true, therefore,
Valsalva’s experiment would occasion deafness rather than re-
move it.
V. As a particular instance under the last head, we may take
the case where the tympanal membrane is relaxed.
The deafness hence arising is known to be temporarily relieved
by Valsalva’s experiment; and that it is so may be explained
in this way :—When a rarefied wave is incident, its effect will be
immediately to move the tympanal membrane outwards; but, on
account of the relaxed state of the membrane, the effect will not
be immediately to move out the stapes, the moving out of which
is essential to produce the sensation of sound. Before this latter
effect can be produced the membrane must be moved outwards
until it becomes tightly stretched; and when it is so stretched,
and not till then, the stapes will begin to move outwards. We
may thus see how relaxation of the membrane diminishes the
hearing-power.
VJ. In contrast with the foregoing may be taken the following
ease related by Meniére*:—‘ An old judge had been accus-
tomed for at least sixteen years, by pressure of a blunt gold
needle against the membrana tympani, to make himself, for an
hour or so, a tolerably good hearing-power. Meniére examined
the ear during this state of things, found the membrana tympani
uninjured, and that the pressure was made upon the handle of
the malleus, which was pressed somewhat inwards. He speaks of
having seen several similar cases, and considers them cases of ner-
vous deafness, which were improved to a certain degree by pressure
upon the ossicula auditus, and through them on the labyrinth.”
I think there can be no doubt that the explanation here sug-
gested (if it can be called such) is erroneous. In elucidation of
the case before us, I give the following passage from Dr. Bren-
nan’s article on Elasticity, in the Cyclopedia of Anatomy and
Surgery t :—
“ When the disturbing force ....1is slowly applied, there ap-
pears to exist some degree of elasticity, even in fibrous mem-
branes; thus in hydrops articuli the structures about the joint
are frequently much distended by the accumulation of fluid
within, upon the absorption of which they slowly resume their
proper condition.”
The true explanation of the case in Meniére I take to be, that
in the undisturbed state of the patient’s ear, before the applica-
tion of the needle, the tympanal membrane was unnaturally tight-
* The citation which follows im the text is taken from an American
translation of Von Troltsch’s Lectures, Philadelphia, 1864.
+ The passage here cited immediately follows the statement as to the in-
elastic character of fibrous membrane quoted in my former paper.
SS a SO
a =
—— oo
———
—. — 5 4
376 Mr. R. Moon on the Structure of the Human Ear.
ened in such a manner as to draw out the stapes, whereby the
auditory apparatus, before the sonorous impressions became inci-
dent upon it, was placed in a state unfavourable for their reception.
By the action of the needle the tympanal membrane would be-
come stretched, thus allowing the stapes to assume its proper
position ; and this effect would continue until, by the gradual
but slow recovery by the membrane of its former status, in the
manner described by Dr. Brennan, the original obstacle to the
hearing of the patient would recur.
VII. In conformity with the views which I have endeavoured
to explain, loud sounds may be expected to produce deafness
either (1) by rupture of the tympanal membrane, (2) by dis-
connexion of the chain of ossicles either from one another or
from the tympanal membrane, or (3) by sudden convulsive
action of the muscles of the tympanum, through which the stapes
becomes so firmly fixed in the fenestra ovalis as to be with diffi-
culty withdrawn.
I conceive that deafness might result, i the manner last men-
tioned, even in cases where the sound which is the cause of it is
not exceptionally loud, provided that it was so sudden and unex-
pected as to cause alarm.
Probably also there is a fourth mode in which, in the case of
loud sounds, deafness might result, namely where a great con-
cussion of the air occurs; in which case the tympanal membrane
may become stretched by reason of the unusual pressure exerted
upon it by the condensed wave, in the manner in which Dr.
Brennan describes it as capable of being stretched by the conti-
nued action of a more moderate pressure. The same cause
which stretched the membrana tympani would force in the stapes,
and thus tend to produce the same kind of deafness as No. 3
just referred to.
VIII. The mode in which deafness is sometimes relieved by
means of a loud sound falling upon the ear is readily explicable
upon the principles before set forth, if we suppose the deafness
to have resulted from the stapes having become too firmly im-
bedded in the fenestra ovalis, or from rigidity of the articula-
tions of the ossicles.
IX. In accordance with the same principles, nervous deafness
may be expected to occur in either of two ways, viz. by paralysis
or torpor (1) of the auditory nerve proper, (2) of the motor
nerves connected with the muscles of the tympanum.
I shall seek for another opportunity to point out the functions
of the membranous labyrinth and the semicircular canals*.
6 New Square, Lincoln’s Inn,
October 1, 1869.
* Jn connexion with the explanation given in my former paper of the
pe ore
XLIV. Theory of the Voltaie Pile.
By W. Kencery Bripeman, L.D.S.*
‘HXHERE are extant at the present time two theories of the
voltaic pile, neither of which, however, can be said to be
sufficiently satisfactory to set the matter altogether at rest.
The conclusions arrived at by the late Professor Faraday were
to the effect that the source of power in the battery was derived
from “the chemical force alone” (Experimental Researches,
2053) ; but as chemical force is not supposed to be able to ori-
ginate itself, or to become developed otherwise than by generation
from some antecedent force or forces, the disturbing cause, or
initiating step whereby it becomes excited to action, still remains
for elucidation.
On the other hand, Professor Tyndall expresses his belief m
“the contact electricity of Volta being a reality,” though it could
produce no current, and goes on to observe that Sir Wilham Thom-
son “and others now hold what may be called a contact theory,
which, while it takes into account the action of the metals, also
embraces the chemical phenomena of the circuit ” (Faraday asa
discoverer, by John Tyndall, note, p. 66) ; but as Faraday has
demonstrated in the clearest possible manner (Exp. Res. 879-
883) that metallic contact is not requisite for the completion
of the circuit and obtaining the current, it can scarcely be admis-
sible to recognize contact of the metals as one of the conditions
necessary to the action of the battery.
In conducting the Experimental Researches relating to the
action of the battery, Faraday starts with the assumption that
“ when an amalgamated zinc plate is dipped into dilute sulphuric
acid, the force of chemical affinity exerted between the metal and
action of the auditory apparatus when the tympanal membrane is absent, I
may mention that I am assured by an eminent aurist that when the mem-
brane is absent the interposition of the promontory would prevent the ex-
posure of the cochlear membrane to the direct action of a wave of sound
which had traversed the meatus externus, and that the latter me & brane
could only be reached by a reflected wave.
I may observe that the statement (p. 126, note) as to the action of ¢ he sta-
pedal muscle, so far as the tympanal membrane is concerned, is perhaps
made too positively. Whatever that action may be, I apprehend that it must
always be subordinate to the action of the tensor tympani; so that while
the joint effect of the two muscles combined must necessarily be to draw
in the membrana tympani, that of the smaller and weaker muscle may be
to effect some minute adjustment of the form of the membrane. A similar
remark would apply to the functions of the laxatores tympani muscles, if
upon further examination it should appear that such muscles exist.
* Communicated by the Author.
Phil. Mag.S8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 256. Nov. 1869. ae
f
:
378 Mr. W. K. Bridgman on the Theory of the Voltaic Pile.
the fluid is not sufficiently powerful to cause sensible action at the
surfaces in contact and occasion the decomposition of water by
the oxidation of the metal’”’ (Exp. Res. 893).
Again, in reference to a cylinder of amalgamated zine placed
inside a double cylinder of copper, and the two then inserted
within a jar of dilute sulphuric acid, it is asserted that ‘being
thus arranged there was no chemical action whilst the plates
were not connected” (957) ; and “a battery constructed with
the zinc so prepared (that is, amalgamated), and charged with
dilute sulphuric acid, is active only whilst the electrodes are con-
nected, and ceases to act or be acted upon by the acid the instant
the communication is broken” (1000).
The very decided manner in which the assertion, that no che-
mical action takes place unless the dissimilar metals of the battery
be put into communication, is made, and the frequency with which
the belief in it is reiterated in various forms, make it appear
that this supposed fact was considered of some importance in
connexion with the conclusions arrived at. If, however, it be put
to the test of examination, it will be found to receive a direct
negative from experimental evidence and shown to be altogether
a fallacy.
A rod of absolutely pure zinc, 3} mches long and weighing
487 grains, after being thoroughly amalgamated and drained,
was placed half its length in cold dilute sulphuric acid (one part
pure acid to ten of water), and the other half exposed to the at-
mosphere in the same position as the ordinary plates of a battery,
In a very short time bubbles of hydrogen made their appear-
ance over the whole of the surface exposed to the acid, and after
forty-eight hours the zine was found to have lost upwards of two
grains in weight. This loss, however, was by far the least im-
portant part of the results obtained. The immersed portion of
the metal had not been acted upon uniformly over its entire sur-
face, but the action had been greatest at the surface of the liquid ;
at the same time the exposed portion had become covered with
patches of crystalline sulphate of zinc, high and dry upon the
projecting part of the metal. In addition to the fact of chemical
action having been exerted between the metal and the acid and
the water decomposed, there is the further evidence of the metal
having been polarized.
In order to render the effect more apparent, the experiment
was repeated with copper instead of amalgamated zinc, as the
colour of the crystals and the colouring of the acid afford more
conspicuous evidence of the results which are being produced.
A piece of stout copper wire was then similarly placed in acid ;
the latter very soon gave signs, by the colouring it received,
Mr. W. K. Bridgman on the Theory of the Voltaic Pile. 379
of the former commencing to undergo solution ; and after having
been suffered to remain undisturbed for twenty days, it presented
the appearance exhibited in the diagram, fig. 1. Fig. 1.
The portion A which had been immersed in
the acid was partially corroded into pits and
furrows, gradually decreasing in extent down-
wards.
The upper end, B, exposed to the atmosphere
had become coated with a layer of minute and
beautiful crystals of sulphate of copper, extending
from the top down to within about three-six-
teenths of an inch of the lhquid.
At the intermediate portion, C, a greater
amount of chemical action had been induced—cor-
roding the wire, as represented, about halfway
through and forming a neck tapering upwards.
The solution contaming the end A was only
slightly tmged in proportion to the amount of
copper dissolved, the crystallization having been
derived almost wholly from the metal above the
surface of the liquid.
“It is at present generally admitted that, in the normal con-
dition, the atmosphere is charged with positive electricity ....
The terrestrial globe, on the contrary, is charged with negative
electricity, as is proved by a variety of observations, direct and
indirect ; it is, moreover, a consequence of the presence of posi-
tive electricity in the atmosphere; for one of the electricities
cannot manifest itself in the free state without the appearance of
an equal quantity ofthe other kind’’*.
It is a fair inference to assume that it is in obedience to this
law that the exposed portion of the metal has been rendered
electro-negative, as its behaviour indicates it to be, while that
submitted to the acid has taken the opposite or electro-positive
state.
That the action which arises between the metal and the acid
is due to polarization is evidenced by the following proceeding.
A piece of copper wire wholly submerged in the acid so as to
entirely exclude any portion of it from coming into contact with
the air, has remained for many months without imparting the
slightest tinge to the liquid. Another portion having a piece of
platinum-foil connected with it has been attended with similar
results. A piece of wunamalgamated zinc-foil has also been kept
in dilute acetic acid in the same way with equal effect.
But on suffering the lquid to evaporate so as to bring the
* Phil. Mag. 8.4. vol. xxxiv. p. 322, “ Note on the Electrical Condi-
tion of the Terrestrial Globe,” by arene Rive.
380 Mr. W. K. Bridgman on the Theory of the Voltaic Pile.
upper end of the metal near to its surface, the instant the slight-
est portion becomes exposed chemical action immediately begins.
The first perceptible indication of this polarization is in the
partial dewing of the copper immediately above the surface of
the liquid. ‘This gradually increases in extent until the whole
exposed portion becomes wet with the solution, after which mi-
nute crystals soon make their appearance and in time cover the
exposed part, as shown in fig.1. The determination of fluids to the
negative portion causes the acid to rise and spread itself over the
surface of the metal; and this, becoming saturated in its ascent,
furnishes the material from which the crystallization is derived.
Two equal portions of wire were similarly placed in acid, only
that one was fully exposed to the atmosphere in an open tube,
while the other was placed in a phial, the acid occupying half
its height, and was kept closely corked for several weeks—after
which the fully exposed metal had lost in weight two-fifths more
than the one which had been excluded from contact with fresh
portions of air, showing that contact with the atmosphere in bulk
is necessary to the fullest action.
A piece of copper wire 3 inches long was immersed one-third —
in dilute acetic acid and exposed to the atmosphere im an open
tube. In avery short time a dull coating of amorphous acetate
of copper had been formed on the surface as far as the vapour of
the acid had reached; but by degrees this dry formation became
moistened, and as this occurred it was at once converted into
minute and beautiful dark-green crystals.
In each of these instances it is thus indisputably shown that,
in the position in which the plates of the battery are placed (that is,
one portion immersed in the exciting liquid and the other exposed
to the air), chemical action does invariably occur, and is in fact an
inevitable consequence of such partial immersion; and taking place
where there is no sufficient normal affinity existing between the
metal and the acid to effect the decompo- Fig. 2.
sition of water, but arising from the metal
being first polarized by the atmosphere,
there is hence an additional element in-
troduced that assumes a very significant
character when applied to the composition
of the battery.
Let A B, fig. 2, represent the zinc ele-
ment of the battery immersed half its.
length in the acid. The condition it im-
mediately assumes will correspond to that
shown in fig. 1—that is, the upper end
negative, and the immersed end positive.
It will now appear that there are two
Mr. W. K. Bridgman on the Theory of the Voltaic Pile. 381
pairs of poles, namely, the metal B and the air above, and the
metal A and the acid below, or a voltaic series composed of one
metal and two fluids.
But as the air is a non-conductor, no current can yet be ob-
tained. It is essential therefore to insert a conductor as its
representative which shall retain the same relative condition of
polarity, this polar condition being secured by its having a less
affinity for oxygen than the zinc or primary metal.
A secondary plate of platinum, as in fig. 3, being substituted
for the acid and the air of fig. 2, gives
an arrangement of two equally polarized
plates with their alternate poles in oppo-
sition ; and having their lower poles joined
bya conducting medium, they require only
to be connected by their upper poles or
electrodes to complete the circuit.
While separate, the chemical action is
confined to the primary plate, and takes
place in an upward direction ; but imme-
diately the electrodes are put into commu-
nication with each other, the action is di-
verted to the negative opposed to it in the
conducting acid, and is now spread uni-
formly over the whole surface of the im-
mersed metal. The polarization of the electrodes is thus shown
to constitute an integral part of the battery itself; and these, by
the addition of conducting-wires, are only made to undergo an
extension of surface without alteration of electrical condition.
It is now obvious that placing between the electrodes any con-
ducting substance capable of being decomposed must effect a
corresponding action to that which takes place in the exciting
fluid, and that an equal amount of chemical action will be effected
at either end of the metals. Metallic contact, however, will re-
duce the two pairs of poles to one, as in the case of the horse-
shoe magnet, and thus effect a concentrated action.
In the first instance the secondary platinum plate only repre-
sents the polarity of the acid and the atmosphere; but on im-
mersing the primary plate, and on this becoming equally polarized
and combining with the oxygen of the electrolyte, there is a de-
finite amount of hydrogen liberated, which retains its combining
force unbalanced, and which then augments the charge of the
secondary plate in an equal degree, and thus imparts to it a
feeble degree of tension additional to the first power of the com-
bination.
The chemical action occurring with the single metal chiefly at
the surface of the fluid and but feebly within the acid lower
382 Mr. W. K. Bridgman on the Theory of the Voltaic Pile.
down, exerts only a trifling amount of force upon the secondary
metal; but the instant the connexion is made through the elec-
trodes, the whole of the electrolyte enclosed between the metal
poles becomes electrolyzed and its ions separated, increasing the
electromotive force in like proportion.
The contact of two dissimilar metals in air does not represent
the two dissimilar metals of the battery, but simply corresponds
with the two electric states of the primary metal alone. Scarcely
any two metals have an equal affinity for oxygen, and any two of
these placed together at once become polar and determine the
mixed gases of the atmosphere to their respective poles. The
combination which then takes place between the more oxidizable
metal and the oxygen evolves or induces a certain amount of elec-
trical force by which the combined metals and the adjacent por-
tions of air become charged respectively positive and negative.
In the chemical action which takes place with the polarized
primary alone, it was stated that the greatest amount of chemical
action was found to oceur near to the surfaces of air and acid in
contact. The determimation of oxygen from the atmosphere to
the positive metal, combined with the electrolysis of the elec-
trolyte, was here exhibited in the greater extent of oxidation
and solution of the metal, and the less degree exhibited in the
metal which had been partly excluded from the atmosphere.
That no current can be obtained from the contact of two me-
tals in air is due to the fact that the atmosphere 1s not an elec-
trolyte. It was distinctly defined by Faraday that no current is
obtainable from chemical action unless by the decomposition of
an electrolyte, the cation from which being absolutely indispen-
sable for creating the tension of the secondary metal. The
oxygen of the air having no cation to part with, is therefore un-
provided with the means of accomplishing it.
The fact of this non-combination of the elements of the atmo-
sphere constitutes the means of initiating the action of the bat-
tery. The electrolyte of the battery being held together by a
combining force, cannot of its own accord separate itself into its
component elements, but requires the introduction of some anta-
gonistic force equivalent to or counterbalancing its cohesion, so
as to set its elements free—to repolarize them in fact; this is
accomplished by the introduction of the polarized metal, which,
rendering the force equal on all sides, electrolyzes the water and
allows its elements to rearrange themselves according to the
polar influences then presented to them.
Were the atmosphere an electrolyte, it would then require
some antecedent to effect its electrolysis, as the action must
begin by a non-combination of elements, or a condition requiring
no antecedent.
Norwich, September 1869,
BichS3y? |
XLV. Proceedings of Learned Societies.
ROYAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 320. ]
May 27, 1869.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
HE following communications were read :—
‘Researches on Turacine, an Animal Pigment containing Cop-
per.” By A. W. Church, M.A. Oxon., Professor of Chemistry in
the Royal Agricultural College, Cirencester.
From four species of Touraco, or Plantain-eater, the author has
extracted a remarkable red pigment. It occurs in about fifteen of
the primary and secondary pinion-feathers of the birds in question,
and may be extracted by a dilute alkaline solution, and reprecipi-
tated without change by an acid. It is distinguished from all other
natural pigments yet isolated, by the presence of 5:9 per cent. of
copper, which cannot be removed without the destruction of the
colouring-matter itself. The author proposes the name turactine for
this pigment. The spectrum of turacine shows two black absorption-
bands, similar to those of scarlet cruorine ; turacine, however, dif-
fers from cruorine in many particulars. It exhibits great constancy
of composition, even when derived from different genera and species
of Plantain-eater—as, for example, the Musophaga violacea, the Co-
rythax albo-cristata, and the C. porphyreolopha.
‘““On a New Arrangement of Binocular Spectrum-Microscope.”’
By William Crookes, F.R.S. &e.
The spectrum-microscope, as usually made, possesses several dis-
advantages: it is only adapted for one eye* ; the prisms having to be
introduced over the eyepiece renders it necessary to remove the eye
from the instrument, and alter the adjustment, before passing from
the ordinary view of an object to that of its spectrum and vice versd ;
the field of view is limited, and the dispersion comparatively small.
I have devised, and for some time past have been working with,
an instrument in which the above objections are obviated, although
at the same time certain minor advantages possessed by the ordinary
instrument, such as convenience of examining the light reflected from
an object, and comparing its spectrum with a standard spectrum, are
not so readily associated with the present form of arrangement.
The new spectrum-apparatus consists of two parts, which are
readily attached to an ordinary single or binocular microscope; and
when attached they can be thrown in or out of adjustment by a touch
of the finger, and may readily be used in conjunction with the po-
lariscope or dichrooscope; object-glasses of high or low power can be
uséd, although the appearances are more striking with a power of
* Mr. Sorby in several of his papers (Proc. Roy. Soc. 1867, xv. p. 433; ‘How
to Work with the Microscope,’ by L. Beale, F.R.S., 4th edition, p. 219) refers
to a binocular spectrura-microscope ; but he gives no description of it, and in one
part says that it is not suited for the examination of any substance less than +5
of au inch in diameter,
384 Royal Society :—Mr. W. Crookes on a New Arrangement
‘inch focus or longer; and an object as small asa single corpuscle of
blood can be examined and its spectrum observed.
The two additions to the microscope consist of the substage with
slit &c., and the prisms in their box. The substage is of the ordi-
nary construction, with screw adjustment for centring, and rackwork
for bringing it nearer to or withdrawing it from the stage. Its
veneral appearance is shown in fig. 1, which represents it in position.
A B is.a plate of brass, sliding in grooves attached to the lower part
Bice wilh
of the suvstage; it carries an adjustable slit, C, a circular aperture,
D, 0 Ginch in diameter, and an aperture, O, 3 inch square. A spring
tup euables either the slit or one of the a; ertures to ve brought into
the ceutre of the field without moving the eye from the eyepiece.
Screw adjustinents enable the slit to be widened or narrowed at will,
aud also varied in length. At the upper part of the substage is a
of Binocular Spectrum- Microscope. 385
screw of the standard size, into which an object-glass of high power
is fitted. E represents one in position. I generally prefer a }-inch
power; but it may sometimes be found advisable to use other powers
here. ‘The slit C and the object glass E are about 2 inches apart ;
and if light is reflected by means of the mirror along the axis of
the instrument, it is evident that the object-glass E will form a small
image of the slit C, about 0°3 inch in front of it. The milled head
F moves the whole substage up or down the axis of the microscope,
whilst the screws G and H, at right angles to each other, will bring
the image of the slit into any desired part of the field. If the slide
A B is pushed in so as to bring the circular aperture D in the
centre, the substage arrangement then becomes similar to the old
form of achromatic condenser. Beneath the slit C is an arrangement
for holding an object, in case its surface is too irregular, or substance
too dense, to enable its spectrum to be properly viewed in the or-
dinary way*.
Supposing an object is on the upper stage of the microscope
(shown in fig. 2) and viewed by light transmitted from the mirror
through the large aperture D and the condenser EK, by pushing in
the slide A B soas to bring the slit C into the field, and then turning
the milled head F, it is evident that a luminous image of the slit C
can be projected on to the object; and by proper adjustment of the
focus, the object and the slit can be seen together equally sharp.
Also, since the whole of the light which illuminated the object has
been cut off, except that portion which passes through the slit, all
that is now visible in the instrument is a narrow luminous line, in
which is to be seen just so much of the object as falls within the
space this line covers. By altering the slit-adjustments the length
or width of the luminous line can be varied, whilst, by means of
the rackwork attached to the upper stage, any part of the object may
be superposed on the luminous line. The stage is supplied with a
concentric movement, which permits the object to be rotated whilst
in the field of view, so as to allow the image of the slit to fall on
it inany direction. During this examination a touch with the finger
will at any time bring the square aperture O, or the circular aperture
D into the field, instead of the slit, so as to enable the observer to
see the whole of the object; and in the same manner the slit can
as easily be again brought into the field.
The other essential part of this spectrum-microscope consists of
the prisms. ‘These are enclosed in a box, shown at K (fig. 2). The
prisms are of the direct-vision kind, consisting of three flint and two
crown, and are altogether 1°6 inch long. The box screws into the
end of the microscope-body at the place usually occupied by the
object-glass ; and the object-glass is attached by a screw in front of the
prism-box. It is shown in its place at L. The prism-box is suffi-
* In carrying out the experiments which were necessary before this spectrum-
microscope could be made in its present complete form, | have been greatly as-
sisted by Mr.C. Collins, Philosophical-Instrument Maker, 77 Great Tichfield Street,
to whom lL am also indebted for useful suggestions as to the most convenient ar-
rangement of the different parts, so as to render them easily adapted to micro-
scopes of ordinary construction.
386 Royal Society :—Mr. W. Crookes on a New Arrangement
ciently wide to admit of the prisms being pushed to the side when not
wanted, so as to allow the light, after passing through the object-
glass, to pass freely up the tube K. Apinat M enables the prisms
to be thrown either in or out of action by a movement of the finger.
As the prisms are close above the object-glass, the usual sliding
box, carrying the binocular prism and the Nicol? s prism (shown at N),
may be employed as usual, and the spectrum of any substance may
thus be examined by both eyes simultaneously, either by ordinary
light, or when it is under the influence of polarized light. The inser-
tion of the prism-box between the object-glass and the bedy of the
microscope does not interfere with the working of the instrument in
the ordinary manner. ‘The length of the tube is increased | or 2
inches, and a little additional rackwork may In some instruments be
necessary when using object-glusses of low power. ‘The stereoscopic
effect when the Wenham prism is put into action does not appear
to be interfered with.
For ordinary work both these additions may be kept attached to
the microscope, the prisms being pushed to the side of the prism-
of Binocular Spectrum-Microscope. 387
box, and the large aperture D being brought into the centre of the
substage. When it is desired to examine the spectrum of any por-
tion of an object in the field of view, all that is necessary is to push
the slit into adjustment with one hand, and the prisms with the
other. The spectrum of any object which is superposed on the image
of the slit is then seen.
The small square aperture at O (fig. 1) is for the examination of
dichroic substances. When this is pushed into the field, by placing
a double-image prism P between A B and EK, two images of the aper-
ture are seen in juxtaposition, oppositely polarized ; and if a dichroic
substance is on the stage, the differences of colour are easily seen.
When the spectrum of any substance is in the field and the double-
image prism P is introduced, two spectra are seen, one above the other,
oppositely polarized, and the variations in the absorption-lines, such
as are shown by didymium, jargonium, &c., are at once seen.
A Nicol’s prism, Q, as polarizer, is also arranged to slip into the
same position as the double-image prism, and another, R, as analyzer,
above the prism-box. The spectra of the brilliant colours exhibited
by certain crystalline bodies, when seen by polarized light, can then
be examined. Many curious effects are then produced, a description
of which I propose to make the subject of another paper. Both the
prisms P and Q are capable of rotation.
If the substance under examination is dark coloured, or the illumi-
nation is not brilliant, it is best not to divide the light by means of
the Wenham prism at N, but to let the whole of it pass up the tube
to one eye. If, however, the light is good, a very great advantage
is gained by throwing the Wenham prism into adjustment and using
both eyes. The appearance of the spectrum, and the power of grasp-
ing faint lines, are incomparably superior when both eyes are used ;
whilst the stereoscopic effect it confers on some absorption and in-
terference spectra (especially those of opals) seems to throw entirely
new light on the phenomena. No one who has worked with a ste-
reoscopic spectrum-apparatus would willingly return to the old mo-
nocular spectroscope*.
If the illumination in this instrument is taken from a white cloud
or the sky, Fraunhofer’s lines are beautifully visible ; and when using
direct sunlight they are seen with a perfection which leaves little to
be desired. The dispersion is sufficient to cause the spectrum to fill
the whole field of the microscope, instead of, as in the ordinary in-
strument, forming a small portion of it, the dispersion being four or
five times as great ; whilst, owing to the very perfect achromatism
of the optical part of the microscope, all the lines from B to G are
practically in the same focus.
As the only portion of the object examined is that part on which
the image of the slit falls, and as this is very minute (varying from
* Jt is not difficult to convert an ordinary spectroscope into a binocular instru-
ment. The rays after leaving the object-glass of the telescope are divided into
two separate bundles and received on two eyepieces properly mounted. Asitis -
immaterial whether the spectrum be stereoscopic or pseudoscopic, a simpler form
of prism than Mr. Wenham’s arrangement can be used.
388 Royal Soctety:—
0:01 to 0:001 inch, according to the actual width of the slit), it is
evident that the spectrum of the smallest objects can be examined.
If some blood is in the field, it is easy to reduce the size of the image
of the slit to dimensions covered by one blood-disk, and then, by
pushing in the prisms, to obtain its spectrum.
If the object under examination will not transmit a fair image
of the slit (@f it be a rough crystal of jargoon for instance), it must
be fixed in the universal holder beneath the siit and the light con-
centrated on it before it reaches the slit. If the spectra of opaque
objects are required, they can also be obtained in the same way, the
light being concentrated on them either by a parabolic reflector or by
other appropriate means.
By replacing the illuminating lamp by a spirit-lamp burning with a
soda-flame, and pushing in the spectrum-apparatus, the yellow sodium-
line is seen beautifully sharp; and by narrowing the slit sufficiently
it may even be doubled. Upon introducing lithium- or thallium-com-
pounds into the flame, the characteristic crimson or green line is
obtained ; in fact so readily does this form of instrument adapt
itself to the examination of flame-spectra, that for general work I
have almost. ceased to use a spectroscope of the ordinary form. The
only disadvantage I find is an occasional deficiency of light; but by
an improved arrangement of condensers I hope soon to overcome this
difficulty.
“On some Optical Phenomena of Opals.” By William Crookes,
F.R.S. &e.
When a good fiery opal is examined in day-, sun-, or artificial
light, it appears to emit vivid flashes of crimson, green, or blue light,
according to the angle at which the incident light falls, and the rela-
tive position of the opal and the observer; for the direction of the
path of the emitted beam bears no uniform proportion to the angle
of the incident light. Examined more closely, the flashes of light
are seen to proceed from planes or surfaces of irregular dimensions
inside the stone, at different depths from the surface and at all angles
to each other. Occasionally a plane emitting light of one colour
overlaps a plane emitting light of another colour, the two colours
- becoming alternately visible upon slight variations of the angle of the
stone; and sometimes a plane will be observed which emits crimson
light at one end, changing to orange, yellow, green, &c., until the
other end of the plane shines with a blue light, the whole forming
a wonderfully beautiful solar spectrum in miniature. I need scarcely
say that the colours are not due to the presence of any pigment,
but are interference colours caused by minute strize or fissures lying
in different planes. By turning the opal round and observing it
from different directions, it is generally possible to get a position in
which it shows no colour whatever. Viewed by transmitted light,
opals appear more or less deficient in transparency and have a slight
greenish yellow or reddish tinge.
In order to better adapt them to the purposes of the jeweller, opals
are almost always polished with rounded surfaces, back and front ;
Mr. W. Crookes on some Optical Phenomena of Opals. 589
but the flashes of coloured light are better seen and examined when
the top and bottom of the gems are ground and polished flat and
parallel.
A good opal is not injured by moderate heating in water, soaking
in turpentine, or heating strongly in Canada balsam and mounting
as a microscopic slide.
By the kindness of Mr. W. Chapman, of Frith Street, Soho, and
other friends, I have been enabled to submit some thousands of opals
to optical examination ; and from these I have selected about a dozen
which appeared worthy of further study.
If an opal which emits a fine broad crimson light is held in front
of the slit of a spectroscope or spectrum-microscope, at the proper
angle, the light is generally seen to be purely homogeneous, and all
the spectrum that is visible is a brilliant luminous line or band,
varying somewhat in width and more or less irregular in outline, but
very sharp, and shining brightly on a perfectly black ground. If,
now, the source of light is moved, so as to shine into the spectrum-
apparatus through the opal, the above appearance is reversed, and
we have a luminous spectrum with a jet-black band in the red, iden-
tical in position, form of outline, and sharpness with the luminous
band previously observed. If instead of moving the first source of
light (the one which gave the reflected luminous line in the red) an-
other source of light be used for obtaining the spectrum, the two ap-
pearances, of a coloured line on a black ground, and a black line on
a coloured ground, may be obtained simultaneously, and they will be
seen to fit accurately.
Those parts of the opal which emit red light are therefore seen to be
opaque to light of the same refrangibility as that which they emit ;
and upon examining in the same mamner other opals which shine
with green, yellow, or blue light, the same appearances are observed,
showing that this rule holds good in these cases also. It is doubtless
a general law, following of necessity the mode of production of the
flashes of colour.
Having once satisfied myself that the above law held good in all
the instances which came under my notice, I confined myself chiefly
to the examination of the transmitted spectra, although the following
descriptions will apply equally well, mutates mutandis, to the re-
flected spectra. The examinations were made by means of the spec-
trum-microscope, which instrument is peculiarly adapted to exami-
nations of this sort, both on account of the small size of the object
which can be examined in it, and also as it permits the use of both
eyes In viewing the spectrum.
The following is a brief description of some of the most curious
transmission spectra shown by these opals. The accompanying
figures, drawn with the camera lucida, convey as good an idea as pos-
sible of the different appearances. The exact description will of
course only hold good for one portion of the opal; but the general
character of each individual stone is well marked.
No. 1 shows a single black band in the red. When properly in
focus this has a spiral structure. Examined with both eyes it appears
390 Royal Society : —
in decided relief, and the arrangement of light and shade is such as
to produce a striking resemblance to a twisted column.
No 2. gives an irregular line in the orange. Viewed binocularly,
this exhibits the spiral structure in a marked manner, the different
depths and distances standing well out; upon turning the milled
head of the stage-adjustment, so as to carry the opal slowly from left
to right, the spiral line is seen to revolve and roll over, altering its
shape and position in the spectrum. It is not easy to retain the
conviction that one is looking merely at a band of deficient light in
the spectrum, and not at a solid body, possessing dimensions and in
actual motion.
No. 3 has a line between the yellow and green, vanishing toa point
at the top, and near the bottom having a loop, in the centre of which
the green appears. Higher up, in the green, is a broad green band,
indistinct on one side and branching out in different parts.
No. 4 has a broad, indistinet, and sloping band in the blue, and
another, still more indistinct, in the violet.
No. 5 has a band in the yellow, not very sharp on one side, and
somewhat sloping. Upon moving the opal sideways, it moves about
from one part of the yellow field to another. In one position it
covers the line D, and is opaque to the sodium-flame of a spirit-
lamp.
No. 6 shows a curiously shaped band in the red, very sharp and
black, and terminating in one part at the line D. In the yellow
there is a black dot. The spectrum of this opal showed by reflected
light intensely bright red bands, of the shape of the transmission
bands. On examining this opal with a power of 1 inch, in the or-
dinary manner, the portion giving this spectrum appeared to glow
with intense red light, and was bounded with a tolerably definite
outline. Without altermg any other part of the microscope, the
prisms were then pushed in so as to look at the whole surface of
the opal through the prisms, but without the slit. The shape and
appearance of the red patch were almost unaltered; and here and
there over other parts of the opal were seen little patches of homo-
geneous light, which, not having been fanned out by the prisms,
retained their original shape and appearance.
No. 7 shows a black patch in the red, only extending a little dis-
tance, and a line in the yellow. On moving the opal the line in the
red vanishes, and the other line changes its position and form.
No. 8 shows the most striking example of a spiral rotating line
which I have yet met with. On moving the opal sideways the line
is seem to start from the red and roll over, like an irregularly shaped
and somewhat hazy corkscrew, into the middle of the yellow. The
drawing shows the appearance of this band in two positions.
No. 9 is one of the most curious. A broad black and sharp
band stretches diagonally across the green, touching the blue at the
top and the yellow at the bottom.
No. 10 gives a diagonal band, wide, but straight, and tolerably
sharp across the green. By rotating these opals, 9 and 10, in azi-
muth, whilst in the field of the instrument, the lines cau be made to
Mr. W. Crookes on some Optical Phenomena of Opals.
391
aa |
392 Royal Society :-—
alter in inclination until they are seen to slope in the opposite di-
rection.
No. 11 gives another illustration of a diagonal line, across the yel-
low and green, not extending quite to the,top.
No. 12 is one of the best examples I have met with of a narrow,
straight, and sharply cut line. It is in the green, and might easily
be mistaken for an absorption-band caused by an unknown chemical
element.
Other opals are exhibited, which show a dark band travelling along
the spectrum, almost from one end to the other, as the opal is
moved sideways.
It is scarcely necessary to say that the colour of the moving lumi-
nous line varies with the part of the spectrum to which it belongs.
The appearance of a luminous line, slowly moving across the black
field of the instrument, and assuming in turn all the colours of the
spectrum, is very beautiful.
All these black bands can be reversed, and changed into luminous
bands, by illuminating the opal with reflected hight. They are, how-
ever, more difficult to see; for the coloured light is only emitted at a
particular angle, whilst the special opacity to the ray of the same
refrangibility as the emitted ray holds good for all angles.
The explanation of the phenomena is probably as follows :—In the
case of the moving line, the light-emitting plane in the opal is some-
what broad, and has the property of giving out at one end, along its
whole height and for a width equal to the breadth of the band, say,
red light; this merges gradually into a space emitting orange, and
so on throughout the entire length of the spectrum, or through that
portion of it which is traversed by the moving line in the instrument,
the successive pencils (or rather ribbons) of emitted light passing
through all degrees of refrangibility. It is evident that if this opal
is slowly passed across the slit of the spectrum-microscope, the slit
will be successively illuminated with light of gradually increasing
refrangibility, and the appearance of a moving luminous line will be
produced ; and if transmitted light is used for illumination, the re-
versal of the phenomena will cause the production of a black line
moving along a coloured field. A diagonal line will be produced if an
opal of this character is examined in a sloping position.
The phenomenon of a spiral line in relief, rolling along as the
opal is moved, is doubtless caused by modifying planes at different
depths and connected by cross planes ; I can form a mental picture
of a structure which would produce this effect, but not clear enough
to enable me to describe it in words.
It is probable that similar phenomena may be seen in many, if not
all, bodies which reflect coloured light after the manner of opals. A
magnificent specimen of Lumacelli, or Fiery Limestone, from Italy,
kindly presented to me by my friend David Forbes, shows two sharp
narrow and parallel bands in the red. I have also observed similar
appearances in mother-of-pearl. The effects can be imitated to a
certain extent by examining ‘‘ Newton’s rings,”’ formed between two
plates of glass, in the spectrum-instrument.
Sir W. Thomson on a new Astronomical Clock. 893
June 10.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
“On a new Astronomical Clock, and a Pendulum-governor for
Uniform Motion.’ By Sir William Thomson, LL.D., F.R.S.
It seems strange that the dead-beat escapement should still hold
its place in the astronomical clock, when its geometrical transforma-
tion, the cylinder escapement of the same inventor, Graham, only
survives in Geneva watches of the cheaper class. or better portable
time-keepers, it has been altered (through the rack-and-pinion move-
ment) into the detached lever, which has proved much more accurate.
If it is possible to make astronomical clocks go better than at present
by merely giving them a better escapement, it is quite certain that
one on the same principle as the detached lever, or as the ship-chro-
nometer escapement, would improve their time-keeping.
But the inaccuracies hitherto tolerated in astronomical clocks may
be due more to the faultiness of the mercury compensation pendulum,
and of the mode in which it is hung, and of the instability of the sup-
porting clock-case or framework, than to imperfection of the escape-
ment and the greatness of the are of vibration which it requires ;
therefore it would be wrong to expect confidently much improvement
in the time-keeping merely from improvement of the escapement. I
have therefore endeavoured to improve both the compensation for
change of temperature in the pendulum, and the mode of its support,
in a clock which I have recently made with an escapement on a new
principle, in which the simplicity of the dead-beat escapement of
Graham is retained, while its great defect, the stopping of the whole
train of wheels by pressure of a tooth upon a surface moving with
the pendulum, is remedied.
Imagine the escapement-wheel of a common dead-beat clock to be
mounted on a collar fitting easily upon a shaft, instead of being rigidly
attached to it. Let friction be properly applied between the shaft
and the collar, so that the wheel shall be carried round by the shaft un-
less resisted by a force exceeding some small definite amount, and let a
governor giving uniform motion be applied to the train of wheel-work
connected with this shaft, and so adjusted that, when the escapement-
wheel is unresisted, it will move faster by a small percentage than it
ought to move when the clock is keeping time properly. Now let
the escapement-wheel, thus mounted and carried round, act upon
the escapement, just as it does in the ordinary clock. It will keep
the pendulum vibrating, and will, just as in the ordinary clock, be
held back every time it touches the escapement during the interval
required to set it right again from having gone too fast during the
preceding interval of motion. But in the ordinary clock the interval
of rest is considerable, generally greater than the interval of motion.
In the new clock it is equal to a small fraction of the interval of mo-
tion: 54, in the clock as now working, but to be reduced probably
to something much smaller yet. The simplest appliance to count
the turns of this escapement-wheel (a worm, for instance, working
upon a wheel with thirty teeth, carrying a hand round, which will
Phil. Mag. 8.4. Vol. 38. No. 256, Nov. 1869. 2D
394. ~ Royal Society :—
correspond to the seconds’ hand of the clock) completes the instru-
ment ; for minute- and hour-hands are a superfluity in an astrono-
mical clock.
In various trials which I have made since the year 1865, when
this plan of escapement first occurred to me, I have used several
different forms, all answering to the preceding description, although
differing widely in their geometrical and mechanical characters. In
all of them the escapement-wheel is reduced to a single tooth or arm,
to diminish as much as possible the moment of inertia of the mass
stopped by the pendulum. ‘This arm revolves in the period of the
pendulum (two seconds for one second’s pendulum), or some multiple
of it. Thus the pendulum may execute one or more complete pe-
riods of vibration without being touched by the escapement.
I look forward to carrying the principle of the governed motion
for the escapement-shaft much further than hitherto, and adjusting
it to gain only ;{,5 per cent. on the pendulum ; and then [ shali
probably arrange that each pallet of the escapement be touched only
‘once a minute (and the counter may be dispensed with). The only
other point of detail which I need mention at present is that the pal-
lets have been, in all my trials, attached to the bottom of the pen-
dulum, projecting below it, in order that satisfactory action with a
very small are of vibration (not more on each side than ;4,5 of the
radius, or 1 centimetre for the second’s pendulum) may be secured.
My trials were rendered practically abortive from 1865 until a
few months ago by the difficulty of obtaining a satisfactory governor
for the uniform motion of the escapement-shaft; this difficulty is -
quite overcome in the pendulum-governor, which I now proceed to
describe.
Imagine a pendulum with single-tooth escapement mounted on a
collar loose on the escapement-shaft just as described above—the
shaft, however, being vertical in this case. A. square-threaded screw is
cut on the upper quarter of the length of the shaft, this being the part
of it on which the collar works, and a pin fixed to the collar projects
inwards to the furrow of the screw, so that, if the collar is turned
relatively to the shaft, it will be carried along, as the nut of a screw,
but with less friction than an ordinary nut. The main escapement-
shaft just described is mounted vertically. The lower screw and
long nut collar, three-quarters of the length of the escapement-shaft,
are surrounded by a tube which, by wheelwork, is carried round
about five per cent. faster than the central shaft. This outer shaft,
by means of friction produced by the pressure of proper springs,
carries the nut collar round along with it, except when the escape-
ment-tooth is stopped by either of the pallets attached to the pen-
dulum. A stiff cross piece (like the head of a T), projecting each
way from the top of the tubular shaft, carries, hanging down from
it, the governing masses of a centrifugal friction governor. These
masses are drawn towards the axis by springs, the inner ends of
which are acted on by the nut collar, so that the higher or the lower
the latter is in its range, the springs pull the masses inwards with
less or more force. A. fixed metal ring coaxial with the main shaft
Dr. W. A. Miller on a Self-registering Thermometer. 395
holds the governing masses in when their centrifugal forces exceed
the forces of the springs, and resists the motion by forces of friction
increasing approximately in simple proportion to the excess of the
speed above that which just balances the forces of the springs. As
long as the escapement-tooth is unresisted, the nut collar is carried
round with the quicker motion of the outer tubular shaft, and so it
screws upwards, diminishing the force of the springs. Once every
semiperiod of the pendulum it is held back by either pallet, and the
nut collar screws down as much asit rose during the preceding inter-
val of freedom when the action is regular; and the central or main
escapement-shaft turns in the same period as the tooth, being the
period of the pendulum. If through increase or diminution of
the driving-power, or diminution or increase of the coefficient of
friction between the governing masses and the ring on which they
press, the shaft tends to turn faster or slower, the nut collar works
its way down or up the screw, until the governor is again regulated,
and gives the same speed in the altered circumstances. It is easy
to arrange that a large amount of regulating power shall be implied
in a single turn of the nut collar relatively to the central shaft, and
yet that the periodic application and removal of about 3; of this
amount in the half period of the pendulum shall cause but a very
smail periodic variation in the speed. The latter important condi-
tion is secured by the great moment of inertia of the governing masses
themselves round the main shaft. I hope, after a few months’ trial,
to be able to present a satisfactory report of the performance of
the clock now completed according to the principles explained
above. As many of the details of execution may become modified
after practical trial, it is unnecessasy that I should describe them
minutely at present. Its general appearance, and the arrangement
of its characteristic parts, may be understood from the photograph
now laid before the Society.
June 17.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—
“‘ Note upon a Self-registermg Thermometer adapted to Deep-sea
Soundings.’ By W. A. Miller, M.D., Treas. and V.P.R.S.
The Fellows of the Royal Society are already aware that the Ad-
miralty, at the request of the Council of the Society, have placed a
surveying-vessel at the disposal of Dr. Carpenter and his coadjutors
for some weeks during the present summer, to enable them to insti-
tute certain scientific inquiries in the North Sea. Among the objects
which the expedition has in view is the determination of deep-sea
temperatures.
Now it is well known that self-registering thermometers of the
ordinary construction are liable to error when sunk to considerable
depths in water, in consequence of the diminution produced for the
time in the capacity of the bulb under the increased pressure to which
it is subjected. The index, from this cause, is carried forward beyond
2D2
396 Royal Society :—Dr. W. A. Miller on a Self-registering
the point due to the effect of mere temperature, and the records fur-
nished by the instrument rise too high*.
A simple expedient occurred to me as being likely to remove the
difficulty ; and as upon trial it was found to be perfectly successful,
I have thought that a notice of the plan pursued might not be
unacceptable to future observers.
The form of self-registermg thermometer which it was decided to
employ is one constructed upon Six’s plan. Much care is requisite
in adjusting the strength of index-spring, and the size of the pin,
so as to allow it to move with sufficient freedom when pressed by
the mercury, without running any risk of displacement in the ordi-
nary use of the instrument while raising or
lowering it into the water. Several of these
thermometers have been prepared for the
purpose with unusua. care by Mr. Casella,
who hasdetermined the conditions of strength
in the spring and diameter of tube most fa-
vourable to accuracy. He has also himself
had an hydraulic press constructed expressly
with the view of testing these instruments.
By means of this press the experiments
hereafter to be described were made.
The expedient adopted for protecting the
thermometers from the effects of pressure
consisted simply in enclosing the bulb of
such a Six’s thermometer in a second or
outer glass tube, which was fused upon the
stem of the instrument in the manner shown
in the accompanying figure. This outer tube
was nearly filled with alcohol, leaving a little
space to allow of variation in bulk due to
expansion. The spirit was heated to dis-
place part of the air by means of its vapour,
and the outer tube and its contents were
sealed hermetically.
In this way, variations in external pres-
sure are prevented from affecting the bulb
of the thermometer within, whilst changes of
temperature in the surrounding medium are
speedily transmitted through the thin stra-
tum of interposed alcohol. ‘The thermo-
meter is protected from external injury by
enclosing it in a suitably constructed copper
case, open at top and bottom, for the free
passage of the water.
In order to test the efficacy of this plan,
the instruments to be tried were enclosed
* In sea-water of sp. gr. 1-027, the pressure in descending increases at. the
rate of 280 Ibs. upon the square inch for every 100 fathoms, or exactly one ton
for every 800 fathoms.
Thermometer adapted to Deep-sea Soundings. 397
in a strong wrought-iron cylinder filled with water, and submitted
to hydraulic pressure, which could be raised gradually till it reached
three tons upon the square inch; and the amount of pressure could
be read as the experiment proceeded, upon a gauge attached to the
apparatus.
Some preliminary trials made upon the 5th of May showed that
the press would work satisfactorily, and that the form of thermo-
meter proposed would answer the purpose.
These preliminary trials showed that, even in the thermometers
with protected bulbs, a forward movement of the index of from 0°°5
to 1° F. occurred during each experiment. This, however, I be-
lieved was caused, not by any compression of the bulb, but by a real
rise of temperature, due to the heat developed by the compression of
the water in the cavity of the press.
This surmise was shown to be correct by some additional experi-
ments made last week to determine the point. On this occasion
the following thermometers were employed :—
No. 9645. A mercurial maximum thermometer, on Prof. Phillips’s
plan, enclosed in a strong outer tube containing a little spirit of wine,
and hermetically sealed.
No. 2. A Six’s thermometer, with the bulb protected, as proposed
by myself, with an outer tube.
No. 5. A Six’s thermometer, with a long recurved cylindrical bulb,
also protected in a similar manner.
No. 1. Six’s thermometer, with cylindrical bulb of extra thickness,
noé protected.
No. 3. Six’s thermometer, with spherical bulb, extra thick glass,
not protected.
No. 6. Admiralty instrument, Six’s thermometer, ebonite scale,
bulb not protected.
No. 9651. An ordinary Phillips’s maximum mercurial thermo-
meter, spherical bulb, not protected.
The hydraulic press was exposed in an open yard, and had been
filled with water several hours before. A maximum thermometer,
introduced into a wrought-iron, tube filled with water, open at one
end to the outer air, closed at the other, where it passed into the
water contained in the press, registered 46°°7 at the commencement,
and 47° at the end of the experiment. Temperature of the external
air 49° F.
In commencing the experiment, the seven thermometers under trial
were introduced into the water in the cavity of the press, and after
a lapse of ten minutes the indices of each were set, carefully read,
and each instrument was immediately replaced in the press, which
was then closed, and by working the pump the pressure was gra-
dually raised to 23 tons upon the inch. It was maintained at this
point for forty minutes, in order to allow time for the slight elevation
of temperature caused by the compression of the water to equalize
itself with that of the body of the apparatus. At the end of the forty
minutes the pressure was rapidly relaxed. A corresponding depres-
sion of temperature was thus occasioned, the press was opened im-
398 Royal Society.
mediately, and the position of the indices of each thermometer was
again read carefully ; and the water was found to be at a temperature
sensibly lower than before the experiment began, by about 0°6 F.
By this means it was proved that the forward movement of the index
in the protected thermometers, amounting to 0°°9, was really due
to temperature, and not to any temporary change in the capacity of
the bulb produced by pressure.
This will be rendered evident by an examination of the subjoined
Table of observed temperatures :—
First Series: Pressure 24 tons per square inch.
Nuiiber oe Minimum index. || Maximum index. ees
Thermometer. Before. | After. || Before. | After. After. |
Jeimoegisebn.§ SIO) || oat gadh Ie Lcegdee 47-0 | 47-7
‘ pe BN ATO 46°5 46-7 47-6 46°5
% tipo 20 46'3 46°5 47-6 46:0
Meare ccc se Iperree, oiler eeen: 47-6
Unprotected. 1)| 46-7 46°4 46°5 54:0 46
i} 3| 47-0 46°5 46°5 56°5 46
; 56] 47:0 46:0 47-0 55°5 46
i, SOLS) ae Me See Ao | ALSio
Mean <.-:-: 46°9 46:3 46-7 | seen 46:1
Temperature of external air...... 49 49
Temperature of thermometer ’
ATL MOLES pe se seat ee sect once | 0 2s
In the Phillips’s maximum thermometer, with unprotected sphe-
rical bulb, No. 9651, the bulb had experienced so great a degree of
compression as to drive the index almost to the top of the tube. In
all the other unprotected instruments, which had been made with
bulbs of unusual thickness, the index had been driven beyond its
proper position from 6°°4 to 8°9 F.; and it is obvious that the
amount of this error must vary in each instrument with the varying
thickness of the bulb and its power of resisting compression.
Notwithstanding the great pressure to which these instruments had
been subjected, all of them, without exception, recovered their ori-
ginal scale-readings as soon as the pressure was removed.
It will be seen that the mean rise of temperature indicated by the
three protected instruments was 0°-9 F., whilst the mean depression
registered on removing the pressure amounted upon all the instru-
ments which admitted of its measurement to 0°°6, an agreement as
close as was to be expected from the conditions of the experiment.
A second set of experiments was made upon the same set of instru-
ments, with the exception of 9651; but the pressure was now raised
to 3 tons upon the inch; this was maintained for ten minutes. When
Geological Society. 399
it had risen to 22 tons a slight report was heard in the press, indi-
cating the fracture of one of the thermometers. On examining the
contents of the press afterwards it was found that No. 2 was broken ;
the others were uninjured. The broken thermometer was the earliest
constructed upon the plan now proposed, and it was consequently not
quite so well finished as subsequent practice has secured for those of
later construction. The results of the trial under the higher pres-
sures showed an increase in the amount of compression experienced
bythe unprotected instruments rising in one instance to as much as
11°-5 F. With the protected instruments the rise did not exceed 1°°5,
due, as before, to the heat evolved from the water by its compression.
A pressure of 3 tons, it may be observed, would be equal to that
of 448 atmospheres of 15 lb. upon the square inch; and if it be as-
sumed that the diminution in bulk of water under compression con-
tinues uniformity at the rate of 47 millionths of its bulk for each ad-
ditional atmosphere, the reduction in bulk of water under a pressure
of 3 tons upon the square inch will amount to about ;4 of its ori-
ginal volume. This probably is too high an estimate, as the rate
of diminution would most likely decrease as the pressure increases.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 322. ]
February 24th, 1869,—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D,, F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—
«On the British Postglacial Mammalia.” By W. Boyd Daw-
kins, Esq., M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S.
The author stated that the Postglacial or Quaternary Mammalia
of Englard and Wales amounted to 47. Of these only 15 are found
in Cayes and not in River deposits, whilst out of 31 found in the
latter, only 1 does not occur in caves; hence the author inferred
that the Cave and River deposits are palzontologically synchronous.
In Scotland, remains of Mammalia have occurred only in five places,
and in Ireland only in two places, in beds of Postglacial age. The
author ascribed this unequal distribution to the long continuance of
subaérial glaciation in Ireland, Scotland, and North Wales.
The author then compared the Postglacial with the Preglacial
Mammalia. The British species of the latter are :—
Ursus arvernensis. Bos primigenius.
—— speleus?. Hippopotamus major.
Sorex. Equus fossilis.
Mygale moschata. Rhinoceros megarhinus.
Talpa europea. Htruscus.
Cervus megaceros ¢ Elephas antiquus.
capreolus. meridionalis.
—— elaphus. Arvicola amphibia.
Sedgwickii. Castor fiber.
—— Ardeus. Trogontherium Cuvieri.
400 Geological Society :—
Of these 19 species inhabiting Britain before the deposition of the
Boulder-clay, 13 survived into Postglacial times*.
Passing from Postglacial to Prehistoric time, the Sheep, Goat, Bos
longifrons, and Dog make their appearance, while the great Pachy-
dermata, the Cave Mammals, and nearly all the northern forms dis-
appear. The characteristic postglacial mommals were defined by
the author to be
Paleolithic man. Ovibos moschata.
Gulo luscus, Rhinoceros tichorhinus.
Ursus speleus ? Elephas primigenius.
ferox, Lemmus.
Felis leo. Spermophilus citillus,
pardus. erythrogenoides.
Hyena spelea.
The author finally discussed the question of the age of the Lower
Brick-earths of the Thames valley and Clacton, and indicated the
difficulty of proving, from Paleontological evidence, whether they
are pre- or postglacial. He supposed that durihg the glacial sub-
mergence, the valley of the Lower Thames roughly marked the
coast-line of the icy sea, with a climate too cold to allow the con-
tinued residence of the Preglacial mammals, but which might still
occasionally be visited by their surviving descendants, the remains
of which would thus be mingled with those of Arctic immigrants.
March 10th, 1869.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The folowing communications were read :—
1. “On the Origin of the Northampton Sand.” By John W.
Judd, Hsq., F.G.S., of the Geological Survey of England.
This paper was an attempt to base on the study of a rock, both
in the field and the laboratory, a complete and consistent theory of
the conditions of its original deposition, and of the sequence and
causes of its varlous metamorphoses.
The Northampton Sand was described as consisting of various
strata, usually of an arenaceous character, which frequently pass,
both vertically and horizontally, into a ferruginous rock, the well-
known Northamptonshire ore.
The different features presented by the formation in various
localities were then indicated; and the lithological, microscopical,
and chemical characters of its constituent rocks described at length.
These characters were shown to point to the conclusion that the
beds were accumulated in a delta of one or more great rivers.
Arguments were then adduced in opposition to the theory of the
formation of ironstones by direct deposition, and in favour of the
hypothesis that the Northamptonshire ore consisted of beds of sand
altered by the percolation through them of water containing carbo-
nate of iron.
The cause of the redistribution of the iron in the rock was then
discussed ; and, in opposition to the views of Mr. Maw, who has
* The names of these are printed in italic.
Prof. Coquand on the Cretaceous Strataof England and France. 401
referred the phenomena in question to “ segregation,” they were all
shown to be easily capable of explanation on well-known chemical
principles, and to be due to the action of atmospheric water finding
access to the rock by its joints and fissures.
The paper concluded with a sketch of what was inferred to be the
history of the rock from its accumulation to the present time, and
some remarks on the varied and important effects of water when
acting under different conditions on rocks.
2. “On the Occurrence of Remains of Pterygotus and EHurypterus
in the Upper Silurian Rocks in Herefordshire.” By the Rev. P. B.
Brodie, M.A., F.G.S.
In this paper the author described the occurrence of numerous
specimens of Crustacea, chiefly belonging to the genera Huwrypterus
and Pterygotus, in beds of Upper Silurian age, probably the “ passage
beds,” in the Woolhope district and near Ludlow.
March 24th, 1869.—Sir Philip de M. Grey Egerton, Bart., M.P.,
F.R.S., in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. “ On the Cretaceous Strata of England and the North of France,
compared with those of the West, South-west, and South of France,
and the North of Africa.” By Professor Henri Coquand, of Mar-
seilles.
In this paper the author indicated that the agreement between the
Cretaceous strata of England and the North of France, as far as the
Basin of Paris, is such that the same classification may be applied to
the whole, but that in advancing to the west and south new beds
make their appearance. This is also the case in Algeria, the pale-
ontological differences between the Cretaceous rocks of that country
and those of the Anglo-Parisian basin being so great as to lead at
first sight to the impression that they belong to two different
formations. The author arrived at the following classification and
nomenclature of the divisions of the Cretaceous rocks, the paleonto-
logical characters and geographical range of which were described
in the paper :—
I. Upper CRETACEOUS.
A. Red Lancustrine Sandstone of Vitrolles (=Garumnien of Leymerie).
B. Dordonien.
C. Campanien (= Upper Chalk).
D. Santonien (=Superior Lower Chalk).
E. Coniacien (Sandstone).
IT. Mipprz Cretaceots.
F. Provencien.
G. Mornasien.
H. Angoumien.
I. Ligérian (=Inferior Lower Chalk).
J. Carentonien.
K. Gardonien.
L. Rothomagien (=Upper Greensand and Chalk-marl).
M. Gault.
402 Geological Society.
III. Lower Creracrovs.
N. Aptien.
1, Upper.
2. Middle
3. Lower
O. Neocomien.
P. Valengien. |
2. “On the Structure and Affinities of Sigillavia and allied
genera.” By W. Carruthers, Esq., F.L.S., F.G.8.
The author indicated the characters of the medullary rays of dico-
tylcdonous stems, and stated that these stems have a vascular hori-
zontal system connected with the axial organs, in which respect the
dicotyledonous and acrogenous stems agree. ‘The woody columns of
Stigmaria and Sigillaria are destitute of medullary rays, the struc-
tures previously described as such being the vascular bundles run-
ning to the rootlets and leaves. Hence the author concluded that
Sigillaria is a true cryptogam—a position supported by the charac-
ters of the organs of reproduction as described by Goldenberg. The
paper concluded with an enumeration of the forms of fruits belong-
ing to Stgillaria and its allied-genera, with indications of the exist-
ing forms to which they most nearly approach.
3. “On the British Species of the Genera Climacograpsus, Diplo-
grapsus, Dicranograpsus, and Didymograpsus.” By H, Alleyne Nichol-
son, D.Sc., M.B., F.G.S.
The author stated that all the genera referred to in this paper
appear to be exclusively of Lower Silurian age,—Clhmacograpsus and
Diplograpsus occurring almost throughout the Lower Silurian;series,
whilst the other two genera belong chiefly to the Llandeilo series of
rocks, or to strata of corresponding position out of Britain.
The British species of the above genera admitted by the author
are :—
Climacograpsus teretiusculus (His.). Diplograpsus tamariscus, Nich.
bicornis (Hall). putillus (Hai/).
tuberculatus, Nich., sp. n. nodosus, Harkn.
} = Lower Greensand.
Diplograpsus pristis (/Zs.). —— pinnatus, Harkn.
— mucronatus (Hall). , Sp.
— Whitfieldii (Hall). Dicranograpsus ramosus (Hail).
Harknessii, Nich. D'dymograpsus Murchisoni (Bech).
affinis, Vich., sp. n.
—— cometa, Gein. divaricatus (Hall).
palmeus, Barr. anceps, Vick.
—— acuminatus, Nich. —— flaccidus (Hal?).
vesiculosus, Nich. — sextans (Hall).
—— pristiniformis (Hall).
The paper included descriptions of the supposed embryonic states
of several of the species.
April 14th, 1869.—Prof. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair.
The following communication, were read :—
1. “On the Coal-mines at Kaianoma, in the Island of Yezo.” By
F. O. Adams, Esq., Hon. Secretary of Legation in Japan.
The writer states that the works at Kaianoma have made con-
confertus, Nich.
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 403
siderable progress since they were reported upon by Mr. Mitford
last year*. There are four seams of coal, each about 7 feet thick,
from 50 to 100 feet apart. A tunnel has been driven through one
of the seams for a distance of between 150 and 250 feet, and at an
elevation of 430 feet above the sea. From this the coal obtained is
carried down to the shore on the backs of men, mules, and ponies.
The writer adds that there is abundance of coal “of the canrel
description.”
2. “On a peculiarity of the Brendon-Hills Spathose Ore-veins.”
By M. Morgans, Esq.
The author described the Brendon Hills as consisting of a Devo-
nian slate dipping 8. by HE. and N. by W. on the two sides of the
axis of elevation. The cleavage-lamine dip 8. by W. at an angle
of 80°; and the cleavage-strike forms only a slight angle with that
of the beds, which, however, is sometimes irregular. Veins of
spathose iron-ore, very rich in manganese, occur in the slate; and
the ~eneral dip of these appears to coincide with that of the cleavage-
planes. The veins consist of thin “tracks” of softened clay-slate
and quartz, with larger or smaller pockets of productive ore. These
metalliferous portions do not descend parallel to the line of their
dip, but slope more or less, usually to the west. The author stated
that the veins have been segregated from the adjoming clay-slate,
the unproductive portions of them occurring where the conterminous
strata were not impregnated with sufficient ferruginous matter to
produce a lode of iron-ore ; the slope of each productive part, called
“‘end-slant” by the author, is determined by the line of inter-
section of the plane of the vein with the boundaries of the ferru-
ginous portions of the beds.
XLVI. Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
ON THE EMISSION AND ABSORPTION OF HEAT RADIATED AT Low |
TEMPERATURES. BY G. MAGNUS.
ie IFFERENT substances, when heated to 150° C., emit dif-
ferent kinds of heat.
9. There are bodies which emit only one kind of heat, and others
which emit several.
3. To the first class belongs rock-salt when it is quite pure. Just
as the ignited vapour of this substance, or of one of its constituents
(sodium), only emits one colour, so, too, it only radiates one kind of
heat. It is monothermal,as its vapour is monochromatic.
4, Rock-salt absorbs the heat radiated by rock-salt in larger quan-
tity, and more energetically, than that of sylvine (chloride of potas-
sium) and other kinds of heat. Hence, contrary to what Melloni
* See Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxiv. p. 511.
404 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
and Knoblauch allege, it does not transmit all kinds of heat equally
well.
5. Absorption by rock-salt increases with the thickness of the ab-
sorbing plate.
6. The great diathermancy of rock-salt does not depend upon a
small absorbing-power for different kinds of heat, but upon the cir-
cumstance that it only emits one kind of heat and only absorbs
this one, and that almost all other bodies at a temperature of 150° C,
emit heat which only contains a small portion, or none at all, of the
rays which rock-salt emits.
7. Sylvine behaves like rock-salt, but is not monothermal to the
same extent. In this case also we have an analogy with its ignited
vapours or those of potassium, which is known to give an almost con-
tinuous spectrum.
8. Fluor-spar absorbs the pure heat from rock-salt almost com-
pletely. It would thence be expected that the heat which it emits is
also strongly absorbed by rock-salt ; yet 70 per cent. passes through
a rock-salt plate 20 millims. thick. ‘Taking into consideration the
sum of the heat which fluor-spar emits, which is more than thrice as
much as that of rock-salt, this phenomenon might be explained; but
it needs further investigation.
9. If it were possible to construct a spectrum of the heat radiated
at 150° C., and if rock-salt were the substance, the spectrum would
contain only ove band. If sylvine were used for radiation the spec-
trum would be more extended, but would only occupy a small por-
tion of that which would result from the heat radiated by lampblack.
— Berliner Monatsbericht, June 1869.
ON THE LIMITS OF THE MAGNETIZATION OF TRON AND STEEL.
BY PROF. A. WALTENHOFEN.
The author has subjected to exhaustive calculations the whole of
the present materials of observation on the connexion between elec-
tromagnetism and current-intensity, and has thus arrived at the fol-
lowing result.
The limiting value of the magnetic momentum of the unit of weight
corresponding to the condition of magnetic saturation of iron is an
absolute constant (that is, independent of the shape and magnitude
of the electromagnet) whose numerical value amounts to very nearly
2100 absolute units per milligramme.
{t follows from this that the theoretically possible temporary
magnetization of iron is more than five times as much as the perma-
nent which has been attained by the best steel magnets, if, with M.
Weber, we take the latter as 400 absolute units per milligramme.
The author considers it remarkable that just this degree of satu-
ration is also that required by the law which he discovered in 1863,
in reference to the temporary magnetization of steel bars by means
of the electrical current ; while, in the case of iron, Lenz and Jacobi's
law of proportionality, as the author shows, only holds up to a degree
of saturation of (on the average) 800 absolute units per milligramm
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 405
The author regards the absolute limiting value of the magnetic
momentum of the unit of length as a physical constant characteristic
of iron, and comparable with the constants of elasticity, solidity,
&e.; and he holds that its existence is quite in accord with the
theory of rotatory molecular magnets, of the probability of which he
thinks a striking proof has been afforded by his discovery of abnormal
magnetization and the phenomena connected therewith.
The author finally points out that the result of his calculation,
contained in the above law, also justifies the conclusion that the pro-
portionality indicated by Muller between the coefficient B of his
formula and the length of the bar, but considered inaccurate and
imperfectly established, must have general validity. At the same
time the circumstances are mentioned to which it must be ascribed
that both Muller and the author were led to doubt, from existing
data, the applicability and universality of this formula.
The author refers to a research by Oberbeck which has recently
appeared, of which he only heard after his investigation was finished :
in it the question of the existence of an independent limiting value of
the magnetic momentum of the unit of valumeis discussed. But the
author remarks that this research involves no change or completion
of the results above adduced; for the amount of the limiting value is
neither ascertained nor adduced, and the results of the experiments
show too irregular a course to permit a numerical deduction of such
a limiting value, although the existence of such a one seems to follow
from two of the series of them.—Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserlichen
Akademie in Wien, 1869, No .12.
——
ON THE REFLECTION OF HEAT FROM THE SURFACE OF FLUOR-
SPAR AND OTHER BODIES. BY G. MAGNUS.
After succeeding in freeing the heat from various substances
raised to 150° C. from the rays of the heating-flame and of other
heating-bodies, it was possible to show, in the research laid
before the Academy on June 9, that there are some bodies which
only radiate one or at most a few wave-lengths, others which emit a
greater number. Hence it seemed interesting to answer the question,
what is the reflecting-power of these bodies? whether tke same dif-
ferences which are observed in reference to the absorption and trans-
mission of heat by bodies that are identical as regards the action of
light also occur in the reflection of heat.
Differences in reflecting-power can only definitely occur when
rays are reflected which only contain one or a few wave-lengths.
Such rays have been already obtained by using individual parts of
a spectrum produced by a rock-salt prism, or by allowing the rays
of a source of heat which radiates many wave-lengths (those of a
lamp for instance) to pass through substances which only absorb a
certain number. But there are very few substances which transmit
rays of only one or of a few wayve-lengths ; and these are, moreover,
of small intensity.
4.06 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
In spite of this difficulty, MM. La Provostaye and Desains showed
in 1849* that, according as heat from a Locatelli’s lamp has passed
through glass or through rock-salt, various quantities are reflected by
speculum-metal, silver, and platinum; and in the case of all re-
flecting surfaces, less was reflected of that which had passed through
glass than of that through rock-salt.
The same inquirers have subsequently published a comprehensive
series of experiments made with the heat of a lamp decomposed by
means of a glass prism, in which it was shown that heat from the
different parts of the spectrum is variously reflected. But they
restricted their experiments to reflection from metallic surfaces,
doubtless on account of the feeble intensity of the incident heat. Now
that we possess in rock-salt a substance which only emits one or a
few wave-lengths, and we also know other bodies which at the tem-
perature of 150° C. radiate a limited number of wave-lengths, it is
possible to make experiments on the reflection of non-metallic sur-
faces. It has thus been found that from these the different kinds of
heat or wave-lengths are reflected in very different quantity. Only
one of the most surprising examples shall be here mentioned. It
refers to the reflecting-power of fluor-spar.
Of heat which very different substances radiate, there are reflected
at an angle of 45° quantities which are indeed not equal, but which
do not differ much from each other.
Silver, between .... 83 and 90 per cent.
Glass hs G1 Ae a
Rock-salt i... pais a vt
Fluor-spar_,, (opis esate)
Of the heat from rock-salt, fluor-spar reflects 28 to 30 per cent.,
while silver, glass, and rock-salt do not reflect larger proportions of
this than of the other kinds of heat.
Here, as in the experiments on the transmission of heat, it has
been confirmed that sylvine emits a large quantity of rock-salt heat,
but at the same time emits other kinds of heat. And fluor-spar
reflects 15-17 per cent. of sylvine-heat, consequently less than
it reflects of rock-salt heat, and more than it does of that from the
other radiating bodies.
If our eyes had the power of distinguishing the various wave-lengths
of heat as well as the colours of light, fluor-spar would appear brighter
than all other substances when the rays of rock-salt fell upon them.
If the rays came from sylvine, fluor-spar would also appear brighter
than all other bodies, but not so bright as with the radiation from
rock-salt.
Melloni has taught us that various substances transmit very dif-
ferent quantities of heat, and that the source from which it origimates
has great influence on its transmission. But the sources of heat
were only distinguished as to their degree of heat, and we knew that
with increasing temperature the diversity of the radiation increased.
* Comptes Rendus, vol. xxvil. p. 501.
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 407
It has now been found thateven at one and the same temperature, and
that a temperature (150° C.) which is very far from a red heat, dif-
ferent substances emit very different kinds of heat, and that thus, in
any space whatever, an extraordinarily large number of different wave-
lengths are continually crossing each other. This manifold crossing
is especially increased by the selective absorption which is met with
at different surfaces.
Hence an eye which could discriminate the various wave-lengths
of heat like the colours of light, would see all objects in the most
different colours, evenif they were not specially warmed.—Poggen-
dorff’s Annalen, September 1869.
ON THE LUMINOUS EFFECTS PRODUCED BY ELECTROSTATIC IN-
DUCTION IN RAREFIED GASES.—LEYDEN JAR WITH GASEOUS
COATINGS. NOTE BY M. F. P. LE ROUX.
I, In a previous communication I described a certain number of
experiments which render evident the induction that takes place in
the body of rarefied gases, in vessels formed of a continuous insula-
ting material, and devoid of all metallic communication with the ex-
terior. ‘These effects are manifested by true currents which illumi-
nate the gaseous masses in the body of which they are propagated.
The facts here treated of have interesting consequences in the way
of explaining certain meteorological phenomena. ‘They must play
an important part in the luminous manifestations of the electricity of
the globe to which is given the name of polar auroras; and the dif-
fused part of the glows which constitute them, it seems to me, should
be attributed to an electrostatical induction seated in the higher
strata of the atmosphere, under the influence of the discharges of the
aurora.
This same induction, operating in the rarefied strata of the atmo-
sphere, seems to me to furnish the explanation of a remarkable cir-
cumstance which often accompanies the lustre of the lightning-dis-
charge. When the lightning strikes, it produces an illumination
which surrounds the perfectly serene regions of the sky, when there
are any; the circumstances of this phenomenon do not appear to
me to be capable of explanation by a phosphorescence of the atmo-
sphere properly so called. Itseems to me that we must rather per-
ceive in it the manifestation of the return shock which must take
place in the higher regions of the atmosphere at the moment when,
through the effect of the discharge which constitutes the lightning,
the clouds revert to their neutral condition.
As to the heat-lightning, so called, which is observed in a clear
sky at a certain height above the horizon, there is no doubt that
itis due to the same cause.
II. The electrostatical induction of rarefied gaseous masses ap-
pears to operate instantaneously across insulating envelopes; at
least this is what seems to me to result from the working of the
apparatus that I have constructed, in which the illumination is pro-
408 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
duced under the influence of a toothed disk of india-rubber previ-
ously electrified. We remark, in short, that the flash of the illumi-
nation increases with the velocity of the disk. This circumstance
is but little favourable to the hypothesis according to which the in-
fluence would be exercised across dielectrics by a polarization of
successive layers ; it would be necessary in that case that the polar-
ization should be instantaneous, and we cannot see in what the
difference between insulating bodies and conductors would consist.
III. Tubes filled with rarefied gases and provided with metallic
wires sealed at the ends like Geissler’s tubes, but terminated ex-
ternally by knobs to prevent the wires from acting like points, may
be applied with advantage to demonstrate the movements of electricity
to which the influence gives rise, especially those of the return shock.
I have executed these experiments; but the credit of them is due to
M. G. Govi, of Turin, who has very ingeniously employed this means
of demonstration in the place of metallic conductors armed with
pendulums, of the electroscopic frog, and of the other contrivances
usually employed in this part of the study of electricity *. These
luminous conductors have also been made use of by him to exhibit
the phenomena of induction of different orders by interposing them
in long metallic circuits.
IV. In the course of the experiments which I have had occasion
to make with rarefied gases, [ have remarked that the glass was
charged by the intervention of gaseous conductors with the same
facility as by means of metallic conductors. I have thus been led
to construct a Leyden jar in which the metallic coatings are replaced
by rarefied gas: itis composed of a closed primary tube enveloped by
a second, to which it is fused; each of the tubes is provided with a
platinum wire ; a vacuum is created in them to the extent of about 3
millims. Such a system is charged with a Leyden jar of the same
dimensions ; the residues init seem to be less abundant than in ordi-
nary jars; but this question, in order to be fully solved, requires
more numerous experiments.
In fine, rarefied gases behave precisely as metallic conductors. It
is to be remarked that such a medium formed into a point acts just
like a metal of the same shape, and manifests the same effects of
tension, to such an extent that, in the glass vessels intended to con-
tain gases with a view to the experiments here treated of, it is neces-
sary to avoid all such tapering of the tubes as would give to the
interior surface the form of an acute point. If this circumstance
does happen, and the interior gas is strongly electrified, we often see
the electricity strike out for itself a passage through the glass at that
place; and if the glass be too thick, the electricity, in place of
opening a direct path for itself, cracks off the little button of melted
glass which generally terminates the tapering ends closed by the
blowpipe.—Comptes Rendus, May 31, 1869.
* Gazette officielledu Royaume d’Italie, No. 49, 1865.
NOV. 13, 1438
THE
LONDON, EDINBURGH, ann DUBLIN
PHILOSOPHICAL MAGAZINE
AND
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.
[FOURTH SERIES.]
DECEMBER 1869.
XLVII. On the Motions of Camphor on the Surface of Water.
By Cuartes Tomurnson, F.R.S.*
Is Wop phenomena presented by the motions of camphor on
water form a kind of scientific waif, which has at va-
rious times been claimed by certain scientific lords of the manor,
quarrelled over, and then thrown aside. At one time it has
wandered over the outer boundaries of science, occupying a sort
of no-man’s-land; at another it has been admitted into the best
society, which latter position it may be said to occupy at the
present time.
2. During the current year a remarkable memoir! has been
couronné by the Royal Academy of Sciences of Belgium, and
favourably reported on to the Academy” by that distinguished
Belgian physicist M. Plateau. As the author has done me the
honour of frequently referring to my labours, and was so
good as to forward to me a copy of his memoir, I trust an
account of it will not be considered out of place in the Philoso-
phical Magazine.
3. But first it may be of advantage to give an account of the
phenomena in question as briefly as is consistent with clearness.
Some years ago I took considerable pains to read up all that had
* Communicated by the Author.
1 Sur la Tension superficielle des Liquides considérée au point de vue de
certains mouvements observés a leur surface, par G. Van der Mensbrugghe,
Répétiteur a l Université de Gand. |
2 Bull. de V Acad. Roy. des Sciences de Belgique, 10th July, 1869.
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 88. No. 257. Dec. 1869. 2 i
410 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
been published on the subject ; and it is chiefly from the account
then given? that the following details are condensed.
4. In 1686 Dr. Heyde* noticed that when fragments of cam-
phor placed on olive-oil are viewed under the microscope certain
currents are observed, particles setting out, as it were, from a
centre and returning to the same point.
5. In 1748 Romieu* first described the rapid. gyrations of
camphor on the surface of water: the motions are favoured by
heat, and their cause is referred to electricity.
6. In 1773 Dr. Franklin®, in his account of the effects of oil
in stillmg the waves, states that being about to show the expe-
riment to Smeaton the engineer, on a small pond near his house,
he was informed by Mr. Jessop, a pupil of Smeaton’s, that in
cleaning an oily cup in which some flies had been drowned, he
threw the flies upon water, when they began to spin round very
rapidly as if they were vigorously alive. ‘To show that this
was not any effect of life renewed by the flies,” says Franklin,
““T imitated it by little bits of oiled chips and paper cut in the
form of a comma of the size of a common fly, when the stream
of repelling particles issuing from the point made the comma
turn round the contrary way.”
7. In 1785 Lichtenberg’ notices that the camphor experiment
succeeds best on warm water, or when the roomis not very cold. .
On plunging a thermometer into water at 130° the motions sud-
denly ceased, in consequence of some alteration in the surface ;
or, as he says, the thermometer may not have been quite clean,
so that the water became covered with a thin film. He refers
the motions of the camphor to the varying attractions consequent
on the constant change in form of the fragments brought about
by solution and evaporation. He disproves the electrical theory
of Romieu (5).
8. In 1787 Volta® examined the experiment with great care.
He refers the motions to an effluvium which escapes from the
camphor explosively after the manner of a firework, and pro-
duces motion by the force of reaction. Similar motions are pro-
duced by benzoic acid, salt of amber (succinic acid), and volatile
concrete alkali (carbonate of ammonia). Salt of amber is parti-
cularly recommended, as it makes manifest to the eye the cause
of the motions; for the fragment is evidently driven back from
* Experimental Essays, published in Weale’s series, 1863. Essay I. On
the Motions of Camphor on Water.
4 Centuria Observationum Medicarum. Amsterdam, 1686. Obs. LYVII.
° Hist. de V Acad. Roy. des Sciences de Paris, 1762.
® Letter to Dr. Brownrigg, November 7, 1773. Posthumous Writings
of Dr. B. Franklin,:F.R.S. &c. London, 1819. Part IV. p. 268.
7 Delectus Opusculorum Medicorum, edited by Frank. Ticini, 1787.
© Tbid:
on the Surface of Water. 411
the point where the effluvium is discharged most abundantly,
covering the water and suffusing it with colour. It is further
shown that when the water becomes impregnated with the cam-
phor &c. the motions cease, that warm water and fine weather
are favourable to the phenomena, that the purity of the water
and of the containing vessel are necessary to success (indeed the
success or failure of the experiment is a sort of indication of the
purity of the water), that agitation of the water assists the expe-
riment, and, lastly, that the gyrations take place on wine but
not on spirits of wine, and not very well cn olive-oil.
9. About the year 1794 Carradori? began to publish a number
of papers and memoirs, sull’ attrazione di superficie, in which he
shows, by a great variety: of ingenious experiments, that the
surface of water exerts a remarkable attractive force on various
bodies ; and in 1800, referring to the motions of camphor, he
says!°, “I prove that on this surface-attraction, and on no other
cause, the motions of camphor depend.” And again, “ The me-
chanical force of the elastic vapour against the water has nothing
to do with the phenomenon; it depends entirely on surface-
attraction ;” and in order to show that a non-volatile body will
rotate, he repeats Franklin’s experiment (6) on the gyration
of bits of paper smeared with a fixed oil and thrown on the sur-
face of water.
10. Several of Carradori’s papers are in answer to the theory
of B. Prevost!', which attributes the motion of camphor and
other volatile bodies to the formation of an atmosphere of elastic
fluid round them, and to the impact of such fluid on the air.
According to Prevost, a fragment of camphor of the size of a pea
on a metallic disk four or five lines in diameter, and so placed
on water, rotates.
11. Fourcroy”, in reporting Prevosi’s paper, expressed his own
opinion that these motions are due to the attraction of odorous
matter both for air and for water, and their solution in one or both.
12. In 1797 Venturi!®? showed that a column of camphor
fixed vertically in water wastes away chiefly at the junction of
the air and the water. The oily matter of the camphor covers
the surface and evaporates; and this explaims the motion of
camphor when free to move. This motion is the mechanical
reaction which the oily substance, in spreading on the water,
exerts on the camphor itself.
9 Opus. scelti di Milano, vol. xx. Giornale Fisico di Brugnatell, vol.
vil. &e.
© Giornale di Fisica &c. Pavia, vol. i. p.97. See also vo's. iii., iv.,
Vill., 1X., and x.
% Annales de Chimie, vol. xxi. p. 254; vol. xxiv. p. 31.
eon 13 bid. vol'xxi, p..262,
2H 2
412 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
13. In 1800 Carradori!* approves of this explanation and
claims it as his own. The camphor owes its motion to the ex-
pansion of an oil drawn from it by the surface-attraction of the
water. He combat’s Prevost’s theory (10), and denies that the
camphor on a bit of cork or other substance floating on water
has any motion. He insists on the energetic surface-attraction of
water. Oils, whether fixed or volatile, have a strong adhesion
or surface-attraction for water, but no cohesion or affinity of
ageregation forit. White wax and hard suet, which have no odour
and contain an oil that is not volatile, rotate on water. Oils,
whether fixed or volatile, are more strongly attracted by the sur-
face of the water than camphor 1s, and hence they arrest its mo-
tion. And not only so, but star ch and other vegetable products
and the juice of milky plants arrest the motions on account of
the strong surface-attraction. Many odorous bodies that do not
give out an oil to the surface of water have no motion.
14. In 1801 Prevost!® denies Carradori’s position (13), and
further supports his own case by stating that minute fragments
of camphor, benzoic acid, and dry musk rotate on clean dry mer-
cury, and indeed on any clean dry surface. He has seen under
the microscope minute fragments of camphor, too small for the
unassisted eye, rotate on various kinds of support. Camphor
will even rotate on small disks of mica placed on mercury.
15. In 1801 Biot!® confirms some of Prevost’s leading re-
sults, and gives the following experiment in support of his
theory :—If a very small pointed cone of camphor be presented
without contact to a thin film of water on a clean glass plate, it
will repel the water and ieave a dry space round it. Hence he
concludes that camphor acts on water at a distance, and that its
movements on water are due to the mechanical reaction produced
on itself by the resistance which its vapour experiences in dart-
ing against the liquor which surrounds it, and that this emis-
sion of vapour is most abundant in the horizontal plane where
the air and the water meet. The camphor-cone will also repel
fragments of gold leaf floating in water without touching it or
ther!
16. In 1808 Carradori!” replied to precaee It is curious to
note the common feature of this and other scientific controversies,
that one man cannot follow the reasoning or even repeat the ex-
periments of his antagonist, so difficult does observation become
when another man’s results are looked at through the spectacles
of one’s own theory. ‘Thus Carradori denies that a capsule of
4 Annales de Chimie, vol. xxxvii. p. 38. 15 Thid. vole pee.
6 Bulletin des Sciences par la Société Philomatique, No. 54, p. 42.
" Annales de Chimie, vol. xlviii. p. 197.
on the Surface of Water. 413
ether suspended over water containing bits of gold leaf repels
them by its vapour acting at a distance. He denies that cam-
phor on a raft floating on water rotates; while Prevost, on his
part, knows nothing “of surface-attraction, or of the oil that is
said to issue from camphor in contact with water, and which is
said to produce rotation by its reaction on the fragment. He
has looked in vain for such oil, and believes it exists only in the
imagination of the Italian physicist. Carradori replies, “ What
wonder is it that camphor should cover the water with an oily
film, since camphor is itself a very volatile concrete oil?” He
insists on surface-attraction, and cites this ingenious experl-
ment :—A bottle 2 inches in diameter with a neck only 3 lines
im diameter was filled with water; fragments of camphor thrown
into the narrow neck did not rotate for want ofa sufficient expanse
of surface-attraction. Hnough water was drawn out by means
of a straw so as to lower the surface to the wide part of the bottle,
when the camphor rotated briskly on the larger surface. Here,
again, the two observers are at variance; lon Prevost, in nis
former paper (14), says that camphor will move in capillary tubes
previously cleaned by drawing threads through them, and that
lively motions may be seen in them with the aid of a magnifying-
glass.
17. In 1812 we meet with Carradori again!®. He describes
some experiments, based on an observation by Accum, that phos-
phorus rotates on the surface of mercury. He gives this as a
further illustration of the attraction of surface, the phosphorus
covering the mercury with a subtle varnish ‘which gradually
arrests the motion; but it may be renewed by filtering the mer-
cury. Phosphorus was also found to rotate on the surface of
tepid water.
18. In 1820 Serullas!9 describes the motions of alloys of po-
tassium, sodium, &c. ona shallow surface of water 1 or 2 lines
deep resting on mercury. Small fragments of the alloy of po-
tassium and antimony rotated, disengaging hydrogen, especially
from one point: each fragment described a circular path in the
opposite direction to the point of greatest liberation of the gas.
An alloy of potassium and bismuth rotates on the surface of
mercury. An alloy of potassium with lead or tin does the same ;
but if water be added the motions are morerapid. The smaller
the fragments the more rapid the motions: ‘on les voit voltiger
avec une étonnante vivacité: on dirait des mouchons retenus
dans les piéges, faisant des efforts pour s’en délivrer’*®. Alloys
8 Giornale di Fisica &c. di Bignell vol. il. pp. 261, 373; vol. iv.
297:
es , Journal de Physique, vol. xci. p. 172.
° Prevost also says of the motions of camphor on mercury, “ on ett dit
les y voir voltiger,” for they scarcely touched the mercury.
414 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
of sodium with most of the metals also rotate on mercury, or on
a thin plate of water on mercury.
19. In 1825 the brothers Weber®!, in noticing Franklin’s ex-
periment (6), reiterate the fact that a downy feather smeared
with oil rotates on water, and express their opinion that the mo-
tions of camphor and of various other bodies on water still remain
to be accounted for by a satisfactory theory.
20. In 1833 Matteucci? states that raspings of cork steeped
in ether rotate on the surface of water, and continue to do so as
long as the surface is supplied with ether, as by conducting a
thread from the ether bottle to the surface. His conclusion
is that it is to the currents of volatile substances that the mo-
tions are due.
21. In. 1841 Dutrochet®? described the following experi-
ment :—If cork be steeped in a solution of caustic alkali and
dried and then be placed on water, the solution is projected
strongly from the cork, and this moves in the opposite direction.
“This motion of the cork is evidently the effect of recoil produced
by the repulsion which the solid alkali contained in the cork exerts
on its own solution. It is very probable that this repulsion is elec-
trical, and arises from the fact that the solid body dissolved has a
Grniler electricity to that of the solution. However this may be,
the fact of the reciprocal repulsion of the soluble body and of the
aqueous solution is certain, and it is to this repulsion that we
may attribute the motion that takes place at the surface of water
of all floating bodies that dissolve in it. This occurs not only
in the case of alkalies, acids, and salts, but in gum resins, such
as opium, aloes, &c. 224.
22. In 1841 Messrs. alg and Boisgiraud?? bring before the
1 Wellenlehre. Leipzig, 1825.
Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. vol. liu. p. 216.
Comptes Rendus, vol. xu. p. 2.
“4 This experiment is evidently. based on Prevost’s experiments (note "),
intended to show that almost all liquids are each susceptible of repelling
all others or of being repelled by them; that is, ifa liquid be made to cover
a glass plate, and a drop of another liquid properly selected be placed on
the film, the latter will be driven away and the second will occupy its place.
Thus
5 bb bt
to
nN
wo
Ether repels Alcohol.
Alcohol » Essential oil of peppermint.
Oil of peppermint ,, Oil of bergamot.
Oil of bergamot >, Oil of origanum.
Oilof origanum ,, Oil of savory.
Oil of savory 5) Fixed-oils.
So also pure water repels many solutions of salts. A solution of alum
repels one of vitriol; this repels sodic sulphate; this potassic nitrate; this
sodie chloride, and so on.
*> Comptes Rendus for 1841, p. 690, which contains a Report on the
Memoir.
\
on the Surface of Water. 415
Academy of Sciences a memoir which clashes a good deal with
Dutrochet’s (21) ; and the noise is heard at intervals during this
and the first half of the following year. The authors do not
seem to have added much to the subject in hand. They found
that thin slices of cloves, pepper, orange-peel, &c. rotated on
water, and that naphthalin, though motionless on the surface of
water, rotated briskly on that of mercury. The advantage of
working with mercury is that it renders visible effects which are
not seen on the surface of water.
23. Although Dutrochet’s researches. (21) occupy nearly
seventy pages of the Comptes Rendus between the 4th of January
and the 5th of April, 1841, he felt that he had published them
with too much precipitation, and accordingly retired for awhile
in order to reconsider the whole subject. This led to the pub-
lication of a separate work, in two parts®, in which not only
the motions of camphor, but a vast number of other interesting
facts are traced to the influence of a force residing on the surface
of liquids, and hence named epipolic (ému7roAn,, surface). He does
not admit, and probably did not see, that this is nothing more
than another name for Carradori’s attraction of surface (9), (138),
(16), (17); for he does not seem to have been master of the
Italian language, in which Carradori’s earlier memoirs are printed,
and that at a time when the noise of conquest would scarcely
allow the voice of science to extend so far as from Italy to Frauce,
unless it were unusually loud, as when Galvani and Volta spoke
for her. In the early part of his work Dutrochet says that “ when
a bit of camphor is placed on the surface of water, there forms
around it a portion of camphorated water, which immediately
becomes endowed with a rapid centrifugal extension due to the
development of the epipolic force. The morsel of camphor, sur-
rounded by camphorated water incessantly renewed and inces-
santly projected circularly on the surface of the surrounding
water by a kind of intermittent explosion, must necessarily par-
take by reaction of the motions of the liquid which surrounds it,
and receives from it those motions of progression which we see it
execute on the surface of the water. Such is, in short, the cause
of this phenomenon”?’. In the second part of his treatise he
says :— The motion of camphor on water is an effect of reaction
produced by heat-repelling epipolic currents, which are formed
near the small fragment of this volatile substance, especially near
its points or angular parts” (part u. p. 159). “ Everything
concurs to prove that these epipolic currents, produced on water
by a morsel of camphor placed on the surface of that liquid, are
due to the local heat developed on such surface by the vapour of
26 Recherches Physiques sur la Force Epipolique, part i. 1842; part i.
March 1843. 7 Thid. part i. p. 74.
416 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
the morsel of camphor, and probably also by its immediate
contact ”*8.
24. In 1861-62 I was led by the phenomena of cohesion-
figures to pay some attention to the motions of camphor &c. on
water”, It was evident that Carradori’s attraction of surface
exerted a powerful influence on the phenomena, since a globule
of creosote, carbolic acid, &c. on the surface would sail about and
exhibit the most lively motions and even be torn to pieces and
disappear in the course of some seconds, while below the surface a
drop would remain asa globule unchanged for hours or even days.
So also a drop of a solution of camphor in benzole &c. would move
over the surface, darting out waving tongues and so disappearing.
But phenomena of this kind seemed to be simple effects of ad-
hesion of surface, tending to overcome the cohesion of the drop
by spreading it out into the form of a film; and the various
amounts of resistance offered by different liquids led to such dif-
ferent resultant phenomenaas those of cohesion-figures, and the
various motions of camphor and other bodies. But in the case
of camphor and other solid bodies, not only was a film detached
from its surface by the adhesion of the water, but the reaction
of this film on the fragment seemed to be a sufficient force to
account for its gyrations. It is true that in the case of camphor
the film is not visible, but im many other cases this objection
does not apply. Oil of aniseed, for example, solidified by cold,
gyrates like camphor, only more slowly, with the advantage of
leaving a filmy trail on the surface. A fragment of this oil on
water, apparently performing the whole of its work under the
eye of the observer, seemed to give irresistible proof of the truth
of the theory, viz. that the adhesion of the water detaches a film
from the solid, which film in the act of spreading on the surface,
produces motion by reaction. If the film remain on the surface
the motion ceases ; but if it be rapidly disposed of by evaporation
and solution, the motion may continue so long as the fragment
lasts. If proper arrangements be made, motions which admi-
rably represent the phenomena may be kept up for days together.
For example, if a three- or four-sided stick of camphor held in
forceps be made to dip just below the surface of clean water pre-
viously dusted with a very thin coating of lycopodium-powder, a
film is detached from each side of the camphor the moment it
touches the water; there is instant repulsion of the powder as
by a flash ; then a momentary pause, during which the film is
disposed of by evaporation and solution ; another film is detached
in like manner, and the solution of camphor from each film, cor-
responding with each side of the stick, travelling on, or rather
a8 Recherches ep a sur la Force Epipolique, part ii. p. 160.
29 See note ?
on the Surface of Water. 417
being propelled on by successive films to the curved surface of
the glass, divides and curls round in two opposite directions,
thus producing a pair of wheels for each face of the camphor,
which the lycopodium renders distinetly visible. I have allowed
this action to go on during sixty hours with no other interrup-
tion than having to lower the stick two or three times when a
portion had been cut off by the sawing action of the surface-
water.
Now this process, like a machine in motion which goes on so
long as it 1s wound up, fails unless free course be given to the eva-
poration of the camphor-film. The experiment cannot be con-
ducted in a large bottle. The camphor has been made to dip
into the water contained in a clean bottle: at first there were
faint indications of a current; but these soon ceased. After
many hours some of the water was poured from the bottle mto
an open vessel ; and the moment the camphor was lowered into it,
the currents set in with much of their accustomed vigour. The
experiment also fails if the lycopodium dust be laid on too thickly;
a very faint shower from a muslin bag is sufficient for the pur-
pose. The motions are more vigorous on a bright clear day
‘than on a dull cloudy one, more active in summer than in
winter.
25. That this experiment depended on the constant formation
and evaporation of a film of camphor seemed to be evident from
the perfect way in which it could be imitated by means of ether.
At the end of a narrow tube a bit of sponge was tied, and the
tube filled with ether was supported vertically about an inch
above the surface of water previously dusted with lycopodium ;
a very perfect, sharply cut, well-defined disk of ether is formed
on the surface of the water by the condensation of the vapour
pouring down from the sponge. The disk does not increase in
diameter, but the excess of ether pours off from it and proceeds
radially to the surface of the glass, where each branch curls round
in two opposite directions, throwing the powder into pairs of
wheels precisely as in the case of the camphor current (24).
26. Another phenomenon, which I named “ camphor pulsa-
tions,’ seemed also to illustrate the view I had taken of these
motions. A stick of camphor with a square base is lowered so
as to touch the bottom of a shallow glass vessel 6 or 7 inches in
diameter, containing a little water, not more than about two
ounces. As soon as the camphor touches the water the whole
surface becomes agitated with rapid pulsations, at least 250 per
minute. As the water soon becomes saturated, the pulsations
gradually diminish to 60 or 80 per minute, and they may even
sink down to8 or 10 per minute.
According to my explanation, as soon as the camphor is low-
418 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Metions of Camphor
ered to the bottom of the vessel, the water rises by capillary
attraction some way up the stick and detaches a portion of
its substance, which is then spread out as a film by suriace ad-
hesion and disposed of by solution and evaporation. As the film
is being detached, it repels the water from the camphor and pro-
duces a depression of surface all round the stick; the water
recovers itself, capillarity again comes into play, another film is
detached, and matters proceed as before—the result being a series
of pulsations or waves which rise up so that at length their crest
may be one, two, or three tenths of an inch above the general
surface of the water. The variations in height are marked by a
series of curved grooves or ripple-lines on the sides of the cam-
phor, which gradually exchanges its dull translucent appearance
for a bright transparent one, showing that the water has pene-
trated it. In the meantime an incision is made in the camphor,
which goes on increasing as successive films are detached, until
the stick is cut through and the submerged portion rises to the
surface and commences a series of gyrations on its own account.
27. As, in the case of small fragments of camphor rotating on
the surface of water, the motions are stopped if the surface be
touched with a fatty oil, so these pulsations are immediately
arrested if the water be touched with a drop of any substance
which forms a film and arrests evaporation. The point of a pin
dipped into olive-oil and brought into contact with the water at
once stopped the lycopodium currents (25); a second contact
stopped the pulsations (26). So also if a body be added to the
water that satisfies its adhesion so as to stop the solution of the
camphor, the pulsations are arrested. Thus a drop of oil of
camphor stops the pulsations by depriving the water of the
power of dissolving camphor ; a drop of olive-oil stops the pul-
sations by preventing evaporation; but a drop of oil of bitter
almonds, which speedily evaporates, allows the pulsations to go
on after a slight interruption. Turpentine and bodies that
leave a permanent film stop the pulsations; but ether, alcohol,
benzole, bisulphide of carbon, caustic potash, and sal-ammoniac
allow them to go on. A bit of sponge tied to the end of a glass
rod, dipped into ether and held near the camphor, will hold up
the wave of water against the camphor for some time. A drop
of benzole does not stop the pulsations; but it makes them less
rapid. The pulsations go on in a solution of caustic potash and
in one of sal-ammoniac. The pulsations and rotations of camphor
are not arrested by the addition of acids to the water, including
butyric acid. _Camphor even rotates on the surface of acetic acid.
28. In 1863 I obtained a result®° which seemed to place the es-
sential oils in a new light with respect to the surface of water. It
30 Phil. Mag. September 1863.
on the Surface of Water. 419
was shown in my original essay that. essential oils did not per-
manently arrest the motions of camphor, but only so long as they
remained in the form of films on its surface. When these had
evaporated without leaving any residue or oxidized deposit, the
motions set in as before. But I now found that if the oils were
freed from oxidized products by being distilled in contact with a
bit of sodium or caustic potash, they did not arrest the motions
of the camphor at all. The fragments skated through them and
cut them up in all directions. “The oils had so far ‘improved in
cohesive force that they no longer formed films, but lenticular
masses with rounded edges. From ten to twenty drops of an
oil might thus be deposited on the water without interfering in
any way with the gyrations. Fragments of benzoic acid, ob-
tained by exposing oil of bitter almonds, or of Laurus cerasi, to
the air for some time, were singularly active below, in, and
among the oil. This showed that there was little or no adhe-
sion of the oils to the surface of the water; so that the frag-
ments were as free to move as if the oil were not present.
29. It was not until after reading Professor Van der Mens-
brugghe’s memoir (note ') that I attempted to repeat the expe-
riment of camphor on a raft on the surface of water (10). It
was evident to me that if this were a true result, it would be
fatal to the reaction theory—although Prevost (14) ‘and Biot (15)
insist on the force of the experiment, and explain it on the prin-
ciple of reaction on the air, while Carradori (13) is equally
energetic in denying the possibility of the experiment unless
there is reaction on the surface of the water. I placed camphor
on a tinfoil raft and also on cork, and never obtained any motion
unless the water wetted the camphor, or had some direct com-
munication with it. Professor Mensbrugghe suggests that my
rafts and their cargo of camphor were too heavy. I now see
that this was the case, and that the cork, from being too thick,
was too high out of the water. I formed a raft of a small square
of mica, placed on it a bit of camphor about thesize of a small pea,
took up the raft on the point of a penknife, and so launched it
upon the surface cf 6 ounces of water contained in a very clean
cohesion-figure glass 34 inches in diameter. Before the raft had
touched the water, a visible shudder passed over its surface,
showing the action of camphor at a distance, as in Biot’s expe-
riment (15). No sooner was the raft fairly launched than it
began to sail about, and continued to do so with gradually
slackening effort during a whole week. The advantage of using
mica is that its suriied valunceiny fleur d@eau, and it Soils about
without allowing the camphor to be disturbed or to become
wet.
30. The principle upon which the new theory is based is that
420 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
of the surface tension of liquids. The researches of Segner®! in
1751, and of Dr. Thomas Young** im 1806, rendered it very
probable that there existed a contractile force or tension at the
surface of liquids. The labours of Henry®?, Lamarle**, Dupré
de Rennes®, Van der Mensbrugghe*’, and others have con-
verted this probability into a certainty ; so that the existence of
such a force (which is a more perfect definition of Carradori’s
attraction of surface (9), and of Dutrochet’s epipolic force (28))
is not only capable of proof, but can also be expressed numeri-
cally for different hquids at a given temperature. As this force
cannot be said to be yet recognized in our Manuals of Physics,
perhaps i may be excused for quoting the following lines from
one of the few books, imtended for the use of the student, in
which it 1s noticed :—
“‘ very liquid possesses a certain amount of fenacity or direct
cohesion, whereby its parts resist separation by being directly torn
asunder. ‘This cohesion has been proved to be the result, in
whole or in part, of an attractive force between the particles of the
liquid, which acts at appreciable though exceedingly small dis-
tances; in consequence of which there exists at the external
surface of every liquid mass a layer or film of liquid of unknown
but exceedingly small thickness, which is of somewhat less den-
sity than the internal mass of liquid, and consequently in a state
of tension. ‘This superficial tension is the force which sustains
a hanging drop; and its amount may be computed from the
weight and dimensions of the largest drop of the liquid which
can hang. It causes the surface of every isolated mass of hquid
(such as a falling drop), or cavity i a mass of liquid (such as
an air-bubble), to contract to the smallest possible dimensions,
and consequently to assume the figure of a sphere. It also
causes the surface of every isolated jet of lquid to tend to as-
sume a form of circular section, or to oscillate about sucha form.
It modifies the form of the surface of every mass of liquid by
rounding more or less the corners, which would otherwise be an-
gular. Cohesion also exists to a greater or less degree between
liquids and solids; and the combined effects of this force and of
the superficial tension due to the cohesion of the liquids them-
selves, constitute what are known as phenomena of capillary at-
traction. It is by reason of this tendency of the external film
of a liquid mass to assume a definite figure, viz. the sphere, that,
in defining the word ‘liquid,’ non-resistance to change of figure
31 De Figuris Superficierum fludarum comment. Gotting. 1751.
® Phil. Trans. 1805. Essay on the Cohesion of Fluids, p. 65.
33 Phil. Mag. 1845.
3 Mém. de P Acad. Roy. de Belgique, 1864.
35 Ann. de Chim. et de Phys. Ser. 4, vols. vi.., 1x., &e.
Bull. de ? Acad. Roy. de Belgique, vols, XXU., XXIl.
on the Surface of Water. 4.21
has been predicated of the interior parts of a liquid body only
and not of the whole mass”’®7.
31. In order to produce distinct experimental results on sur-
face-tension, Professor Van der Mensbrugghe had to devise a
method by which one portion of a tensile liquid surface could be
separated from another portion of the same surface, so as to show
" variations in tension between the two portions. For this purpose
filaments of a silkworm’s cocoon were cut into lengths of about
12 centimetres, and, ten or fifteen of these being laid parallel, were
tied at the two extremities. The bundle thus formed was bent
into an irregular circle, washed in alcohol and then in distilled
water, and flattened between the leaves of a book. The bundle
was now taken up by means of a clean glass rod, and placed on
the surface of water im such a way as to be exactly in contact
with it without being below the level. |
32. Let the two liquids be distilled water (whose surface-ten-
sion is equal to 7°3) and ether (of which the tension is 1:88). The
water is contained in a large capsule, and a drop of ether is held
above that portion of the surface limited by the coil of fila-
ments; this immediately undergoes lively trepidations, and
tends to assume the circular form, evidently because the vapour
of ether diminishes the tension of the subjacent portion of sur-
face within the silken boundary, and this, in its turn, yields to
the superior traction of the portion external to it. The moment
the drop of ether touches the surface within the flexible contour,
the silk expands into a circular form; but it as quickly con-
tracts, since the evaporation of the ether cools the surface and
so restores its contractile force. When, on the other hand, the
ether is deposited outside the silken boundary, this immedi-
ately becomes reduced in size, but expands again as the cold
produced by evaporation augments the contractile force of the
exterior portion.
33. In this way may be explained the observation of Prevost
(14), that ifa bit of camphor be held near the surface of water
that has been dusted with lycopodium, the powder is repelled
towards the edge of the vessel; or, as in Biot’s experiment (15),
if camphor be brought near a thin layer of water, this opens
and leaves a dry space on the support just under the camphor.
In such cases the water locally dissolves a small quantity of the
vapour of camphor, and thereby has its tension locally reduced,
while the contractile force of the other parts of the surface is free
to act.
34. The rotations of camphor on the surface of a liquid, and
similar phenomena, are included in the following general propo-
37 Nichols’s ‘ Cyclopedia of the Physical Sciences,’ 2nd edit. 1860. Art.
* Liquid.”
4.22 Mr. C. Tomlinson on the Motions of Camphor
sition :—When on the surface of a liquid, A, we deposit a small
fragment of a solid, B, which is more or less soluble in A, or
detaches from its surface matter that is so, the equilibrium of
the superficial layer of A is disturbed. Ifthe solution take place
equally all round the fragment, this does not move; if unequally
in different azimuths, the fragment displays sudden movements
of translation and rotation.
85. In order to show the action of camphor in diminishing
the surface-tension of water, flexibte filaments were taken, 30 or
40 centims. inlength. On scraping a few fragments of camphor
upon the space defined by the filaments, these were quickly
thrown into the form ofa perfect circle. The camphor produced
great diminution in the contractile force of the water, reducing
it to 4°5; and as this diminution takes place unequally round
each fragment, this must necessarily rotate. Ifthe camphor be
placed outside the ring, the filaments immediately contract.
36. By repeatedly adding fragments of camphor to the water,
this became reduced in tension to 4°5, and the camphor no
longer rotated. Or if the surface be touched with the finger,
the tension is reduced to 4°75 im consequence of a greasy film
being transferred to the water. A similar effect 1s produced by
an unclean vessel, or the presence of smoke, or of the vapours of
essential oils &c. in the air of the room.
37. The various bedies that rotate on water act like camphor
in locally diminishing its surface-tension. The reason why the
motions are not in general observed on the surface of oils, spirit,
&c. is, that their surface-tension is feeble, although their adhe-
sion to the camphor &c. 1s sufficiently energetic to dissolve 1t.
38. There are many circumstances which render this theory more
acceptable than the recoil theory, which has so long found favourin
accounting for these motions. For example, in one of the experi-
ments described in my essay (note °), a well-shaped lens of water
with a well-defined rounded edge was formed on a glass plate, and
also on the surface of clean, pure mercury, and on this lens mi-
nute fragments of camphor were set spinning. I observed that
the fragments would often pass over the edge and rotate in a nearly
vertical tangent plane, and then go back again to the upper sur-
face of the lens. A similar effect was also noticed with phos-
phorus on the surface of mercury. I could not understand by
what influence the fragments recovered their position from a
nearly vertical to a horizontal plane. The surface-tension theory
makes it clear. Another difficulty was that the rotations of bits
of paper smeared with oil are very rapid on the surface of water,
notwithstanding the friction ; flakes of camphor, formed by ex-
posing oil of camphor to the air, or flakes of benzoic acid, formed
by a similar exposure of oil of bitter almonds, move with even
_on the Surface of Water. 423
ereater rapidity; indeed their gyrations are sometimes so rapid
as to make the fragment appear hazy. This also occurs when
the ether-sponge is held over the rotating camphor. Flakes of
solid acetic acid are amazingly active on water ; while the needles
of solid. carbolic acid have a peculiar rapid jerking kind of
motion, not consistent with the reaction of the solution on the
fragment. Then, again, the sharply defined character of the
perfectly circular disk of ether formed by holding the ether-
sponge over the surface of the water (25) seemed to point to
the action of a force acting equally around and exterior to the
disk.
39. With respect to the rotations on the surface of mercury
in which the camphor &c. are not soluble, the theory is not quite
so clear. But I gather from the memoir that the rotations are
due to variations in surface-tension consequent on the adhesion
of the camphor. This must be very slight; for Prevost says
(note 7°) the fragments seemed scarcely to touch the surface.
I also do not see how Prevost’s experiment (14) on the motions
of camphor on solid plane surfaces is to be accounted for on
this theory. It is very desirable to repeat this experiment; and
I hope some of our microscopists will do so. I also do not see
how the case of pure or recently distilled essential oils, occu-
pying the surface of the water without interfering with the mo-
tions of the camphor (28), is met by the theory, unless it can be
said that the oil is bound up, as it were, by its own surface-ten-
sion, so as not to interfere with the surface-tension of the water.
If this condition be admitted, the fragments are as free to move
as if the oil were not present. Although the fragments pass
through and cut up the oil, the latter does not lose its lenti-
cular form, so that its tension is probably not diminished by
the presence of the camphor.
40. There are a large number of facts contained in, or sug-
gested by this memoir (such as those relating to the action of
vapours and films on the surface of water), which may perhaps
ceail for a separate notice. Butas far as the motions of camphor
&e. on the surface of water are concerned, I am bound to admit
(notwithstanding 39) that this curious and suggestive problem,
which has occupied so many scientific minds during nearly two
centuries, has at length received a satisfactory solution. And
this, like every true scientific work, has absorbed a vast number
of phenomena which apparently had little or no mutual con-
nexion. During these two centuries many labourers have been
working in the same field, tilling a difficult soil, which to the
most diligent culture never yields a harvest, but only now and
then a few grains, for which, it may be, the proper granary is
not known, until at length the master comes and collects the
424 Prof. A. Kenngott’?s Microscopical Investigation of
grain from the various labourers into the proper storehouse
which Nature herself condescends to point out to him. Such
I believe to have been done by the Belgian whose work I have
surveyed with so much pleasure and profit. All honour to him!
Highgate, N., Nov. 13, 1869.
XLVI. Microscopical Investigation of thin polished Lamineof the
Knyahynia Meteorite. By Professor A. Kenneort, of Zurich*.
[ With a Plate. |
P | ‘HE general tint of these lamine is grey, spotted with yellow;
they are semitransparent, with the exception of some opaque
or dark-yellow spots. Incident light shows not unfrequently
minute spots of metallic lustre. The whole appears fine-grained
to the unassisted eye, and spheroidally grained (“oolitic,” to
use a somewhat imadequate term) under a magnifyig-power
of two to four. The granules are grey, some of them more
or less angular; the yellow tints appear only in irregular
spots, not ‘being proper to any distinct component. Opaque
substances are irregularly interspersed, in some cases mark-
ing the outlines of isolated granules. The spherical granules
pass gradually into angular forms with rounded edges; and
some of them lose their rounded form under strone magni-
fying-powers. Rounded and distinct sections appear scarce
under a thirtyfold magnifying-power, which has proved the best
for examining the structure in its totality.
Besides the metallic and opaque particles, two crystalline mi-
neral species are discernible; one of them is colourless and trans-
parent, the other grey and translucent ; both are bi-refractive,
and show various polarization colours, not separated from each
other by distinct limits. Some spherules consist essentially
of one or the other of these minerals; in others their outlines
have become indistinct. The opaque substances are subordinate,
nor have they any influence on the structure, being merely in-
terposed among the rounded or angular granules.
The structure of the Knyahynia meteorite (the relative size
being left out of consideration) reminds one of the globular diorite
of Corsica, and may therefore be supposed to be rather the result
of a process of crystallization within its own substance than an
ageregation of separately formed corpuscles. The opaque com-
ponents are light-grey metallic iron, greyish-yellow magnetic
iron-pyrites (Haidinger’s “troilite’”’), and a black substance.
* From a letter to Chevalier W. de Haidinger, read to the Imperial
Academy of Vienna, May 13, 1869. Translated and communicated by
Count Marschall, F.C.G.S. &e.
thin polished Lamine of the Knyahynia Meteorite. 425
These three components may be best discerned by the microsco-
pical examination of the lamine under zncidené light. Ifthe light
from above is stopped, they all appear black by transmitted
light. Iflight from above is admitted, only the black substance
seems to be opaque, the iron appearing dark-grey and translucent,
and the pyrites blackish yellow and faintly diaphanous by the
effect of reflected light. This optical illusion could not be left
unnoticed; as, besides the frequent grey and translucent minerals,
another dark-yellow faintly diaphanous substance is visible at
two places of the lamina.
The grey and the uncoloured silicates are differently affected
by hydrochloric acid; and it may be inferred from this differ-
ent action, and from the crystalline structure, that the first is
pyroxemc (probably enstatite), and the other peridotic. The
erey silicate, if polished, shows stripes, indicative of lamellar
structure; the hyaline one shows merely fissures. Both appear
in angular and rounded granules.
Plate III. fig. 1 shows the section of a granule nearly every-
where surrounded by irregular angular granules of the black
opaque mineral. Its diameter is 0:48 to 0°64 millim. ; it is im-
perfectly round, and is surrounded by transparent particles, ex-
cept at four places, where it is in contact with small particles of
the black mineral. It shows distinct stripes, also appearing in
the small granule on the right, the other three showing merely
irregular minute stripes. An extremely delicate transparent sub-
stance interposed between the grey, partly parallel, partly diver-
gent stripes, makes them perceptible. Some few isolated black
points lie within the round granule. Further to the right (at e) is
metallic iron, with a black opaque substance around it ; and a yel-
lowish tint, equally affecting the grey and the hyaline silicate (ind1-
cated by the outline and the letter y), extends into the rounded
granule. The tinging substance is oxyhydrate of iron. The black
particles lying isolated within the granule and around it have
undoubtedly been expelled outward by the progress of crystalli-
zation. ‘The structure just described becomes more and more
indistinct as the magnifying-power is increased, and resolves
itself into a mere aggregation of grey and hyaline particles
when the power is =900.
Fig. 2 represents another object, 0°5 to 0°6 millim. in dia-
meter, of which (perhaps rather fortuitously) the greater half
offers the form of a hexagon. ‘This granule is essentially com-
posed of the grey mineral, showing linear formation only in its
lower portion—its upper half showing irregular, light-coloured,
rounded spots with darker margins, reminding one of granular
texture. The whole is framed in by a light-coloured border with
isolated fissures, which is distinctly limited by an aggregation of
Phil. Mag. S.4. Vol. 38. No. 257. Dec, 1869. 2 F
426 Prof. A. Kenngott’s Microscopical Investigation of
the black opaque substance in minute granules. On the right
(at e) is metallic iron bordered with black, and on the left, above,
another minute particle of iron. The dark granular substance
outside and above the figure is granular magnetic pyrites (froz-
lite) connected and framed by black opaque substance. 'The di-
stinctly linear portion of the granule touches a small portion of
striped grey substance below, which separates it from the iron (e),
and from a diaphanous fissured granule. A number of particles
of the black opaque substance become visible in the interior of
the granule under a magnifying-power of 120 to 330.
The third object (fig. 3) is a round granule of the grey mi-
neral, 0°7 millim. in diameter, nearly circular, rather distinctly
limited by a double row of minute opaque black granules accu-
mulated laterally into two black spots. The whole surface ap-
pears made up of white aud grey under a magnifying-power of
75 to 120, and spotted or speckled under a higher power. Some
large fissures run irregularly through the whole. The double
border of black granules is worthy of particular notice. A mag-
nifying-power of 450 and more shows the whole to be inter-
spersed with extremely minute yellow granules, quite different
from the irregular yellow tints of some single places more or
less spread over the whole polished surface.
. The grey mineral constitutes essentially the round or rounded
granules figured in figs. 1, 2, and 3, besides many others, larger
and smaller, and more or less varied. All of them prove this
mineral to possess a certain degree of crystalline structure, as it
is observable in enstatite and diallage, and manifested by linear
stripes on the sections under certain aspects. An oblong round
granule of 0°8 to 1:2 millim. shows several groups of parallel
stripes, one near the other, as would an aggregation of a number
of individuals. Another granule, 0°6 millim. in diameter, pre-
sents very dark stripes together with lighter ones. The black
opaque granules along or near the margin are rarely wanting.
Other granules consist of a compound of a transparent and
of a translucent mineral substance. Fig. 4 is a large round
granule 1°5 millim. in diameter, showing a crystalline granular
aggregation of the transparent silicate, with irregularly angular
or rounded granules cemented together by the dark-grey silicate.
Some few black granules appear locally, accumulated here and
there along the margin of the outline. A small portion of me-
tallic iron, bordered with a black substance, appears at e ; and at
another place is a dark spot of magnetic pyrites, smaller than
that im fig. 2, and likewise bordered with black substance.
Another granule, 0°8 millim. in diameter, shows within a light-
coloured border (about 0:08 millim. in breadth) an aggregation
similar to that in fig. 4, only the transparent granules are reia-
thin polished Lamine of the Knyahynia Meteorite. 427
tively larger, and the grey substance is of somewhat lighter tint.
The margin is exclusively formed by the transparent fissured
mineral. The somewhat sinuated outline of the whole granule (or
rather of its section) is marked in some places by black granules.
A rounded section, 0°6 millim. in diameter, is merely a crystalline
granular aggregation of transparent silicate, with many black
Opaque granules more approximated towards the margin than in
the central region. Wherever the rounded granules appear less
distinctly, the granular aggregations of the transparent silicate
are irregularly associated with the grey one, whose stripes are then
no longer perceptible. Where the grey silicate prevails (as in
the portion, 1 millim. in breadth, shown in fig. 5), the stripes
become more distinct and appear either parallel or divergent.
The specimens hitherto described prove both silicates to have
crystallized stmultaneously—one or the other of them, according
to circumstances, having accumulated around certain centres in
a spherical form, thus imparting to the meteorite, as a whole, a
somewhat oolitic aspect. An alternation of substances within
one and the same granule, as it occurs in globular diorite, is seen
in the section of a granule 15 millim. in diameter. In its
interior the grey mineral with irregular fine stripes is associated
and partly framed with the black opaque substance (see fig. 6).
Around this central portion is a granular aggregation of the
transparent fissured silicate, locally interspersed with granules
of the black opaque substance and of metallic iron. The outer
border is marked by irregular particles of iron bordered with
black substance. Small yellow granules of magnetic pyrites,
associated with black substance (as in fig. 2), appear on the left
side.
The grey mineral is likewise the essential component of an-
other rounded granule, 0°36 millim. in diameter, some few
linear individuals appearing more conspicuously. A broad mar-
ginal zone includes some black granules. The whole granule is
surrounded with portions of the three opaque minerals, compa-
ratively more extensive than those in fig. 6, and themselves parts
of a more extensive zone of granular erystalloids of the trans-
parent mineral, whose intervals are filled up with amorphous par-
ticles of the grey mineral. This zone gradually vanishes into
the general aggregation.
A third granule, 1 millim. in diameter, shows likewise a grey
nucleus and a surrounding transparent zone, both including abun-
dant particles of black substance and magnetic pyrites.
Fig. 8 is a portion of the transparent mineral, 1 millim. in
length and 2 millims. in breadth, whose appearance and optical
condition are those of one single individual, interwoven with an-
other dark greenish brown, faintly pellucid mineral, and itself ex-
282
|
428 Mr. W. H. Preece on the Parallelegram of Forces.
hibiting a great number of fissures in nearly equal directions. A
similar but by far smaller portion appears in a rounded section,
0-6 millim. in breadth, occupying one-half of the whole diameter,
and bordered on both sides by granular aggregations of the
transparent mineral.
The metallic iron, like the two other opaque minerals, generally
appears interspersed in proportionally minute particles. In some
few cases (see fig. 7) particles of iron, of 0°6 to 0:8 millim., in-
clude granules of the transparent silicate, with some few black
granules in its interior, and others at the external margin of the
central granule and of the iron.
Small fragments acted on by the blowpipe-flame are locally
covered with a black glossy enamel. The grey powder of the
meteorite, brought into contact with curcuma-paper moistened by
distilled water, offers a distinct and sometimes intense alkaline
reaction ; it is partly soluble in hydrochloric acid, emitting sul-
phuretted hydrogen and leaving gelatinous silica.
XLIX. The Parallelogram of Forces.
By Witt1am Henry Preece, Assoc. Inst. CE. &c.*
if is said that there are twenty-seven known proofs of the pa-
rallelogram of forces. Any attempt to add to this number
appears to be a needless undertaking; but the proofs usually
inserted in elementary works are generally so laboured, that
beginners rarely succeed in mastering them fullyin their first jour-
ney through statics. Indeed it appears to me that the proof that
the resultant is represented in magnitude as well as in direction
by the diagonal, as usually given, is defective; for we are required
to draw a line equal to an unknown quantity, and then to show
that another line is equal to this lme without obtaming the un-
known quantity.
I have therefore ventured to arrange another proof based
upon the principle of couples, which not only attempts to re-
move this defect, but to free the usual proofs from the necessity
of subdividing the proposition into the two cases of commensu-
rable and incommensurable forces—a veritable pons asinorum to
all students.
Definitions.
(1) A couple is a system of two equal forces acting in dissi-
milar directions in parallel lines.
(2) The arm of a couple is the perpendicular distance between
the lines of direction of the two forces.
*“ Communieated by the Author.
Mr. W. H. Preece on the Parallelogram of Forces. 429
(3) The moment of a couple is the proauc of the magnitude
of either force into the arm of the couple, (It is the numerical
measure of its Importance.)
Axioms.
(1) Any system of forces may be replaced by their resultant.
(2) Two equal and opposite forces acting on different points
of a rigid body, so as to balance each other, are upon the same
straight line.
(3) Two equal and opposite couples acting at the same point
of the same rigid body, balance each other.
(This is a Cor. to Definition 3; for the two couples have the
same moments, but of different signs.)
1. Let the two forces P,Q act upon the point A; it ts required
to find the direction of their resultant.
Take A C, A D respectively equal
in magnitude and direction to the
forces P,Q. Through C draw C B
parallel to AD, and through D
draw DB parallel to A C, meeting
CBinB. JomAB. Then ACBD
is a parallelogram, and A B is its
diagonal.
At B, rigidly connected with A, apply a force P, equal and
opposite to P, and also a force Q, equal and opposite to Q.
The system is in equilibrium ; for at the pomts A, B we have
the couple (P, P,) acting in one direction, and also the couple
(Q, Q,) acting in the other direction; and these couples are
equal, for the moment of (P, P,) is B D x Cc, and the moment of
(Q, Q,) is ADxDd; and these two products are evidently
equal, for they are each equal to the area of the parallelogram
ADBC. Hence they balance each other, and the system is in
equilibrium.
Now the forces P and Q have a resultant which acts between
them ; we may therefore replace them by their resultant without
disturbing the equilibrium: call it R.
The forces P, and Q, have also a resultant which acts between
them; we may also replace them by their resultant, which we
will call R.,.
But these two systems of forces are equal and opposite; and
since they balance each other, their resultants must be equal and
opposite and also balance each other ; and therefore, by axiom 2,
the resultants must be in the same straight line. /
Hence the resultant of the forces P and Q acting at A must
be along the diagonal A B of the parallelogram ACBD whose
sides are equivalent to the forces P and Q.
4.30 Prof. F. Kohlrauseh on the Deternunation of
2. The diagonal A B also represents the magnitude of the result-
ant of the forces P and: Q at A. Fig. 2.
For if the diagonal A B does
not represent the resultant of
P and Qin magnitude, it must
either be greater or less than
this resultant. Let it be
‘greater, and take AG less
than A B to represent the re-
sultant in magnitude. © Draw
DE parallel to BA. Produce
CA tomeet DEin E. Draw
GF parallel to BD or CE meeting DE in F, and join AF.
Then A EF G is a parallelogram, A F is its diagonal, and. A K
=A C, for both equal BD by construction.
Apply a force R at A along A E equal and opposite to P, and
therefore represented in magnitude and direction by A E.
Suppose the three forces P, Q, and R acting at A. We may
replace P and Q by their resultant AG. Hence the forces AG
and R acting at A must have a resultant acting in the direction
of A i.
Therefore P and Q and R at A produce the same effect as a
resultant force acting along AF’. Now if we remove P and R,
which we can do as they are equal and opposite, we have left Q
acting along A F as wellas along A D, which is absurd.
Hence the resultant cannot be less than AB. In the same
way it may be proved that it cannot be greater; and therefore
A F must coincide with AD, and the point G with the point B.
Therefore the diagonal A B represents the magnitude as well
as the direction of the resultant of P and Q.
i yh Deie mination re He a: Heat t of Air oe constant
Volume by means of the Metallic Barometer. By ¥. Kout-
RAUSCH*,
HE value universally assumed for the specific heat of air
under constant volume has been calculated from the velo-
city of sound. There has hitherto been no exact direct determi-
nation; for the observations made by Clément and Désormes,
as alk as by Gay-Lussac and Welter}, can only be regarded
as approximations by which the proof has been furnished that
* From Poggendorff’s Annalen, No. 4, 1869.
t+ Clément and Désormes, Journal de Physique, &c., vol. Ixxxix. pp. 321,
428 (1819) ; Gay-Lussac and Welter in Laplace’s Mécanique Celeste, vol. v.
p. 125. In the first paper all details are wanting which would render pos-
sible an opinion as to the accuracy of the experiments. Only one experi-
ment is given in full; of all the others only the mean of the results is given.
the Specific Heat of Air under constant Volume. 431
the magnitude in question is not far removed from that calcu-
lated by Laplace. The observers mentioned, as is well known,
subjected an enclosed volume of air to a sudden change of den-
sity by connecting it for a very short time with a large reservoir
of air under a known pressure (mostly that of the atmosphere),
and then measured the change in temperature. But as even the
most delicate thermometer is too slow to follow rapid alterations
of temperature, the enclosed air was itself used as a thermometer
by observing the change in pressure which it experienced when
the original temperature was restored. As the change in pres-
sure was small, it was measured by a column of water instead of
by one of mercury.
Nothing can be urged against the principle of this method.
The doubts which might arise from the evaporating water would
be removed by the use of sulphuric acid. The question is
whether the two assumptions can in practice be simultaneously
realized—first, that the duration of the communication with
the atmosphere is sufficiently short to justify the neglect of
the equalization of temperature which takes place during this
time, and, secondly, that after so short a communication the
pressure in the receiver is at first exactly equal to the atmospheric
pressure. Doubts asto the simultaneous fulfilment of these two
conditions will arise at the outset; an empirical proof has not
been afforded by the observers. To remove this objection, a
knowledge cf the condition immediately after the change in pres-
sure must be sought in some other way; and this is afforded
by not merely remarking the total change in pressure from the
moment of rarefaction or condensation of the mass of air to the
final restoration of the original temperature, but commencing the
observation very soon after the primary change in pressure.
From the course observed, the law of the equalization of tempe-
rature will be ascertained by which the condition corresponding
to the time zero is to be calculated. The duration of the com-
munication between the receiver and reservoir may be as small as
the mechanism of the apparatus permits. Indeed when once this
duration is known it can be readily allowed for in the calculation.
Such a method was not applicable so long asthe pressure was
to be measured by a column of liquid; for in order to diminish
capillary actions a tolerably wide tube must be used, and there-
fore, owing to the initial oscillations of the column of liquid,
the most important time for observation is lost.
The metallic barometer now constructed in great perfection fur-
By arather arbitrary correction this mean value was brought into accordance
with that which followed from the then known velocity of sound. The
experiments of Gay-Lussac and Weiter, of which Laplace gives an example,
do not appear to have been published. Compare also Dulong, Poggen-
dorff’s Annalen, vol. xvi. p. 404.
4.32 Prof. F. Kohlrausch on the Determination of
nishes a very delicate means of measuring pressure. From the
smallness of the mass put in motion in the action of this instru-
ment, the initial oscillations are of very short duration. The
moment of inertia of a manometer which 1s specially intended for
such experiments, may be materially diminished as compared with
that of the commercial instruments, in which little attention is
ordinarily paid to this element of delicacy.
I will here communicate a few observations which I made at
the instigation of Professor Weber, which cannot indeed serve
for more than a preliminary trial of the method, and should in-
cite to a more accurate repetition with more perfect means.
The instrument used was a Paris barometer graduated in milli-
metres. It was placed on the plate of an air-pump under a re-
ceiver of about 6 litres capacity. The air under the receiver was
dried by means of chloride of calcium. Bya rapid stroke of the
piston, the air in the receiver was rarefied and immediately shut
off by a stopcock. ‘The index of the barometer at first moved ra-
pidly towards the smaller numbers, and then retrograded, at first
rapidly, and then more slowly through a number of divisions.
During this time one observer gave a signal as often as he noted
that the index passed over a whole division ; a second noticed the
corresponding time. When the motion of the index had become
slower, parts of a division were noted. After a lapse of sixty
seconds a motion could no longer be perceived; that is, the mass
of air had assumed the temperature of the surrounding atmosphere.
With the aid of Dr. Nippoldt the six following series of ex-
periments -were made, from which a mean may be easily de-
duced. ‘The diminution in pressure of the air, which before the
experiment was under atmospheric pressure, was nearly equal in
all experiments ; after the original temperature had been restored,
the maximum was 38°5 millims. and the minimum 34 millims.
As the individual series are proportional, they can all be reduced
to the mean alteration in pressure, 37 millims. The observations
thus corrected are contained m the following Table, in which ¢
represents the time in seconds which elapses from the beginning
of the stroke of the piston, y the distance in millimetres of the
index at the time / from its ultimate position.
™~
©
™~
S
~“™
S&
“
Ye t. Ye t. y.
seconds.|millims.fseconds.|millims.{seconds.|millims.{seconds.|millims.'seconds, millims.{seconds. millims.
|
20 | 71 1 20] 80,] 2:0 |. 82 | 21 | 7-4.) 2:0 1 7-55 1 aes
40 | 52] 38 | 59°] '36 | 62 [3:8] °5:5-| 39. | o:Go 1) amen
51 | 42 1°60 | 37 | "51 | 43 1.60 1°36) 62 || ayo eee
83 19-2180 12-6 1 et 19 Se -08) ae |e eee 82 | 26
120 | 1:3. ]103 | 15 [711-0] 14/110] 16 | 101 | 1-75]108 | 16
21-0 | 03 | 200 | 0-4 119-4 | 0-4 | 18:2 | 07 | 202 | 0351183 | 06
40 | O1]40 | 02 [40 | 005]-40 | O1 ]35 | O15]40 | O91
the Specitic Heat of Air under constant Volume. 433
The calculation of a mean from these individual series is faci-
litated by the circumstance that the first observation was in each
case made about the same time (two seconds) after the com-
mencement of the stroke, and that thenceforward the intervals
of time were almost equal. Hence it is sufficient if we take the
arithmetical means both of the almost equal times ¢ and of the
corresponding values of y.
Thus we find
y.
t. TES os a |) Ditterences
Observed. Calculated.
seconds. millims. millims. millim.
2°07 7°62 774A —()-12
3°87 5°66 5°52 +()°14
5°75 3°85 3°88 —0:03
8:12 2:46 2°49 —0:03
10°87 1-52 1:48 +0:04
19-52 0:46 0:29 +017
39-2 0-12 0:07 +0:05
The calculated values are obtained thus. Putting the quan-
tity of heat added to the mass of air in each minute proportional
to the difference in temperature from the surrounding medium,
or, what is the same thing, the alteration in pressure propor-
tional to the difference y of the momentary from the final pres-
sure, we have
dy
dt
We introduce in the calculation for A and C,
C=11°41, A=0:1877:
=—Ay, lognaty=log nat C—At.
The calculated values, as we see, agree well with observation.
The expression is valid only from the moment at which the
stopcock was closed, which was the case at 0°75 second. We
get for this time from the formula y=9°912.
In order to calculate accurately the amount cf heat absorbed
from the beginning of the stroke to that time, it would be neces-
sary to have an exact knowledge of the course of the piston;
but the correction may be approximately calculated in the fol-
lowing manner :—At the time 0°75 we get the change in pres-
sure due to change in temperature
yeas os
= 71800.
At the time 0 it was =O. Hence as the mean from 0 to 0°75
434, Prof. F. Kohlrausch on the Determination of
we may assume
dy :
ag —0°930 ;
from which the change of pressure till then, due to change in
temperature, will be
—0°75 x 0:939 = —0°698 millim.
This number must be added to the value y=9-912 calculated
for 0°75 second, from which the diminution in pressure due to
lowering of temperature when the air is rarefied 1s
Yo=10°610 millims.
From this we get the ratio of the specific heat under constant
pressure c to that under constant density c, in the following
manner. If the mass of air unity, at the temperature @, is rare-
fied from d to d, without the access of heat from without, it un-
dergoes a diminution in temperature of
1+2a0 d—d, c-—e,
a a Cy
if « is the coefficient of expansion of gases with the temperature.
If the residual pressure after rarefaction, but after restoration
of the original temperature, be called p,, the above lowering of
temperature produces a diminution of Len c:
d—d, ¢—
VORP dl ve =,
or, if p is the pressure before rarefaction,
Dp Cae
NOP amet aa
D C
whence
ae =i sO ie
Cy P-Pi hh
Now in the experiments there was obtained
g=/o2 millims,, = 705.0) 7,— ole
hence
ro =
Cube ai ABs epee age)
Ci By ia 15
I have repeated the observations under various conditions
—namely with greater and less change of density, with com-
pression of the above mass of air instead of rarefaction, with
shorter duration of communication (by rapidly opening and clo-
sing the stopcock), finally with three different barometers, one
the Specific Heat of Air under constant Volume. 435
of which was a small and extremely good English one; and within
the limits of accuracy attainable by a single observer I have
always obtained the same value. I see no reason why the result
should not deserve at any rate the same confidence as the older
experiments with the water manometer.
Yet the value found above (=1:302) would be in disaccord
with the observed velocity of sound and with the number assumed
for the mechanical equivalent of heat; for it would lead to
319°4 metres for the velocity of sound, taking 0:00129384 as the
density of dry air at 0° and 756 millims. pressure. Taking,
with Regnault, the specific heat of air under constant pressure
as 0°2377, the mechanical equivalent of heat would be 582,
taking Delaroche and Bérard’s number (0°2669) it would be
equal to 473 kilogrammetres. The most recent experiments of
Regnault have given 330°3 metres for the velocity of sound,
from which = =1:392, and the mechanical equivalent of heat
1
(putting c=0°2377) would be equal to 437 kilogrammetres. In
our experiments ¥ would have to be = 14°5 millims., mstead
of 10°61, to agree with this result.
It would be difficult to discover a source of error to this
amount in the above measurements. It is, however, advisable
to repeat the experiments with improved instrumental means.
In the Jatter we should include first of all a method of pro-
ducing the change of density in a time much shorter, but
capable of accurate measurement. Both the motion of the
cocks and the observation itself would be best effected by mecha-
nism. Moreover a metallic manometer of as small moment of
inertia as possible should be constructed. Doubtless, too, by
using a larger receiver with badly conducting sides, the equali-
zation of temperature might be considerably retarded. |
I doubt not that if these conditions be fulfilled a trust-
worthy direct determination may be made by the above method
of the ratio < (and thus an important gap in physics be filled),
not merely for atmospheric air, but also (with no greater difficulty)
for other gases, which is of especial interest. Apart from this,
the indication of this simple method of quantitatively determin-
ing with approximate accuracy the heating produced by com-
pression in gas may be welcome to many a lecturer.
Gottingen, January 1869.
[ 436 ]
LI. On Fulgurites in the Andesite of the Lesser, Ararat and on
the Influence of Local Agents on the Production of Thunder-
storms. By M, Axpicu*,
nae influence of the geographical distribution of mountain-
masses on the limit-lines between the eastern over-heated
(and therefore over-dried) steppe-atmosphere of the continent of
Asia, and the mozst and cooler masses of air brought by north-
west atmospherical currents, is nowhere so conspicuous as within
the region of the Great and Lesser Ararat group, where it finds
its highest expression in the beginning of the eestival half of the
year, under the form of frequent and sudden thunderstorms in
the summit-region. These phenomena stand in close relation
with the orographical constitution of the mountain-group. The
first clouds and the first electrical discharges within them begin
generally on the north-west side of the group, where its most
powerful massif reaches furthest into the region of the Araxes
valley, conspicuously spreading in breadth. The thunderstorm,
in its rapid development, soon envelopes in a south-east direction
the whole top region of the mountain, remaining stationary
within the space between the Great and the Lesser Ararat, the
north-west high portion, called “ Kippgolil,”’ standing at the
same time in full sunlight. After a shorter or a longer space of
time the flumderstorm: dies away on the Lesser Ararat, or it
descends with gradually dimimishing energy into the plain
towards Nachitshevan and Dzaulze. These well-characterized
and regular thunderstorms begin in April (old style), reach
their maximum in May, and have considerably diminished in
the course of June. Although rare in July and August, they
may possibly break out suddenly during this period, and be thus
an obstacle to ascending Ararat. The journal of a meteorolo-
gical station at Erivan, established by M. Abich and continued
during more than fourteen months, registers for April 10, for
May 14, and for June 6 several thunderstorms in this Ararat re-
gion, not mentioning those which had broken out in the inter-
vals of the hours (six every day) fixed for the observation of the
instruments.
M. Abich, having repeatedly ascended the Lesser Ararat, has
been enabled to ascertain some physico-lithological facts demon-
strating the frequence of thunderstorms in these lofty regions,and
of the mutual action of atmospherical and terrestrial electricity.
The chief rock of the Lesser Ararat is a fine-grained amphibolic
andesite, risimg im cliffs above the slopes covered with decom-
* From a letter to Chevalier W. de Haidinger, dated Tiflis, June 25, 1869.
Communicated and translated by Count Marschall, F.C.G.S. &e.
M. Abich on Fulgurites in the Andesite of the Lesser Ararat. 437
posed andesite, or in obtuse pyramidal massifs, on the margin of
a fault across the mountain, thus constituting its extreme top,
12,106 feet above the sea-level, according to the measurements
taken by M. Abich in 1844. When ascending the moun-
tain from its easier, north-west side, M. Abich saw on the
upper slope some dark stripes on the light-brown rock, whose
vitrified aspect was evidently due to the action of lightning.
The path of the electrical discharge was constantly traced in the
form of a narrow tube,in the form of a thick goose-quill, traversing
the rock, and lined on its inside with a dark green vitreous slag.
These tubes increase in number towards the top, and have
modified a portion of the top itself into a variety of andesite,
which may properly be called “fulguritic.’? The originally
compact rock of microcrystalline texture, traversed in every di-
rection by vermiform fulgurites bearing evident marks of igneous
fusion, has taken a cavernous aspect not unlike wood completely
disaggregated by the borings of Teredines. The depth to which
the rock had been attacked by lightning could not be sufficiently
ascertained. M. Abich’s laborious examinations of the top of
the Great Ararat could not discover there any traces of fulgurites,
either on the cliffs of black trachytic porphyry on the steep
south-east slope of the upper cone, reaching an absolute altitude
of 13,000 to 14,000 Paris feet, or on the reddish-brown scori-
aceous rocks rising above the snow on the margins of the flattened
top. An investigation of the north-west side of the Ararat, be-
tween the Kipp-Goll and Professor Parrot’s encampment, 12,954
Paris feet above the sea-level, led to the same negative result.
The investigation of the upper region of the south slope proved
more satisfactory. The first fulgurites were observed on the
massive trachyte cliffs at the mouth of a deep-cut glacier-ravine,
the only real valley on the south side of the Ararat, exactly co-
inciding in longitudinal direction with the Valley of St. Jacob on
the north-west side. The slight depression of the top line of
Ararat, as its projection appears when seen from the north, would
coincide with the defile between these two valleys running in
opposite directions. The absolute altitude of the glacier’s termi-
nation in the first-mentioned ravine is 11,200 feet according to
M. Abich’s statements, based on corresponding barometrical
observations made at Hrivan and Nachitshevan.
Another trace of fulgurites has been noticed in the Goéll-Dag,
as the Jessidian Kurds call a conspicuous conical eminence visible
from Bajazid, on the same apparent level as the south-west side
of the Ararat. This eminence isabout 14 hour’s march distant
from the flatly vaulted plateau of the Kipp-Goll (10,648 Paris
feet above the sea-level). The Goell-Dag is the highest point
of a rocky ridge diverging from the main mass of Ararat nearly
438 M. Abich on Fulgurites in the Andesite of the Lesser Ararat.
on the horizon of permanent snow, and stretching downward in a
N.35° E. direction. Its component rock is a light-coloured pho-
nolite-like, fine-grained trachyte, separating into sonorous lamine,
quite different from the dark-coloured doleritic lava covering
the mountain-slopes. A similar ridge, at. some distance from
the first, and somewhat diverging from it, runs from the top
ridge of the Ararat down to the lower region. These ridges are
undoubtedly the upheaved margins of the powerful fissures tra-
versing the foundations of the Ararat mass, probably coeval with
its last great upheaval, and antecedent to the great effusion of
lava attending it. ‘The whole structure of the Ararat slope con-
firms this view. From the Goélldag (11,340 Paris feet above
the sea-level) the eye looks down into the broad, valley-like space
between the tworocky ridges, which converge upwards and at a
short distance towards a third ridge. In this place the dolerite
is covered by glacier-detritus; anda large current of lava, de-
scending in a south-west direction, having advanced in the
form of a wall on the plain of Bajazid, had evidently found here
a fissure or excavated bed. Another current of lava, reaching
the plain in the direction towards Bajazid, seems to have also
broken out alongside of this second rocky ridge. The only traces
left by lightning in these regions are isolated traces of fusion
and perforations of trachyte plates. No such traces had been
ascertained on the north side of the Ararat. 3
Isolated fulgurites occur on the Parlydag (‘‘ Mountain of
Lightning” in the Tartar language), an extensive trachyto-
porphyritic system, dominating the plateau of Sinak, on the
nitrachytic top of the Magaz*, and on the highest top of the
Sahand near Tawris (Adherbeidjan) at an altitude of 11,600
Paris feet. The light-coloured vitreous and lithoid rhyolites,
forming the prominent tops of the Agdag and Boosdag moun-
tain-systems (11,168 and 10,726 Paris feet above the sea-level),
offered no traces of fulgurites; nor did the crater-margin of the
great eruptive trachytic system of the Ischichlydag (9740 feet),
or the T'ardourek, a flatly vaulted cone south-west of the Ararat
behind Bajazid.
All these details are necessary for demonstrating the frequence
of thunderstorms in the region of the Lesser Ararat, and the
very frequent and intense action of lightning perceptible on its
summit, to be facts depending not only on general physico-
geographical circumstances, but still more on the situation of
this mountain-system relative to the plain of the Araxes and to
the Great Ararat.
* Altitudes measured by M. Abich :—plateau of the Sinak, 7582 Paris
feet ; uppermost peak of Parlydag, 6887 feet. Uppermost peak of the Magaz
(Imperial Russian Staff-Corps), 12,610 Paris feet.
Influence of Local Agents in the Production of Thunderstorms. 439
If we suppose the Pontic atmosphere, coming from W.N.W.
at considerable altitudes, to pass over the Taurian Highlands,
radiating heat in consequence of protracted insolation, it must
become saturated nearly to its maximum with aqueous vapour
and receive a notable amount of negative electricity. Whenever
this atmosphere meets with the colossal prominence of Ararat,
the electricity of the clouds, accumulated in the aqueous vapour,
is suddenly increased ; and, of course, electrical compensation
begins first on the north-west side of the Great Ararat. The
elliptical form and the situation of summit and ridge of Ararat
force the accumulated atmospheric current coming towards its
side to the broad elevated valley between the two Ararats, and to
its opening into the region where the atmosphere arising from
the hot south portion of the Araxes-plain has reached its maxi-
mum of heat and dryness.
The greater half of the Lesser Ararat, whose base is notably
inclined east-north-eastward, and which rises to more than 9000
feet above the plain of the Araxes*, is almost to its summit
under the action of this pure and non-electric atmosphere, moving
constantly south-eastwards, and counteracted by a cold north-
west current descending from the depression between the two
mountain-groups (altitude 8274 feet). The notable energy of this
counter-current is a necessary consequence of the local thermal
contrast between the summit-region and the neighbouring heated
plain. The uncommonly rapid decline of temperature observed on
the higher horizons of this valley is indicative of an accelerated
fall of the higher strata of clouds, containing (as M. Vogel sup-
poses) aqueous vapour of a temperature far below the point of
congelation, and the presence of which causes the violent falls of
hail, attending in most cases the thunderstorms breaking out in
the lower half of the valley. The clouds, highly charged with elec-
tricity, coming rapidly from the Great Ararat and turning round
the mountain, discharge each other on the north and east side of
the Lesser Ararat, as the difference between the temperature and
the point of degelation of the air in those regions increases with
the distance from the mountain towards the plain. At the same
time the increased permanent electro-negative tension of the
summit of the Lesser Ararat discharges the latent electricity of
the vapours, and provokes a continued intense compensation
with the electrically charged clouds constantly coming from the
Great Ararat. At all events, the degree of freedom from vapour
of the atmosphere above the Nachitshevan half of the Araxes
plain, as resulting from preceding meteorological conditions,
and consequently its degree of electrical conductibility, must
* Absolute altitude of the Araxes plain in the meridian of the Great
Ararat, about 2400 feet,
44.0 M. Abich on Hailstorms in Russian Georgia.
cause the thunderstorm rising in the Ararat region either to
exhaust itself in the Lesser Ararat, or to pass it rapidly and to
spread over the whole opposite plain. The facts and observa-
tions above mentioned seem to confirm MM. Peltier and La-
mont’s views on the origin of thunderstorms and of atmospheric
electricity. :
LII. Hailstorms in Russian Georgia. By M. Astcu*,
[With a Plate. |
HE first of these storms took place May 27, 1869, at
3 p.M., the other June 6, at 6 P.m., both within a limited
region of the Trialat Mountains near Beloi Kliutsch, about forty
wersts (263 Engl. miles) from Tiflis. The hailstones, although
different in form in both cases, were of uncommon size, and
deserve some attention. In the first case they presented a
quite regular flattened spheroidal form, somewhat like the so-
called “‘mandarin-oranges,” and a series of varieties almost re-
minding one of organic evolution. The second case was a com-
plete ‘ shower of ice erystals’”—not of fragments of ice of indi-
stinctly crystalline outlines, but of spheroidal crystalloid solids,
densely but irregularly beset, on the surfaces corresponding to
their longitudinal diameter, with limpid regular crystals showing
various combinations of forms belonging to the tri- and mono-
axial systems—a peculiarity which, it seems, has not yet been
observed, or at least published. The forms characteristic of
calcareous spar and of specular oxide of iron prevailed, especially
the scalenohedron, combined with rhombic planes, in crystals
15 to 20 millims. in length. Other crystals exhibit the prism,
combined with obtuse rhombohedra, and with the terminal plane
perpendicular to the principal axis. Some specimens that fell
soon after the beginning of the storm were aggregations of
tabular crystals, 30 to 40 millims. in diameter, resembling the
rosette-like aggregations of specular oxide of iron from Mount
SG otthardt.
Both these storms caused enormous devastations; strong
branches were struck down as if cut with some sharp implement.
The specimens gathered immediately after the fall presented
perfectly sharp edges and somewhat convex surfaces, like some
crystals of diamond—except the scalenohedral surfaces, which
were completely flat. MM. Abich made drawings from ten of the
most remarkable and best preserved specimens, intending to pub-
lish in extenso his observations on the phenomena in question.
These hailstorms have a close connexion with the abnormal me-
* From a letter to Chevalier W. de Haidinger, dated Tiflis, June 25,
1869. Communicated and translated by Count Marschall, F.C,G.S8, &e.
ol
Mr. T. T. P. B. Warren on Electrification. 441
teorological conditions observed in Georgia during June 1869,
and characterized by uncommonly intense frequent rains and
thunderstorms. On June 20, a hailstorm, still more violent than
those of May 27 and June 6, caused horrible devastations in the
valley of Manglis, 18 wersts from Tiflis, and progressed, in the form
of rain and electrical discharges, as far as into the valley of Algat.
PI.III. figs.9 and10 are intended to represent the outlines of two
of the most remarkable varieties of hailstones as true to nature as
possible, without any pretence to elegant execution. In the two
cases under notice, personal observation sets more or less at de-
fiance any theory of the formation of hail hitherto established.
How could indeed the formation of such crystalline aggregations,
as regular as those of the calcareous spars of Andreasberg, be
possible in the midst of the tumult generally supposed to
be necessarily connected with the formation of hail? These
ageregations may have had a long stay within a medium of
highly refrigerated aqueous vapour before they fell to the ground.
It must be remarked, to fully understand the drawings, that the
shaded portion of the flattened spheroidal fundamental form
of the groups is not always opaque in the original. Only the
circle round the centre has a milky aspect, due to the air-bubbles
enclosed in it, as also the nucleus of the greater number; in
other specimens the nucleus is transparent, especially when re-
duced by melting away into disks of ? to 1 inch in diameter,
sometimes affecting the form of a perfect regular hexagon. In
this case the milky circle around the centre appeared distinctly
as an intricate tissue of minute lengthened pores and of capillary
fissures filled with air. The shadow next to the margin of the
larger peripherical circle is only intended to indicate the rounded
and flattened spheroidal form of the chief body, on whose broader
margin the crystals themselves adhere parasitically, or are in-
serted, as in an alveole, made visible by the commencement of
fusion (see a in fig.9). All the specimens presented lengthened
vermiform and pyriform pores filled with air, extending radially
from the centre to the circumference. The drawing shows these
pores of-approximately natural size.
LUI. On Electrification.
By Tuomas T. P. Bruce Warren*.
\ V HEN an insulated wire or cable is connected to a battery,
and the deflection noted on a galvanometer, the first
rush of current into the cable is due to the electrostatic capacity
* Communicated by the Author, having been read at the Exeter Meet-
ing of the British Asaociation, in Section A, August 1869.
Phil, Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 257, Dec. 1869. 2G
442 Mr, T. T. P. B. Warren on Electrification.
of the insulator. Battery-contact being still maintained, the
deflection falls very rapidly at first, and gradually becomes reduced
for some time after.
The shorter the length of cable and the lower the degree of in-
sulation, the less defined will be the differences in the deflections
after a few minutes’ contact.
Great care must be taken, when making these experiments,
that the cable has not been previously charged ; should the cable
have been charged, it must be connected to earth for some hours
before testing. The battery must be in very good condition, and
unsteady deflections totally discarded.
The ratio between the deflections for equal periods of contact
is independent of the length, and is greater or less according to
the specific resistance of the dielectric.
The ratio is unaltered under different electromotive forces so
long as constancy is maintained during the time of observation
and the deflection itself the same with the different electromotors
at the end of the first period of contact ; but when, with different
electromotive forces, the deflections at the end of the first period
of contact are not the same, we may obtain the deflections which
should be given on prolonged contact if we know the deflection
for a corresponding period by any electromotive force, since the
deflections for the first period of contact will have to one another
the same ratio which the deflections at any other period of con-
tact have: thus if with a given electromotive force we obtain at
the end of the first minute’s contact a deflection of 84, which at
the end of the second minute is reduced to 76, and with a dif-
ferent electromotive force we have a deflection of 70 at the end of
the first minute’s contact, the deflection at the end of the second
minute will have the same ratio to 76 which 70 has to 84.
Under different temperatures the resistances corresponding to
one, two, three, &c. minutes’ contact follow the same law of varia-
tion. Thus if R=r x constant; represent the resistance after
one minute’s contact, then
R’ =,’ x constant; = resistance after 2nd minute.
Hie SAll
a ae ” ” » ord ”
R™ =r 2» » ” 4th ”
[oe yp ” » ” Sth ”
RY =r" »” » ” nth ”
ro, r!!, rl, rl", o ave the resistances determined after 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, n minutes’ contact respectively, and R, R/, R’, Rl, Rl", R* the
required resistances for the same differences of temperature ¢, and
at the end of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, n minutes’ contact.
If at any temperature T we obtain a deflection G after one
minute’s contact, which at the end of the second minute falls to
Mr. T, T. P. B. Warren on Electrification. 443
g, we may calculate what the deflection should be at the end of
the second minute for any other temperature by knowing only
the deflection after the first minute at this temperature.
Let G and g be the deflections after one and two minutes’
contact respectively at a given temperature, and G! the deflection
at the end of the first minute at any other temperature, then
G:G'::g9:4'; g' will be the deflection at the end of the second
minute at this temperature.
By calculating in this way the value of g', and comparing it
with the actual reading, much more reliance can be placed on the
value of a test than can be done by correcting for temperature in
the usual way. We are thus quite independent of temperature
for knowing whether a cable or core has received the slightest
injury in manufacture.
G and g may readily be obtained by testing a core at a fixed
temperature, as 75° F., which is now done.
Coils having the same dimensions have rarely the same ratio
in their resistances on prolonged contact with a battery; but
when several coils are joined together, the ratio between the de-
flections for any two successive durations of contact may be ob-
tained from the reciprocals of the deflections of the several coils.
In reducing tests of insulation by discharge to measures of
resistance, it is impossible to obtain but approximations in the
ordinary way of making the tests. The best way is to charge
the cable or core for one minute and then note the discharge,
recharge the core, and take the instantaneous discharge. By
this method we know exactly the amount of electrification which |
has been given to a core; but by taking the instantaneous dis-
charge first, even although contact with the battery is made for
one minute, we cannot say how much electrification is retained
in the core.
When a core is thus connected to a battery for one minute and
afterwards removed, electrification still takes place, but, of course,
not precisely as if connected to a battery; for the insulator, in-
stead of being acted upon by a constant charge, is affected by
the variable charge consequent upon leakage ; but when the core
is held free for one minute, it is very easy to ascertain how much
effect the electrification has had in reducing the loss.
The amount of electrification retained at any given interval is
proportional to the quantity of charge remaining at that time.
‘The longer battery-contact is maintained, the slower will a core
or cable lose its charge, and conversely.
In a cable which has been charged by contact with a battery
for one minute and afterwards held free for one minute, the elec-
trification will be the same as if, instead of being held free, it had
been left connected to a battery having the last tension, thus :—
2G2
AAA) Mr. T. T. P. B. Warren on Electrification.
If the discharge after one minute’s contact and one minute’s
insulation be 180, and the immediate discharge 200, the dura-
tion of contact being also one minute, the total effect for electri-
fication at the end of the minute’s insulation will be 95 per cent.
of what it would have been if connected to the same battery for
two minutes.
By taking these considerations into account, the formula of Pro-
fessor Fleeming Jenkin, R= (-——) x 10°, may be rendered
K log. =
strictly applicable for deducing from the loss of static charge in
time ¢ the resistance for the same period of contact in absolute
measure, or in terms of that system which makes R and K func-
tions of each other; and we may expect that the capacity K can
be eliminated from this formula when R is known, if we can
determine the constant for electrification for the interval of time
during which the core is held free.
In this formula, if the test is performed in the manner here
indicated, ¢ will be 60, and the value obtained for R will be the
C
resistance at the end of the second minute more nearly as 7 aP-
proaches 1. This resistance has then to be divided by a number
which expresses the ratio between the first and second minute’s
contact ; approximately, and on short lengths of core, this may
be obtained as follows :—Recharge the core, after being kept to
earth for some hours, maintainig contact with the battery for
two minutes before noting the loss; then by dividing the per-
centage of loss in the first experiment by the percentage of loss
given in the second experiment, we shall obtain a number by
which, if R be divided, the resistance corresponding to one mi-
nute’s contact may be found.
The following ratio expresses the rate of crease in resistance
on prolonged contact :—Let D be the deflection at the end of the
first period of contact, and d the deflection at the end of the nth
period, then D:d::d: deflection at the end of n* minutes; or
the deflection after the first period of contact is to the deflection
for any other period of contact as this deflection is to the deflec-
tion at the period of contact corresponding to the square of the
intervals.
I have to acknowledge my obligation to Mr. Hooper for pla-
cing at my disposal the necessary instruments and cores for the
subject of this paper.
[ 445 ]
LIV. Experimental and Theoretical Researches into the Figures
of Equilibrium of a Liquid Mass without Weight.—Vighth
Series. By Professor J. Puateau*,
Researches into the causes upon which the easy development and
the persistence of liquid films deyend.—On the superficial ten-
sion of Liquids.—On a new principle relating to the surfaces of
liquids.
N the last series of these researches, while discussing the
various processes of producing liquid films, I tried to make
it clearly understood that the production of such films always
depends upon the cohesion and viscosity of the liquid—the former
property opposing the rupture, and the second impeding the re-
lative motion of the molecules when the liquid has reached a
certain degree of thinness, and thus rendering any further atte-
nuation of it more slow. I concluded, in consequence, that the
property of undergoing extension into thin films must belong to
all liquids, and I tried to show that this is really the case.
But if all liguids are capable of beimg spread out into thin
films, they nevertheless present important differences in the
degree of facility with which the films are formed, and in their
permanence when produced. Tor example, it is easy to blow
large bubbles at the end of a pipe with soap and water, but no
one would think of trying to do so with pure water. The easy ex-
tensibility of solution of soap and of some other liquids into thin
films of great size 1s generally ascribed to their viscosity ; but I
find that viscosity, at least as commonly understood, plays only
a quite subordinate part in this facility of extension. In fact
experiments, which will be spoken of further on, show that the
viscosity of a solution of 1 part of Marseilles soap in 40 parts
of water, a solution with which bubbles can be blown more than
25 centims. in diameter at the mouth of a common tobacco-pipe,
is scarcely greater than that of pure water; moreover one part
of the same soap in 500 parts of water is sufficient to give bub-
bles a centimetre in diameter ; and, lastly, the fat-oils, glycerine,
whether pure or mixed with water, treacle under the same con-
ditions, and solutions of gum-arabic of various degrees of con-
centration, liquids which are all of them more viscous than solu-
tion of soap, are absolutely incapable of being blown into bubbles
at the mouth of a pipe. We must consequently look elsewhere
for the cause of the phenomenon: this 1s what I do in the pre-
* Translated from the Annales de Chimie et de Physique, S. 4. vol. xvii.
p- 260. For abstracts of the previous series see Taylor’s Scientific Me-
moirs, vol. iv. p. 16, vol. v. p. 584; and Phil. Mag. (S. 4.) vol. xiv. p. 1,
vol. xvi. p. 23, vol. xxi. p. 286, vol, xxiv. p. 128, and vol. xxxiu. p. 39,
4.4.6 Prof. J. Plateau on the Figures of Equilibrium
sent series; and it will be seen that the cause in question seems
to reside in the most mysterious properties of liquids.
I begin by the study of an element the influence of which
must be regarded as self-evident—namely, the tension of liquid
surfaces, a curious property whose existence has long remained
a mere hypothesis. In order to place this matter in a clear
light, I first of all give an historical sketch of this hypothesis,
passing in review the researches of Segner, Leidenfrost, Young,
Hough, MM. Henry, Hagen, Lamarle, Dupré, Van der Mens-
brugghe, and Quincke; I also recall my general principle in re-
lation to systems of films, and from the whole I draw the fol-
lowing conclusions :—
Ist, tension really exists in every liquid surface, and conse-
quently in every liquid film; 2nd, this tension is independent of
the curvature of the surface or of the film ; it is the same through-
out the whole extent of the same surface, or of the same film, and
at each point it is the same in all tangential directions; 3rd, it
is independent of the thickness of the film, at least so long as
this thickness is not less than twice the radius of the molecular
attraction; 4th, it varies with the nature of the liquid; 5th, in
the same liquid it varies in the opposite direction to the tempe-
rature, but at ordinary temperatures it undergoes only small
alterations; 6th, we possess a great number of processes for mea-
suring this tension.
The tension continually tends to break the films; but, accord-
ing to the third conclusion above, this tendency is no stronger in
a very thin film than in one that is comparatively thick. Con-
sequently, if very thin films break im reality more easily than
thicker ones, it is no doubt because they offer less resistance to
external causes of rupture, such as movements of the air, slight
shakings, &c.
In the case of most liquids, films that are at all large burst as
soon as they are formed. In order to be able to make observa- -
tions on films of a great number of liquids, I have therefore been
obliged to confine myself to films of small size; and I have
chosen for the purpose of examination the hemispherical bub-
bles formed at the surface of liquids by the ascent of air, study-
ing those only the diameter of whose base was between 10 and
12 milims. When the liquids under examination were more or
less volatile, hke water, aqueous solutions, alcohol, &c., the obser-
vations were made in an atmosphere saturated with its vapour ;
and when, on the contrary, they had a tendency to absorb mois-
ture, like glycerine, sulphuric acid, &c., they were made in a
dried atmosphere.
These experiments have led me to divide liquids, in relation
to their formation of films, into three principal categories. The
of a Liquid Mass without Weight. 447
general characters of the first are the formation of little or no
froth when shaken, the incapability of being blown into bubbles,
the absence of colours on the hemispheric bubbles, or a tardy
and only incipient coloration, showing only the red and green of
the last orders. Among the numerous liquids which belong to
this category, I may mention water, glycerine, sulphuric and
nitric acids, ammonia, saturated solutions of tartaric acid, nitrate
of potassium, carbonate of sodium, and chloride of calcium.
The liquids of the second category are distinguished from the
preceding by the prompt and decided coloration of their films,
showing tints of all the orders. These liquids are the fat
oils, lactic acid, glacial acetic acid, oil of turpentine, alcohol,
benzine, Dutch liquid, chloroform, sulphuric ether, sulphide of
carbon*, and no doubt many more.
The liquids which belong to the third category are covered
over, when shaken, with an abundant and very persistent froth ;
they can be easily blown into bubbles at the end of a pipe; the
hemispherical bubbles which they form last much longer than
those formed by the liquids of the two preceding categories, usu-
ally for several hours, and sometimes even for several days. They
have generally at first a well-marked colourless phase, the dura-
tion of which differs much in different liquids; they then become
gradually coloured, but in a way which varies somewhat with
the nature of the liquid.
This category is not numerous: if we take away some sub-
stances which are only liquid when hot, such as glass, it is re-
duced essentially, I think, to the solutions of different kinds of
soap, of saponine, and albumen, to which may be added solution
of sesquiacetate of iron.
In order not to make this abstract too long, I omit aseries of
curious facts that have been met with in the course of the expe-
riments, and an account of which will be found in the memoir.
I pass on to the deductions which have an immediate bearing
upon the question [ am discussing.
We have seen that films of the second category assume, im-
mediately on their formation or very soon afterwards, bright
colours belonging to all the orders; whence we must conclude
that they get thinner with extreme rapidity.
We have seen also that there is never an immediate or nearly
immediate coloration in the films of the first category : the very
great majority remain colourless till they break; in the very
rare cases in which such films do become coloured, this does
* At ordinary temperatures, the hemispherical bubbles of sulphide of
carbon, which last only a fraction ofa second, do not exhibit colours; but
at a few degrees below zero a bright coloration may be observed on some
of them.
4.48 Prof. J. Plateau on the Figures of Equilbrium
not happen till after several seconds, sometimes not till after
two minutes. It evidently follows from this that in this cate-
gory, on the contrary, the diminution of thickness is very slow.
Again, we have seen that the films of the third category have
generally a long colouriess phase, and that the coloration that
appears afterwards never changes quickly. It follows from this
that in the third category, as im the first, the diminution of
thickness takes place very slowly.
This great difference in the rapidity with which films of the
second category diminish in thickness as compared with those of
the other two, cannot be attributed to ordinary viscosity ; for
the fat oils and lactic acid, for instance, which belong to the
second category, are much more viscous than most of the liquids
belonging to the first and second; oil of turpentine, again,
which belongs to the second category, is more viscous than
water, which belongs to the first, &c. Now the distinguishing
character of a film is the great extent cf its surfaces in proportion
to its volume ; we are consequently forced to recognize here an
effect depending on the faces of the film, and to look for the
cause of the great difference in question in a viscosity peculiar
to the superficial layers, and independent, or nearly so, of the
internal viscosity, and which is very weak in the liquids of the
second category, but, on the contrary, is very strong in those of
the first and third.
This principle being admitted, let us apply it to the pheno-
mena. ‘Take a hemispherical bubble at the moment of its for-
mation, and let us fix our attention upon one of the two faces
of the film, on the convex face, for example, and let us imagine
it divided into horizontal molecular rings from the summit to
the base. All these rings descend, and consequently each of
them goes on always increasing in diameter; this implies that
its molecules separate further from each other, and that other
molecules belonging to the subjacent layer come and place them-
selves in the intervals, so as to reestablish a uniform arrange-
ment. This must evidently apply also to the concave face. Let.
us now consider one of these molecular rings at the moment of
its departure from the summit; it is clear that for any small
space traversed there is a great increase of the distances between
the molecules of this ring ; and it will be easily admitted be-
sides that these movements are not performed with mathematical
regularity, and hence that in the same ring the intervals between
the molecules are not all absolutely equal. This being admitted,
let us suppose that from some cause or other an obstacle inter-
feres with the free arrival of the subjacent molecules into the
intervals ; one or other of these will in this case soon become so
great that the attraction of the molecules which it separates
of a Liquid Mass without Weight. 449
is no longer able to counterbalance the tension ; these mole-
cules will then easily drag after them their inside neighbours,
which will thus be separated in their turn also; the sepa-
ration will gradually get deeper and deeper, and the film will
break at this point. Now in hemispherical bubbles of the first
category the superficial layers have, according to my principle, a
very great viscosity, so that molecular movements take place
with difficulty ; hence it is intelligible that very near to the
summits of either of the faces an increased molecular interval
may not have time to be filled up before the tension, if at all
energetic, causes rupture as above. Such is, in my opinion, the
explanation, of the breaking of nearly all the bubbles of the first
category before any coloration is visible upon them.
It will now be seen why it is impossible to blow bubbles with
films of this category—namely, because the film cannot extend
im consequence of the blowing, unless the molecules of its two
faces get continually further apart, thus making room in the
intervals between them for molecules nearer the inside of the
film, and giving numerous opportunities for the film to break.
In the films of the second category the rupture must be in-
comparably more rare. In this case, according to my principle,
the molecular mobility of the superficial layers is very great,
and consequently there is little hindrance to the movement of
the interior molecules into the widened intervals between those
at the outside; hence films of this category become im a very
short time extremely thin. This rapid attenuation teaches us
why we cannot succeed in blowing bubbles with these liquids
any more than with those of the preceding category. When we
have taken up a plane film at the end of the pipe, the suction
due to the small quantity of liquid which adheres to the circum-
ference of the pipe-bowl, and the descent of the liquid due to
the mouth of the pipe not being held perfectly horizontal, make
a film of this kind almost instantaneously so thin that it often
bursts by the unavoidable movements of the hand before it is
possible to put the pipe to one’s mouth ; and when this does not
happen, the bulging of the film produced by blowing and the
descent of the liquid towards the lowest point soon bring about
the same result.
We now come to the third and most important category, that
of the liquids which admit of being blown into bubbles. Here,
as in the first category, the superficial layers have but little mo-
lecular mobility, so that such films become thinner only slowly ;
but they seldom break, because, notwithstanding the descent of
the liquid and the effect of the blowing, the films subsist and
are capable of undergoing great extension. Ifthe ideas above
explained be admitted, we must conclude that in liquids of the
450 Prof, J. Plateau on the Figures of Equilibrium
present category the tension is insufficient to cause rupture;
and this is supported by a comparison of the respective tensions
of water and of our solution of Marseilles soap: the tension of
a film of water at the common temperature is 14°6, and that of
a film formed by a solution containing one part of Marseilles
soap to forty of water is only 5°64°, or between one-half and
one-third of the former.
Nevertheless, in order that a liquid may be capable of exten-
sion into bubbles, it is not indispensable that the tension should
be absolutely weak, if only it is so in comparison with the vis-
cosity of the superficial layers, or, in other words, if the ratio
of the superficial viscosity to the tension be sufficitntly great.
For instance, while the tension of a film of soap-water, as we have
just seen, is only 5°64, that of a film of a solution of albumen,
made by adding a tenth of its volume of water to white of egg,
is 11°42, or twice as great ; but in hemispherical bubbles of soap
the colourless phase is at most twenty seconds, while in those of
albumen it lasts several hours. Thus when we pass from the
first of these liquids to the second, the tension, or the force tend-
ing to break the films, becomes double; but the resistance to rup-
ture increases at the same time, in consequence of the greater
viscosity of the superficial layers, and thus solution of albumen
stretches out into bubbles like soap, but to a less degree.
Such is the theory which I propose as a solution of the
principal question treated of in the present series of these re-
searches. In order that a liquid may be capable of forming
large and persistent films, and may consequently admit of bemg
blown into bubbles, it is necessary, in the first place, that the
viscosity proper to the superficial layers of its films should be
great, in order that the diminution of thickness may take place
slowly ; it is also needful that the tension should be relatively
small, in order that it may not overpower the resistance opposed
by the above viscosity to the rupture of the film, when, in con-
sequence of superficial movements, a more than ordinary sepa-
ration of the molecules occurs. I have shown, however, by rea-
soning which is too long to be dwelt upon here, that the ratio
between superficial viscosity and tension, which makes the for-
mation of bubbles possible, must be greater in proportion as the
superficial viscosity 1s greater.
I next pass to a series of facts in support of this theory. I
have tried, in the first place, to prove by direct experiments the
existence of a viscosity peculiar to the superficial layers, and the
variations which it presents in different liquids. The following
is, in substance, the method of experimenting that I adopted,
and which I found perfectly successful.
* These tensions are expressed in milligrammes per millimetre of length.
of a Liquid Mass without Weight. | 451]
A pivot, 25 millims. high, carrying a magnetized needle 10
centims. long, was fixed at the centre of a cylindrical glass dish,
11 centims. in internal diameter and 6 centims. deep. In making
an experiment, the liquid to be examined was poured into the
dish until it just came up to the lower face of the needle ; next, by
means of a bar-magnet, the needle was turned through 90° from
the magnetic meridian, and kept in that position until the surface
of the liquid had again become motionless ; then the bar-magnet
was suddenly removed and the time observed that the needle
took in traversing a given angle: in my experiments this angle
was 85°. When this time had been observed, more liquid of
the same kind was added until the needle was covered to a depth
of about 2 centims., the interior of the cap of the needle was
freed from the small quantity of air which it contained, and
under these new conditions the time occupied by the needle in
traversing the angle of 85° was determined as before.
Experiments of this kind were made with five liquids of the
first category, namely, water, glycerine, and saturated solutions
of carbonate of sodium, nitrate of potassium, and chloride of
calcium. Now, although it would seem that the needle must
experience about twice as little resistance at the surface of the
liquid as it does in the interior, nevertheless for each of the
above liquids its velocity was much less in the former case than
it was in the second. With water, for instance, in one series of
observations the mean time occupied in traversing 85° at the
surface was 4°59 seconds, while in the interior it was only 2°37
seconds. Consequently it is evidently necessary to assume that
the surface of these liquids opposes a special resistance to the
movement of the needle, or, in other words, that the superficial
layer possesses a viscosity proper to itself and much greater
than the interior viscosity. We may add that if, while the
needle is kept at the surface at an angle of 90° from the mag-
netic meridian, any very small light body, such as the smallest
fragment of gold leaf, is laid on the surface of the liquid in
the meridian, on setting the needle free, this small body is seen
to be displaced and to move in the same direction as the needle,
whence it follows that the whole surface of the liquid turns to-
gether with the needle.
Five liquids of the second category, namely, alcohol, oil of
turpentine, olive-oil, sulphuric ether, and sulphide of carbon,
were tried in the same way; and for each of these the velocity
was, on the contrary, greater at the surface than in the interior,
With alcohol, for example, the average time occupied by the
needle in traversing 85° was 1°48 second at the surface, and
3°30 in the interior. Moreover, in the case of these liquids, a
small body floating on the surface in the magnetic meridian
452 Prof. J. Plateau on the Figures of Equilibrium
was in no way disturbed by the movement of the needle, which
simply came and struck against it. It follows from this that in
liquids of the second catecor y the superficial layer has not any
ereater viscosity than the interior; but I have shown that in reality
it has less. I will confine myself here to citing a single fact
bearing on this point. If the experiment of a small floating
body is made with a mixture of equal volumes of water and
alcohol, the body is simply struck by the needle; thus the ex-
cess of superficial viscosity possessed by the water is completely
destroyed by the presence of the alcohol. It therefore follows
that the superficial layer of the latter must be less viscous than
the interior, or, if | may so express myself, that 1t possesses a
negative excess of viscosity which neutralizes the positive excess
belonging to the water.
Lastly, five liquids of the third category were tried, namely,
solutions of Marseilles soap, soft household soap, resin soap,
saponine, and albumen, and showed, like those of the first ca-
tegory, a superficial viscosity much greater than the interior
viscosity. One of them (solution of saponine) yielded in this
respect extraordinary results; its superficial viscosity is ex-
tremely strong: the necdle placed at 90° from the magnetic
meridian and then left free remains in this position, as if the liquid
were covered with a solid pellicle; but yet it is impossible to
detect by any means the presence of such a pellicle. Solution of
albumen shows a similar behaviour, but in a less degree.
Thus the results obtained by means of the magnetic needle in
regard to the fifteen liquids that | have submitted to this kind
of trial, fully confirm the consequences drawn from the experi-
ments on the hemispherical films; we may therefore, I think,
look upon the following principle as fully established :—
The superficial layer of liquids has a proper viscosity, indepen-
dent of the viscosity of the interior of the mass. In some liquids
this superficial viscosity is greater than the internal viscosity, and |
often much greater, as in water and, especially, in solution of sapo-
nine ; in other liquids, on the contrary, it 1s less than the internal
viscosity, and often much less, as in oil of turpentine, alcohol, &c.
The idea of a viscosity proper to the superficial layer of liquids
had already been put forward by M. Hagen; but he seems to
consider that this viscosity is greater in all liquids than the
internal viscosity.
In order to be able to form a definite estimate of the relations
between superficial viscosity and tension, we should require to
have some accurate means of determining the numerical values
of the first of these elements, in the same way as those of the
second are determined. I have tried without success to find an
accurate method for this purpose; but I have shown that, in the
ee
of a Liquid Mass without Weight. 453
case of those liquids of the first and third categories in which
the superficial viscosity does not greatly exceed that of water,
we may adopt as approximate relative values the ratios between
the times occupied by the movement of the magnetic needle at
the surface and in the interior; a small correction, however,
must be applied to this ratio in the case of liquids like glycerine,
in which the internal viscosity is very great. I have therefore
calculated these ratios; then representing the superficial visco-
sity of water by 100, I have expressed those of the other liquids
in the same units; and, lastly, I have divided the numbers so
obtained by the respective tensions of the films, and have thus
formed the two Tables which follow :—
First Category.
: : Ratio of superfi-
Liquids. Beene) alee cal viscosity
o tension.
Wi diisiee cere nccccctonescs-se-80e 100-00 14-60 6°85
Prieé’s glycerine «:............. 60°42 8:00 7°95
Carbonate of sodium (saturated, 91-14 8-56 10-65
SURGE WRI) ese cac ta caesesncus
Nitrate of potassium (saturated 96°35 11-22 $59
SLE TI) BeOS RRA Oe ener |
Chloride of calcium (saturated, 90-62 11-06 8-19
uD) - ¢ ict SAREE BROCE SET eee |
= NX
Third Category.
Solution of Marseilles soap,1:40 94:79 5°64 16°81
,», -soft household soap,1 : 30 96:95 6°44 14:96
», potash resin-soap ......... §4°89 7°68 11-05
Not determined, Not determined,
», Saponine 1:100 ...... but extremely 8:74 but extremely
great. great.
PMD DUUTHCT I a. do o0 a. «a0. 65 «ocho Idem. 11-42 Idem.
It will be seen, on looking at these Tables, that the ratios of
superficial viscosity to tension are all greater for the liquids of
the third category (that is to say, for those which yield bubbles
and a copious froth) than for those of the first category, and
moreover that, with a single exception, the difference is con-
siderable.
In the second place, of the liquids in the first Table, that one
for which the ratio of these two elements has the highest value
(namely solution of carbonate of sodium) is precisely the one
which, when shaken in a flask, yields the most perceptible froth ;
we may therefore suppose that if a saturated solution of carbonate
of sodium is incapable of forming bubbles, it is not so far from
having that property as the four other liquids. :
454 On Figures of Equilibrium of a Liquid Mass without Weight,
In the third place, among the liquids of the second Table,
the one which shows the smallest ratio is solution of resin-soap,
and this is also the liquid in which bubbles attain the smallest size.
The small difference will no doubt be observed between the
ratios 10°65 and 11-05, belonging respectively to solution of car-
bonate of sodium, which does not admit of being blown into
bubbles, and to solution of resin-soap which does yield bubbles
up to a certain diameter. But this, again, is a consequence of
our theory; in fact, according to our Tables, the superficial vis-
cosity is smaller in the second of these liquids than in the first,
and, as I have stated above, the ratio at which the formation of
bubbles first becomes possible is higher the greater the super-
ficial viscosity. Itis therefore intelligible that, if the ratio 11-05
for resin-soap allows of the formation of bubbles of moderate
size, this same ratio (and still less the somewhat smaller ratio
10°65) will not allow of the formation of bubbles in solution of
carbonate of sodium.
Lastly, my theory leads me to a complete explanation of the
long persistence of bubbles blown with the glycerine-solution,
as well as of the singular property possessed by the film which
forms them of not diminishing in thickness beyond a certain
degree, and then increasing in thickness again. In the first
place, I endeavour to find the approximate value of the superficial
viscosity of the liquid in question, and I find it equal to 80°25,
whence it will be seen that it is distinctly less than that of water ;
the tension of the films is the same as for solution of soap,
namely 5°64; hence for the ratio of these two elements in the
elycerine-solution we have the number 14°22, Bearing in mind
the comparatively low value of the superficial viscosity of the
glycerine-solution, this ratio may be looked upon as high, and
is much greater than is needful for the formation of bubbles;
accordingly the glycerine-solution yields very large bubbles.
But this liquid absorbs moisture from the air, and consequently,
when a bubble has been blown with it, the film is subject to two
opposite influences—namely, that of weight which tends to make
it thinner, and that of absorption, which tends to thicken it,
The former predominatesat first, and the film gets thinner; but
the descent of the liquid becomes slower through two causes—
first, the diminution of the mass, and, secondly, the gradual ab-
sorption of moisture, which renders the liquid more aqueous and
thus approximates its viscosity to that of water, It follows that
soon the descent of the liquid becomes so slow that the augmen-
tation of thickness due to absorption predominates. As regards
the tension, M. Dupré has found that in solution of soap it
varies extremely little with the proportion of water; and this
probably holds good for the glycerine-solution also.
Dr. Odling on a Theory of Condensed Ammonia Compounds. 455
Thus, on the one hand, in consequence of the continual ab-
sorption of aqueous vapour, the film can never at any phase of
its existence become very thin ; and, on the other hand, the ratio
between superficial viscosity and tension remains great enough
to render the rupture of the film difficult, until the proportion
of water assimilated by it has become very great.
I conclude by showing that in relation to the ready develop-
ment of large films and the persistence of them, the part played
by cohesion is subsidiary to that played by internal viscosity. In
fact, for different liquids, the cohesion is known to vary in the
same direction as the coefficient of the sum of the curvatures in
the expression for the capillary pressure—a coefficient which,
according to the researches of M. Hagen and M. Dupré,is nothing
else than the tension; and since this latter is much weaker in
soap-water than in pure water, the same is necessarily true for
the cohesion also; but, notwithstanding, solution of soap yields
enormous bubbles, while water does not yield any.
LV. Note on a Theory of Condensed Ammonia Compounds.
By Wit11aM Opuiine, M.B., F.RS*
HE unit of ammonia, N H?, has the well-known property
of combining with the unit of hydrochloric acid, HCl, to
form a unit of the more complex body sal-ammoniac, HCI,NH?.
Hypothetical methylene being regarded as the analogue of
ammonia, chloride of methyle will be the hydrochloride of me-
thylene, corresponding to sal-ammoniac or hydrochloride of am-
monia,
HCILCH2, HCl,NH®.
But this chloride of methyle or hydrochloride of methylene is
known to be the first term of a series of compounds, the earlier
terms of which are formulated below. In a parallel column are
written the formule of what, if they existed, would form a similar
series of sal-ammoniac compounds :—
Chloride of methyle HCl,C H? HCl, N H®
rh ethyle HCl, C? H? Hel Ne 6
3 propyle HCl, C°H® HCl, N? H9
bs butyle HCl, C*H® HCl, N+ H??
ne aunyle; PELCL C> Et? HCl, N° H'
&e. &e.
Substituting an equivalent of metallic chloride for chloride of
hydrogen in the sal-ammoniac series, we have the following
* Communicated by the Author,
456 Dr. Odling on a Theory of Condensed Ammonia Compounds.
compounds, all of which, and many like them, are fairly well
known :—
Z :
Cl, N Ty?
AgCl, N? H®,
“Cl, N39,
“ Ol, NAH.
Chemists who express the composition of the chlorides of
ethyle and butyle as underneath, may express the composition
of the ammoniated chlorides of silver and calcium in a similar
fashion ; thus—
Cl, C H? Cl, C H? Cl, N H3 Cl, N H3
| | |
H, CH? CH Ag, NH N He
| |
C H? N H?
| Cael
H, CH CoN HS
The polyammoniated salts are all more or less unstable. It
is observable, however, that the diammonia compounds are
habitually less unstable than their more highly ammoniated
congeners, and coincidently that in the diammonia compounds
alone is it possible for each unit of ammonia to be combined
directly with a constituent of the hydrochloric acid or of its re-
presentative metallic chloride.
The superior solubility of diammonia compounds is especially
recognizable in the case of the best-characterized metal-ammonia
bases, such as platinamine and platosamine. In the salts which
these and such like bases form with hydrochloric acid, a portion
of the hydrogen of the ammonia, instead of the hydrogen of the
hydrochloric acid, would appear to be replaced by its equivalent
of metal.
Still employing the equivalent method of notation, hydrochlo-
ride of platosamine (the yellow salt) would be represented thus:
HCl, NH?
This salt very readily absorbs another unit of ammonia, and
thereby forms the hydrochloride of diplatosamine,
H, NH?
|
Cl, NH? »
HCl, N?H®=t, or
Notices respecting New Books. 457
from which, as is well known, ammoniais not liberable by treat-
ment of the salt with potash, or by its desiccation at upwards of
100°. The base N? H®*!,
state, as upon the above view of the cause of its stability it
scarcely should be, is yet transferable from one salt to another
by double decomposition with almost as much facility as am-
monia itself,
What I conceive to be the constitution of the different plati-
nous and platinic ammonia compounds in relation to each other,
is indicated in the last chapter of my ‘ Outlines of Chemistry,’
just published.
It is observable that in no stable metallicized ammonia hydro-
chloride is the number of nitrogen atoms more than double the
number of chlorine atoms in the salt. Thus the empirical for-
mul of the purpuro-cobaltic and luteo-cobaltic chlorides are
Co? CI®, LJONH®, and Co? Cl®, 12 NH® respectively. These ex-
pressions are of course easily translatable into forms harmoni-
zing with the above suggested view of the constitution of con-
densed ammonia compounds.
though not procurable in the free
—
LVI. Notices respecting New Books.
Methods of teaching Arithmetic. A Lecture addressed to the London
Association of Schoolmistresses. By J. G,. Fircu, M.A. Pp. 81.
London, 1869.
The School Arithmetic. By J. Cornnwett, Ph.D., and J. G. Fircu,
M.A. Pp. 144. Tenth edition. London, 1869.
The Science of Arithmetic. By J. Cornnwett, Ph.D., and J. G. Frrcn,
M.A. Twelfth edition. Pp.372. London, 1868.
WE have put these books together at the head of a short notice
on account of their common authorship, and of their being
more or less supplementary to each other. The first of them (the
lecture on methods of teaching arithmetic) contains many hints and
remarks likely to be useful to the audience to which it was addressed.
The point most dwelt on is the need of making learners understand
the ultimate reasons of the rules for performing the elementary ope-
rations of arithmetic, such as the rules for multiplication and division
of integers. We doubt whether the importance of this point is not
somewhat exaggerated. Any ordinary child of nine or ten years
can be brought to divide, for instance, 5382 by 23 correctly, and be
made to understand what is meant by the answer, viz. that if 5382
marbles were divided equally between 23 boys, each boy would get
234 marbles. But to make the child understand each separate step
of the process of the division is quite another matter. And though
much can be done by a good teacher by means of a discussion of
particular examples, yet we question whether any but a few ex-
Phil. Mag.S8. 4. Vol. 88. No. 257. Dec. 1869. 2H
458 Notices respecting New Books.
ceptional children of the above age could be brought to know much
more about long division than that it is a process leading to a certain
result. Nor does this to any serious extent diminish the value of the
intellectual training which a child goes through in the study of
arithmetic. ‘That training is undergone by means of particular ex-
amples. Thus, let the question proposed be this :—‘‘ A watch gains
uniformly 13 seconds a day. It is 2 minutes 10 seconds slow on a
certain day, by how much will it be fast at the end of three weeks ?”
The reasoning by which a child arrives at the answer is quite inde-
pendent of his knowledge of the ultimate reasons of the processes
of multiplication &c. that he employs.
We suppose that in reality Mr. Fitch’s opinion is not very differ-
ent from ours; for we find that in the book for children, of which he
is the joint author (the ‘School Arithmetic’), no more is attempted
than the statement and illustration of rules. The method of the
book is this :—In each section a typical example is given and its so-
lution reasoned out step by step; then follow a general rule,
another example worked out by the rule, and finally many examples
of the rule are given for practice. Of the examples some are such as
can be worked mentally, others, involving larger numbers, are to be
worked on slate or paper. This classification of the examples seems
to us a very valuable feature of the book; and the work altogether
seems a very good school arithmetic. If we were to hint a fault,
it would be that, to secure cheapness, a paper and type are used
likely to prove hurtful to young eyes.
The third work on the list (the ‘Science of Arithmetic’) is one of
more pretensions. It aims at imparting a systematic acquaintance
with the principles as well as the rules of arithmetic. The authors
have evidently bestowed much labour and thought upon the work,
and have produced a book from which a teacher of arithmetic would
doubtless learn much. The characteristic defect of the book is a
want of precision of statement, which sometimes contrasts quite
curiously with the air of laborious and systematic accuracy which
pervades the book: e. g. the authors mark out nineteen arithmetical
facts as axioms. Now, if we are justified in demanding precision in
any statement, it is In an axiom; yet here is one, Axiom XV.
p. 85 :—‘‘ If the dividend and divisor be either both increased or both
diminished the same number of times, the quotient remains un-
altered.” What the authors intend is pretty plain ; but if they were
held to what they say, it would follow that the quotient of 12 divided
by 6 might be the same as that of 9 divided by 38. In short, num-
bers may be increased or diminished in other ways than by taking
equimultiples of both or dividing both by a common factor, which is
what they mean by increasing or diminishing the dividend and divisor
a certain number of times. ‘This is by no means a solitary instance
of an inexactness which seriously diminishes the value of a book in
many respects well executed.
[ 459 |
LVIL. Proceedings of Learned Societies.
ROYAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 399.]
June 17, 1869.—Lieut.-General Sabine, President, in the Chair.
(THE following communication was read :—
“ Additional Observations on Hydrogenium.” By Thomas
Graham, F.R.S., Master of the Mint.
From the elongation of a palladium wire, caused by the occlu-
sion of hydrogen, the density of hydrogenium was inferred to be a
little under 2. But it is now to be remarked that another number
of half that amount may be deduced with equal probability from
the same experimental data. This double result is a consequence of
the singular permanent shortening of the palladium wire observed
after the expulsion of hydrogen. Ina particular observation formerly
described, for instance, a wire of 609-14 millims. increased in length
to 618°92 millims. when charged with hydrogen, and fell to 599°44
millims. when the hydrogen was extracted. The elongation was
9°78 millims., and the absolute shortening or retraction 9°7 millims.,
making the extreme difference in length 19°48 millims. The elon-
gation and retraction would appear, indeed, to be equal in amount.
Now it is by no means impossible that the volume added to the
wire by the hydrogenium is represented by the elongation and re-
traction taken together, and not by the elongation alone, as hitherto
assumed. It is only necessary to suppose that the retraction of the
palladium molecules takes place the moment the hydrogen is first
absorbed, instead of being deferred till the latter is expelled; for
the righting of the particles of the palladium wire (which are in
a state of excessive tension in the direction of the length of the
wire) may as well take place in the act of the absorption of the
hydrogen as in the expulsion of that element. It may indeed
appear most probable in the abstract that the mobility of the pal-
Jadium particle is determined by the first entrance of the hydrogen,
The hydrogenium will then be assumed to occupy double the space
previously allotted to it, and the density of the metal will be reduced
to one half of the former estimate. In the experiment referred
to, the volume of hydrogenium in the alloy will rise from 4°68 per
cent. to 9°36 per cent., and the density of hydrogenivm will fall
from 1°708 to 0°854, according to the new calculation. In a series
of four observations upon the same wire, previously recorded, the
whole retractions rather exceeded the whole elongations, the first
amounting to 23°99 millims., and the last to 21°38 millims. Their
united amount would justify a still greater reduction in the density
of hydrogenium, namely to 0°8051.
The first experiment, however, in hydrogenating any palladium
wire appears to be the most uniform in its results. The expulsion
of the hydrogen afterwards by heat always injures the structure of
the wire more or less, and probably affects the regularity of the ex-
pansion afterwards in different directions. The equality of the ex-
pansion and the retraction in a first experiment appears also to be
2H 2
4.60 Royal Society:—
a matter of certainty. This is a curious molecular fact, of which
we are unable as yet to see the full import. In illustration, another
experiment upon a pure palladium wire may be detailed. This
wire, which was new, took up a full charge of hydrogen, namely
956°3 volumes, and increased in length from 609°585 to 619:354
millims. The elongation was therefore 9'769 millims. With the
expulsion of the hydrogen afterwards, the wire was permanently
shortened to 600°115 millims. It thus fell 9°470 millims. below its
normal or first length. The elongation and retraction are here within
0-3 millim. of equality. The two changes taken together amount to
19°239 millims., and their sum represents the increase of the wire
in length due to the addition of hydrogenium. It represents a
linear expansion of 3°205 on 100, with a cubic expansion of 9°827
on 100. The composition of the wire comes to be represented as
being,
In volume.
Palladiomas feet ant. et Ee 100:000 or 90°895
Eby diogeminn asl. e045 etek e 9°827 or 9°105
109°827 or 100:000
The specific gravity of the palladium was 12°3, the weight of the
wire 1°554 grm., and its volume 0°126 cub. centim. The occluded
hydrogen measured 120°5 cub. centims. The weight of the same
would be 0:0108 grm., and the volume of the hydrogenium 0°012382
cub. centim. (100: 9°827:: 0°126:0°01238). The, density of the
hydrogenium is therefore
0:0108
0°01238
This is a near approach to the preceding result, 0°854. Calculated
on the old method, the last experiment would give a density of 1:708.
It was incidentally observed on a former occasion that palladium
alloyed with silver continues to occlude hydrogen. This property
is now found to belong generally to palladium alloys when the second
metal does not much exceed one half of the mixture. These alloys
are all enlarged in dimensions when they acquire hydrogenium. It
was interesting to perceive that the expansion was greater than
happens to pure palladium (about twice as much), and that, on after-
wards expelling the hydrogen by heat, the fixed alloy returned to
its original length without any further shortening of the wire. The
embarrassing retraction of the palladium has, in fact, disappeared.
The fusion of the alloys employed was kindly effected for me by
Messrs. Matthey and Sellon—when the proportion of palladium was
considerable, by the mstrumentality of M. Deville’s gas-furnace (in
which coal-gas is burned with pure oxygen), or by means of a coke-
furnace when the metals yielded to a moderate temperature. The
alloy was always drawn out into wire if possible; but if not suffi-
ciently ductile, it was extended by rolling into the form of a thin
ribbon. The elongation caused by the addition of hydrogenium was
ascertained by measuring the wire or ribbon stretched over a gra-
duated scale, as in the former experiments.
1. Palladium, Platinum, and Hydrogenium.—Palladium was fused
=0°872.
Mr. T. Graham on Hydrogenium. 461
with platinum, a metal of its own class, and gave an alloy consisting,
according to analysis, of 76°03 parts of the former and 23°97 parts
of the latter. This alloy was very malleable and ductile; its specific
gravity was 12°64. Like pure palladium, it absorbed hydrogen,
evolved on its surface in the acid fluid of the galvanometer, with
great avidity.
A wire 601°845 millims. in length (23°69 inches) was increased
to 618°288 millims., on occluding 701°9 volumes of hydrogen gas
measured at 0° C. and 0°760 barom. This is a linear elongation of
16°443 millims. (0°6472 inch), or 2°732 on a length of 100. It
corresponds with a cubic expansion of 8°423 volumes on 100 vo-
lumes ; and the product may be represented—
In volume.
ixcoemetals.. 66 Jose0 cee ..- 100°000 or 92°225
PemnOcenmuna, Oy. .l cet ye.) oO B423'or” °7°7 79
108423 or 100-000
The elements for the calculation of the density of hydrogenium
are the following, the assumption being made as formerly, that
the metals are united without condensation :—
Original weight of the wire 4°722 grms.
Original volume of the wire 0°373 cub. centim.
Volume of the hydrogen extracted 264°5 cub. centims.
Weight of the hydrogen extracted, by calculation, 0:0237 grm.
The volume of the hydrogenium will be to the volume of the
wire (0°373 cub. centim.) as 100 is to 8°423—that is, 0°03141
cub. centim. Finally, dividing the weight of the hydrogenium by
its bulk, 0°0237 by 0:03141, the density of hydrogenium is found
to be 0°7545.
On expelling all hydrogen from the wire at a red heat, the
latter returned to its first dimensions as exactly as could be mea-
sured. ‘The platinum present appears to sustain the palladium, so
that uo retraction of that metal is allowed to take place. This alloy
therefore displays the true increase of volume following the acqui-
sition of hydrogentum, without the singular complication of the
retraction of the fixed metal. It now appears clear that the retrac-
tion of pure palladium must occur on the first entrance of hydrogen
into the metal; the elongation of the wire due to the hydrogenium
is negatived thereby to the extent of about one half, and the ap-
parent bulk of the hydrogenium is reduced to the same extent;
hydrogenium came in consequence to be represented of double its
true density.
The compound alloy returns to its original density (12°64) upon
the expulsion of the hydrogen, showing that hydrogen leaves with-
out producing porosity in the metal. No absorptive power for
vapours, like that of charcoal, was acquired.
A wire of the present alloy, and another of pure palladium, were
charged with hydrogen, and the diameters of both measured by a
micrometer. ‘The wire of alloy increased sensibly more in thickness
than the pure palladium, about twice as much; the reason is, that
4.62 Royal Society :—
the latter while expanding retracts in length at the same time. The
expansion of both wires may be familiarly compared to the enlarge-
ment of the body of a leech on absorbing blood. The enlargement is
uniform in all dimensions with the palladium-platinum alloy ; the
leech becomes larger, but remains symmetrical. But the retraction
in the pure palladium wire has its analogy in a muscular contraction
of the leech, by which its body becomes shorter but thicker in a
corresponding measure.
The same wire of palladium and platinum, charged a second time
with hydrogen, underwent an increase in length from 601°845 to
618°2, or sensibly the same as before. The gas measured 258-0
cub. centims., or 619°6 times the volume of the wire. The product
may be represented as consisting of
By volume.
ixed metals s,s. c. s\2\5, 2 of a se ceoleielot a mea
PEM GRO SCM ncaa bs 2 Sune.es ware ome ors | eS
100-000
The density of hydrogenium deducible from this experiment is
0°7401. The mean of the two experiments is 0'7473.
2. Palladium, Gold, and Hydrogenium.—Palladium fused with
gold formed a malleable alloy, consisting of 75:21 parts of the former
and 24°79 parts of the latter, of a white colour, which could be
drawn into wire. Its specific gravity was 13:1. Of this wire 601°85
millims. occluded 464°2 volumes of hydrogen with an increase in
length of 11°5 millims. This is a linear elongation of 1:91 on 100,
and a cubic expansion of 5°84 on 100. The resulting composition
was therefore as follows :—
In volume.
Alloy of palladium and gold .... 100 or 94:48
Piydnocenium ese. Wie ee nee 5°84 or 5ah2
105°84 100-00
The weight of the wire was 5°334 grms.
The volume of the wire was 0°4071 cub. centim.
The volume of hydrogen extracted, 189-0 cub. centims.
The weight of the hydrogen, 0°01693 grm.
The volume of the hydrogenium, 0°02378 cub. centim.
Consequently the density of the hydrogenium is 0°711.
The wire returned to its original length after the extraction of
the hydrogen, and there was no retraction.
The results of a second experiment on the same wire were almost
identical with the preceding.
The elongation on 601°85 millims. of wire was 11°45 millims.,
with the occlusion of 463°7 volumes of hydrogen. This is a linear
expansion of 1:902 on 100, and a cubic expansion of 5°81 on 100.
The volume of hydrogen gas extracted was 188°8 cub. centims., of
which the weight is 0°016916 grm. The volume of the hydrogenium
was 0°02365 cub. centim., that of the palladium-gold alloy being
0°4071 cub. centim. Hence the density of the hydrogenium is 0°715.
In a third experiment made on a shorter length of the sanie
wire, namely 241-2 millims., the amount of gas occluded was very
Mr. 'T’. Graham on Hydrogenium. 463
similar, namely 468 volumes, and was not increased by protracting
the exposure of the wire for the long period of twenty hours. There
can be little doubt, then, of the uniformity of the hydrogenium com-
bination, the volumes of gas occluded in the three experiments being
464°2, 463-7, and 468 volumes. The linear expansion was 1°9 on
100 in the third experiment, and therefore similar also to the prece-
ding experiments.
The hydrogenium may be supposed to be in direct combination
with the palladium only, as gold by itself shows no attraction for the
former element. In the first experiment the hydrogenium is in the
proportion of 0:3151 to 100 palladium and gold together. This
gives 03939 hydrogenium to 100 palladium ; while a whole equiva-
lent of hydrogenium is 0°939 to 100 palladium*. The hydrogenium
found is by calculation 0°4195 equivalent, or 1 equivalent hydroge-
nium to 2°383 equivalents palladium, which comes nearer to 2 equi-
valents of the former with 5 of the latter than to any other proportion.
To ascertain the smallest proportion of gold which prevents retrac-
tion, an alloy was made by fusing 7 parts of that metal with 93 parts
of palladium, which had a specific gravity of 13°05. The button
was rolled into a thin strip and charged with hydrogen by the wet
method. An occlusion of 585°44 volumes of gas took place, with a
lmear expansion of 1:7 on 100. A retraction followed to nearly
the same extent on afterwards expelling the hydrogen by heat.
With another alloy, produced by fusing 10 of gold with 90 of pal-
ladium, the occlusion of gas was 475 volumes, the linear expansion
165 on 100. The retraction on expelling the gas afterwards was
extremely:slight. To nullify the retraction of the palladium, about
10 per cent. of gold appears therefore to be required in the alloy.
Another alloy of palladium of sp. gr. 13:1, and containing 24°79
per cent. of gold, underwent no retraction on losing hydrogen, as
already stated.
The presence of so much gold in the alloy as half its weight did
not materially reduce the occluding power of the palladium. Such
an alloy was capable of holding 459-9 times its volume of hydrogen,
with a linear expansion of 1°67 per cent.
3. Palladium, Silver, and Hydrogenium.—The occluding power
of palladium appeared to be entirely lost when that metal was alloyed
with much more than its own weight of any fixed metal. Palladium
alloys containing 80, 75, and 70 per cent. of silver occluded no hy-
drogen whatever. .
With about 50 per cent. of silver, pailadium rolled into a thin
strip occluded 4U0°6 volumes of hydrogen. It expanded 1°64 part
in 100 in length, and returned to its original dimensions without
retraction upon the expulsion of the gas. The specific gravity of
this silver-palladium alloy was 11°8 ; the density of the hydrogenium
()°727.
An alloy which was formed of 66 parts of palladium and 34 parts
of silver had the specific gravity 11°45. It was drawn into wire
and found to absorb 511°37 volumes of hydrogen. The length of
the wire increased from 609-601 to 619°532 millims. This is a linear
7% Fe — | Pd— 1060.
464. Royal Society.
elongation of 1°629 on 100, or cubic expansion of 4°97 on 100.
The weight of the wire was 3°483 grms., its volume 0°3041 cub.
centim. The absolute volume of occluded hydrogen was 125°1 cub.
centims., of which the weight is 0:01120896. The volume of the
hydrogenium was 0°015105 cub. centim. The resulting density of
hydrogenium is 0°742.
In a repetition of the experiment upon another portion of the
same wire, 407°7 volumes of hydrogen were occluded, and the wire
increased in length from 609°601 millims. to 619°44 millims. This
is a linear expansion of 1'614 part on 100, and a cubic expansion of
4-92 on 100. The absolute volume of hydrogen gas occluded was
124-0 cub. centims., and its calculated weight 001111 grm. The
volume of the hydrogenium being 0°1496 cub. centim., the density
of hydrogenium indicated is 0°741. The two experiments are indeed
almost identical. ‘The wire returned in both experiments to its ori-
ginal length exactly, after the extraction of the gas.
4, Palladium, Nickel, and Hydrogenium.—The alloy, consisting
of equal parts of palladium and nickel, was white, hard, and readily
extensible. Its specific gravity was 11:22. This alloy occluded
69°76 volumes of hydrogen, with a linear expansion of 0°2 per cent.
It suffered no retraction below its normal length on the expulsion of
the gas by heat.
An alloy of equal parts of dismuth and palladium was a brittle mass
that did not admit of being rolled. It occluded no hydrogen, after
exposure to that gas as the negative electrode in an acid fluid for a
period of 18 hours. It seems probable that malleability and the
colloid character, which are wanting in this bismuth alloy, are essen-
tial to the occlusion of hydrogen by a palladium alloy.
An alloy of 1 part of copper and 6 parts of pailadium proved mo-
derately extensible, but absorbed no sensible amount of hydrogen.
The metallic laminze which remain on digesting this alloy in hy-
drochlorie acid, and which were found by M. Debray to be a defi-
nite alloy of palladium and copper (Pd Cu), exhibited no sensible
occluding power.
The conclusions suggested as to the density of hydrogenium, by
the compound with palladium alone and by the compounds with
palladium alloys, are as follows :—
Density of
Hydrogenium observed.
When unitedwith palladinm ieee bee i eee 0°854 to 0°872
When united with palladium and platnum .... 0°7401 to 0°7545
When united with palladium and gold ........ 0-71) “toste7is
When united with palladium and silver........ 0°727 to 0°742
The results, it will be observed, are most uniform with the com-
pound alloys, in which retraction is avoided; and they lie between
0°711 and 0°7545. It may be argued that hydrogenium is likely
to be condensed somewhat in combination, and that consequently
the smallest number (0°711) is likely to be the nearest to the truth.
But the mean of the two extreme numbers will probably be admitted
as a more legitimate deduction from the experiments on the com-
Geological Society. 4.65
pound alloys, and 0°733 be accepted provisionally as the approxi-
mate density of hydrogenium.
I have the pleasure to repeat my acknowledgments to Mr. W. C.
Roberts for his valuable assistance in this inquiry.
Could the density of hydrogenium be more exactly determined, it
would be interesting to compare its atomic volume with the atomic
volumes of other metals. With the imperfect information we pos-
sess, one or two points may be still worthy of notice. It will be
observed that palladium is 16°78 times as dense as hydrogenium
taken as 0°733, and 17°3 times as dense as hydrogenium taken as
0-711. Hence, as the equivalent of palladium is 106°5, the atomic
volume of palladium is 6°342 times as great as the atomic volume of
hydrogenium having the first density mentioned, and 6°156 as great
with the second density. To give an atomic volume to palladium
exactly six times that of hydrogenium, the latter element would
require to have the density 0°693.
Taking the density of hydrogenium at 0°7, and its atomic volume
equal to 1, then the following results may be deduced by calculation.
The atomic volume of lithium is found to be 0°826; or it is less even
than that of hydrogenium (1). The atomic volume of iron is 5°026,
of magnesium 4°827, of copper 4°976, of manganese 4°81, and of
nickel 4°67. Of these five metals, the atomic volume is nearly 5 times
that of hydrogenium. Palladium has already appeared to be nearly
6 times. The atomic volume of aluminium on the same scale is 7°39,
of sodium 16°56, and of potassium 31°63.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
[Continued from p. 403. |
April 14th, 1869.—Prof. Huxley, LL.D., F.R.S., President,
in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
3. “On the Salt-mines of St. Domingo.” By F. Ruschhaupe.
Communicated by Sir R. I. Murchison, Bart., F.P.G.S.
The author described the Cerro de Sal, or Salt Mountain of St.
Domingo. It extends about 3 leagues in length, and consists, ac-
cording to the author, of rocks “ of the Red Sandstone class ”—which,
where the chief visible deposits of salt occur, are principally gypsum
schists, sometimes very argillaceous. The salt is generally surrounded
by an ash-like mass consisting of gypsum and clay. The author
compared the gypsum beds with those of the Keuper. The beds are
thrown into a perpendicular position, and the same change is ob-
servable for miles in the Savannas. Animmense body of salt, 250—
300 feet broad, is exposed upon the north side of the mountain.
The salt is very white and pure, and might easily be conveyed to the
port of Barahona, about 18 miles distant.
4, « A description of the ‘ Broads’ of East Norfolk, showing their
origin, position, and formation in the Valleys of the Rivers Bure,
Yare, and Wayeney.” By B. B. Grantham, Ksq., C.E., F.G.S8.
4.66 Geological Society :—
The author described the general characters of the “ Broads,” or
shallow lakes of East Norfolk, and indicated their connexion with
the river-valleys. He regarded them as the last traces of great es-
tuaries, now cut off from the influence of the sea by upheaval.
5. “Ona peculiar instance of Intraglacial Erosion near Norwich.”
By Searles Wood, Jun., Esq., F.G.8., and F. W. Harmer, Esq.
The authors described the general structure of the valley of the
Yare near Norwich, in which the fundamental chalk-rock is covered
by the following drift-beds:—1, the Chillesford sand and clay; 2,
pebbly sands and pebble-beds; 3, the equivalent of the contorted
Drift of Cromer; 4, the middle glacial sand; and 5, the Boulder-
clay. The valley is hollowed out in these beds. Sewer-shafts sunk
in the bottom of the valley near Norwich have shown the existence
of an abrupt hole or narrow trough in the chalk, having one of its
sides apparently perpendicular. This is filled up in part by a de-
posit of dark-blue clay, full of chalk debris, exactly resembling the
Boulder-clay at a distance from Norwich, but quite different in
character from that occurring in the vicinity (No. 5); and this is
overlain in part by a bed of the middle glacial sand (No. 4), and in
part by a postglacial gravel. ‘The authors believed that this peculiar
hole or trough was excavated by glacial action after the deposition
of the bed No. 3, and that it belongs to the earliest part of the
middle glacial period. At Sommerleyton Brick-kiln, near Lowestoft,
a perfectly similar bed occurs between the drift and sand (Nos. 3
and 4.
6. “On the Lignite-mines of Podnernuoyo, near Volterra.” By
K. J. Beor, Esq., F.G.S.
The author states that the deposit of Lignite at Podnernuovo,
near Volterra, is of lacustrine origin, and consists of two parallel
strata of compact coal about 24 metres (=8 feet 4 in.) in thickness,
separated by a thin stratum of marl, with marl-shells, The lower
coal-bed lies on a bed of marl with marsh-shells, and the upper bed
is covered by a marine formation belonging to the Upper Miocene.
The lignite comes to the surface near the Alberese, where it extends
for a considerable distance. Some shifts occur, bringing the upper
bed down nearly to the level of the lower one; the inclination of the
beds diminishes gradually ; and the intervening stratum of marl de-
creases in thickness, and probably at last thins out altogether. ‘The
coal in the upper bed is better than that in the lower one. The
author remarks that this lignite deposit differs from those of the
neighbouring valleys in being purely of marsh origin, while they are
estuarine.
April 28th, 1869.—Prof. T. H. Huxley, LL.D., F.B.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communications were read :—
1. “On the Geology and Mineralogy of Hastings County, Canada
West.” By T. C. Wallbridge, Esq.
Before describing the gold and iron-ores of Hastings, which formed
the main subject of this paper, the author introduced a general
sketch of the geology of the county. After noticing certain local
Mr. Wallbridge on the Geology of Hastings County, Canada. 467
deposits of recent origin, he described the extensive accumulations
of drift-gravels and boulder-clay. A single boulder near the Shan-
nonville railway-station was said to cover an area of about 5 acres,
and to have a thickness of 100 feet. The evidences of glacial action
over the whole country were referred to, and the direction of ice-
marks cited from several localities. Below the posttertiary deposits
the rocks consist, in the southern townships, of Lower Silurian lime-
stones referred for the most part to the Trenton group, and, in the
northern townships, of a large series of metamorphic rocks, supposed
to be of Lower Laurentian age. Bosses of syenite and gneiss pene-
trate the Silurian beds to the south of the main Laurentian mass;
and several outliers of Trenton limestone point to the former ex-
tension of the Silurian rocks northwards. All the minerals of eco-
nomic value are confined to the Laurentian area.
Gold was first discovered in the county of Hastings in 1866. The
author described in detail the singular occurrence of the metal at
the Richardson Mine in Madoc, where it was found in two pockets
associated with a peculiar black carbonaceous substance, a ferru-
ginous dolomite, and ochre-brown iron-ore. Assays of the sur-
rounding rocks showed the existence of gold even at a considerable
distance from the mine. Mention was also made of several other
gold mines, in Madoc, Marmora, and Elzevir, from which specimens
were exhibited, and analyses of ore quoted.
The iron-ores of Hastings occur partly as magnetic oxide and
partly as hematite. In addition to the well-known “ Big Ore-
bed” and the “Seymour bed,” the writer called attention to some
new localities of magnetic ore in Madoc. ‘The deposit of hematite
called the ‘‘ Kane Ore-bed” was discovered by the author some
years back; and from ancient workings in this bed (apparently
those of the Indians, who may have used the ochre as war-paint)
he has obtained bone needles and other objects of human workman-
ship. Attention was then directed to a large deposit of specular
iron-ore in Hungerford, hitherto undescribed, and to the pyrrhotine
or magnetic pyrites of Madoc.
The paper concluded with a notice of the galena and other less
important minerals of the county.
2. “On the distribution of Flint Implements in the Drift, with
reference to some recent discoveries in Norfolk and Suffolk.” By
J. W. Flower, Esq., F.G.S.
The author noticed some recently discovered localities in the
valley of the Little Ouse which have yielded Flint Implements,
viz.:—at Broomhill, about 350 feet from and 5 or 6 feet above the
level of the river ; at Gravel Hill, about 1 mile from and 10 feet above
the river; at Shrub Hill, about 1 mile from and only a foot or two
above the river ; and at Lakenheath, nearly 3 miles from the river,
and 60 feetaboveit. In the first three of these localities the worked
flints are in coarse gravel, resting immediately on the Cretaceous
beds (chalk in the first and second, gault in the third), and overlain
by regular deposits of gravel and sand. The implements resemble
those of Acheul, Thetford, and Salisbury, but present some pecu-
hiarities, from which the author inferred that each place had its own
468 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
workmen, and that the different forms were intended to answer dif-
ferent purposes. At Brandon, implements formed of quartzite were
found in a bed consisting of rounded quartzite pebbles mixed with
about one-fourth of flints. Flint implements occurred beneath this
bed.
The author indicated the geographical characters of the district
and the peculiarities in the distribution of the flint implements, which
he regarded as in accordance with the phenomena presented by the
valley of the Somme ; and he argued from the consideration of all the
facts that the implements were not transported to their present
situation by the agency of the rivers in whose valleys they occur,
but that they were made upon the spot, exposed upon the surface
with the gravels in which they are found and from which they were
made, and finally covered up by the river-gravels and sandy beds
which now overlie them.
LVIII. Pareipenre and Misvelanevis Articles.
ON THE EXTENSION OF LIQUIDS UPON EACH OTHER.
BY R. LUDTGE.
HEN a drop of liquid is placed on the surface of another liquid
with which it does not mix, either the drop may retain the shape
of a lens floating on this liquid, or it may spread out and form a very
thin layer. The first case is that of a drop of water placed upon oil,
or of a drop of oil upon alcohol; the second that of oil upon water,
or of alcohol on glycerine.
It is readily ascertained that the thickness of the liquid on which
is placed the drop of the second substance has an influence on the
extension of this drop on its surface. If this thickness is adequate
(at least 1 centim.), the drop readily expands, forming a very thin
layer, too thin indeed to produce the phenomenon of coloured rings.
When it is very small (1 to 5 millims. and even less), the drop in
extending hollows in its centre the liquid surface, to such an extent
sometimes as to moisten the bottom of the vessel in which the surface
was contained, by driving away at this point the liquid which origi-
nally covered it. ‘The nature of the material of which the vessel is
made has no influence on the relative positions which the two liquids
assume under these circumstances; it does not seem to depend on
any difference in the force with which the two liquids adhere to the
bottom.
M. Ludtge brings this out more clearly by the following experiment,
in which he quite gets rid of the vessel, so that adhesion cannot
come into play. On a lamina of oil produced in a circular iron wire
frame, he places a drop of soap-water ; there is thus formed a circular
lamina of soap-water which gradually extends into the interior of the
lamina of oil until it fills the entire ring, while the oil is repelled in
the form of smail droplets which adhere to the iron wire. A lamina
of water may also first be produced in the ring; this may be driven
away by a drop of oil delicately placed upon it, which spreads
over the frame in its place; and this lamina of oil may finally be re-
placed by another of soap-water, as we have seen. We might obvi-
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 469
ously work in this way with all substances which are capable of
spreading over each other, were it not that there are some which
cannot be made to form a thin plate on a framework. In the case
of these liquids, the experiment is made by replacing the free Jamina
by one almost as thin and as stretched, which is formed by letting
the liquid extend on a carefully cleaned glass plate.
One of the two substances may be extended as a thin lamina on
another liquid, and the lamina thus produced may be worked with like
a free one. ‘These two latter methods have this advantage over the
use of a skeleton, that the surface of contact between the two liquids
is smaller, and that they mix or combine less easily; thus the expe-
riment is in many cases greatly facilitated.
The author has investigated a great number of substances from this
point of view. He has found it to be an extremely general fact,
and that there is probably no liquid, excepting perhaps mercury,
which has not the property of spreading as a thin lamina on a great
number of liquids, and in regard to which other substances do not
enjoy the same property. The following are the principal results to
which this investigation has led.
1. When one liquid can extend in a thin lamina upon the surface
of another liquid, the second can never extend in the same way over
the first.
2. Two liquids whose reciprocal adhesion is greater than the co-
hesion of that one of them in which this property is smallest, have
always the property that a drop of the one with the smaller cohesion
extends upon the other.
3. A drop of the latter retains its shape when placed on the surface
of the former, and becomes coated with a thin layer of the first
liquid.
4. All liquids which satisfy the above conditions as to the magni-
tude of adhesion, may be arranged in a series in which each antece-
dent liquid spreads on the surface of a succeeding one, and never
conversely.
5. This series is the same as that obtained when the same liquids
are arranged in the order of their capillarity-constants
(<% = H ey g=T=a),
2r7r 2 2
the smallest constant being first.
6. The rapidity with which this extension takes place is almost
proportional to the interval which separates them in the Table.
7. The phenomenon is the more distinct the less the miscibility
of two liquids and the greater the difference of their cohesions.
8. The extension of a liquid on its own surface may be effected by
placing a drop at a high temperature upon the surface of the liquid
at a lower temperature.
9. The greater the cohesion of a liquid the more difficult is it to
obtain a clean surface. ‘This is the case with water for instance, on
which almost all liquids can extend.
The substances on which the author has worked are the following,
ATO Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
arranged in such an order that each can extend a thin lamina on a
following one; it will be seen by the numbers that the order is the
same as that for the capillarity, the authority for which is given :—
Hither 4 ecgk ieee see 6s 1789 |
cee ether ecek ee eo
PlCoMON ve eeee ess a ee 2°49 >Frankenheim.
BenZOle 2 cece te ese ck) gO
Essence of turpentine .. 2°78
UAD-WaleL oss... .a. 62 02 O Melatcat
ACCHIE ACIG : ae k tas 6 2°884 Bede.
Oil of poppies... 202 bc ks 3°05 :
Bisulphide of Carbon, 22+. “ool } Gash
Solution of potash ......
Glyceniie Ota aay ea + Plateau.
INMCMIO'ACIG fs rae st 6°026
Sulphuric agids | sce e504 6°623 } Frankenheim.
Eiydrochloric acid (5); - 7°026
FANIVOOMIA See ce et cee 2
Sulphate of copper ......
Water th tele as ens 8 7°58 Frankenheim.
Chloride of ammonium
Solution of chloride of iron.
—Poggendorff’s Annalen, No. 7, 1869; Bibliotheque Universelle de
Geneve, September 15, 1869.
MEASUREMENT OF THE ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY OF LIQUIDS
HITHERTO SUPPOSED TO BE INSULATORS.
To the Kditors of the Philosophical Magazine and Journal.
Tamworth House, Mitcham Common, §.,
GENTLEMEN, September 22, 1869.
You have given in the August Number of this Magazine an ex-
tract from the Comptes Rendus for June, on the ‘“‘ Measurement of
the Electrical Conductivity of Liquids hitherto supposed to be In-
sulators.” Ina paper read in the Chemical Section of the British
Association at Dundee, 1867, I gave the resistances, in B.A. units, of
a definite length and thickness of oils, and pointed out in some in-
stances the electrolysis resulting from the tests. This paper appeared
inthe Report of the British Association for 1867, the Chemical
News, October 1867, and in the Proceedings of the British Pharma-
ceutical Conference, as well as in the Pharmaceutical Journal for
October 1867.
Some of the oils operated upon gave much higher resistances than
any of the liquids tested by M. Said-Effendi. In the case of oil of
turpentine, I found by continued contact with the battery that its
resistance became considerably reduced in consequence of electrc-
lysis, and pointed out the importance of this fact to the detection of
oil of turpentine when employed as an adulterant to volatile oils.
Yours obediently, .
Tuomas I, P. Bruce Warren,
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 471
ON THE FREEZING-POINT OF WATER CONTAINING DISSOLVED
GASES, AND ON THE REGELATION OF WATER. BY C. SCHULTZ.
Gases, like solids or liquids, dissolved in water lower its freezing-
point. ‘This is well known in the case of hydrochloric acid and of
ammonia, which, from the exception they present to the law of the
absorption of gases, are not considered to form mere solutions in water.
The same effect is very distinct in the case of sulphurous and car-
bonic acids; and by adopting certain precautions it may also be ob-
served in the case of the permanent gases oxygen, hydrogen, and
nitrogen.
The following experiment shows that pure water solidifies at a
temperature at which water containing dissolved air remains liquid.
In a glass bulb provided with a U-tube, water, freed from air by
boiling for a sufficient length of time, was introduced, and was shut
off from communication with the atmosphere by mercury in the
bend. ‘This vessel was surrounded by melting ice obtained from
distilled water. Over this melting ice a current of air washed with
water was passed. The water in the bulb had, by strong cooling,
been made tc freeze, and the ice formed melted, except a very small
piece. Ifthe vessel is then surrounded by the mixture of aérated
water and ice, large crystals of ice are gradually formed on it.
Helmholtz has given an experiment the method of which has
been applied in the foregoing one. In a vacuous vessel containing
water, ice is formed when it is surrounded with ice melting in the
air. This experiment is designed to show that ice melting in the
air has, owing to the external pressure, a lower melting-point than
that which has been freed from this pressure. But it has been shown
above that ice melting in the air has a lower melting-point than
that which melts under the same pressure without contact with air.
By comparison with the known lowering of the melting-point of
pure water produced by pressure, we are in a condition to determine
the small value cf the depression of the melting-point produced by
absorbed air. If the open end of the U-tube in the above apparatus
be connected with a column of mercury under an excess of pressure
of two atmospheres, the renewed formation of ice almost ceases; and
with an excess of pressure of 834 atmospheres the ice in the vessel
gradually melts. According to Thomson, the lowering of the melt-
ing-point of pure water by a pressure of 3 atmospheres amounts to
0°-02; so that ice in contact with water which is saturated with air
under the pressure of 1 atmosphere, melts at about this much lower
temperature than it does under the same pressure, air being excluded.
If we define the temperature 0° as that of the melting-point of pure
water under a pressure of 760 millims. mercury, the zero-point of the
thermometer may, on the ordinary determination in melting ice, lie
between 0 and —=,°.
The alteration in the melting-point of water by absorbed hydrogen
is far smaller. Water which is saturated with hydrogen under the
ordinary atmospheric pressure freezes in a mixture of ice and water
saturated with air.
472 Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
To investigate the influence of the quantity of the absorbed gases
on the magnitude of the change in the melting-point, the tempera-
ture of a mixture of ice and water which was saturated under 1, 2,
3 atmospheres was examined, and was found to be —0°'13, 25,
and —0°'35. Thealteration in the melting-point seems proportional
to the amount of dissolved gas.
The remarkable property which ice has of regelation has been
variously interpreted. Faraday has explained it by assuming that
the particles in the interior of a mass of ice have a higher melt-
ing-point than those on the surface*. Forbest and others assume
that ice on melting assumes an intermediate condition of softness,
and that in this condition pieces adhere together, like those of weld-
able metals. ‘Thomson { and, subsequently, Helmholtz explain the
phenomenon by an alteration in the melting-point of ice by
pressure. ‘There must always be an increase in pressure on inti-
mate contact of the pieces of ice; under this pressure a portion of
the ice must meit at the surface of contact, the water formed must
run off, and, in virtue of its lower temperature, partially freeze again
in places where it is liberated from pressure.
If in regelation a fresh formation of ice from water be as-
sumed, the action of the air on the melting-point must influence the
process of regelation. Pure ice can only retain a temperature of 0°
in pure water; when it slowly thaws in air, or in water containing
air, its temperature is lower; a layer of pure water, or of water which
is not saturated with air, can therefore freeze between two pieces of
such ice. ‘This condition mustin many cases be considered to exist.
Hence in an atmosphere of carbonic acid the phenomenon of
regelation must be more decided than in common air; the experi-
ment, in fact, frequently succeeds. Yet the rapidity with which
water becomes saturated with carbonic acid seems to exert a disturb-
ing influence; for probably the water between the surfaces in con-
tact is also quickly saturated with carbonic; acid.—Poggendorff’s
Annalen, No. 6, 1869.
DISTURBANCES OF RESPIRATION, CIRCULATION, AND OF THE
PRODUCTION OF HEAT AT GREAT HEIGHTS ON MONT BLANC.
BY M. LORTET.
On the 17th and 26th of August, 1869, I made two ascents of the
highest peak of Mont Blanc. In the interval I twice passed the Col
du Géant; and before returning to Lyons I traversed other high
passes, and ascended several secondary summits in order to verify
the results I had obtained in reference to the disturbance which re-
maining or moving at great heights may produce in various physio-
logical functions. ‘The instruments which I used for estimating these
are the anapnograph of Bergeon and Kastus, Marey’s sphygmograph,
* Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. x. p. 440.
+ Phil. Mag. 8. 4. vol. xvi. p. 544.
% Proc. Roy. Soc. yolux.sp. 14ke
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 473
and maximum thermometers with an air-bubble and index specially
constructed by Baudin and which readily indicate the hundredth of
a degree.
In proportion as we ascend from a low to a considerable altitude,
the disturbance of the physiological functions becomes greater and
greater. While it is scarcely perceptible in going from Lyons to
Chamounix (that is, from a height of 656 feet to one of 3444 feet),
it is very appreciable from Chamounix to the Grands-Mulets (8444
to 10,000 feet), more perceptible still from the Grands-Mulets to
the Grand-Plateau of Mont Blanc (from 10,000 to 12,897 feet) ;
lastly this disturbance becomes very appreciable from the Grand-
Plateau to the Bosses-du-Dromadaire (14,944 feet) and at the summit
of the Calotte of Mont Blanc (15,776 feet). We shall pass in re-
view the variations which the respiration, the circulation, and the
internal temperature of the body undergo at the different heights,
either during actual walking or after a suitable time of rest.
Respiration.—From Chamounix to the Grand-Plateau (from 3444
to 12,897 feet) the disturbances of the respiration are little marked
in those who are accustomed to the ascent of high mountains, who
hold the head down to diminish the orifice of the respiratory organs,
who merely breathe through the nasal orifice, and keep the mouth
shut, taking care to suck an inert body, such asastone. From Cha-
mounix to the Grand-Plateau the number of respiratory motions is
scarcely altered ; we found twenty-four ina minute, as at Lyons and
Chamounix. But from the Grand-Plateau to theBosses and thence
to the top we observed thirty-six in a minute. The respiration is
short and obstructed; it seems as if the pectoral muscles became
rigid, and the sides squeezed in a vice. At the top, after two hours’
rest, these inconveniences gradually disappear. ‘The respiration
_ sinks to twenty-five a minute; but it remains obstructed, and the
anapnograph shows that the quantity of air inspired and expired is
much less than on the plain. ‘he air being under a very low pres-
sure, the quantity of oxygen brought in a given time into contact
with the blood is necessarily very small.
Circulation—During the ascent, although the pace was extremely
slow, the circulation was enormously accelerated. At Lyons, ina
state of rest and while fasting, the mean number of the pulsations
was 64 inaminute. In the ascent from Chamounix to the top of
Mont Blanc this number gradually increases, according to theheights,
to 80, 108, 116, 128, 136, and finally, in ascending the last ridge,
which leads from the Bosses to the top, to 160 and more in a minute.
These ridges are, it is true, extremely difficult; they have an inclina-
tion of from 45° to 50°; but the pace was very slow, never more
than 32 paces in a minute, and frequently less. The pulse is
feverish, rapid and weak. The artery is felt to be almost empty.
Thus the least pressure stops the current of blood in the vessel.
The blood must pass with great rapidity into the lungs, a rapidity
which aggravates the bad oxygenation it already undergoes owing
to the rarefaction of the air. From 14,760 feet the veins of the hands,
the forearms, and the temples swell; and every one, including the
Phil. Mag. 8. 4. Vol. 38. No. 257. Dec. 1869. 21
474: Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles.
guides, feels a heaviness of the head and a somnolence which are
frequently very painful, evidently due to a venous stagnation and
imperfect oxygenation of the blood. Even after two hours’ com.
plete rest and while still fasting, the pulse always remains between
90 and 108. ‘The sphygmograph applied to the wrist after an hour’s
rest indicates an extremely feeble tension, and a most pronounced
dicrotism. According to M. Marey, this defect of tension must be
due to the fact that, owing to muscular motion, the blood flows more
rapidly through the small vessels. When the sphygmograph is ap-
plied to persons suffering from mountain-sickness, curves are ob-
tained which exactly resemble those obtained in cases of algidity.
The pulse is so weak that the spring of the instrument is scarcely
raised. This alone would indicate a general cooling of the body.
Internal Temperature of the Body.—This was always taken with
great care at different heights, the thermometer being placed in the
mouth underneath the tongue; the mouth itself was closed, and
breathing was effected through the nose. The thermometer was a
Walferdin’s maximum with index, on which, from 30° to 40°, the hun-
dredths of a degree could be read off. ‘The index facilitated the
reading, and prevented any errors. ‘The instrument was always left
for at least fifteen minutes in the mouth, a time which was far more
than sufficient for it to reach the maximum.
While fasting and exactly in the same conditions, during the ascent,
the decrease of the internal temperature of the body is very remark-
able, and zs proportional to the altitude reached. ‘This is easily seen
by an inspection of the following Table, which condenses the ob-
servations made upon myself during my two ascents of Mont Blanc.
Temperature taken under the Tongue.
Ascent on | Ascent on Temperature
E Aug. 17, 1869. | Aug. 26, 1869.| of the air.
: Height
Names of the stations. |. 2... ——— = ar See Se
Miele In mo Inmo-| Aug. | Aug
At rest. tion. Atrest, tion. ike 26.
ne ie) io) 1) fe) 1)
TIYOMS sancteescooteees earseeee G56" 4S5 45 Stee aie eee ae Bp | 3
Chamounixes.4..06 A 3,444| 36:55 | 363] 87-0 | 35:3 |+101|412-4
Cascade-du-Dard ......... 4,920| 36-4 | 35:7] 363 | 34:3 |+11:2/+124
Chalet-de-la-Para, ccusse.s2 5,264| 366 | 34:8 | 363 | 34:2 |+-11:38/41386
Pierre-pointue ........... 6,721| 36:5 | 33:3 | 36:4 | 33°4 |-+-13°2)4141
Grands-Mulets ............ 10,002| 86°5 | 33:1] 36:3] 33:3 |— O3/— 15
Grand-Plateau ............ 12,897 | 36.3 | 32:8 | 36:7 | 325 |— 82\— 64
Bosses-du-Dromadaire ...|14,944| 386°4 | 82:2] 35:7 | 32:3 |—10°3/— 42
Top of Mont Blanc ...... 15,777| 363 | 32:0] 366 | 31°85 |— 91 )— 34
It is thus seen that, during the muscular efforts of the ascent, the
internal temperature of the body may be lowered in ascending from
3444 to 15,777 feet by from 4° to 6°—an enormous diminution for
mammals. If we remain stationary for a few seconds, the tempera-
ture rapidly rises to very nearly its normal maximum; at the top of
,
;
.
Intelligence and Miscellaneous Articles. 475
Mont Blanc, however, where every one feels a little uneasiness,
more than half an hour elapsed before the thermometer attained
its normal height. ‘These data cease to be true during digestion.
Then, in spite of the efforts which the ascent necessitates, the tem-
perature is maintained at about 36° or 37°, and even exceeds 37°'3.
The influence of the food does not last long; scarcely half an hour
after having eaten, the body is again cooled.
Whence arises this diminution of temperature? In a state of rest
and while fasting man burns the materials of his blood, and the heat
developed is altogether employed in keeping his temperature constant
during the variations of the atmosphere. On a plain, and by mecha-
nical efforts, the intensity of the respiratory combustions, as Gavarret
has shown, increases proportionally to the expenditure of force.
Heat is transformed into mechanical force; but from the density of
the air and the quantity of oxygen inspired, enough heat is formed
to compensate this expenditure. On a mountain, on the contrary,
especially at great heights and on very steep snowy ascents, where the
mechanical labour of the ascent is very great, an enormous quantity
of heat must be transformed into muscular force. This expenditure
of force consumes more heat than the organism can furnish; hence
the body is cooled, and frequent halts must be made in order to
reheat it. Although the body be burning and ina state of perspira-
tion, it becomes cooler in ascending, because it consumes too much
heat, and the respiratory combustion cannot furnish a sufficient quan-
tity, owing to the small density of the air. It is this rarefaction
that causes less oxygen to enter the lungs at an elevated place than
on theplain. ‘The rapidity of the circulation is also a cause of cool-
ing, the blood not having sufficient time to become properly charged
with oxygen. At a great height, as Gavarret has remarked, the
respiratory and circulatory motions are accelerated, not only in order
to render possible the absorption of a suitable quantity of oxygen,
but also to remove from the blood the dissolved carbonic acid. But
this gaseous exhalation, though very active, is no longer sufficient
to keep up the normal composition of the blood, which remains super-
saturated with carbonic acid; hence the headache, sickness, sleepi-
ness which sometimes is almost irresistible, and the still greater cool-
ing which affects both travellers and guides, on reaching a height
of 13,000 or 14,000 feet. ‘The mountain-sickness, which attacked
two of my companions very severely, is especially due to this con-
siderable cooling, and probably also to the blood being vitiated by
carbonic acid. During digestion the cooling becomes almost zero ;
hence the usage of the guides to eat about every two hours. Unfor-
tunately at great heights the want of appetite becomes usually so
ereat that it is impossible to swallow any food.
The secretions exhibited nothing remarkable. The urine contained
neither sugar nor albumen; but it was considerably diminished.—
Comptes Rendus, September 20, 1869.
476
INDEX to VOL. XXXVIII.
ABIcH (M.) on fulgurites m the
andesite of Lesser Ararat, and on
the influence of local agents in the
production of thunderstorms, 436 ;
on hailstorms in Russian Georgia,
440.
Air, determination of the specific heat
of, under constant volume by the
metallic barometer, 430.
Albatros, on the mechanical princi-
ples involved in the sailing flight of
the, 130.
Aldis (J. 8.) on the nebular hypo-
thesis, 508.
Amaury (M.) on the compressibility
of liquids, 164.
Ammonia compounds, on a theory of
condensed, 455.
Ammonium alloys, on, 57.
Angstrom (J. A.) on the spectrum of
the aurora borealis, 246.
Arctic regions, on the winterings in
the, during the last fifty years, 340.
Aurora borealis, on the spectrum of
the, 246.
Baily (W. H.) on Inish graptolites,
and on plant-remains from beds in-
terstratified with the basalt in An-
trim, 241.
Battery, thermalresearchesonthe,310. °
Bauerman (H.) on the geology of
Arabia Petreea, 75; on the occur-
rence of celestine in the tertiary
rocks of Egypt, 162.
Beor (KE. J.) on the lignite-mines near
Volterra, 466.
Bessemer-flame, on the spectrum of
the, 254.
Bismuth, on the existence of an alloy
of ammonium and, 58.
Blaserna (P.) on the mean velocity of
the motion of translation of the mo-
lecules mm imperfect-gases, 326.
Blood, on the function of the, in mus-
cular work, 195.
Books, new:— Fitch’s Methods of
teaching Arithmetic, 457; Cornwell
and Fitch’s School Arithmetic and
Science of Arithmetic, zbid.
Borgen (C.) on the wintermgs in the
polar regions during the last fifty
years, 340.
Bridgman (W. K.) on the theory of
the voltaic pile, 377.
Broadbent (Dr. W. H.) on the fune-
tion of the bloodin muscularwork, 15.
Browne (G. M.) on floods in the Island
of Bequia, 73.
Camphor, on the motions of, on the
surface of water, 409.
Capillarity of molten bodies, on the
constants of, 81.
Carbon, on the spectra of, 249.
Carruthers (W.) on the structure and
affinities of Sigillaria, 402.
Cazin (A.) on the expansion of gases,
322)
Challis (Prof.) on the hydrodynamical
theory of magnetism, 42; on a
theory of the dispersion oflight, 269.
Church (Prof. A. W.) on turacine, 383.
Climate, on, 220.
Clock, on a new astronomical, 393.
Clouds, on the formation and pheno-
mena of, 156.
u i acure=
Conductors, comparative measure
INDEX.
a of the electrical capacity of,
3l.
Combustion, on the supposed action
of light on, 217.
Copeland (R.) on winterimgs in the
polar regions during the last fifty
years, 340.
Coquand (Prof. H.) on the cretacesus
strata of England and the North of
France, 401.
Corona, observations of the, during
the total eclipse, August 7, 1869,
281.
Croli (J.) on the supposed greater loss
of heat by the southern than by the
northern hemisphere, 220.
Crookes (W.)on a binocular spectrum-
microscope, 383; on some optical
phenomena of opals, 388.
Dawkins (W. B.) on the British post-
glacial mammalia, 399.
Desains (M.) on obscure calorific
spectra, 78.
Deschamps(M.)on the compressibility
of liquids, 164.
Duncan (Dr. P. M.) on the anatomy
of the test of Amphidetus Virgi-
nianus, 74; on fossils from the cre-
taceous rocks of Sinai, 163.
Dupré (Dr. A.) on the specific heat
and other physical properties of
aqueous mixtures and sclutions,
158.
Dynamical theory of the electromag-
netic field, on the, 1.
Ear, on the structure of the human,
118, 369.
Eclipse of August 1868, observations
on the, 338.
Edlund (E.) on the construction of the
galvanometer used in electrical dis-
~ charges, and on the path of the
extra-currents through the electric
spark, 169; on the cause of the
phenomena of voltaic cooling and
heating, 263.
Edmonds (T. R.) on vital force ac-
cording to age, and the ‘ English
Life Table,” 18.
Electric currents, on the development
of, by magnetism and heat, 64.
spark, on the path of the extra-
currents through the, 169.
Electrical conductivity of liquids sup-
posed to be msulators, on the mea-
surement of the, 165, 470.
477
Electricity, on some lecture-experi-
ments in, 229,
Electrification, observations on, 441.
Electrolytic polarization, on, 243.
Electromagnetic phenomena,
some, l.
Electromotive force, comparative mea-
surement of, 232.
Electrophorus, experiments with the,
LEN
Electrostatic imduction in rarefied
gases, on the luminous effects pro-
duced by, 407.
Equilibrium of a liquid mass with-
out weight, researches into the
figures of, 445.
Ethyhe alcohol and water, on the spe-
cific heat and other physical pro-
perties of mixtures of, 158.
Extra-currents, method of demonstra-
ting the existence of the inverse
and direct, 233.
Favre (P. A.), thermal researches on
the battery by, 310.
Flight of birds, on the mechanical
principles mvolved in the, 130.
Flower (J. W.) on the distribution of
flint implements in the drift, 467.
Fluorescent substance, on a new, 136.
Fluor-spar, on the reflection of heat
from the surface of, 405.
Forces, on the parallelogram of, 428.
Foster (Prof. G. C.) on some lecture-
experiments in electricity, 229.
Frankland (Prof. E.) on gaseous spec-
tra in relation to the physical con-
stitution of the sun, 66.
Fritzsche (Dr. T.) on the production
of a columnar structure in metallic
tame 2O7e
Fulgurites in the andesite of the
Lesser Ararat, on, 436.
Gallatm (Dr. A. H.) on ammonium
alloys, and on tests for nascent hy-
drogen, 57.
Galvanometer, on the construction of
the, used in electrical discharges,
169.
Gases, on the expansion of, 322; on
the mean velocity of the motion of
translation of the molecules in 1m-
perfect, 326; on the luminous ef-
fects produced by electrostatic in-
duction in rarefied, 407.
Geological Society, proceedings of
the, 73, 162, 235, 320, 399, 465.
478
Gore (G.) on a momentary molecular
change in iron wire, 59 ; on the de-
velopment of electric currents by
magnetism and heat, 64,
Graham (T.) on hydrogenium, 459.
Haidinger (Prof.) on the polarization
ot light by air mixed with aqueous
vapour, 54.
Hailstorms, on remarkable, 440.
Heat, on the development of electric
currents by, 64; of the stars, on
the, 69; consumed in internal work
when a gas dilates under the pres-
sure of the atmosphere, on the, 76;
produced in solid bodies when
sounded, on the, 138; developed
in discontinuous currents, on the,
166; on the supposed greater loss
of, by the southern than by the
northern hemisphere, 220; on
the radiation of, from the moon,
314; on the emission and absorp-
tion of, radiated at low tempera-
tures, 403; on the reflection of,
from the surface of fluor-spar, 405.
Herschel (Lieut. J.) on spectroscopic
observations of the eclipse of Au-
gust 1868, 338.
Herwig (Dr. H.) on the conformity
of vapours to Mariotte and Gay-
Lussac’s law, 284.
Horopter, on the, 193.
Huggins (W.) on a method of view-
ing the solar prominences without
an eclipse, 68; on the heat of the
stars, 69.
Hull (E.) on a ridge of lower carboni-
ferous rocks crossing the plain of
Cheshire beneath the trias, 321.
Hutton (Capt. F. W.) on Nga Tutura,
an extinct voleano in New Zealand,
73; on the mechanical principles
involved in the sailing-flight of the
Albatros, 130.
Huxley (Prof. T. H.) on Hyperoda-
pedon, 258.
Hydrogen, on tests for nascent, 57.
Hydrogenium, on the alloy of palla-
dium and, 51; further researches
on, 459.
Iron, on the hmits of the magnetiza-
tion of, 404.
wire, on a momentary molecu-
lar change in, 59.
Jamin (M.) on the heat developed in
discontinuous currents, 166.
INDEX.
Judd (J. W.) on the origin of the
Northampton sand, 400.
Kenngott (Prof. A.) on the microsco-
pic structure of the Knyahynia
meteorite, 424.
King (Prof. W.) on the so-called eo-
zoonal rock, 235.
Kingsmill (T. W.) on the geology of
China, 238.
Kohlrausch (F.) on the specific heat
of air under constant volume, 430.
LeConte (Prof. J.) on some pheno-
mena of binocular vision, 179.
Le Neve Foster (C.) on the ocecur-
rence of celestine in the tertiary
rocks of Egypt, 162.
Le Roux (F. P.) on the luminous
effects produced by electrostatic
induction in rarefied gases, 407.
Light, on the polarization of, by air
mixed with aqueous vapour, 54;
on the supposed action of, on com-
bustion, 2]7/; on a theory of the
dispersion of, 269.
Liquids, on the compressibility of,
164; on the electrical conducti-
vity of, 165,470; on the formation
of bubbles of gas and of vapour in,
204; on the superficial tension of,
445; on the extension of, upon
each other, 468.
Lockyer (J. N.) on gaseous spectra,
66; on recent discoveries in solar
physies, 142.
Lortet (M.) on disturbances of respi-
ration, circulation, and of the
production of heat on ascending
great heights, 472.
Ludtge (R.) on the extension of li-
quids upon each other, 468.
Lunar atmosphere, on the existence
of a, 281.
Magnetism, on the hydrodynamical
theory of, 42; on the development
of electric currents by, 64,
Magnetization of iron and steel, on
the limits of the, 404.
Magnus (Prof. G.) on the emission
and absorption of heat radiated at
low temperatures, 403; on the re-
flection of heat from the surface of
fluor-spar and other bodies, 405.
Marcet (Dr. W.) on the temperature
of the human body at various alti-
tudes, in connexion with the act of
ascending, 329.
INDEX.
Mason (J. W.) on Dakosaurus, 74.
Mensbrugghe (G. Van der) on the
Superficial tension of liquids with
regard to certain movements ob-
served on their surface, 409.
Meteorite, microscopical investigation
of the Knyahynia, 424.
Miller (Dr. W. A.) on a self-register-
ing thermometer for deep-sea
soundings, 305.
Molecular physics, on the fundamen-
tal principles of, 34, 208.
—— vortices, on the thermal energy
of, 247.
Moon, on the radiation of heat from
the, 314.
Moon (R.) on the structure of the
human ear, and on the mode in
which it administers to the percep-
tion of sound, 118, 369.
Moseley (Canon) on the descent of a
solid body on an inclined plane
when subjected to alternations of
temperature, 99.
Moutier (J.) on the heat consumed in
internal work when a gas dilates
under the pressure of the atmo-
sphere, 76.
Nebular hypothesis, on the, 308.
Norton (Prof. W. A.) on the funda-
mental principles of molecular phy-
sies, 34, 208.
Odling (Prof. W.) on a theory of con-
densed ammonia compounds, 455.
Opals, on some optical phenomena of,
388.
Page (F. J. M.) on the specific heat
and other physical properties of
aqueous mixtures and solutions,
158.
Palladium, on the expansion of, at-
tending the formation of its alloy
with hydrogenium, ol.
Parnell (J.) on a new fluorescent sub-
stance, 136.
Phosphorus, on a remarkable struc-
tural appearance in, 215.
Pickering (Prof. E. C.), observations
on the corona during ‘the total
eclipse, August 7, 1869, by, 281.
Plateau (Prof. J.) on the figures of
equilibrium of a liquid mass with-
out weight, 4405.
Pogson (Mr.) on spectroscopic obser-
vations of the eclipse of August
1868, 338.
479
Preece (W. H.) on the parallelogram
of forces, 428.
Quincke (G.) on the constants of
capillarity of molten bodies, 81.
Rankine (W. J. M.) on the thermal
energy of molecular vortices, 247.
Roberts (W. C.) on the expansion of
palladium attending the formation
of its alloy with hydrogenium, 51.
Roger (M.) on the heat developed
in discontinuous currents, 166.
Rosse (Earl of) on the radiation of
heat from the moon, 314.
Rowney (Dr. T. H.) on the so-called
eozoonal rock, 235.
Royal Institution, proceedings of the,
142.
Royal Society, proceedings of the,
59, 156, 314, 383, 459.
Ruschhaupe (F.) on the salt-mines of
Saint Domingo, 465.
Said-Effendi (M.) on themeasurement
of the electrical conductivity of
liquids hitherto supposed to be in-
sulators, 165.
Schultz (C.) on the freezing-point of
water containing dissolved gases,
and on the regelation of water,
471. |
Seguin (J. M.) on the employment of
the spectroscope to distinguish a
feeble light inja stronger one, 325.
Shearmg, on the fracture of brittle
and viscous solids by, 71.
Solar prominences, on a method of
viewing the, without an eclipse, 68.
Sound, on the structure of the ear,
and on the mode in which it ad-
ministers to the perception of, 118,
369.
Spectra, on gaseous, 66; on obscure
calorific, 78; of carbon, on the,
249.
Spectroscope, on recent discoveries in
solar physics made by means of the,
142; on the employment of the,
to distinguish a feeble hght m a
stronger one, 324; description ofa
new, 360.
Spectrum-microscope, on a new ar-
rangement of binocular, 383.
Stars, on the heat of the, 69; on the
spectral analysis of the, 360.
Steel, on the limits of the magnetiza-
tion of, 404.
Strutt (The Hon. J. W.) on some
480
electromagnetic phenomena cons!-
dered in connexion with the dyna-
mical theory, lL.
Sun, on the physical constitution of
the, 66, 142; on the nature of the
protuberances of the, 368.
Sutherland (Dr.) on auriferous rocks
in South-eastern Africa, 242.
Tait (Prof.) on electrolytic polariza-
tion, 243.
Temperature, on the descent of a solid
body on an inclined plane when
subjected to alternations of, 99; of
the human bodyat various altitudes,
on the, 329, 472.
Thermometer, on a self-registering, for
deep-sea soundings, 395.
Thomson (Sir W.) on the fracture of
brittle and viscous solids by shear-
ing, 71; on a new astronomical
clock, and a pendulum-governor for
uniform motion, 393.
Thunderstorms, on the influence of
local agents in the production of,
436.
Tin, on the production of a columnar
structure in metallic, 207.
Tomlinson (C.) on the formation of
bubbles of gas and of vapour im
liquids, 204; on aremarkable struc-
tural appearance in phosphorus,
215; on the supposed action of hight
on combustion, 217; on the mo-
tions of camphor on the surface of
water, 409.
Turacine, researches on, 383.
INDEX.
Tyndall (Prof. J.) on the formation
and phenomena of clouds, 156.
Vapours, on the conformity of, to Ma-
riotte and Gay-Lussac’s law, 284.
Vision, on some phenomena of bi-
nocular, 179.
Vital foree according to age, and the
“Enelish Life Table,” on, 18.
Voltaic cooling and heating, on the
cause of the phenomena of, 263.
—-— pile, on a theory of the, 377.
Wallbridge (T. C.) on the geology
and mineralogy of Hastings County,
Canada West, 467.
Waltenhofen (Prof. A.) on the limits
of the magnetization of iron and
steel, 404.
Warburg (Dr. E.) on the heating pro-
duced in solid bodies when they are
sounded, 138.
Warren (T. T.P.B.) onelectrification,
441; on the measurement of the
electrical conductivity of liquids
supposed to be insulators, 470.
Water, on the freezing-point of, con-
taining dissolved gases, and on the
regelation of, 471.
Watts (Dr. W. M.) on the spectra of
carbon, 249.
Whitaker (W.) on Hyperodapedon,
240.
Wiltshire (Rev. T.) on the red chalk
of Hunstanton, 321.
Zollner (F.) on a new spectroscope,
with contributions to the spectral
analysis of the stars, 360,
END OF THE THIRTY-EIGHTH VOLUME.
PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.
QY
ALERE ‘ FLAMMAM,
5
GT aes
.s Bol, (a) Ce Ha Flame
= i Ty y pay me" 1 py Mm | Be rT yt TTT _oym ion roe m yoy
(b) me oes wrevvr Nery e(0), 1b), 10)
5 SA AL oT EN TA ALA (oye "7 ay MY TTT AR ian if He 3! } pai WN ng TTT Wn 7 Pea ly
. Ke > fe D t by (a ie) |i/ ¢ vv
eS cs
KS Wa) ;
> (Cc) Cio H8 vacuum.
=. Oran TT THT Vf i Mt pseu hob IT TTTTT SREAIDABE n | n rT